JP6897633B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated while a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, an internal lottery is performed, the reel starts rotating, and the reel stops during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the gaming machines illustrated above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The present invention
Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A starting operation means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than other predetermined states in the first specific gaming state is set.
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state is executed, and the lottery result of the first transition lottery corresponds to shifting to the first specific gaming state. Based on the existence, the first specific transition means for shifting to the first specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state is executed, and the lottery result of the second transition lottery corresponds to the transition to the second specific gaming state. , The second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific gaming state, and
A first grasping means for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific gaming state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the first specific gaming state.
In the second specific gaming state, a second grasping means for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and
Said first detection means said that the execution count has reached the upper limit a predetermined number of times and the speed change to be grasped at is based on at least one of the reaches the number of increase upper limit, grasped by the second grasping means A first termination means for terminating the first specific gaming state including the second specific gaming state, regardless of the remaining number.
Based on the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means, the second ending means for ending the second specific gaming state and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, the increase determination means capable of performing the increase determination of executing the increase process of the second specific gaming state, and the increase determination means.
Based on the determination result of the increase determination means, the increase means capable of executing the increase process of the second specific gaming state, and the increase means.
A situation in which the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit, and the number of increases / decreases grasped by the first grasping means. When the second gripping means form the sum of the expected increase or decrease the number based on the remaining number to be grasped that have reached the upper limit number increased by status, the execution count the maximum number of times that is grasped by the first grasping means The specific number of times is less than, and at least the difference between the specific number of times and the upper limit number of times is in a continuous state, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the first grasping means and the difference between the specified number of times and the upper limit number of times are grasped by the second grasping means. At least one of the situations in which the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number is a specific increase number smaller than the upper limit increase number, and at least the difference between the upper limit increase number and the total is scheduled to increase. In a specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, or when the increase process based on the special result results in the specific situation, the event is different from the event based on the increase process. Specific event execution means that can cause a specific event that is an event and can be beneficial to the player,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a rear view of the front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a main control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the push order notification effect performed in the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a special zone. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control device of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of betting. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the start. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notification timing and the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing during a bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notifying a specific role. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the transition lottery probability of a display mode, and a setting difference. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the start game and the end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the type of an advantageous section, and the display mode of a section indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of the display start mode table of the section indicator in modification 1. FIG. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a process for a specific state. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of the section indicator for a specific state. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of the section indicator in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. (A) is a flowchart showing a part of the reel control process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the section display third process. This is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display. In the fourth modification, it is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display. FIG. 5 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the type of advantageous section and the display start timing of the section display in the modified example 5. It is a front view of the slot machine in the modification 6. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of a section indicator. It is a figure for demonstrating the display start mode table of the section indicator in the modification 7. In the modified example 8, (a) is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state, and (b) is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a timing chart for explaining the display start timing of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st processing in the modification 9. It is a figure for demonstrating the display end mode table of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a special RT state. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a special RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 4th process. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special RT state, an instruction monitor and an interval indicator. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode of various replay results for a special RT state, and the main stop rolls. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing for special RT. (A) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification content at the time of special replay and the instruction monitor, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop result at the time of special replay and the type of advantageous section. Is. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a special RT state in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a special RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the notification at the time of winning a specific combination and the place to push. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing for special RT. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification content at the time of winning a special replay and the place to push. It is a flowchart which shows the specific combination notification processing in the modification 2. (A) is a flowchart showing a notification release process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of a release table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing for special RT. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the specific role in a special RT, and the notification content at the time of a special replay. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the winning combination and the RT state of the transition destination in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT state processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the winning combination and the RT state of the transition destination in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given in the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a special RT state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the winning mode of various replay results for a special RT state, and the main stop rolls. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning mode which is established. It is a flowchart which shows the special RT command reception processing by a display control device. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification scenario table. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing for special RT. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of a special replay winning by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st specific combination processing in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining game number management processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the number of games of an advantageous section. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which added the number of games. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the addition game number lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of adding the number of games. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special notification setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a first special notification type table. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the number of games of an advantageous section, and special notification. It is a flowchart which shows the various mode lottery processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the winning result correspondence processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special notification setting process. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a second special notification type table. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the game number addition lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of adding the number of games. It is a flowchart which shows the set processing of the addition command. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a third special notification type table. It is a flowchart which shows the set processing of the addition command in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the attack mode end effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the fourth special notification lottery table in the modified example 6, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the fourth special notification lottery table in the modified example 7. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a fourth special notification type table 1 and a fourth special notification type table 2 in the modified example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 9. It is a figure for demonstrating various areas in RAM of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the data initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special section setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special section table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a push order notification lottery table at the time of winning a special replay. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal game state. (A) is a flowchart showing the number of games management process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the push order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing for special replay. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor game number table in the modification 10. It is a flowchart which shows the process of adding the number of games in the modification eleventh. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd special notification setting process in the modification 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display in the modified example 13. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the post-addition effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special notification setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo addition game number lottery processing in the modification 14. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-additional game number table for suggesting a set value, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of pseudo-additional games and the suggestion content. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd specific combination processing in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd specific combination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for special zone transition lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the mode transition notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the push order combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery result and the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the addition process for a special zone. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special zone end effect. It is a flowchart which shows the post-addition lottery processing in a zone in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition notification timing table for special use. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the back-loading lottery process in the zone, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of various addition notification timing tables. It is a flowchart which shows the post-addition lottery processing in a zone in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition notification timing table in the modification 3 to the modification 5. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect in the modification 6. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the attack mode end effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a mobile terminal in the modification 7. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the attack mode end effect in the modification 8. In the sixth embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by the auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. It is a flowchart which shows the additional notification processing at the time of all stops. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the post-addition effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON in the modification 1. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of normal replay, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process for the selected counter. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of 1st stop ON. It is a flowchart which shows the addition notification processing at the time of all stops in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the correction process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. In the seventh embodiment, it is a timing chart for explaining the end condition of the advantageous section. It is a timing chart for explaining the end condition of an advantageous section. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each combination by state. It is a figure for demonstrating the expected net increase number for each state. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining game number management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of adding the number of games. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th special notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 5th special notification type table. It is a timing chart for demonstrating how the 1st excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for demonstrating how the 2nd excess flag is set. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between each excess flag and the 5th special notification. In the first modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number of games management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) and (b) are the fifth. It is a figure which shows an example of the special notification type table. In the second modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number of games management process, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (c) is a fifth special notification type table. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th special notification processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a sixth special notification type table. It is a flowchart which shows 6th special notification processing in modification 4. It is a figure which shows an example of each 6th special notification lottery table. (A) is a diagram showing a part of the sixth special notification process in the modified example 5, (b) is a diagram showing a part of the sixth special notification process in the modified example 6, (c) and (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of notification that the excess flag has been set. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the 6th special notification processing in the modification 7. It is a flowchart which shows the special section setting process in the modification 8. It is a figure which shows an example of a special section table. It is a flowchart which shows a part of the game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the attack mode end effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the situation in the modified example 9 when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease is less than expected. It is a flowchart which shows the reallocation process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of adding the number of games in the modification 10. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of moving the number of disappearing games, and (b) is a diagram for explaining various counter areas in the RAM of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows 6th special notification processing in modification 11. It is a flowchart which shows the push order notification process for CB in the modification 12. It is a figure for demonstrating the situation in the modified example 13 when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease is larger than expected. It is a flowchart which shows the 7th special notification processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification lottery table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a seventh special notification type table. It is a flowchart which shows the special section setting process in the modification 14. (A) is a flowchart showing a part of the game number management process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the push order combination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order notification table at the time of a special replay winning. In the modified example 15, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the 7th special notification lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining number management process in the modification 16. In the modified example 17, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state, and (b) is a diagram showing a state of change in medal increase / decrease. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the addition command in the modification 18. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd adjustment process. It is a figure for demonstrating how the predicted number of sheets is corrected. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining number management process in the modification 19. It is a figure for demonstrating the state in the case of winning the bonus near the end of the advantageous section in the modification 20. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process at the time of a bonus winning. It is a figure for demonstrating how the number of adjustment games is added to the number of precursor games. It is a figure for demonstrating the state when the bonus is won near the end of the challenge mode in the modification 21. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process at the time of winning a duplicate target combination in CM. It is a figure for demonstrating how the extension process of a challenge mode is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in CM in the modification 22. (A) is a diagram for explaining how the extension processing of the second challenge mode is performed, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in the advantages of the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode. .. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the lighting start timing and the forced end condition when the lighting start condition of a section indicator is changed in the modification 23. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 1st process. It is a flowchart which shows the section display 2nd processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the state of a preliminary section and a target section. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the advance section and the upper limit increase number in modification 24. (A) is a flowchart showing the second process of displaying the section, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in advantage between the first challenge mode and the second challenge mode.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment when applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is a front view. A rear view of the door 12 and FIG. 5 are front views of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached by hitting a nail against so-called island equipment at the time of installation in the game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front thereof, and the front door 12 is provided with bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the respective support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by the locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured so that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. Three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one to form a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape), respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. .. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. .. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving, for example, a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is set by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, when the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, a detection signal is output to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time the detection is performed. Therefore, the main control device 101 shifts the angular positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction) thereof. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps a symbol that is visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R by the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and the display window. It is possible to perform control such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. It is a number for recognizing, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used for explanation.

The symbols include a "red bell" symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a "white bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a "first replay" symbol (for example, 19 on the left reel 32L). Second), "2nd replay" symbol (eg 6th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg 10th on left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (eg 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (for example, 4th on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (for example, 17th on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and the "youth" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified by using a combination of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R among the visible symbols. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected. The combination of each symbol that stops at the upper line L1, the combination of each symbol that stops at the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. There is a combination of each symbol that stops at the lower line L3. In addition, the combination of the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the symbols that stop at the lower right line L4 connecting the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M There is a combination of symbols and symbols that stop at the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of each symbol that stops at the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that become a straight line when the symbols are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which a bending occurs in the middle when the symbols are arranged. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, other than the bending line L6, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, when a line that is activated and a line that is not activated depending on the number of bets on medals are set and the symbols are stopped on the activated line, that is, the valid line in a predetermined combination, , As a result of winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which is a game medium, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, the prize will not be established and the above benefits will not be granted.

In the slot machine 10, only the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the lower line L3 and the right-down line L4 are shown in FIG. 8 (b). There are cases where the combination line is an effective line and cases where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8 (c). More specifically, if three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-sloping line L4 is considered to be the valid line, and if two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line is below. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are considered to be effective lines. Further, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bending line L6 is regarded as an effective line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-sloping line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with three medals bet is a three-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is a two-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is played. Also called a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be won and a privilege given when the prize is won.

The small winning combination for which medals are paid out includes the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If it is stopped, it will be the first small winning combination. If the first small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination have different combinations of winning symbols, but in the 3-bet game, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol and the middle reel 32M "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol, and right reel 32R "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White bell" symbol, A winning mode in which the "red 7" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the bottom. If you do, you will win the 8th small role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a “cherry” symbol (No. 11) and a “red bell” symbol at an adjacent position (No. 12) on the upstream side, and the right reel 32R has a “red bell” symbol. The "red bell" symbol is placed at a position (No. 20) separated by one symbol from the "white BAR" symbol (No. 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd small winning combination to the 26th small winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th small winning combination is a role in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol of the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Specifically, the "cherry" of the left reel 32L. The 27th small winning combination is established when the symbol stops at the upper or lower row. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L is on the upper stage or stops, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is on the effective line. By stopping, the 27th small winning combination is established. If the 27th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L may stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbol may stop at the downward-sloping line L4. More specifically, the left reel 32L has a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel 32R has a "cherry" symbol. When the "1st replay" symbol or the "2nd replay" symbol is stopped, the 28th small winning combination is awarded. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 3 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

To supplement the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L or the "second replay" symbol stops, regardless of the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Although the 27th small winning combination is established, the 28th small winning combination may be established instead of the 27th small winning combination depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode that is the 27th small winning combination includes the winning mode that is the 28th small winning combination, the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination are clearly distinguished and determined. Is done.

The 29th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line. That is, when the right-down line L4 is regarded as an effective line, the 29th small winning combination is established when the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped in the right-down direction. If the 29th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 30th small It will be a winning role. If the 30th small winning combination is successful, 5 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 14 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay", middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "red bell" symbol or "white" If the "bell" symbol and stops on the valid line, the 31st small winning combination will be won. If the 31st small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out in the 3-bet game and 15 medals will be paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

In the 36th small winning combination, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L The "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line. If the 36th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol, "white" on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "youth" symbol stop on the valid line, the 37th small winning combination will be awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "second replay" symbol are arranged at adjacent positions (No. 6) on the downstream side, and the main "white" symbol is arranged. The "1st replay" symbol is placed at the adjacent position (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side of the "bell" symbol (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and the adjacent positions on the upstream side (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) are "1st". A "replay" symbol or a "second replay" symbol is arranged, and a "first replay" symbol is arranged at an adjacent position (11th) on the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (No. 10). Therefore, when the 37th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol are mainly tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop, so-called double tempai off-stop rolls. If the 37th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Left reel 32L "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol, middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "first replay" symbol, If the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the effective line, the 38th small winning combination will be won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the upper to lower tiers, and if the 38th small winning combination is established, the left The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 39th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 39th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 39th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, It will be the 40th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 40th small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. If the 40th small winning combination is successful, 9 medals will be paid out.

If the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small It will be a winning role. If the 41st small winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

There are 1st re-game prize to 8th re-game prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be performed without inserting a medal is given. Further, when the second re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game When a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

The state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed include the first BB prize, the second BB prize, and the CB prize.

When the "red 7" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line, the first BB prize is won, and when the "white BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the effective line. Will be the second BB prize. When these BB prizes are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "first replay" symbol, and the "black BAR". If the symbol and stop on the valid line, a CB prize will be awarded. When the CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from the winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white BAR" symbol, "LUCKY" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, and "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , "Red 7" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol also shift to the 1st RT state when they stop on the effective line. In the following, the combination of each of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition result.

On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start the variable display of the symbol. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and the main control device 101 described later are connected to each other. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the LOW signal detection signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The detection signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In that case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the symbol based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. Further, paying attention to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by the selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, and the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is excited. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12, and is returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out medals to the player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to the opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a rotating plate for medal payout (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent medals exceeding a predetermined amount from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated while the medals inserted in the medal insertion slot 45 are jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and the medals packed in the selector 46 are medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as a game medium at a time is provided. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, each credit insertion switch 56 to 58 only involves the operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

An effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect is generated is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. There is.

A checkout switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the stored and stored state, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game medium.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that are credited, and the number of remaining medals that display the number of medals remaining to be paid out by the end of the BB state. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided, respectively. These display units 60 to 62 are composed of a 7-segment display, but it is naturally possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, on the right side of the payout number display unit 62, there is a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a push order indicator that notifies the operation order. A section display for showing an advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be advanced in a situation advantageous to the player by changing the winning rate of the small winning combination, and an instruction monitor 68 having the section display are provided. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

On the upper part of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that sound various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. The speaker 64 and an auxiliary display unit 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary display unit 65 is used. It is called an auxiliary display unit 65. On the back surface of the auxiliary display unit 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display unit 65 are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside, and also includes a power supply switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is for a hole manager or the like to adjust the output of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by the hall manager or the like inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and operating the ON operation. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the housing 11.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 102, which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45, and medals to be paid out from the hopper device 51. The first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the payout detection sensor 51a and the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. In the third credit input detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, the settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, the reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as the setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10, including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power cutoff state and generates a power failure signal not only when the power is cut off but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volt in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply is cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volt, for example. It is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal to execute the power failure process described later. Further, the power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a regulated voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As the time for outputting this regulated voltage, a sufficient time is secured for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101.

On the output side of the main control device 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, and a credit An external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting information to a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), or the like is via an input / output port 104. Is connected.

The CPU 102 described above has a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits required in the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. A main memory as a storage means is configured by the ROM 105 and the RAM 106, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 91 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 contains a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the winning combination, and stop information used when stopping control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the data, the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like, a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including power cutoff by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. .. Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is cut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written in the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Then, when the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt process as the power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on the CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181 and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 or the like for securing is built-in.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), a main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and an upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. There is. Then, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main base that controls and manages the game. That is, the burden on the main board is reduced by providing a sub board for voices, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the display control device 81. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main control device 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure process.

Here, the outline of the power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets the power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored to end the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in case the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the timer interrupt processing is restored. If the power failure signal is continuously output, it goes into an infinite loop as it is. By the way, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and if the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor, which is a rotating cylinder drive motor, is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the insertion medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether the reading result is normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the number. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set the segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62, respectively. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each display unit 60 to 62 to display the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. After that, in step S115, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, a normal process for performing main control related to the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S201, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the display control device 81 or the like waits until the initialization is completed. When the initialization of the display control device 81 or the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in the previous game) is cleared. After that, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any of the re-game winnings has been established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings is established, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when the re-game prize is established in the 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when the re-game prize is established in the one-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs the process of automatically inserting medals. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game winning is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the game is transformed so that the re-game winning is established even in the 2-bet game, two cards are inserted in this automatic insertion process. It is advisable to set the virtual medal of to be automatically inserted.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any of the re-game prizes is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals possessed and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings is established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an error has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 is operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medal. I do.

Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated. If any of these is performed, the medal insertion process for changing the number of bets and the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medals has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as a specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB). "1" and "3" are set as the specified number in the state). That is, in the CB state, the affirmative judgment is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and the bet number is "1" or "3" in other than the CB state. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medal is bet, or if the number of bets is "2" even if the medal is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

After performing the processing in step S206, a bet command including information on the processing result in step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as the control device on the sub side. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a specified number of medals are bet, so the game is started in order to start the game. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, the effective line setting process for setting the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as the effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the effective line. Further, in the 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are executed in this order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and each of the lottery tables has a lottery table. It is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. .. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, the lottery table having the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 1", and the lottery table having the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is "setting 6".

Here, the processing related to the setting of the winning probability will be supplementarily described.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after the initialization process. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 for each operation of the start lever 41. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, "setting 1" → "setting 2" → Update the setting value so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated every time the set value is updated. Then, based on the setting key detection sensor 73a being turned off, the set value at that time is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process is completed. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 also ends. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set value.

The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for a normal game state selected in the normal game state of “Setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the validity of the winning combination is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is used as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. The judgment value is DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the index value IV. In the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 at the index value IV (IV = 32 to 48) including any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, the corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. When a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing of step S307 is performed, the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV which is affirmed in step S305 in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area. The process of setting to 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small winning combination winning flag, the 33rd small winning combination winning flag, and the 33rd small winning combination flag are set in step S308. Set the 35 small win winning flag. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 15, a winning flag indicating that the 30th small winning combination and the 41st small winning combination have been won in step S308 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, if the set winning flag is not the winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (the first BB winning flag) or the winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (the second BB winning flag), the winning flag storage area 106a The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning is established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In steps S306 to S308 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, If the winning combination other than the 2nd BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the first BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 32, the first BB winning flag is not set and the 28th small winning combination winning flag is set. , The 33rd small winning combination winning flag and the 35th small winning combination winning flag are set. Further, in the state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 33, the second BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small winning combination winning flag and the 33rd Set the small winning combination flag and the 35th small winning combination flag.

A lottery table in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery process is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. It may be configured to perform. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV value may be set so as not to win the first BB, the second BB, and the CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined as to whether or not it is correct, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is successful is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning or losing of the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning the normal replay (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/3, and the strong cherry. The probability of winning a prize (probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. is there. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 218 minutes. 1. The probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning chance B (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 252. It is one-third. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 65500 minutes. It is 1. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, the forward push bell 2, the pinch push bell 1, and the pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 21 to 24) is about 1 / 43.7, respectively, and the middle push bell. 1. The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, the right push bell 1, and the right push bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 25 to 28) is about 1 / 21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is Approximately 1 / 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 35) The probability of winning) is about 1/6550. The probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is About 1/6550. The probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/13100, and the probability of winning the weak watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is About 1/6550. The probability of winning the chance A duplication 1, the chance A duplication 2, the chance B duplication 1, and the chance B duplication 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 40 to 43) is about 1/3280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 44, 45) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning a single prize in the first BB and the second BB (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning the CB (the probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1 / 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/96.

In the normal game state lottery table, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 12, 29 to 31, 49 to 52. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the winner is not won at these index values IV.

After setting the winning flag in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that invalidates the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In the following step S312, the lottery result correspondence process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for whether or not to shift the game state according to the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, processing for notifying the push order combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, the lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. However, in the normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the command is not transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process for setting a stoptable symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the lottery result of this game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information according to the winning combination is set based on the winning flags set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if a strong cherry is won (winned when IV = 13) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are on each reel 32L. , 32M, 32R, set the stop symbol information so that it can be stopped. In addition, when the strong cherry duplication 1 is won (winned when IV = 32) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1st BB winning flag are set, the 28th small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, the 35th small winning combination, and the 1st small winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoptable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles are won among the small roles, replays, and bonus roles, the priorities shown below are set. If the small winning combination and the bonus are won, the priority is set so that the small winning combination is given priority and the bonus winning is established when the small winning combination cannot be established. If the re-game and bonus are won, the priority is set so that the re-game prize is prioritized.

For example, when the strong cherry duplication 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, the 35th small winning combination, and the 1st BB winning is set, the 28th is higher than the 1st BB winning. The priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are prioritized and established. Further, for example, in a situation where the first BB winning is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB winning and the first replay winning is set, the first BB winning is higher than the first BB winning. 1 Set the priority so that the re-game winning is prioritized.

After executing the process of step S315, the section display first process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, the rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect processing is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the weight time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start process. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. To do. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped is stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S407, any value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reel arrival symbol to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. Do. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop result of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning when IV = 24 to 31, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established depending on the operation order.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time. Then, the stop information is set so that the first small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the second small winning combination and the seventh small winning combination are established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Stop information is set so that the winning combination or the 9th small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, after sliding the reels 32L, 32M, 32R by a maximum of 4 symbols from the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode. It can be stopped and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the valid line. Therefore, when the spacing between the symbols of the same type is 4 or less on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning symbol is valid when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by 5 symbols or more, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination.

The second small winning combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Further, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a seventh small winning combination symbol and a function as a ninth small winning combination symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged so that the distance between the 2nd small winning combination symbols (7th small winning combination symbols and 9th small winning combination) is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped in the upper row regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the 7th "red bell" The symbol stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination, the seventh small winning combination, or the ninth small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning combination symbol of the medium reel 32M is the "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. And the ninth small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small winning combination symbol, the seventh small winning combination symbol, or the ninth small winning combination symbol may stop on the effective line, or the second small winning combination symbol, the seventh small winning combination symbol, and the seventh small winning combination symbol may be stopped. None of the 9th small winning combination symbols may stop on the effective line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 13th "1st replay" symbol to the 17th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The "white BAR" symbol, which is a symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 9th "2nd replay" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (b). , The 7th small role symbol "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the 7th small winning combination to be established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol and the 10th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the 9th small role symbol "cherry" symbol is in the middle row. Stop at. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol, and the 9th small winning combination symbol are displayed. It cannot be stopped in the middle stage. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a timing, the No. 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the No. 6 "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the 7th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 7th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 7th small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "1st replay" symbol and the 10th "white bell" symbol reaches the lower stage, FIG. 20 (c). As shown in, the "white bell" symbol, which is the 7th small winning combination symbol, stops at the bottom. As a result, the 7th small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 3 "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the No. 4 "watermelon" symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 20 (d). Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol is a transitional result as shown in FIG.

When the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information 2nd setting process so that the 9th small winning combination winning can be established.

The 9th small role symbol of the right reel 32R is the "youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "youth" symbol is placed at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 11th "1st replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, it is the 9th small role symbol. The "Youth" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional roll as shown in FIG.

When the second small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small winning combination winning can be established.

The second small winning combination symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning combination symbol may or may not stop on the effective line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small winning symbol "" The "white BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is a transitional result as shown in FIG.

When the 2nd small winning combination symbol, the 7th small winning combination symbol and the 9th small winning combination symbol of the middle reel 32M did not stop in the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stopped in the middle stage. In this case, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" symbol are arranged so that the distance between the "watermelon" symbol and the "first replay" is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) is shifted as shown in Fig. 11. It's a roll.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is established and the seventh small winning combination is established. It is either the case where the winning is established, the case where the ninth small winning combination is established, or the case where the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination prize.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbol, which is the first small winning combination symbol, is arranged so that the distance between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops in the upper row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged so that the distance between the first small winning symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops in the lower row regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination prize is established regardless of the operation timing.

When the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, the small winning combination is established or the shift roll is stopped on the valid line depending on the operation timing. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and if the unquestioned bell is won, the 38th small winning combination is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 Small winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out on the condition that the combinations of winning symbols are lined up on the valid line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the effective line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and whether or not a prize is established on the effective line is determined. judge. If the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, the winning result handling process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result will be described in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, the section display second process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described in detail later. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 grasps the winning winning combination in this game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it is determined that the small winning combination has not been established in the previous payout determination process. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game prize to the eighth re-game prize is established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game prizes have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game prizes has been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game state to the re-game state is performed. , End the medal payout process. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, when it is determined that the current game state is the re-game state, the automatic input process is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is completed. Regarding the payout of medals Specifically, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or if the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the rotating plate for medal payout is driven to eject medals from the hopper device 51. Pay out to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 is also changed according to the payout of medals. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. ..

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the valid line. When the shift result is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the shift roll has not stopped on the valid line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second re-game winning combination is awarded based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Judge whether it is established or not. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. Further, when the shift roll is stopped on the effective line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the step S503 is performed. The first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. To do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 5, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing of the winning combination is determined using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1 in 32.8, respectively. The odds of not winning any of the roles are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and if the winner is IV = 2, the first promotion replay is won, and the IV If you win when = 3, you will win the 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win the 1st promotion replay 3, and when IV = 5, you will win. If this happens, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under a normal game state is also about 1 / 7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, the winning mode is that the small role, the re-game, and the bonus are won with the same probability as the normal game state, while the re-game privilege is given. Changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game prize that does not shift to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize, the third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the push order bell described above is won, but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stopped switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, the first replay prize or the first replay prize is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. The third re-game prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game will not win a prize regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is the first replay and the first replay. The 6th replay is assigned in addition to the 3 replays, the 1st promotion replay 3 is assigned the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is assigned. Although the 8th re-game is assigned in addition to the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game, the re-games that win the prize are the 1st re-game and the 3rd re-game regardless of which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third re-game prize is established. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize is also one type, and the third replay prize is intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This is because it can be possible to make it. It should be noted that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. It is determined whether or not the third re-game prize has been established. When the third re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508 to end this process. To do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. To do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 1 to 10, and has the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning when IV = 1. The probability of winning is about 1 / 13.2, and the probability of winning is not won when IV = 2-5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 1 / 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , The probability of winning at 10 is about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. That is, when the state shifts to the second RT state, the probability of deviation is lower than that of the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the 2nd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 4th re-game winning that shifts to the 3rd RT state, and the 5th re-gaming Winning and is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second 2 Even when the promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 are won, the first re-game prize or the second re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the second promotion replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game prize, the fourth re-game prize, and the fifth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game prize or the fourth re-game prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The numbers assigned to the 4th re-game in the figure correspond to the symbol combination when the 4th re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that is a disjointed pattern, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that stops at the middle stage of red 7, red 7, and black BAR (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the combination of symbols that will be disjointed will stop and the fourth replay prize will be established, or red 7 -Red 7 / Black BAR The symbol combination that stops in the middle stage stops, and the 4th re-game prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination processing, the process proceeds to step S509. It is determined whether or not the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has been established. If the 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are not established, this process is terminated as it is. When the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process is terminated.

When the 3rd RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the third RT state is selected. To do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the third RT state has a different point value PV of IV = 9 to 12, and the point value PV that is the same as the other index value IV. Is set. Therefore, when the winning / failing judgment of the winning combination is performed using the lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 52 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9,10. At that time, the winning will not be achieved, and the probability of winning at IV = 11 and 12 will be about 1/7.00, respectively. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, re-game, and bonus will be won with the same probability as the 2nd RT state, while the winning mode in which the privilege of the re-game is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, the 2nd re-gaming prize that shifts to the 1st RT state, and the 6th re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state, 7 Re-game prize, 8 re-game prize, and 3rd re-game prize that shifts to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. If BAR Replay 1 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 7th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true. If BAR Replay 2 is won, any one of the 1st re-game prize, the 6th re-game prize, the 8th re-game prize, and the 3rd re-game prize, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is always true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the CB winning is established based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

Left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol, middle reel 32M "red bell" symbol, right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol or "black BAR" symbol If, stops on the valid line, it will be a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the distance between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are determined. Is set as a valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, the lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the drawing of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 48, and "16384" is set as the point value of IV = 49 to 52. Is set (see Fig. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 50). The probability of winning in the case of CB is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning in CB small and medium-sized role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is about 1 in 4.00, and CB. The probability of winning the small and medium-sized role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 52) is about 1/4.00. No off-the-shelf event occurs.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, some small winning combination will be won. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded if the 1st small role prize, the 27th small role prize, the 31st small role prize, the 36th small role prize to the 38th small role prize are established. If the payout is made and the 2nd small role prize-26th small role prize, the 28th small role prize-30th small role prize, the 32nd small role prize-35th small role prize are established, 14 cards will be awarded. The medal is paid out. That is, when the state shifts to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables a game (JAC game) of one game to be executed as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) May be provided for the transition SB state.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, when it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established.

Then, when any of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. After that, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processes of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. ..

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioned in the first BB and the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 28, 32 to 52, and "21845" is set as the point value of IV = 29 to 31. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 1 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 33). (Probability of winning at the time) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 3 (probability of winning at IV = 34) is about 1 / 3.00. The probability of losing any of the roles is about 1/65500.

FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established. As described above, the first small winning combination winning mode is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of which of the BB small and medium-sized combination 1, the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 and the BB small and medium-sized combination 3 is won, the first small combination winning prize is given regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Either the 39th small role prize or the 40th small role prize is always established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st small winning combination, the 39th small winning combination, and the 40th small winning combination are established. Since the probability of loss in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB winning is established, a process of setting a carry-over command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to know that the bonus winning is not established in the bonus winning game and the so-called carry-over state has been established, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the game played in the carry-over state, winning of other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), when a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV = 32 to 48 is won, these bonuses are dealt with. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when a duplicate winning combination with each small winning combination of IV = 32 to 45 is won, the winning flag of each small winning combination is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is not set, and the small winning combination is not set. Only winnings are valid. That is, the carry-over state can be said to be a state in which the lottery of bonuses is restricted.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout number counter becomes 0, and when it becomes 0, the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is cleared. Further, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in this game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state returns to the game state when the CB winning is established. For example, if the CB prize is established under the normal game state, the game returns to the normal game state after the end of the CB state, and if the CB prize is established under the third RT state, the third RT state is established after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, in the case of shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals by the end of the CB state. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24-3 × 24) medals by the time the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, the 2nd BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, and the CB winning are not established and are carried over. When a command is set (when the process of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination process is performed in step S614, To, the process proceeds to step S606, and the state command is set. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game), and in step S606, the state information storage area. Set the status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal plate 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The CB state is not shown.

When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state when the transition roll stops on the valid line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third re-game prize is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (a)). .. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state are not won, so that the 1st RT state does not shift to the 3rd RT state.

In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the 2nd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state when the 4th re-gaming prize or the 5th re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition result is stopped on the valid line. The 4th re-game prize and the 5th re-game prize are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 or the 2nd promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b). )reference). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the 3rd RT state, the gaming state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the 3rd re-game winning is established. Further, the game state shifts to the first RT state depending on whether the second re-game winning is established or the transition result is stopped on the valid line. The third replay prize is established when the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (c)). The second re-game prize is established when any of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23 (b)). The transition roll will stop on the valid line if a miss occurs in the game that wins the push order bell. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of game states: a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly classified into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , Attack mode (including additional special zone), VBB mode (including additional special zone), and BB mode are managed by the main control device 101.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and if you win the lottery to shift to the challenge mode, you will shift to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lottery is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode is finished. When the mode shifts from the VBB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VBB mode after the BB mode ends.

The normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1st 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1-fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as "push order replay") This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. Transition to challenge mode If the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and if the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so that it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, as in the normal mode. In the challenge mode, a lottery for transition to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which it is easy to shift to the attack mode, although the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode. Transition to attack mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the mode shifts from the challenge mode to the normal mode. The challenge mode does not shift to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay is won, it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, which corresponds to the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. Will be done. In the challenge mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 for each game played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified regardless of whether the push order bell is won or the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. Regardless of the attack mode, the attack mode shifts to the VB mode as compared with the normal mode. The transition probability of is high. Transition to VB mode If you win the lottery, you will transition from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode has the highest probability and the first attack mode has the lowest probability, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set to be the lowest. , The third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the stop switch 42 is notified in the operation order notified by the player. When ~ 44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when the game state shifts to the attack mode.

Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell winning and the pushing order replay winning. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. , In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. In that case, the operation order for establishing the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize is notified. Therefore, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 for each game played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for each game played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when the game state shifts to the VB mode.

Explaining the transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and then return from the attack mode to the normal mode. .. Then, in the attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and the VB mode returns to the attack mode, the player expects more medals to be owned. it can.

As described above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also called a so-called chance zone that is expected to shift to the attack mode.

Further, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. Then, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, it basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the second attack mode, you will shift to the second attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the third attack mode, you will shift to the third attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to VB mode will increase. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. If you win the lottery to shift to the 4th attack mode, you will shift to the 4th attack mode and the winning probability of the lottery to shift to the VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when shifting to attack mode, the probability of shifting to VB mode increases as the first attack mode → second attack mode → third attack mode → fourth attack mode and attack mode are promoted, and the attack A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the player has a configuration in which the number of medals owned by the player is increased in each display mode of the attack mode, the VBB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are switched back and forth by winning a prize in each re-game or stopping a transitional outcome. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning prize is established or the transition result is stopped. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established is notified, so that the number of owned medals can be expected to increase.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) processing related to the transition lottery of the display mode, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the transition lottery of the display mode, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, they will be described in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery (1) is performed in the lottery result correspondence process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, as a result of this lottery, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, strong watermelon duplication 1, 2 , Weak watermelon duplication 1, 2, Chance A duplication 1, 2, Chance B duplication 1, 2, Middle bell duplication 1, 2 (see, for example, FIG. 17, IV = 13-19, 32-45, hereinafter, these roles Are collectively referred to as "specific role"). If the lottery result is a specific combination, it is determined in step S702 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag has already been set as the bonus winning flag.

In the process of step S702, when the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are already set, it indicates that the game is in the carry-over state, and the games won in the first BB and the second BB are not included. That is, the case where it is determined in step S702 that the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not already set is not the case where the specific winning combination is a duplicate winning with the first BB or the second BB, or the first BB or It also includes the case where the specific winning combination is a duplicate winning with the second BB. In other words, if a specific winning combination that is a duplicate winning with the first BB or the second BB is won in the carry-over state, an affirmative determination is made in step S702.

If a negative determination is made in step S702, the process for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S703 to S709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is not won, or if the bonus winning flag is set in step S702, processing for shifting to the display mode is performed in steps S710 to S713.

Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination is won and the bonus winning flag is not set in step S702, the current gaming state is changed in step S703. It is determined whether or not it is in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the attack mode is entered. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the first specific combination process is executed in step S705.

<First specific role processing>
The first specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state, and the attack mode is not won. In this case, the display mode corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the attack mode is performed. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the processing for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a challenge mode table is acquired as an attack mode lottery table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S803. In the normal time table and the challenge mode table, the transition probabilities to the attack mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the weak cherries. In addition, the normal time table and the challenge mode table have different transition probabilities to attack mode as a whole, and the challenge mode table has a higher transition probability to attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to.

After acquiring the table for the attack mode transition lottery in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In such a process, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery to shift to the attack mode.

In step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won based on the processing result of step S804. If the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. The super attack mode is an attack mode that is started after passing through the additional special zone. For example, assuming that the initial number of games in the normal attack mode is 50, in the super attack mode, the attack mode is started with the number of games obtained by adding the number of games added in the additional special zone to the initial number of games of 50. To. Therefore, the advantage for the player is different between the normal attack mode and the super attack mode, and the super attack mode is more advantageous for the player than the attack mode. The super attack mode is set to win a part (for example, 1%) when the attack mode is won in the attack mode lottery process of step S804.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the super attack mode may be set to be different between when the normal time table is acquired (step S802) and when the challenge mode table is acquired (step S803). In this case, If the winning probability of the super attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal time, the superiority of the challenge mode is guaranteed. Further, although the winning probability of the attack mode is lower in the normal state than in the challenge mode, the ratio of the super attack mode at the time of winning may be set to be large. Further, the winning probability of the super attack mode and the ratio of the super attack mode at the time of winning the attack mode may be different depending on the type of the specific combination.

If it is determined in step S806 that the super attack mode has been won, the process of setting the special zone winning flag is executed in step S807.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, or after the process of step S807 is executed, the process of setting the attack mode winning flag is performed in step S808. That is, when the attack mode is won, the attack mode winning flag is set, and a special zone winning flag is set in a part of them (when the super attack mode is won).

After the process of step S808 is performed, the process for setting the precursor mode is performed in steps S809 to S812. The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the attack mode or the challenge mode is likely to occur, and the attack mode or the challenge mode is won after each game of the precursor mode is passed. Winning notification will be given. The precursor mode continues from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of continuous games in the precursor mode is set to differ depending on the type of attack mode, challenge mode, etc. won and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. ing. If the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. are won at the same time as the bonus, the bonus winning notification will be sent after passing through the precursor mode, and after the bonus state is completed, the attack mode, challenge mode, etc. will be won. You will be notified of what was happening. Further, when the number of precursor games is set as 0 games, the winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode.

Specifically, in step S809, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games selected is set to differ depending on the current display mode (normal mode or challenge mode) and whether or not the bonus is won at the same time. .. Specifically, when the current display mode is the normal mode and the attack mode is won, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected at 80%, and 6 Games-10 games are selected at 20%. On the other hand, even if the current display mode is the normal mode, if the attack mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, 1 to 5 games are selected at 10%, and 6 to 10 games are 20. %, 11 games to 20 games are selected at 50%, 21 games to 32 games are selected at 20%. That is, when the display mode is the normal mode, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time. In other words, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the attack mode winning game will be notified of the attack mode winning in a relatively short number of games. On the other hand, when the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the attack mode winning notification is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In addition, when the super attack mode, which is an attack mode with an additional special zone, is won, if the bonus is not won at the same time, 1 to 5 games are selected at 70%, and 6 to 10 games are 30. Selected by%. On the other hand, if the bonus is won at the same time when the attack mode is won, 1 game to 5 games are not selected, 6 games to 10 games are selected at 20%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected at 30%. 21 games to 32 games are selected at 50%. That is, even when the super attack mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time. Will be notified of the winning of the super attack mode in a relatively short number of games from the winning game of the super attack mode. Even when the super attack mode is won, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, 0 games are selected as the number of precursor games regardless of whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. That is, in this case, the precursor mode is not set, and the winning notification of the super attack mode is performed in the next game of the winning game.

In step S810, a process of drawing the number of games in the precursor mode this time is performed based on the precursor game number table acquired in step S809 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S811, the process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is subtracted by 1 for each game, and when the precursor counter becomes 0, the precursor mode ends, and the winning notification that the transition lottery such as the attack mode has been won is performed.

In step S812, a process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (display mode that shifts after the precursor mode, BB mode and attack mode in the case of step S812) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S812, the first specific combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, the challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, the challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the transition probability to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the challenge mode than the weak cherries.

The case where step S813 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case as well, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S813, and the lottery table is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. It is a table of. As in steps S801 to 803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S814, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S813. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, the process of setting the challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S816.

After the processing of step S816 is performed, the setting processing for the precursor mode is performed in steps S817 to S820 in the same manner as in steps S809 to S812. That is, the precursor game number table is acquired in step S817, the precursor game number lottery process is performed in step S818, the precursor game number is set in step S819, the precursor command is set in step S820, and then the precursor command is set. The first specific combination processing is completed.

In the precursor game number table acquired in step S817, as shown in FIG. 35, when the challenge mode alone is won, 1 game to 5 games are selected at 90%, and 6 games to 10 games are 10 games. Selected by%. On the other hand, if the challenge mode is won at the same time as the bonus, 1 to 5 games are selected at 20%, 6 to 10 games are selected at 30%, and 11 to 20 games are selected at 50%. Will be done. In other words, even when the challenge mode is won, it is easier to select a longer number of precursor games when the bonus is won at the same time than when the bonus is not won at the same time, and when the bonus is not won at the same time. , The challenge mode winning game will be notified in a relatively short number of games.

In addition to the number of precursor games, regardless of whether or not the bonus is won at the same time, it is easier to select a longer precursor game in attack mode than in challenge mode, and a longer precursor game in super attack mode than in attack mode. The number is easy to select, and if the display mode that is advantageous to the player is won, the long precursor game number is easy to be selected. In addition, if the bonus is not won at the same time, the number of precursor games of 10 games or less is selected, and if the precursor mode continues for 11 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus is won at the same time. To do. In addition, even if the bonus is won at the same time, the number of precursor games of 20 games or less is selected in the challenge mode and the bonus simultaneous winning, while the attack mode and the super attack mode and the bonus In the simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games of 21 games or more is also selected, and when the precursor mode continues for 21 games or more, it is confirmed that the bonus + attack mode or super attack mode is used. In this way, the fun of predicting the winning content in relation to the number of precursor games is added.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific combination is won, if the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like is not won, the mode may shift to the pseudo precursor mode. Although such processing will be described later, the number of games set as the pseudo precursor mode is any one of 1 game to 20 games. Therefore, since the winning suggestion effect frequently occurs over 21 games or more, it is determined that the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode that has been shifted by the specific combination trigger is the precursor mode.

If it is determined in step S815 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, the process for adding the continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S821 to S825. That is, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S822, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. In step S822, a value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is an 80% chance of adding 30 games in challenge mode, and a 20% chance of adding 50 games. For weak cherries, there is an 80% chance of adding 5 games, and a 20% chance of adding 20 games.

In step S823, the number of games in the challenge mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S822 is added to the counter (more specifically, the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S824, after performing the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81, the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information that the addition has occurred, the number of additional games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) to be added. The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the additional command will be described in detail later, but the display control device 81 adds the information included in these additional commands as notification based on the reception of the additional command. Notify (additional production).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S821, the process proceeds to step S825. In step S825, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination process ends. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, the game in which the additional notification is performed is set to differ depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S703 or an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. In the second RT state, in step S707, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the VB mode transition lottery is won and is cleared when the transition to the VB mode is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S707, the second specific combination process is executed in step S708. If a negative determination is made in step S706 or an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the third specific combination process is executed in step S709.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is a state in which the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second specific combination process, a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode is performed. Further, in the second specific combination process, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode is the rank of the current attack mode.

In step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probabilities to the VB mode are set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the strong cherry 1 is set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherry. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is different as a whole, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the one in the fourth attack mode shifts to the VB mode more than the one in the third attack mode so that the one in the third attack mode has a higher probability of transitioning to the VB mode than the one in the second attack mode. It is set so that the transition probability of is high.

In step S903, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. After that, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the precursor game number table is acquired in step S906, the precursor game number is drawn in step S907, the precursor game number is set in step S908, the precursor command is set in step S909, and then the second identification is performed. End the role processing. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, the number of precursor games is set to 0 for each VB mode winning in the attack mode. Therefore, if the VB mode is won during the attack mode, the winning notification will be sent in the next game.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processes for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, the attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In such a process, the table for promotion lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, the table for the first attack mode, the table for the second attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode are totaled. There are three (promotion lottery is not performed when staying in the 4th attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, among strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the promotion probability of the second attack mode table is lower than that of the first attack mode table, so that the third attack mode table has a lower promotion probability than the second attack mode table. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion winning. If the promotion is won, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flags provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten from the rank flags corresponding to the ranks of the current attack mode to the rank flags one higher. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command contains information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As an effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and the display control device 81 receives the promotion command in the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, it is controlled to perform the effect for the attack mode with the background color according to the rank of the promotion destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S913 is executed, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In such an additional lottery process, the attack mode additional lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% chance of winning an additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% chance of winning an additional lottery. The winning probability may be different depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the second specific combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the attack mode is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The number of additional games in the attack mode The table for the lottery is set so that the number of additional games differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, with a strong cherry, there is a 90% chance of adding 20 games in attack mode, and a 10% chance of adding 80 games. For weak cherries, there is a 95% chance of adding 5 games, and a 5% chance of adding 100 games.

In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In such processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn by step S917 is added to a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode. Performs the process of adding. Then, in step S919, the process of setting the additional command as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process ends. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the addition condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Details will be described later, but if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, as in the case of the additional notification of the number of games in the challenge mode, the game in which the additional notification is performed is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S709 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is a case where the third RT state is performed, or a state where the second RT state is performed and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. The winning probability of the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process of step S914 and the lottery process of step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the added command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the third specific combination process ends. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the lottery process is not the specific combination winning, or even if the specific combination is won, the bonus winning flag is set in step S702. If it is determined that the set has been set, in step S710, whether or not the result of the lottery process this time is a push order replay or a push order bell (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a "push order role"). To judge. If the push order combination is won, the push order combination process is executed in step S711. The push order combination processing will be described in detail later.

After executing any of the processes of step S705, step S708, step S709 and step S711, or after making a negative determination in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th re-game prize, and the additional special zone is a high addition of the number of continuous games in the attack zone over a plurality of games. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S712, the special zone process is executed in step S713. The special zone flag, the special zone, and the special zone processing will be described in detail later. When a negative determination is made in step S712, or after the process of step S713 is executed, the process for dealing with the result of the lottery ends.

As described above, when it is determined that a specific combination has been won in the lottery result handling process, the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, challenge mode or attack, provided that the player is not in the carry-over state. Processing for adding the number of continuous games in the mode is performed. In other words, even if a specific role is won, the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode transition lottery, and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or attack mode are not performed during the carry-over state. Its implementation is restricted. If the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the notification of winning the transition lottery is given after the precursory game. Therefore, a process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. The processing to be performed and the processing to be performed are performed. Therefore, first, the process related to the notification that the transition lottery has been won will be described.

<Process for mode transition notification>
The notification that the transition lottery has been won is performed in the mode transition notification processing (step S206) in the normal processing (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a predetermined number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursor games is subtracted by 1 each time one game is exhausted. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

When the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode of this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1103, and then the mode transition notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by displaying, for example, "bonus confirmed !!" on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the attack mode, the challenge mode, or the like are simultaneously won, the winning notification of the attack mode or the like is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1103. The processing related to the winning notification will be described in detail later, but when the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1103. The configuration should be such that commands are set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1105. Then, in step S1106, the challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1107, the challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies that the challenge mode is started by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later.

After that, in step S1108, counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1108, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1109 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1112, the attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies that the attack mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1112, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the winning notification in the super attack mode is different from the mode of the winning notification in the attack mode. Therefore, in step S1112, the attack mode winning notification command may be set so as to include information on whether or not the super attack mode is set. The mode of the winning notification in the attack mode and the mode of the winning notification in the super attack mode may be different as long as they can be identified by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification in the super attack mode having a high advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the attack mode.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the modes of winning notification in the attack mode and the super attack mode are shared. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the winning content has been promoted from the attack mode to the super attack mode between the attack mode winning notification game and the start notification game, and the attack mode winning. It is possible to eliminate the delay caused by the difference between the notification game and the start notification game.

When it is determined in step S1109 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1113 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode triggered by the winning of the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1114. Then, in step S1115, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. After that, in step S1116, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies that the VB mode transition lottery has been won by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1116, the process for notifying the transition to this mode is terminated. If it is determined in step S1113 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that shift through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, regarding the attack mode and the VB mode, only the notification that the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed based on the betting operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, and the precursor is announced. Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode does not involve the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the gaming state, and specifically, the attack mode shifts to the second RT state. It is started and the VB mode is due to the difference that it is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is the case where the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, and the transition is made when the 3rd re-game winning is established, and the 3rd RT state is the 2nd promotion replays 1 and 2. If the player wins the game and the 4th and 5th re-game prizes are established, the process proceeds. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are established, This is the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third re-game winning or the like. Therefore, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the winning combination is to shift the gaming state thereafter. It is configured to enable the transition of the game state. It should be noted that from the notification that the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery has been won to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state shifts), the notification as a preparation state (for example, "" "Preparing" will be announced.

<Explanation of transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the push order combination process (step S711) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination processing, an outline of the case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the operation order (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification) at the time of winning the push order combination is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the push order combination in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left is won. The push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43), and the display is larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize that the winning combination in this game and the stop switch to be operated first are the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, a number is displayed on the right button display so as to indicate that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is attached and displayed, and the number 3 is attached to the left button display.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 37B, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), on the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed large. As a result, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the execution timing of the push order notification, the push order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. Is set to run. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective in this way, the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized after recognizing the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make the operation desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

<Pushing order processing>
Next, the push order combination process executed in step S711 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1201 is the case where the first re-game or the third re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). is there.

If the attack notification flag is set, the push order notification process of the third re-game is executed in step S1203. Specifically, among the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (a)). After that, in step S1204, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the control device on the sub side, and then the main push order combination process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

In addition, in the case of notifying the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning in step S1203, basically, the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning notification of the attack mode is performed through the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after the damage and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the attack mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like, and even in such a case, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first re-game or the second re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, the push order notification process of the first re-game is executed in step S1207. Specifically, among the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1208, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is completed.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, and the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first re-game prize is established and the third re-game prize is established. , There is.

In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in the situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning. It is possible to prevent it from being caused. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Will shift from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state.

Further, for example, in the 1st RT state, the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay prize, and the 3rd regame prize is established. Even if it is done (even if it shifts to the second RT state), the second re-game winning can be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will promptly shift to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1209 is the case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game, or the fifth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1211, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the transition lottery to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 36). is there.

When the VB notification flag is set, the process for notification of the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1213, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push order combination process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the process for notifying the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and the player must be in the attack mode. If there is no push order notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the lottery result this time is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1214 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, the process for notifying the push order of the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game is executed. Specifically, among the 1st re-game, the 3rd re-game, and the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game, the operation order corresponding to the 6th re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning is notified (FIG. 23 (FIG. 23). c) See). After that, in step S1218, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the main push order combination process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order combination process is terminated as it is without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the push order of the first re-game is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the push order notification command is performed in step S1208. The final push order processing is completed. Therefore, when the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first re-game winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and if the attack mode is not in the push order notification effect. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the lottery result this time is a push order bell winning. If the push order bell is won, in step S1220, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the normal mode or the challenge mode. When the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, the process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the main push order combination process is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the push order notification process is not performed, and the push order combination process is terminated as it is.

<Process to shift the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of notifying the game state to be changed as described above, a process when a winning combination corresponding to the game state change is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.

In step S1301, the game number management process is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode described above, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established based on the result of this stop. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs a process for shifting the game state to the second RT state. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. The case where the attack notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without satisfying the transition condition to the attack mode. In this case, the process for starting the attack mode is not performed. The processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is in the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying the display mode, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a special zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional special zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the corresponding flag of the mode (VB mode flag, It has a structure that coexists with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where it is in the attack mode, the case where it is in the VB mode, and the case where it is in the special zone. ..

When the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies that the attack mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. After that, in step S1307, counting of the number of continuous attack modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

After performing the process of step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the special zone flag is set. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S1308 means that the attack mode won this time is the super attack mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1309, the additional special zone is started. The process proceeds to (step S1318 to step S1320). The process for starting the additional special zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as the result of this stop. As described above, when the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), a process for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1311, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the 4th and 5th replay prizes have been established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. In this case, the VB mode start dignity process is not performed. , Ends the winning result handling process as it is. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the VB mode flag is set. When the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the processing for dealing with the winning result is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the VB mode flag is not set, the process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1313 to S1315.

That is, in step S1313, the process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode, and after the VB mode ends, the VB mode always shifts to the attack mode.

After that, in step S1314, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies that the VB mode is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1315, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1315 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is completed.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1316. In step S1316, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as the result of this stop. In the present embodiment, when the 7th re-game winning is established, that is, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R is " When the "black BAR" symbol stops and the "black BAR" symbol stops on the middle combination line, the zone shifts to the additional special zone. In the extra special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added not only for the specific combination but also for all the winning combinations (pushing order, specific combination and bonus). The case where the 7th re-game prize is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game prize (FIG. 23). (C)) Further, when the 7th re-game of the 1st, 6th, and 7th re-games wins the lottery, for example, 20 minutes when the BAR replay 1 is won. Win a lottery to win the 7th re-game with a probability of 1.

When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1317 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, the processing for starting the special zone is performed in steps S1318 to S1320. As described above, at the start of the super attack mode, the processes of steps S1318 to S1320 are also performed when the affirmative determination is made in step S1308 and the process of step S1309 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1318, a process of setting the special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is the above-mentioned additional special zone, and when the special zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is stopped. .. In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d.

After that, in step S1319, the special zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command notifies that the special zone is started from the next game by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later. Then, in step S1320, counting of the number of continuous special zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After the processing of step S1320 is performed, the processing for dealing with the winning result is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S1316 or step S1317, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

As described above, based on the winning of the winning combination (3rd to 5th re-games) corresponding to the transition of the game state, a process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). Do. This is to prevent the attack mode etc. from being started based on the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the game state even though the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won. Is.

In addition, when shifting to the display mode, among those that accompany the transition to the gaming state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or when shifting from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of the transition to the lower mode, the transition of the display mode is not performed when the gaming state shifts due to, for example, the second re-game winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes is 0. Based on the above, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3-bet, the game number management process is terminated as it is. That is, in the 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted.

If the game ending this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is set. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process is terminated. To do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set, or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the like are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after the preparation state such as the attack mode is passed, the push order notification for shifting the game state is performed by these flags, and it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus. On the other hand, if a bonus is won during the challenge mode or the special zone, the challenge mode or the special zone is terminated by the bonus winning.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. If it is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (when the precursor mode is not set), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1428. ..

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. In the challenge mode, the number of challenge mode continuation games is subtracted by proceeding to step S1407 and performing a process of subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1410. In the display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the challenge mode ends in this game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412, and it is determined whether or not the zone is in the attack mode. That is, when shifting to the special zone at the start of the attack mode as in the super attack mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1412. If the player is in the special zone, the number of games for the special zone is managed in steps S145 to S1428. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the number of attack mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the attack mode continuation counter in step S1413. Then, in step S1414, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1415, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1416. After that, in step S1417, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the attack mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1417, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1418. In step S1418, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. In the case of the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1419, and it is determined whether or not the zone is an additional special zone. If it is not an additional special zone, the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the VB mode continuation counter in step S1420. Then, in step S1421, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1422, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1423. After that, in step S1424, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. In the display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the VB mode ends in this game. Such notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1424, the game number management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1419 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1425. As described above, if it is determined in step S1412 that the zone is a special zone in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1425. In step S1425, the number of special zone continuation games is subtracted by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1426, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1427, and the special zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1428. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in this game. As such notification, for example, the number of games that have been successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1428, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1418 or step S1426, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End judgment processing>
Next, as the process at the end of the bonus, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. As described above, the end determination process is the process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success or failure of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is terminated, processing for winning notification such as an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is performed, and an attack mode in which the bonus is duplicated is elected. Process for adding the number of games such as.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination is established. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB small and medium small winning combination 1) is established with high probability during the bonus (Fig. 28). Further, when the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 (IV = 30) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 39th small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and further, the first If the 39th small winning combination of the small winning combination and the 39th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 39th small winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, when the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 is won, the lottery for winning the 39th small winning combination is won with a probability of 1/100. When the BB small and medium-sized combination 3 (IV = 31) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 40th small combination winning (FIG. 27 (b)), and the first small combination is further operated. And, when the 40th small winning combination of the 40th small winning combination wins the lottery, the 40th small winning combination winning is established. In the present embodiment, for example, when the BAR matching combination in BB is won, the lottery for winning the 40th small combination is won with a probability of 1/200. By adjusting the winning probabilities of the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 and the BB small and medium-sized winning combination 3, the probability of winning the 39th small winning combination and the 40th small winning combination may be adjusted. More specifically, the point value PV is allocated so that the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 is won with a probability of about 1/100 of the above configuration, and the BB small and medium-sized combination 3 is won with a probability of about 1/200 of the above configuration. Allocate the point value PV. Then, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the corresponding small winning combination (39th small winning combination, 40th small winning combination) at the time of winning the BB small and medium-sized combination 2 and the BB small and medium-sized combination 3, the corresponding small combination winning can be established. It may be configured.

When it is determined in step S1501 that the small winning combination is established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. When a negative determination is made in step S1501 or after the processing of step S1502 is executed, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after setting the bonus end command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1504, in steps S150-5 to S1518, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding the number of continuous games.

That is, in step S1505, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1506, the number of precursor games is set in step S1507, and the precursor command is set in step S1508. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process of the number of precursor games in step S1506, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 with a 100% probability. That is, in step S1507, the number of precursor games of 0 games is always set, and the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed in the next game of the bonus end game. After executing the process of step S1508, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. When the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1506 to S1508 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in the situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the winning notification of the challenge mode and the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

In addition, when the bonus ends when the attack mode winning flag or the challenge mode winning flag is set, it means that the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. and the bonus are won at the same time, or the attack mode, the challenge mode, etc. This is the case when the bonus is won during the precursor mode of. On the other hand, the case where the bonus ends when the VB mode winning flag is set is when the VB mode and the bonus are won at the same time in the attack mode, or in the precursor mode of the winning notification in the VB mode (in this case, in this case). This is the case when the bonus is won in the next game) in which the VB mode is won because the precursor mode of 0 games is selected.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. When the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1512, the attack mode addition game number addition process is performed in step S1513, and the addition command is set in step S1514. .. The processing of steps S1512 to S1514 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1514, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1511, it is determined in step S1515 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. When the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1516, the challenge mode number of games addition process is performed in step S1517, and the addition command is set in step S1518. .. The processes of steps S1516 to S1518 are the same as the processes of steps S822 to S824. When a negative determination is made in step S1515, or after the process of step S1518 is executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zones>
Next, the processing for the special zone will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The special zone processing is the processing executed in step S713 in the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the special zone shifts to the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, the result of the lottery processing this time is grasped in step S1601. In the following step S1602, the attack mode additional game number lottery process is performed. In the following step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. Then, in step S1604, after setting the additional command, the processing for the special zone ends. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of additional games selected in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 is larger than that in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effect on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side, various notification processes performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As various notification processes, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. When a new command is received, in step S1702, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed. The RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be individually stored and can be read from the previously stored command.

When a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet command. The bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation, and is a mode transition notification process (FIG. 6) in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process. There are a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like in 36). In the case of these bet-time commands, the bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the process of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to first commands are used. There are precursor commands and addition commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order combination process (FIG. 38), and the like. In the case of these start-time commands, the start-time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the process of step S1706 is executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command at each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the respective stop operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a command output from the main control device 101, and is step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). It is a stop command command set by. In the case of a stop command command as each stop operation command, step S1708 executes each stop operation effect setting process.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the process of step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of total stop. The all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the commands, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, and specialization set in the winning result correspondence process (Fig. 39). There is a zone end command, etc. In the case of these commands at the time of all stops, the effect setting process at the time of all stops is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, the effect based on the command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, the start time, and the stop time (for example, the effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) is set, and the connection is made without going through the main control device 101. Set the effect based on the signal from the sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), set for error notification, and so on.

Hereinafter, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stops will be described. In the description of each effect setting process, the outline of the display effect of FIGS. 55 to 60 will be referred to.

<Bet production setting process>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included as the bet command received this time. If the challenge mode start command is included, the process of setting the challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "challenge mode start", and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) suggesting that the mode is in the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "grab the attack mode!" With a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack number one!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, the process of setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "VICTORYBONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the bet time command received this time. If the bonus winning notification command is included, the process of setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S1808. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Yatte bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I did it!" In the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

After executing any of the processes of step S1802, step S1804, step S1806 and step S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, after setting other betting effects in step S1809, the present The effect setting process ends. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode that shifts to one condition that the game has not been played for a predetermined time, or turning on the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Starting effect setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S1901, the display mode setting process is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is a normal mode, a challenge mode, an attack mode, a VB mode, or a specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. , The display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side. An area is provided, the corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, the challenge mode flag is set in the setting process of the challenge mode start effect in step S1802. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a push order winning combination based on the received lottery result command. If the push order combination is won, the push order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the third re-game winning is established, and then the push order notification process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the first replay winning is established, and then the push order notification process is completed. To do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. The notified flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it is preferable that the configuration is such that the presence / absence of the notified flag is determined. If the winning notification of the VB mode has been completed, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the 4th and 5th re-game winnings are established, and then the push order notification is performed. End the processing. If the winning notification of the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replays 1 and 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the sixth to eighth re-game winnings are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification process is terminated. To do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the push order notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the lottery result this time is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the push order in which the bell prize is established as the first small winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated. .. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 45), if it is determined in step S1902 that the push order combination is not won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific combination is won. If the specific combination is won, the specific combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after executing the process of step S1903 or step S1905, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an additional command is received as the start command this time. When the additional command is received, in step S1907, a process of setting the additional effect in advance is performed so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed at the time of stop. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games as “+10”. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64.

The details of the setting process of the addition effect of step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the additional command received this time. In the following step S2102, the notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of drawing a lottery at which timing in the game the additional effect is performed on the premise that the additional effect is performed in the current game.

The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 48, as the execution timing of the additional effect in this game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are set in the order of the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed Is set.

Here, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be supplementarily described. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from the initial position arranged on the front side to the operation position arranged on the back side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are generated by operating from the initial position to the operation position. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop ON operation is performed on the assumption that the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed based on the detection signal being switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, when the hand is released from the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operating force (pushing pressure) pushed toward the operating position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, the main control device 101 grasps that the stop OFF operation is performed on the assumption that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed based on the detection signal being switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional effect is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can occur at both the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which the additional effect is generated, the additional effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed but also at the timing when the pressing operation is completed.

In the execution timing table of the additional effect, as the number of games with a relatively small number of additional games, for example, when 5 to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , The timing when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, and the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%. The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, it is easier to select the operation when the stop is turned off than when the stop ON operation is performed on each reel, and it is easier to select the operation on the rear side.

On the other hand, as the number of games with a relatively large number of additional games, for example, when 100 or more games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. Was performed at 10%, the 2nd reel stop ON operation was 5%, the 2nd reel stop OFF operation was 30%, the 3rd reel stop ON operation was 5%, and the 3rd reel stop OFF operation ( (When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. Also in this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the stop ON operation, and the rear operation is relatively easier to select.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional effect is more likely to occur at the time of the stop OFF operation than at the time of the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation of the third reel (ON operation, OFF operation) is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is most likely to be selected next, and the stop of the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is most easily selected during operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step S2102 was when the stop of any reel was ON. judge. When the stop is ON, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set in step S2104, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, in step S2104, a process of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the additional effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. When the stop OFF operation of these reels is performed, the target reel to generate the additional effect is set in step S2106, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the stop OFF operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. Further, also in step S2106, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the addition effect this time is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed) in step S2107. Specifically, a process of setting a flag at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a. Further, also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processes of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the setting process of the additional effect is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process at the start, if the additional command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S1908, and the process proceeds to step S1909. Then, in step S1910, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effect setting process ends. The effect setting process during the bonus and the continuous effect setting process will be described in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, or a process of turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

<Production setting process at each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In step S2201, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated when the reel is stopped ON is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop ON operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed in step S2204, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when the additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop ON operation this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 is at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An additional effect will occur at. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

Further, for example, when the current game is a push order winning combination and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect is the next operation target by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. It changes to the production showing the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the display is made so that the first reel shown in FIG. 37A is the operation target. .. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel (right reel 32R in the figure) to be the next operation target shown in FIG. 37 (b) is shown. It changes to a production. Further, if the two reels are rotating before the effect of the stop ON operation, the display indicating that the second reel shown in FIG. 37 (b) is the stop target is displayed, and the second reel is displayed by the stop ON operation. Based on the reels being stopped, the display changes to a display (FIG. 37 (c)) in which the third reel is to be stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed among the stop operations of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated at the time of the reel stop OFF operation is set as the effect of this game. If it is not set, this setting process ends as it is. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop OFF operation effect is performed in step S2208, and then the present setting process is terminated.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation this time, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are used. At the timing when the hand is released, the additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the present effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Production setting process when all stops>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stops will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. When the challenge mode end command is included, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed in step S2302. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Make more devotion!" With a thick male voice) is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode start command is included, the process of setting the attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “attack mode !! Ver.1”. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "attack mode start!" In a high voice of a woman) is emitted.

By the way, the display of "Ver.1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, it is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the characters "attack mode !! Ver.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a promotion effect. In addition, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.3" are displayed, and when the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the characters "attack mode !! Ver.4" are displayed. The display is done.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the attack mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the attack mode end command is included, the process of setting the attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "attack mode END" and includes the current attack mode (VB mode, special zone). ) Is displayed, and the total number of payouts in this attack mode (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the attack mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you" in a high-pitched female voice) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode start command is included, the process of setting the VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58A, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "777 VICTORY !!". In addition, in the VB mode start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in the voices of men and women) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the VB mode end command is included, the process of setting the VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the character "VICTORY BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the VB mode this time. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of this VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, the voices of men and women "will continue") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, the process of setting the special zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Additional challenge !!" and a special mode in which the attack mode is likely to be added. The character suggesting that is is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "I'm going" with the voice of a boy) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the special zone end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone end command is included, the process of setting the special zone end effect is performed in step S2316. In the special zone end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Kyukyukyukyuin!") Is emitted from the speaker 64. The display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be different depending on the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the stop command received this time. If the bonus end command is included, the process of setting the bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during this bonus, and if the bonus has moved to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode (attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts (including VB mode, special zone, bonus). In addition, in the bonus end production, a character or the like that suggests these contents is performed according to the success or failure of the attack mode, the success or failure of the challenge mode, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316 and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2317, the process proceeds to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In step S2309 and step S2319, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, when the generation timing of the additional effect this time is set at the time of full stop in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 47), as shown in FIG. 50 (c), all the reels 32L, 32M , 32R is stopped, and an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in step S2310 and step S2320, other stop effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or the sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64. , The sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is controlled so as to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of these display modes, various in-game production processing is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, as the effects during various games, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided. The continuous production is a production that expects a favorable result for the player (winning a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game of a plurality of times (4 times in this embodiment). It is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which notification of whether or not the result was advantageous in the final game is performed. The effect during the bonus is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning.

The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). Shows a daruma-dropping effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect of notifying the presence or absence of the continuation of the continuous effect is performed (the figure shows the effect that the first stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed. It shows that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage Daruma drop fails). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of continuation of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of the Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the second stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Shows).

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two-stage Daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect of notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (the figure shows the effect that the third stage daruma doll has been successfully removed, and the continuous effect is continued. Shows).

As shown in FIG. 60 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous production, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, the one-stage Daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, it is produced whether or not the result is advantageous for the player (the figure shows the effect that the final stage of the Daruma doll has been successfully removed).

As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games there are until the end of the continuous production).

Here, in each game of continuous production, whether or not the continuous production is continued until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of continuous production, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of continuous production is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of being notified of discontinuation is low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player differs greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production of the current game, and the higher the interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. ..

Hereinafter, as the processes related to the continuous effect and the effect during the bonus, the effect setting process during the bonus (step S1908), the process for notifying the specific combination (step S1905), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 45). ) Will be described respectively.

<Production processing during bonus>
First, the effect processing during the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus middle effect setting process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from this game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB is won to the end of the bonus. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2401 is the case where the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2402, the number of bonus production games is set in the bonus production counters of the various counter areas 183b in the RAM 183. The bonus mid-effect counter is a counter for executing the effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the winning role is won in which 9 medals are paid out in each game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the bonus games of the first BB and the second BB end in 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned effect counter during the bonus is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games should be produced. Is. Then, in step S2402, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games. After the processing of step S2402 is performed, in step S2403, the bonus medium effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 183a. The bonus during effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the bonus during effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after the process of step S2403 is executed, the effect setting process during this bonus is terminated.

<Process for notification of specific role>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command of this time. If the precursor command is not included, in step S2502, it is determined whether or not the additional command is included as the start command of this time. If the additional command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a result of the lottery, you have not won the lottery to shift to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or the lottery to add the number of continuous games. If the bonus is not won, the lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2504. Although it is difficult to distinguish the pseudo-precursor mode from the premonition mode in appearance, in the precursor mode, the player is notified of a favorable result (such as winning the challenge mode) based on the end of the number of precursor games. The pseudo-precursor mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of a favorable result based on the end of the pseudo-precursor game number.

In step S2504, the table for the pseudo precursor mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, the counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 183b, and the lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo precursor mode is performed. Do. In the pseudo-precursor mode lottery table, the probability of winning the pseudo-precursor mode lottery is set to differ depending on the type of specific winning combination. For example, a strong cherry is a pseudo-cherry rather than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the precursor mode is high.

In step S2505, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S2504. If the game is won, the lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2506. This process corresponds to step S810 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2507, a process is performed in which the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is subtracted by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which continuous production of four games is performed, continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and result notification is performed in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous production. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode becomes the one corresponding to the start of continuous effect (remaining 4 games), the continuous effect is started. It will be.

In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating that the pseudo precursor mode is set in the various flag storage areas 183a is executed. In the following step S2509, the continuous effect flag is set. After that, the process for notifying the specific combination is terminated. If a positive determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the precursor command is included as the start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2602, a process of inputting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous production counter is performed. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (4 games remaining), continuous production is started. When the number of precursor games of 1 to 3 games is input to the continuous production counter in step S2602, the continuous production is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous production counter in step S2602, the continuous production starts from this game, and is performed from the production of the third continuous production game of FIG. 60 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification such as the attack mode is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S2602, the continuous effect flag is set in step S2603.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after the process of step S2603 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the number of continuous effect counters corresponds to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2608, and the effect table for this precursor is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2609, the production data of the corresponding continuous production is specified from the production table for this precursor and the continuous production counter, the corresponding production data is acquired from the production data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the continuous production of this time is performed. Performs the process of setting as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the production table for this precursor, if the continuous production counters are 1 to 3, the continuous production counter is the production data indicating that the continuous production is continued until the next game. If it is 0, it is the production data indicating that the continuous production of this time ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, a pseudo precursor effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2611, the production data of the corresponding continuous production is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous production counter, and the corresponding production data is acquired from the production data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the continuous production of this time is performed. Performs the process of setting as. As the production data of the continuous production specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous production counters are 1 to 3, the production data indicating that the continuous production continues until the next game or the production data indicating that the continuous production does not continue is used. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect this time ends with a failure.

It should be noted that the effect data specified from the pseudo precursor effect table when the continuous effect counters are 1 to 3 includes data in which continuous effect is not set. For example, when the continuous effect counters are 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game of FIG. 60 (a). When the production data of the first production game is set and the continuous production counter is 0, the production data of the second continuous production game indicating that the continuous production does not continue until the next game is set in FIG. 60 (b). By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is 0.

After performing the process of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. When the continuous effect counter is 0, the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the continuous effect setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the bonus production flag is set. If it is set, in step S2615, the effect counter during bonus is subtracted. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the bonus is performed. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect table is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S2617, the production data of the corresponding bonus production is specified from the bonus production table and the bonus production counter, the corresponding production data is acquired from the production data storage area 182b, and the current bonus production is performed. Performs the process of setting as. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during the bonus is 0. If the bonus production counter is 0, the process of clearing the bonus production flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the main control device 101 side based on the insertion of medals as a game medium and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are When the rotation is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which the privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay wins. Whether or not the corresponding replay can be won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / failing lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the push order bell winning can be established and a medal can be obtained. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the gaming state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, the player presses in the RT state with the replay probability improved. It is possible to establish a forward bell prize and obtain a large number of medals.

The events that trigger the acquisition of a large number of medals are the transition lottery of the display mode, the execution of the additional lottery for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, and the winning of the bonus winning / failing lottery. Occurs when a specific role such as watermelon, weak watermelon, chances A and B, and middle bell is won. That is, as a specific combination, a small combination (single combination) or a duplicate combination of IV = 13 to 19, 32 to 45 is set, and when these specific combinations are won, a display mode transition lottery or a display mode transition lottery or An additional lottery will be held, or a bonus lottery will be won. A specific role is a role that is won with a relatively lower probability than a bell or replay, and is also called a rare role. Therefore, the player plays each game while expecting the occurrence of such a relatively low-probability trigger event.

Here, the display mode transition lottery based on the specific combination and the bonus winning / failing lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the display mode transition lottery, and the set value.

As already explained, as the specific role, a single role such as a strong cherry with IV = 13 to 19 and an overlapping role with a bonus of IV = 32 to 45 are set.

The bonuses of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are the winning flags corresponding to the bonus winning when the winning combination with the bonus of IV = 32 to 45 is won, or when the bonus single role of IV = 46,47 is won. 1BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag) is set. On the other hand, if IV = 13 to 19 is won as a single role, the bonus will not be won twice. That is, when it is determined in step S305 of the lottery process of FIG. 16 that the player has won at IV = 13 to 19, the winning flag (strong cherry winning) of the small winning combination corresponding to these IV = 13 to 19 is determined in step S308. Although the flag, weak cherry winning flag, strong watermelon winning flag, weak watermelon winning flag, chance A winning flag, chance B winning flag, middle bell winning flag are set, in step S307, the bonus winning flag (1st BB winning flag, 1st) 2BB winning flag) is not set. That is, the trigger event as a bonus winning occurs in the game won in IV = 32 to 45, and does not occur in the game won in IV = 13-19.

The probability of occurrence of a bonus winning event may differ depending on the set value that causes a change in the payout rate. That is, of IV = 32 to 45, the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value for the overlapping combination with the first BB, and the probability of occurrence is the same, while the overlapping combination with the second BB differs depending on the set value. It is a winning probability and the probability of occurrence is different. More specifically, strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 32), weak cherry duplication 1 (IV = 34), strong watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 36), weak watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 38), chance A duplication 1 (IV). = 40), chance B duplication 1 (IV = 42), middle bell duplication 1 (IV = 44) are set to be the same probability regardless of the set value, while strong cherry duplication 2 (IV = 33), Weak Cherry Duplicate 2 (IV = 35), Strong Watermelon Duplicate 2 (IV = 37), Weak Watermelon Duplicate 2 (IV = 39), Chance A Duplicate 2 (IV = 41), Chance B Duplicate 2 (IV = 43), the probability of winning the middle bell duplication 2 (IV = 45) is set so as to differ depending on the set value. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB independently is set to be the same regardless of the set value. Therefore, the first BB is set to have the same probability of occurrence regardless of the set value, while the second BB is set to have a different probability of occurrence depending on the set value.

The display mode transition lottery is carried out when a single combination of IV = 13 to 19 and an overlapping combination of IV = 32 to 45, which are set to have the same probability of occurrence depending on the set value, are won. On the other hand, if the duplicate winning combination of IV = 32 to 45, which is set to have a different occurrence probability depending on the set value, is won, it is not executed (or, although it is implemented, the winning probability is 0). Is set to). In other words, regardless of whether or not there is overlap with the bonus, when a winning combination with a different winning probability differs depending on the set value, the display mode transition lottery is not performed, but the winning combination with the same winning probability set according to the set value is won. At times, the display mode transition lottery is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unlike the trigger event as a bonus winning, it can be said that the trigger event related to the display mode is defined so that the probability of occurrence does not differ depending on the set value. Regarding the trigger event related to the display mode, not only the transition lottery of the display mode, but also the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of continuous games in the attack mode and the challenge mode and the number of additional games at the time of winning, the performance differs depending on the set value. It is stipulated not to be.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous state as a bonus state that becomes advantageous for the player by changing the probability (lottery table) of the winning / losing lottery of the small winning combination and the notification of the operation order of the pushing order combination are notified. Comparing with the second advantageous state such as the attack mode which becomes an advantageous state for the player by being performed, the winning probability (transition probability) differs depending on the set value for the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state It is stipulated that the winning probability (transition probability) does not differ depending on the set value.

The real thrill of the so-called slot machine game is that each game has a winning / failing lottery for the winning combination, and each reel is stopped according to the result. There is also the idea that the second advantageous state to obtain is a secondary game. From that point of view, although it is permissible that the winning probability of the first advantageous state differs depending on the set value, it is not preferable that the winning probability differs even with respect to the second advantageous state of the above-mentioned secondary game. Conceivable. If the winning probability of even the above-mentioned secondary game differs depending on the set value, the difference in the ball output rate due to the winning probability of each role, which is the main game, becomes small, and as a result, the master-slave of the game is reversed. This is because there is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, as described above, the ball output rate is adjusted according to the first advantageous state, and the second advantageous state is regarded as a secondary game to the last, so that these first advantageous states are not eliminated without eliminating the original game characteristics of the slot machine. It is possible to realize playability by linking the state and the second advantageous state.

With respect to such a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, both advantageous states are carried out separately and are set so that the two states do not overlap. That is, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the first BB or the second BB is won and the bonus state (BB state) is entered, the bonus state required until the specified number of payouts is made is maintained, and the RT state or the like is reached. No migration occurs. In addition, the display mode also shifts to the BB mode, and the BB mode that takes until the bonus state ends is maintained (the shift to the attack mode or the like does not occur). Then, if the first BB or the second BB is won during the attack mode, the display mode shifts to the BB mode, and the attack mode is restarted after the BB mode ends (FIG. 40).

On the other hand, the configuration is such that a trigger event of the other advantageous state can occur during one advantageous state. More specifically, during the first advantageous state, which is the main game, it is a subordinate game and no trigger event (attack mode transition lottery, additional lottery, etc.) related to the second advantageous state occurs, but during the second advantageous state, The structure is such that an opportunity event (bonus winning) related to the first advantageous state can occur. Specifically, in each small winning combination (IV = 29 to 31) in the bonus state as the first advantageous state, the attack mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, etc. are not performed, and the trigger event related to the second advantageous state does not occur. .. On the other hand, in the attack mode and the VB mode as the second advantageous state, since the overlapping combination of IV = 32 to 45 can be won, the trigger event related to the first advantageous state can occur. In this way, while limiting the overlapping implementation of both advantageous states, the other trigger event can occur, so that a chain of both advantageous states is likely to occur, and the interest is improved.

Here, when the second advantageous state is reached and the operation order of the push order combination is notified, in addition to the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 of FIG. The push order notification is also performed on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62A is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 62B is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on / off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment and to light the display segment. Any combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the instruction monitor 68. Since each of the individual light sources irradiates light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

For each display segment N1 to N8, in detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. Further, the eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region provided with the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

If it is possible to individually display the symbols of a plurality of patterns on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary, and 7 instead of the eight segments. A configuration using 9 segments, 9 segments, or the like may be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on and off is not essential, and if the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, A segment display may be configured by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for notifying the operation order of the push order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the winning mode is advantageous for the player by performing the stop operation in the order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. In that case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" as the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is advantageous for the player, the first display segment N1 The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and displayed, and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win a prize in a manner advantageous to the player.

The eighth display segment N8 is selected when the display mode is the normal mode and the lottery for transition to the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode is won, or the attack mode, the super attack mode, or the challenge mode is simultaneously won. Lights up when you win the bonus (1st BB) you get. Further, it is turned off when the attack mode, the super attack mode, the challenge mode, and the first BB are completed and the normal mode is entered (except when the attack mode is changed again after passing through the precursor mode).

In other words, the navigation state (attack mode, super attack mode, high frequency mode) that makes it easier for the player to win a prize by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell and push order replay, to the navigation state. Chance state (challenge mode, 1st BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or winning that has won the transition lottery to the navigation state or chance state but has not transitioned to these navigation states or chance states The section including the state (winning mode) is set as an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is turned on during the advantageous section and turned off during the normal section which is not the advantageous section. It serves as a section indicator (specific notification means) for clearly indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section.

The eighth display segment N8 is a game in which the game results (specific roles such as strong cherries, etc.) that trigger the advantageous sections such as the navigation state, chance state, and winning state are won and the game results are established. Then, in the game next to the start game, the lighting is started as a notification that the advantageous section is reached at a timing before the game operation by the player is allowed. More specifically, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game result winning that triggered the advantageous section is established, that is, regardless of whether or not the game is missed, the game in which the game result is won is As the start game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on at a timing before the betting operation is permitted as the game operation by the player in the next game. That is, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on before the start of the next game of the game that has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, the front portion of the gaming machine below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is arranged at a position that is easy for the player to see. Further, it can be said that oversight by the player is suppressed from the fact that the player who advances the game aiming at the acquisition of the medal is arranged near the payout number display unit 62 which is easy to watch.

Further, in the instruction monitor 68, in particular, the eighth display segment N8 has a brightness higher than that of the surrounding display units (for example, the payout number display unit 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is defined so that it is twice as bright as the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in the lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine should be higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is defined (so that the illuminance is doubled). From such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

Hereinafter, the section display first process and the section display second process will be described as processes related to lighting / extinguishing of the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The first section display process is a process performed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery result is based on the lottery result. It is carried out after the display mode transition lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, and more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is lit, as an advantageous section, the attack mode, the super attack mode, the transition lottery to the challenge mode has been won, or in these modes. Shows a case. If a negative determination is made in step S2701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S2702.

In step S2702, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. When the eighth display segment N8 is turned off and either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery for transition to the challenge mode or the attack mode is performed in this lottery process. And when you win the lottery to shift to the super attack mode. As described above, in the first specific combination process (FIG. 32), when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the challenge mode winning flag is set and the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the super attack mode is won. If so, set the attack mode winning flag. If none of the flags is set in step S2702, the first process of displaying this section is terminated as it is.

If either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2703 to execute the display start mode lottery process. In the display start mode lottery process, the display start mode table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the lighting mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery when shifting to the advantageous section. In the display start mode table in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is set to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is the operation of the start lever 41, the stop ON operation of the first reel, the stop OFF operation of the first reel, and the second. Each of the reel stop ON operation, the second reel stop OFF operation, the third reel stop ON operation, the third reel stop OFF operation, and the medal payout based on the winning is set. In this case, the section display first process is one of the lottery processes performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery process is the operation of the start lever 41 in the lighting start timing. Indicates the time when the start lever 41 is operated, and the lighting is started immediately after the first processing of the section display. Further, with respect to the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel, the first reel that has been stopped is the first reel among the three stop switches 42 to 44, and the reel that has been stopped next is the first reel. It is the second reel, and the last reel that has been stopped is the third reel. The stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation are as described above, and the operation of pushing the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position arranged on the front side to the operation position arranged on the back side is the stop ON operation and the stop. The operation of returning from the operation position to the initial position by releasing the hands from the switches 42 to 44 is the stop OFF operation. In addition, when the medal payout is completed, if the prize is not established due to missing medals or the like, the lighting is started without going through the payout process.

When shifting to the challenge mode (when the challenge mode winning flag is set), 5% when the start lever 41 is operated, 10% when the first reel is stopped ON, and the first reel is stopped OFF. 55% when the time is 55%, 5% when the second reel is stopped and turned on, 15% when the second reel is stopped and turned off, 3% when the third reel is stopped and turned on, and when the third reel is stopped and turned off. 6% and 1% when the medal payout is completed are selected. When shifting to the attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set), the start lever 41 is operated by 3%, the first reel is stopped by 3%, and the first reel is stopped. 6% when OFF operation, 10% when stop ON operation of 2nd reel, 55% when stop OFF operation of 2nd reel, 5% when stop ON operation of 3rd reel, Stop OFF operation of 3rd reel The time is selected at a rate of 15%, and the time when the medal payout is completed is selected at a rate of 3%. Then, when shifting to the super attack mode (when the attack mode winning flag is set and the special zone flag is set), the start lever 41 is operated by 1%, and the first reel is stopped. 2% when ON operation, 4% when stop OFF operation of 1st reel, 8% when stop ON operation of 2nd reel, 20% when stop OFF operation of 2nd reel, Stop ON operation of 3rd reel The time is selected at a rate of 8%, the time when the third reel is stopped and turned off is 50%, and the time when the medal payout is completed is 7%.

That is, in the present embodiment, the section indicator (eighth) selected in the case of shifting to the advantageous section, the case of shifting to the challenge mode, the case of shifting to the attack mode, and the case of shifting to the super attack mode. The display start timing of the display segment N8) is set so that it can be different. In the challenge mode, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is most easily selected, and in the attack mode, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is the most selected. In the super attack mode, it is most likely to be selected when the third reel is stopped and turned off. Challenge mode is a so-called chance zone where it is easy to shift to attack mode, attack mode is a navigation state where push order notification is easy to be performed, and super attack mode is a navigation state where it shifts to attack mode via an additional special zone. , The attack mode has a higher advantage for the player than the challenge mode, and the super attack mode has a higher advantage for the player than the attack mode. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up and shifts to the advantageous section, it can be said that the advantage for the player greatly differs depending on the content of the advantageous section. Since the display start mode is such that the content and the advantage of the advantageous section are associated with the eighth display segment surface and the N8, the eighth display segment N8 is used in the game in which the lottery for transition to these modes is won. It is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the timing of starting lighting.

Further, in the present embodiment, the later the lighting start timing of the eighth display segment N8 is, the easier it is to shift to the advantageous section of the mode that is advantageous for the player. Therefore, a device has been devised to gradually and stepwise obtain a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

Moreover, while giving superiority or inferiority to the selection rate of the display start timing in each mode, any display start timing can be selected at the time of winning any mode. That is, for example, when the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated, it is most likely that the lottery for transition to the challenge mode was won, and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode could be won. Although set to be the least likely, the chances are not zero for the least likely Super Attack mode. By doing so, even if the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing different from the timing desired by the player, it is possible not to give up until the mode winning notification is performed. it can.

Here, as already explained, the notification that the challenge mode has been won (challenge mode start effect, step S1802) and the notification that the attack mode has been won (attack mode winning notification effect, step S1804) are set to the precursor mode. It is performed at the time of betting operation of the next game in which the number of precursor games becomes 0. On the other hand, in the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, the game in which the game result that triggered the transition lottery such as the challenge mode is established is set as the start game, and the betting operation of the next game is permitted. Lighting starts at a timing before the time. That is, even if the precursor mode is set to 0 game, when the winning notification effect of each mode transition and the notification of the advantageous section by the section display are compared, the notification of the advantageous section by the section display is performed first. In such a relationship, when the section indicator starts lighting, it is not possible to completely identify which mode is won, so each mode shifts after the section indicator starts lighting. It is also possible to provide a feeling of excitement during the period when the winning notification effect is performed.

Further, looking at the stop operation of each reel, the configuration is such that the stop OFF operation is easier to select than the stop ON operation. Therefore, in a situation where there is no certainty as to whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit, it is considered that the operation is performed with the expectation that it will be lit during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation. .. In this case, it is highly possible that the corresponding reels are stopped by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop ON, and that the corresponding reels are stopped when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop OFF. Therefore, the stop switch 42 has a higher expectation that the eighth display segment N8 will light up in the situation where the corresponding reel is stopped than in the situation before the corresponding reel is stopped. It is considered that the operations of ~ 44 are performed.

For example, comparing the time when the weak cherry of the 27th small role is won and the time when the strong cherry of the 28th small role is won, each reel 32L, 32M is when the 27th small role is won and the 28th small role is won. , When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on 32R, the stop result of the left reel 32L is the same, and the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper or lower stage of the left reel 32L in both cases. .. In this case, by stopping the middle reel 32M, it is determined whether the 27th small winning combination was won or the 28th small winning combination was won. Then, in the present embodiment, both the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination may win the transition lottery to the advantageous section. That is, if the eighth display segment N8 is not lit when the left reel 32L is stopped, (1) the game result of this game is a weak cherry win, and the eighth display segment N8 is still Cases where the lighting timing has not been reached, (2) Cases where the game result of this game was a weak cherry win, and cases where the transition lottery to any advantageous section was not won, (3) Game of this game A case where the result is a strong cherry win and the lighting timing of the 8th display segment N8 has not yet been reached. (4) The game result of this game is a strong cherry win and the transition to any advantageous section. It is conceivable that the lottery was not won. Then, by stopping the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R as the second reel, it is determined whether the case is (1) or (2) or the case (3) or (4). And, since it is easier to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section when the strong cherry is won than when the weak cherry is won, as a player, (1) or (2) is more important than the case (1) or (2). It is considered that the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped while expecting the case of 3) or (4). That is, when the "cherry" symbol also stops at a predetermined position on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, it is determined that the case is (3) or (4), so that the "cherry" symbol stops. It is considered that the stop operation is performed while hoping for this. Then, the stop OFF operation in that situation can be said to be an operation for determining whether it is either the case (3) or the case (4) above, and whether the section indicator lights up more purely. You can entertain whether or not. In other words, when the stop ON operation is performed while hoping that the "cherry" symbol will stop, the eighth display segment N8 is difficult to light. Therefore, when the stop ON operation is performed, the "cherry" is more pure. You can entertain the game of stopping the design. In this way, by dividing the parts that the player will be interested in in stages so that they are less likely to overlap, it is possible to prevent the event that the player's attention is distracted and the player cannot enjoy the game. Is possible.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, after executing the display start mode lottery process in step S2703, the process of setting the display start mode based on the lottery result of step S2703 is performed in step S2704. In this case, the process of setting the flag corresponding to the timing determined by the lottery is performed. Then, in the display start process (not shown) that is individually started as the display start process of the section indicator (8th display segment N8), a process of determining whether or not the timing corresponds to these flags is performed. At the same time, if it is the corresponding timing, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the timing is set, and if it is set, the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started. .. For example, when the time of the first stop OFF operation is determined in step S2703, the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set. In the process for starting the display, each determination process such as whether or not it is the operation timing of the start lever 41, whether or not it is the first stop ON operation timing, and whether or not it is the first stop OFF operation timing is performed. , The display of the eighth display segment N8 is started (turned off) on condition that it is determined that the first stop OFF operation timing is reached and the flag corresponding to the first stop OFF operation is set as described above. Switch from state to lit state). The display start process is configured as a cycle process that is started every predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle), and is started as one process of the timer interrupt process, for example.

In addition, in the main control device 101, when the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is set to be lit and the display is started, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!"" Is spoken from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. At the start of display of the eighth display segment N8, the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit may be configured to generate an effect. In this case, the corresponding command is output to the display control device 81 and the corresponding command is output. It is preferable that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S2704, in step S2705, the process of starting the measurement of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is executed, and then the section display first process ends. The number of continuous games in the advantageous section is measured by measuring the number of advantageous section games AG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and in step S2705, the process of setting the number of advantageous section games AG to 0, which is the initial value. I do. The advantageous section game number AG is executed by adding 1 in each game in the advantageous section.

When it is determined in step S2701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, in step S2706, the process of continuing the display in the advantageous section is performed, and then the first process of displaying this section is performed. To finish. Specifically, in step S2706, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lit state is performed.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 65. As described above, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, the medal is paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result. Etc. (Processing for winning results) will be performed.

In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit and displayed as the section indicator. If it is off (non-lighting, non-display), the second section display process is terminated as it is. If the lighting display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, the process of adding 1 to the number of games AG in the advantageous section is performed. The advantageous section game number AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is lit is measured.

After executing the process of step S2802, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value "1500". When "1500" is reached, the number of advantageous section games AG is cleared to 0 in step S2804, and then the eighth display segment N8 is turned off as the end processing of the display of the section display in step S2805. Perform the process of causing. Then, after performing the data initialization process in step S2806, the section display second process ends.

The data initialization process is a process of returning the flags and counters set at the time of transition to the advantageous section of this time and the flags and counters set during the advantageous section of this time to the initial values. For example, the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, etc. may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag may be set during the attack mode, and the flag may remain set until the final initialization process. If so, clear these winning flags. Further, in the initialization process, if the attack notification flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, the special zone flag, and the like are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if the precursor counter, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the attack mode, and the like are larger than 0, all of these counters are reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables or parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for such variables or parameters. It is a process to perform.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S2807 to determine whether or not the advantageous section has ended. That is, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not neither the challenge mode winning flag nor the attack mode winning flag is set, and in step S2808, neither the challenge mode flag nor the attack mode flag is set. Determine if it is in a state. When affirmative judgment is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, it means that the advantageous section is completed before the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In this case, in step S2809, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is determined. In addition to clearing to 0, the section display second process is terminated after the section indicator display end process is performed in step S2810. If a negative determination is made in either step S2807 or step S2808, it is considered that the section is still advantageous, and the section display second process is terminated as it is. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) will continue.

<About the display of the push order display and the section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 66, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not lit) in a normal section that is not an advantageous section. In this normal section, the push order notification effect is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, whereas the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, when a lottery for transition to an advantageous section such as a challenge mode or an attack mode is won by winning a weak watermelon role, the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established is set as the start game, and the start game of the start game is set. In the next game, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator lights up at a timing before the betting operation by the player is allowed, and the notification of the advantageous section is started.

In this case, in the game in which the weak watermelon role is won as described above, the game is in the state before the transition to the advantageous section and is included in the normal section. Then, with respect to the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator indicating the advantageous section, the timing at which the notification that the eighth display segment N8 is the advantageous section allows the betting operation of the next game of the start game in which the weak watermelon combination is won. That is, assuming that the game in which the advantageous section is started is performed at the timing when the game becomes possible, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in the weak watermelon role winning game (starting game) as described above. It can be said that the notification is a prior notification performed before the notification that the section is advantageous (state notification, mode notification). Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, the content or the degree of advantage of the advantageous section is suggested when the notification of the advantageous section is performed by the advance notification.

After that, in the situation where the notification that the section is advantageous is made, the push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 occurs. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player pushes based on the push order information. You can grasp the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If such a game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends and the eighth display is finished when the third reel stop ON operation is performed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the push order combination is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to the push order combination is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit and the final game in the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off, and the notification of the advantageous section ends. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted in the game in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. Specifically, the game following the start game is set as the first game, and the final in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. Up to the game is the number of games in the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second process which is a process after the payout determination process). If the medal is not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the game is the final game of the advantageous section.

In this way, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on during the advantageous section, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the advantageous section ends. Then, the eighth display segment N8 not only starts lighting based on the transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc., but also based on the fact that the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, etc. is won. Lighting starts. That is, even if the notification is not given in the game that has won the transition lottery to these modes, it is possible to determine whether or not the transition lottery has been won by checking whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit. It is possible to grasp clearly. By doing so, there is an advantage between the player who has won the lottery for transition to these modes but ends the game without knowing it, and the successor player who is seated after that. It is possible to prevent the difference in degree.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured so that there is no difference in the advantage depending on the set value with respect to the playability in which the advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the challenge mode and the attack mode. Therefore, by making the playability by the push order notification a uniform advantage in each game table (set value) and each game (situation), advantages / disadvantages between players are eliminated, and benefits are aimed at the pattern. It is possible to make a well-balanced gaming machine by fully enjoying the original gametability of the slot machine 10 and the relationship with the playability by the accompanying push order notification.

On the other hand, in terms of playability by push order notification, it is the player's interest whether or not to win the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, etc. and whether or not these modes continue. 8 It may be advantageous in terms of ensuring equality among players that it becomes obvious by turning on / off the display segment N8, but it can be a disadvantage in terms of playability and production effect. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the section display first process, the lighting start timing (display start mode) of the eighth display segment N8 is configured to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section that shifts by lighting.

FIG. 67 shows the relationship between the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 and the content of the advantageous section to be notified (shifted) of winning after that when the weak watermelon combination is won as a specific combination in the normal section. ing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 67A, when the weak watermelon combination is won, it is assumed that the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. As the player, since the eighth display segment N8 has started lighting, it is possible to grasp that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won, and the lighting has started when the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. Therefore, it is predicted that the advantageous section this time is the challenge mode (see FIG. 64). Then, the player confirms that the advantageous section of this time is the challenge mode by generating the challenge mode start effect as the notification game through the precursor mode. It should be noted that the measurement of the advantageous section is started after the lighting of the eighth display segment N8 is started, that is, the advantageous section is also in the precursor mode as described above.

FIG. 67B shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting when the second reel is stopped and turned off when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that he / she has won the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section this time is in the attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after passing through the precursor mode, the attack mode confirmation effect is generated as a notification game, so that it is confirmed that the advantageous section this time was the attack mode.

FIG. 68 (c) shows a case where the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting when the third reel is stopped and turned off when the weak watermelon combination is won. In this case, the player predicts that he / she has won the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section this time is in the super attack mode (see FIG. 64). Then, after passing through the precursor mode, the additional special zone confirmation effect is generated as a notification game, and it is confirmed that the advantageous section this time was the super attack mode with the additional special zone.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit to clearly indicate that it is an advantageous section, and the eighth display segment N8 is turned off to clearly indicate that it is not an advantageous section. By changing the lighting start mode of the display segment N8, it is possible to improve the effect of the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) while ensuring the notification function of whether or not the section is advantageous.

By making the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 different depending on the content of the advantageous section, the player can shift to the advantageous section by starting the lighting of the eighth display segment N8. It is possible not only to grasp that the winner has been won, but also to predict the contents thereof, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of attention when the eighth display segment N8 is lit.

In particular, since the lighting start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the content of the advantageous section, the lighting start mode and the content of the advantageous section do not have a one-to-one relationship, and the player is assumed to have a one-to-one relationship. Even if the lighting is started in an unfavorable manner for the player, the game can be advanced while maintaining the expectation for the mode to be shifted to after that.

Moreover, on the premise of a configuration in which the eighth display segment N8 is started to be lit by the next game of the start game, the challenge mode or attack mode is notified (challenge) to shift after the eighth display segment N8 is started to be lit. Since the mode start notification effect, attack mode winning notification effect, etc.) are configured to occur several games after the precursor mode, the content of the advantageous section is predicted at the start of lighting, and the predicted content is correct during the precursor mode. It is possible to make the eighth display segment N8 a so-called definite notification, and to perform a game that predicts the content even after the definite notification, such as to entertain the feeling of excitement.

Further, as described above, since the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting by the next game of the starting game, the end of the lighting start timing is predetermined. In such an effect in which the end of occurrence is determined, the content of the advantageous section when the lighting starts is performed in the eighth display segment N8 before the end of the occurrence, so that the content of the advantageous section can be changed. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the effect of notification. That is, in the first place, for a player who is interested in whether or not he / she has won the transition lottery to the advantageous section, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is started to be displayed is of great interest, and moreover. Since the end of the display start timing is set, it can be said that the timings at which the player should be interested in the eighth display segment N8 are aggregated. Based on such a premise, if the content notification of the advantageous section is performed in the eighth display segment N8, it is overwhelming as compared with the content notification of the advantageous section performed by other timings or other display means. It is possible to make a notification that attracts a certain degree of attention.

Since the eighth display segment N8 is configured to be lit mainly when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, there is a sense of expectation that the eighth display segment N8 will be lit in a game that may be lit (a game at the time of winning a specific role). However, it is possible to perform a stop operation, and it is possible to enhance the impression that the light is turned on by one's own operation, as compared with a configuration in which the light is turned on regardless of the player's operation.

Further, since the structure is such that the lights can be turned on based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to make the operated reel determine whether or not the lights are turned on from the relationship with the stop result. Specifically, for example, when a strong cherry or a weak cherry is won, the transition lottery to the challenge mode or the attack mode can be won, while the winning probability of the transition lottery differs between the strong cherry and the weak cherry, and the strong cherry. Has a higher probability of winning than weak cherries. Therefore, it is considered that the player will operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while expecting that the lottery result of this game is not a weak cherry but a strong cherry, and the eighth display segment N8. It is possible to perform the stop operation while predicting whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry in relation to the lighting timing of.

<Modification example 1>
In the first embodiment, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery according to the content of the advantageous section, and even if the display start mode is started in any of the display start modes, a challenge is taken. Although the configuration may be a mode, an attack mode, or a super attack mode, the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. Further, there may be a configuration in which there are a display start mode that is associated one-to-one and a display start mode that is not associated (any mode is possible).

For example, FIG. 68A shows an example of a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis. That is, in this example, when the content of the advantageous section of this time is the challenge mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the first reel, and the advantageous section of this time When the content is in attack mode, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of the second reel, and when the content of this advantageous section is in super attack mode, the third reel The eighth display segment N8 starts lighting based on the stop operation of. By doing so, it is possible to clearly grasp the contents of the advantageous section this time based on the lighting start mode. In particular, the eighth display segment N8 is smaller than other notification units such as the auxiliary display unit 65 and is easily recognized only by the player playing the game, depending on the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. It is highly possible that only the player who is playing the gaming machine can grasp the contents of the advantageous section. Then, for example, the player who grasps that the super attack mode is set by the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is immersed in the superiority complex of knowing the information unknown to other players, and the subsequent supermarket. It is also possible to wait for the attack mode winning notification effect.

Further, also in this example, the interval shifts to an advantageous section in which the stop operation of the second reel is more advantageous than the stop operation of the first reel, and the stop operation of the third reel is performed rather than the stop operation of the second reel. Is set to be more advantageous when the display is started at the time of the rear operation, such as shifting to an advantageous section where is more advantageous. By doing this, a game that enjoys the balance between the desire to start displaying early and confirm the transition to the advantageous section and the desire to start displaying on the rear side and shift to the advantageous section. Can realize sex. For example, if you stop the 1st reel and the 2nd reel and predict / understand that you will win a role (for example, the middle bell role) that you can expect in the super attack mode from the stop result, the 1st reel Or, you will operate while hoping that the display will not start when the stop OFF operation of the 2nd reel is performed, and even in the challenge mode when the 1st reel is stopped, the winning combination is unlikely to be won (for example, the weak cherry role). If the above is predicted / grasped, it is considered that the operation is performed while hoping that the display is started when the stop / OFF operation of the first reel is performed. That is, even in a configuration in which the display start mode and the content of the advantageous section are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, the stop can be stopped by setting the ratio of the selection rate between the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation as described above. It is possible to entertain whether or not the display is started in relation to the outcome.

FIG. 68 (b) shows a display start mode table in which the contents of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, and some are not associated with each other. An example is shown. In this example, in addition to associating the stop operation of each reel with the contents of the advantageous section in the table of FIG. 68A, the eighth display segment N8 may start to be displayed even at the end of payout. At the end of the payout, it can be selected regardless of the content of the advantageous section. By doing so, when the stop operation up to the second reel is completed, it is determined that either the super attack mode is won or the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is not selected. Compared with the example of, you can enjoy the feeling of excitement until the end.

<Modification 2>
In the present embodiment, as the game state (game situation), a specific state (specific situation) that affects the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is provided. In this modification, the specific state does not change the normal game state and the lottery table like each RT state and bonus state, and does not change the performance related to push order notification like the challenge mode and attack mode. Although there is no difference in the degree of advantage for the player depending on whether or not it is in a specific state, the display start mode table when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won differs depending on whether or not it is in a specific state.

FIG. 69A shows a part of the lottery process (FIG. 16) in this modified example. That is, in this modification, the priority setting process is performed in step S315, the specific state process is performed in step S2901, and then the section display first process in step S316 is executed.

In the specific state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69B, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed (lighted). If it is being displayed (lit), the process for the specific state is terminated as it is. If it is not displayed (turned off), it is determined in step S3002 whether or not the game result of the current game is a specific winning combination as a result of the current lottery process. If the specific winning combination is not won, the processing for the specific state is terminated as it is. If the specific combination is won, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The specific state flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp whether or not it is in a specific state. If the specific state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3004, and it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the player has won the transition lottery for the advantageous section in this game. If it is won, the processing for the specific state is terminated as it is. If the player has not won, the process proceeds to step S3005 to execute the specific state lottery process. The specific state lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to shift to a specific state by lottery. For example, a lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105 and a lottery is performed from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. Get the counter for. In this case, the winning probability of the transition lottery may be different depending on the type of the specific role. For example, as in the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the strong cherry has a higher winning probability than the weak cherry. Alternatively, the probability of winning may be higher for weak cherries than for strong cherries. The opposite relationship with the ease of winning the transition lottery to challenge mode etc. (The easier it is to win the transition lottery to challenge mode etc., the harder it is to win the transition lottery to a specific state, and the more you win the transition lottery to challenge mode etc. By making it easier to win the transition lottery to a specific state), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the role that is difficult to win the transition lottery to the challenge mode or the like.

After performing the specific state lottery process in step S3005, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the result of step S3005 is the winning result. If it is not won, the process for the specific state is terminated as it is, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S3007. In step S3007, a process of inputting "3" as a predetermined value to the state counter K provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The state counter K is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the continuation condition in the specific state, and is subtracted by 1 each time the specific combination is won. In the following step S3008, the specific state flag is set, and then the process for the specific state is terminated. By setting the specific state flag in step S3008, it is possible to make an affirmative determination in step S3003.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the specific state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, as in step S3004, it is determined whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set, and whether or not the player has won the transition lottery for the advantageous section in this game. Is determined. If the transition lottery has not been won, the state counter K is subtracted by 1 in step S3010, and it is determined in step S3011 whether or not the state counter K has become 0. If the state counter K is not 0, the specific state process is terminated as it is, and if the state counter K is 0, the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012 and then the specific state process is terminated. To do. If it is determined in step S3009 that the transition lottery for the advantageous section has been won, the state counter K is cleared to 0 in step S3013, and then the specific state flag is cleared in step S3012 to clear the specific state. End the processing.

As described above, in this modification, the specific state shifts in a part of the case where the game in which the specific combination is won in the normal section does not win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and then becomes the specific combination. The game continues until the number of games that have been won and have not been won in the transition lottery to the advantageous section occurs three times as a predetermined number of times. That is, the specific state is a state in which a player shifts based on an event that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section.

In the section display first process in this modification, in the display start mode lottery process (step S2703), a display start mode table that differs depending on whether or not it is in a specific state is acquired. That is, when it is not in a specific state, the display start mode table shown in FIG. 64 or the like is acquired and a lottery for the display start mode is performed, while when it is in a specific state, the display start mode table for the specific state shown in FIG. 70 is acquired. Then, a lottery for the display start mode is performed. The display start mode table for the specific state is different from the display start mode table for the normal time (for the state that is not the specific state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the selection rate of the display start mode differs not only depending on the content of the advantageous section but also on the set value that changes the increase / decrease rate of medals.

For example, when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode is won, the operation of the start lever 41, the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the end of payout are selected. However, the selection rate of each timing depends on the set value. Specifically, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is set 2, setting 4 and setting 6 rather than setting 1, setting 3 and setting 5. Is higher, and even-numbered settings are easier to select than odd-numbered settings. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated and then the challenge mode is entered, there is a high possibility that the set value of the gaming machine is an even number setting rather than an odd number setting. Further, when the challenge mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at the end of payout is higher in setting 5 than in setting 4, higher in setting 6 than in setting 5, and in setting 3 or less. It is 0. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of payout and then shifts to the challenge mode, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher. Further, when the challenge mode is won, the stop / OFF operation of the third reel is not selected in the setting 1. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 2 or higher.

On the other hand, when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the operation of the start lever 41, the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the end of payout are selected. , The selection rate of each timing differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the attack mode is won, the probability that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started when the start lever 41 is operated is set 1, setting 3, and setting 5 rather than setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6. Is higher, and odd-numbered settings are easier to select than even-numbered settings. That is, it is set to have the opposite relationship to the case of the challenge mode, and when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the start lever 41 is operated and then shifts to the attack mode, the set value of this gaming machine is set. Is more likely to be an odd number setting than an even number setting, and when the challenge mode is entered, the setting value of this gaming machine is more likely to be an even number setting than an even number setting. Further, when the attack mode is won, the end of payout is not selected in setting 1. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of payout, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher as described above, but when the attack mode is entered, the setting 2 is set. It is confirmed that the above is the case. Therefore, on the premise that a high set value is preferable for the player, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up at the end of payout, it is preferable for the player to shift to the challenge mode rather than the attack mode. The advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the preference for the player are reversed. Further, when the challenge mode is won, the stop / OFF operation of the third reel is not selected when the setting is 3 or less. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or higher. That is, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, and then the challenge mode is entered, the setting 2 or higher is confirmed as described above, but the attack mode is entered. If so, it is confirmed that the setting is 4 or more. Therefore, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up when the third reel is stopped and turned off, it is preferable for the player to shift to the attack mode rather than the challenge mode, and the advantage of the content of the advantageous section and the player's advantage. The taste matches.

In the display start mode table for the specific state, when the lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won, the time when the payout ends is selected regardless of the set value. That is, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in a specific state, if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started at a timing before the end of the payout, some set value can be estimated and the payout ends. Even at that time, if the advantageous section to be shifted is the challenge mode or the attack mode, the set value can be estimated, but if the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting at the end of the payout and is in the super attack mode. , The set value cannot be guessed. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playful by utilizing the desire to shift from the advantage of the super attack mode to the super attack mode and the desire to guess the setting.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8, a plurality of display start modes having different elapsed times from the event that triggers the start are set.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the display start mode table in this modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts lighting after the stop ON operation of the third reel or at the end of payout regardless of the content of the advantageous section. .. Then, the elapsed time from the stop ON operation of the third reel is set to be different after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel (that is, at the time of the stop ON operation of the third reel). Each of 5 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel can be set. For example, when the challenge mode is won, 5 seconds after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel is most likely to be selected, and when the attack mode is won, 10 seconds after the stop ON operation of the 3rd reel is most likely to be selected, and the super attack mode is won. At times, it is most likely to be selected 15 seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel. That is, the later the lighting timing of the eighth display segment N8 is delayed from the stop ON operation of the third reel, the more advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section for the player.

In the section display first process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, the same processes as those in steps S2701 to S2703 are performed in steps S3101 to S3103. However, in the lottery process of step S3103, the lottery is performed based on the display start mode table of FIG. 71. In step S3104, a process of storing the display start timing according to the lottery result is performed based on the process result of step S3103. In this case, for example, a flag that can determine the determined display start timing (that is, how many seconds after the stop ON operation of the third reel or at the end of payout) is set, and the display is started ex post facto by such a flag. The timing can be determined. In step S3105, a process of setting the display start game flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The display start game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started in this game.

After executing the process of step S3105, the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is started in step S3106, and then the section display first process is ended. The process of step S3106 is the same as the process of step S2705. If it is determined in step S3101 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the display continuation process is performed in step S3107, and then the section display first process is terminated. The process of step S3107 is the same as the process of step S2706.

In the reel control process (FIG. 18) in this modification, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), after determining that all reels have stopped in step S411, the section display third process is performed in step S3201. After the processing of step S3201, the payout determination processing is performed in step S413, the winning result corresponding processing is performed in step S414, the section display second processing is performed in step S415, and the winning result command is performed in step S416. Is set, and then the reel control process ends. The processing of steps S413 to S416 is as described above.

The section display third process of step S3201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73 (b).

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the display start game flag is set. As described above, the display start game flag is a flag set in the section display first process. If it is not set, the third process of displaying this section is terminated as it is. If it is set, the process of clearing the display start game flag is performed in step S3302. Then, in step S3303, the freeze setting process is performed. The freeze setting process is a process for generating a process based on an operation by the player or a so-called freeze effect that temporarily limits the progress of the game when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on in this modification.

Specifically, in step S3303, any one of 1 sec, 6 sec, 11 sec, and 16 sec is set as the freeze period. Here, the timing at which the section display third process is performed is the timing at which all the reels have stopped, and the timing at which the stop ON operation of the third reel has been performed. Then, the freeze period set in step S3303 is a period in which 1 sec is added as a predetermined period to each period when the eighth display segment N8 is displayed after the stop ON operation of the third reel in this modification. It is 0 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 5 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, 10 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, and 15 sec + 1 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, respectively. In step S3303, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 this time is grasped, and the freeze period is set according to the grasped start mode. That is, if the start mode is 0 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is 1 sec, if it is 5 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the freeze period is 6 sec, and 10 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel. If so, the freeze period is set to 11 sec, and if it is 15 sec after the stop ON operation of the third reel is performed, the freeze period is set to 16 sec. Further, if the current start mode is the end of payout, 16 sec, which is the longest freeze period in the case of the start mode after the stop operation of the third reel, is set as the current freeze period. To set the freeze period, for example, a value corresponding to the length of the freeze period is input to the timer counter that is updated (subtracted) at a predetermined cycle, and the update of the timer counter is started. It is assumed that the freeze state continues until the timer counter reaches the initial value (0), and the CPU 102 determines whether or not to proceed to the next process (payout determination process in step S413) with reference to the value of the timer counter. That is, the timer counter waits in the section display third process until it reaches the initial value.

After the process of step S3304 is performed, the process of setting the display start timing is performed in step S3305. That is, based on the display start timing information that can be determined ex post facto in step S3104 of the first section display process, a process of synchronizing with the freeze period information set in step S3305 is performed. Specifically, when 0 sec is set as the display start timing after the stop ON operation of the third reel, the display start segment N8 is set to start 0 sec after the freeze start, and the display start timing is set. If 5 sec is set after the stop ON operation, the 8th display segment N8 is set to start displaying 5 sec after the start of freeze, and if 10 sec after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, the freeze is set. If the display start of the 8th display segment N8 is set to start 10 seconds after the start and 15 sec after the stop ON operation is set as the display start timing, the 8th display segment N8 starts to be displayed 15 seconds after the freeze starts. Set to be done. If the display start timing is set at the end of payout, the eighth display segment N8 is set to start displaying at the end of payout after the end of the current freeze period. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the display should be started at the end of the payout is set, and whether or not the display should be started during the freeze period is determined by determining the presence or absence of such a flag, and whether the display should be started at the end of the payout. It is preferable to have a configuration for determining whether or not.

After performing the process of step S3305, the display start command is output to the display control device 81, which is the control device on the sub side, in step S3306, and then the section display third process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the display start command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the freeze effect (for example, blackout effect) according to the freeze period is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, and has a corresponding effect. The speaker 64 is controlled so that a sound (for example, a “push” sound as if the machine is broken) is emitted. In this case, the freeze effect and its sound effect may be different depending on the length of the freeze period.

In this modification, the relationship between the timing at which the eighth display segment N8 is started to be displayed and the content of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 74.

FIG. 74A shows a case where 6 sec is set as a freeze period in which the operation by the player or the process based on the operation is invalidated. When the third reel stops at the timing of ta1 and freezes over the period from there to the timing of ta3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of ta3. .. In this case, the period TB1 from the start of freezing to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 5 sec, and the period from the start of display at the timing of ta2 to the release of the freeze at the timing of ta3. Is 1 sec. When the freeze is released at the timing of ta3, the medal is paid out and the medal payout process is performed for the period TA up to the timing of ta4. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be in challenge mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of ta4, the operation of the next game (bet operation) is allowed.

FIG. 74B shows a case where the freeze period is set to 11 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tb1 and freezes over the period from there to the timing of tb3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tb2 slightly earlier than the timing of tb3. .. In this case, the period TB2 from the start of freezing to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 10 sec, which is longer than the case of FIG. 74 (a) above, but after the display is started at the timing of tb2. The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tb3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74 (a) above. When the freeze is released at the timing of tb3, the medal is paid out and the medal payout process is performed for the period TA until the timing of tb4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIG. 74 (a), the length of the medal payout process is also the same, and the period TA from tb3 to tb4 is the same length as in the case of FIG. 74 (a). .. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be in attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tb4, the operation of the next game (bet operation) is allowed. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (b), the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is later than that in the case of FIG. 74 (a).

FIG. 74 (c) shows a case where the freeze period is set to 16 sec. When the third reel stops at the timing of tk1 and freezes over the period from that to the timing of tk3, the eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tk2, which is slightly earlier than the timing of tk3. .. In this case, the period TB3 from the start of freezing to the eighth display segment N8 in the freeze period is 15 sec, which is longer than the case of FIG. 74 (b) above, but after the display is started at the timing of tc2. The period until the freeze is released at the timing of tk3 is 1 sec, which is the same length as in the cases of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). When the freeze is released at the timing of tk3, the medal is paid out and the medal payout process is performed for the period TA until the timing of tk4. If the winning result of the game is the same as in the case of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b), the length of the period TA is the same as in the case of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). Is. In this case, the advantageous section to be started is likely to be in super attack mode. When the medal payout process is completed at the timing of tk4, the operation of the next game (bet operation) is allowed. That is, in the case of FIG. 74 (c), the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is later than in the case of FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

As described above, in the start game for starting the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display, the start timing is set by setting the freeze state (freeze period, invalid period) that limits the progress processing of the game. In the display start effect of the eighth display segment N8 whose final stage is determined, it is possible to secure a period for performing the display start effect and diversify the display start effect.

Moreover, by associating the length of the period of the frozen state with the content of the advantageous section, it is possible not only to cause the frozen state but also to be interested in the length of the period. It becomes.

In particular, by associating the period from the start of the frozen state to the display start timing of the eighth display segment N8 with the content of the advantageous section, interest in the eighth display segment N8 after the frozen state is reached. It will be overwhelmingly enhanced, and it is possible to expect a great effect of the effect, even though it is a simple effect such as simply switching the eighth display segment N8 from the off state to the on state.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the freeze state occurs during reel rotation, not after all reels are stopped.

That is, for example, when 6 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the period from the timing of ta 5 when any reel is rotating to ta 7 which is 6 sec later becomes the frozen state. For example, even if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop the rotating reel, the stop drive control is not executed. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of ta6, which is slightly earlier than that of ta7. That is, the display of the section indicator is started after the TA1 period (5 sec) elapses after the freeze state is entered. All reels are stopped at the timing of ta8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of ta9 to ta10, and the operation of the next game is allowed at the timing of ta10.

When 11 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the period from the timing of tb 5 when any reel is rotating to tb 7 which is 11 sec later is in the freeze state. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tb6, which is slightly earlier than tb7. That is, the display of the section indicator is started after the TA2 period (10 sec) has elapsed from the frozen state. All reels are stopped at the timing of tb8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of tb9 to tb10, and the operation of the next game is allowed at the timing of tb10.

When 16 sec is set as the freeze period, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the period from the timing of tk5 in which any reel is rotating to tk7, which is 16 sec later, is in the freeze state, for example, the player. Does not execute stop drive control even if an attempt is made to stop the rotating reel by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. The eighth display segment N8 is lit and displayed at the timing of tc6, which is slightly earlier than that of tc7. That is, the display of the section indicator is started after the TA3 period (15 sec) elapses after the freeze state is entered. All reels are stopped at the timing of ct8, the medal payout process is performed at the timing of ct9 to ct10, and the operation of the next game is allowed at the timing of ct10.

As described above, the period of the freeze state in the start game can be set at any timing as long as the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is associated with the content of the advantageous section.

In particular, by configuring the configuration in which the player's operation (stop operation in the above example) is restricted by being in the frozen state, the player can be in the frozen state by restricting the operation. It can be recognized. Then, the start timing of the freeze state becomes difficult to understand as compared with the freeze state in which the execution of the process unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side such as the payout process is restricted as in the modified example 3. Therefore, since the start timing becomes difficult to understand, the length of the frozen state also becomes difficult to understand, and even if the set length of the frozen state is unfavorable for the player, the section while maintaining a sense of expectation. It is possible to enjoy suggesting the contents of the advantageous section by starting the display on the display.

Further, by setting the frozen state in which the player's operation is restricted as described above, it becomes difficult to understand the end of the frozen state. That is, as described above, when a freeze state is generated during the rotation of the reel, it is necessary to stop the rotating reel by the operation of the player after the freeze state is released. From the viewpoint that the timing of the stop operation depends on the player, in the case of a configuration in which a freeze state occurs during reel rotation, the timing at which the operation of the next game is allowed is not only the length of the freeze state but also the game. The operation timing of the person will also affect. By doing the above, it is possible to enjoy the content notification of the advantageous section while giving a feeling of expectation beyond the set length of the frozen state, and also to set the end of the display start timing by the section display. It is also possible to bring about the merit of delaying.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed at a timing different from that during the freeze period. That is, in this modification, the eighth display segment N8 is configured to start displaying at the end of payout, a freeze state is generated in the start game, and the length of the freeze period is associated with the content of the advantageous section. I am trying to do it.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the challenge mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (6 sec, TC1) from ta11 to ta12. The reel stops at the timing of ta13, and the medal payout process is performed during the period (TA) from ta14 to ta15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of ta15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (11 sec, TC2) from tb11 to tb12. The reel stops at the timing of tb13, and the medal payout process is performed during the period (TA) from tb14 to tb15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of tb15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), when the super attack mode is won, a freeze state occurs over a period (16 sec, TC 3) from tk11 to tk12. The reel stops at the timing of ct13, and the medal payout process is performed during the period (TA) from ct14 to tk15. When the payout of medals is completed at the timing of tk15, the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started.

In this way, even if the display of the section indicator is not started during the frozen state, the length of the period in which the frozen state is set may be associated with the content of the advantageous section, which is advantageous from the length of the frozen state. It is also possible to play a game that predicts the contents of the section. By doing so, the degree of freedom in the timing of generating the freeze state can be overwhelmingly improved.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, the mode of the section indicator is different. FIG. 77 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this modified example.

In this modification, the ninth display unit N9 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a section display. Specifically, in the game panel 25 on the front side of the gaming machine, a ninth display unit N9 is provided next to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R (to the left of the display window 26L in front view). The ninth display unit N9 is a light emitting unit whose front panel is formed of a resin member having light transmission, and the front panel is integrally formed with the game panel 25. In the ninth display unit N9, an LED (not shown) is arranged behind the front panel. Then, the LED is connected to the main control device 101, and the LED is controlled to emit light by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The LED can emit light in a plurality of colors, for example, it can emit light in four colors of blue, green, red, and white. Although the eighth display segment N8 is provided in this modification as well, the ninth display unit N9 may be provided as a substitute for the eighth display segment N8.

By the way, when the LED of the 9th display unit N9 is controlled to emit light, the brightness and the illuminance toward the front of the game machine are the brightness of the peripheral display unit and the illuminance toward the front of the game machine (for example, the back of the game panel 25). Light is emitted so as to be higher than the brightness or illuminance of the light or the brightness or illuminance of the auxiliary display unit 65). Therefore, when the ninth display unit N9 is controlled to emit light, it becomes more noticeable than the peripheral display units, and the player is prevented from overlooking.

In addition, each emission color in the ninth display unit N9 is set to a color that is easily conspicuous in relation to other display units (game panel 25, etc.), regardless of which color is emitted. , The function as a section indicator that clearly indicates that it is an advantageous section is guaranteed.

FIG. 78 shows a display start mode table in this modification.

In this modification, among the display start modes of the ninth display unit N9 as the section display, the display start timing is unified at the end of payout in the start game. On the other hand, in the display start mode, the emission color of the LED of the ninth display unit N9 is changed according to the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, in the case of winning the challenge mode, blue is easily selected from blue, green, and red, in the case of winning the attack mode, green is easily selected, and in the case of winning the super attack mode, red is selected. Easy to do. Therefore, when the ninth display unit N9 is started to be displayed in the start game, the content of the advantageous section in which the emission color is elected in the order of red, green, and blue tends to be advantageous. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the section display and improve the degree of attention to the section display.

The ninth display unit N9 as a section display emits light in any of red, green, and blue colors depending on the content of the advantageous section at the start of display, but from the next game of the start game, that is, In the advantageous section, the emission color is unified to white. That is, the game of predicting the content of the advantageous section from the display color of the ninth display unit N9 is limited to the start game, and the timing to be watched is centralized, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced.

Further, as described above, any of the emission colors to be emitted at the start of display is set to be a color that is more conspicuous than the emission by white in the advantageous section. From such a viewpoint as well, it is possible to facilitate high interest in the display color at the start of display of the ninth display unit N9.

As described above, in suggesting the content of the advantageous section by making the start mode of the section display different, the difference in the start mode is not limited to the difference in the display start timing, and the section display at the time of display start is used. It may be configured to suggest the content of the advantageous section from the difference in the production content (color).

In particular, in each emission color, regardless of which emission color is emitted, the configuration is such that it is easily conspicuous (easy to recognize) in relation to other display units, so that the lighting state is normally achieved during the advantageous section. Even if the section display has a relatively low effect element, that is, the light is turned off during the section, it is possible to expect the effect element while ensuring the function of clearly indicating the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, in the configuration in which the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is different, the display start mode is changed according to the game result that triggered the transition lottery to the advantageous section. FIG. 79 shows an example of the display start mode table in this modified example.

For example, in FIG. 79 (a), the game result that triggered the transition lottery to the advantageous section, that is, the game result in the game in which the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set is a strong cherry. The display start mode table when there is is shown. That is, when the challenge mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected as the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8. Further, when the attack mode is won based on the strong cherry winning, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected.

On the other hand, when the game result that triggered the lottery to shift to the advantageous section is a weak cherry, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the challenge mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed. When selected and the attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is selected, and when the super attack mode is won, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected.

For strong watermelon and weak watermelon, the display start mode is determined by the common display start mode table. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), in the challenge mode, the stop ON operation of the third reel is selected, and in the attack mode, the stop OFF operation of the third reel is selected, and the super attack mode is selected. If so, the end of payout is selected.

For other specific combinations, the display start mode is determined by the display start mode table of FIG. 79 (d). In this case, in the challenge mode, the operation of the start lever 41 is selected, in the attack mode, the stop / OFF operation of the first reel is selected, and in the super attack mode, the end of payout is selected.

With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a game such as predicting whether or not there is a transition to an advantageous section and the content of the advantageous section when shifting from the game result and the display start mode of the section display. Can be done. Specifically, for example, when the "cherry" symbol stops at the lower or upper stage of the left reel 32L, the result of this game is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. In this case, if the left reel 32L is stopped first and the left reel 32L is the first reel, when the left reel 32L is stopped and the eighth display segment N8 lights up, the challenge mode or super attack It is confirmed that you have won the lottery to shift to the mode. In other words, it is determined that you are not in attack mode. Whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry can be determined by stopping the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and the "cherry" symbol is aligned with the effective line of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R and stopped, and the triple cherry. If it becomes, it becomes a strong cherry, and if it does not stop all together, it becomes a weak cherry. For example, if the second reel or the third reel is stopped and it is determined that the cherry is weak, the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the stop OFF operation of the first reel. , It is confirmed that the content of this advantageous section is the super attack mode. On the other hand, when the second reel and the third reel are stopped and it is determined that the cherry is a strong cherry, in this case, it is determined that the content of the advantageous section is the challenge mode. In other words, from the viewpoint of winning probability in challenge mode, attack mode, etc., it can be said that strong cherries are preferable to weak cherries for players, while in the above situation, weak cherries are more preferable to strong cherries. The image of the game result is reversed.

Further, when the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L and the eighth display segment N8 does not light up, the strong cherry wins and the challenge mode or the attack mode wins, the weak cherry wins and the attack mode or the super attack mode. Winning, strong cherry or weak cherry winning and non-winning in the lottery to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, when the eighth display segment N8 lights up during the stop-off operation of the second reel, it is determined that the advantageous section of this time is the attack mode regardless of whether it is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. On the other hand, if the eighth display segment N8 does not light up when the second reel is stopped and turned off, the strong cherry wins and the challenge mode wins, the weak cherry wins and the super attack mode wins, the strong cherry or the weak cherry wins, and the advantageous section is entered. Either the transition lottery will not be won. When it is possible to distinguish between a strong cherry and a weak cherry from the stop roll of the second reel, if it is determined to be a strong cherry, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has not been won, or the challenge mode has been won. It will be either. However, in the case of a strong cherry, there is a high possibility of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section in the first place, and in this case, the possibility of winning the challenge mode is high. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a weak cherry, either the player has not won the lottery to move to the advantageous section or has won the super attack mode, which is the most different advantage for the player. It becomes a situation. However, in the case of a weak cherry, it is unlikely that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section will be won in the first place, and in this case, it is highly possible that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has not been won.

In this way, by associating the game result, that is, the stop result with the display start mode of the section indicator, the winning combination can be narrowed down as the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. From the relationship with the game playability of 10, it is possible to perform a game such as predicting the content of an advantageous section.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, in a predetermined replay of the replay (replay result), a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode is performed. FIG. 80A shows a part of the winning / failing lottery table for the normal game state and the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modified example, in the winning / failing lottery table in the normal game state and the first RT state, as a kind of replay combination, a prize is established by winning with an index value IV = 53 and winning the first re-game or the seventh re-game. The winning replay role to be played is set. The winning replay combination has the same winning probability regardless of the set value, and specifically, the winning replay combination is won with a probability of about 1/32000. As described above, when the winning replay role is won, the replay is granted and the next game can be played without the need to insert a new medal.

In this modification, the winning replay role is treated as a specific role in the same way as the strong cherry role. Therefore, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), if the winning replay combination is won, an affirmative determination is made as a specific combination winning, and the process proceeds to the first specific combination process (step S705) and the like. Then, in the first specific combination processing in this modified example, a transition lottery for the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode based on the winning replay combination is also performed.

The winning probabilities of the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, and super attack mode based on the winning replay are the same regardless of the set value. Specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to challenge mode is 0% regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to attack mode is 50% regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the transition lottery to is 50% regardless of the set value. That is, in the normal game state or the first RT state, when the winning replay is won while the display mode is the normal mode, the attack mode or the super attack mode is won, and the ratio is 1: 1. In this modified example, if the winning replay is won during the challenge mode, the super attack mode is won with a 100% probability.

As described above, when the winning replay combination is won, the replay is given as in the case of other replay combinations. However, the configuration of the bet processing when granting the replay is different from that of other replay combinations. FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the start waiting process in this modification. The start waiting process is a process started in step S204 in the normal process (FIG. 15), and is mainly a process for setting (bet) the number of bets in the game.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the previous game was one of the replay prizes. If the replay is won, the processes of steps S3402 to S3404 for granting the replay are performed. In this case, in this modification, in step S3402, it is determined whether or not the replay that won the prize in the previous game was a winning replay. If it is not a winning replay, automatic betting processing is performed in step S3403. The automatic bet process is a process of determining the number of bets in the previous game and setting the same number of bets as the number of bets. For example, if the previous game was a 3-bet, step S3403 performs a process of setting a 3-bet. If the previous game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3403. After executing the process of step S3403, the start waiting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3402 that the previous game was a winning replay winning combination, the operation bet flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S3404. The operation bet flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current game is a game to which the replay is given and that the replay is not yet given. In this modified example, when the operation bet flag is set, the bet number of the previous game is temporarily stored in a register or the like, but a different operation bet flag is set according to the bet number of the previous game. It may be provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or after the process of step S3404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, it is determined whether or not the betting operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been operated. If it is not operated, it waits as it is, and when any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, a positive determination is made in step S3405. If a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 while waiting in step S3405, betting processing is performed based on the medal insertion, but the description of the configuration will be omitted.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406 to determine whether or not the above-mentioned operation bet flag is set. If the bet flag is not set at the time of operation, in step S3407, a number of bets are processed according to the operated credit insertion switch (bet switch). That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a 3-bet is set, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, a 1-bet is set, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is operated. In that case, set 2 bets. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3406 that the bet flag at the time of operation is set, in step S3408, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game is set as the replay. For example, if the previous game is 3 bets, 3 bets are set in step S3408, and if the game is 1 bet, 1 bet is set in step S3408. After executing the process of step S3408, the operation bet flag is cleared in step S3409. Then, after executing the process of step S3407 or step S3409, the start waiting process is terminated.

As described above, the winning replay and the other replays have different bet processing configurations when the replay is granted. For other replays, the same number of bets as the number of bets in the previous game is automatically set, and for the winning replay, the number of bets in the previous game and the number of bets in the previous game are triggered by the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58. The same number of bets are set. If the previous game is not a replay prize, the automatic bet processing is not performed, and one of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated to advance this game. If the winning replay is won, the credit insertion switch is used. From the viewpoint of the presence or absence of the operations of 56 to 58, the operation for advancing the game is common to the case of the game result other than the replay.

FIG. 81 shows the section display first processing in this modification.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether or not any of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If neither of the winning flags is set, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, the winning opportunity of the winning flag, which was determined to be affirmative in step S3502, is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific combination that triggered the winning of the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is the winning replay. As described above, since the challenge mode is not won in the winning replay, the case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3503 is the case where the attack mode winning flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 is determined by lottery in steps S3504 and S3505, and a process for setting the display start mode is performed. The processes of steps S3504 and S3505 are the same as the processes of steps S2703 and S2704.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3503 that the winning opportunity is the winning replay, in step S3506, the display start mode of the eighth display segment N8 this time is set at the time of betting operation in the next game.

After the processing of step S3505 or step S3506 is performed, the measurement start processing of the advantageous section game number AG is performed in step S3507, and then the section display first processing is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the section display first process is terminated after the section display is continued in step S3508. The processing of step S3507 and step S3508 is the same as the processing of step S2705 and step S2706.

The difference in the final timing at which the display of the section display is started due to the difference in the winning opportunity of the advantageous section will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 82.

FIG. 82A shows a case where the winning opportunity of the advantageous section is a specific combination other than the winning replay. All reels stop at the timing of ta16, and medals are paid out at the timing of ta17 to ta18. Then, when the medal payout of this game (starting game) is completed at the timing of ta18 and the betting operation of the next game becomes effective at the timing of ta19, the timing of the ta19 is the timing at which the section display is displayed. Of these, it is the latest timing.

In this way, the section display is configured to be displayed before the operation of the next game is allowed in the start game, so that it is before the determination of whether or not to execute the next game is performed. In other words, when deciding whether or not to end the game at the end of the start game, the display of the section indicator has started, and despite winning the advantageous section, It is deterred to end the game. As already described, in the display start mode table of the section display, the display start mode that is the latest timing among the set display start modes is at the end of the payout of ta18.

The betting operation becomes effective at the timing of ta19. For example, when the betting operation is performed by the timing of ta20, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts based on the start operation of the timing of ta21 (operation of the start lever 41). Will be done.

On the other hand, when the previous game is a winning replay, the latest timing of displaying the section indicator is different as shown in FIG. 82 (b). Specifically, when the reels stop at the timing of tb16, the replay is given instead of the medals not being paid out. However, since this replay is a winning replay, the bet flag at the time of operation is set in the start waiting process (FIG. 80 (b)) in the normal process, and the replay is given by the bet operation instead of the automatic bet. ..

In this case, if the bet operation is performed at the timing of tb18 between the time when the bet operation becomes effective at the timing of tb17 and the timing of tb19 which is the valid period, the replay is given and the number of bets in the previous game is given. The same number of bets as the above are set, and the display of the section indicator is started. Then, when the start operation is performed at the timing of tb20, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started.

In this way, when the display of the section indicator is started based on the winning replay, the display of the section indicator is started at the time of betting operation after winning the winning replay. Here, the betting operation after the winning replay winning is an operation for obtaining the replay obtained in the starting game, and can be said to be an operation accompanying the starting game. That is, even with the above configuration, the effect of displaying the section indicator in the start game is guaranteed.

Further, if the betting operation after winning the winning replay is an operation accompanying the starting game won in the winning replay as described above, the next game of the starting game is performed from the operation of the start lever 41. Then, when the display of the section display is started based on the winning replay, the latest timing of the display start timing is the timing of tb20, which is the start operation of the next game.

As described above, when a small combination (specific combination, payout combination) other than the replay is the winning opportunity of the advantageous section, the section indicator is started to be displayed by the bet operation of the next game, and the predetermined replay (winning replay) is performed. When the advantageous section is won, the section indicator is configured to start displaying by the time the start lever 41 of the next game is operated. In this way, by making the final timing for starting the display of the section display different, it is possible to greatly diversify the display start mode of the section display.

Moreover, in the case of a winning replay, the betting operation is triggered by the granting of a replay based on the winning replay. That is, it is possible to postpone the start game by assuming that the game won in the winning replay continues until the player operates the bet.

Then, when the winning replay is the winning opportunity of the advantageous section, the section indicator is displayed based on the betting operation that triggers the granting of the replay. Normally (if other small wins, etc. are the winning triggers), assuming that the display of the section indicator is started before the betting operation, it will be the trigger for granting the replay based on the winning replay. It is considered that the bet operation is a situation in which the display of the section display has not already started, and if the display of the section display is started in such a situation, the player can be surprised, which is a great deal. It is possible to exert a great effect.

The stop result of the above-mentioned winning replay may be as follows. Specifically, when the combination of symbols set as the winning mode of the winning replay stops on the valid line, a small winning combination with other medal payouts (particularly a specific winning combination that triggers a lottery to shift to an advantageous section, for example, Make sure that the combination of symbols set as the winning mode of (strong watermelon) stops on a line different from the effective line. By doing so, it is possible to expect an effect that makes it seem as if a small winning combination with the other medal payout has been established, and the section display has not started to be displayed by the time of betting operation. Through this, it is possible to increase the effect of making the transition lottery to the advantageous section seem to be non-winning based on the small winning combination with the other medal payout. As a result, it becomes easy to give up the winning of the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and it is possible to expect the effect of astonishing the player.

<Modification example 9>
In this modification, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and ends, the display end mode of the section indicator is changed. FIG. 83 shows the section display first processing in this modification.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not displayed, the same process as in step S2702 to step S2705 is performed in step S3602 to step S3605. When the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3606, and the number of advantageous section games AG is added. That is, in this modification, the management of the advantageous section game number AG is not the section display second process that is started at the end of the game (in the reel control process), but the section that is started at the start of the game (in the lottery process). Display Performed in the first process. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value “1500”. If the upper limit has not been reached, in step S3608, the process of continuing the display of the eighth display segment N8 is performed, and then the section display first process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3607 that the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit value, that is, if it is determined that the forced termination condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in this game, the process proceeds to step S3609. In step S3609, the advantageous section game number AG is reset to the initial value (0). Then, in step S3610, a process of setting the forced termination flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The forced termination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the above forced termination condition is satisfied.

In step S3611, the display end mode lottery process is performed. In such a lottery process, a display end mode table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the display end mode of the section display when ending the advantageous section is determined by lottery. In the display end mode table, as shown in FIG. 84, the display end mode (display end timing) is set to be different depending on the content of the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied and the set value.

That is, in step S3611, the content of the display mode in the game in which the forced termination condition is satisfied (the game when the process of step S3611 is performed) is grasped, and when the display mode is the challenge mode or the attack mode, the section display is displayed. As the display end mode of, the time of the end of payout is set. On the other hand, when the display mode of this game is the VB mode or the addition special zone, the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the stop OFF operation of the third reel, and the like. One of the end of payout is determined from the set value.

Specifically, when the game this time is in the VB mode, the setting 2 or higher is selected at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel, and the setting 1 is not selected. When the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed, it is selected in the setting 4 or higher, and is not selected in the setting 3 or lower. Further, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel, the setting 2, the setting 4, and the setting 6 are more easily selected than the setting 1, the setting 3, and the setting 5.

When the game this time is a special zone, it is selected in the setting 4 or more and not selected in the setting 3 or less at the time of the stop OFF operation of the second reel. When the third reel is stopped and turned off, it is selected only in setting 6. Further, at the time of the stop OFF operation of the first reel, the setting 1, the setting 3, and the setting 5 are easier to be selected than the setting 2, the setting 4, and the setting 6.

That is, the display end mode table is defined so that the setting value can be easily narrowed down so that the situation (display mode) at the time when the forced end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is advantageous to the player. In other words, it is an advantageous situation for the player, and if there is no upper limit on the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, if the forced termination condition is satisfied in a situation where further increase in the number of continuous games can be expected, it is set as a substitute. It is possible to make a game in which the value is guessed, and it is possible to compensate for the feeling of loss for the end of the advantageous section in the situation where the advantageous section is still in the future.

After the display end mode lottery process is performed in step S3611, the display end mode according to the lottery result is set as the end mode of the section display this time in step S3612, and then the section display first process is finished. To do. In this case, for example, if the stop OFF operation of the first reel is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the stop OFF operation. Further, if the payout end time is set, the CPU 102 controls to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 based on the medal payout end.

In the section display second process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85, it is determined in step S3701 whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display process is terminated as it is, and if it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the forced termination flag is set, and if it is set, the data initialization process is performed in step S3703, and then the second section display process is terminated. Since the display of the eighth display segment N8 ends in the end mode set by the processes of step S3611 and step S3612, the section display second process is performed when the forced end flag is set. Now, only data initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step S3702 that the forced termination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3704. The processing of steps S3704 to S3707 is the same as the processing of steps S2807 to S2810.

As described above, in the section indicator, the display is started when the player shifts to the advantageous section which is advantageous for the player due to the improvement of the performance related to the push order notification, and the display is terminated when the advantageous section ends. By making the display end mode different depending on the situation at the end, it is possible to grasp the situation at the end from the section display and immerse in the afterglow of the situation at the end.

In particular, when the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in a situation advantageous to the player and the advantageous section ends, the set value can be estimated as a kind of information that can be useful to the player. .. By doing so, the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination can be reduced, and the more the forced termination condition is satisfied in a situation favorable to the player, the easier it is to estimate the set value. The playability can be balanced between the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination and the ease of obtaining information that can be useful.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the winning opportunity of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is an overlapping combination with the bonus, the content of the advantageous section is suggested in the game from the game in which the overlapping combination is won to the bonus winning. Here, the changes in the display mode of the section indicator in the present embodiment will be described first.

As mentioned above, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is conducted based on winning a specific role such as a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. In addition, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is also performed based on winning the overlapping combination of the bonus and the strong cherry (particularly the overlapping combination with the first BB). In the present embodiment, the display start mode of the section indicator is different depending on whether or not the winning opportunity of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is a duplicate combination with the first BB. Specifically, when the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is not a duplicate combination with the first BB, the game in which the specific combination winning opportunity is won is the specific combination as in the first embodiment. Is set as the start game as the game in which is established, and the display of the section indicator is started before the operation of the next game is allowed.

On the other hand, when the winning opportunity of the transition lottery is an overlapping combination with the first BB, the game in which the first BB prize is established among the specific winning opportunities is set as the start game as the game in which the specific combination is established. Start displaying the section indicator before allowing the operation of the next game.

As described above, in the first BB, a so-called missing symbol combination is set as a winning mode, and if the winning game is not successful, the first BB winning flag is carried over. Therefore, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won with the overlapping combination with the first BB as an opportunity, the game in which the overlapping combination is won and the game in which the first BB prize is established and is regarded as the start game may be different. Then, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won with the overlapping combination with the first BB as an opportunity, the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the overlapping combination is won, and the first BB prize is established. The display start of the section indicator is carried over to.

In the present embodiment, game playability is realized by utilizing the presence or absence of carry-over of the display start of the section display. Hereinafter, the processing configuration related to the game playability will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in steps S3801 to S3816, the same processing as in steps S401 to S416 is performed. Then, in step S3817, the special RT state process is performed, and then the reel control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, when the first BB or the second BB is won, the game shifts to a special RT state different from the first RT state to the third RT state, which shifts due to the promotion replay, the fall replay, or the like. In the special RT state, the winning probability of the predetermined replay is different from the normal gaming state, and specifically, it is higher than the normal gaming state. The special RT state that shifts based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB ends when the winning of the first BB or the second BB that triggered the transition is established. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special RT state is also provided in which the transition is made without being based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. The special RT state processing is a process for controlling such a special RT state.

In the special RT state processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the first BB or the second BB is won in the normal gaming state or the first RT state.

If any of the BBs is won, it is determined in step S3903 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S3904 whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. When the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is set, and when the attack mode winning flag and the special zone winning flag are set, the display control device displays a special RT command with a super attack mode in step S3905. It is set as an output target to 81. The special RT state command with super attack mode is for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state shifts to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB, and that the state of winning the super attack mode. It is a command. More specifically, the special RT state command with super attack mode shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, wins the transition lottery to the super attack mode, and is before the transition to the super attack mode. This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the fact. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

On the other hand, if the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and if the attack mode winning flag is set but the special zone flag is not set, the attack mode is added in step S3906. A special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The special RT command with attack mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state shifts to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB and that the attack mode is won. .. More specifically, the special RT state command with attack mode indicates that it shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and that it has won the lottery for shifting to attack mode and has not yet transitioned to attack mode. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3903 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3907. In step S3907, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, in step S3908, a process of setting a special RT state command with a challenge mode as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The special RT state command with challenge mode is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the state shifts to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB and that the challenge mode is won. is there. More specifically, the special RT state command with challenge mode indicates that it shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and that it has won the transition lottery to the challenge mode and has not yet transitioned to the challenge mode. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received such a special RT command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3909. The special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the transition to the RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the transition to the special RT state is performed based on the first BB winning and that the transition lottery such as the attack mode has not been won. .. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT state command will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3902 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, it is determined whether or not a specific combination has been won in this game. When it is determined that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S3911 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If it is determined in step S3910 that the specific combination has not been won, or if it is determined in step S3911 that any of the winning flags has been set even if the specific combination has been won, then The special RT state processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the specific combination is won and neither the challenge mode nor the attack mode is won, in step S3912, the special RT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are in the special RT state. The process of inputting "5" as the number of continuous games is executed. The special RT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of continuous games in the special RT state that shifts without being based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. The number of continuous games in the special RT state is arbitrary, and may be less than 5 or more than 5. However, it is preferable to set the number of continuous games in the special RT state in relation to the winning probability of the special replay described later.

In the following step S3913, the fake special RT state command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The fake special RT state command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the RT state is entered without being based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB. More specifically, the fake special RT state command causes the display control device 81 to grasp that it shifts to the special RT state without being based on the first BB or the second BB winning, and that it has not won the transition lottery such as the attack mode. Command for. The processing of the display control device 81 that has received the special RT state command will be described later.

After executing any of the processes of step S3905, step S3906, step S3908, step S3909, and step S3913, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, a process of storing the current gaming state is executed. Specifically, a process of grasping the current gaming state (normal gaming state or first RT state) and storing the RT setting flag (first RT setting flag) in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 106 if it is the first RT state. I do. The RT setting flag stored in the storage area can be read later. For example, the RT setting flag read from the storage area after the end of the first BB and the second BB, or after the end of the special RT state. The RT state can be set based on.

Then, in step S3915, the stored RT setting flag is cleared, the process of setting the fourth RT setting flag is performed in step S3916, and then the special RT state process is terminated. The fourth RT setting flag corresponds to the special RT state. By the processing of step S3915 and step S3916, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state as the special RT state.

Here, the winning / failing lottery table in the fourth RT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 shows a winning / failing lottery table for the 4th RT state that shifts based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, and FIG. 89 shows a winning / losing lottery table for the 4th RT state that shifts without being based on the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning. Is shown.

In the winning / failing lottery table for any of the 4th RT states, the winning probabilities of the specific winning combination with index values IV = 13 to 20 and 32 to 45 and the push order bell with IV = 21 to 28 are in the normal gaming state and the 1st RT state. It has the same winning probability. However, in the 4th RT state in which the transition is based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, even if the specific winning combination with the index value IV = 32 to 45 is won, the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is not won. That is, in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set, it is avoided that the first BB and the second BB are newly won (the bonus is duplicated). For the same reason, in the 4th RT state based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB winnings, various bonuses with index values IV = 46 to 48 are not won. In that respect, in the 4th RT state which is not based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, if the winning is done with the index value IV = 32 to 45, the winning is duplicated with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, and the index value IV = 46 to 48. You can also win various bonuses.

In the 4th RT state, as a replay, the winning probability of the normal replay having the index value IV = 1 and the winning probability of the special replay having the index value IV = 53,54 are higher than those in the normal gaming state and the 1st RT state. More specifically, the special replay with the index value IV = 53,54 is a replay that wins only in the 4th RT state, and the winning probability in other gaming states is zero. In addition, even in other gaming states, a part (low probability) may be won. Further, in the 4th RT state, 0 is set for the point value PV of the index value IV = 2 to 12, and the push order replay corresponding to these index values is not won.

If the special replay 1 with the index value IV = 53 is won, the first re-game, the ninth re-game, and the eleventh re-game to the fifteenth re-game are repeatedly won. Further, when the special replay 2 with the index value IV = 54 is won, the first re-game and the eleventh re-game to the fifteenth re-game are repeatedly won.

In the 4th RT state, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 1 is about 1 / 5.3, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 53 is about 1 / 43.7, and the index value IV The probability of winning at = 54 is about 1 in 43.7. Therefore, in the 4th RT state, the total replay probability is higher than in the normal gaming state and the 1st RT state, and the probability of an out-of-order result is lower.

By the way, the replay probability in the 4th RT state is lower than that in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and the probability of a deviation result is high. Therefore, even when the reel control is performed in which the replay winning is prioritized over the BB winning, the BB winning can be established relatively smoothly.

Returning to the description of the special RT state processing, if it is determined in step S3901 that the state is not the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, it is determined whether or not the game state is the special RT state by determining whether or not the above-mentioned fourth RT setting flag is set. If it is not in the special RT state, the special RT state processing is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, the process proceeds to step S3918.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not any of the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag is set. That is, if the special RT state shifts based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, or if it shifts without being based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, but subsequently wins the 1st BB or 2nd BB, it remains as it is. End special RT state processing. If it is determined in step S3918 that none of the BB winning flags are set, the special RT counter is subtracted in step S3919. That is, the special RT counter set in step S3912 is subtracted by 1 when the game is digested.

In step S3920, it is determined whether or not the special RT counter has become "0" based on the processing result of step S3919. If it is determined that the value is not "0", it is determined in step S3921 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. The case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S3921 is a special RT state in which the current special RT state shifts without being based on the first BB or the second BB, but in the current game in the special RT state, the first BB or the second BB It means that the player won the challenge mode or the attack mode (super attack mode) with a specific role that is not a duplicated role with. As described above, when a specific combination that is not an overlapping combination with the first BB or the second BB is used as a winning opportunity, the section indicator starts displaying the game as the start game.

If it is determined in step S3920 that the special RT counter is "0", or if the section indicator display is started with this game as the start game in step S3921, the process proceeds to step S3922, and the above step S3914 is performed. Reads the stored RT setting flag. In the case of the normal gaming state in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored, and in step S3914, the RT setting flag is not stored in the storage area of the RT setting flag, so that the gaming state before the transition is achieved. Is determined to have been in the normal gaming state. Then, in step S3923, based on the result of the reading process in step S3922, a process of returning to the gaming state before the transition to the special RT state is performed. After performing the process of step S3923, the special RT state process is terminated.

In addition, when shifting to the special RT state, the gaming state before the transition may not be memorized, and the game state may be uniformly shifted to the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) at the end of the special RT state. In particular, the special RT state is configured so that it does not shift between the second RT state and the third RT state, but there is not much difference in the advantage between the normal gaming state and the first RT state, and no matter which gaming state is returned to. It is considered that the loss suffered by the player is small.

Next, the bonus state processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not it is in the bonus state, and if it is not in the bonus state, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4002, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the CB prize has been established. If so, the CB setting flag is set in step S4004 and the remaining CB setting flag is set in step S4005. The number of payouts is "15". After that, the state command is set in step S4006, the external signal setting process is performed in step S4007, and then the bonus state process ends. The processing of steps S4001 to S4007 is the same as the processing of steps S601 to S607.

If a negative determination is made in step S4003, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the first BB or second BB winning is established. If any of the BB prizes is established, the process proceeds to step S4009 to clear the current RT setting flag. In step S4010, a process of clearing the BB winning flag is performed, and in step S4011, a process of setting the BB setting flag is performed. Then, in step S4012, "216" is set for the number of remaining payouts. After that, in step S4013, the section display fourth process is performed. The section display fourth process is a process related to the display of the section display, and the details thereof will be described later.

If it is determined in step S4008 that the BB prize has not been established, the carry-over command is set in step S4014. If it is determined in step S4001 that the bonus state is in effect, the end determination process is performed in step S4015. After executing the processing of step S4013, step S4014 or step S4015, the process proceeds to step S4006 in the same manner as after the processing of step S4005 is executed, the state command set processing and the external signal setting processing are performed, and then the bonus state is executed. End the process.

Next, the RT state processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not the 4th RT setting flag is set. If the 4th RT setting flag is set, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S4101 that the 4th RT setting flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S4102, and the same processing as in steps S501 to S511 is performed in steps S4102 to S41112.

That is, the 4th RT setting flag is set, and during the special RT state, the RT state does not shift until the number of continuous games in the BB prize or the special RT state becomes 0. Specifically, even if the transition roll is stopped, the transition to the 1st RT state is not performed, and other promotion replays and fall replays (2nd replay to 5th replay) are not won. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped in the special RT state (4th RT state), the process of resetting to the 4th RT state may be performed. In this case, the special RT counter may be configured to set the initial value (5) again.

Next, the section display first process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the waiting period flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The waiting period flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that although the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won, the display start of the section display has also been carried over due to the carryover of the BB winning. .. If the waiting period flag is set, the section display first process is terminated as it is. That is, in the situation where the waiting period flag is set, the section display first process does not perform the process for starting the display of the section indicator.

If a negative determination is made in step S4202, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not either the challenge mode winning flag or the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags are set, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4204, and it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag is set. When the affirmative judgment is made in step S4204, it means that the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won in this game, and the winning opportunity is an overlapping combination with the first BB.

As described above, since the overlapping combination with the second BB and the single combination with the second BB (IV = 47) are configured not to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, in the above step S4204, only the presence or absence of the first BB winning flag is present. To judge. When the configuration is such that the overlapping combination with the second BB or the single combination with the second BB can win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, the presence / absence of the second BB winning flag may also be determined in step S4204.

If a negative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is not a duplicate combination, in steps S4205 to S4207, the display start mode of the section display is set and the advantageous section is continued in the same manner as in steps S2703 to S2705. After performing the process of starting the measurement of the number of games, the first process of displaying this section is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4204 and the winning opportunity is a duplicate combination, the waiting period flag is set in step S4208, and then the first process of displaying this section is terminated. By such processing, in the next game and thereafter, an affirmative determination is made in step S4202.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed, the process of continuing such display is performed in step S4209, and then the first section display process is terminated. The process of step S4209 is the same as the process of step S2706.

Next, the section display fourth process performed in step S4013 of the bonus state process (FIG. 90) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned waiting period flag is set. The case where the waiting period flag is not set is, for example, the case where the first BB or the second BB is won while the section display is being displayed (during the advantageous section), or the case where the current bonus is the second BB. In this case, in step S4301, a negative determination is made, and the section display fourth process is terminated as it is. If the waiting period flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4302 to clear the waiting period flag.

Then, in step S4303, the display of the section indicator is started. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the section display is started in the section display fourth process performed based on the first BB winning, and the section display is performed until the first BB winning is established. The display start of the vessel is carried over. In step S4304, the AG measurement start processing of the number of advantageous section games is performed. Such processing is the same as in step S4207 and the like. That is, when the waiting period flag is set, the start of measuring the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is also carried over until the first BB prize is established. After performing the process of step S4304, the section display fourth process ends.

The flow of the special RT state will be described with reference to FIG. 94.

In the normal section, for example, when a stop roll that wins a weak watermelon role appears, (1) this game is a specific role that is not a duplicate role with the BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and shifts to an advantageous section. Cases where the lottery was won, (2) Cases where this game is a specific role that does not overlap with BB (1st BB or 2nd BB) and has not been won in the transition lottery to the advantageous section, (3) This time The game is a duplicate of BB (1st BB) and wins the lottery to move to the advantageous section. (4) This game is a duplicate of BB (1st BB and 2nd BB). There may be multiple cases in which the lottery for transition to an advantageous section has not been won.

In the case of (1) above, the game in which the stop roll that is the weak watermelon winning combination appears is regarded as the start game, and the display of the section indicator is started. On the other hand, in the cases (2) to (4) above, the display of the section indicator is not started in the game in which the stop result that is the weak watermelon winning combination appears. Then, in the cases of these cases (2) to (4), the state shifts to the special RT state. However, in the cases of (3) and (4), it is a special RT state in which BB winning is the end condition, and in the case of (2), the end condition is the digestion of the number of games with the maximum number of continuations of 5. It is a special RT state. In any case, in the special RT state, the display of the section display is not started, the probability of winning the replay is higher than that, and the expectation for the BB winning or the advantageous section winning is maintained.

In the lottery process of each game in the special RT state, if no index value is won and the result is a loss, the winning BB prize can be established. In this case, if the display of the section indicator is started with the BB winning, it is determined that the case is the case of (3) above, and if the display of the section indicator is not started with the BB winning, the case of (4) above is not started. It is determined that it was. On the other hand, in the case (2) above, the special RT state ends when the maximum number of games that can be continued is exhausted in the special RT state. Then, in this case, the display of the section indicator is not started either.

In the special RT state as described above, the replay probability increases. Most of the replays that are won during the special RT state are normal replays, and in rare cases, special replay 1 or special replay 2 is won. As already explained, the special replay 1 is a duplicate of the first replay, the ninth regame, and the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay, and the special replay 2 is the first replay and the tenth replay. It is a duplicate role of the 15th re-game.

As shown in FIG. 95, in each of the 9th re-game to the 15th re-game, the re-game is given as a privilege, but the stop result is different. In the following description, the winning mode is described on the premise that the right-down line L4 is set as the valid line in the 3-bet game.

Specifically, the ninth replay is the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The winning mode is set in which the winning is established when the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol of the above stops at the effective line. In the tenth replay, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol, the right reel 32R "red bell" symbol or A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the "white bell" symbol stops at the effective line. In the 11th replay, the left reel 32L "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M "black BAR" symbol, and the right reel 32R "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol A winning mode is set in which a winning is established by stopping at the valid line. The twelfth replay is the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. A winning mode is set in which a winning is established when the symbol stops at the valid line. In these 9th to 12th re-games, even if the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on any reel, or even if it stops, it is straight. It is a replay game in which the "black BAR" symbols are aligned on the line and the replay prize is established on the stop roll that does not stop, and the prize is established on the stop roll that is out of the black BAR tempai as a whole.

More specifically, for example, in the ninth replay, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped at the upper stage. Then, the 18th "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. Further, when the 9th "second replay" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the 8th "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. Then, when the sixth "first replay" symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, and middle stages, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempered on the middle line L2 by the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, and the middle reel 32M. In, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tempai line, and the stop result is a stop roll (left / right middle tempai off).

Further, in the 10th replay, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th "1st replay" symbol of the left reel 32L is stopped on the upper stage, and the 18th. "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. Further, when the 7th "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the 8th "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper stage. Then, when the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, upper, and upper stages, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempered on the upper line L1 by the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. In, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tempai line, and the tempai comes off (middle / right upper tempai off).

In the 11th re-game, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped on the upper stage, and the 18th "black" is stopped. The "BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. Further, on the middle reel 32M, the eighth "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage. When the 6th "1st replay" symbol of the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the 7th "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, middle, and middle stages, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempered on the middle line L2 by the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L. In the above, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tempai line, and the tempai is off (middle / right middle tempai off).

In the 12th replay, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 19th "1st replay" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper row, and the 18th "black BAR" is stopped. The "Black BAR" symbol stops in the middle. Further, when the ninth "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. Then, on the right reel 32R, the 7th or 9th "black BAR" symbol stops at the lower stage. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the middle, lower, and lower (upper) stages, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempered on the lower line L3 by the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. On the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tempai line.

In the thirteenth replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which the winning is established is set. In particular, in the winning mode of the 13th re-game, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation is performed, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle Although the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempted at the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5. A stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai is set as a winning mode.

The 14th re-game is won when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which is established is set. In particular, in the winning mode of the 14th re-game, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle The "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper row of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the lower row. A stop roll with black BAR singles, in which the symbols are aligned and stopped, is set as a winning mode.

In the 15th re-game, the winning mode is that the winning mode is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. It is set. In particular, in the winning mode of the 15th re-game, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol is stopped at the upper and lower stages of the left reel 32L, and the middle The "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the reel 32M, the "black BAR" symbol also stops in the upper and lower rows of the right reel 32R, and the "black BAR" symbols are aligned on the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5. A stop roll that stops after the black BAR tempai is set as a winning mode.

By the way, both the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 include the first replay as a winning combination. As already explained (as shown in FIG. 11), the first replay is the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" on the middle reel 32M. A winning mode is set in which a winning mode is established when the symbol, the "red bell" symbol of the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol, or the "youth" symbol stops at the effective line. In this case, in the first replay, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 20th "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L is stopped in the upper row, and 18 The second "black BAR" symbol stops at the bottom. Further, when the ninth "second replay" of the middle reel 32M is stopped in the middle stage, the eighth "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the lower stage. Then, when the fifth "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped in the lower row, the seventh "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the upper row. In this case, the "black BAR" symbol stops from the left reel 32L to the lower, lower, and upper stages, and the "black BAR" symbol is tempered on the lower line L3 by the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. In, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop on the tempai line, and the stop result is a stop roll (left / middle lower tempai off).

The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are push order combinations in which the winning combination differs depending on the stop order. However, the privilege given regardless of which role wins is a re-game, and the advantage for the player is not different. That is, although the stop result differs depending on the stop order, the profit obtained by the player does not increase or decrease.

FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode.

If you win the special replay 1, stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the first stop order of "left" → "middle" → "right", and the first replay prize will be established. In this case, the stop roll stops with the "replay" symbols aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. Further, even if the engine is stopped in the second stop order of "left"-> "right"-> "middle", the first re-game winning prize is established, and the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right-down line L4. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, as described above, a prize is established at the stop result where the left / middle lower tempai is off.

On the other hand, if the game is stopped in the third stop order of "middle"-> "left"-> "right", any one of the 9th re-game, the 11th re-game, and the 13th re-game is won. In this case, when the "black BAR" symbol is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation is performed, any one of these 9th re-game, 11th re-game, and 13th re-game comes off the black BAR tempai (black). Winning is established at the stop roll that becomes BAR double tempai off). More specifically, in the middle reel 32M which is first stopped, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage, the 11th re-game or the 13th re-game can be won, but the 9th re-game prize is not established. In this case, if the "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower row on the left reel 32L, the 11th re-game prize can be established, but the 13th re-game prize cannot be established, and the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row on the right reel 32R. When the game is stopped and the 11th re-game prize is established, the middle and right middle tier tempai will be out of the stop. If the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the upper row of the left reel 32L, the 13th re-game prize can be established, but the 11th re-game prize can be established. When the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R and the 13th re-game prize is established, the black BAR double tempai on the right-down line L4 (and the right-up line L5) is stopped. In the middle reel 32M that is first stopped, if the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle row and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the lower row, the 9th re-game prize can be established, but the 11th re-game prize and The 13th re-game prize will not be established. In this case, even if the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R are also stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the stop result is that the left and right middle stage tempais come off. In other words, no matter which re-game prize is established, even if the "black BAR" symbols are stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbols are not stopped on the straight line. , Black BAR Tempai will be out of the stop roll. That is, in this case, by performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it is possible to make a stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai appear, and at the same time, it is possible to make the black BAR tempai appear. It is possible to make a stop roll that is out of the way, and if the pressing operation is accurate, a replay prize will be established for the stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai.

In the special replay 1, if the game is stopped in the fourth stop order of "middle"-> "right"-> "left", any one of the 10th re-game, the 11th re-game, and the 14th re-game is won. In this case, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol is aligned and stopped at the right rising line L5 on the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. However, as the 14th re-game prize, the black BAR singles will be stopped.

When the game is stopped in the fifth stop order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle", any one of the 9th re-game, the 12th re-game, and the 13th re-game is won. Also in this case, as in the case of the third stop order, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the black BAR tempai comes off. When the game is stopped in the sixth stop order of "right"-> "middle"-> "left", any one of the 9th re-game, the 12th re-game, and the 15th re-game is won. In this case, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the black BAR double-matched stop result is obtained as the 15th re-game prize.

In the case of the special replay 2, in both the first stop order and the second stop order, the first replay winning is established, and the "replay" symbols are aligned and stopped on the downward-sloping line L4 as in the special replay 1. In this case as well, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the winning result is established when the black BAR tempai comes off. In the case of the third stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the 10th replay, the 11th replay, and the 14th replay is established, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". If you aim at the symbol and stop it, you will get a stop with all the black BAR singles as the 14th re-game prize. In the case of the fourth stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any one of the tenth replay, the eleventh replay, and the thirteenth replay is established. However, also in this case, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the black BAR double tempai comes off and the stop result is obtained.

In the case of the 5th stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any of the 10th re-game, the 12th re-game, and the 15th re-game is won, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". If you aim at the symbol and stop it, you will get a black BAR double-matched stop as the 15th re-game prize. In the case of the 6th stop order, unlike the special replay 1, any of the 10th re-game, the 12th re-game, and the 13th re-game is won, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR". If you aim at the symbol and stop it, the black BAR double tempai will come off.

In the present embodiment, the content of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is suggested by utilizing the difference in the stop result due to the stop order of the special replays 1 and 2 that are won during such a special RT state. FIG. 97 shows the push order combination processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the push order combination process is a process (FIG. 37) performed in step S711 of the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31) in the main control device 101.

The push order combination processing in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the push order combination process in the first embodiment, and the difference is that the push order combination this time is a special replay 1 or 2 winning. It is a process. That is, the processing of steps S4401 to S4422 is the same as the processing of steps S1201 to S1222, and depending on the relationship between the winning push order combination and the display mode (whether or not the push order notification condition is satisfied), When it is determined whether or not to perform the push order notification and the push order notification is performed, the push order notification is performed by the instruction monitor 68, and the push order notification command is output to the display control device 81. The processes of steps S4401 to S4422 are processes that can cause a change in the advantage for the player by the push order notification.

In the push order combination processing in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4419 that the push order bell is not the various promotion replays or the like, the process proceeds to step S4423. In step S4423, it is determined whether or not the special replays 1 and 2 are performed. If it is neither of the special replays 1 and 2, the push order processing is terminated as it is. In the case of any of the special replays 1 and 2, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4424, and then the push order combination processing is ended.

That is, although the push order notification at the time of winning the special replays 1 and 2 is executed regardless of the display mode (whether or not the push order notification condition is satisfied), the instruction monitor 68 connected to the main control device 101 is used. The push order notification is not performed, and only the push order notification is performed by the display control device 81.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a push order notification process in the present embodiment. As described above, the push order notification process is a process (FIG. 45) performed in step S1903 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81 on the sub side.

The push order notification process is also substantially the same as the push order notification process of the first embodiment, and the difference is that the push order combination this time is a process when the special replays 1 and 2 are won. Is. Specifically, in steps S4501 to S4513, as in steps S2001 to S2013, the push order is pushed depending on the relationship between the winning push order combination and the display mode (whether or not the push order notification condition is satisfied). When it is determined whether or not to perform the order notification and the push order notification is performed, the push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65.

In the push order notification process in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S4512 that the push order bell is not various promotion replays or the like, the process proceeds to step S4514. In step S4514, it is determined whether or not the special replays 1 and 2 are performed. If it is neither of the special replays 1 and 2, the push order notification process is terminated as it is. If it is one of the special replays 1 and 2, the special RT notification process is executed in step S4515, and then the push order notification process ends.

The special RT notification process in step S4515 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the special RT command with super attack mode has been received. As described above, when the display control device 81 receives a new command in step S1701 of the effect setting process (FIG. 42), the received command is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 183 in step S1702. Perform processing. In step S4601, by checking the command storage area, it can be determined whether or not the above-mentioned special RT state command has been received. In the following processing, the command storage area is also confirmed in the determination processing of whether or not the predetermined command has been received.

As described above, the special RT command with super attack mode is a command whose output is set in step S3905 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the state shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and that the super attack mode is won and the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the above command has been received, in step S4602, a push order notification effect is performed so that the black BAR doubles are aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the game result this time is special replay 1, the sixth stop order of "right"-> "middle"-> "left" is notified. If the result of this game is Special Replay 2, the fifth stop order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle" is notified. After performing the process of step S4602, the special RT notification process is terminated.

In this case, as the push order notification effect, along with the notification of each stop order, the notification that the "black BAR" is aimed at each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation is performed is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 100A, on the auxiliary display unit 65, the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is associated with the positional relationship of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and a number is added. In addition to showing, the symbol to be aimed at is displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In FIG. 100 (a), the number "3" and the character "black BAR" are displayed on the left side, the number "1" and the character "black BAR" are displayed in the middle, and the number "2" is displayed on the right side. And "black BAR" characters are displayed, and the stop operation should be "middle"-> "right"-> "left" as the stop order this time, and "black BAR" is displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It shows that you should aim for the design. In addition, the number in the middle and the character of "black BAR" are highlighted by the boy lifting them, so that it is easy to grasp that the stop operation should be performed first.

Incidentally, in this case, although the push order notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the push order notification is not performed by the instruction monitor 68. This indicates that the push order notification effect this time is not a push order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage. In other words, in the case of the push order notification effect for causing a change in the player's advantage, the push order notification is always generated by the instruction monitor 68.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the special RT command with super attack mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not a special RT state command with an attack mode has been received.

As described above, the special RT command with attack mode is a command whose output is set in step S3906 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the state shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and that the attack mode is won and the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4603 that the above command has been received, in step S4604, a push order notification effect is performed so that the black BAR singles are aligned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the game result this time is special replay 1, the fourth stop order of "middle"-> "right"-> "left" is notified. If the result of this game is Special Replay 2, the third stop order of "middle"-> "left"-> "right" is notified. After performing the process of step S4604, the special RT notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4603 that the special RT command with attack mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4605. In step S4605, it is determined whether or not a special RT state command with a challenge mode has been received.

As described above, the special RT command with challenge mode is a command whose output is set in step S3908 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the state shifts to the special RT state based on the first BB winning, and that the challenge mode is won and the state is before the transition.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the above command has been received, the notification lottery process 1 is executed in step S4606. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for selecting whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is set to the first probability (80%). Is. In this case, the lottery table having the first probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

If it is determined in step S4605 that the special RT command with challenge mode has not been received, the process proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, it is determined whether or not a special RT command has been received.

As described above, the special RT command is a command whose output is set in step S3909 in the special RT state processing (FIG. 87). Such a command is a command indicating that the player shifts to the special RT state based on the winning of the first BB or the second BB, and has not won the lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like.

If it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has been received, the notification lottery process 2 is executed in step S4608. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability. ) Is the process set in. In this case, the lottery table having a second probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

The case where it is determined in step S4607 that the above command has not been received is a case where the special RT this time has shifted without being based on the first BB or the second BB, and the fake special RT command has been received. When the fake special command is received, the notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4609. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for selecting whether or not to execute the push order notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, and the winning probability is lower than the first probability or the second probability. This is a process set to a probability (5%). In this case, the lottery table having a third probability is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and the lottery counters are acquired from the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 to perform the lottery process.

After executing any of the processes of step S4606, step S4608, and step S4609, in step S4610, it is determined whether or not each of the above notification lottery processes has won. If the notification lottery process does not win, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. In this case, even if the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the push order notification effect is not performed. For example, if the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, the first replay winning is established. Then, even if it is a special replay 1 or a special replay 2, it cannot be distinguished from a normal replay having an index value IV = 1.

If it is determined in step S4610 that the winner has been won in each of the above notification lottery processes, in step S4611, a push order notification effect that is out of the black BAR double tempai is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 96, if the game result this time is special replay 1, the third stop order of "middle"-> "left"-> "right" or "right"-> "left" → Notify the 5th stop order of "medium". If the result of this game is Special Replay 2, the 4th stop order of "middle"-> "right"-> "left" or the 6th stop order of "right"-> "middle"-> "left" is used. Notify. After performing the process of step S4611, the special RT notification process is terminated.

The relationship between the push order notification effect when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won and the content of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (b).

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect, a replay prize (special replay 1 or special replay 2) is obtained at the stop result where the black BAR doubles are aligned. If any of the winnings) is established, it is confirmed that the special RT state this time is the special RT state based on the first BB, and that the mode shifts to the super attack mode after the first BB. As shown in FIG. 61, the overlapping combination with the second BB is set so as not to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and the situation in which the special RT command with the super attack mode is output and set in step S3905 is This is a case where the overlapping combination with the first BB is an opportunity to win the transition lottery to the advantageous section. Therefore, when the black BAR double alignment is stopped by operating in the stop order according to the push order notification effect, it is a special RT state based on the first BB winning of the first BB and the second BB, and the super attack mode. It shows that he has also won the transition lottery.

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect, a replay prize (special replay 1 or special replay 2) is obtained at the stop result where the black BAR singles are aligned. If any of the winnings) is established, it is confirmed that the special RT state this time is the special RT state based on the first BB, and that the attack mode is entered after the first BB. Similar to the above, of the first BB and the second BB, the overlapping combination of the second BB does not win the lottery for transition to the attack mode. Therefore, the situation in which the special RT command with attack mode is output and set in step S3906 is a case where the overlapping combination with the first BB is a winning opportunity of the transition lottery to the advantageous section.

As a result of performing a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R according to the push order notification effect, the black BAR double tempai is out of the stop roll and the replay prize (special replay 1 or special replay 2) If any of the prizes) is established, the special RT state this time is (1) a special RT state based on the first BB and shifts to the challenge mode after the first BB, (2) a special RT based on the first BB. A case where the player is in a state and has not won the lottery for transition to an advantageous section, (3) a case where the special RT state is based on the second BB, and (4) a case where the special RT state is not based on the first BB or the second BB winning. Is one of.

However, due to the difference in the winning probability of each of the above notification lottery processes, when the replay winning is established at the stop result of the black BAR double tempai coming off, the push order notification effect is performed through the notification lottery process 1, that is, the above ( The case of 1) is the most likely, and the case of the push order notification effect after the notification lottery process 2, that is, the case of (2) or (3) is the next highest.

Furthermore, it is possible to predict which case is the case from the stoppage of the game that triggered the transition to the special RT state. For example, when a stop roll that wins the middle bell appears and the special RT state is entered, the middle bell with the index value IV = 19, the middle bell overlap 1 with the index value IV = 44,45, or the middle bell overlap 2 It means that the special RT state has been entered based on either of them. In the case of index value IV = 44 middle bell duplication 1, there is a 90% chance of winning the challenge mode, a 10% chance of winning the super attack mode, not winning the attack mode, and shifting to either mode. The event of not winning does not occur. Further, in the case of the middle bell duplication 2 of the index value IV = 45, the transition to any mode is not won. Therefore, when a stop roll that wins the middle bell appears and the special RT state is entered, the push order notification effect that the black BAR singles that suggest the attack mode winning does not occur.

In addition, when a stop roll that wins the middle bell appears and the game shifts to the special RT state, if the index value IV = 44, there is a 90% chance that the special RT command with challenge mode will be received and the special RT will be received. No command is received. If the index value IV = 44, only the special RT command is received. Then, when the index value IV = 19 shifts to the special RT state, the fake special RT command is received.

Then, when a stop roll that wins the middle bell appears and shifts to the special RT state, aiming for the "black BAR" symbol according to the push order notification effect, and when the stop roll is out of the black BAR tempai, ( 1) The case where the first BB and the challenge mode are won at the index value IV = 44, (2) The case where the second BB is won at the index value IV = 45, or (3) No one is won. Either the case is based on the fake special RT command. However, the probabilities of winning the notification lottery in these cases (1) to (3) are 80%, 20%, and 5%, respectively, and it can be predicted that the case (1) is the most probable. it can. In addition, since the case (3) is based on the premise that the transition to any mode that occurs at 10% of the middle bell is not won, even if the notification lottery is won, the index value IV = It will be 0.5% when winning 19 and the possibility is extremely low.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

During the carry-over state of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section such as the attack mode is restricted, and then the game result that triggered the carry-over state is used to move to the advantageous section. If the transition lottery is won, the display start of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is delayed until the bonus prize is won. By doing so, in the configuration in which the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed by the overlapping combination of the bonus and the small combination, even if the display of the eighth display segment N8 is not started in the winning game, the transition lottery can be performed. You can maintain the expectation that you have won.

However, by doing the above, there are many opportunities to limit the transfer lottery to the advantageous section. For example, even if a specific combination is won during the carry-over state, the transfer lottery will not be performed, so the carry-over state is It is considered that the expectation for the advantageous section is lowered, and it can be said that the situation is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the above-described embodiment, the content of the transition lottery to the advantageous section carried out based on the game result that triggered the transition to the carry-over state is notified by using the stop result of the special replay in the carry-over state. , Suggested configuration. By doing so, even in the carry-over state, it is possible to play the game while having a sense of expectation for the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Moreover, the carry-over state is basically a state of transition based on the bonus winning, and if a specific role that does not overlap with the bonus winning wins the transition lottery to the advantageous section, it will be used as a section indicator in the game. The display of the eighth display segment N8 of the above is started. Therefore, for example, when a stop roll that wins a specific role such as a strong watermelon appears, if the section indicator display is not started, it is a small role that does not overlap with the bonus and the transition lottery is not won. There is either a case where the bonus is duplicated and the transition lottery is not won, or a case where the bonus is duplicated and the transition lottery is won. In this way, it has a bonus overlapping combination and a bonus non-overlapping combination, and in each case, the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed, and the display start timing of the section indicator is whether or not the bonus overlaps as described above. If the configuration is different depending on the situation, the patterns of the winning combination and the presence / absence of the display start of the section display are diversified, and it is possible to greatly improve the playability.

In particular, for example, the strong watermelon duplication 1 which is an overlapping role with the bonus and the strong watermelon which is a small role which is not the overlapping role with the bonus have a common stop result, so that the strong watermelon duplication 1 and the strong watermelon In the winning game, it is difficult to determine which result is the result. As a result, it is possible to determine which result is the result, including not only whether or not the carry-over state is reached, but also the start of the display of the section indicator.

As a lottery for transition to an advantageous section, for example, when comparing a strong watermelon and a weak watermelon, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the advantageous section is higher for the strong watermelon than for the weak watermelon regardless of the presence or absence of overlap with the first BB. High (Fig. 61). Therefore, comparing the case where the stop roll of the strong watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start, and the case where the stop roll of the weak watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start the display, the former However, it can be judged that there is a high possibility that it is in a carry-over state.

Further, for example, regarding the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon, the ratio of whether or not the first BB overlaps is higher in the strong watermelon than in the weak watermelon (FIG. 61). Specifically, when a strong watermelon stop roll appears, about a quarter overlaps with the first BB, whereas when a weak watermelon stop roll appears, it takes about 30 minutes. 1 is an overlap with the first BB. Therefore, even if a comparison is made between the case where the stop roll of the strong watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start and the case where the stop roll of the weak watermelon appears and the section indicator does not start, the former It can be judged that is more likely to be in the carry-over state.

In the carry-over state, the special replays 1 and 2 can be won, and the contents of the advantageous section are notified and suggested when the special replays 1 and 2 are stopped. Specifically, at the time of winning the special replays 1 and 2, when the push order notification effect of the stop order that is the same as the black BAR double is performed, it is notified that the lottery for transition to the super attack mode has been won, and black. When the push order notification effect of the stop order that makes the BAR singles aligned is performed, it is notified that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won, and the push order notification effect of the stop order that is out of the black BAR tempai is performed. , It is suggested that the lottery for transition to challenge mode has been won. In this way, in the carry-over state where the display of the section display has not been started, the transition lottery of the player's interest is based on the premise that the player has a sense of expectation for the transition lottery to the advantageous section. If the content is performed by the push order notification effect, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the push order notification effect.

Even if the push order notification effect of the black BAR occurs, the corresponding stop result does not appear unless the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, when trying to grasp and predict the content of the advantageous section from the relationship with the stop roll, it is necessary to challenge the "black BAR" symbol, which enhances the playability. In other words, the "black BAR" symbol was stopped at the desired position by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode etc. was won. It is also possible to give the impression that, even from such an impression (the impression that you will not win the transition lottery unless you aim), you can expect active participation in the game.

In the special replays 1 and 2, although the stop result differs depending on the stop order, the privilege obtained is the replay regardless of the stop order, and it can be said that the push order notification effect does not affect the interests of the player. Therefore, consistency with performing the push order notification effect is ensured in the section where the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section whose advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the push order bell is restricted.

Further, the special replays 1 and 2 are replays that are not involved in the transition of the RT state like other promotion replays. Therefore, it can be said that not only the privilege of the re-game to be granted but also the advantage of the subsequent game state does not change, which is more consistent with the limitation of the lottery for transition to the above-mentioned advantageous section. Secured.

When the push order notification effect of the special replays 1 and 2 is performed, the push order notification is not performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side, and only the effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like on the sub side. In other words, when performing push order notification that is related to the interests of the player, push order notification is always performed on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side. By doing so, it is clarified that, for example, if the manager of the game hall or the like wants to monitor the relationship between the stop order and the privilege given, the instruction monitor 68 should be monitored. , The degree of freedom in the production of the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 side is overwhelmingly improved.

The special replays 1 and 2 in which the push order notification effect can occur are game results that do not trigger a lottery to shift to an advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to have the push order notification effect purely enjoyed without giving a negative image that the transition lottery is restricted in the carry-over state.

<Modification example 1>
In this modified example, the configuration of the special replay that can be won during the special RT state is different. FIG. 101 is a winning / failing lottery table for the special RT state that shifts based on the first BB or second BB winning in this modification, and FIG. 102 shows the winning / failing for the special RT that shifts without being based on the first BB or second BB winning. It is a lottery table.

In this modification, as special replays, the index value IV = 53, the special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay, and the index value IV = 54, the first replay, the first replay. Special replay 4 consisting of 9 replays to 12th replays and 14th replays, and special replays consisting of 1st replays, 9th replays to 12th replays, and 15th replays with an index value of IV = 55. 5 is set.

The winning modes of the 1st re-game and the 9th re-game to the 15th re-game are as described above. Game ~ 12th re-game is won by a stop roll that is out of the black BAR tempai, 13th re-game is a prize by a stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai, and the 14th re-game is A prize is established on a stop roll with black BAR singles, and a prize is established on a stop roll with black BAR doubles in the 15th replay. In addition, the winning probabilities of the special replays 3 to 5 are about 1 / 65.5 each.

As shown in FIG. 103, in the special replays 3 to 5, the corresponding replays can be won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. That is, for example, in the situation where the special replay 5 is won, regardless of the stop order, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the black BAR double is aligned. The 15th re-game prize is established on the result. In addition, even in the situation where the special replay 5 is won, if the stop operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, most of the replays descend to the right regardless of the stop order. The first re-game prize is established at the stop result.

By the way, since the 14th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 3, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol at the time of winning. Regardless of the stop order, the 14th re-game and the 15th re-game will not win, and the black BAR singles and black BAR doubles will not appear. Further, since the 13th replay and the 15th replay are not associated with the special replay 4, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol at the time of winning, the special replay 4 is not associated with the 13th replay or the 15th replay. Regardless of the stop order, the 13th re-game and the 15th re-game will not win, and the black BAR double tempai will not come off or the black BAR double will not appear. Similarly, since the 13th replay and the 14th replay are not associated with the special replay 5, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol at the time of winning. Regardless of the stop order, the 13th re-game and the 14th re-game will not win, and the black BAR double tempai off and the black BAR singles will not appear.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a prize for each small winning combination including a specific winning combination will be described.

Among the winning combinations in each game, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, and weak watermelons are set as small winning combinations that cannot be won due to the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. .. More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry and the strong cherry duplication 1 and 2 are the roles in which any of the 28th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win, and the left reel 32L. The 28th small winning combination symbol and the 32nd small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the above-mentioned first operation is performed. Neither the 28 small winning combination symbol, the 32nd small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong cherry role will be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a role in which any of the 27th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win a prize, and the 27th small role symbol and the 32nd small role symbol to the 32nd small role symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small role symbols are the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 7th "red bell" symbol to the 20th "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, Neither the 27th small winning combination symbol, the 32nd small winning combination symbol to the 35th small winning combination symbol, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak cherry role is missed.

The strong watermelon and the strong watermelon duplication 1 and 2 are the roles in which either the 30th small winning combination or the 41st small winning combination can win, but the 30th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are It is a "watermelon" pattern. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon role will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination of either the 29th small winning combination or the 41st small winning combination, while the 29th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, if the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the 9th "red 7" symbol to the 3rd "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th small winning combination symbol and the 41st small winning combination symbol "watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon role is missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped and operated while leaving the possibility of winning any of the roles that may be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop the operation when the upper stage is reached. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a dropout, and each operation mode in which the above-mentioned dropout occurs is a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

Further, in each game, in a game in which there is a high possibility that a specific role has been won, a chance notification effect may occur as the effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "chance !!", and the characters with the exclamation mark are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, respectively. Each is displayed in correspondence with 32R. In addition, in the chance notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "cui" by an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64.

In the chance notification effect, although it is suggested that the winning combination this time is one of the specific roles, it is set so that it cannot be determined or it is difficult to determine which specific role it is. That is, when the chance notification effect is performed, it is highly possible that the winning role of this game is one of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., but either strong cherry or weak cherry. It is not possible to determine whether there is a strong watermelon, whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), the player uses the left reel 32L in the above specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the specific combinations is won. The operation will be performed.

Here, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect differs depending on whether or not the special RT state is in progress. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), the chance notification effect occurs at 80% of the time when the specific combination is won, except during the special RT state, whereas it is specified during the special RT state. Chance notification effect occurs at 5% when the role is won. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the present embodiment, the special RT state is provided mainly for the purpose of prolonging the expectation that the player has won the first BB or the second BB, but the first BB or the second BB has been carried over. During the carry-over, duplicate winning of the first BB and the second BB does not occur, and further, the execution of the transition lottery for the new advantageous section is restricted. That is, in a game played in a situation where the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set, even if a specific role is newly won, duplicate winning with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB does not occur, and an advantageous section. Since the lottery for transition to the game is not won, the winning of the specific role is basically not preferable for the player from the viewpoint of the timing of winning. Therefore, in the special RT state that gives a feeling of expectation that it is being carried over, the occurrence rate of the chance notification effect is lower than the occurrence rate other than the special RT state even if the specific role is won, so that the specific role is won. It has been devised so that it is difficult to notice, and it is not intentionally generated a flashy production, so that the player's feelings that can be felt as a loss are not repelled.

However, even if a specific role is won in the carry-over state, even if there is no expectation for a new bonus duplicate winning or a transition winning to an advantageous section, missing a specific role itself is in terms of medal loss. It is not preferable for the player. Therefore, it is considered that the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout, particularly in the special RT state, regardless of whether or not it is a specific combination. ..

As already explained, even if you win the special replays 3 to 5 in the special RT state, the 13th re-game to the 15th re-game prize will not be established unless you aim at the "black BAR" symbol and stop operation, and black The BAR double tempai off, the black BAR single match, and the black BAR double match stop rolls do not appear. In other words, when the operation of the left reel 32L will be performed in a specific operation mode, these stop rolls do not appear.

The special RT notification process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. The special RT notification process is a process (FIG. 99) performed in step S4515 in the push order notification process (FIG. 98) by the display control device 81.

In this modification, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the special replay 5 has been won. If it is won, in step S4702, it is determined whether or not the special RT command with super attack mode has been received by referring to the command storage area. When such a command is received, in step S4703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the black BAR push notification effect is performed.

In the black BAR push notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays an image in which the hub character and the mongoose character are intertwined and fighting. In addition to the image of the battle between the hub and the mongoose, an image of a push instruction to aim at the "black BAR" is also displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, in the black BAR eye-press notification effect, it is controlled so that the corresponding sound effect (for example, "aiming" with a male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64. In this case, for example, when the player stops from the left reel 32L aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the "black BAR" symbol is on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the "white" is on the middle stage. Since the "BAR" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol are stopped at the bottom, there is a sense of expectation that a black BAR double match or a black BAR single match will appear.

When the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R aiming at the "black BAR" symbol based on the black BAR push notification effect of step S4703, in this case, the black BAR doubles are aligned. The 15th re-game prize is established. On the other hand, in step S4702, when the special RT command with the super attack mode is not received, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is without generating the black BAR push notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above in order to prevent the specific combination from being missed. As a result, even if the special replay 5 is won, it is difficult for a stop roll with a black BAR double to appear, and the 1st re-game and the 9th re-game to the 12th re-game winning are likely to be established.

If it is determined in step S4701 that the special replay 5 is not won, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the special replay 4 is won. If the special replay 4 is won, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not a special RT command with an attack mode is received. When receiving, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the black BAR push notification effect is generated in step S4706. In this case, when the player makes a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 14th re-game winning is established at the stop result in which the black BAR singles are aligned. On the other hand, in step S4705, when the special RT command with the attack mode is not received, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is without generating the black BAR push notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 4 is won, the stop result of the black BAR singles is unlikely to appear, and the 1st re-game and the 9th re-game to the 12th re-game winning are likely to be established.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the special replay 4 is not won, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not the special replay 3 is won. If the special replay 3 is won, it is determined in step S4708 whether or not the special RT command with the challenge mode is received. If it has been received, the notification lottery process 1 is executed in step S4709. The notification lottery process 1 is substantially the same as that in step S4608, and a lottery for winning the notification with the first probability (80%) is performed. If the special RT command with the challenge mode has not been received, it is determined in step S4710 whether or not the special RT command has been received. When the special RT command is received, the notification lottery process 2 is executed in step S4711, and when the special RT command is not received, the notification lottery process 3 is executed in step S4712. The notification lottery process 2 and the notification lottery process 3 are substantially the same as the processes of step S4608 and step S4609, and the notification lottery process 2 is notified and won with a second probability (20%) lower than the first probability, and the notification lottery is performed. Process 3 is a lottery in which the notification is won with a third probability (5%) lower than the second probability.

After executing the processes of step S4709, step S4711, or step S4712, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not the player has won the notification lottery process. If the player is elected, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the black BAR push notification effect in step S4714. In this case, when the player makes a stop operation aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the thirteenth re-game winning is established at the stop result which is out of the black BAR double tempai. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4713 that the notification is not won in the notification lottery process, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is without generating the black BAR push notification effect. In this case, it is considered that the player performs the stop operation in the specific operation mode as described above. As a result, even if the special replay 3 is won, the stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai is unlikely to appear, and the 1st re-game and the 9th re-game to the 12th re-game winning are likely to be established.

If it is determined in step S4707 that the special replay 3 is not won, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. That is, the black BAR push notification effect does not occur at the time of normal replay winning or other small winning combination winning.

By doing so, it is possible to make the stop result at the time of winning the special replay different while not using the push order notification effect. Therefore, regarding the advantageous section whose advantage is changed by the push order notification such as the push order bell, the advantage section during the carry-over state while more strictly guaranteeing the significance of restricting the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section in the carry-over state. It is possible to realize the playability of notifying about.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, if a specific combination is won in the special RT state, a predetermined notification release lottery is performed, and if a special replay is won while the notification release lottery is won, the push order notification for aligning the "black BAR" symbols is performed. Generate a production. In this modification, a special RT state that can win the special replay 1 and the special replay 2 in the second embodiment is set, and the stop result may differ depending on the stop order.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a specific combination notification process in this modified example. As described above, the specific combination notification process is a process (FIG. 52) executed in step S1905 of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44) in the display control device 81, and is a process executed when the specific combination is won. is there.

In the specific combination notification process in this modification, the notification release process is performed in step S4801 before the process for setting the pseudo precursor mode (steps S4802 to step S4810) is performed in the same manner as the processes in steps S2501 to S2509.

In the notification release process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108 (a), first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the special RT state is in progress. If it is not in the special RT state, the notification release process is terminated as it is. If it is in the special RT state, it is determined in step S4902 whether or not the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag is set. If none of the winning flags are set, the notification cancellation process is terminated as it is. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S4903.

In step S4903, a release lottery table in which a release rate according to a specific combination is set is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182. In the cancellation lottery table, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), for example, a strong cherry has a 40% probability of winning a cancellation, and a weak cherry has a 5% probability of winning a cancellation, which is lower than that of a strong cherry. In addition, strong watermelons have an 80% chance of winning a cancellation, which is higher than strong cherries, and weak watermelons have a 20% chance of winning a cancellation.

In step S4904, the release lottery process is performed based on the release lottery table acquired in step S4903. Then, in step S4905, it is determined whether or not the cancellation lottery has been won. If the cancellation lottery has not been won, the notification cancellation process is terminated as it is. If the release lottery has been won, in step S4906, the process of setting the release flag in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 is performed, and then the notification release process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a special RT notification process in this modified example.

In this modification, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the release flag is set. If the release flag is not set, the process of acquiring the notification table for the non-release state from the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is performed in step S5002. When the release flag is set, the process of acquiring the notification table for the release state from the various table storage areas 182a is performed in step S5003. In these notification tables, when the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the winning probability of the notification lottery as to whether or not to notify the stop order of the black BAR double alignment, the black BAR single alignment, and the black BAR double tempai. Is defined, and the notification table for the release state has a higher probability of winning the notification lottery than the notification table for the non-release state.

After performing the process of step S5002 or step S5003, it is determined in step S5004 whether or not the special RT command with super attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5005, and the notification lottery process 1 is executed. The notification lottery process 1 is a lottery process for whether or not to execute the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR doubles are aligned, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 1 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 1 in the release state, the notification lottery has a higher probability of 80% than in the non-cancellation state. Win.

In step S5006, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5005, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5007, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR doubles are aligned, and the special RT notification is performed. End the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5004, it is determined in step S5008 whether or not a special RT command with an attack mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5009, and the notification lottery process 2 is executed. The notification lottery process 2 is a lottery process for whether or not to execute the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR singles are aligned, and the lottery process is performed based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. Do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 2 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 2 in the release state, the notification lottery has a higher probability of 80% than in the non-cancellation state. Win.

In step S5010, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S5009, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5011, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR singles are aligned, and the special RT notification is performed. End the process.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined in step S5012 whether or not the special RT command with challenge mode has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5013, and the notification lottery process 3 is executed. The notification lottery process 3 is a lottery process for whether or not to execute the push order notification effect of the stop order that is out of the black BAR double tempai, and the lottery process is based on the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003. I do. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 3 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 30%, and in the notification lottery process 3 in the release state, the notification lottery has a higher probability of 80% than in the non-cancellation state. Win.

If a negative determination is made in step S5012, it is determined in step S5014 whether or not the special RT command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S5015, and the notification lottery process 4 is executed. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S5016 to execute the notification lottery process 5. The notification lottery process 4 and the notification lottery process 5 are also lottery processes for whether or not to execute the push order notification effect of the stop order that is out of the black BAR double tempai, and the notification table acquired in step S5002 or step S5003 is displayed. Based on that, the lottery process is performed. In this modification, in the notification lottery process 4 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%, and in the notification lottery process 4 in the release state, the notification lottery is won with the same probability of 10% as in the non-cancellation state. To do. Further, in the notification lottery process 5 in the non-cancellation state, the notification lottery is won with a probability of 5%, and in the notification lottery process 5 in the release state, the notification lottery is won with the same probability of 5% as in the non-cancellation state.

After executing the process of step S5013, step S5015, or step S5016, the process proceeds to step S5017. In step S5017, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won based on the processing results of the notification lottery processes 3 to 5, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the special RT notification process is terminated as it is. If the notification lottery is won, in step S5018, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to generate a push order notification effect of the stop order that is out of the black BAR double tempai, and is used for special RT. The notification process ends.

The state at the time of winning the special replay in the special RT state of this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

For example, suppose that a stop roll that wins the role of a weak watermelon appears and the game shifts to the special RT state. In the example of FIG. 110, the case of shifting to the special RT state with the super attack mode is shown. As already explained, in the special RT state, the replay is frequently won.

When a specific combination such as a weak watermelon combination is won during the special RT state, the notification release process (FIG. 108) is performed. Then, if the release is won in the release lottery process of the notification release process, the notification table acquired when the special replays 1 and 2 are won after that is different (step S5002, step S5003), and the person who has won the release lottery. However, it becomes easier to win the notification lottery. Then, when the notification lottery (step S5005) at the time of winning the special replays 1 and 2 is won, the push order notification effect of the stop order in which the black BAR doubles are aligned occurs, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are "" in the stop order. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 15th re-game prize is established with a stop result in which the black BAR doubles are aligned.

On the other hand, in the special RT state, if you do not win a specific role such as a weak watermelon role, or if you win a specific role but do not win in the cancellation lottery process, the special replay 1 and 2 will be announced at the time of winning. The probability of winning is low. As a result, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, the first re-game prize is established with a stop roll that is a downward-sloping replay.

By doing the above, the playability when a specific role is won during the special RT state is improved. As already explained, in the situation where the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are set, no new bonus winning is generated and the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not performed. Therefore, even though the specific role has been won, the benefits that can be obtained may be less than in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are not set. In that respect, as described above, if the notification release lottery is performed based on the specific role winning, there is an advantage that the game predicts the content of the advantageous section after that, and the bonus lottery based on the specific role winning and the advantage It is possible to provide an alternative to the section lottery.

In particular, by making it possible to appear a stop roll that suggests the content of the advantageous section based on the winning of the specific combination in the special RT state, it is possible to make a lottery to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the specific combination in the special RT state. It can make the player think as if he was elected. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not performed in the situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set.

In addition, during the special RT state, even if the cancellation lottery based on the specific combination winning is not won, the notification lottery can be won, so that the specific combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state has an advantageous section. It is easy to make the judgment in predicting whether you won the game or whether you won the advantageous section with the specific role won after shifting to the special RT state, and the game to be predicted will be more ambiguous. It will be possible to entertain.

According to the configuration in which the content of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section can be notified based on the specific combination winning in the carry-over state (during the special RT state) as in the above modification, the specific combination winning in the carry-over state is used. Therefore, it is possible to realize a new game property of notifying the contents of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section that has already been executed. That is, in the carry-over state, the execution of the transition lottery to the advantageous section based on the specific combination winning is restricted, so that the specific combination winning can be said to be unfavorable for the player. In that respect, according to the above configuration, since the content of the transferred transition lottery that has been executed is notified, it is possible to make it appear as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specific combination winning, and the transition is made during the carry-over state. It is also possible to prevent people from realizing that the lottery will be restricted.

As described above, in the winning game of the game result that triggers the transition to the carry-over state, the result of the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not always notified, and the notification may be limited. Specifically, even if the attack mode is won, the notification of the winning is made through the precursor mode, and depending on the number of games set in the precursor mode, the result of the lottery to shift to the advantageous section Will be notified in a game after the game in which the transition lottery was performed. Therefore, as described above, when a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed by overlapping with the bonus that triggered the carry-over state, the content of the transition lottery remains unreported in the carry-over state. There is a high possibility. With such a configuration, in the configuration in which the unreported content can be notified when the specific combination is elected as described above, the event that the unreported content does not exist is less likely to occur.

In addition, in the carry-over state, the unreported content is not notified in the specific role winning game, but the unreported content is notified in the game after the specific role winning game. It is possible to notify the contents of the notification in a wider variety of games.

Then, in the game after the specific role winning game, the game that has won the special replay is configured to notify the unnotified content, so that there is room for not being notified unless the special replay is won. Even if you have not won the transition lottery, you can maintain your expectations.

On the other hand, the unnotified content is notified by whether or not the section indicator is lit at the end of the carry-over state, that is, at the time of winning the bonus. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of not being notified endlessly of the unnotified content.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, a plurality of special RT states are set, and the type of special replay to be won differs depending on each special RT state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state are set as the special RT state, and the types of special replays to be won in each RT state are different. In the 5th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay are set as winning replays. There is. The winning probability of each replay is about 1 / 5.3 for normal replays, about 1 / 21.8 for special replays 5, and about 1 / 4.3 for total replays.

In the 6th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the 1st replay and a special replay 4 consisting of the 1st replay, the 9th replay to the 12th replay, and the 14th replay are set as winning replays. There is. The winning probability of each replay is about 1 / 5.3 for normal replays, about 1 / 21.8 for special replays 4, and about 1 / 4.3 for total replays.

In the 7th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 3 consisting of the first replay and the ninth replay to the thirteenth replay are set as winning replays. The winning probability of each replay is about 1 / 5.3 for normal replays, about 1 / 21.8 for special replays 3, and about 1 / 4.3 for total replays.

In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and each special replay 3 to 5 is not won. And since the normal replay is about 1 / 4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1 / 4.3.

In this modification, different RT states are set at the time of transition to the special RT state. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the special RT state processing in this modification.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. If any of the BB winning flags are set, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. When the attack mode winning flag is set, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the special zone winning flag is set.

If the special zone winning flag is set and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode is won, the process of setting the special RT command with the super attack mode as the output target to the display control device 81 in step S5105 is performed. Do. Then, in step S5106, a process of storing the current RT setting flag in a predetermined storage area is performed, and in step S5107, a process of clearing the current RT setting flag is performed. After that, in step S5108, the process of setting the fifth RT setting flag is performed, and then the special RT state process is terminated. The processes of steps S5106 to S5108 are basically the same as the processes of steps S3914 to S3916, although there are differences in the types of RT setting flags to be set. Omit.

By the above process, the game state shifts to the 5th RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the special RT state this time is the special RT state based on the 1st BB winning and the transition lottery to the super attack mode is won, the transition to the 5th RT state is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the special replay 5 can be established in the RT state, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the black BAR double-matched replay winning is established.

If it is determined in step S5104 that the super attack mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command with an attack mode is set as an output target in step S5109, and then the sixth RT state is entered in steps S511 to S51112. After performing the process for migration, the special RT state process is terminated.

By the above process, the game state shifts to the 6th RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the special RT state this time is the special RT state based on the 1st BB winning and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the process shifts to the 6th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the special replay 4 can be established in the RT state, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the replay winning of the black BAR singles is established.

When it is determined in step S5103 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S5113 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the special RT command with challenge mode is set as an output target in step S5114. After that, in steps S5115 to S5117, a process for shifting to the 7th RT state is performed, and then the special RT state process is terminated.

By the above process, the game state shifts to the 7th RT state among the special RT states. That is, if the special RT state this time is the special RT state based on the 1st BB winning and the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the process shifts to the 7th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the special replay 3 can be established in the RT state, and if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the replay winning of the black BAR tempai is established.

If it is determined in step S5113 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, a special RT command is set as an output target in step S5118. After that, in steps S5119 to S5121, the process for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed, and then the special RT state process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5102 that neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5122. The processing of steps S5122 to S5125 is the same as the processing of steps S3910 to S3913. After setting the output of the fake special RT command in step S5125, the process for shifting to the eighth RT state is performed in steps S5126 to S5128, and then the special RT state process ends.

By the above process, the game state shifts to the 8th RT state among the special RT states. That is, when the special RT state this time is a special RT state based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning and the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode has not been won, or these 1st BB and 2nd BB If neither of the attack modes and the attack mode is won, the process shifts to the 8th RT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 111, the normal replay is frequently established, and the special replays 3 to 5 are not established in the RT state. Even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the black BAR double alignment or black There will be no replay prizes for all BAR singles and black BAR double tempai.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the process proceeds to step S5129. Since the processing of steps S5129 to S5135 is the same as the processing of steps S3917 to S3923, the description thereof will be omitted.

By the way, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, a black BAR push notification effect is generated when the special replay is won, regardless of the content of the advantageous section. That is, if the RT state is the 5th RT state, the black BAR double-aligned stop roll appears by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect, and if the RT state is the 6th RT state, the black BAR push notification effect appears. By operating according to the above, a stop roll that is aligned with the black BAR single appears, and if it is in the 7th RT state, a stop roll that is out of the black BAR double tempai appears by operating according to the black BAR push notification effect. To do. Since the special replay is not won in the 8th RT state, the black BAR push notification effect does not occur.

By doing the above, since the winning probability of special replays 3 to 5 is different in each RT state, it is not necessary to draw lots for notification when the special replay is won, and it is an advantageous section from the stop result of various black BARs. You can play a game that predicts the contents of.

In the configuration in which the transitioned RT state is different depending on the content of the advantageous section as in the above modification, the game result may be set in association with the RT state and the content of the advantageous section. Specifically, for example, although strong cherry duplication 1 (IV = 32) can win the super attack mode, it is prevented from winning the attack mode or challenge mode, and a special RT that shifts based on the strong cherry duplication 1 The state is the 5th RT state. In addition, although the weak cherry duplication 1 (IV = 34) can win the attack mode, the super attack mode and the challenge mode are not won, and the special RT state that shifts based on the weak cherry duplication 1 is set to the 6th RT. Make it a state. Strong watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 36) and weak watermelon duplication 1 (IV = 38) can win the challenge mode, but do not win the super attack mode or attack mode, and these strong watermelon duplication 1 and weak watermelon duplication 1 and weak watermelon duplication The special RT state that shifts based on 1 is defined as the 7th RT state. In other overlapping roles (IV = 40 chance A duplication 1, IV = 42 chance B duplication 1, IV = 44 middle bell duplication 1), do not win any of the super attack mode, attack mode, and challenge mode. The special RT state that shifts based on these overlapping combinations is defined as the eighth RT state. By doing so, the game results that trigger the transition to each RT state are associated with each other, and the transparency of the game is ensured.

Then, in each RT state, the notification lottery probability at the time of winning the special replay is different depending on whether or not the lottery for transition to the super attack mode, attack mode, or challenge mode is won, so that the lottery for transition to each mode can be performed. You can guarantee the fun of predicting whether you have won or not.

In the configuration for associating the RT state with the game result as described above, the content of the advantageous section that can win the transition lottery may be different even if the same stop result is obtained by increasing the types of bonuses. For example, in addition to the first BB and the second BB, a third BB and a fourth BB are provided. Then, in the strong cherry duplication A in which the first BB and the strong cherry are duplicated, the transition RT state is set to the fifth RT state, assuming that only the super attack mode can be won. On the other hand, in the strong cherry duplication B in which the third BB and the strong cherry are duplicated, the transition RT state is set to the sixth RT state, assuming that only the attack mode can be won. Then, in the strong cherry duplication C in which the 4th BB and the strong cherry are duplicated, the transitioning RT state is set to the 7th RT state, assuming that only the challenge mode can be won. By doing so, it is not possible to grasp the contents of the advantageous section that can be transferred from the stop result of the specific role that triggered the transition to the RT state (the stop result that is a strong cherry prize in the above example). Therefore, when the special replay is won after that, it becomes possible to further enjoy the game of predicting the content of the advantageous section from the stop result.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, as in the above modification 3, the special RT state to be shifted is made different according to the content of the advantageous section, and the winning probability of the predetermined special replay in each special RT state is made different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, in the fifth RT state, which is the special RT state in which the super attack mode is won, the normal replay consisting of the first replay, the first replay, and the ninth replay ~ A special replay 5 consisting of a twelfth replay and a fifteenth replay is set as a replay that can be won. The winning probability of each replay is about 1 / 5.3 for normal replays, about 1 / 21.8 for special replays 5, and about 1 / 4.3 for total replays.

In the 6th RT state, a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay are set as winning replays. The type of replay to be won is the same as in the 5th RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, the normal replay is about 1 / 5.0, which is higher than that of the 5th RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 1 / 32.8. However, a winning probability lower than that of the fifth RT state is set.

The 7th RT state is also set as a replay in which a normal replay consisting of the first replay and a special replay 5 consisting of the first replay, the ninth replay to the twelfth replay, and the fifteenth replay can be won. The type of replay to be won is the same as the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state. However, the winning probability of each replay is different, the normal replay is about 1 / 4.6, which is higher than that of the 5th RT state and the 6th RT state, and the special replay 5 is about 65. The winning probability is set to be one-fifth, which is lower than that of the fifth RT state and the sixth RT state.

In the 8th RT state, the normal replay consisting of the first replay is set as a replay that can be won, and each special replay 5 is not won. And since the normal replay is about 1 / 4.3, the total replay probability is also about 1 / 4.3.

By the way, in the special RT notification process in the present embodiment, a black BAR push notification effect is generated when the special replay 5 is won regardless of the content of the advantageous section. In other words, regardless of the type of RT state, a stop roll that is a black BAR double match appears based on the special replay 5 winning.

As described above, by making the type of special RT state to be transferred different according to the content of the advantageous section and making the winning probability of special replay 5 different depending on the type of special RT state, the advantageous section depends on the winning probability of special replay 5. It is possible to perform a game such as predicting the contents of. Therefore, it is not necessary to make the winning probability of the lottery process of whether or not to generate the black BAR push notification effect when the special replay 5 is won different according to the content of the advantageous section, and the configuration can be simplified. In addition, according to the above, even if the "black BAR" symbol is pressed in a situation where the black BAR eye-press notification effect is not generated, the stop result such as the black BAR double alignment does not appear, so that the effect does not occur. It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that sometimes a stop result such as a black BAR double alignment appears.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, a configuration example in which the transition to the special RT state is performed by the re-game winning will be described.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given in this modified example.

In this modified example, a re-game is set as a privilege given at the time of winning each of the specific combinations (27th small role to 38th small role) in each of the above-described embodiments and the modified examples, and the re-game is set. At the same time, it is configured to shift to the fourth RT state, that is, the special RT state. That is, for example, when a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc. are won and a winning combination is established, a replay is given and the system shifts to the 4th RT state. In addition, for overlapping roles of each of these roles and bonuses (strong cherry duplication 1, 2, strong watermelon duplication 1, 2, etc.), if the duplicate role is won, the corresponding role winning will be established and the replay will be granted. At the same time, it shifts to the 4th RT state.

In addition, regarding the re-game in which the winning is established when the strong cherry or the like is stopped, it is preferable that the re-game is configured so that the re-game is not missed by overlapping with the first re-game. That is, when it is not possible to stop the stop roll of a strong cherry or the like, it is preferable that a prize is established in another stop roll, a replay is given, and the game shifts to the 4th RT state.

Then, in this modified example, each combination to which these re-games and the fourth RT state are to be given is designated as a specific combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific re-game), and the advantageous section is shifted based on the specific re-game winning. Make a lottery. More specifically, for example, in step S701 in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 31), when these specific re-games are won, a positive determination is made and the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process are performed. To do.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing RT state processing in this modified example.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped, and if it has stopped, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not either the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set. To do. That is, the process of step S5202 mainly shows a case where the process shifts to the 4th RT state based on the result of overlapping winning with the 1st BB and the 2nd BB among the results to which the replay is granted. ing. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. That is, in this case, the RT state is not changed even if the stop result is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S5202, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not it is in the normal gaming state, and if it is in the normal gaming state, a process of setting the first RT state in step S5204 is performed. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S5205, it is determined in step S5205 whether or not the second re-game winning is established, and if it is established, or if a negative determination is made in step S5103, the step After clearing the RT setting flag in S5206, the process of setting the first RT state is performed in step S5204. The processing of steps S5204 to S5206 is the same as the processing of steps S503 to S505.

If the second re-game winning is not established in step S5205, the RT state corresponding to the winning re-game is set in steps S5207 to S5212 in the same manner as in the processes of steps S506 to S511. Perform the processing to be performed.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the 4th re-game prize or the 5th re-game prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S5213. In step S5213, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game winning is established. If the prize is not established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning is established, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5214, the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S5215, the game state is shifted to the 4th RT state, and then this RT state processing is performed. To finish. In this modified example as well, the RT state before the transition may be stored when shifting to the fourth RT state.

FIG. 116 shows the special RT state processing in this modified example.

In the special RT state processing of this modification, since the transition processing to the 4th RT state is performed by the RT state processing as described above, the transition processing to the 4th RT state in the special RT state processing is performed. Absent. Specifically, in steps S5301 to S5309, as in steps S3901 to S3909, various special RT commands based on the specific re-game winning, which is a duplicate winning with the first BB and the second BB, are set. After that, the special RT state processing is terminated as it is without performing the transition processing to the fourth RT state in steps S3914 to S3916.

Further, in step S5302, when it is determined that the winning is not duplicate with the first BB and the second BB, in step S5310, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game is won, and if it is the specific re-game winning, it is determined. On condition that the attack mode, challenge mode, and the like have not been won (step S5311: NO), the process of setting the fake special RT command is performed in step S5312, and then the special RT state process is terminated.

Further, in this modified example, when it is determined in step S5301 that the game is not in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, the special process is performed as it is without performing the processing for ending the fourth RT state (steps S3917 to S3923). End RT state processing.

With the above configuration, the transition condition to the special RT state can be matched with the condition when various replay prizes, which are the transition conditions to the other RT state, are established.

Further, in the above configuration, since the special RT state that has been transferred without going through the first BB or the second BB winning is terminated on the condition that the transition result is stopped, the number of continuous games in the special RT state is increased. A game that estimates the subsequent advantage (whether or not BB is won, whether or not the advantage section is won) during the special RT state until it is diversified and the bell is missed (until the transition roll stops). Can be entertained.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is suggested that the first BB and the second BB are won as well as the advantageous section by using the special replay in the special RT state. In this embodiment, as in the modified example 5 of the second embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, Weak cherry duplication 1, 2, strong watermelon duplication 1, 2, weak watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1, 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2, all will be replayed by winning a prize It is assumed that the 4th RT state is given at the same time as being given.

FIG. 117 shows a part of the winning / failing lottery table in the special RT state in the present embodiment. As described above, in the special RT state, the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change, but the winning probability of the replay changes. FIG. 117 shows the winning combination and the winning probability only for the replay in which the winning probability changes. Also in this embodiment, in the special RT state, the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 is mainly won, and rarely, the special replays 6 to 11 are won. The special replays 6 to 11 are duplicates of any of the 16th replay to the 24th replay.

As shown in FIG. 118, although the 16th re-game to the 24th re-game are all given a re-game as a privilege, the stop result is different, and in particular, in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, "black" is given in the middle stage. The number of stops of the "BAR" symbol is different. In the following description, the winning mode is described on the premise that the right-down line L4 is set as the valid line in the 3-bet game.

In the 16th replay, the left reel 32L "black BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol, and the right reel 32R "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol A winning mode is set in which a winning is established by stopping at the valid line. In the 17th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. A winning mode is set in which a winning is established by stopping. In both the 16th re-game and the 17th re-game, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the "black BAR" symbol is in the middle of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Is a winning mode that does not stop.

In the 18th replay, the left reel 32L "white BAR" symbol, the middle reel 32M "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol, and the right reel 32R "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol A winning mode is set in which a winning is established by stopping at the valid line. The 19th re-game is won when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which is established is set. In the 20th replay, the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which the winning is established is set. In each of the 18th to 20th replays, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. This is a winning mode in which one "black BAR" symbol is stopped.

The 21st re-game is won when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which is established is set. In the 22nd replay, the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. The winning mode in which the winning is established is set. In the 23rd re-game, the winning mode is that the winning mode is established when the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. It is set. In each of the 21st re-game to the 23rd re-game, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of any one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. This is a winning mode in which two "black BAR" symbols are stopped.

In the 24th re-game, the winning mode is that the winning mode is established when the "white BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop at the effective line. It is set. In the winning mode of the 24th re-game, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol is aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. , The number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol in the middle row is 3 in the winning mode.

The special replay 6 to the special replay 11 are push order combinations in which the winning combination differs depending on the stop order. However, the privilege given regardless of which role wins is a re-game, and the advantage for the player is not different. That is, these special replays 6 to 11 have different stop rolls depending on the stop order, but their advantages do not change.

FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode to be established.

The special replay 6 is a duplicate of the 16th replay and the 18th to 20th replays. If the special replay 6 is won, if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the first stop order of "left"-> "middle"-> "right", the 16th replay or the 18th replay A prize is established, and in this case, when a stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the 18th re-game prize of the 16th re-game and the 18th re-game is established. , The "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. When stopped in the second stop order of "left"-> "right"-> "middle", the 16th re-game winning prize is established. In this case, even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle stage of any reel. When stopped in the third stop order of "middle"-> "left"-> "right", the 16th re-game or the 19th re-game winning is established. In this case, "black" is placed in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbol, the 19th re-game prize is established among the 16th re-game and the 19th re-game, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. If the game is stopped in the 4th stop order of "middle"-> "right"-> "left", the 16th re-game winning prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any reel. If you stop in the 5th stop order of "right"-> "left"-> "middle", the 16th re-game or the 20th re-game prize will be established. In this case, "black" will be placed in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop operation is performed aiming at the "BAR" symbol, the 20th re-game prize is established among the 16th re-game and the 20th re-game, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. If the game is stopped in the sixth stop order of "right"-> "middle"-> "left", the 16th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any reel. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" in the middle stage. If the symbol cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game winning prize will be established.

The special replay 7 is a duplicate of the 17th replay to the 20th replay. Then, as in the case of the special replay 6, when the stop operation is performed aiming at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first stop order, the third stop order and the fifth stop order are described. If any of the above, the 17th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the second stop order, the 18th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L. In the 4th stop order, the 19th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M. Then, in the sixth stop order, the 20th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the right reel 32R. Regarding the 2nd stop order, 4th stop order and 6th stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game winning prize will be established.

The special replay 8 is an overlapping combination of the 16th replay and the 18th replay to the 22nd replay. Then, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 16th re-game prize is awarded if any of the above-mentioned second stop order, fourth stop order, and sixth stop order is used. It holds, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, in the first stop order or the third stop order, the 21st re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Then, in the fifth stop order, the 22nd re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game prize and the 18th re-game prize to the 20th re-game prize are established.

The special replay 9 is a duplicate of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, the 22nd replay, and the 23rd replay. Then, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped by aiming at the "black BAR" symbol, the 17th re-game prize is awarded if any of the above-mentioned first stop order, third stop order, and fifth stop order. It holds, and the "black BAR" symbol does not stop in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, in the second stop order, the 22nd re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R. Then, in the 4th stop order or the 6th stop order, the 23rd re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Regarding the 12th stop order, the 4th stop order, and the 6th stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game prize to the 20th re-game prize are established.

The special replay 10 is a duplicate of the 16th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 24th replay. Then, if any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order is used, the 16th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do not. In addition, if any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, the 24th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. .. Regarding the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 16th re-game prize and the 18th re-game prize to the 22nd re-game prize are established.

The special replay 11 is a duplicate of the 17th replay, the 18th replay to the 20th replay, and the 22nd replay to the 24th replay. Then, if any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order is used, the 17th re-game prize is established, and the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do not. In addition, if any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order, the 24th re-game winning is established, and the "black BAR" symbols are aligned and stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. .. Regarding the 2nd stop order, 4th stop order and 6th stop order, even if the stop operation is aimed at the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation is the "black BAR" symbol in the middle. If the timing cannot be stopped, the 17th re-game prize to the 20th re-game prize, the 22nd re-game prize, and the 23rd re-game prize are established.

As described above, various special RT commands are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 based on the specific combination winning (BB winning or BB non-winning). Further, as described above, when the display control device 81 receives a command from the main control device 101, the display control device 81 performs a process such as storing the received command in a predetermined area in the command storage process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special RT command reception process that is activated when the various special RT commands are received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120. In the special RT command reception process, processing for setting the effect pattern in the current special RT state is performed according to the type of the received command.

Specifically, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with a super attack mode. If it is a special RT command with a super attack mode, in step S5402, the notification scenario table stored in the various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is referred to, and the notification scenario A is set as the effect pattern during the special RT state this time. After performing the setting process, this special RT command reception process ends.

As shown in FIG. 121, in the notification scenario table of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the push order notification effect lottery for black BAR stop according to the value of the black BAR stop counter is set to be different depending on the type of the notification scenario. ing. The black BAR stop counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times the "black BAR" symbol has stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during this special RT state, and is a counter for various types of RAM 183. It is provided in the counter area 183b. In addition, the push order notification effect lottery for stopping the black BAR is executed when any of the special replays is won. For example, in the notification scenario A, if the black BAR stop counter is 0, the push order notification effect lottery is won with an 80% probability, and if the black BAR stop counter is 5, the push order notification effect lottery is won with a 30% probability. Win.

If a negative determination is made in step S5401, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with an attack mode. If it is a special RT command with an attack mode, in step S5404, a process of setting a notification scenario B as an effect pattern during the current special RT state is performed from the notification scenario table. After that, in step S5405, in the current effect pattern, 5 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 121, in each notification scenario, when the black BAR stop counter exceeds a predetermined value, the upper limit value is set so as not to win the push order notification effect lottery. For example, in the notification scenario B set when the special RT command with the attack mode is received, if the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0 to 4, the push order notification effect lottery can be won, but the value of the counter is 5. When it becomes, the push order notification production lottery will not be won.

In the present embodiment, in the special RT state, the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R suggests the content of the subsequent game. For example, when the total number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol in the special RT state is 3 or more, it is confirmed that the bonus state is changed to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB after that. Further, when the total number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol in the special RT state is 4 or more, it is confirmed that the mode is further shifted to the challenge mode after the bonus state of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB. Then, when the total number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol is 5 or more, it is confirmed that the attack mode is further shifted after the bonus state of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, and when the total number of stops is 6 or more, the bonus state is reached. Later, it is confirmed that the mode will be further shifted to the super attack mode.

That is, the more the "black BAR" symbol stops at the middle stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the special RT state, the easier it is to shift to a state advantageous for the player after the special RT state. Therefore, as a player, it is possible to estimate the subsequent state from the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol.

Further, in the special RT state, the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed to produce a state corresponding to the special RT state. Then, the state effect is set to change depending on the number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol. Specifically, as the cumulative number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol increases from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6, the background color of the state effect becomes white → blue → yellow → green → red → It changes from gold to rainbow. That is, by stopping the "black BAR" symbol in the middle of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the background color of the state effect indicating the special RT state changes, and the state shifts to an advantageous state after the special RT state. Be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the "black BAR" symbol has shifted to an advantageous state because it is stopped in the middle stage during the special RT state, and the playability during the special RT state. Is significantly improved.

Returning to the description of the special RT command reception process (FIG. 120), if a negative determination is made in step S5403, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command with a challenge mode. If it is a special RT command with a challenge mode, in step S5407, a process of setting a notification scenario C as an effect pattern during the current special RT state is performed from the notification scenario table. After that, in step S5408, in the current effect pattern, 4 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5409 whether or not the command received this time is a special RT command. If it is a special RT command, in step S5410, a process of setting a notification scenario D as an effect pattern during the current special RT state is performed from the notification scenario table. After that, in step S5411, in the current effect pattern, 3 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S5409, it means that the command received this time is a fake special RT command. As already explained, the fake special RT command is a case where a specific role that is not an overlapping role with the first BB or the second BB is won, and any of the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the super attack mode is triggered by the specific role. This is a command output from the main control device 101 when the transition is not won. Then, when the fake special RT command is output / received, the state shifts to the special RT state that continues until the transition roll is stopped. It should be noted that when the transition roll is stopped and the special RT state ends, the game returns to the normal gaming state or the first RT state, as described in the second embodiment.

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S5409, the notification scenario lottery process is executed in step S5412. In the notification scenario lottery process, which of notification scenario E to notification scenario G is set as the effect pattern during the special RT state this time is determined by lottery from the above notification scenario table. The notification scenario E to the notification scenario G are set so that the winning probabilities of the push order notification effect lottery differ depending on the value of the black BAR stop counter. For example, when the value of the black BAR stop counter is 0, the winning probability of the push order notification effect lottery is 80% in the notification scenario E, 60% in the notification scenario F, and 50% in the notification scenario G. .. Which of the notification scenario E to the notification scenario G is set depends on the type of the specific combination that triggered the fake special RT command, and the winning probability differs. For example, in the notification scenario E, the winning probability is high when a fake special RT command is output / received triggered by a strong cherry or a strong watermelon as a specific role, and in the notification scenario F, a weak cherry or a weak watermelon is triggered as a specific role. As a result, the winning probability is high when the fake special RT command is output / received, and in the notification scenario G, the winning probability is high when the fake special RT command is output / received triggered by another specific combination.

After performing the lottery process of the notification scenario in step S5412, the process of setting the notification scenario according to the lottery result is performed in step S5413. Then, in step S5414, in the current effect pattern, 2 is set as the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter, and then the special RT command reception process is terminated.

Next, the special RT notification process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 122. As described above, the special RT notification process is a process performed in step S4515 of the push order notification process (FIG. 97) when the special replay is won in the display control device 81.

In step S5501, a process of grasping the notification scenario set in the special RT command reception process is performed. Then, in step S5502, a process of grasping the current value of the black BAR stop counter is performed. In the following step S5503, a process of grasping the type of special replay of this game is performed. That is, it is determined which of the special replays 6 to 11.

In step S5504, it is determined whether or not there is a vacancy in the black BAR stop counter from the relationship between the upper limit value set in the special RT command reception process and the special replay this time. That is, for example, when the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit value is set to 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), the special replay of this time is " If the "black BAR" symbol is a special replay 6 or a special replay 7 in which only one symbol can be stopped, more specifically, in this game, "black BAR" is placed in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if the symbol is stopped, if there is no inconsistency in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that there is a vacancy in the value of the black BAR stop counter. On the other hand, even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 and the upper limit is set to 3 (when the notification scenario D is set), "black" is displayed in the middle as this special replay. If the "BAR" symbol is a special replay 8 to a special replay 11 that can stop two or more, more specifically, in this game, if any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has a "black BAR" symbol in the middle. When is stopped, if a conflict may occur in relation to the notification content (content of the state after the special RT state), it is determined that the black BAR stop counter is full. Even if the current value of the black BAR stop counter is 2, if the upper limit is set to 2 (when notification scenario E to notification scenario G are set), a special replay is performed. Regardless of the type, it is determined that the black BAR stop counter is full.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is a vacancy in the value of the black BAR stop counter, the notification lottery process is executed in step S5505. Specifically, the winning probability of the notification lottery is grasped from the current notification scenario and the black BAR stop counter, and the push order notification production lottery is performed using the lottery counter or the like. Then, in step S5506, the result of the lottery process in step S5505 is determined, and if it is determined that the result is a winning result, in step S5507, the push order for stopping the black BAR is used as the current push order notification effect. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the notification effect is performed. Specifically, for example, if the special replay this time is the special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, one of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order is notified. Controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. Further, for example, if the special replay this time is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, an auxiliary display is provided so as to notify the pressing order of any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order. The unit 65 and the like are controlled. Which push order is notified may be randomly determined by lottery or the like. Then, in step S5508, the notification flags are set in the various flag storage areas 183a, and then the special RT notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5504 that there is no vacancy in the black BAR stop counter, or if it is determined in step S5506 that there is a vacancy but the notification lottery has not been won, then in step S5509, the current push order As the notification effect, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the push order notification effect for non-stopping the black BAR is performed. Specifically, for example, if the special replay this time is the special replay 6, as shown in FIG. 119, the push order of any of the second stop order, the fourth stop order, and the sixth stop order is notified. Controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. Further, for example, if the special replay this time is the special replay 11, as shown in FIG. 119, an auxiliary display is provided so as to notify the pressing order of any of the first stop order, the third stop order, and the fifth stop order. The unit 65 and the like are controlled. Which push order is notified may be randomly determined by lottery or the like. After that, the special RT notification process is terminated.

Next, when the special replay wins, the special replay winning process performed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123. The special replay winning process is performed as one of the all-stop effect setting processes (step S1710) in the effect setting process (FIG. 42).

First, in step S5601, it is determined from the stop rolls of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R whether or not the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If it is stopped, it is determined in step S5602 whether or not the notification flag is set. When the "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage in the situation where the notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the number of "black BAR" symbols stopped in the middle stage is grasped. Then, in step S5604, a process of adding the number grasped in step S5603 to the black BAR stop counter is performed. For example, if one "black BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row, the black BAR stop counter is added by 1, and three "black BAR" symbols are stopped in the middle row. If black BAR stop counter is added by 3.

In the following step S5605, the notification effect at the time of addition is set. Specifically, a process is performed in which the background color of the state effect for the special RT state is changed so as to correspond to the value of the black BAR stop counter after addition. Then, in the following step S5606, the process of clearing the notification flag is performed, and then the process of winning the special replay is completed.

If it is determined in step S5601 that the "black BAR" symbol is not stopped in the middle of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, or in step S5602, the notification flag is set although the "black BAR" symbol is stopped. If it is determined that the setting is not set, the process proceeds to step S5606, the processing for clearing the notification flag is performed, and then the processing for winning the special replay is terminated. In step S5606, if the notification flag is not set, that state is maintained.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, it is configured to shift to the special RT state, and when the special replay is won during the special RT state, the suggestion of whether or not the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won is notified in the push order. The composition was made by directing. By doing so, it is possible to make the stop rolls different by using the one result (special replay) won in the special RT state, and it is possible to realize the above-mentioned suggestion effect using the stop rolls.

Here, by providing a plurality of stop rolls for one result and making the stop rolls appear differently depending on the stop order, the stop rolls are not complicated by the lottery result. On the other hand, in the special RT state in which the first BB and the second BB are carried over, the execution of the transition lottery for the advantageous section is restricted, so that the carry-over state is in effect. , Pushing order bells and pushing order replays, where the advantage may differ depending on the stop order. If the push order notification is performed for the game result, the configuration may be contrary to the purpose of restricting the execution of the transition lottery of the advantageous section. .. That is, if the push order notification is performed in such a carry-over state, the push order notification may be performed indefinitely by the act of intentionally delaying the bonus winning. In that respect, according to the above embodiment, as a push order notification effect that does not cause a change in the advantage for the player, the push order notification effect at the time of special replay is provided, so that the transition lottery can be performed during the carry-over state. It is possible to realize an effect using the difference in the stop result within the range not contrary to the purpose of restricting the execution.

The suggestion effect using the stop roll is configured to be performed by the cumulative number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol. By doing so, it becomes difficult to judge the suggestion content from the suggestion by one game, in other words, the content is predicted by the suggestion over multiple games, and the suggestion production can be enjoyed for a longer time. It becomes.

In this case, in various special replays, the cumulative number of stops has already reached the upper limit of the suggested content by setting the stop order in which no "black BAR" symbol stops in the middle row. However, it is possible to generate a push order notification effect (generate a push order notification effect that stops 0 pieces), and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of a finished race due to no effect.

By configuring the notification effect when the special replay is won in the special RT state to be executed according to the notification scenario set when the special RT state is entered, the suggestion effect that can be executed over a plurality of games as described above can be obtained. , It can be easily carried out without using a configuration in which the special replay is performed while matching with the previous suggestion contents at the time of winning.

At the time of winning the special replay, even if the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the black BAR stop in the situation where the push order notification effect has not occurred, the addition process of the black BAR stop counter and the addition notification effect Was not performed. In addition, even if the push order notification effect occurs at the time of winning the special replay, if the "black BAR" symbol fails to be pressed, the black BAR symbol does not stop in the 16th replay or the 17th replay. The game wins a prize. Also in this case, the addition process of the black BAR stop counter is not performed, the notification effect at the time of addition is not performed, and the background color does not change. By doing so, in the special RT state, first, the push order notification effect is expected to occur, and when the push order notification effect occurs, the push corresponding to the black BAR stop is performed. You can expect a sense of expectation that it is a forward notification effect. Moreover, in order to change the background color, it is not only necessary to match the pressing order, but it is also necessary to aim at the "black BAR" symbol and perform a stop operation, which leads to an increase in expectations after the special RT state. And the player's operation are closely related. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the degree of expectation after the special RT state is changed according to the skill of his / her own stop operation, and it is possible to further improve the fun of the game operation.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration regarding the addition of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the maximum number of games (1500) in the advantageous section will be described in detail.

First, the first specific combination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. As described above, the first specific combination process is a process that is mainly performed when the lottery result of the game becomes a specific combination in a situation where the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode.

The change in this embodiment is that the challenge mode lottery process (step S813) is performed regardless of whether or not the challenge mode is in each of the above embodiments, and when the challenge mode is won again during the challenge mode, the challenge mode is concerned. The configuration in which the number of games is added is different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress, whether it is a mode transition lottery or an additional lottery.

That is, the process related to the lottery for shifting to the attack mode in steps S6001 to S6012 is the same process as in steps S801 to S812. If a negative determination is made in step S6005 and it is determined that the attack mode is not won, the process proceeds to step S6013. In step S6013, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is in progress. If the player is not in the challenge mode, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S6014. The process of step S6014 is a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and is a transition lottery for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.

In step S6015, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6014 has been won. If it is not won, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S6016, and the challenge mode winning flag is set. The processing of steps S6016 to S6020 is the same as the processing of steps S816 to S820.

When it is determined in step S6013 that the challenge mode is in progress, as described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is executed in step S6021. In step S6022, it is determined whether or not the lottery process of step S6021 is won, that is, whether or not the number of games in the challenge mode is added. Determine if it is a duplicate of the bonus. The processing of steps S6023 to S6027 is the same as the processing of steps S821 to S825. If it is determined in step S6022 that the addition does not occur, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is.

Next, the second section display process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

The change in this embodiment is a process of grasping and managing the number of remaining games that can be added in relation to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section after the addition processing of the number of games in the advantageous section AG (management of the number of remaining games). Process, step S6103) is performed.

That is, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed as in step S2801, and if it is being displayed, in step S6102, the number of advantageous section games AG is the same as in step S2802. Executes the addition process of. Then, in step S6103, the remaining game number management process is executed. The processing of steps S6104 to S6111 is the same as the processing of steps S2803 to S2810.

The data initialization process in step S6107 will be supplementarily described.

As described above, by performing the initialization process, various counters and various flags used during the advantageous section are cleared. For example, even if the number of continuations of the challenge mode and the number of continuations of the attack mode remain, they are forcibly set to 0, and flags for transition to the display mode such as the attack notification flag and the attack mode flag (for push order notification). Since the flag) is also cleared, the attack mode and the like will be forcibly terminated.

In this case, since the number of continuations of the attack mode is forcibly set to 0 as described above, in the game number management process (FIG. 40), for example, the number of continuations of the attack mode becomes 0 (in step S1414). The attack mode end command is output to the display control device 81 based on the affirmative determination). When forced termination during VB mode or special zone, a VB mode termination command is output based on the fact that the number of continuation of VB mode is forcibly set to 0, or the number of continuation of special zone is forcibly terminated. The special zone end command is output based on the fact that it becomes 0, but when the display control device 81 receives these various end commands in duplicate, it means that the attack mode end command has been received. The process based on (the process of performing the attack mode end effect) is prioritized. As a result, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform the attack mode end effect based on the reception of the attack mode end command (step S2306).

As described above, even when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the display effect for the normal mode does not suddenly occur, and the attack mode end effect or the like occurs as the display effect, so that the gaming machine malfunctions or the like occurs. It is possible not to misunderstand that it was done. In addition, when the forced termination is performed, a configuration different from the normal attack mode termination effect may be set so that the forced termination can be more clearly grasped. Further, if the VB mode is in the middle of the forced termination, the main control device 101 may not output the VB mode end command or the like, but may output only the attack mode end command.

<Remaining game number management process>
The remaining game number management process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. In the remaining game number management process, the number of remaining continuous games in various modes scheduled to be executed in the advantageous section can be grasped, and can be added from the total number of the remaining continuous games and the number of games in the advantageous section already executed. Calculate the number of empty games (number of remaining games).

That is, in step S6201, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining precursor modes when the current situation is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). .. In step S6202, the challenge mode continuation number G2 is grasped. The challenge mode continuation number G2 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining challenge mode when the current situation is the challenge mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). .. In step S6203, the attack mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The attack mode continuation number G3 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining attack mode when the current situation is the attack mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). .. In step S6204, the VB mode continuation number G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining VB mode when the current situation is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). .. In step S6205, the number of continuous special zones G5 is grasped. The number of continuous special zones G5 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining special zones when the current situation is a special zone in an advantageous section, and one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 40). It is subtracted. In step S6206, the number of remaining BB games G6 is grasped. The number of BB remaining games G6 represents, for example, the number of games in the remaining BB mode when the current situation is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and each time the game number management process (FIG. 40) is activated once. In addition, subtraction is performed one by one by a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the player is in the BB mode.

Here, for these continuation numbers G1 to G6, a value of 0 or more may be input even if the current mode or zone is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in a situation where a lottery for transition to VB mode is won but before transition to VB mode, the current mode is attack mode and VB mode continuation number G4 continues VB mode. The initial value of the number of games, "60", remains input. Also, in the situation where the lottery to shift to the super attack mode was won during the challenge mode, but before the transition to the super attack mode, the current mode is the challenge mode, and the special zone continuation number G5 is special. A situation in which "5", which is the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode, is still input, and "50", which is the initial value of the number of continuous games in the attack mode, is also input to the attack mode continuous number G3. It becomes.

In step S6207, a process of calculating the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by accumulating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S6201 to S6206. By performing such processing, it becomes possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section will continue afterwards. In the following step S6208, the total number of advantageous section games SG is calculated by adding the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section AG) and the number of remaining games ZG that have been executed so far. Then, in step S6209, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of advantageous section games SG from 1500G, which is the maximum number of continuous advantageous section games. Perform processing.

After performing the process of step S6209, in step S6210, it is determined whether or not the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, that is, whether or not there are the number of empty games and it is possible to add them. If the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of free games FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S6211, and then the process of managing the number of remaining games is terminated. The CPU 102 grasps that the excess flag is a situation in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section cannot be added, and more specifically, even if the addition is performed, the game for the added amount is not executed due to the forced termination at the time of 1500 games. It is a flag to do.

For example, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the advantageous section is started by setting the challenge mode winning flag in the game of ta1, the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is started from the game. After that, ta1 to ta2 is a challenge mode, ta2 to ta3 is an attack mode, ta3 to ta4 is a VB mode, ta4 to ta5 is an attack mode, and so on, even if the advantageous section continues while repeating the mode transition. The number of games up to ta5 is grasped by the number of advantageous section games AG. Further, at the time of ta5, the number of continuations of the remaining attack mode and the like is grasped by the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (accumulation of G1 to G6), and it is confirmed that the advantageous section continues until ta6 at the time of ta5. doing. In FIG. 127 (a), ta6 is a game before ta7, which is 1500 games from ta1, and ta6 to ta7 correspond to the number of empty games FG that can be added at the time of ta5. That is, in FIG. 127 (a), the excess flag is not set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the advantageous section starting from tb1 passes through the challenge mode from tb1 to tb2, the attack mode from tb2 to tb3 and tb4 to tb5, and the VB mode from tb3 to tb4 and tb5 to tb6. , It is assumed that the attack mode continues until tb7. In this case, the advantageous section game number AG is the number of games from tb1 to tb7, and when the advantageous section remaining game number ZG at the time of tb7 is added to the advantageous section game number AG, it exceeds 1500. That is, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated at the time of tb8 without exhausting all the remaining games ZG in the advantageous section at the time of tb7. In this case, the excess flag is set.

In the situation where the excess flag is set as described above, that is, in the game in which the number of games remaining in the advantageous section from tb7 to tb8 is ZG, even if a specific role is won and an opportunity to add the attack mode occurs, in the end, Since the game is forcibly terminated at tb8, the game from tb7 to tb8 can be a so-called digestion game, and there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game is greatly reduced.

Further, FIG. 127 (c) shows an example in which a large number of games are added in the special zone. For example, in the challenge mode started from tk1, it is assumed that the super attack mode is won, and the special zone is implemented from tk2 to tk3. In such a specialized zone, a large amount of continuous games in the attack mode is added, and even when the attack mode started from tk3 is digested to tk4, a large amount of ZG remaining in the advantageous section still remains. And. Assuming that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG at the time of tk4 exceeds 1500 when added to the number of games AG of the advantageous section from tk1 to tk4, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG remaining in large quantities at the time of tk4 Everything is a digestion game as described above. In that case, not only will the interest in the game be greatly reduced, but even though a large amount of addition has been generated, it can be a factor that leads to a decrease in attention. However, there may be concerns about a decline in interest. Moreover, the more advantageous sections that can be such a digestion game remain, the higher the possibility that an additional opportunity will occur in the digestive game, and the more times the additional opportunity will occur. There is also a high possibility that the player will be discouraged by the occurrence of a meaningful addition opportunity.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a device is devised so as not to discourage the player in such a situation that the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less and it may be meaningless even if the number of games is added. .. Hereinafter, regarding such a configuration, the processing when the number of free games FG is larger than 0, that is, the processing when the addition opportunity does not become meaningless will be described first, and then the processing when the number of free games FG is 0 or less. explain.

<When the number of empty games FG is larger than 0>
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode and the attack mode. For example, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed in step S6021 of the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). Further, the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S914 (FIG. 33) in the second specific combination process and step S1001 (FIG. 34) in the third specific combination process. Since the processing configuration is basically the same for the lottery process for adding the number of games in any case, the case where the game is executed in the challenge mode, the case where the game is executed in the attack mode, and the like will be collectively described below.

In step S6301, it is determined whether or not the above excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set and the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the process proceeds to step S6302 to perform a process of grasping the type of the specific combination this time. Then, in step S6303, after performing the process of acquiring the additional lottery table, the additional lottery is executed in step S6304, and then the game number additional lottery process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 129, the additional lottery table is set so that the additional winning rate differs depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific combination (mode to be added).

In the challenge mode game number addition lottery, for example, a strong cherry has a 15% chance of winning an addition, and a weak watermelon has a 5% chance of winning an addition. It is possible to win the extra in the overlapping role with the first BB, and the strong cherry duplication 1 has a 5% chance of winning the extra, and the weak watermelon duplication 1 has a 15% chance of winning the extra. That is, even with the same strong cherry or weak watermelon, the additional winning probability differs depending on the presence or absence of duplication with the first BB, and there are a mixture of those in which the additional winning probability is higher and those in which the duplication is lower.

In the attack mode game number addition lottery performed during the attack mode or VB mode, for example, the strong cherry has a 15% chance of winning the extra, and the weak watermelon has a 5% chance of winning the extra. On the other hand, with 1 strong cherry duplication and 1 weak watermelon duplication, there is a 100% chance that you will win the extra, and if it is a duplicate role with the 1st BB, there is a high probability (both with 100% probability) that the number of games in attack mode. It is set to generate an addition.

In the attack mode game number addition lottery held in the special zone, it is set to win the addition with a high probability (100% probability) regardless of the type of specific role, and various types other than the specific role. It is set to win in addition by push order replay and various push order bells. Therefore, in the flowchart of the special zone processing (FIG. 42), the processing configuration in which the lottery processing for adding the number of games is omitted is shown.

When the additional winning is achieved by the additional game number lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in the determination process (step S6022, step S915, step S1002) executed after the additional game number lottery process, and the additional game number lottery process (step S6024, step S6024, Step S917 and step S1004) are performed. The number of additional games lottery process may be performed at the end of the bonus (FIG. 41, step S1512, step S1516) or during the special zone (FIG. 42, step S1602), and the process in this case is the same. It has a processing configuration. Therefore, the lottery process for the number of additional games will be collectively described with reference to FIG. 130.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. In this case (when the additional winning is won), the excess flag is not set, so a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6402. In step S6402, a process of grasping the type of the specific combination is performed. Then, in step S6403, the process of acquiring the additional game number lottery table is performed, then the game number lottery is executed in step S6404, and then the additional game number lottery process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 131, the number of additional games lottery table is set so that the number of additional games differs depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific combination (mode to be added).

In the challenge mode additional game number lottery, for example, in the strong cherry, any one of 2 to 20 games is added, and the average value is 15 games. In addition, in weak watermelon, the number of games added is one of 5 to 15 games, and the average value is 6 games. Depending on the type of specific role, not only the average number of games added but also the average number of games is added. The width is also set to be different.

In the attack mode additional game number lottery that occurs during the attack mode or VB mode, for example, in the strong cherry, any one of 20 to 200 games is added, and the average value is 30 games. , A larger number of games can be added in challenge mode. Also, for weak watermelons, the number of games added to any of 50 to 150 games is added, and the average value is 60 games. In any specific role, the average number of games added and its value are added. Regarding the width, it is set so that the number of games can be larger than that in the challenge mode.

In the attack mode additional game number lottery that occurs in the special zone, for example, in the strong cherry, any one of 20 games to 200 games is added, which is equivalent to that in the attack mode. Although it is in the range of, the average value is 50 games, and an additional number of games may occur, which is larger than that when it occurs in the attack mode or the like. Also, for weak watermelons, the number of games added to any of 50 to 150 games is added, which is the same range as that when it occurs in attack mode, etc., but the average value is 70 games. In any specific role, it is set so that a larger number of games can be easily selected than when it occurs in the attack mode or the like.

After executing the addition game number lottery process, the game number addition process is performed in step S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, and the like. Since the processing configuration is the same for any of the game number addition processes, they will be collectively described below with reference to FIG. 132.

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. Since the excess flag is not set this time, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S6502. In step S6502, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the processing result of the above-mentioned process of drawing the number of additional games. After that, in step S6503, the process of adding the number of additional games to the number of target continuous games is performed, and then the process of adding the number of games is completed.

As a result, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode and the attack mode will be added. As described above, when the addition occurs, the addition effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 occurs. Then, the player grasps that it is possible to carry out the advantageous section by adding the number of games notified by the additional effect.

<When the number of empty games FG is 0 or less>
Next, the processing when the number of free games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set will be described.

Since the excess flag is set, in the game number addition lottery process of FIG. 128, an affirmative determination is made in step S6301, and the process proceeds to step S6305 instead of the process for the addition lottery on the step S6302 side. That is, even if the specific combination that triggers the addition is won in the situation where the excess flag is set, the execution of the processing for the additional lottery is restricted, and the processing for the additional lottery is not executed.

In step S6305, a process of grasping the type of the specific combination this time is performed. Then, in step S6306, after executing the process of acquiring the first special notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, in step S6307, the first special notification lottery as to whether or not to execute the first special notification is executed. Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 133, the first special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of executing the first special notification differs depending on the type of the specific combination and the mode at the time of winning the specific combination. That is, the first special notification lottery table corresponds to the additional lottery table, and the determination process of the presence or absence of the excess flag at the time of winning the specific combination is performed by adding the reference lottery table to the additional lottery table and the first special notification lottery table. It can be said that it is a process that makes it different.

In the present embodiment, the first special notification is a notification that presents information that may be useful to the player, and specifically, a notification that suggests a set value set in the slot machine 10. Has been done. That is, in the situation where the excess flag is set, instead of performing the additional lottery for the number of games in the advantageous section when the specific combination is won, the lottery for whether or not to execute the first special notification as a suggestion effect of the set value is performed. Do.

Regarding the first special notification lottery table Specifically, in the first special notification lottery in the attack mode or VB mode and the first special notification lottery in the special zone, the special zone has a higher probability of being the first. 1 The winning probability in each specific combination is set so that the special notification lottery can be won. For example, for a strong cherry that does not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 15% chance of winning the 1st special notification lottery in the attack mode or VBB mode, while there is a 100% chance of winning the 1st special notification lottery in the special zone. 1 Win a special notification lottery. Also, for weak watermelons that do not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a 5% chance of winning the 1st special notification lottery during the attack mode or VBB mode, while there is a 100% chance of winning the 1st special notification lottery. 1 Win a special notification lottery.

As already explained, it is easier to win the additional lottery in the special zone than in the attack mode or VB mode, and it is easier to win the additional lottery in the attack mode or VB mode than in the special zone. It is said that a larger number of games can be expected to be added if the player wins the middle addition lottery. In the first special notification lottery table, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is set according to the difference in the winning probability of the additional lottery and the expected value of the number of additional games at the time of winning, and the additional lottery is won. The first special notification lottery that is executed instead of the easy lottery, and the first special notification lottery that is executed instead of the additional lottery that can be expected to add a large number of games, to the player as the first special notification It is easy to present information that can be useful, that is, to suggest setting values.

In the 1st special notification lottery process in the challenge mode, for specific roles such as strong cherries and weak cherries that do not overlap with the 1st BB, there is a high probability (100% probability) that the 1st special notification lottery will be won. It is set. Therefore, in the challenge mode, if a specific combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set, the suggestion of the set value is generated with a high probability (with a probability of 100%). On the other hand, the strong cherry duplication 1 and the weak cherry duplication 1 which are duplicates with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (30% probability) than in the case of non-duplication. There is. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in the challenge mode, if a stop roll that wins a strong cherry etc. appears as a specific role, it is highly probable that the set value is suggested unless it overlaps with the first BB. An effect is generated, and if it overlaps with the first BB, a suggestion effect of a set value is generated with a lower probability.

In the first special notification lottery process in attack mode or VBB mode, there is a high probability (100% probability) that the first special notification lottery will be used for specific roles such as strong cherries and weak cherries that do not overlap with the first BB. It is set to win. Therefore, if a specific combination is won in a situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, the suggestion of the set value is generated with a high probability (with a probability of 100%). On the other hand, the strong cherry duplication 1 and the weak cherry duplication 1 which are duplicates with the first BB are set to win the first special notification lottery with a lower probability (30% probability) than in the case of non-duplication. There is. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set in these modes, if a stop roll that wins a strong cherry etc. appears as a specific role, there is a high probability that the set value will not overlap with the first BB. The suggestion effect is generated, and if it overlaps with the first BB, the suggestion effect of the set value is generated with a lower probability.

Here, the slot machine 10 has a configuration in which once the challenge mode is shifted to the attack mode or the like, the challenge mode is not returned even if the attack mode ends (FIG. 30). Therefore, during the challenge mode in which the excess flag is set, the upper limit of the advantageous section is the result of the challenge mode not winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode, etc., and the addition and bonus winning being repeated endlessly. The situation when the number of games is reached can be considered, and it can be said that it is a situation that can hardly occur in reality. However, if such a situation occurs, it is the case that the lottery for transition to the attack mode etc. continues to be out of the way, so in order to follow the trouble, the first special notification is generated with high probability. .. The reason why the occurrence rate of the first special notification is lower when the overlap with the first BB occurs is that if the overlap with the first BB occurs, at least the benefit of the first BB prize can be obtained. This is to ensure the balance with.

Comparing with the additional lottery, if you pay attention to the presence or absence of overlap with the first BB, for example, in the additional lottery, in the attack mode or VBB mode, 10% of the weak cherries that do not overlap with the first BB Winning with a probability, weak cherry duplication 1 which is an overlapping role with the first BB wins with a 100% probability, and the overlapping role with the first BB wins the additional lottery with a 10 times probability. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery, in the attack mode or VBB mode, a weak cherry that is not an overlapping role with the first BB is won with a probability of 10%, and a weak cherry duplication 1 that is an overlapping role with the first BB is won. There is a 30% chance that the winning combination with the 1st BB will win the 1st special notification lottery, but the ratio will be lower than the ratio in the case of the additional lottery.

In addition, in the additional lottery in the special zone, both the weak cherry that is not the overlapping role with the first BB and the weak cherry overlapping that is the overlapping role with the first BB are won with a 100% probability. On the other hand, in the first special notification lottery in the special zone, there is a 100% probability of winning a weak cherry that is not an overlapping role with the first BB, and a 30% probability of a weak cherry duplication 1 that is an overlapping role with the first BB. The winning probability is lower for the winning combination with the 1st BB.

That is, in the additional lottery, the one that overlaps with the first BB has a higher rate of winning the additional lottery, and in the first special notification lottery, the one that overlaps with the first BB wins the first special notification lottery. The ratio is set to be lower than the ratio in the case of the additional lottery. In other words, if a stop roll that is a specific winning prize appears and an additional lottery is held, it can be expected that the person who overlaps with the first BB has won the additional lottery. When the additional lottery is not performed and the first special notification lottery is performed, even if it overlaps with the first BB, the winning of the notification lottery cannot be expected as much as the additional lottery.

Here, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the forced termination process (step S6105 to step S6107) of the advantageous section is performed, various counters and various flags related to the display mode and push order notification are initialized. On the other hand, information regarding the game state (for example, the RT setting flag and the bonus winning flag) is retained without being initialized. That is, if the game to which the forced termination process is performed is in the bonus state or is in the carry-over state in which the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus state or carry-over state is retained without being erased. .. As already explained, in the bonus state, regardless of whether or not the push order is notified, the bonus small and medium-sized combination 1 to the bonus small and medium-sized combination 3 are won with high probability, and the number of medals can be expected to increase. That is, if the forced termination process is performed during the bonus state, the attack mode or the like is not returned after the bonus ends, but the expected medal acquisition value during the bonus state is not affected.

Then, if you win the duplicate role with the 1st BB in the situation where the excess flag is set, you can enjoy at least the benefits based on the 1st BB prize, although the additional lottery will not be done. Therefore, it can be said that the result is preferable for the player than the case where it does not overlap with the first BB. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the winning combination with the first BB is duplicated, the winning probability of the first special notification lottery is set low, and the balance with the benefit of the first BB winning is secured.

After executing the first special notification lottery in step S6307, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not the first special notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, the process of setting the first special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6309, and if the notification lottery has not been won, the step In S6310, a process of setting the first special notification non-execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The first special notification execution command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first special notification lottery has been performed and that the notification lottery has been won, and the first special notification non-execution command is , This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the first special notification lottery has been performed and that the notification lottery has not been won. After executing the process of step S6309 or step S6310, the lottery process for adding the number of games is completed.

Here, in the game number addition lottery process, when each process for the first special notification is performed due to the excess flag being set, the subsequent addition winning or not determination process (step S6022, step S915, In step S1002 and the like), a positive determination is made. More specifically, in the above-mentioned additional winning / non-winning determination process, an affirmative determination is made when the additional lottery is won or when the excess flag is set.

When the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S6401 of the additional game number lottery process in FIG. 130, and the additional game number lottery process is completed without performing the lottery for the number of additional games. Further, also in the game number addition process of FIG. 132, an affirmative determination is made in step S6501, and the game number addition process is completed without performing the game number addition process or the like. That is, when the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set, the process of adding the number of additional games or the process of adding the number of games is substantially not performed.

On the other hand, a set process of additional commands (step S6026, step S919, step S1006, step S1514, step S1518, step S1604), which is executed after the additional game number lottery process and the game number additional process that do not perform these substantial processes. Then, regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag, the process of setting the additional command is performed. By doing so, even in a situation where the excess flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45) on the display control device 81 side, and the additional effect setting process is activated. It will be.

<Additional production setting process>
Next, the processing of the display control device 81 when the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command are received will be described with reference to FIG. 134. As described above, the additional effect setting process is the process performed in step S1907 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 45).

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not any of the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command has been received. The case where none of the commands is received is the case where only the additional command is received without setting the excess flag in the main controller 101. In this case, the process proceeds to step S6602, and a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the received additional command. The processing of steps S6602 to S6608 is the same as the processing of steps S2101 to S2107.

In this case, for example, if a specific role is won in the attack mode or the like, as shown in FIG. 136 (a), a chance notification effect is generated, and this game is a game result that triggers an addition, and a push. It is urged to establish such a game result prize by the operation. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (b), the additional notification effect corresponding to the number of additional games this time is generated, and it becomes possible to grasp that the number of continuous games such as the attack mode has been added.

If it is determined in step S6601 that any of the first special notification commands has been received, the process proceeds to step S6609. In step S6609, the first special notification setting process is performed. After performing the first special notification setting process, the setting process of the additional effect is completed.

In the first special notification setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 135, it is determined whether or not the first special notification command received this time in step S6701 is the first special notification execution command. If it is not the first special notification execution command but the first special notification non-execution command, the first special notification setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, the display control device 81 grasps that the command for non-execution of the first special notification does not perform the addition effect or the first special notification of the addition trigger that has occurred. It can be said that it is a command to make it.

If it is determined in step S6701 that the command is for executing the first special notification, the process proceeds to step S6702 to execute a process for grasping the current set value. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the main process of the main control device 101, a set value command including information on the corresponding set value is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 can grasp the current set value by storing the set value command in a predetermined area.

In step S6703, the first special notification type lottery process is executed. The first special notification type lottery process is a process of drawing the type of the first special notification, and is either the first special notification A shown in FIG. 137 (a) or the first special notification B shown in FIG. 137 (b). It is a process of deciding whether to execute the first special notification of the above by lottery. In the first special notification A, for example, an image of a soldier who is the main character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and more specifically, an image of the soldier holding a weapon is displayed. Further, in the first special notification A, an image of a winning combination-corresponding character corresponding to the type of the game result of this time is displayed. Then, when the first special notification A is performed, the speaker 64 emits a line saying "I will win and survive !!" by, for example, a male's thick voice as the sound effect. In the first special notification B, for example, an image in which the main character is screaming with a weapon in one hand is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Further, in the first special notification B, an image of the winning combination corresponding character is displayed. Then, when the first special notification B is performed, a male scream, for example, "Uooo!" Is emitted from the speaker 64 as the sound effect. That is, the difference between the first special notification A and the first special notification B can be clearly grasped by the player by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

Whether the first special notification A or the first special notification B is selected depends on the set value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (c), if the set value is "1", the first special notification A is selected with a 100% probability, and the first special notification B is not selected. If the set value is "2", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 75% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 25%. If the set value is "3", both the first special notification A and the first special notification B are selected with a probability of 50%. If the set value is "4", the first special notification A is selected with a probability of 25% and the first special notification B is selected with a probability of 75%. If the set value is "5" or "6", the first special notification B is selected with a 100% probability, and the first special notification A is not selected.

That is, in the first special notification type table of the above example, when the first special notification A is performed, the set value is likely to be low, and when the first special notification B is performed, the set value is likely to be high. Become. More specifically, it is determined that the set value is "2" or more by performing the first special notification B, and the set value is "4" or less by performing the first special notification A. Is confirmed.

In this way, it is possible to predict the current set value from the type of the first special notification that can be executed when the specific combination is won. If the set value is from "2" to "4", "2" to "4" are obtained from the ratio of the first special notification A and the first special notification B when the first special notification is generated a plurality of times. It is also possible to narrow down which one is.

After performing the first special notification type lottery process in step S6703, it is determined in step S6704 whether or not the result of the lottery process is the first special notification A, and if it is the first special notification A, After controlling the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to execute the first special notification A in step S6705, the first special notification setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S6704 that it is not the first special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the first special notification B in step S6706, and then the first special notification setting is made. End the process.

FIG. 138 shows the difference in the notification contents when the specific combination is won during the digestion of the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section in the example of FIG. 127.

That is, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), if the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, or if a specific winning combination is won during the digestion of the remaining number of games ZG, an additional lottery is executed. Then, when the additional lottery is won, a lottery for the number of additional games is performed, the corresponding number of games is added, and the additional notification effect of the corresponding number of games is generated.

Here, in a situation where the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, the lottery table for the number of additional games and the lottery table for the number of additional games use a common table regardless of the value of the number of empty games FG. .. That is, if the number of empty games FG is larger than 0, for example, if the strong cherry duplication 1 is won as a specific role, there is a 100% probability that the additional lottery will be won (FIG. 129). Then, regardless of the value of the number of empty games FG, a lottery is performed for the number of additional games of 10G to 200G (average 30G), and the additional games are generated according to the lottery result (FIG. 131). Therefore, an additional number of games larger than the number of empty games FG can occur. For example, even though the number of empty games FG is 5, an additional effect of 200 games is generated in terms of production. obtain.

By doing so, not only the configuration related to the additional lottery can be simplified, but also the following effects can be expected. That is, assuming that the upper limit of the advantageous section is defined, as the number of vacant games FG decreases, there is a possibility that the number of additional games will not be of interest even if a specific role that triggers the additional lottery is won. high. On the other hand, on the premise that useful information for the player can be presented by the addition exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section, that is, by the number of vacant games FG becoming 0 or less, the number of vacant games It can be said that the fact that the FG is 0 or less is rather preferable in the situation where the number of empty games FG is around 0. Moreover, if it is given the impression that it is preferable for the player to exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section as described above, it is more advantageous to generate an addition that greatly exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section than to exceed the upper limit of the limit. It is thought that it is easy to expect that such an event will occur. Therefore, as described above, if the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the number of additional games is determined regardless of the value, so that the advantages and disadvantages actually differ depending on the size of the number of additional games when the upper limit is exceeded. It is possible to realize playability as if it has an influence on advantages and disadvantages by utilizing the impression that the player can feel without making it.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b), in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, if a specific combination is won during the digestion of the remaining number of games ZG, the first special notification can be executed. In this case, since it is possible to narrow down the set value depending on the type of the first special notification, it is advantageous to make the specific combination winning during the digestion preferable without giving the impression of so-called loss. It can be used as a motivation for continuing the game after the end of the section or as a material for determining whether or not to continue the game.

As shown in FIG. 138 (c), when the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less early in the advantageous section due to a large amount of addition occurring in the special zone or the like, the remaining number of games ZG is consumed for a long time. Can be done over. In that respect, in the first special notification type table, since the set value can be narrowed down by generating the first special notification a plurality of times, the game itself for narrowing down the set value ends early. The occurrence of such an event is suppressed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 138 (c), even when it takes a long time to digest the remaining number of games ZG, it is possible to prevent the game from getting bored.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the number of vacant games in the advantageous section is 0 or less and a specific role is won as an additional trigger, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the first special notification is executed as a suggestion effect of the set value. The configuration was set so that it could be used. By doing so, it is possible to provide relief against the fact that it may be meaningless even if an addition based on the winning of a specific role occurs, and to a game that can be regarded as a digestion game in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less. It is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in.

In particular, in a situation where the number of vacant games FG is 0 or less, if a specific combination is won, the specific combination is won each time during the advantageous section without waiting for the forced termination of the advantageous section. 1 By making it possible to execute the special notification, it is possible to secure the lottery result of each game that can be a so-called digestion game, especially the significance of being a specific role, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. Become.

When the number of vacant games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the specific role as the additional trigger is won, as already explained in the configuration for suggesting the set value, the specific role as the additional trigger The winning probability of is common regardless of the set value, and the winning probability of the additional lottery and the number of additional games at the time of winning the specific combination are also common regardless of the set value. That is, the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the occurrence of the suggestion effect of the set value is common regardless of the set value, and the chances of the occurrence of the suggestion effect are equally generated regardless of the set value. Therefore, for example, the probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect of the set value itself differs depending on the set value, and compared to the configuration in which the probability of occurrence is low at a low setting, even the suggestion effect cannot be enjoyed because the setting is low. Is unlikely to occur, and it is possible to equally provide a chance to enjoy the suggestion effect of the set value, that is, the first special notification, regardless of the set value.

In this case, the higher the winning probability of the additional lottery, the higher the probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect of the set value, so that it is easy to understand that the suggestion effect is generated instead of the addition of the number of games. , It is possible to easily predict from the probability of lottery that the suggestion effect is likely to occur, and by preparing the mind for the occurrence of the suggestion effect, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the suggestion effect. Become.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the mode transition lottery in the advantageous section that occurs in the situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less will be described. Examples of the mode transition lottery in the advantageous section include an attack mode (super attack mode) transition lottery in the challenge mode, a VB mode transition lottery in the attack mode, and a special zone transition lottery in the VB mode. If you win the lottery to shift to the attack mode, you will shift to the attack mode where the initial number of games is 50 games. Therefore, winning the lottery to shift to the attack mode means that 50 games in the advantageous section will be added. It can be said that it is said. Also, if you win the lottery to shift to VB mode, you will shift to VB mode where the initial number of games will be 60 games. Therefore, winning the lottery to shift to VB mode will add 60 games in the advantageous section. Can be said to be performed. If you win the lottery to move to the special zone, you will move to the special zone of 5 games. Therefore, if you win the lottery to move to the special zone, you can add 5 games to the advantageous section. It can be said that it is said.

That is, even if each of these mode transition lottery is won, the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section will be added, and even if the mode transition lottery is won in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, the game is played. It can be meaningless to a person. Therefore, in this modification, the special notification can be executed even when the mode transition lottery is won.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing a lottery process of a challenge mode, an attack mode, and a VB mode in this modified example. The challenge mode lottery process is a process performed in step S6014 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124), and the attack mode lottery process is performed in step S6004 in the first specific combination process (FIG. 124). The VB mode lottery process is a process performed in step S903 in the second specific combination process (FIG. 33). Since all of these processes have almost the same processing configuration, they will be described together below.

That is, in these mode lottery processes, in step S6801, the type of the specific combination is grasped, and in step S6802, a process of acquiring the mode lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed. Then, in step S6803, a mode transition lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 141, the mode lottery table is set so that the probability of winning each mode transition lottery differs depending on the current display mode and the type of the specific combination that triggers the lottery. For example, the probability of winning the transition lottery to attack mode in challenge mode is 90% for strong cherries, 30% for weak cherries, and strong cherries are more likely than weak cherries. There is a high probability of winning the transition lottery. On the other hand, as the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the same challenge mode, the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 which is the overlapping role with the first BB is 30%, while the probability of winning the weak cherry duplication 1 is 40%. Winning with probability, weak cherry duplication 1 is more likely to win the transition lottery than strong cherry duplication 1.

The probability of winning a lottery for transition to VB mode in attack mode depends on the rank of attack mode. For example, in a lottery to shift to VB mode based on strong cherries, if the rank of attack mode is 1, there is a 15% chance of winning, and if the rank of attack mode is 4, there is a 60% chance of winning, and the rank is The higher the value, the higher the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode. On the other hand, in the transition lottery to the VBB mode, the winning probability is set so that it is difficult (not won) to win the transition lottery in each specific combination that is an overlapping combination with the first BB. However, the additional lottery is set so that it is easier to win in the case of duplication than in the case of non-overlapping (Fig. 129), and when a stop roll corresponding to a specific combination appears, it is called the 1st BB plus addition. It is possible to play the game while looking forward to whether the benefit of the benefit or the benefit of VB mode can be enjoyed.

In the various mode lottery processes of FIG. 139, after the mode transition lottery is performed in step S6803, it is determined in step S6804 whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the mode lottery process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6805.

In step S6805, a process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed. Then, in step S6806, the process of acquiring the second special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S6807, the second special notification lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 142, the second special notification lottery table is a lottery for executing the second special notification with a high probability (100% probability) in the second special notification lottery performed as a substitute for the attack mode transition lottery in the challenge mode. Is set to win. As already explained, the challenge mode in the situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less is the case where the challenge mode continues endlessly without winning the attack mode or the like during the challenge mode, which is realistic. Is a situation that can hardly occur. Therefore, if such a situation occurs, the second special notification is generated with a high probability as a consideration for the troubles up to that point, that is, in order to aim for the troubles.

On the other hand, in the second special notification lottery performed instead of the VB mode transition lottery in the attack mode, the winning probability of the execution lottery of the second special notification is set to be different depending on the type of the specific combination. As described above, if a specific combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery of the first special notification is performed instead of the additional lottery. That is, if a specific combination is won in the attack mode in which the excess flag is set, the execution lottery for the first special notification and the execution lottery for the second special notification are performed. Each mode transition lottery and additional lottery is a processing system in which the mode transition lottery is carried out first, and then the additional lottery is carried out, and the second special notification execution lottery is more than the first special notification execution lottery. It will be done first. In this modified example, although detailed description by the figure is omitted, if the second special notification execution lottery is won, the first special notification execution lottery is not won. That is, the first special notification and the second special notification are not executed in duplicate in the same game.

In the second special notification lottery, which is executed instead of the transition lottery from the attack mode to the VB mode, the second special notification lottery is set to be won with the same probability as the winning probability in the first special notification lottery ( FIG. 133). That is, in this modified example, when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the second special notification execution lottery is performed and the first special notification execution lottery is performed, and the winning probability is the same in any execution lottery. It is common. Therefore, the lottery table can be shared in both execution lottery, and the configuration is simplified.

In this case, the winning probability is set not to exceed 50% in any of the specific combinations, and the winning probability is 30% or less in each case. Therefore, an event that does not win in the execution lottery of the second special notification and does not win in the execution lottery of the first special notification occurs in about half (49%) of the time when the specific combination is won. By suppressing the occurrence probability of the special notification in this way, the rarity of the special notification can be ensured in the configuration in which both special notifications can be performed, and the degree of attention when the special notification occurs can be suitably increased. It becomes.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6807 in the various mode lottery processing, it is determined in step S6808 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, the mode lottery process ends after performing the process of setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S6809. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6808 that the notification lottery has not been won, the present mode lottery process ends as it is. The processing of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described later.

Next, the special zone lottery in the VB mode will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 shows a part of the winning result handling process.

As described above, the VB mode is basically executed in the 3rd RT state, and the lottery process for each game is performed with reference to the 3rd RT state lottery table (FIG. 25). Then, the player shifts to the special zone based on the 7th replay prize, which is won with a probability of 5% when the BAR replay 1 (IV = 11) is won. That is, if the BAR replay 1 winning is used as an opportunity for the special zone transition lottery, the winning probability of the special zone transition lottery triggered by the BAR replay 1 is 5%, and other game results ( No other specific role) will win the special zone transition lottery (Fig. 142).

In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1310, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established. When the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S6902 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the 7th re-game prize this time has occurred during the VB mode. If it is the 7th re-game winning in the VB mode, it is assumed that the transition condition to the special zone is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S6903. If a negative determination is made in step S6901 or step S6902, it is assumed that the conditions for transition to the special zone have not been satisfied, and the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

In step S6903, a process of setting the special zone flag is executed, in step S6904, a process of setting the special zone start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and in step S6905, the special zone is continued. Start counting the number. The processing of steps S6903 to S6905 is the same as the processing of steps S1318 to S1320.

In the following step S6906, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the winning result handling process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6907. In step S6907, the process of acquiring the second special notification lottery table is executed, and in the subsequent step S6908, the second special notification lottery is executed.

In the second special notification lottery executed instead of the transition lottery to the special zone in the VB mode, as shown in FIG. 142, in the second special notification lottery table, there is a 100% probability of winning the seventh re-game. The winning probability is set so that the second special notification is executed. Further, in the second special notification lottery executed in place of the special zone, the winning probability is determined so that the second special notification is not executed in other game results (other specific roles). That is, the execution condition of the second special notification is defined as the same as the transition condition to the special zone.

After executing the second special notification lottery in step S6908, it is determined in step S6909 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, the process of setting the second special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S6910, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If it is determined that the notification lottery has not been won, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

The second special notification setting process of the display control device 81 when the second special notification command is received will be described with reference to FIG. 143. The second special notification setting process is executed as one of the other processes (step S1711) of the effect setting process (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

First, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not the second special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, the second special notification setting process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S7002, and a process of adding 1 to the second special notification counter TH is performed. The second special notification counter TH is a counter for grasping the number of times the second special notification has been performed. In the following step S7003, a process of grasping the set value is performed. Then, after executing the process of acquiring the second special notification type table in step S7004, the second special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7005.

In the second special notification type table, the type of the second special notification is set to be different depending on the value of the second special notification counter TH and the set value. Specifically, as the second special notification, the second special notification A shown in FIG. 144 (a) and the second special notification B shown in FIG. 144 (b) are provided. In the second special notification A, for example, the character of the snake hub is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the sound effect when the snake sticks out the tongue from the speaker 64 is emitted. .. In the second special notification B, for example, the mongoose character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the speaker 64 emits a mongoose cry as a sound effect. That is, the difference between the second special notification A and the second special notification B can be clearly grasped by the player by the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the second special notification type table is set so that the selected second special notification is different between the set values 1, 3, 5 and the set values 2, 4, 6. There is. Specifically, if the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second special notification A is selected at 60% and the second special notification B is selected at 40% at the set values 1, 3 and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 1, the second special notification A is selected at 40% and the second special notification B is selected at 60% at the set values 2, 4 and 6. If the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second special notification A is selected at 80% and the second special notification B is selected at 20% at the set values 1, 3 and 5. On the other hand, even if the second special notification counter TH is 2 to 5, the second special notification A is selected at 20% and the second special notification B is selected at 80% at the set values 2, 4 and 6. If the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification A is selected at 100% at the set values 1, 3 and 5, and the second special notification B is not selected. On the other hand, when the second special notification counter TH is 6 or more, the second special notification B is selected at 100% at the set values 2, 4 and 6, and the second special notification A cannot be selected.

That is, the second special notification can be narrowed down to an even / odd set value depending on the type, and the larger the value of the second special notification counter TH, that is, the number of executions of the second special notification increases. The more the even / odd number can be narrowed down, the better.

As described above, in a configuration in which the execution lottery for the second special notification and the execution lottery for the first special notification can be performed in duplicate, if the execution lottery for the second special notification is won, the first special notification will be sent. The structure is such that the execution lottery is not won. That is, the second special notification is easier to execute than the first special notification.

This is a setting value suggestion that the second special notification can narrow down the set value even / odd, while the first special notification can narrow down the set value. There is, and the second special notification is a setting value suggestion that can be narrowed down by executing a plurality of times, while the first special notification is a setting value suggestion that can be narrowed down by executing one time. This is due to the difference. That is, due to the above differences, the second special notification can gradually narrow down the set values, and the game of narrowing down the set values can be enjoyed for a long time. (2) If the special notification is preferentially executed, the game of narrowing down can be preferably realized.

After executing the second special notification type lottery process in step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006 to determine whether or not the result of the type lottery process is the second special notification type A. If it is the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification A is performed in step S7007, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated. If it is not the second special notification A, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the second special notification B is performed in step S7008, and then the second special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, even if the number of games is not added, even in the mode transition lottery, if the mode transition as a result of the lottery may not affect the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. If the second special notification is performed as a suggestion of the set value, it is possible to compensate for the mode transition lottery being performed in the situation where the excess flag is set.

When the mode transition lottery is performed, the excess flag is set, for example, by the configuration in which the second special notification is executed together with the mode transition lottery instead of the configuration in which the second special notification is performed instead of the mode transition lottery. In such a situation, the transition to VB mode can occur, and the transition to the specialized zone can also occur. In particular, the special zone is a zone in which it is easy to win the additional lottery, but it can be said that the first special notification is easily executed in the situation where the excess flag is set. In other words, especially for the specialized zone, the transition to a zone where it is easy to suggest the set value is allowed by configuring the configuration to suggest the set value together with the transition lottery instead of suggesting the first set value instead of the transition lottery. However, it is possible to suggest a set value as a compensation for the addition of the number of games (addition of 5 games) accompanying the transition to the specialized zone.

Since the second special notification is a setting value suggestion in which the ease of narrowing down the set value differs depending on the number of executions, it becomes easier to narrow down the set value when the excess flag is set early. .. By doing so, it is possible to provide fun when the number of free games FG becomes 0 or less relatively early.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, a value corresponding to the number of additional games is stored in a predetermined area based on the additional trigger that occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set. First, the changes in the game number addition lottery process and the game number addition lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

In the game number addition lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (a), a process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7101, the addition lottery table is acquired in step S7102, and step S7103 After executing the additional lottery at, the additional lottery process for the number of games is completed. That is, in this modification, the additional lottery is executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

Further, in the additional game number lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 145 (b), a process of grasping the type of the specific combination is executed in step S7111, and the additional game number lottery table is acquired in step S7112. Then, after executing the game number lottery in step S7113, the book addition game number lottery process is completed. That is, in this modified example, the lottery for the number of additional games is also executed regardless of the presence or absence of the excess flag.

The process of adding the number of games in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 146.

First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the process of adding the number of additional games is performed in steps S7202 and S7203, and then the process of adding the number of additional games is completed. These steps S7202 and S7203 are the same processes as in step S6502 and step S6503.

If it is determined in step S7201 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7204. In step S7204, a process of grasping the processing result of the number of additional games lottery process, that is, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed. Then, in step S7205, a process of adding the number of additional games grasped in step S7204 to the number of disappearing games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. After executing the process of step S7205, the process of adding the number of games is completed.

That is, in this modification, even if the number of empty games FG in the advantageous section is 0 or less and the excess flag is set and an additional opportunity occurs, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the addition is performed. And a lottery for the number of games when the addition is executed. Then, the result of the game number lottery is not added to the corresponding continuation number of the advantageous section, but is added to the disappearance game number EG separately provided.

Next, the set processing of the additional command in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 147. The set processing of the addition command includes step S6026 of the first specific combination processing (FIG. 124), step S919 of the second specific combination processing (FIG. 33), step S1006 of the third specific combination processing (FIG. 34), and end determination processing ( This is a process performed in step S1514 and step S1518 of FIG. 41), step S1604 of the special zone process (FIG. 42), and the like.

In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is not set, the process of setting the target additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S7302, and then the process of setting the additional command is terminated. In this case, the display control device 81 performs an additional notification effect.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S7303 to execute the process of grasping the disappearance game number EG. Then, in step S7304, the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table is executed, and in step S7305, the third special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the third special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery differs depending on the value of the number of disappearing games EG, and the value of the number of disappearing games EG. The larger the value, the easier it is to win. More specifically, if the number of disappearing games EG is 0, that is, if the number of games added this time is not added and won, the third special notification lottery is not won. When the number of disappearing games EG is 1 to 50, that is, when the number of games of 1 to 50 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, the third special notification lottery is won with a probability of 10%. When the number of disappearing games EG is 51 to 100 and the number of games of 51 to 100 games is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is a 30% probability that the third special notification lottery will be won. When the number of disappearing games EG is 101 to 200 and the number of games of 101 to 200 is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is a 50% probability that the third special notification lottery will be won. When the number of disappearing games EG is 201 or more and the number of games of 201 games or more is selected as the number of additional games this time, there is an 80% probability that the third special notification lottery will be won. That is, it is set so that it becomes easier to win the third special notification lottery when a large number of games should be added.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7305, it is determined in step S7306 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If it is elected, the third special notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S7307. If a negative determination is made in step S7306, or after the process of step S7307 is executed, the process of clearing the disappeared game number EG to the initial value (0) is performed in step S7308, and then the set process of the addition command is completed. To do.

The display control device 81 performs a process for executing the third special notification based on the reception of the third special notification command. Since the processing configuration of such processing is almost the same as the first special notification setting process and the second special notification setting process, the figure is omitted, but the set value is grasped and the third special notification type table is acquired. , The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the third special notification of the corresponding type after performing the third special notification type lottery.

As the type of the third special notification, for example, the third special notification A, the third special notification B, the third special notification C, the third special notification D, the third special notification E, and the third special notification F are set. Therefore, at least one of the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect of the speaker 64 is set to be different from each other, so that the player can grasp which type of third special notification.

In the third special notification type table, as shown in FIG. 148 (b), the type of the third special notification selected differs depending on the set value. For example, if the set value is 1, the third special notification A is selected with a 100% probability, and the other third special notification B to the third special notification F are not selected. If the set value is 2, the third special notification B is selected with a probability of 60%, the third special notification C is selected with a probability of 40%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 3, the third special notification A is selected with a 55% probability, the third special notification C is selected with a 45% probability, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 4, the third special notification B is selected with a 50% probability, the third special notification C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special notification D is selected with a 5% probability. No other third special notification is selected. If the set value is 5, the third special notification A is selected with a 45% probability, the third special notification C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special notification D is selected with an 8% probability. The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 2%, and the other third special notifications are not selected. If the set value is 6, the third special notification B is selected with a 40% probability, the third special notification C is selected with a 45% probability, and the third special notification D is selected with an 11% probability. The third special notification E is selected with a probability of 1%, the third special notification F is selected with a probability of 3%, and the third special notification A is not selected.

That is, when the third special notification A is selected, it is determined that the set value is one of 1, 3, and 5, and when the third special notification B is selected, the set values are 2, 4, and 6. It is confirmed that it is one of. Further, when the third special notification C is selected, it is determined that the set value is 2 or more, and when the third special notification D is selected, the set value is determined to be 4 or more. It is determined that the set value is 5 or more in the 3 special notification E, and that the set value is 6 in the third special notification F. Therefore, the set value can be narrowed down by combining the types of the third special notification.

As described above, the number of games that should have been added is temporarily stored in the number of disappearing games EG, and then the execution lottery for the third special notification is performed according to the value of the number of disappearing games EG. , It becomes possible to adjust the profit and loss with the privilege (number of games) that the player should have obtained according to the ease of execution of the third special notification.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, in the modification 2, the third special notification lottery is performed based on the set value together with the value of the number of disappearing games EG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing a set process of the additional command in this modification.

In this modification, when it is determined in step S7401 that the excess flag is set, the set value is grasped in step S7404 after grasping the disappeared game number EG in step S7403. Then, after executing the process of acquiring the third special notification lottery table in step S7405, the third special notification lottery is executed in step S7406.

As shown in FIG. 150, the third special notification lottery table in this modified example is set so that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is different, with the value of the number of disappearing games EG and the set value as parameters. There is. For example, when the number of disappearing games EG is 50 or less, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256, if the set value is 6, the winning is 6/256, and so on. Even if the number of disappearing games is EG, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the third special notification lottery. Further, even with the same set value, the larger the value of the number of disappearing games EG, the higher the winning probability of the third special notification lottery is set, as in the above-mentioned modification 2.

In the set processing of the addition command, the processing of steps S7402 and S7407 to S7409 is the same as the processing of steps S7302 and S7306 to S7308, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, by using not only the value of the number of disappearing games EG but also the set value as the parameter of the third special notification lottery itself, the number of branches for predicting the set value when various third special notifications are performed increases. , The game of predicting the set value from the third special notification can be made heavy.

More specifically, when any of the third special notifications is performed, it means that the third special notification lottery has been won regardless of the set value, in other words, the number of empty games FG is 0. In the following situations, when the third special notification is not given even though the specific role is won, the case where the additional lottery is not won, or the number of additional games even though the additional lottery is won. In addition to the case where the number is low, the case where the set value is low can be cited as a factor. That is, in any of the third special notifications, the fact that the third special notification is performed itself can be a weight in predicting that the set value is high. Then, on the premise that the player wants a high setting value, even if the type of the third special notification can suggest a low setting that is not preferable for the player, the third special notification is Due to the fact that it is being done, it is judged that the setting is high instead of low, and the judgment becomes dull, and the enjoyment of the game of predicting the set value increases.

<Modification example 4>
In the above modification examples 2 and 3, the third special notification is performed each time a specific combination is won (when an additional combination occurs), but in this modification, the third special notification is performed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. .. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If it is being displayed, the addition process of the number of advantageous section games AG is performed in step S7502, and the remaining game management process is executed in step S7503. Then, in step S7504, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value (1500). When the upper limit is reached, in step S7505, a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The total number of disappearing games TEG corresponds to the number of disappearing games EG in the above-mentioned modification 3, and is a counter to which a value corresponding to the corresponding number of games is added at the time of additional winning.

That is, although detailed description by the figure is omitted, in this modification, the number of disappearing games EG is added to the number of disappearing games EG in the process of adding the number of games (FIG. 146) (step S7205). Instead, the process of adding the number of games to the total number of extinct games TEG is performed. Further, in this modification, when it is determined that the excess flag is set in the setting process of the additional command (step S7301, step S7401), the output setting of the target additional command is not performed. The configuration is such that each process related to the third special notification (step S7303 to step S7308, step S7403 to step S7409) is not performed.

After grasping the total number of extinct games TEG in step S7505, the third special notification lottery table is acquired in step S7506, and the third special notification lottery is performed in step S7507. In the third special notification lottery table, for example, the parameters referred to in the table of FIG. 148 (a) are replaced with the total number of disappearing games EG from the number of disappearing games EG. That is, the larger the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG, the easier it is to win the third special notification lottery.

After executing the third special notification lottery in step S7507, it is determined in step S7508 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it has been won, the third special notification command is issued in step S7509. Performs output setting processing. If it is determined in step S7508 that the game is not won, or after the process of step S7509 is executed, the process of clearing the total number of extinct games TEG to the initial value (0) is performed in step S7510.

Each process for the end of steps S7511 to S7513 is the same as the process of steps S6105 to S6107. Further, in this modification, even if both of steps S7514 and step S7515 are positively determined and the advantageous section is terminated before the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the process proceeds to steps S7511 to S7513. It has a structure. That is, even when the advantageous section is terminated before the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the data initialization process (step S7513) is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to clarify the distinction between the advantageous section and the normal section.

When the third special notification is executed when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated as described above, for example, the third special notification may be executed as the end effect of the attack mode, or from the end effect of the attack mode. The third special notification may be executed before or after, that is, separately from the end effect.

By doing so, even if the number of single-shot additional games is small, the third special notification can be easily executed if the additional games occur a plurality of times. Therefore, for example, even if a specific role is won with a small average number of additional games such as a weak cherry, it is possible to give meaning to winning, and the playability after the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less. Can be improved.

Moreover, the longer the number of games after the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less, the more likely it is that the additional trigger will occur a plurality of times. Therefore, in the above configuration, the third special notification is likely to be executed. Therefore, even if the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less in the number of games soon after the transition to the advantageous section, the games after the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less can be fully enjoyed. it can.

In the above configuration, the third special notification lottery table is basically configured by diverting the numerical value of the table using the disappearance game number EG, but as a configuration in which a table with the total disappearance game number TEG as a parameter is separately provided. May be good. Since the total number of disappearing games TEG corresponds to the integrated value of the number of additional games after the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less, it can be said that the value tends to be larger than the number of disappearing games EG. For example, assuming that the winning probability of the third special notification lottery differs depending on whether the value of the total number of extinguished games TEG exceeds the upper limit of the number of additional games (300 games in the above example) or not. , The significance of being an integrated value of multiple additions can be further secured.

In addition, the third special notification is given based on the total number of extinct games TEG at the forced termination of the advantageous section, and the third special notification is given based on the number of extinguished games EG even when an additional opportunity occurs in the advantageous section. Good. In this case, the third special notification based on the total number of disappearing games TEG and the third special notification based on the total number of disappearing games EG may be different production contents, different lottery tables, or different types of tables.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, in the configuration of presenting information that may be useful to the player by suggesting a set value as a compensation for setting the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the game situation of the day when the upper limit number of games is reached is taken into consideration. The above information that may be useful is presented. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the section display is being displayed, and if it is not being displayed, the section display second process is terminated as it is. If it is being displayed, the number of advantageous section games AG is added in step S7602, and the number of remaining games is managed in step S7603. Then, in step S7604, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG has reached the upper limit value (1500).

When the upper limit value is reached, the process of grasping the set value is executed in step S7605. Then, in step S7606, by confirming the total number of games TG provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a process of grasping the total number of games on the day is executed. The total number of games TG is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of digested games (total number of games) on the day. The counter is cleared to the initial value (0) based on, for example, the setting process of the winning probability, that is, the RAM clear process, and the game number management process (FIG. 40) is started once. Each time, the number is increased by 1 by an increase process (not shown) regardless of the number of bets, the game state, and the like.

In the following step S7607, the fourth special notification lottery table is acquired, and in step S7608, the fourth special notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 153, the fourth special notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the fourth special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of games TG and the set value. Specifically, the larger the value of the total number of games TG, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to win the fourth special notification lottery. For example, when the value of the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256, and if the set value is 6, the probability of winning is 6/256. .. When the value of the total number of games TG is 4001 to 6000, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 4/256, and if the set value is 6, the probability of winning is 256/256. To do.

After executing the fourth special notification lottery in step S7608, it is determined in step S7609 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery is won, the process of setting the fourth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S7610. When it is determined in step S7609 that the notification lottery has not been won, or after the process of step S7610 is executed, the section display second process is performed after the process for ending the advantageous section is performed in steps S7611 to S7613. To finish. If a negative determination is made in step S7604, the success or failure of the end conditions of steps S7614 and S7615 is determined, and if the advantageous section is terminated, the processes of steps S7611 to S7613 are performed. The processing of steps S7611 to S7615 is the same as the processing of steps S7510 to S7514.

Next, the setting process of the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 154. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed in step S2306 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51), and is executed based on the reception of the attack mode end effect. As described above, the attack mode end command is output in the game number management process based on the initialization process such as step S7614, and the attack mode end effect is performed. ..

In step S7701, the total number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section is grasped. The total number of payouts can be grasped by referring to the total number of payout counters in the various counter areas 183b. The total payout number counter is a counter that is subjected to addition processing according to the number of medals paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section, and is initialized when the advantageous section ends. It should be noted that the counter may be a counter in which the subtraction process is performed according to the number of bets based on the bet at the start of each game, and the number of sheets corresponding to the number of acquisitions obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts may be grasped.

In the following step S7702, a process of grasping the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is performed. Then, in step S7703, it is determined whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received. If it has not been received, the process of setting the normal end effect is performed in step S7704, and then the process of setting the attack mode end effect is ended. As the normal end effect, as shown in FIGS. 155 (a) and 57 (b), the attack mode ends, and the number of continuous games and the total number of payouts are displayed.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the fourth special notification type command has been received, the process of acquiring the fourth special notification type table is executed in step S7705, and the fourth special notification type lottery process is executed in step S7706. To do. Although detailed description of the fourth special notification type table by the figure is omitted, for example, even if the fourth special notification type table suggests an even number / odd number of set values as in the second special notification type table of FIG. 144 (c). Good. As the fourth special notification, for example, the fourth special notification A illustrated in FIG. 155 (b) and the fourth special notification B illustrated in FIG. 155 (c) are provided. The fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B are configured to display the number of continuous games and the total number of payouts instead of the winning characters in the display contents of the first special notification A and the first special notification B, for example. May be.

After executing the fourth special notification type lottery process in step S7706, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not it was the fourth special notification A, and if it is the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification is in step S7708. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the notification A. Further, in the case of the fourth special notification B, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the fourth special notification B is executed in step S7709. After executing the process of step S7708 or step S7709, the setting process of the attack mode end effect is terminated.

By doing so, when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, it is possible to suggest a set value according to the game situation on the day.

Here, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the player who thinks that it should have continued more, is more likely to be discouraged from the game due to the forced termination and end the game as it is. Is also possible. In that respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less and the setting value is suggested when the forced termination occurs, for example, it is predicted that the setting is high. Even in the above-mentioned situations where the motivation for the game may be discouraged, it is possible to support the decision to continue the game. In particular, when forced termination occurs, it is assumed that a large number of medals have been won, and a player who sees such a large number of medals, even if the set value is estimated, is biased toward the high setting side. It is thought that it is easy to make the guess. In other words, it can be said that by giving an opportunity to guess the set value according to the forced termination, it is possible to stimulate the feeling of continuing the game rather than the configuration in which only the forced termination is performed.

On the other hand, for example, in the case where a forced termination occurs shortly after the opening of the game hall, if a suggestion effect that suggests a high setting for the game table or a suggestion effect that the high setting is confirmed occurs, the game table is used. Although it is a boost for the player to continue the game, another person who sees the suggestion effect sideways may predict that the set value of the other game table is low in relation to the game table. In other words, it can be said that it is not preferable for the game hall as a whole if a suggestion effect suggesting a high setting occurs at a stage or situation shortly after the opening of the game hall. On the contrary, it is considered that it is preferable as a business strategy of the game hall to generate a suggestion effect suggesting a setting as high as possible at the end of the business hours of the game hall.

Therefore, in suggesting the set value based on the forced termination, the demerit (high) that the set value is suggested by setting the configuration to suggest the set value in consideration of the game situation of the day. It is possible to suppress as much as possible the operating rate of other game consoles decreases due to the suggestion of setting, the operating rate of the game console decreases due to the suggestion of low setting, etc.).

In particular, in this modified example, since the total number of games TG is used to take into account the game situation of the day, the conventional configuration of the gaming machine is used and the information is reflected in the suggestion of the set value. can do. Further, the total number of games TG is not only managed by the game machine side, but also can be grasped by the player by the data display or the like installed in the game hall, and can be obtained from the data display or the like. After weighting the information, it is possible to perform a game in which the set value is predicted from the suggestion notification of the set value, and the enjoyment of the game in which the set value is predicted increases.

Further, the total number of games TG is configured to be cleared to the initial value based on the setting processing of the winning probability, and is not cleared to the initial value simply by turning the power of the gaming machine ON / OFF. It is supposed to be. Therefore, when the game hall is opened or closed, the set value is not changed or updated, and if the above-mentioned winning probability setting process is not performed, the total number of games TG on the previous day will be taken over. In this way, when predicting the set value, it is possible to make the prediction including whether or not the set value is changed, and the fun of the prediction game is further enhanced.

<Modification 6>
The fourth special notification lottery table may be changed as follows.

FIG. 156 (a) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which not only the total number of games TG at the time of forced termination but also the time at the time of forced termination is used as a parameter. Specifically, not only when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less, but also when the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 1/256 and the set value is If it is 6, there is a 6/256 chance of winning. In addition, not only when the total number of games TG is 4001 or more and 6000 or less, but also when the time is before 19:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 4/256 and the set value is 6. If so, there is a probability of winning 256/256.

By doing the above, for example, when the forced termination condition is satisfied with a small total number of games, for example, when the operation of this game machine starts after noon or after the evening instead of when the store opens in the morning. Even if there is, if the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied is late, the fourth special notification as a setting value suggestion is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest a set value according to the business form and operating status in the hall.

In addition, in referring to the fourth special notification lottery table, the time at the time of forced termination may be grasped from a predetermined built-in clock or the like provided in the gaming machine.

<Modification 7>
FIG. 156 (b) shows a fourth special notification lottery table in which the lower the setting, the easier it is for the fourth special notification as a setting value suggestion to be executed when the forced termination condition is satisfied with a small number of games or at an earlier time. .. That is, when the total number of games TG is 2000 or less or the time is before 13:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 128/256, and if the set value is 6, 256 minutes. There is a 4 chance of winning. On the other hand, when the total number of games TG is 2001 or more and 4000 or less, or when the time is before 16:00, if the set value is 1, the probability of winning is 2/256, and the set value is 6. If you win, there is a 12/256 chance of winning.

By doing the above, if forced termination occurs relatively early, it is easy to judge that it is a high setting, so it is possible to adjust the occurrence rate of suggestion notification with a low setting. Can be done. That is, as described above, even if a setting value suggestion of a low setting occurs in a situation where it is easy to judge that the setting is high from the number of digested games and the number of medals won, the impression is that the setting is already high. As a player, it is considered that the game is likely to be continued without taking the suggestion of the set value. Therefore, by generating a low setting value suggestion in such a situation, it is difficult for an event such as a low setting value suggestion occurrence probability to be low among the total setting value suggestion occurrence probabilities. be able to.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, the fourth special notification lottery type table is changed according to the total number of games at the time when the forced termination condition is satisfied. Specifically, when acquiring the fourth special notification type table in step S7705, the total number of games is grasped by grasping the counter corresponding to the total number of games TG on the main control device 101 side, and the total number of games is grasped. The fourth special notification type table to be acquired is different depending on whether the number is 2000 games or less and 2001 games or more.

FIG. 157 (a) shows a fourth special notification type table acquired when the total number of games is 2000 games or less, and FIG. 157 (b) shows a case where the total number of games is 2001 games or more. The fourth special notification type table to be acquired is shown. In this modification, as the fourth special notification, the fourth special notification A, the fourth special notification B, the fourth special notification C, the fourth special notification D, the fourth special notification E, and the fourth special notification F are set. The production contents are set so that they can be distinguished from each other. The fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification F correspond to the third special notification A to the third special notification F in FIG. 148 (b). That is, the fourth special notification A suggests an odd number setting, and the fourth special notification B suggests an even number setting. Further, the fourth special notification C suggests a set value of 2 or more, the fourth special notification D suggests a set value of 4 or more, the fourth special notification E suggests a set value of 5 or more, and the fourth special notification F suggests a set value of 6. It is a thing.

In the type table of FIG. 157 (a), the fourth special notification A to the fourth special notification C are easily selected, and the fourth special notification D to the fourth special notification F are not selected. That is, when the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in a situation where the total number of games is small, even / odd set value suggestion is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, in the type table of FIG. 157 (b), not only the fourth special notification A and the fourth special notification B but also the fourth special notification C to the fourth special notification F can be selected. That is, unless the total number of games is small, the set value can be narrowed down more easily than in the case where the total number of games is small, based on the establishment of the forced termination condition of the advantageous section.

By doing the above, by advancing the game (increasing the total number of games), it becomes easier to gradually narrow down the set value, and while advancing the game and aiming for medal acquisition, the set value can be estimated. Can provide fun to do.

In particular, by configuring the type table to be different according to the game situation, it is possible to realize a completely different suggestion effect according to the game situation, for example, to make the type table different in the morning and the afternoon. It can be a motivation to keep the game going by keeping the game from getting bored throughout the day.

<Modification example 9>
In this modification, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, a special section is set in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section by using the total number of extinct games TEG. First, the second section display process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 158.

The processing of steps S7801 to S7807 is the same as the processing of steps S6101 to S6107, and the processing of ending the display of the section display and the data initialization based on the establishment of the forced termination condition of the advantageous section. Perform processing.

The data initialization process of step S7807 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

As described above, the data initialization process executed at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section is a process of initializing various counters, various flags, and the like related to game playability in which the advantage is changed by push order notification. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159, the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 includes the winning flag storage area 106a, the stop information storage area 106b, the state information storage area 106c, various flag storage areas 106d, and various counter areas 106e. Is provided. In each of these areas 106a to 106e, an area for storing various information (advantageous information, specific information) used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information (normal information) also used in the normal section, respectively. And are provided separately. More specifically, an area for storing various information used in the advantageous section and an area for storing various information also used in the normal section are separately provided as areas that do not overlap with each other.

Specifically, the winning flag storage area 106a is provided with an advantageous section-corresponding winning flag storage area 201 and a normal section-corresponding winning flag storage area 202. The stop information storage area 106b is provided with an advantageous section correspondence stop information storage area 203 and a normal section correspondence stop information storage area 204. The state information storage area 106c is provided with an advantageous section correspondence state information storage area 205 and a normal section correspondence state information storage area 206. The various flag storage areas 106d are provided with various flag storage areas 207 corresponding to advantageous sections and various flag storage areas 208 corresponding to normal sections. The various counter areas 106e are provided with various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections and various counter areas 210 corresponding to normal sections.

Of these, an area for storing flags for grasping various display modes such as a challenge mode flag and an attack mode flag, and a flag for grasping that an additional condition has been satisfied such as a challenge mode additional flag and an attack mode additional flag. The area for storing the excess flag and the area for storing the excess flag are provided in the various flag storage areas 207 corresponding to the advantageous section. On the other hand, an area for storing the bet number flag for grasping the number of bets in each game, an area for storing the freeze effect flag for grasping that the conditions for generating the freeze effect are satisfied, and a payout process are performed. An area for storing the payout flag for grasping that the flag is being paid out is provided in the various flag storage areas 208 corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, an area for storing the precursor game number G1, an area for storing the challenge mode continuation number G2, an area for storing the attack mode continuation number G3, an area for storing the advantageous section game number AG, and an area for storing the empty game number FG. Etc. are provided in various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections. On the other hand, the area for storing the total number of games TG, the area for storing the inter-BB game counter for counting the number of games between bonuses, the area for storing the payout medal counter for counting the number of medals paid out, etc. , It is provided in various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section.

In the data initialization process in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 160, the process of initializing the advantageous section corresponding winning flag storage area 201 is performed in step S7901. In the following step S7902, a process of initializing the advantageous section corresponding stop information storage area 203 is performed. In the following step S7903, a process of initializing the advantageous section correspondence state information storage area 205 is performed. In the following step S7904, a process of initializing the various flag storage areas 207 corresponding to the advantageous section is performed. In the following step S7905, a process of initializing various counter areas 209 corresponding to advantageous sections is performed. Then, in step S7906, the process of initializing the information or parameters related to the other advantageous sections is performed, and then the data initialization process is terminated.

That is, in the data initialization process executed based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, the initialization processing of various areas 201, 203, 205, 207, 209 related to the advantageous section is performed, while the initialization process is related to the advantageous section. No initialization processing is performed for various areas 202, 204, 206, 208, 210 that are used without distinguishing between normal sections and advantageous sections. Then, as described above, various areas related to these advantageous sections and various areas not related to the advantageous section or used without distinction between the normal section and the advantageous section are provided as separate areas so as not to overlap. Therefore, when the above initialization process is performed, an error that the area that should be initialized is not initialized or an error that the area that should not be initialized is initialized occurs. Is preferably suppressed.

Returning to the description of the second section display process, after the data initialization process is performed in step S7807, the special section setting process is performed in step S7808, and then the second section display process is terminated. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7804, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in step S7809 or step S7810, and if the end condition is satisfied, steps S7805 to step S7808 are performed. After the process of is performed, the second section display process is terminated. If the end condition is not satisfied, the second section display process is terminated without performing the processes of steps S7805 to S7808. The processing of step S7809 and step S7810 is the same as the processing of step S6108 and step S6109.

The special section setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 161.

In step S8001, a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 159, the total number of disappearing games TEG is stored in the counter area 210 corresponding to the normal section in the RAM 106. Therefore, even if the above data initialization process is performed, the total number of disappearing games TEG is not initialized. That is, when the game number addition process is performed in the situation where the free game number FG is 0 or less, the addition number is added to the counters of the various continuation numbers in the various counter areas 209 corresponding to the advantageous section such as the attack mode continuation number G3. Instead, the value corresponding to the total number of disappearing games TEG in the various counter areas 210 corresponding to the normal section is added.

In other words, in this modification, when an additional opportunity occurs, a process of storing the number of additional games as information used during the advantageous section in various areas for the advantageous section is executed, and the number of the additional games is stored in various areas. As information that is also used during the normal section, there are cases where the total number of disappearing games TEG is to be stored in various areas for the normal section, and whether or not the number of empty games FG is 0 or less, that is, exceeds. The process of determining whether or not the flag is set can be said to be the process of selecting which area the storage process is to be performed. As described above, in this modification, it is possible to make the area for storing the information of the event occurring in the advantageous section different depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag. By doing so, it is possible to take over the information of the event that occurred in the advantageous section to the normal section while assuming that the initialization process is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

In the following step S8002, a process of acquiring a special section table from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. Here, the special section is provided as a section in which the suggestion effect of the set value is likely to occur in the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the special section table is set so that the number of games in the special section differs depending on the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG. Specifically, if the total number of disappearing games TEG is 0, no special section is set, if the total number of disappearing games TEG is 1 to 50, a special section of 10 games is selected, and the total number of disappearing games TEG is 51. If it is ~ 100, a special section of 30 games is selected, and the larger the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG, the longer the special section is selected.

After specifying the number of games in the special section in the processes of steps S8001 and S8002, in step S8003, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the specified number of games into the special section game number PG is performed. Then, in step S8004, it is determined whether or not the input special section game number PG is larger than 0, and if it is larger than 0, a process of setting the special section flag in step S8005 is performed, and in step S8006. The special section command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. These special section game number PGs are counters for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the special section, and the special section flags are flags for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is a special section. Further, the special section command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that it is a special section.

If it is determined in step S8003 that the number of special section games PG is 0, or after the process of step S8006 is executed, the process proceeds to step S8007. In step S8007, a process of clearing the total number of extinct games TEG to the initial value (0) is performed. After that, the special section setting process is terminated. That is, when the total number of extinct games TEG is 0 at the end of the advantageous section, the special section flag is not set and the special section is not set.

In the special section in this modification, a push order notification effect is generated when a predetermined special replay is won. As shown in the second embodiment and the like, although the type of re-game result to be won differs depending on the stop order, the privilege to be given is different from the special replay regardless of which re-game result is won. This is a result of a re-game and no transition of the game state such as the RT state.

FIG. 163 shows a lottery table for a normal gaming state in this modified example. In this modified example, special replay 1 and special replay 2 can be won as special replays in the normal game state. The special replay 1 and the special replay 2 are as described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, and the special replay 1 is a duplicate of the first replay, the ninth replay, and the eleventh replay to the fifteenth replay. , Special replay 2 is an overlapping role of the first replay, the tenth replay to the fifteenth replay. Then, the re-games to be won differ depending on the stop order, and the corresponding re-game prizes are given for each stop, such as downward-sloping replay, black BAR tempai off, black BAR double tempai off, black BAR single match, and black BAR double match. To establish. The total value of the winning probabilities of the special replay 1, the special replay 2, and the normal replay is set to be the same as the winning probability of the normal replay in the lottery table for the normal game state in each of the above embodiments.

The processing during the special section will be described below.

FIG. 164 (a) is a flowchart showing the number of games management process in this modified example.

In this modification, when it is determined in step S1401 that the number of bets is 3, it is determined in step S8101 whether or not the above-mentioned specific section flag is set. If it is set, in step S8102, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal game state or the first RT state, in step S8103, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of special section games PG is performed. After that, it is determined in step S8104 whether or not the number of special section games PG has become 0, and if it becomes 0, a process of clearing the specific section flag is performed in step S8105. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, step S8102 or step S8104, or after the process of step S8105 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1402.

FIG. 164 (b) is a flowchart showing the push order combination processing in this modification.

In this modification, if a negative determination is made in step S4419, the process proceeds to step S8111. In step S8111, it is determined whether or not the game result of this game is the above-mentioned special replay 1 or special replay 2 winning. If either the special replay 1 or the special replay 2 is won, the process proceeds to step S8112, and it is determined whether or not the specific section flag is set. If the specific section flag is set, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S8113, and then the main push order combination process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S8111 or step S8112, the push order combination process ends without setting the output of the push order notification command.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a special replay notification process in this modification. The special replay notification process corresponds to the special RT notification process in the second embodiment and the like. That is, it is a process executed in step S4515 when it is determined in step S4514 of the push order notification process (FIG. 98) that the special replay is won.

In step S8201, a process of grasping the set value is executed. In the following step S8202, a process of acquiring the push order notification lottery table at the time of winning the special replay is executed from the various table storage areas 182a. As shown in FIG. 162 (b), the push order notification lottery table at the time of winning the special replay is set so that the occurrence rate of the push order notification effect differs depending on the set value and the winning mode when the push order notification effect occurs differs. Has been done.

Specifically, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the push order notification effect will occur, and the higher the set value, the more the black BAR singles and the black BAR doubles when the push order notification effect occurs. It is set so that the ratio of selecting the push order notification effect of the winning mode that is the same is high. For example, if the set value is 1, the push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25%, and the push order notification effect that is out of the black BAR double tempai is selected as the winning mode at the time of occurrence. Further, if the set value is 2, the push order notification effect is generated with a probability of 25% as in the case where the set value is 1, but a part of the push order notification effect is selected so that the black BAR singles are aligned. Will be done. The push order notification effect in which the black BAR singles are aligned corresponds to the suggestion effect suggesting a set value of 2 or more. When the set value is 4 or more, when the push order notification effect is generated, the push order notification effect with the black BAR double alignment is also selected, and the push order notification effect with the black BAR double alignment is set to the set value 4 or more. Corresponds to suggestive production.

In step S8203, the push order notification lottery is executed based on the push order notification lottery table acquired in step S8202. In such a lottery process, whether or not to generate the push order notification and the type of push order notification effect (corresponding winning mode) when the push order notification is generated are drawn. Then, based on the lottery result, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding push order notification effect is performed in step S8204.

As described above, depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the storage area is different and added depending on whether the number of games drawn based on the addition opportunity is stored as the number of additional games or the total number of disappeared games is stored as TEG. The number of games was subject to the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and the total number of extinct games TEG was excluded from the initialization process. As a result, as a configuration for performing initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, it occurred during the advantageous section within a range not contrary to the purpose of clearly indicating the advantageous section with a section display or the like and not increasing the performance of the consecutive villa too much. Event information can be taken over after the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to fill the gap between the advantageous section and the normal section, which may occur by forcibly terminating the advantageous section, and enhance the interlocking of the two sections in terms of production.

Then, based on the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG, a special section in which the suggestion effect of the set value is likely to occur is set after the end of the advantageous section. As a result, it becomes possible to estimate the set value after the event that is unfavorable to the player, such as the occurrence of an additional trigger in the situation where the excess flag is set in the advantageous section, occurs. It can be used as a compensation for the above-mentioned unfavorable event.

In particular, even if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, it will be forcibly terminated at the maximum number of games in the end, so normally, the more the additional opportunity occurs, the less the intention to continue the game. , It is thought that the game will end as it is at the time of forced termination. On the other hand, since it is possible to set a special section that is so long that the additional opportunity occurs, the game should not be ended immediately at the time of forced termination, but at least the special section should be digested before the game is terminated. It becomes possible to urge. Then, if a setting value suggestion preferable to the player occurs during the special section, there is a high possibility that the game will be continued as it is, which can lead to an improvement in the operating rate.

In this modification, since the setting value suggestion is made by the stop roll (stop order) of the special replay, it gives the impression that the player makes the suggestion of the preferable setting value appear by his / her own operation. It is easy, and the degree of attention to the effect of suggesting such a set value is preferably increased.

In the special replay, the stop result differs depending on the stop order, but if the player does not want to generate the suggestion of the set value, it is preferable to operate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a stop order different from the notified stop order. .. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the suggestion of the set value from being generated against the player's intention. That is, for example, for a player who already knows that the setting is high, it may be considered unfavorable for the surrounding players to know that his or her game table is set high. Therefore, by making it as described above, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to generate the setting value suggestion, so that the production content can be as desired by the player.

<Modification example 10>
In this modification, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the push order notification effect is generated during the special section, the precursor game number table in the special section is changed. FIG. 166 (a) shows a table of the number of bonus precursor games in the normal mode in a situation not in the special section, and FIG. 166 (b) shows a table of the number of bonus precursor games in the normal mode during the special section. ing.

FIG. 166 (a) is as described with reference to FIG. 35, and the number of precursor games is set so that any one of 1 to 2 games is selected. Then, the number of precursor games that are likely to be selected differs depending on the content of the advantageous section that is duplicated with the bonus. Specifically, it is easier to select the number of precursor games that are longer in the duplicate winning in the attack mode than in the duplicate winning in the challenge mode, and the duplicate winning in the super attack mode is more than in the duplicate winning in the attack mode. It is easy to select a long precursor game number.

As shown in FIG. 166 (b), during the special section, the number of precursor games is set so that any one of 0 to 4 games is selected, which is shorter than the case of FIG. 166 (a). It tends to be the number of precursor games. Further, during the special section, the larger the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG that triggered the setting of the special section, the easier it is to select a short precursor game number, and further, the shorter the precursor that the multiple winning modes are advantageous. The number of games is set so that it can be easily selected.

More specifically, in the duplicate winning with the challenge mode, if the total number of disappearing games TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is 1 to 50, the number of precursor games of 4 games is selected, while the total number of disappearing games. If the TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected. In addition, in the duplicate winning with the attack mode, if the total number of disappearing games TEG that triggered the setting of this special section is 1 to 50, the number of precursor games of 2 or 4 games is selected, while the total number of disappearing games is selected. If the number TEG is 201 or more, the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected.

In this case, for example, as a special section flag, if the total number of disappearing games TEG is 1 to 50, the special section flag 1 is set according to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG, and the total number of disappearing games TEG is 51 to 100. If so, the special section flag 2 is set, if the total number of disappearing games TEG is 101 to 200, the special section flag 3 is set, if the total number of disappearing games TEG is 201 or more, the special section flag 4 is set, and so on. However, it is preferable that the total number of extinct games TEG when setting the special section can be determined ex post facto.

As described above, the superiority of the special section is not limited to the suggestion of the set value, but can be guaranteed by the number of precursor games of the bonus. In particular, when a bonus such as the first BB is won, the player is less likely to lose the bonus if the bonus winning is established promptly because the bonus winning is not duplicated. From this point of view, by making the number of precursor games likely to be shortened during the special section as described above, it is possible to supplement the additional invalidity during the advantageous section.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, the special notification is executed based on the addition that the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in this modified example.

In step S8301, it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set. If the excess flag is set, the process of adding the number of games is terminated as it is. If the excess flag is not set and the number of empty games FG is still 0 or more, the process proceeds to the addition process in step S8302 and subsequent steps. In step S8302, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. Then, in step S8303, by grasping the number of empty games FG, whether or not the number of additional games this time is equal to or greater than the number of empty games FG, that is, whether or not the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less due to this addition. Judge whether or not. If it does not become 0 or less, the process of adding the number of additional games to the number of target continuous games is performed in step S8304, and then the process of adding the number of games is completed.

On the other hand, when the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less due to this addition, in step S8305, the number of additional games is added to the number of target continuous games, and then in step S8306, the first step is performed. 1 After setting the special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81, the process of adding the number of games is completed.

In this case, when the addition occurs, the addition command may be output, or the addition command and the first special notification execution command may be output. When the additional command and the first special notification execution command are received, for example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (a) and 168 (b), the number of additional games is combined with the first special effect A and the first special effect B. The character may be displayed so that the occurrence of the addition and the suggestion of the set value can be grasped at the same time.

Even with regard to the addition that triggers the excess flag to be set, at least the excess of the maximum number of games cannot be fully benefited, but according to this modification, such a loss is also possible. , It is possible to supplement by presenting information that can be useful to the player, such as suggesting a set value. In addition, for example, when the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less at the time of addition that occurs at the limit of the maximum number of games, there is a situation where it is not possible to expect the occurrence of special effects in subsequent games (a situation where the number of games is small). However, the special notification can be preferably generated.

Moreover, by making it possible to simultaneously grasp the information that the addition has occurred (character corresponding to the number of additional games) and the information suggesting the set value (first special notification A and first special notification B) as described above. , It is possible to present the information of the setting value suggestion with a close relationship to the event that is preferable for the player, such as adding the information of the setting value suggestion, and further strengthen the impression that the information of the setting value suggestion is useful for the player. Is possible. That is, for example, it is assumed that luck is involved in the result of the game, and for a player who disregards the high and low of the set value, even if the information suggesting the set value is presented, it cannot be useful information at all. Be done. In that respect, as described above, by presenting the information of the setting value suggestion in association with the strong addition effect of the luck element, it is understood that the luck element is strongly reflected in the setting value suggestion as well. It is possible to make an impression that the setting value suggestion is useful.

It should be noted that the information suggesting the set value and the information indicating that the addition has occurred do not have to be presented at the same time, and the information indicating that the addition has occurred first is presented, and the setting value suggestion is made later. The information may be presented together with the information that the addition has occurred, and at least there may be a period in which both are presented in duplicate.

<Modification example 12>
The values of the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a third special notification setting process in this modified example. The third special notification setting process is a process executed in place of or in addition to the first special notification setting process, and is a process executed as one process of the setting process of the additional effect.

As described above, the third special notification is a special notification executed based on the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG. In this modification, in the set processing of the additional command of FIG. 147, the information of the number of disappearing games EG is set for the third special notification command, and then the information is output to the display control device 81. Therefore, by receiving the third special notification command, the display control device 81 can grasp the number of additional games of the additional effect that should have occurred this time. The third special notification command may be configured to set information on the total number of disappearing games TEG.

In step S8401, based on the received third special notification command, a process of grasping the information corresponding to the disappearance game number EG is performed. Then, in step S8402, the number of additional games that should have occurred this time is grasped. In step S8403, the additional effect is generated by the corresponding number of additional games. In this case, it may be the same effect as the additional effect in the normal time (for example, FIG. 136 (b)), or it may be different from the additional effect in the normal time by changing the background or the like. The configuration may be such that the player can grasp it. Then, in step S8404, the special game number display unit TGH is updated, and then the third special notification setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the special game number display unit TGH displays the number of normal games remaining in the advantageous section (attack mode, etc.) including the upper limit of 1500 games on the auxiliary display unit 65. The unit GH is set in a different area, and more specifically, a special game number display unit TGH is provided in an area adjacent to the normal game number display unit GH. Therefore, when the normal game number display unit GH is to be visually recognized, the special game number display unit TGH is naturally easily seen, and the special game number display unit TGH is provided in an area that is difficult for the player to overlook. Both the display units GH and TGH are set in an area that does not overlap with the push order notification effect.

Further, the counter that displays the number of games on the special game number display unit TGH is set to be different in color, size, shape, etc. from the counter that displays the number of games on the normal game number display unit GH. It is easy to give the impression that the contents of the counters of the parts GT and TGH are different. Moreover, the counter that displays the number of games on the special game number display unit TGH is displayed larger than that of the normal game number display unit GH, and the counter of the special game number display unit TGH is only more conspicuous. Instead, it is easy to give the impression that the content is meaningful to the player.

Here, the normal game number display unit GH is updated according to the progress of the game in the advantageous section. That is, each time one game is exhausted, the counter of the normal game number display unit GH is updated as a counter subtracted by one. On the other hand, the counter of the special game number display unit TGH is updated based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity, and is not subtracted when the game is digested. In particular, when the special game number display unit TGH is updated, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), the counter is updated so as to be increased instead of being subtracted based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity. Will be done. Therefore, the counter of the special game number display unit TGH is a counter that increases as it approaches the end of the advantageous section, as compared with the counter of the normal game number display unit GH being subtracted. It is easy to associate that some beneficial event will occur, and it can be expected to have the effect of alleviating the feeling of loss due to the forced termination of the advantageous section.

Also in this modification, a configuration that suggests a set value according to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section (a configuration that suggests a set value as an effect at the end, or a configuration that sets a special section is set. The configuration that suggests the value). That is, in fact, the larger the value of the special game number display unit TGH, the easier it is for the player to present useful information, and it becomes possible to produce a game that matches the player's expectations.

As described above, in a configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, if an addition exceeding the upper limit number of games occurs, it is usually meaningless for the player to add more than the upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is considered that we do not want to know the fact that the addition has occurred and the number of additional games. From that premise, it is a normal idea to hide the fact that the addition occurred in such a situation and the number of addition games so that the player does not understand it, that is, not to notify it. is there.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present embodiment, such an addition has occurred and the number of additional games is meaningful, and the value displayed by the special game number display unit TGH suggests a set value. It is possible to play a game while expecting it to be performed. In this way, by intentionally displaying the number of games that are not normally displayed, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which a set value is suggested based on the number of games.

Moreover, since it is intentionally displayed in this way, even if the configuration is such that the setting value is not suggested, it is predicted that the display will have some meaning as a player. It is thought that the game is played while playing. In other words, since the display is intentionally displayed, the player himself can predict the significance and benefits of the display, and the effect of entertaining the prediction itself can be expected.

The above-mentioned special game number display unit TGH may be configured to be displayed even at the end of an advantageous section such as an end effect of an attack mode. By doing so, the player can calculate the total number of continuous games and the total number of medals won when the advantageous section is not forcibly terminated from the special game number display unit TGH. Even though I was able to win a medal, it is possible to make it a story of memories with friends.

<Modification example 13>
In this modification, notification is performed using the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on the display. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of remaining games on the display.

In this modification, as a predetermined additional effect, a post-addition effect is set in which a part or all of the number of additional games is notified in a game after the game in which the additional opportunity occurs. That is, a part of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is notified first as the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, and the number of remaining games in the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is notified later. Assuming that the number of games on the side to be notified first is the remaining number counter HG for display and the number of games on the side to be notified later is the counter BG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is added to the remaining number counter HG for display. It becomes equal to the total value with the counter BG. The remaining number counter HG for display is subtracted by 1 each time the game is digested, and the post-addition counter BG is not subtracted even if the game is digested unless the post-addition effect occurs. The display remaining number counter HG and the post-addition counter BG are both counters managed by various counter areas 183b of the display control device 81, but may be counters managed by the main control device 101.

For example, when the number of remaining games on the display reaches a predetermined number (1 in this modification) while the attack mode is being digested, that is, the remaining number counter HG for display becomes a predetermined number (1). If this happens, a post-addition effect will occur. In the post-addition effect, for example, as in the case of the add-on effect, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150) has been added. As a result, the post-addition counter BG is subtracted by the notification amount (it becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount by the post-addition effect, and the display is also the display remaining number. The value corresponds to the counter HG (150 in the figure after one game is digested).

The process for performing the post-addition effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process in the present modification, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the additional effect setting process. The post-addition effect setting process is performed by other processes among the effect setting processes (FIG. 43) in the display control device 81.

If it is determined in step S8501 that the first special notification command has not been received in the additional effect setting process, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed in step S8502. Then, in step S8503, the post-addition lottery process is executed. The post-addition lottery process is a lottery process of whether to notify the number of additional games this time in the game concerned or in a later game, that is, whether or not to add up. For example, it is set so that the ratio to be added is different depending on the type of the specific combination.

In the following step S8504, it is determined whether or not the player has won the extra lottery. If the game is not won, that is, if it is determined that the number of additional games this time is to be notified in the game, the process proceeds to step S8505, and a process of adding the number of additional games this time to the remaining number counter HG for display is performed. After that, in steps S8506 to S8511, the lottery for the execution timing of the additional notification effect and the setting of the additional notification effect are performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of additional games this time will be notified in a later game, a process of setting the additional flags in the various flag storage areas 183a is performed in step S8512. If the post-addition flag has already been set in step S8512, that state is maintained. Then, in step S8513, after performing the process of adding the number of the added games this time to the post-addition counter BG, the setting process of the additional effect is completed.

When the first special notification command is received in step S8501, the first special notification setting process is performed in step S8514, but the first special notification setting process in this modification will be described later.

In the post-addition effect setting process, in step S8601, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG is 1 as a predetermined value. As described above, the remaining number counter HG for display is subtracted by 1 by a subtraction process (not shown) every time one game is consumed in the advantageous section, and the display of the auxiliary display unit 65 is also updated corresponding to the subtraction process. Will be done. If the display remaining counter HG is 1, it is determined in step S8602 whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the remaining number counter HG for display is not 1, or if the post-addition flag is not set, the post-addition effect setting process is terminated as it is.

When the display remaining counter HG is 1 and the post-addition flag is set, the process of grasping the value of the post-addition counter BG is executed in step S8603. Then, in step S8604, the number of games for the additional production this time is determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether to notify all of the post-addition counter BG as a post-addition effect or to notify a part of the post-addition counter BG as a post-addition effect. In such a lottery, it is advisable to make the total or a part different depending on the size of the value of the post-addition counter BG, and if it is a part, make the ratio different. In this modified example, in any case, all of them are notified as a post-addition effect.

In the following step S8605, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the number of games to be notified is added. In the following step S8606, a process of adding the value of the post-addition counter BG for the notified amount to the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Then, in step S8607, a process of subtracting the value added to the notification and display remaining number counter HG from the post-addition counter BG is performed, and on condition that the post-addition counter BG is 0 in step S8608. In step S8609, a process of clearing the post-addition flag is performed. When the post-addition counter BG is not 0 in step S8608, or after the process of step S8609 is performed, the post-addition effect setting process is terminated.

In the configuration for performing the post-addition effect as described above, for example, when a large amount of extra is added to the post-addition counter BG, the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set. Even so, a specific event may occur in which it is not possible to grasp that the number of remaining games has reached the upper limit from the number of remaining games on the display. In this modified example, the specific event is used to eliminate the feeling of loss when the specific role is won.

The first special notification setting process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 174.

In step S8701, it is determined whether or not the post-addition flag is set. If the post-addition flag is not set, the first special notification process is performed in steps S8702 to S8707. The process of step S8702 to step S8707 is the same as the process of step S6701 to step S6706.

If the post-addition flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8708 to perform a process of grasping the post-addition counter BG. Then, in step S8709, the number of games to be added in a pseudo manner is determined by lottery. In this case, the number of pseudo-additional games is set to the upper limit of the post-addition counter BG, and for example, if the post-addition counter BG is 100, it is determined by lottery so that any of 100 or less games is selected.

Specifically, for example, the display control device 81 also stores a lottery table similar to the number of additional games lottery table in the normal time (when the addition is actually generated) in FIG. 131. Then, based on the lottery table and the result of this game, a pseudo number of additional games is selected by lottery. If the number of games selected by the lottery is equal to or less than the post-addition counter BG, the number of games is determined as the number of pseudo-addition games this time. On the other hand, if the number of games selected by the lottery is larger than the post-addition counter BG, the value of the post-addition counter BG is determined as the number of pseudo-addition games this time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a pseudo-addition exceeding the post-addition counter BG from occurring while making it as if the addition is actually performed in relation to the specific role that triggered the addition. ..

In the following step S8710, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect is performed by the number of pseudo-addition games determined in step S8709. In this case, if the effect is the same as the additional effect that normally occurs, it is possible to give a strong impression that the additional effect has occurred triggered by the result of this game.

In the following step S8711, the processing of adding the notification amount to the display remaining number counter HG is performed, and in step S8712, the notification amount is added and subtracted from the counter BG. Then, it is determined in step S8713 whether or not the post-addition counter BG becomes 0, and if it becomes 0, the post-addition flag is cleared in step S8714. When it is determined in step S8713 that the post-addition counter BG is not 0, or after the process of step S8714 is executed, the first special notification setting process is terminated.

As described above, even when the number of vacant games FG becomes 0 or less by using the number of games remaining in the advantageous section of the unreported portion ZG (for the post-addition counter BG), a pseudo addition effect is performed. With the configuration, it is possible to eliminate the feeling of loss when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the number of empty games FG is 0 or less and the excess flag is set.

In particular, since the pseudo-addition of the unreported portion is performed within the range of the post-addition counter BG, and the configuration is such that the pseudo-addition is performed through the actual addition lottery and the number of addition games lottery, the pseudo addition is merely for the production. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is an actual addition based on the winning of a specific role, and it is possible to make the person feel pure joy in the pseudo-addition.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, the set value is suggested by using the pseudo addition in the modification 13. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-additional game number lottery process in this modified example. The pseudo-additional game number lottery process is a process performed in step S8709.

In step S8801, a process of grasping the set value is performed. In the following step S8802, the set value suggestion lottery process is performed. The set value suggestion lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to suggest a set value by lottery at the time of this pseudo addition. Specifically, a table of the number of pseudo-addition games for suggesting the set value is acquired from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery is drawn as to whether or not the pseudo-addition is performed based on the number of games including the content of the suggestion of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the pseudo-additional game number table for suggesting the set value is set so that the number of pseudo-additional games selected differs depending on the set value. For example, as the number of pseudo-addition games, the pseudo-addition effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG can be selected by all the set values, but is set so that the higher the setting, the easier it is to select. Further, as the first number for the post-addition counter BG, for example, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games in which 10 is added is selected in the settings 1 to 3, and is set so that the lower the setting, the easier it is to select. As a second number with respect to the post-addition counter BG, for example, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games including 56 is set to be selected in the setting 5 and the setting 6. As a third number with respect to the post-addition counter BG, for example, the pseudo-addition effect of the number of games including 77 is set so as to be selected only by setting 6.

After performing the lottery process for suggesting the set value in step S8802, it is determined in step S8803 whether or not the player has won the pseudo-addition effect of each number of games including the content of the suggested value. If the player has won, in step S8804, the process of setting the number of games according to the winning content as the number of pseudo-additional games this time is performed, and then the lottery process for the number of pseudo-additional games is completed.

As shown in FIG. 176 (a), in the pseudo-additional game number table for setting value suggestion, the number of games including the contents of these setting value suggestions is not selected regardless of the setting value. Set to get. When the setting suggestion deviation is selected, the number of games of the pseudo-addition effect is determined by lottery by the following processing.

That is, if the result of the lottery process in step S8802 is out of the suggestion of the above set value, a negative determination is made in step S8803, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S8805. In step S8805, a lottery process for the number of pseudo-additional games for normal use is performed. The pseudo-additional game number lottery process for normal use is the same as that described in the above modification 13, and is based on the same lottery table as the normal addition game number lottery table in FIG. 131 and the game result of this time. Select the number of pseudo additional games by lottery.

In the following step S8806, it is determined whether or not the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the post-addition counter BG. When the post-addition counter BG is exceeded, the process of setting the value of the post-addition counter BG as the number of pseudo-addition games this time is performed in step S8807, and then the pseudo-addition game number lottery process is ended. If the number of games selected in step S8805 is equal to or less than the post-addition counter BG, the process of setting the selected number of games as the number of pseudo-addition games this time is performed in step S8808, and then the number of pseudo-addition games is drawn. End the process.

In this case, for example, when the number of games notified in the additional effect (pseudo-addition effect) is added to the total number of games and the number of remaining games to reach the upper limit of 1500, the number of pseudo-addition games for suggesting the set value. There is a possibility that the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG was selected in the lottery. As described above, the number of games equal to that of the post-addition counter BG is more likely to be selected as the setting is higher, so that it is possible to predict that the setting is high. However, the addition effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG may occur even when the number of games equal to or greater than the post-addition counter BG is selected in the pseudo-additional game number lottery process for normal use. Then, not only is it sufficient to generate an additional effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG, but also the difficulty of predicting the set value is increased, and the fun of the game is added.

For example, in the additional game number table performed based on the strong cherry winning in the attack mode, the maximum number of games selected is set to 200 games (FIG. 131). Therefore, for example, if an additional effect of 250 games occurs as the number of games exceeding 200 games when the strong cherry is won, it is highly possible that it is a pseudo additional effect, and if the number of games is the same as the number of additional counter BG ( If you add it to the total number of games and the number of remaining games to reach the upper limit), the expectation that the setting is high will increase.

On the other hand, even if the same 250 games are added, if it is triggered by the weak cherry winning, the number of games will be within the selected range at the time of weak cherry (Fig. 131), and the post-addition counter will be assumed. Even if the number is the same as that of the BG, it cannot be denied that the number of games equal to or greater than the post-addition counter BG may have been selected in the normal pseudo-additional game number lottery process.

Further, in the above example, even if an additional effect of more than 200 games occurs when the strong cherry is won, it is set low if it is the number of games (260) obtained by adding the first number (10) to the post-addition counter BG. Is more likely to be. On the other hand, if it is an additional production triggered by the winning of a weak cherry, it cannot be said that the setting is low.

Here, when the number of empty games on the display grasped from the total number of games and the number of remaining games on the display is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time as described above, the post-addition counter BG is used. When the same number of games are added, it is clearly understood that the effect includes the content of the setting value suggestion. On the other hand, when the number of empty games on the above display is less than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time, when the additional effect of the same number of games as the post-addition counter BG occurs, the content of the setting value suggestion is included. Can no longer be determined. In other words, in the situation where the number of empty games on the above display is large, the additional effect including the content of the setting value suggestion is likely to occur, and even if the excess flag is set early, the set value is set accordingly. It is possible to generate merits such as being able to enjoy the suggestions. In addition, when the number of empty games on the display is less than the upper limit of the number of additional games at one time, for a player who desires an additional effect including the content of the setting value suggestion, an additional game based on a specific role with a small upper limit number of games (for example, At most, 50 games will be added based on chance A and chance B). In other words, it is possible to realize an unprecedented novel playability by requesting an addition with a completely opposite feeling to the usual one, which would expect a large number of games to be added.

Further, for example, when the generated additional effect is the number of games in which the second number (56) and the third number (77) are added to the post-addition counter BG, a high setting is expected as described above. It is possible. However, such content also differs from the suggested content from the number of games that appear depending on the progress of the game, such as the number of remaining games on the display.

For example, in FIG. 176 (b1), in a situation where the total number of games is 1045, the number of remaining games on the display is 102, and the post-addition counter BG is 353, the number of additional games appearing and the suggested content of the set value Shows the relationship. In this case, if the number of additional games is 353 games, a high setting is suggested, and if the number of additional games is 363 games, a low setting is suggested. Further, if the number of additional games is 409 games, setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and if it is 430 games, setting 6 is fixed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176 (b2), even if the same total number of games is 1045, the number of additional games is 409 in the situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 56 and the post-addition counter BG is 399. If it is a game, it suggests a low setting. That is, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games suggesting the setting 5 or the setting 6 is suggested to be the low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b2), and even if the same number of games are added. , The content of the suggestion will be completely different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176 (b3), even if the same total number of games is 1045, the number of additional games is 430 in the situation where the number of remaining games on the display is 35 and the post-addition counter BG is 420. If it is a game, it suggests a low setting. That is, in the case of FIG. 176 (b1), the number of games for which the setting 6 is determined suggests a low setting in the situation of FIG. 176 (b3). Will be completely different.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specialized zone is different from each of the above embodiments. In each of the above embodiments, the pattern shifts to the special zone based on the occurrence of the 7th re-game winning in the VB mode, and the shift to the special zone based on winning the lottery for transition to the super attack mode. Although the pattern has been described, in the present embodiment, a pattern of transition based on the winning of a specific combination in the attack mode or the VB mode will be described.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the second specific combination process is a process performed when the specific combination is won, and is a process performed when the display mode is mainly the attack mode.

In the second specific combination processing in the present embodiment, the processing when the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing of steps S10001 to S10020 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S920, and based on the winning of a specific combination, a lottery to shift to VB mode according to the rank of the attack mode and the rank of the attack mode. A promotion lottery or a lottery to add the number of games in the attack mode is carried out, and if each of these lottery is won, the processing for granting the corresponding benefits (transition to VB mode, rank promotion, addition of the number of games) is performed. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10015 that the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode carried out in the immediately preceding step S10014 has not been won, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, the transition lottery to the special zone is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, if the lottery for shifting to the VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for shifting to the specialized zone is performed. Will be done. In the special zone lottery process, a table for special zone transition lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the special zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. Do.

As shown in FIG. 179, the table for the special zone transition lottery is set so that the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of the specific combination.

Here, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the specific combination in the lottery process (FIG. 16) is different from each of the above embodiments, and in particular, the strong cherry (IV = 13), the weak cherry (IV = 14), and the strong cherry. The winning probabilities of watermelon (IV = 15) and weak watermelon (IV = 16) are different. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the strong cherry is won with a probability of about 1/600, and the weak cherry is won with a probability of about 1/200. In addition, a strong watermelon is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a weak watermelon is won with a probability of about 1/60. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry (collectively referred to as simply "cherry") is about 1/150 in total, and the strong watermelon or the weak watermelon (these are simply referred to as "cherries") is about 1/150. Collectively, the probability of winning (also simply referred to as "watermelon") is about 1/50 in total, and watermelons are overwhelmingly easier to win than cherries. These cherries and watermelons are set so that there is no difference in winning probability regardless of the set value. For example, the cherry winning probability of setting 1 and the cherry winning probability of setting 6 are common, and the watermelon of setting 3 The winning probability and the watermelon winning probability of setting 5 are common. The winning probabilities of other specific combinations are the same as in each of the above embodiments. Further, the probability of the game result other than the specific combination (normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, first BB, second BB, CB, loss, etc.) is the same as in each of the above embodiments.

In the special zone transition lottery table, for example, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a 5% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a 0.5% chance of winning. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, there is a 15% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, there is a 5% chance of winning. In other words, not only is the winning probability of watermelon higher than that of cherry as a game result, but it is also set so that the winning probability is higher in the special zone transition lottery.

The winning probabilities for each specific combination in the special zone transition lottery are set as common winning probabilities regardless of the set values, and are set so as not to differ depending on the set values.

In step S10022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the special zone has been won based on the processing result of step S10021. If it is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If the flag is won, the process of setting the special zone winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed in step S10023. Then, in step S10024, the process of acquiring the precursor game number table is performed, in step S10025, the precursor game number lottery process is performed, in step S1002, the precursor game number is set, and in step S10027, the precursor command is performed. After performing the process of setting, the second specific combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S10024 to S10027 are the same as the processes of steps S906 to S909, for example, and are processes for setting the precursor mode.

Next, the third specific combination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. As described above, the third specific combination process is a process performed when the specific combination is won, and is a process performed when the display mode is mainly the VB mode.

In the third specific combination processing in the present embodiment, similar to the changes in the second specific combination processing, the processing when the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won is different. That is, the processing of steps S1011 to S10107 is the same as that of steps S101 to S1007, and the number of games in the attack mode based on the winning of the specific combination is added to the lottery. Addition processing etc. are performed.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10102 that the lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode carried out in the immediately preceding step S10101 has not been won, the process proceeds to step S10108. In step S10108, the transition lottery to the special zone is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when a specific combination is won during the VB mode, even if the lottery for adding the number of games in the attack mode is not won, the lottery for shifting to the special zone is performed. The special zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S10021, and is performed based on the special zone transition lottery table.

As for the table for the special zone transition lottery in the VB mode, as shown in FIG. 179, the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of the specific combination, as in the table for the special zone transition lottery in the attack mode. Is set to. For example, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong cherries, there is a 10% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak cherries, there is a 1% chance of winning. On the other hand, in the special zone transition lottery based on strong watermelon, there is a 30% chance of winning, and in the special zone transition lottery based on weak watermelon, there is a 10% chance of winning. That is, even in the VB mode, the winning probability of the special zone transition lottery is set to be higher for the watermelon than for the cherry. In addition, the winning probability of the special zone transition lottery including other specific roles is set to be higher in the VB mode than in the attack mode.

As with the winning probability for each specific role in the special zone transition lottery in VB mode, the winning probability is set as a common winning probability regardless of the set value, and does not differ depending on the set value. Is set to.

In step S10109, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won based on the processing result of step S10108. The processes of steps S10109 to S10114 are substantially the same as the processes of steps S10022 to S10027, and are processes for setting the precursor mode when the lottery for transition to the special zone is won. However, in step S10113, the number of games obtained by adding the number of remaining games in the VB mode to the number of precursor games determined by the lottery process for the number of precursor games is set as the number of precursor games this time. That is, although the precursory effect suggesting the winning of the special zone is performed from the VB mode, the transition to the special zone is made after the VB mode is completed. The number of remaining games in the VB mode may be set as the number of precursor games. In this case, the lottery process for the number of precursor games can be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery for transition to the special zone is carried out based on the fact that the additional non-winning based on the specific combination is made in the attack mode and the VB mode. With such a configuration, the profit that can be obtained when a specific role is won during the attack mode or VB mode is not limited to the direct addition of the number of games, and the expectation is higher. Be done. In addition, the transition route to the specialized zone will be diversified, and it will be possible to greatly improve the playability.

As a process for shifting the display mode to the specialized zone, the mode shift notification process and the push order combination process in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181. The special zone in this embodiment shifts based on the establishment of the 7th re-game prize, as in each of the above-described embodiments. However, in this embodiment, the lottery at the time of winning the BAR replay (lottery for whether or not to win the 7th replay) is not performed, but the lottery for transition to the special zone is not performed, but the specific role is won as described above. Sometimes a transition lottery is held. Then, if the transition lottery at the time of winning the specific role is won, the special zone winning flag is set and the transition is possible, and then, when the BAR replay 1 is won, the push order for establishing the 7th replay prize. It is configured to be notified and move to the specialized zone.

That is, in the mode transition notification process in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 180, in steps S10201 to S10216, the number of precursor games is 0, as in the process of steps S1101 to S1116. Based on this, processing for shifting to the corresponding display mode and processing for generating push order notification at the time of winning the push order combination, which is a transition to the corresponding gaming state, are performed.

In the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S10213 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S10217. In step S10217, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is. If it is set, the process of clearing the special zone winning flag is performed in step S10218. Then, in step S10219, a process of setting the special zone notification flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing push order notification corresponding to the seventh re-game winning prize. After executing the process of step S10219, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S10220, and then the mode transition notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the special zone has been won. The process may be executed, for example, on the condition that the special zone winning notification command is received in the other bet-time effect setting process (step S1809) of the bet-time effect setting process (FIG. 44). ..

In the push order processing in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, in steps S10301 to S10313, the push for promotion to the second RT state or the third RT state is performed in the same manner as in the processes of steps S1201 to S1213. Sequential notification (push order notification of the third re-game to the fifth re-game) and push order notification (push order notification of the first re-game) for preventing the player from falling to the first RT state are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S10309, in the present embodiment, in step S10314, it is determined whether or not the current game result is BAR replay 1 among the BAR replays. In the case of BAR replay 1, it is determined in step S10315 whether or not the attack notification flag is set, and in step S10316 it is determined whether or not the special zone notification flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S10315, the push order combination processing is terminated as it is without executing the push order notification in the current BAR replay 1 winning game. If a negative determination is made in step S10316, the process proceeds to step S10307, and a process for notifying the push order for establishing the first re-game winning is performed.

When both the attack notification flag and the special zone notification flag are set, the push order notification corresponding to the 7th re-game winning is executed in step S10317, and the 7th re-game winning is performed in step S10318. After performing the process of setting the push order notification command including the stop order corresponding to the output target to the display control device 81, the push order combination process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the relationship between the stop order at the time of winning the BAR replay 1 and the winning mode is such that the 7th re-game winning, the 1st re-game winning, and the 6th re-game winning have different stop orders. It is good to set (Fig. 23 (c)). As a result, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order notification corresponding to the 7th re-game winning as described above, the 7th re-game winning can be more reliably established. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S1316 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 39) that the seventh re-game winning is established, instead of determining the presence / absence of the VB notification flag in step S1317, The configuration is such that the presence or absence of the notification flag for the special zone is confirmed. That is, when the seventh re-game winning is established and the special zone notification flag is set, the special zone start processing (steps S1318 to) is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid shifting to the special zone when the stop order happens to match the stop order corresponding to the 7th re-game winning.

Further, also in the push order combination process of the present embodiment, if a negative determination is made in step S10314, the push order bell process is performed in steps S10319 to S10322, which is the same as the process of steps S1219 to S1222. Is.

Next, the setting process of the additional effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. As described above, the addition effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 based on the reception of the addition command from the main control device 101.

In step S10401, it is determined whether or not the zone is in the special zone. If it is not in the special zone, in steps S10402 to S10413, as in steps S8502 to S8513, it is determined whether or not this addition is to be added, and if it is not added, it is not to be added. , It is determined at which timing of the game the additional effect is generated.

In the following description, as a comparison with the post-addition effect, the add-on effect generated in the add-on winning game (additional effect generated at a timing earlier than the post-addition effect) is also referred to as an immediate addition effect.

If the addition command is received in the special zone in step S10401, the special zone addition process is executed in step S10414, and then the addition effect setting process ends.

Here, before explaining the addition processing for the special zone, the effect in the additional special zone in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), when the zone shifts to the addition special zone, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters “addition probability is increasing”. As a result, the player can clearly grasp that the probability of winning the lottery with the number of games added is high. Further, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the total number of games added in the special zone is displayed by the number of games added in the special zone TUG. The number of additional games TUG in the special zone is arranged, for example, in the upper center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and is arranged in a position that is particularly eye-catching to the player.

Also in this embodiment, in the special zone, not only the specific combination but also the push order bell and the push order replay are additionally won (Fig. 129). Therefore, the number of additional games is added to each game, the corresponding additional effect is performed, and the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is updated every game.

In the present embodiment, among the specific roles in the special zone, especially for watermelon and cherry, when the immediate add effect for which the additional effect is performed in the winning game is selected, and at the end of the special zone. In some cases, a post-addition effect is selected in which the notification of the number of additional games is carried over.

In the following explanation, the additional effect generated in the winning game in the special zone is also referred to as the immediate addition effect in the zone as a contrast with the immediate addition effect other than in the special zone and the post-addition effect, and at the end of the special zone. The additional effect generated (additional effect generated at a timing later than the immediate addition effect in the zone) is also referred to as the post-addition effect in the zone.

As shown in FIG. 184 (a), for example, when the immediate addition effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the watermelon, the addition effect already described occurs. Such an additional effect is an effect in which the winning notification of the additional winning and the content notification of the number of additional games are performed at the same time. On the other hand, if the post-addition effect in the zone is selected when the watermelon is won, the first post-addition character BUP1 is used as a character imitating a green treasure box corresponding to the watermelon, for example, as a notification of winning that the watermelon has been added and won. Along with the display, the character display "Get !!" indicates that the first post-addition character BUP1 (additional right based on the watermelon opportunity) has been acquired. Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when the immediate ride effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the cherry, the additional effect described above occurs as in the case where the immediate ride effect is selected at the time of winning the watermelon. .. On the other hand, when the post-addition effect in the zone is selected at the time of winning the cherry, the second post-addition character BUP2 is used as a character imitating a red treasure box corresponding to the cherry, for example, as a notification of winning that the addition was won by the cherry. Along with the display, the character display "Get !!" indicates that the second post-addition character BUP2 (additional right based on the cherry opportunity) has been acquired. The display contents of the first back-mounted character BUP1 and the second back-loaded character BUP2 are different so that the player can identify them. Specifically, the color of the character is different as described above (BUP1). Is green, BUP2 is red, and the dot hatch is shown differently in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the acquired first post-addition character BUP1 and second post-addition character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the number of additional games TUG in the special zone. In FIG. 183 (b), three first rear-loading characters BUP1 are displayed and one second rear-loading character BUP2 is displayed, indicating that the watermelon-triggered zone rear-loading effect occurs three times. At the same time, it shows that the back-up effect in the cherry-triggered zone occurs once. Note that FIG. 183 (b) shows a situation in which the number of additional games in the special zone TUG is updated to "150", and such a situation is an immediate addition effect in the zone in each game in the special zone. Indicates that a total of 150 games have been added. More specifically, the situation in which FIG. 183 (b) is displayed means that 150 games are added in the special zone, and further, the post-addition effect in the zone occurs 4 times (3 times + 1 time). Is a confirmed situation, and it means that there is a potential increase in the number of additional games, which is larger than the 150 games displayed in the number of additional games in the special zone TUG.

When the number of continuous games in the special zone becomes 0 and the special zone ends, a post-addition effect corresponding to the first post-addition character BUP1 and the second post-addition character BUP2 is generated. Specifically, at the end of the final game of the special zone (after stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, more specifically, after the completion of medal payout), as shown in FIG. The character display of "Riding Judge" is made, and it is shown that the situation is such that the post-adding effect in the zone as the content notification that is notified by the first post-launching character BUP1 and the second post-launching character BUP2 is generated. In addition, the first number of additional games BUG1 indicating the total number of additional (post-added) games generated by the watermelon trigger and the second number of additional games BUG2 indicating the total number of additional (post-added) games generated by the cherry trigger. And are displayed. FIG. 185 (a) shows the situation before the occurrence of the post-addition effect in the zone, and the number of post-addition games BUG1 and BUG2 are 0 games.

In the zone-in-zone add-on effect, the zone-in-zone add-on effect is sequentially generated (for example, each time the effect switch 66 is operated) for each of the plurality of displayed add-on characters BUP1 and BUP2. For example, one of the plurality of displayed first rear-mounted characters BUP1 is moved to the substantially center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and enlarged and displayed, and the content corresponding to the winning notification indicated by the first rear-loaded character BUP1. Notification is performed. As the content notification, for example, the treasure box shown as the first rear-loading character BUP1 is opened, and a display is made as if the contents pop out. The content corresponds to the number of additional games, and FIG. 185 (b) shows that 10 additional games have been added (post-added). In this case, the display is updated by adding 10 games to the first post-addition game number BUG1, and the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is also updated by adding 10 games. After that, the contents of the remaining first post-addition character BUP1 are sequentially notified.

When the content notification for the first post-addition character BUP1 is completed, the content notification for the second post-addition character BUP2 is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the second rear-mounted character BUP2 moves to substantially the center of the auxiliary display unit 65 and is enlarged and displayed, and the winning notification shown by the second rear-mounted character BUP3 is displayed. The content notification corresponding to is performed. For example, the treasure box shown as the second rear-loading character BUP2 is opened, and a display is made as if the contents pop out. As in the case of the first post-addition character BUP1, the content corresponds to the number of extra games, and FIG. 186 (a) shows that 90 games have been added (post-added). In this case, the display is updated by adding 90 games to the second post-addition game number BUG2, and the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is also updated by adding 90 games.

When all the content notifications (post-addition effect in the zone) have been completed for the additions that occurred in the special zone, as shown in Fig. 186 (b), regarding the additions of watermelon and cherry that occurred in the special zone, The ratio notification indicating the selection ratio (selection ratio) between the immediate addition and the post-addition is performed.

Specifically, regarding the addition generated by the watermelon trigger, the number of times the content of the number of additional games was notified in the game that won the watermelon (the number of immediate additions) and the addition triggered by the watermelon winning at the end of the special zone The number of times the content of the number of games has been notified (the number of post-additions) is displayed as the first ratio display HP1. In addition, regarding the additions that occurred due to the cherry winning, the number of times the content of the number of additional games was notified in the game that won the cherry (the number of immediate additions) and the number of additional games triggered by the cherry winning at the end of the special zone The number of times the content notification has been performed (the number of times the content has been added) is displayed as the second ratio display HP2.

In FIG. 186 (b), in the special zone this time, the number of immediate additions triggered by the watermelon winning is one, and the number of subsequent additions triggered by the watermelon winning is three times, which is the first ratio display. It is shown as HP1 in a stacked bar graph. In addition, in this special zone, the number of immediate additions triggered by the cherry winning is 2 times, and the number of subsequent additions triggered by the cherry winning is 1 time, which is shown in the stacked bar graph as the second ratio display HP2. Is shown. In these stacked bar graphs, the area indicating the number of immediate additions and the area indicating the number of additions are shown by different colors, and the player can clearly grasp the difference between these areas. (In the figure, the dot hatch is displayed differently). More specifically, in this special zone, the addition that occurred due to the watermelon was selected as immediate addition in 1/4 (25%), and the addition was selected in 3/4 (75%). In this special zone, two-thirds (about 66%) of the extras generated by the cherry trigger were selected for immediate addition, and one-third (about 33%) was selected for post-addition. It is shown visually and easily graspable.

In the present embodiment, regarding the addition in the special zone, the ratio at which the immediate addition is selected and the ratio at which the post-addition is selected (probability of winning the post-addition lottery) are set to be different depending on the set value. ing. That is, the player can predict and grasp the set value by notifying the ratio of the immediate ride and the trailing ride in the special zone as described above. Hereinafter, the process for performing the additional notification in the special zone, including the process for performing the ratio notification, will be described in detail.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the addition process for the special zone.

In step S10501, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. In the following step S10502, the post-addition lottery process in the zone is executed. In the zone middle-addition lottery process, the addition effect timing table for the special zone is acquired from various table storage areas 105a, and it is determined by lottery whether the addition effect this time is to be added immediately or after.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the additional effect timing table for the special zone, the execution timing of the additional effect is set to be different depending on the game result (winning combination) that triggered the additional winning and the set value. .. Specifically, as a result of the game that triggered the addition winning, the execution timing of the addition effect will be different for watermelon (common to strong watermelon and weak watermelon), cherry (common to strong cherry and weak cherry), and others. Is set to.

In setting 1, the watermelon is selected for immediate loading at 40% and for post-loading at 60%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 45% and post-addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 55% and post-addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 65% and post-addition is selected at 35%. That is, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for post-addition and the higher the selection rate for immediate addition.

In setting 1, the cherry is selected for immediate addition at 10% and for post-addition at 90%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. That is, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the post-addition and the higher the selection rate for the immediate addition, which is common to watermelons.

On the other hand, in the case of cherry, the difference between the ratio of immediate addition and post-addition is set to be larger than that in the case of watermelon. That is, for example, in predicting the set value when immediate loading is selected, cherry has a higher degree of contribution as a prediction material than watermelon. In other words, predicting the set value from the immediate / post-addition ratio of cherry is more accurate and easier to predict the set value than predicting the set value from the immediate / post-addition ratio of watermelon. It is possible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning probability is set so that the watermelon is overwhelmingly easier to win than the cherry (FIG. 179). The winning probability is the same even in the special zone, and the watermelon is easier to win than the cherry in the special zone. Then, in the game of predicting the set value from the immediate / post-addition ratio in the special zone, it is easy to win the watermelon with low prediction accuracy, and it is difficult to win the cherry with high prediction accuracy. By doing so, the benefit of winning a cherry with a low winning probability is not only the benefit related to the advantage such as the number of additional games, but also the presentation of information that can be useful for the player as a prediction material of the set value. It is possible to add benefits and not overly increase the proportion of benefits related to that advantage.

After executing the zone-in-zone post-loading lottery process in step S10502, it is determined in step S10503 whether or not the zone-in-zone post-loading lottery process has been won. If it is not won, that is, if immediate addition is selected, it is determined in step S10504 whether or not the addition opportunity this time was a watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process proceeds to step S10505, and a process of adding 1 to the watermelon immediate loading counter provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The watermelon immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the watermelon triggering the addition occurs during the special zone this time and the immediate loading is selected.

If it is determined in step S10504 that it is not a watermelon trigger, the process proceeds to step S10506. In step S10506, it is determined whether or not the addition trigger this time was cherry. If it is a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10507, and a process of adding 1 to the immediate counter for cherries provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The instant loading counter for cherries is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when an additional addition occurs in the special zone this time and the immediate loading is selected.

After executing the process of step S10505 or step S10507, or when a negative determination is made in step S10506, the additional effect (immediate addition effect in the zone) can be generated in this game in step S10508. To set. In this case, the timing of generating the additional effect is set to the time when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, but other timings such as when the first reel stop ON operation or the second reel stop OFF operation is performed. It may be configured so that the reeling effect is generated immediately in the zone.

After that, in step S10509, at the timing of the immediate ride effect occurrence in the zone (or at a timing slightly delayed from the timing of the immediate ride effect occurrence in the zone), the number of additional games in the special zone TUG is the number of additional games this time. After setting the update effect so that the display is updated to the added display, the addition process for the special zone is completed.

As described above, the data for the additional effect of step S10508 and step S10509 is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area defined in advance. The CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area at the timing of the occurrence of the additional effect (immediate addition effect in the zone) so that the additional effect is performed. This also applies to the following other additional effects.

If it is determined in step S10503 that the lottery for post-addition in the zone has been won, that is, if post-addition is selected as the addition this time, the process proceeds to step S10510. In step S10510, it is determined whether or not the addition trigger this time was a watermelon. If it is a watermelon, the process proceeds to step S10511, and a process of adding 1 to the watermelon post-addition counter provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The watermelon post-addition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the watermelon-triggered addition occurs during the special zone this time and the post-addition is selected.

In the following step S10512, a process of storing the number of the added games this time is executed in the individual area for adding watermelons provided in the RAM 106. In the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are provided as individual areas for watermelons, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so that the number of games from 0 to 999 can be stored, and the number of games added based on the watermelon opportunity can be read out after the fact. For example, if 10 games are stored in the first area and 50 games are stored in the second area, an addition occurs as a watermelon trigger in the special zone, and the first addition is selected among those for which the addition is selected. It becomes possible to grasp after the fact that the number of additional games for the next addition was 10 games and the number of additional games for the next addition was 50 games. In step S10512, a process of storing the number of additional games triggered by the current watermelon is performed in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the individual area for adding watermelon.

After that, in step S10513, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the first rear-loading character BUP1 is displayed as the rear-loading character for watermelon when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Finish the addition process for the special zone. It is preferable that the display timing of the first rear-loading character BUP1 is the same as or slightly later than the timing at which the immediate loading effect occurs in the zone.

If it is determined in step S10510 that it is not a watermelon trigger, the process proceeds to step S10514. In step S10514, it is determined whether or not the addition trigger this time was a cherry. If it is a cherry, the process proceeds to step S10515, and a process of adding 1 to the post-addition counter for cherries provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-addition counter for cherries is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times when the post-addition occurs during the special zone this time and the post-addition is selected.

In the following step S10516, a process of storing the number of the added games this time is executed in the individual area for adding cherries provided in the RAM 106. The rear-loading individual area for cherries corresponds to the rear-loading individual area for watermelon. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of areas are also provided for the individual rear-loading areas for cherries, and specifically, 255 areas are provided. Each area is set so that the number of games from 0 to 999 can be stored, and the number of games added based on the cherry trigger can be read out after the fact. In step S10516, a process is performed in which the number of additional games triggered by the current cherry is stored in the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is not stored in the individual area for adding cherries.

After that, in step S10517, the data is temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the second rear-loading character BUP2 is displayed as the rear-loading character for cherry when all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Finish the addition process for the special zone. It is preferable that the display timing of the second rear-loading character BUP2 is the same as or slightly later than the timing at which the immediate loading effect occurs in the zone. If a negative determination is made in step S10514, the special zone addition process is terminated as it is.

In the present embodiment, in the special zone, the immediate addition is selected regardless of the set value for the addition trigger other than the watermelon and the cherry (FIG. 188), so that a negative determination is made in step S10514. There is no such thing. That is, it can be said that the determination process of step S10514 is provided for expansion when the post-addition is generated even at another addition trigger.

If there is a first back-added character BUP1 or a second back-up character BUP2 that has already been displayed in step S10513 or step S10515, the displayed first back-up character BUP1 or second back-up character BUP2 is used. It is advisable to set the production data so that the characters to be added this time are displayed so that they are lined up. By unifying the rules of the order of arranging (for example, by arranging in order such as upper left → upper right → lower left → lower right), the post-addition effect at the end of the special zone described later will be performed. In such cases, it is possible to clearly understand the number of additional winnings corresponding to the additional winnings. The first back-mounted character BUP1 and the second back-mounted character BUP2 are displayed in separate areas (in FIG. 185, the first back-loaded character BUP1 is displayed at the upper left of the screen and the second back-loaded character BUP2). (Upper right of the screen), and the rules of the order in which they are mixed and arranged may be unified. By doing so, in the playability of the specialized zone where the watermelon and the cherry are added afterwards, it becomes possible to more easily grasp when the added-up is corresponding to the additional winning.

In addition, when the total number of the displayed post-addition characters and the current post-addition character reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5), the current post-addition character and the displayed post-addition character are combined. It may be configured to display the integrated display character. For example, in a situation where four first rear-mounted characters BUP1 are displayed, when a new display trigger for the first rear-loaded character BUP1 occurs, a total of five watermelon triggers are used for post-addition. The first integrated display character (for example, a treasure chest with a different color or a different shape) for showing the situation is displayed. By doing so, when displaying a character corresponding to multiple addition triggers using the limited display area, the upper limit (limiter) of the addition trigger is due to the fact that there is no or little display area that can be displayed. It is possible not to give the impression that there is.

Next, the setting process of the special zone end effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 189. The special zone end effect setting process is a process executed based on the reception of the special zone end command from the main control device 101 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 51) (step S2316). ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the special zone, the post-addition effect is performed and the ratio of the immediate-addition / post-addition ratio is notified. Specifically, first, in step S10601, a process of grasping the watermelon immediate loading counter and the cherry immediate loading counter is performed. In the following step S10602, a process of grasping the watermelon back-loading counter and the cherry back-loading counter is performed. Then, in step S10603, the immediate addition / post-addition ratio of the addition triggered by the watermelon and the immediate addition / post-addition ratio of the addition triggered by the cherry are determined based on the grasped results of step S10601 and step S10602, respectively. Execute the calculation process. Then, in step S10604, a process of temporarily storing the calculated result in a register or the like is performed.

After that, in steps S10605 to S10620, a process for generating a post-addition effect of adding watermelons and cherries is executed. That is, in step S10605, it is determined whether or not the watermelon post-loading counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S10606, and a process of grasping the number of additional games is executed from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the individual area for adding watermelon. Then, in step S10607, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-effect in the rear-loading effect for watermelon is performed. In this case, the first rear-mounted character BUP1 displayed first is selected from the first rear-loaded character BUP1, and the first rear-loaded character BUP1 is moved to substantially the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the process of step S10607, it is determined in step S10608 whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. It should be noted that a positive determination may be made in step S10608 regardless of the presence or absence of an operation depending on the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 sec).

After the affirmative determination is made in step S10608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect is performed in step S10609. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the first rear-loading character BUP1 arranged in the substantially center of the screen is released, and the display effect is performed as if the number of additional games pops out as the treasure inside (FIG. 185 (b)). ).

In the following step S10610, as the display of the number of additional games for watermelon, the display of the number of first additional games BUG1 is controlled so as to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10609. In step S10611, the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is controlled so as to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10609. Then, in step S10612, the watermelon post-loading counter is decremented by 1, and then the process returns to step S10605.

When the watermelon post-loading counter becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10605, and the process proceeds to step S10613. The processes of steps S10613 to S10620 are processes for performing post-addition based on cherries, and are substantially the same as the processes of steps S10605 to S10612.

That is, in step S10613, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter for cherry is larger than 0, that is, whether or not it is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S10614, and a process of grasping the number of additional games is executed from the area with the smallest number among the areas in which the number of games is stored in the individual area for adding cherries. Then, in step S10615, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the pre-effect of the rear-loading effect for cherry is performed. In this case, the second rear-mounted character BUP2 displayed first is selected from the second rear-loaded character BUP2, and the second rear-loaded character BUP2 is moved to substantially the center of the screen. Then, an operation instruction effect for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66 is also generated.

After executing the process of step S10615, it is determined in step S10616 whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. Similar to step S10608, the configuration may be such that affirmative determination is made in step S10616 regardless of the presence or absence of an operation depending on the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 5 sec).

After the affirmative determination is made in step S10616, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the additional effect is performed in step S10617. In this case, the character in the treasure box as the second rear-loading character BUP2 arranged in the substantially center of the screen is released, and the display effect is performed as if the number of additional games pops out as the treasure inside (FIG. 186 (a)). ).

In the following step S10618, as the display of the number of additional games for cherries, the display of the number of additional games for the second BUG2 is controlled so as to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10617. In step S10619, the display of the number of additional games TUG in the special zone is controlled so as to be updated by adding the number of additional games of the additional effect performed in step S10617. Then, in step S10620, the post-addition counter for cherry is subtracted by 1, and then the process returns to step S10613.

When the post-addition counter for cherry becomes 0, a negative determination is made in step S10613, and the process proceeds to step S10621. In step S10621, based on the information stored in step S10604, the first ratio display HP1 for immediate addition / post-addition based on the watermelon winning and the second ratio display HP2 for immediate addition / post-addition based on the cherry winning are displayed. It is controlled so that it is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 186 (b)).

After that, in step S10622, after initializing various counters for the special zone such as each immediate add-on counter and each post-addition counter, the setting process of the special zone end effect is ended.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The execution timing of the additional notification differs depending on the set value. More specifically, the content notification of the result of the additional lottery, which is set so that there is no difference in the winning probability and the number of additional games at the time of winning depending on the set value, is performed at different timings depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make a difference due to the set value, particularly for the game in the attack mode in which the difference in the game playability due to the set value is unlikely to occur.

As an effect in which the execution timing of the addition notification is different, an immediate addition effect in which the addition effect is performed in the game in which the addition opportunity occurs and a post-addition effect in which the addition effect is performed in the game after the addition opportunity is provided. In addition, in any of the productions, the notification of the additional winning is executed in the game in which the additional opportunity occurs. More specifically, even in the case of performing the post-addition effect, the first post-addition character BUP1 and the second post-addition character BUP2 are displayed in the game. As a result, when the post-addition effect is selected, the player can be made to understand that the add-on effect will occur before the add-on effect in the post-addition effect occurs, and the player who grasps it can grasp it. , You can play the game while looking forward to the additional effect being performed in the post-addition effect. Therefore, it is possible to extend the period for enjoying the additional production.

Even if the post-addition effect is selected as described above, the notification that the additional lottery has been won is made in advance, and the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the post-addition effect. did. In this way, even if the post-addition effect is selected, by notifying in advance that the additional lottery has been won, the additional effect can be performed in a state in which the player is not a little pleased by the notification. Even if it is predicted and grasped that the setting is low by the additional effect in the post-addition effect, it is possible to compensate for the degree of disappointment of the player due to the prediction and grasp (the low setting). It will be possible.

The selection ratio of immediate / after-adding based on the cherry opportunity and the selection ratio of immediate / after-adding based on the watermelon opportunity are made different. By doing so, in predicting and grasping the set value based on the selection ratio, not only the setting of the occurrence rate in the production but also the result of the lottery process (whether it is cherry or watermelon) can be obtained. It will be reflected. Therefore, as a player who wants to predict and grasp the set value, the game is played while hoping that the lottery result in each game will be the result of the desired selection ratio (in the above embodiment, the cherry with the setting difference in the selection ratio). This will be done, and it will be possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery results of each game.

The setting difference is set so that the selection ratio of immediate / post-addition based on the cherry opportunity with a low winning probability is larger than the selection ratio of immediate / post-addition based on the watermelon opportunity with a high winning probability. By doing so, the superiority of winning the cherry can be secured by factors other than those directly linked to the player's profit, such as the number of medals paid out based on the cherry winning and the additional performance based on the cherry winning. it can. Therefore, it is possible to set the privilege of each lottery result within a range that does not affect the ball output rate.

<Modification example 1>
In this modification, the additional production timing table for the special zone is changed depending on the transition to the special zone. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the additional lottery process in the zone. As described above, the zone addition lottery process is a process performed in step S10502 in the special zone addition process (FIG. 187).

In step S10701, it is determined whether or not the transition trigger of the special zone this time is a cherry (either a strong cherry or a weak cherry). If the transition trigger is not cherry, in step S10702, a process of acquiring a normal additional notification timing table from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10701 that the opportunity to shift to the special zone this time was cherry, in step S10703, a process of acquiring a special additional notification timing table from various table storage areas 182a is executed. .. After acquiring any of the notification timing tables, the post-addition lottery is executed based on the notification timing table in step S10704, and then the post-addition lottery process in this zone is completed.

The difference between the normal additional notification timing table and the special additional notification timing table will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The normal use additional notification timing table is as shown in FIG. 188, and in FIG. 191, in the normal use additional notification timing table, the parameter (immediate addition / post-addition selection) when the addition occurs triggered by the winning of the watermelon. Rate) is shown as a reference value.

That is, in the special addition notification timing table, the parameters (immediate addition / post-addition selection rate) when the addition occurs triggered by the winning of the watermelon are different from those of the normal addition notification timing table. Specifically, in the special addition notification timing table, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. That is, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the post-addition and the higher the selection rate for the immediate addition, which is the same as the parameter at the time of winning the watermelon in the normal addition notification timing table.

On the other hand, in the case of the special additional notification timing table, the difference between the immediate addition and the post-addition ratio is set to be larger than that of the normal additional notification timing table. That is, for example, in predicting the set value when immediate ride is selected, the specialized zone that has been migrated by the cherry trigger is more predictive material than the specialized zone that has been migrated by another specific role trigger. Contribution is high. In other words, it is better to predict the set value from the immediate addition / post-addition ratio in the special zone that has been migrated by the cherry trigger, and to predict the set value from the immediate addition / post-addition ratio in the special zone that has been migrated by another specific role opportunity. The prediction accuracy is higher than that, and it is possible to predict the set value more easily. In other words, it can be said that the specialized zone that shifts with the cherry trigger is a zone that makes it easier to predict the set value.

Moreover, in the special addition notification timing table in this modification, the immediate addition / post-addition ratio based on watermelon and the immediate addition / post-addition ratio based on cherry are common to all the set values. By doing so, each addition opportunity can be treated as common data in predicting and grasping the set value based on these ratios, and the population parameter can be increased.

By doing so, it is possible to set a special zone with completely different playability for predicting and grasping the set value without changing the additional performance in the special zone. As a result, it is possible to create a new game property that wants a specialized zone in which the set value can be easily predicted, which is a departure from the conventional game property such as simply requesting a specialized zone with a large number of additional games.

In particular, by making the special zone that shifts when the cherry has a low winning probability into a special zone that makes it easy to predict and grasp the set value, the merit of winning a result with a low winning probability will be added to the ball output rate. It is possible to add within the range that does not affect.

Moreover, the special zone that shifts when the cherry is triggered and the special zone that shifts when another specific role triggers differ only in the additional notification timing table used in the selection of immediate addition / post-addition, and the small winning combination is won. It is possible to realize the above-mentioned excellent playability with a very simple configuration that does not require changes in the probability and the additional winning probability.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the immediate addition effect is selected in the zone, the addition effect timing table is changed. FIG. 192 (a) is a flowchart showing the back-loading lottery process in the zone in this modified example.

In step S10801, a process of acquiring a table counter ATK from various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is performed. The table counter ATK is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the additional effect timing table to be acquired in the post-addition lottery this time. That is, in step S10802, a process of acquiring an additional notification timing table corresponding to the value of the table counter ATK acquired in step S10801 from various table storage areas 182a of the ROM 182 is performed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, a plurality of additional notification timing tables are provided as the additional notification timing table, and the four additional notification timing tables of the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table are provided. It is provided. In this modified example, there is no difference in the selection rate between immediate and post-addition, such as cherry, watermelon, and other specific combinations, and for any specific combination, immediate addition and post-addition are performed with a common selection rate. Is made. Therefore, even for the character displayed when the post-addition effect in the zone is selected, the character associated with the post-addition selected combination such as the first post-addition character BUP1 and the second post-addition character BUP2 is not used. A common character is displayed instead. Further, in this modification, the ratio notification at the end of the special zone is not performed.

The first additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 1. In this table, regardless of the set value, the selection rate for immediate addition and post-addition is set to 50%.

The second additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 2. In this table, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 45% and post-addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 55% and post-addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 65% and post-addition is selected at 35%. That is, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for post-addition and the higher the selection rate for immediate addition.

The third additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 3. In this table, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for the immediate addition and the higher the selection rate for the immediate addition, which is common to the second addition notification timing table, but the setting value of the ratio between the immediate addition and the post-addition. The difference due to is larger in the third additional notification timing table than in the second additional notification timing table.

The fourth additional notification timing table is a table selected when the table counter ATK is 4 or more. In this table, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 100% and post-addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In other words, the higher the set value, the lower the selection rate for additional addition and the higher the selection rate for immediate addition, which is common to the second additional notification timing table and the third additional notification timing table, but immediate addition and later. The difference due to the set value of the ratio with the addition is larger in the fourth addition notification timing table than in the second addition notification timing table and the third addition notification timing table.

Returning to the description of the additional lottery process in the zone, after acquiring one additional notification timing table from each of the additional notification timing tables in step S10802, the additional lottery process is executed in step S10803. Then, in step S10804, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S10803 was immediately placed. In the case of immediate loading, in step S10805, the process of adding 1 to the table counter ATK is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10804 that the table counter is not immediately added but is added later, the process of setting the table counter ATK to 1 which is the initial value is executed in step S10806.

That is, in this modification, the table counter ATK is added by 1 when the immediate addition is selected in the post-addition lottery, and the table counter ATK returns to the initial value of 1 when the post-addition is selected. As described above, the value of the table counter ATK is associated with the type of the additional notification timing table used in the post-addition lottery, and the notification timing table acquired in the situation where the value of the table counter ATK is large is immediately. It is set so that the difference depending on the set value of the addition / addition ratio becomes large.

More specifically, basically (except for the first additional notification timing table), in any notification timing table, the higher the setting, the easier it is to select the immediate addition, and the lower the setting, the more difficult it is to select the immediate addition. Has been done. Then, the notification timing table acquired in a situation where the value of the table counter ATK is larger, the greater the difference between the ease of selecting the immediate ride at the high setting and the ease of selecting the immediate ride at the low setting. For example, in the second addition notification timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 2, the immediate addition is selected with a probability of 65% in the setting 6, and the immediate addition is selected with a probability of 40% in the setting 1. , The difference is about 1.6 times more likely. On the other hand, in the fourth addition notification timing table acquired in the situation where the table counter ATK is 4, immediate addition is selected with a probability of 100% in setting 6, and is selected with a probability of 10% in setting 1, and the difference is Is 10 times more likely. Therefore, the larger the value of the table counter ATK, that is, the more the immediate addition is continuously selected, the easier it is to estimate the set value from the selection ratio between the immediate addition and the post-addition.

Moreover, the more the immediate ride is continuously selected, the easier it is for the high setting side to select the immediate ride. Therefore, the continuous selection of the immediate ride itself is the high setting. It can be a material to support (predict) that. For example, as shown in FIG. 193, when switching from the first additional notification timing table to the fourth additional notification timing table is used, the probability that immediate addition is selected four times in a row is 0.6% in setting 1. On the other hand, setting 2 is 2.7%, setting 3 is 6.2%, setting 4 is 11.6%, setting 5 is 18.9%, setting 6 is 26%, and setting 1 is set. The difference from 6 is a probability difference of about 43 times. Then, as described above, since the configuration is such that the higher the setting, the easier it is to select the immediate addition, the additional notification timing table is switched to. Therefore, in order to predict the set value by the continuity of the immediate addition, the continuous probability is set. The difference is widened at an accelerating rate.

That is, for example, in the case of a configuration in which only the second additional notification timing table is used (a configuration in which switching to the third and fourth additional notification timing tables does not occur), the probability that the immediate addition is selected four times in a row is set to 1. Is about 2.7%, setting 6 is about 17.9%, and the difference between setting 1 and setting 6 is about 7 times the probability, and the notification timing table is switched as in this modification. Less than the difference in configuration. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to make a setting difference without switching the notification timing table, it is necessary to increase the difference in the immediate addition / post-addition ratio depending on the set value, and once as in the fourth addition notification timing table. By adding it, it becomes possible to judge to some extent whether it is a high setting or a low setting.

Therefore, by using the switching of the notification timing table as in the above configuration, it is possible to gradually narrow down the set values and improve the interest of the game of predicting the set values.

After performing the process of step S10805 or step S10806 in the zone-in-zone post-addition lottery process (FIG. 192 (a)), the display background change process is performed in step S10807, and then the zone-in-zone post-addition lottery process ends. To do. In the display background change process, the display background color in the special zone effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is changed in association with the value of the table counter ATK. For example, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), if the table counter ATK is 1, the background color is displayed in white, and if the table counter ATK is 2, the background color is displayed in yellow. If the table counter ATK is 3, the background color is displayed in green, and if the table counter ATK is 4 or more, the background color is displayed in red. By doing so, the player can easily grasp the current value of the table counter ATK, that is, the number of times that the immediate addition is continuously selected, and the immediate addition is accumulated to be useful for predicting the set value. It is possible to excite the game by changing the production (change in background color).

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, the additional notification timing table is switched based on the number of games in the advantageous section in which the special zone is executed. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the back-loading lottery process in the zone in this modified example.

In step S10901, a process of grasping the current number of advantageous section games is performed. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is managed by the main control device 101. However, in this modification, the display control device 81 also has a similar counter, or the main control device 101 By outputting a command from the display control device 81, the number of digested games in the current advantageous section can be grasped.

In step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the current number of advantageous section games is acquired from various table storage areas 182a. Then, after executing the post-addition lottery in step S10903, the post-addition lottery process in this zone is completed.

In the addition notification timing table in this modification, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the immediate addition / post-addition ratio differs depending on the number of digested games in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number AG) and the set value. It is set. Specifically, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, both immediate addition and post-addition are selected with a probability of 50% regardless of the set value. When the number of digestion games is 100 to 499, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 45% and post-addition is selected at 55%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 55% and post-addition is selected at 45%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 65% and post-addition is selected at 35%. That is, when the number of digestion games is 100 to 499, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select immediate loading.

When the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 30% and the post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. Further, when the number of digestion games is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 100% and post-addition is selected at 0% (not selected). Then, when the number of digestion games is 1400 to 1500, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected (not selected) at 0%, and the post-addition is selected at 100%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. In setting 5 and setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 100%, and post-addition is selected at 0% (not selected).

That is, as the number of digestion games in the advantageous section increases, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the immediate ride, and the difference in the selection rate between the immediate ride and the post-load increases. By doing so, the more the advantageous section is digested, the easier it is to predict the set value at the time of addition in the special zone, and it is a privilege for the advantageous section to continue for a long time, and it is acquired. It is possible to grant benefits other than the number of medals.

As described above, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, which is the upper limit, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Therefore, when the number of digested games approaches 1500 games, there is a possibility that the benefits (additions) cannot be sufficiently obtained even if the game shifts to the specialized zone. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, even if the number of digestion games is close to the upper limit and the expectation for addition in the special zone may decrease, the merit of moving to the special zone Can be caused.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, the parameters of the additional notification timing table in the above modification 3 are different. FIG. 195 (b) shows an additional notification timing table in this modified example.

In the additional notification timing table in this modification, the relationship between the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the set value is reversed from that in the above modification 3. More specifically, when the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 100%, and the post-addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 0% (not selected) and post-addition is selected at 100%. That is, in the early stage of the advantageous section, the lower the setting, the easier it is to select the immediate ride, and the higher the setting, the easier it is to select the post-load.

When the number of digestion games is 100 to 499, in setting 1, immediate addition is selected at 100% and post-addition is selected at 0% (not selected). In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%. That is, when comparing the cases where the number of digestion games is 1 to 99 and the cases where the number of digestion games is 100 to 499, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select immediate loading, although it is common with the above-mentioned modification 3, in the first place, digestion. In a situation where the number of games is small, the difference between the selection rate of immediate addition and post-addition depending on the set value is overwhelmingly large. That is, it is easy to predict and grasp the set value at the beginning of the advantageous section.

When the number of digestion games in the advantageous section is 500 to 999, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 80% and the post-addition is selected at 20%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 30% and post-addition is selected at 70%. Further, when the number of digestion games is 1000 to 1399, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 65% and the post-addition is selected at 35%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 55% and post-addition is selected at 45%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 45% and post-addition is selected at 55%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. Then, when the number of digested games is 1400 to 1500, both immediate and post-addition are selected with a probability of 50% regardless of the set value.

That is, as the advantageous section progresses, the setting difference of the selection rate for immediate addition / post-addition becomes smaller. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of predicting and grasping the set value. That is, for example, the initial number of games in the attack mode is 50 games in the advantageous section, and if an additional opportunity occurs between the 50 games, at least the set value can be predicted and grasped. By doing so, it becomes easy to perform a game of predicting and grasping the set value, and it is possible to fully enjoy the game.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, the display remaining number counter HG is used instead of the number of digestion games in the advantageous section as the parameter of the additional notification timing table in the modification 3 and the modification 4. As described above, the display remaining number counter HG represents the number of remaining games in the attack mode displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

In step S10901 of the present modification, instead of grasping the number of advantageous section games, a process of grasping the display remaining number counter HG is performed. Then, in step S10902, an additional notification timing table corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG is acquired, and in step S10903, a post-addition lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 195 (c), the addition notification timing table in this modification is set so that the immediate addition / post-addition ratio differs depending on the display remaining number counter HG and the set value. Specifically, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 99, in setting 1 and setting 2, the immediate addition is selected at 80%, and the post-addition is selected at 20%. In settings 3 and 4, immediate addition is selected at 85% and post-addition is selected at 15%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate addition is selected at 90% and post-addition is selected at 10%. When the remaining number counter HG for display is 100 to 299, in setting 1, the immediate addition is selected at 30% and the post-addition is selected at 70%. In setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 40% and post-addition is selected at 60%. In setting 3, immediate addition is selected at 50% and post-addition is selected at 50%. In setting 4, immediate addition is selected at 60% and post-addition is selected at 40%. In setting 5, immediate addition is selected at 70% and post-addition is selected at 30%. In setting 6, immediate addition is selected at 80% and post-addition is selected at 20%. When the remaining number counter HG for display is 300 or more, in setting 1 and setting 2, immediate addition is selected at 20%, and post-addition is selected at 80%. In settings 3 and 4, immediate addition is selected at 15% and post-addition is selected at 85%. In settings 5 and 6, immediate addition is selected at 10% and post-addition is selected at 90%.

That is, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 99 and when it is 300 or more, the immediate addition / addition ratio of setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6 is common. doing. Therefore, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 99 or 300 or more, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 are used to narrow down the set values from the immediate / post-addition ratio. And setting 6 are indistinguishable. On the other hand, when the remaining number counter HG for display is 200 to 299, the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is set to be different for all of the settings 1 to 6. Therefore, from the viewpoint of narrowing down the set values, it is particularly preferable that the display remaining counter HG is 200 to 299 rather than 300 or more. In other words, it is notified that there are a large number of remaining games in the attack mode, and the notification of the number of remaining games in the attack mode is notified with a smaller number of games than in the situation where a large number of medals can be expected. There will be situations where it is more preferable to be in a situation, and it will be possible to create a new gameplay that breaks away from the traditional one-sided game of aiming for medals.

Further, when comparing the case where the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 to 99 and the case where the counter HG is 300 or more, the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is reversed in any of the set values. Specifically, when the display remaining number counter HG is 1 to 99, it is easier to select the immediate addition than the post-addition at any set value, and when the display remaining number counter HG is 300 or more, any of them. Even in the set value, the post-addition is easier to select than the immediate addition. That is, in the situation where the notification is given that the number of remaining games in the attack mode is small, it is easy to select the immediate ride in which the number of remaining games is immediately increased, and the number of remaining games in the attack mode is large. In a situation where a certain fact is notified, it is easy to select a post-addition in which the number of remaining games is increased after the fact. By doing so, the former can provide a sense of security by increasing the number of remaining games, and the latter can provide a sense of superiority by saving the right to increase the number of remaining games. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to produce a production according to the situation and the emotion of the player.

<Modification 6>
The configuration regarding the immediate / post-addition ratio is not limited to the special zone in the attack mode, and may be applied to other than the special zone. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the additional effect in this modification.

In step S11001, it is determined whether or not it is a special zone, and if it is a special zone, the special zone addition process is executed in step S11026. The addition process is as described above. If it is determined in step S11001 that the zone is not a specialized zone, the number of additional games this time is grasped in step S11002, and a post-addition lottery is performed in step S11003. In the post-addition lottery, as the addition notification timing table, as shown in FIG. 188, a configuration using a table in which the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is different between the watermelon and the cherry is described, but other tables may be used. .. In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won, and if it is determined that the immediate loading has been selected without winning, the process proceeds to step S11005.

In step S11005, it is determined whether or not the addition this time is a watermelon trigger. If it is a watermelon trigger, in step S11006, a process of adding 1 to the total watermelon immediate loading counters provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total watermelon immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that the immediate loading effect is generated by the watermelon trigger in the current attack mode. If it is determined in step S11005 that it is not a watermelon trigger, it is determined in step S11007 whether or not it is a cherry trigger. If it is a cherry trigger, in step S11008, a process of adding 1 to the total cherry immediate loading counters provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed. The total cherry immediate loading counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of times that the immediate loading effect is generated by the cherry trigger in this attack mode. These processes of steps S1105-step S11008 correspond to the processes of steps S10504 to S10507.

After executing any of the processes of step S11006 and step S11008, or when a negative determination is made in step S11007, the process proceeds to step S11009. The processing of steps S11009 to S11015 is the same as the processing of steps S10405 to S10411.

If it is determined in step S11004 that the winner was added later, the process proceeds to step S11016. In step S11016, a process of setting an additional flag in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 is executed. The post-addition flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that there is at least one extra addition that serves as a post-addition effect. After the processing of step S11016 is executed, the processing for the post-addition effect is performed in steps S11017 to S11024. The processes of steps S11017 to S11024 correspond to the processes of steps S10510 to S10517.

That is, in step S11017, it is determined whether or not the addition this time is a watermelon trigger. If it is a watermelon trigger, in step S11018, a process of adding 1 to the watermelon post-addition counter is executed. In the following step S11019, a process of storing the number of added games this time is executed in the individual area for adding watermelon. Then, in step S11020, the display setting of the first rear-loading character BUP1 is performed as the rear-loading character for watermelon.

If it is determined in step S11017 that it is not a watermelon trigger, it is semi-determined in step S11021 whether or not it is a cherry trigger. In the case of a cherry trigger, in step S11022, a process of adding 1 to the post-addition counter for cherry is executed. In the following step S11023, a process of storing the number of additional games this time is executed in the individual area for additional addition for cherries. Then, in step S11024, the display setting of the second rear-loading character BUP2 is performed as the rear-loading character for cherry.

After executing any of the processes of step S11020 and step S11024, or when a negative determination is made in step S11021, the process proceeds to step S11025. In step S11025, the process of subtracting the number of additional games this time from the post-addition counter BG is executed, and then the process of setting the additional effect is completed. The process of step S11023 corresponds to the process of step S8607.

Although detailed description by the figure is omitted, as described above, by setting the post-addition flag, when the number of remaining games on the display of the attack mode reaches a predetermined game, the post-addition effect is generated. In this case, as in the process of steps S10605 to S10620 in FIG. 189, when a plurality of information to be added is present, they are stored in each individual area based on, for example, the operation of the effect switch 66. While acquiring and erasing information, a post-addition effect is generated at each addition opportunity.

In this case, when executing the post-addition effect, the process of adding the value of the post-addition counter for watermelon to the post-addition counter for total watermelon provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is executed, and the value of the post-addition counter for cherry is executed. Is executed in the post-addition counter for total cherries provided in various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183, and then the process corresponding to the step S10605 to step S10620 in the post-addition effect is performed. In this case, as described above, the value of the watermelon post-addition counter and the cherry post-addition counter is subtracted by 1 each time the additional effect is generated, while the values of the total watermelon post-addition counter and the cherry post-addition counter are It does not change even if the additional production is performed. By doing so, as shown below, it is possible to calculate the immediate / post-addition ratio after the fact.

The setting process of the attack mode end effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 197. As described above, the attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the attack mode end game.

First, in step S11101, a repair for grasping the total number of medals won is executed. In the following step S11102, a process of grasping the number of continuous games is executed. As described above, the total number of medals won and the number of continuous games are displayed as targets in the attack mode end effect, and the processes of step S11101 and step S11102 are the processes for displaying them.

In step S11103, a process of grasping the immediate loading counter for total watermelon and the immediate loading counter for total cherry is executed. In the following step S11104, a process of grasping the total watermelon post-addition counter and the total cherry post-addition counter is executed. As described above, the total watermelon post-addition counter and the total cherry post-addition counter are counters to which the values of the watermelon post-addition counter and the cherry post-addition counter are added when performing the post-addition effect.

Then, in step S11105, a process of calculating the immediate / post-addition ratio for total watermelon and the immediate / post-addition ratio for total cherry is performed, and in step S11106, these calculated ratios are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Performs processing to display. After that, in step S11107, the end processing on the display side at the end of the attack mode, such as the initialization processing of various counters, is executed, and then the setting processing of the attack mode end effect is ended.

An example of the attack mode end effect is shown in FIG. 198. In this example, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), the number of continuous games and the number of medals won are displayed as notifications that the attack mode has ended. Then, for example, as an operation instruction character for prompting the operation of the effect switch 66, a character imitating a button, a character of an arrow indicating the operation direction of the button, and "PUSH" indicating that the button should be pressed are called "PUSH". Display characters. When the effect switch 66 is operated, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), as the third ratio display HP3, a graph corresponding to the immediate / post-addition ratio for the total watermelon in the current attack mode is displayed, and the third ratio is displayed. As the 4-ratio display HP4, a graph is displayed corresponding to the immediate / post-addition ratio for total cherries in the attack mode this time. In the example of FIG. 198 (b), the third ratio display HP3 and the fourth ratio display HP4 are displayed as a pie chart, but the first ratio display HP1 and the second ratio display HP2 in FIG. 196 (b) are shown. As such, it may be a stacked bar graph.

By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the playability based on the immediate / post-addition ratio of the additional effect not only in the specialized zone but also throughout the attack mode. In particular, considering that the winning probability of cherry is about 1/150 and the winning probability of watermelon is about 1/50, the number of games is limited as a special zone (5 games in each of the above embodiments). The chances of winning these cherries and watermelons are extremely rare. Then, even if the game of predicting and grasping the set value is performed in the special zone by using the cherry or watermelon prepared with great care, the opportunity may not occur easily. On the other hand, in an attempt to solve this problem, if the winning probability of cherries and watermelons is increased or the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is increased, there is a concern that the ball output rate will rise. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by targeting cherries and watermelons in the attack mode for playability based on the immediate / post-addition ratio, such playability is preferably achieved while avoiding an increase in the ball output rate. It can be realized.

<Modification 7>
The information regarding the execution timing of the additional notification such as the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is not limited to the configuration displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this modification, a configuration will be described in which information regarding the execution timing can be read by a mobile terminal or the like possessed by the player. FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing a process for a mobile terminal executed by the display control device 81. The process for a mobile terminal is, for example, a process executed by a process that is periodically activated by the display control device 81. In this modified example, among the processes for mobile terminals, the process for information regarding the immediate / post-addition ratio in a particularly advantageous section will be described.

In step S11201, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been started. When the advantageous section is started, in step S11220, measurement of each counter of the total watermelon immediate loading counter, the total watermelon rear loading counter, the total cherry immediate loading counter, and the total cherry rear loading counter is started. More specifically, for example, a process of setting a flag that enables determination as to whether or not measurement is in progress is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S11201, or after the process of step S11202 is executed, it is determined in step S1123 whether or not the user has been logged out. In this modified example, the information regarding the immediate / post-addition ratio is configured to be output only when the user information or the like is input on the management screen of the game machine and the user is logged in. In S12003, affirmative determination is made when the logged-in user logs out, while negative determination is made without affirmative determination in a situation where the user is not originally logged in. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1123 and the logged-in user logs out, in step S11204, a total watermelon immediate load counter, a total watermelon post-load counter, a total cherry immediate load counter, and a total cherry post-load counter The measurement of each counter such as, etc. is completed, and the initialization process of each of these counters is executed. That is, each counter is initialized by logging out. On the other hand, when the advantageous section is started, the measurement of each counter is started regardless of the presence or absence of login. As a result, while avoiding the phenomenon that the counter is not measured due to forgetting to log in, it is suppressed that the own game data can be read by another user who succeeds.

If a negative determination is made in step S11203, or after the process of step S11204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S11205. In step S11205, it is determined whether or not there is a request operation for displaying the ratio. This request operation is, for example, an operation according to the operation instruction character (FIG. 198 (a)) during the attack mode end effect shown in the above modification 6, and includes the operation of the effect switch 66 and the like. If an affirmative determination is made in step S11205, the process proceeds to step S11206 to determine whether or not the section is in an advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, in step S11207, a process for displaying the immediate / additional ratio for total watermelon and the immediate / additional ratio for total cherry is performed. By the way, whether or not it is in the advantageous section is determined not in the advantageous section in the end game of the advantageous section (the game in which the attack mode end effect is executed).

In this case, instead of the configuration in which the auxiliary display unit 65 displays these ratios as shown in FIG. 198 (b), a code display (two-dimensional) that can be read by a mobile terminal or the like is shown in FIG. 200 (a). (Code, barcode, etc.) is displayed. By reading the code display, the player can perform data analysis and the like ex post facto on his / her mobile terminal or the like. Further, by doing so, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displayed content is read by another player, and it is possible to guarantee the superiority of having such information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S11206 and it is determined that the section is in an advantageous section, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the restricted display is performed in step S11208. As shown in FIG. 200B, the restricted display means that the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "restricted", but does not display the immediate / post-addition ratio. That is, when the request operation for the ratio display is in the advantageous section, the output of the information regarding the ratio display for the request operation is restricted. In this way, by making it impossible to estimate the set value from the ratio display during the advantageous section and making it known after the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section is too much attention to the ratio display. It is possible to avoid events such as not being able to enjoy.

After executing the process of step S11207 or step S11208, other processes are executed in step S11209, and then the process for the mobile terminal is terminated. In addition, the other processing corresponds to the processing for managing other information (total execution game, number of big hits, number of winning child actors, etc.) that can be read by the mobile terminal. Further, even if a negative determination is made in step S11205, the processing for the mobile terminal is terminated as it is.

By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the execution timing of the additional notification after the fact. In particular, the number of occurrences and contents of advantageous events such as the number of additional games and the number of additional games are likely to remain in the memory of the player who desires the advantageous event, but the timing of notifying the advantageous event is advantageous. It is considered that it is easy to be erased from the player's memory when such an event occurs, and it is difficult to remember the notification timing after the fact. In that respect, by making the notification timing readable to the mobile terminal as in the above configuration, it becomes possible to make great use in data analysis of such notification timing.

<Modification 8>
In a configuration in which the immediate / post-addition ratio is displayed (output) at the end of the attack mode, this display (output) may be performed at a part of the end of the attack mode. In this modification, when the attack mode is forcibly terminated by the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games), the above ratio is displayed (output). FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the attack mode end effect in this modified example.

The setting process of this modification is substantially the same as the flowchart of FIG. 197. As a difference, after performing the same processing as in step S11101 and step S11102 in step S11301 and step S11302, it is determined in step S11303 whether or not the forced termination is performed. In the case of forced termination, in steps S11304 to S11307, the process for displaying (outputting) the ratio is performed in the same manner as in steps S11103 to S11106. After that, the initialization process of each counter is executed in step S11308, and then the setting process of the attack mode end effect is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games becomes 0 and ends before the upper limit is reached instead of forced termination, the process of step S11308 is performed without executing steps S11304 to S11307, and then the attack mode end effect is produced. End the setting process.

As described above, by outputting the information regarding the immediate addition / post-addition ratio based on the forced termination of the attack mode, it is possible to compensate for the forced termination of the attack mode.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the player can select the execution timing of the additional effect. FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining how the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in the present embodiment. In addition, in this embodiment, in the game which executes the additional effect, it is configured to be executed as the effect at the time of total stop. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection of the execution timing of the additional effect will be described as meaning that the game for executing the additional effect is selected.

In the present embodiment, in a game in which a specific winning combination is won as an additional trigger in the attack mode, it is possible to select the execution timing of the additional effect when the additional winning is performed as the specific winning trigger. In the present embodiment, the execution timing is selected depending on which of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped first. The additional effects with different execution timings are the immediate additional effect in which the additional effect occurs in the additional winning game and the game after the additional winning game shown in the fifth embodiment and the like. In a game in which the number of remaining games on the display such as the attack mode is a predetermined number (1), an additional effect is generated, and a precursor mode is implemented from the winning game to the predetermined number of games. After that, an additional effect is set via a precursory effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 202A, when a specific combination is won during the attack mode, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the characters "Select fate by stopping the reels !!" as a notification mode selection effect. Therefore, it is notified that the mode of the additional effect at the time of winning the additional effect can be selected by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the immediate loading effect is selected when the left reel 32L is first stopped, the rear reeling effect is selected when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, and the right reel 32R is first. It is assumed that the effect via the precursor is selected when the stop operation is performed. Therefore, in the notification mode selection effect, the corresponding character that imitates the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the effect selected when the respective stop switches 42 to 44 are operated are associated with each other. And are displayed. Specifically, the first corresponding character TP1 (for example, the character "immediately") indicating the immediate ride effect corresponding to the character of the stop switch 42 is displayed, and the post-load effect is performed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 43. The second corresponding character TP2 (for example, the character "after") to be shown is displayed, and the third corresponding character TP3 (for example, the character "before") indicating the effect via the precursor is displayed corresponding to the character of the stop switch 44. .. In addition, a chance notification effect (exclamation mark) indicating that the game is a specific winning combination is also generated, and the chance notification effect and each display for selecting the execution timing of the above additional effect are Displayed so that they do not overlap with each other.

When the player first stops the left reel 32L in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b1), the left reel 32L is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped and then added. Production occurs.

When the player first stops the middle reel 32M in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b2), the middle reel 32M is stopped based on the stop operation, and then the other reels are also stopped, and then later. A reeling effect is generated corresponding to the selection of the reeling effect. As a post-addition effect, in this example, it is shown that the first post-addition character BUP1 indicating that the addition right based on the watermelon opportunity has been acquired is displayed. The post-addition effect based on the first post-addition character BUP1 and the like is as described in the fifth embodiment and the like.

When the player first stops the right reel 32R in the game, as shown in FIG. 202 (b3), the right reel 32R stops based on the stop operation, and then the other reels also stop, and then a precursor. An effect for precursors is generated corresponding to the selection of the transit effect. As an effect for passing through the precursor, in this example, the character "chance" is displayed in the center of the auxiliary display unit 65, and the band display "chance in progress" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the precursor mode is entered. It is shown that it was done. The additional effect via the precursor mode will be described later, but when the precursor mode continues for the set number of games and the set number of games becomes 0, the additional effect is generated.

Hereinafter, the processing configuration for realizing the above effect will be described.

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the additional effect in the present embodiment. As described above, the addition effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 at the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the specific winning combination winning game.

In step S12001, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is performed. Then, in step S12002, it is determined whether or not the precursor via flag is set. The precursor via flag is a flag that is set when the player selects the precursor via effect based on the addition opportunity. When the precursor via flag is set in step S12002, an additional opportunity occurs in a game prior to the game, the precursor via effect is selected, and the precursor mode based on this selection is in effect. , It means that the additional production has not yet occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12002, in step S12003, the number of additional games in the precursor mode, that is, the number of additional games in which the precursor via effect is selected and the additional effect has not yet occurred, is grasped and the grasped number of additional games is obtained. Is added to the number of additional games this time. Then, in step S12004, a process of clearing the precursor via flag is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S12002, or after the process of step S12004 is executed, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are set so that the notification mode selection effect (FIG. 202A) is executed in step S12005. Control. Then, in step S12006, the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is executed, and then the process of setting the additional effect is completed. The notification mode selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the stop operation of the first reel in this game is the stop operation that is the target of the notification mode selection effect.

Next, in a game in which the notification mode selection effect is executed, a process when the stop operation of the first reel is performed (effect setting process when the first stop is ON) will be described with reference to FIG. 204. This process is the process performed in step S2204 in each stop operation effect setting process (FIG. 49). More specifically, it is a process executed in step S2204 when it is determined in step S2203 that the first stop ON operation is set as the target reel.

In step S12101, it is determined whether or not the notification mode selection flag is set. If it is not set, in step S12102, another set first stop ON time effect is executed, and then the first stop ON time effect setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S12101 that the notification mode selection flag is set, the process of clearing the notification mode selection flag is executed in step S12103. Then, in step S12104, whether or not the immediate ride effect was selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, whether or not the first stop ON operation this time was the stop ON operation of the left reel 32L (left stop switch 42). To judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12104, the process of setting the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12105, and then the process of setting the effect when the first stop is ON is terminated. The immediate ride selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the immediate ride effect has been selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S12104, in step S12106, whether the post-addition effect is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the first stop ON operation this time is the middle reel 32M (middle stop switch 43). It is determined whether or not the stop ON operation has been performed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12106, the process of setting the post-addition selection flag is executed in step S12107, and then the effect setting process at the time of the first stop ON is terminated. The post-addition selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the post-addition effect has been selected.

When the negative determination is made in step S12106, the effect via the precursor is selected in the current notification mode selection effect, that is, the current first stop ON operation is the stop ON of the right reel 32R (right stop switch 44). It means that it was an operation. In this case, in step S12108, the process of setting the precursor selection flag is executed, and then the process of setting the effect when the first stop is ON is terminated. The precursor selection flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the precursor via effect has been selected.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the additional notification effect processing at the time of all stops in the present embodiment. The process for the additional notification effect at the time of all stops is the process performed in steps S2309 and S2319 in the effect setting process at the time of all stops (FIG. 51). As described above, in the present embodiment, all of the additional effects are executed as the effects at the time of full stop, and are not executed at the time of the first stop ON operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the like.

In step S12201, it is determined whether or not the immediate ride selection flag is set. If the immediate ride selection flag is set, the process of clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12202. After that, in step S12203, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the additional effect triggered by this game (see FIG. 202 (b1)).

If a negative determination is made in step S12201, it is determined in step S12204 whether or not the post-addition selection flag is set. If the post-addition selection flag is set, the process of clearing the post-addition selection flag is executed in step S12205. After that, in step S12206, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the effect for rearing (see FIG. 202 (b2)). Then, in step S12207, a process of storing the number of additional games this time is executed in the individual area, and a process of setting a post-addition flag is executed in step S12208. The processes of steps S12207 and S12208 correspond to the processes of step S11016, step S11019, step S11023, and the like, and are storage processes for generating an additional effect after the fact.

If a negative determination is made in step S12204, it is determined in step S12209 whether or not the precursor selection flag is set. If the precursor selection flag is set, the process of clearing the precursor selection flag is executed in step S12210. After that, in step S12211, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so as to execute the effect for passing through the precursor (see FIG. 202 (b3)). Then, in step S12212, a process of storing the number of games added this time in the individual area is executed, and in step S12213, a lottery process of the number of precursor games is executed. Then, in step S12214, the process of inputting the number of precursor games drawn in step S12213 to the continuous effect counter is executed, and in step S12215, the process of setting the continuous effect flag and the precursor via flag is executed. The process of setting the continuous effect flag in step S12213, step S12214, and step S12215 corresponds to the process of step S2506, step S2507, and step S2509. This is a process when a continuous effect is executed based on the above. Further, when the additional effect setting process is performed in the subsequent game (the game until the number of precursor games set in step S12212 is exhausted) by setting the precursor via flag in step S12216, An affirmative determination is made in step S12002.

After executing any of the processes of step S12203, step S12208, and step S12215, or after making a negative determination in step S12209, the process proceeds to step S12216. The processing of steps S12216 to S12220 is a process when it is selected to generate an additional effect in a subsequent game instead of the additional winning game, that is, when a post-addition effect or a precursor via effect is selected. ..

That is, in step S12216, it is determined whether or not the post-addition flag is set and the current game is a game that generates the post-addition effect. More specifically, when the post-addition flag is set and the remaining number counter HG for display is 1 as a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S12216. If an affirmative determination is made in step S12216, the post-addition effect setting process is executed in step S12217.

Here, the setting process of the post-addition effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 206. In the post-addition effect in the present embodiment, basically, an effect substantially similar to the post-addition effect (content notification) in the zone shown in the fifth embodiment is generated.

That is, in step S12301, among the plurality of individual areas provided, the individual area in which the oldest data is stored is referred to, and the process of acquiring the data (the number of additional games) of the individual area is executed. In this case, the corresponding rear-mounted characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are enlarged and displayed in the substantially center of the auxiliary display unit 65. In the following step S12302, as the effect operation unit, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 66 has been operated, and the process waits until the effect switch 66 is operated. If it is operated, the process proceeds to step S12303, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the treasure chest is opened and the number of additional games is displayed as a content notification (FIG. 185 (b)). ). In the following step S12304, the number corresponding to the number of games of the additional effect executed in step S12303 is added to the display remaining number counter HG, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding display is updated. To do. Then, in step S12305, the process of erasing the data of the individual area this time is performed, and then in step S12306, it is determined whether or not the data of the unreported individual area remains.

If the data of the individual area that has not been notified remains in step S12306, the process returns to step S12301 and the processes of steps S12301 to S12305 are repeated. That is, the post-addition effect is a configuration in which the post-addition effect is sequentially performed in the order in which the add-on trigger occurs, and the player can enjoy the post-addition effect while remembering at what timing the add-on effect occurred. Become.

If it is determined in step S12306 that the data of the unreported individual area does not remain, the process proceeds to step S12307 and the process of clearing the post-addition flag is executed. After that, in step S12308, as the end processing of the post-addition effect, for example, the total number of games added in the post-addition effect this time is notified, and then the setting process of the post-addition effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the additional notification process at the time of all stops, if a negative determination is made in step S12216, or after the process of step S12217 is executed, the process proceeds to step S12218. In step S12218, it is determined whether or not the precursor via flag is set and the continuous effect counter is 0. As described above, the continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games in the precursor mode, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. That is, the game in which the continuous production counter becomes 0 is the final game in the precursor mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step S12219 and the process of reading the number of additional games from the individual area is executed. Then, in step S12220, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding additional game number is produced. If a negative determination is made in step S12218, or after the process of step S12220 is executed, the stop-time addition notification process is terminated.

Here, the relationship between the winning mode of various specific combinations and the first reel, which is a selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, will be supplementarily described.

When the specific combination is a strong cherry, as already explained, the strong cherry winning is established when the symbol combination corresponding to the 28th small combination and the 32nd small combination to the 35th small combination stops at the effective line (Fig.). 17). For both the 28th small combination and the 32nd small combination to the 35th small combination, the corresponding symbol of the left reel 32L is a "cherry" symbol or a "second replay" symbol (FIG. 10). In this case, the "cherry" symbol is attached to the left reel 32L at the fourth position, and the "second replay" symbol is attached to the left reel 32L at the sixth position. That is, in the 3-bet game, the left stop switch 42 is from the timing when the 18th "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row to the timing when the 4th "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row. If is operated (ON operation), the corresponding symbol of the strong cherry can be stopped at the effective line. In other words, if the operation timing of the left stop switch 42 is the timing when the 5th "LUCKY" symbol of the left reel 32L to the 17th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the corresponding symbol of the strong cherry is the effective line. It cannot be stopped at, and it becomes a so-called omission.

On the other hand, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbols of the medium reel 32M are, for example, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol in the 28th small role (FIG. 10). , The middle reel 32M is not separated by 5 symbols or more, and any symbol can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the strong cherry, the corresponding symbol of the right reel 32R is, for example, the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol, or the "second replay" symbol in the 28th small role (FIG. 10). As for these symbols, any of the symbols can be stopped at the effective line regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the right stop switch 44.

That is, when the additional winning is a strong cherry, in the notification mode selection effect, when the left reel 32L is stopped first and the immediate addition effect is to be selected, the strong cherry is won due to the stop operation. Cannot be established, and there is a possibility that it will be missed. On the other hand, in the notification mode selection effect based on the strong cherry, when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped first to select the rear-loading effect or the effect via the precursor, the effect is missed due to the stop operation. There is no case. In this way, in order to select the execution timing of the additional effect based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has a configuration in which the possibility of omission is different. The presence or absence of the omission can be added to the selection game of the execution timing of the additional effect.

For example, as a player who is concerned that the possibility of being missed increases due to the conflict between the selection operation and the stop operation, the middle reel 32M or the right reel is used in the notification mode selection effect triggered by the winning of the strong cherry. It is conceivable to stop the 32R first. In this case, as the additional effect, the additional effect or the effect via the precursor is selected, and the additional effect is generated in the game after the game, which is an effect that carries over the expectation. On the other hand, if the left reel 32L is first stopped with the possibility of being missed, the immediate addition effect is selected, and the addition will occur in the game. As a result, even if a miss occurs, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the game was a non-winning small role or a missed role by generating an additional effect in the game. By doing so, it is possible to create an effect in which the risk of omission is added to the competition between the selection operation and the stop operation, and the playability of these selection operations is enhanced.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the game in which the specific combination is won in the attack mode, the execution timing (execution game) of the additional effect triggered by the selection of the specific combination is made different based on the stop operation mode of the game. More specifically, in the specific winning combination winning game, when the left reel 32L is stopped first, the immediate loading effect is generated, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped first, the rear reeling effect is generated, and the right reel is right reel. When the 32R is stopped for the first time, a precursory effect is generated. In this way, by configuring the configuration to determine the effect execution timing at the time of addition according to the stop operation mode of the addition winning game, it is possible to realize the addition effect according to the preference of the player.

In particular, since the execution timing of the additional effect is selected in the additional winning game, for example, the execution timing is selected by comparing with the configuration selected at the start of the attack mode or before the transition to the attack mode. The timing tends to be close to the timing at which the additional trigger occurs. As a result, it is possible to select the execution timing according to the situation of the attack mode that changes from moment to moment, and it is possible to reflect the request to the player more.

Where push order notification occurs frequently during the attack mode, push order notification does not occur in the specific winning combination winning game that triggers the addition. That is, the notification mode selection effect and the push order notification effect are set so as not to conflict with each other. As a result, in the notification mode selection effect, there is no room for selection of the additional effect because the push order for winning the desired result is set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize the playability by the notification mode selection effect.

As described above, the push order notification is frequently generated during the attack mode, but the push order notification is not generated when the specific combination is won. Therefore, as a player, while aiming to win a medal by the push order notification, It is considered that the game progresses with a sense of expectation that a game in which the push order notification does not occur will occur. That is, since the above-mentioned notification mode selection effect is generated in the game in which the push order notification does not occur, the notification mode selection effect is performed in a situation where the degree of attention has already been increased, and the playability by such effect is suitable. It becomes possible to realize.

As described above, the attack mode is mainly executed in the second RT state, but in the second RT, the probability of winning one of the replays is high, and the replay prize is frequently established. The replays that can be won during the second RT state include push order replays such as fall replays 1 to 3 and second promotion replays 1 and 2, as well as replays that are not subject to push order notification such as normal replays. That is, in the second RT state in which the replay is frequently won, there is not only a game in which the desired replay prize is established by the push order notification, but also a game in which the replay prize is established without the push order notification. Based on such a premise, since the notification mode selection effect is generated when the specific combination is won, whether or not the notification mode selection effect is generated is whether the specific combination is won or the normal replay is won. It will function as a branching effect of. As a result, the high degree of interest in the notification mode selection effect is utilized to increase the degree of attention in the normal replay winning game, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention throughout the attack mode.

<Modification example 1>
In this modified example, in a situation close to the maximum number of games in the advantageous period, the effect via the precursor cannot be selected. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of the first stop ON in this modification.

The processing of steps S12401 to S12407 is the same as the processing of steps S12101 to S12107. When the left reel 32L is set to the first stop, the immediate loading selection flag is set, and when the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop. Set the post-selection flag. When it is determined in step S12406 that the middle reel 32M is not the first stop, it is determined in step S12408 whether or not the number of executed games in the advantageous section this time exceeds the predetermined number of games (1450 games). .. That is, assuming that the predetermined number of games is 1450 games, the case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S12408 is the case where the upper limit of the advantageous section is less than 50 games. In this case, even if the effect via the precursor is selected with the right reel 32R as the first stop, the process proceeds to step S12405 and the process of setting the immediate ride selection flag is executed. That is, when an additional effect occurs in a situation close to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the additional effect is generated assuming that the immediate addition effect is forcibly selected even if the precursory effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated during the precursor mode. If it is determined in step S12408 that the number of games executed in the advantageous section this time is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, the precursor selection flag is set in step S12409 as in step S12108, and then the present first step is performed. 1 When the stop is ON, the effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in relation to the forced termination game of the advantageous section, the execution of the selected effect in the notification mode selection effect can be restricted, so that the advantageous section (attack mode) is not executed without the selected effect being executed. ) Can be avoided.

In the above configuration, the explanation is made on the premise that the third corresponding character TP3, in which the effect via the precursor is selected when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop, is displayed, but in a situation close to the forced termination game of the advantageous section, the first is 3 The corresponding character TP3 may not be displayed. In this case, instead of the third corresponding character TP3, the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate ride effect may be displayed. However, the above configuration has an advantage that the effect configuration can be simplified because it is not necessary to change the notification mode selection effect itself. Further, when the right reel 32R is first stopped in the notification mode selection effect, the effect may be forcibly added afterwards.

Further, when the middle reel 32M is set to the first stop and the post-loading effect is selected, the immediate loading effect is forcibly performed according to the number of digested games in the advantageous section (if the number of executed games is 1450 or more). It may be configured to be used. In this case as well, the second corresponding character TP2 corresponding to the post-addition effect may not be displayed, or the first corresponding character TP1 corresponding to the immediate addition effect may be displayed instead of the second corresponding character TP2. Good.

Depending on the number of additional games at the time of winning the additional game, the correspondence between the selection operation executed in the notification mode selection effect and the execution timing of the selected additional notification may be different. Specifically, for example, when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games (100 games), the additional effect is executed with a predetermined probability (50%) at an execution timing different from the execution timing selected by the selection operation. It may be configured to be. More specifically, even if the precursory effect is selected when the number of additional games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, there is a predetermined probability that the additional game is executed instead of the selected precursory effect. Good. By doing so, the surprise of the number of additional games is added to the surprise of being executed at a timing different from one's own intention, and it is possible to make the player more surprised.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the notification mode selection effect is executed in the game that normally wins the replay (a game different from the additional winning game). FIG. 208 (a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of normal replay. This process is performed in the display control device 81 during the start effect setting process as the start effect of the normal replay winning game in the attack mode.

In step S12501, it is determined whether or not the number of selected counters provided in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183 is 1 or more. The selected counter indicates the number of games for which the execution timing of the additional effect selected in the notification mode selection effect is valid, a predetermined value (20) is input by the selection operation, and one game is consumed each time one game is exhausted. It is a counter to be subtracted.

If the selected counter is 1 or more, the effect setting process at the time of normal replay is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the selected counter is 0, the process of setting the notification mode selection flag is performed in step S12502, and then the present effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the normal replay winning game, the notification mode selection effect can be executed as the effect when the first stop is ON.

In the first stop ON time effect setting process in this modification, as shown in FIG. 209, in steps S12601 to S12608, the same process as in steps S12101 to S12108 is executed. After executing any of the processes of step S12605, step S12607, and step S12608, the process proceeds to step S12609, a process of inputting, for example, "20" as a predetermined value to the selected counter is executed, and then the first stop is ON. Ends the time effect setting process. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S12501 over the subsequent 20 games. More specifically, by performing the selection operation at the time of winning the normal replay, the notification mode selection effect will not occur even if the normal replay is won again within 20 games thereafter.

As the process for setting various additional effects, as described above, the additional notification process (FIG. 205) at the time of all stops is executed. More specifically, by generating a notification mode selection effect at the time of normal replay winning and performing a selection operation, one of the immediate addition selection flag, the late addition selection flag, and the precursor selection flag is set, and the subsequent 20 games are completed. If the additional winning is won, all stops are based on the above selection operation performed in the game prior to the additional winning game (based on the immediate addition selection flag, the post-addition selection flag, and the precursor selection flag flag). The execution timing of the additional effect is set in the time addition notification process.

That is, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the left reel 32L is set as the first stop and the immediate addition effect is selected, the immediate addition selection flag is set, and when the addition is won in the subsequent game, the addition is added. An additional effect will occur in the winning game (an immediate effect will occur). Further, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the middle reel 32M is set as the first stop and the post-addition effect is selected, the post-addition selection flag is set, and when the additional win is won in the subsequent game, the attack is performed. When the number of remaining games on the mode display reaches the predetermined number of games, an additional effect is generated (a post-addition effect occurs). Then, in the notification mode selection effect at the time of winning the normal replay, when the right reel 32R is set to the first stop and the effect via the precursor is selected, the precursor selection flag is set, and when the game is additionally won in the subsequent game, the precursor mode is set. After that, the additional effect occurs (the effect via the precursor occurs).

In this way, by making the execution game of the notification mode selection effect and the additional winning game different games, the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect and the eye-pressing operation in the specific combination winning do not conflict with each other. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as failure of the eye-pressing operation and omission due to too much concentration on the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect.

In this modification, the process for selecting the selected counter for managing the selected counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 208 (b). The selected counter process is performed by the display control device 81 as one process in the effect setting process at the time of total stop (FIG. 51).

In step S12511, it is determined whether or not the selected counter is 1 or more. If it is not 1 or more, that is, if it is 0, the selected counter processing is terminated as it is. If it is 1 or more, the process of subtracting 1 from the selected counter is executed in step S12512. Then, in step S12513, it is determined whether or not the selected counter has become 0, and if it is not 0, the selected counter processing is terminated as it is. If it becomes 0, it is determined in step S12514 whether or not the post-addition selection flag or the precursor selection flag is set. If any of these flags is set, the corresponding flag is cleared in step S12515, the immediate loading selection flag is set in step S12516, and then the selected counter processing is terminated. Further, when a negative determination is made in step S12514 and the immediate placement selection flag is set, the selection flag is not erased even if the selected counter becomes 0, and the process for the selected counter is maintained as it is. finish.

As described above, in the normal replay winning game in the attack mode, the notification mode selection effect is generated, and the selection operation in the game is regarded as valid for the predetermined number of games, and after the predetermined game elapses or normally. If an additional opportunity occurs before the replay is won, the immediate addition effect is generated. That is, the immediate ride effect is the default, and the notification mode selection effect of the normal replay winning game causes the additional effect between the predetermined number of games thereafter to be performed as an execution timing different from the default immediate add effect, and the post-addition effect or the effect via the precursor is performed. It was configured to be selected so that it would be done. For example, a configuration in which the selection operation at the time of normal replay winning is regarded as valid until the end of the attack mode can be considered. However, with such a configuration, even if the execution timing desired by the player changes due to changes in the game situation (such as an increase or decrease in the number of remaining games in the attack mode or an increase in the number of medals won) after the selection operation is performed. , It becomes difficult to respond to the change. On the other hand, by doing so as described above, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the player himself / herself selects the execution timing of the additional effect according to the situation of the attack mode that can change from moment to moment.

Moreover, by setting the predetermined number of games to the number of games (20 games) shorter than the initial number of games (50 games) in the attack mode, for example, if the notification mode selection effect occurs immediately after the start of the attack mode, the notification mode selection effect is subsequently generated. , At least once again, there is room for the notification mode selection effect to occur. As a result, even if the addition does not occur, the player who wants to change the execution timing of the addition effect in the first half and the second half of the attack mode to change the effect of the attack mode in case the addition occurs. It will be possible to meet the needs. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game production that meets the diverse needs of the player.

Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the notification mode selection effect is generated triggered by a randomly occurring event such as a normal replay winning, as described above, an element of luck is added as to whether or not the notification mode can be selected. The enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, the execution timing of the additional notification selected by the selection operation can be changed after the fact. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an additional notification process at the time of all stops in this modified example.

The difference between the additional notification process at the time of all stops in this modification and the flowchart of FIG. 205 is the process when the immediate addition selection flag is set. That is, when it is determined in step S12701 that the immediate ride selection flag is set, the process of clearing the immediate ride selection flag is executed in step S12702. Then, in step S12703, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect of this game. The processing of steps S12701 to S12703 is the same as the processing of steps S12201 to S12203.

In step S12704, it is determined whether or not the post-addition flag is set. When it is determined in step S12704 that the post-addition flag is set, the post-addition effect is selected for the addition trigger that occurred before the current addition trigger, but the immediate addition effect is performed at this addition trigger. It means that you have selected. In this case, the correction process is executed in step S12705. If the post-addition flag is not set in step S12704, or after the correction process is executed in step S12705, the process proceeds to step S12718. The processing of steps S12706 to S12722 is the same as the processing of steps S12204 to S12220.

The correction process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 211.

First, in step S12801, a forward-moving effect is set. The forward-moving effect is an effect for notifying that the additional effect that should have occurred just before the end of the attack mode when the post-addition effect is selected can be executed in the current game ahead of schedule. .. More specifically, in order to notify the situation in which it is possible to generate an additional effect in this game based on the first post-addition character BUP1 and the second post-addition character BUP2 acquired as the post-addition right. For example, on the auxiliary display unit 65, the characters "Would you like to open the stored treasure box?" Are displayed. Further, in the forward-moving possible effect, the characters "YES" and "NO" are displayed, and the player can select whether or not to generate the additional effect by moving forward by operating the effect switch 66 or the like.

After the forward-moving possible effect is generated in step S12801, it is determined in step S12802 whether or not the forward-moving instruction operation for generating the additional effect by moving forward is performed. In the above example, it is preferable that the character display selection operation of "YES" is performed in the forward-moving possible production as the forward-moving instruction operation.

If the forward-moving instruction operation has not been performed in step S12802, it is determined in step S12803 whether or not the back-loading maintenance operation has been performed so that the additional effect is not generated in the forward movement. In the above example, it is preferable that the operation of selecting the character display of "NO" is performed in the forward-moving effect as the post-addition maintenance operation. Further, for example, the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 may be a post-addition maintenance operation. This is because such an operation can be regarded as a manifestation of intention to start the next game, and can be regarded as a manifestation of intention not to generate an additional effect ahead of schedule in this game.

If it is determined in step S12803 that the post-addition maintenance operation has been performed, the correction process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S12803, the process returns to step S12802 and loops until either the forward instruction operation or the post-addition maintenance operation is performed.

When it is determined in step S12802 that the forward instruction operation has been performed, the number of stored individual areas is displayed in step S12804. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 212 (a), the first back-mounted character BUP1 and the second back-mounted character BUP2 are displayed side by side in the order in which the back-mounted effect was supposed to be performed. As a result, the player can grasp how many additional rights exist. In FIG. 212 (a), three first back-loading characters BUP1 are displayed side by side, and it is shown that they have three back-loading rights triggered by the winning of the watermelon.

In the following step S12805, it is determined whether or not the individual area selection operation has been performed. For example, in FIG. 212 (a), a cursor such as an arrow is displayed for the arranged post-addition right (treasure box), and one post-addition right (treasure box) can be selected by moving / determining the cursor. .. It is preferable to use the effect switch 66 to select the post-addition right. For example, the cursor is automatically moved in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 sec cycle) to indicate the desired post-addition right. It is assumed that when the effect switch 66 is operated in the state, the right to add one is selected and the individual area is selected. If the individual area selection operation has not been performed, the process returns to step S12805 and waits until the selection operation is performed.

When the selection operation is performed, in step S12806, the process of reading the data of the number of additional games in the selected individual area is executed. Then, in step S12807, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the corresponding individual area addition effect is performed (FIG. 212 (b)). In step S12808, a process of adding the number of additional games this time to the display remaining number counter HG is performed, and in step S12809, a data erasure process of an individual area corresponding to the additional effect generated in step S12807 is executed.

In step S12810, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported individual area. If present, the process returns to step S12802, and steps S12802 to step S12809 are repeated. When the unreported individual area no longer exists, a negative determination is made in step S12810, the process proceeds to step S12811, and a process of clearing the post-addition flag is executed. After that, in step S12812, the end process of the post-addition effect is executed, and then the present correction process is ended. The processing of step S12811 and step S12812 is the same as the processing of step S12307 and step S12308.

In the correction process in this modification, the characters corresponding to the acquired additional rights are displayed side by side in order as shown in FIG. 212 (a), and each character can be selected regardless of the acquisition order. That is, it is possible to generate the post-addition effect regardless of the order in which the add-on triggers that triggered the post-addition effect occur. For example, the first post-addition right that occurred earlier and the second addition right that occurred later. When the post-addition right exists, it is possible to select that the addition effect based on the second post-addition right is executed before the addition effect based on the first post-addition right.

More specifically, in FIG. 212 (a), as the three additional rights, the treasure chest on the left shows the additional right based on the first additional trigger, and the inner treasure box shows the second additional right. The right to add after the opportunity is shown, and the treasure box on the right shows the right to add after the third occurrence. The cursor shown in FIG. 212 (a) points to the treasure chest corresponding to the second postponement right. In that situation, if it is determined that the individual area selection operation has been performed (step S12805: YES), in step S12806, the number of additional games is acquired from the individual area corresponding to the second additional right, and in step S12806, the number of additional games is acquired. An additional effect based on the second additional right is generated (Fig. 212 (b)). In this case, the additional effect of the post-addition right based on the additional trigger that first occurred has not yet occurred. That is, it is possible to make the order of occurrence of the addition trigger different from the order of occurrence of the addition effect in the post-addition effect.

As described above, even when the post-addition effect is selected by the selection operation in the notification mode selection effect, the post-addition effect should be performed after the fact. By making it possible to execute at a timing earlier than the timing, it is possible to respond to the change of mind of the player according to the ever-changing game situation. For example, if an additional trigger occurs in the early stages of the attack mode, it is expected that an additional trigger will occur after that, and even if the additional effect based on this additional trigger is selected as the additional effect, the possibility is high. There is a possibility that the person may change his mind that he wants to generate the addition selected as the post-addition effect before the execution timing of the post-addition effect due to a deviation or the like. In that respect, as described above, by making it possible to change the selected post-addition effect to the immediate-on effect after the fact, it is possible to flexibly respond to the change of mind of the player.

As an opportunity to make the above change possible, it was decided that the immediate addition effect at the time of the addition opportunity was selected. If the trigger for making the change, that is, the trigger for executing the correction process is a configuration that can be changed indefinitely, for example, a configuration for generating each game, the effect of whether or not to make the change (advanceable effect) is frequent. It will occur in the above, and it will make you feel annoyed, and it may be a configuration in which the intention of selecting the post-production is not respected. In that respect, there is a high possibility that a change of mind has occurred when the immediate addition effect is selected after the post-addition effect is selected, and in the above configuration, the correction process can be executed with the change of the player's mind as a trigger. It has a structure. As a result, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the peripheral processing and realize the production according to the needs of the player within the range in which the troublesomeness of the production is not felt.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the forced termination condition of the advantageous section is changed. As described above, in each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section is forced regardless of the number of remaining games such as the attack mode, based on the number of games executed during the advantageous section reaching the upper limit number of games (1500 games). (Second process of section display) was adopted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the first compulsory termination condition of the above upper limit game number, the number of medals increase / decrease (the difference between the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used) in the advantageous section is the upper limit increase number. The second forced termination condition is that the maximum number of sheets is reached (2400 sheets).

Specifically, FIG. 213 and FIG. 213 show the cases where the advantageous section ends under the first forced termination condition of the upper limit number of games and the case where the advantageous section ends under the second forced termination condition of the upper limit increase number. This will be described with reference to FIG. 214.

FIG. 213 shows how the advantageous section ends under the first forced termination condition. It is assumed that the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at the timing of ta1, and the mode shifts to the challenge mode at the timing of ta2. As described above, even if the player wins the lottery for transition to the challenge mode and shifts to the challenge mode, the push order notification is unlikely to occur in the slot machine 10, and the number of medals held decreases as the game progresses. If the attack mode is won during the challenge mode and the transition to the attack mode occurs at the timing of ta3, the push order notification can be generated and the number of medals held will increase. After that, for example, when the transition to the VB mode occurs at ta4 and the attack mode is restored at ta5, and the number of digestion games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 1500 games at the timing of ta6, for example, The advantageous section is forcibly terminated. In this example, although the number of medals increased / decreased in the advantageous section at the timing of ta6 has not reached the upper limit increase number (2400 cards), the first forced termination condition, which is the above upper limit number of games, is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games such as attack mode.

FIG. 214 shows how the advantageous section ends under the second forced termination condition. It is assumed that the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at the timing of tb1, and the mode shifts to the challenge mode at the timing of tb2. Then, as in the case of ta3, the number of medals held can be expected to increase by shifting to the attack mode in which the push order notification can be generated at the timing of tb3.

Here, the push order notification at the time of winning the push order replay shifts the RT state to the second RT state or the third RT state with a high replay probability, and the push order notification at the time of winning the push order bell causes a combination with a large number of payouts (No. 1). As already explained, the number of medals can be expected to increase by establishing a prize (1 small role), and when the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state are digested with the push order notification (when digested as the so-called ART state), An increase of about 1.90 is expected per game. In addition, as a result of the game where the number of medals can be expected to increase (medals can be expected to be obtained), bonus winnings such as 1st BB and 2nd BB are provided, and in the bonus state based on the 1st BB and 2nd BB winnings, the upper limit is 216. Medal payout occurs as the number of payouts. In the bonus state, there is a high probability that one of the BB small and medium-sized wins 1 to BB small and medium-sized wins 3 will be won in each game, and an increase of about 6.00 cards can be expected per game. In other words, comparing the number of medals increased per game (net increase) in the ART state and the net increase in the bonus state, the net increase is larger in the bonus state, and a bonus is required to obtain the same number of payouts. A smaller number of games will suffice after going through the state.

In the example of FIG. 214, the timings of tb4 to tb5 and the timings of tb6 to tb7 indicate that the advantageous section has been digested as a bonus state. After the bonus state ends at tb7, when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase of 2400 at the timing of tb8, the advantageous section is forcibly ended. In this example, although the number of digested games in the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit number (1500 games, tb9) at the timing of tb8, the second forced termination condition, which is the above upper limit increase number, is satisfied. The advantageous section is forcibly ended regardless of the number of remaining games such as attack mode.

That is, when the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section is set as the second forced termination condition, the number of games up to the second forced termination condition depends on the state in which each game in the advantageous section is played. Will be different. FIG. 215 collectively shows the lottery tables for the normal game state, the first RT state to the third RT state, and the BB state in the present embodiment. As already explained, the normal game state and the 1st RT state have different types of replays that can be won, but the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively low compared to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state. It is in the state of. In addition, although the types of replays that can be won are different between the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the total replay probability is common, and the replay probability is relatively high compared to the normal game state and the 1st RT state. Is. Therefore, in FIG. 215, the normal gaming state and the first RT state are collectively referred to as a low RT state, and the second RT state and the third RT state are collectively referred to as a high RT state. The probability of winning the push order bell and CB and the number of medals paid out at the time of winning (privilege) are different from those of each of the above embodiments, but this is a change for adjusting the net increase in the number of medals.

FIG. 216 shows the difference in the net increase number of sheets depending on each state and the presence / absence of push order notification.

In the situation where the push order notification is not generated when the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, and in the above low RT state (normal game state and first RT state), the net increase in the number of sheets that can be expected per game is about -1. The number is 60, and the number of medals held decreases as the game is played. On the other hand, even in the situation where the push order notification does not occur, in the above high RT state (2nd RT state and 3rd RT state), the net increase in the number of medals that can be expected per game is about -0.03, and the number of medals held is about -0.03. You can play the game with almost no reduction.

On the other hand, when the display mode is a situation where push order notification occurs like attack mode or VB mode, the net increase in the number of sheets that can be expected per game is about -0.99 in the low RT state, which is the above. It will be more than the net increase in the number of sheets in the low RT state when the push order notification of is not generated (the decrease will be less). Then, in a situation where push order notification occurs and in a high RT state, the net increase in the number of medals that can be expected per game is about +1.90, which means that many medals can be expected to be won.

Here, each of the above net increase numbers is a net increase number that does not include the number of medals that can be obtained in the bonus state that shifts based on the bonus winning. That is, as described above, in the bonus state based on the winning of the first BB and the second BB, the net increase in the number of cards that can be expected per game is about +6.00. The net increase in the number of sheets in the bonus state is larger than the net increase in the low RT state and the high RT state in the situation where the push order notification does not occur, and the low RT state and the high RT state in the situation where the push order notification can occur. In many cases, by adding the bonus state, the actual expected net increase in the number of cards per game in each game is larger than that without the bonus state. In FIG. 216, the net increase in the number of sheets including the bonus state is also displayed. In the low RT state in the situation where the push order notification does not occur, about -1.05 sheets, in the high RT state, about +0.52 sheets, the push order. It is about −0.44 in the low RT state and about +2.46 in the high RT state in a situation where notification can occur.

The net increase number including the bonus state is the value obtained by converting the increase in the bonus state per game from the bonus winning probability per game and the number of cards obtained in the bonus state at the time of winning, without adding the bonus state. It is calculated by adding to the net increase in the number of cards per game. For example, if the bonus winning probability is about 1/254 and the number of cards acquired in the bonus state is 144 (216 cards-3 cards x 24 games), the conversion value per game is the increase in the bonus state. About 1/254 × 144 sheets = about 0.56 sheets. Then, this converted value is added to the net increase number of sheets not including the above bonus state, and the net increase number of sheets including the bonus state is calculated.

The upper limit increase number (2400 cards), which is the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section defined in the present embodiment, pushes all the upper limit games (1500 games), which is the first forced termination condition of the advantageous section, in order notification. Expected number of acquisitions (1500 games x about 1.90 = 2850) when digested in a high RT state that can occur, and expected acquisition number (1500 games x about 2.46) when the bonus state is added to it The number of sheets is set to be less than (3690 sheets = 3690 sheets). In other words, if all the advantageous sections are digested in a high RT state where push order notification can occur, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition before the first forced termination condition. (Fig. 214).

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in the present embodiment.

In step S13001, it is determined whether or not the interval is advantageous. Here, in the present embodiment, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator may not be lit and displayed. This configuration will be described in detail later, but as already explained, in the section display first process, the number of games in the advantageous section is counted by setting the challenge mode winning flag and the attack mode winning flag (advantageous section game). It is configured to start (addition of several AGs). Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S13001, it is determined that the advantageous section game number AG is grasped instead of the presence / absence of the display of the section display, and the advantageous section game number AG is 1 or more in the advantageous section. Judgment is made, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section is 0, it is determined that the section is not advantageous.

In step S1302, the addition process of the advantageous section game number AG is executed. Then, in step S13003, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous section (the difference between the number of medals bet and the number paid out in each game in the advantageous section), and is a step. In S13003, the number of medals increased / decreased in this game (number of medals paid out in this game-number of bets in this game) is grasped based on the winning result of this game (immediately preceding winning result correspondence processing and payout judgment processing). Then, the process of adding the medal increase / decrease number to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed. For example, when this game is a 3-bet game and 9 medals are paid out, the number of medals increased / decreased is +6, and in step S13003, +6 is added to the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM. Further, when the game this time is a 3-bet game and the medals are not paid out, the number of medals increased / decreased is -3, and in step S13003, a process of adding -3 to the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed.

After executing the process of step S13003, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S13004. The remaining game number management process is as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 218, and is substantially the same as that of each of the above embodiments, but when the number of empty games FG is 0 or less (total advantageous section game number SG is advantageous). When the number of games exceeds the upper limit of the section, the process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d instead of the above excess flag is performed in step S13110: NO) and step S13111. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first forced termination condition can be satisfied after that, and in the present embodiment, the second forced termination condition can be satisfied after that. The configuration is distinguishable from the situation (second excess flag).

After executing the remaining game number management process in step S13004, the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process.

In step S13201, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM updated in step S13003 is grasped. In the following step S13202, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (step S13107) calculated by the remaining game management process in step S13004 and the net increase in the number of games expected in each game in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 (expected increase / decrease). From the number KM), the process of calculating the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM that can be obtained by the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is executed. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease number KM is a case where the advantageous section is digested in the high RT state in the situation where the above push order notification occurs, and the net increase number (about +2.46 sheets) in consideration of the bonus state. ) Is used. That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected number of remaining games NM is 500 games x 2.46 games = 1230 games.

In step S13203, from the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM grasped in step S1321 and the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM calculated in step S13202, the current number of advantageous section remaining games is added and acquired during the current advantageous section. The process of calculating the number of sheets that can be expected (total increase / decrease expected number of sheets SM) is performed. Then, in step S13204, a process of calculating the number of free FMs that can be increased is performed. The process of step S13204 corresponds to the process of calculating the number of free games FG that can be added in step S13109 in the remaining game number management process, and the process of step S13109 is the first forced termination condition in the subsequent games. It is a process of predicting in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated in, and the process of step S13204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is a process to do. That is, in step S13204, a process of subtracting the total expected increase / decrease expected number SM calculated in step S1303 from the 2400 sheets which is the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is performed.

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, even during the advantageous section, before the transition to the attack mode occurs (up to ta3 in FIG. 213, up to tb3 in FIG. 214), in each game. The number of medals held can be reduced, and the net increase in the number of medals during this period is negative. Then, in the prediction process (step S13202) performed in each game during this period, it is considered that the prediction should be performed with the net increase in the number of medals held. However, as described above, in predicting whether or not the upper limit increase number is reached from the relationship with the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the decrease up to ta3 or tb3 is absorbed by the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM. It can be done. Therefore, as described above, the net increase in the number of sheets during that period is not calculated separately, and the processing configuration is simplified.

In step S13205, based on the processing result of step S13204, it is determined whether or not the free number FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and the forced termination is performed under the second forced termination condition in the future. If the number of free FM is 1 or more, it is assumed that the upper limit increase number is not reached, and the remaining number management process is terminated as it is. If the number of free FM is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13206, a process of setting the second excess flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is performed, and then the remaining number management process is terminated. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

In the second section display process, after the remaining number management process is executed in step S13005, whether or not the advantageous section game number AG reaches 1500, which is the upper limit number of games, in step S13006, or the number of advantageous section increase / decrease. It is determined whether or not ZM has reached the upper limit increase number of 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S13007 to execute the process for ending the advantageous section.

That is, in step S13007, the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM are cleared to 0. In the following step S1608, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is performed. Then, in step S13009, after performing a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second process of displaying this section ends. The display end processing of the section display and the data initialization processing are as described above.

Further, even if it is determined in step S13006 that none of the forced termination conditions are satisfied, if it is determined in step S13010 or step S13011 that the normal termination condition is satisfied (challenge mode winning flag or attack mode). If none of the winning flag, the challenge mode flag, and the attack mode flag is set), the process proceeds to step S13007, and the process for ending the advantageous section is performed. The process when the normal end condition is satisfied is the same as the above-mentioned process.

As described above, the present embodiment has a first forced termination condition that defines the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and a second forced termination condition that defines the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section. It is predicted in advance that the 1st forced termination condition and the 2nd forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future (in the subsequent game), and if it is predicted that the forced termination condition will be satisfied, the 1st excess flag and the 2nd will be satisfied, respectively. By setting the excess flag, the CPU 102 can specify that it will be forcibly terminated in the future.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, if the additional lottery such as the attack mode can be won and the additional can occur, the benefit of the additional by forced termination. As compensation for the inability to obtain, the set value is suggested so as to present information that may be useful to the player.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in the challenge mode and the attack mode in the present embodiment. As described above, such a process is a process performed in steps S6025, step S918, step S1005, step S1513, step S1517, step S1603, etc., such as the first specific combination process.

In step S13301, it is determined whether or not any of the above-mentioned first excess flag and second excess flag is set. If neither of the excess flags is set, the process proceeds to step S13302, the number of additional games this time is grasped, and the number of additional games is added to the number of target continuous games in step S13303. End the process of adding the number of games.

If it is determined in step S13301 that any of the excess flags is set, the process proceeds to step S13304. In step S13304, as in step S13302, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. Then, in step S13305, a process of adding the number of added games this time to the total number of extinguished games TEG in the various counter areas 106e is performed. As described above, the total number of extinguished games TEG is a counter for grasping the number of excess games that will be extinguished due to the forced termination of the advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S13305, the process for suggesting the set value (special notification) is performed in steps S13306 to S13311. That is, in step S13306, the process of grasping the specific combination that triggered the addition this time is executed. Then, in step S13307, the process of acquiring the fifth specific notification lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is executed, and then in step S13308, the fifth special notification lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 221 of the fifth special notification lottery table, the set excess of the specific combination that has become the trigger for the addition (the trigger for the fifth special notification), the current display mode, and the display mode to be added. The winning probability of the fifth special notification lottery is set to differ depending on the type of flag.

Specifically, as in the case of the first special notification lottery table, when the display mode is the challenge mode, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when it is the attack mode. Even in the case of the conversion zone, it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than in the case of the attack mode. In addition, the higher the appearance rate (winning rate) of each game, the easier it is to win the fifth special notification lottery, such that the strong cherry has a higher winning probability than the weak cherry.

Furthermore, comparing the case where only the first excess flag is set and the case where only the second excess flag is set, the case where only the first excess flag is set is only the second excess flag. Is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery than when is set. This means that if the first excess flag is set, forced termination will always occur, but if the second excess flag is set, forced termination will not occur depending on the lottery results of each subsequent game. It is a difference due to the fact that there is also.

Further, the winning probability of the fifth special notification lottery is set to be different depending on whether one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set and the case where both excess flags are set. In the present embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the fifth special notification lottery when both excess flags are set. This is because the certainty of predicting forced termination is higher when both excess flags (also the first excess flag) are set than when only the second excess flag is set, and the first excess is set. It is more sufficient when both excess flags (also the second excess flag) are set than when only the flag is set, even if the game is forcibly terminated due to the maximum number of games. The difference is that the number of medals can be expected to increase.

After the fifth special notification lottery is performed in step S13308, it is determined in step S13309 whether or not the result of the fifth special notification lottery is a winning result. If the notification is won, the process of setting the fifth special notification execution command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S13310. If the notification is not won, step S13311 is performed. After executing the process of setting the fifth special notification non-execution command as the output target to the display control device 81, the process of adding the number of games is completed.

The fifth special notification execution command and the fifth special notification non-execution command correspond to the first special notification execution command and the first special notification non-execution command, and receive the fifth special notification execution command. The display control device 81 performs a type lottery for the fifth special notification, and controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to execute the corresponding fifth special notification. Specifically, the first special notification setting process of FIG. 135 may be applied as the fifth special notification setting process. For example, as the fifth special notification type lottery process (step S6703), a plurality of types of fifth special notification may be applied. It is preferable to use the fifth special notification lottery table (FIG. 222 (a)), which is set so that the winning probability differs depending on the set value, so that the corresponding type of fifth special notification is executed.

More specifically, regarding the fifth special notification lottery table, the fifth special notification A, the fifth special notification B, and the fifth special notification C are provided as the types of the fifth special notification, and these are the auxiliary display unit 65. The production contents are set to the extent that the player can be identified by the display contents by the above and the sound effects from the speaker 64.

Which of the various fifth special notifications is likely to be selected differs depending on the setting status of the first excess flag and the second excess flag. Specifically, the fifth special notification A is likely to be selected in a situation where only the first excess flag is set (a situation where the second excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification B is only the second excess flag. Is set (the first excess flag is not set), and the fifth special notification C is easily selected in the situation where both excess flags are set.

By the way, by including the information regarding the presence / absence of the first excess flag and the second excess flag set in the fifth special notification execution command or the like, the display control device 81 side also has the above-mentioned type based on each excess flag. It is possible to make a choice. When the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, information (command) to that effect is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81, and based on that information, the above-mentioned first 5 The configuration may be such that the type of special notification is selected.

In the fifth special notification type lottery, after the lottery based on the type table of FIG. 222 (a), the details of the fifth special notification to be actually performed are determined based on the detail table of FIG. 222 (b). Specifically, the fifth special notification A is provided with the fifth special notification a1 and the fifth special notification a2, and the fifth special notification B includes the fifth special notification b1 and the fifth special notification b2. The fifth special notification C is provided with a fifth special notification c1 and a fifth special notification c2, which are also provided according to the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, and the like, respectively. Different production contents are set so that the player can identify them.

The detailed effect contents of the various fifth special notifications differ depending on the set value, which one is easier to select. Specifically, among the 5th special notification A, the 5th special notification a1 is easily selected by the odd setting of the settings 1, 3 and 5, and the 5th special notification a2 is selected by the even setting of the settings 2, 4 and 6. Easy to do. Further, among the 5th special notification B, the 5th special notification b1 is likely to be selected with a setting of 3 or more, and the 5th special notification b2 is likely to be selected with a setting of 2 or less. Is set not to be selected. Of the fifth special notification C, the fifth special notification c1 can be selected in settings 5 and 6, while the fifth special notification c2 can be selected in settings 1 to 4 and can be selected in settings 1 to 4, while the fifth special notification c1 can be selected in settings 1 to 4. Not selected in settings 5 and 6.

That is, only the first excess flag is set, and then an additional trigger occurs and the fifth special notification A is performed, so that the evenness and oddness of the set value can be predicted, only the second excess flag is set, and then. When the fifth special notification B is performed when an additional opportunity occurs, the level of the set value can be predicted. Then, both excess flags are set, and then an additional trigger occurs and the fifth special notification C is performed, so that it is possible to determine whether the setting is 5 or more or the setting 4 or less.

In this way, the setting value suggestion that occurs differs depending on the excess flag that is set, that is, depending on which forced termination condition is predicted to be forced termination in the future. Not only the fun of predicting the set value, but also the fun of which forced termination condition aims to end the advantageous section is added, and the playability of the advantageous section is greatly improved.

More specifically, from the premise of aiming to acquire many medals, it is considered preferable for the player to end the advantageous section under the second forced termination condition as the upper limit increase number of medals, but the first From the request to see the suggestion of the set value generated by predicting that the forced termination condition of is satisfied in the future, the purpose of aiming to satisfy the first forced termination condition is also added.

Further, the fifth special notification is set so that the set value set in one occurrence is difficult to be determined, and the set value can be narrowed down by multiple occurrences. In that respect, since the fifth special notification has a configuration that can occur when the addition condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, the set value is narrowed down so that the addition condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set. However, it can be said that the more the addition condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, the more advantageous information is presented to the player.

Further, since it is advantageous that the addition condition is satisfied after each excess flag is set, it may be advantageous for the player to set each excess flag at the earliest possible stage.

In other words, by setting each excess flag, the number of games and the number of medals increase / decrease in the advantageous section cannot be changed any more, but whether or not the addition condition is satisfied after the excess flag is set, With respect to the game of narrowing down the set value, the advantage of the game differs depending on the timing when the excess flag is set, and the game playability is improved.

The state in which the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 223 and 224.

FIG. 223 shows a case where the advantageous section is started at the timing of ct1, the challenge mode is started at the timing of tk2, the attack mode is started at the timing of ct3 and tk5, and the VB mode is started at the timing of ct4, and the attack mode is in progress. It is shown with reference to the timing of tc6. In this example, the bonus was not won during the advantageous section, and in the game with the timing of tk3 to the timing of tk6, although the display mode is different between the attack mode and the VB mode, the net increase is about +1.90. It changes in the state of.

At the timing of tk6, the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games increased / decreased in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit of 2400. However, when the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is added to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG, the maximum number of games is exceeded. In this case, the first excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM is added to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is not exceeded, and in this case, the second excess flag is not set.

In this example, when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches 1500 games at the timing of tk7, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without acquiring the upper limit of 2400 medals.

FIG. 224 shows a case where the advantageous section is started at the timing of td1, the challenge mode is started at the timing of td2, the attack mode is started at the timing of td3, td5 and td7, and the bonus state is started at the timing of td4 and td6, respectively. It is shown with reference to the timing of td8 in the attack mode. In this case, the game of the timing of td3 to the timing of td4, the timing of td5 to the timing of td6, and the timing of td7 to the timing of td8 all change in a state where the net increase number is about +1.90. On the other hand, the bonus states of the timing of td4 to the timing of td5 and the timing of td6 to the timing of td7 all change with the net increase number of about +6.00, and the amount of this bonus state is 1 in the advantageous section. The number of cards increased per game will increase substantially.

At the timing of td8, the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, and the number of games increased / decreased in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit of 2400. However, when the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM is added to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the upper limit increase number is exceeded. In this case, the second excess flag is set. On the other hand, even if the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section is added to the current number of advantageous section games AG, the upper limit number of games is not exceeded, and in this case, the first excess flag is not set.

In this example, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaches 2400 at the timing of td9, which is the timing before the timing of td10 where the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is digested, and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. As a result, the advantageous section ends without exhausting 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games.

The relationship between both excess flags and the occurrence rate of the fifth special notification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 225.

In the advantageous section started from the timing of te1, if an additional opportunity occurs at the timing of te2, for example, winning a specific role such as a strong cherry, at the timing of te2, the first excess flag and the second excess are still present. Since none of the flags are set, an additional lottery is carried out based on the additional opportunity. Then, when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding number of games is added.

When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games is set at the timing of te3 and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is not set, and an additional opportunity occurs at the timing of te4 thereafter, the above Since the first excess flag is set as in the above, the addition does not occur, and the fifth special notification may occur instead. As described above, the fifth special notification is performed through the fifth special notification lottery, and the winning probability (occurrence rate) is displayed as A% here.

When the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number is set at the timing of te5 and the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit game number is not set, and when an additional opportunity occurs at the timing of te6 thereafter. Since the second excess flag is set as described above, the addition does not occur, and the fifth special notification may occur instead. In this case, the winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery is displayed as B% here.

When the first excess flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games was set at the timing of te7, and the second excess flag corresponding to the upper limit increase number was also set, an additional opportunity occurred at the timing of te8 thereafter. In this case, since the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set as described above, the addition does not occur, and the fifth special notification may occur instead. In this case, the winning probability (occurrence rate) of the fifth special notification lottery is displayed as C% here.

As described above, in the fifth special notification lottery table, the fifth special notification is executed with a higher probability when only the first excess flag is set than when only the second excess flag is set. It is set so that the fifth special notification is executed with a higher probability when both excess flags are set than when only one excess flag is set. ing. That is, in the above example, when comparing the occurrence rates of the fifth special notification at each timing of te4, te6 and te8, if the display mode is the same and the specific combination is the same, the fifth special notification at the timing of te6 is used. The occurrence rate of notification (B%) is the lowest, the occurrence rate (C%) of the fifth special notification at the timing of te8 is the highest, and the occurrence rate increases in the order of B%, A%, and C%. That is, the probability that information that can be useful to the player, such as suggestion of a set value, is presented is the lowest in the situation where only the second excess flag is set, and the highest in the situation where both excess flags are set.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As the compulsory termination condition of the advantageous section, the first compulsory termination condition which is the upper limit number of games and the second compulsory termination condition which is the upper limit increase number of medals are set, and these compulsory termination conditions will be satisfied in the future. , The number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, etc. can be grasped in advance, and if the forced termination condition is known to be satisfied and an additional advantageous section occurs, the forced termination is grasped. The configuration is such that the setting value suggestion is generated according to the end condition. By providing a plurality of forced termination conditions in this way, it is possible to prevent a large increase in medals that the designers or the like do not intend when the advantageous section is exhausted, and to avoid a rise in the advantage of the advantageous section. Is possible, which ensures the transparency or soundness of the game. On the other hand, by setting the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition, the maximum value of the benefits obtained during the advantageous section is defined for the player, and the advantageous section is defined. It is conceivable that the interest in the advantageous section may be reduced due to the designer's reason such as avoiding the soaring advantage of the above. In particular, from the viewpoint of the purpose of the game, such as aiming to increase the number of medals, when it is specified that the maximum number of medals will be increased in the future, it will not be possible to expect any more medals in the advantageous section. There is a high possibility that it will be a so-called digestion game. In that respect, as in the above configuration, even after it is specified that the upper limit increase number will be reached in the future, information of high interest of the player such as setting value suggestion is presented based on the additional opportunity. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play and to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the situation where it is specified that the maximum number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, is reached, and in the situation where it is specified that the maximum number of medals, which is the second forced termination condition, is reached. The type and incidence of the set value suggestion of were different. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to which forced termination condition terminates the advantageous section. That is, from the viewpoint of aiming to increase medals, it seems preferable for the player to end the advantageous section under the above-mentioned second forced termination condition, but the first forced termination condition may be satisfied in the future. From the viewpoint of wanting the occurrence of the setting value suggestion in the specified situation, it will be desired that the first forced termination condition is satisfied, and vice versa. In this way, in a configuration having a plurality of forced termination conditions for forcibly ending an advantageous section, not only the advantage when the forced termination condition is satisfied but also when it is specified that the forced termination condition is satisfied is given. By different types of benefits (suggested set values), the fun of the game is significantly improved, and the playability is greatly improved.

<Modification example 1>
In this modified example, the content (advantage) of the setting value suggestion depends on which of the identification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied and the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied is performed first. To make it different. FIG. 226 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in the present modification, and FIG. 226 (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in the present modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 226 (a), in the remaining game number management process in this modification, when a negative determination is made in step S13110 and it is determined that the number of free games FG that can be added is 0 or less, step S13401 Proceed to. In step S13401, the process of setting the first excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13111. In the following step S13402, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13402 is a process of determining whether or not it has already been specified that the second forced termination condition is satisfied after the fact at the stage where the first forced termination condition is specified to be satisfied after the fact. Is. Then, when the second excess flag is set, in step S13403, the process of setting the second destination flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the game number management process ends. The second destination flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied is performed before the specification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied. is there. If the second excess flag is not set in step S13402, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), if a negative determination is made in step S13205 and it is determined that the free number FM that can be increased is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13451. In step S13451, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13206. In the following step S13452, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag has already been set. That is, the process of step S13452 is a process of determining whether or not it has already been specified that the first forced termination condition is satisfied after the fact at the stage where the second forced termination condition is specified to be satisfied after the fact. Is. Then, when the first excess flag is set, in step S13453, the process of setting the first destination flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed, and then the game number management process ends. The first first flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the identification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied is performed before the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied. is there. If the first excess flag is not set in step S13452, the remaining game number management process is terminated as it is.

By the way, as already explained, when an addition exceeding the upper limit number of games as the first forced termination condition occurs, the number of additional games is not added to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG but is added to the total number of disappearing games TEG. To. In addition, whether or not to exceed the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition is basically determined by using the total increase / decrease expected number SM predicted from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. Will be done. Then, when the first excess flag is set and the second excess flag is set, the game specified to exceed the maximum increase number of medals is basically a game before the maximum number of games. It is a number. That is, in the situation where it is specified that the first forced termination condition is satisfied and the second forced termination condition is satisfied, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG has reached the upper limit number of games, and the advantage thereof. It is a situation that it is specified that the upper limit increase number of medals is exceeded before the number of games remaining in the section ZG is exhausted.

FIG. 226 (c) and FIG. 226 (d) show the fifth special notification type table in this modification. In the fifth special notification type table of FIG. 226 (c), the distribution destination (type of fifth special notification) when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is , The same as that of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 222 (a)). Further, among the details of the fifth special notification type table of FIG. 226 (d), the detailed tables of the fifth special notification A and the fifth special notification B are also those of the seventh embodiment (FIG. 222 (b)). ).

In this modification, in addition to the 5th special notification A, the 5th special notification B, and the 5th special notification C, the 5th special notification D is set as the distribution destination of the 5th special notification type. 5 Special notification D is a special notification mainly selected when both excess flags are set. As shown in FIG. 226 (c), when the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first destination flag is set and the second destination flag is not set, that is, If a specific person that the first forced termination condition is satisfied in the future is performed first, 10 for each of the 5th special notification A and the 5th special notification B as the distribution destination of the 5th special notification type. The fifth special notification C is distributed with a probability of 80%, and the fifth special notification D is not distributed. On the other hand, when the first destination flag is not set and the second destination flag is set, that is, the specific case where the second forced termination condition is satisfied in the future is performed first. In that case, as the distribution destination of the type of the 5th special notification, the 5th special notification A and the 5th special notification B are each distributed with a probability of 10%, the 5th special notification C is not distributed, and the 5th special notification is not distributed. Notification D is distributed with an 80% probability. Similar to the relationship between the 5th special notification A, the 5th special notification B, and the 5th special notification C, the 5th special notification D also has the 5th special notification A, the 5th special notification B, and the 5th special notification. The effect content is set so that the player can recognize that the notification is different from C. For example, the display content by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect from the speaker 64 are different. In this modification, the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are distributed by 5% each when only the first excess flag is set and when only the second excess flag is set. It has been changed to.

In the detailed table, as shown in FIG. 226 (d), the fifth special notification C is a set value suggestion suggesting whether or not the set value is 5 or more as described above, and the set value is 4 or less. If there is, the fifth special notification c1 is selected, and if the set value is 5 or more, the fifth special notification c2 is selected. On the other hand, the fifth special notification D is a set value suggestion suggesting whether the set value is 4 or 5, or other than that (1 to 3, 6), and the set value is 4 or 5. If, the fifth special notification d1 is selected, and if the set value is 1 to 3 or 6, the fifth special notification d2 is selected. The fifth special notification d1 and the fifth special notification d2 are also set with different production contents to the extent that the player can be identified by the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effects from the speaker 64, and the like.

That is, according to this modification, the specific case where the first forced termination condition is satisfied in the future is performed before the specification that the second forced termination condition is satisfied in the future. The case where the second forced termination condition is satisfied in the future is performed before the specification that the first forced termination condition is satisfied in the future, and the case where the fifth special notification occurs. The content of the setting value suggestion is different. In the former, the setting value suggestion (fifth special notification C) as to whether or not the setting value is 5 or more occurs, and in the latter, the setting value is mainly 4 or 5. The setting value suggestion (fifth special notification D) of whether or not is generated occurs.

Explaining the relationship between the specification of the first forced termination condition and the specification of the second forced termination condition, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is the same as the case where the specification of the first forced termination condition is performed first. Even if it is ZG, it is a case where the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is relatively small, and even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is the same as the case where the specific second forced termination condition is performed first. This is a case where the number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section ZM is relatively large. That is, in a situation where sufficient medals have not been obtained in the advantageous section up to that point, the first forced termination condition is more likely to be specified first, and the fifth special notification C is more likely to occur. If a sufficient number of medals have been obtained in the advantageous section up to that point, the second forced termination condition is more likely to be specified first, and the fifth special notification D is more likely to occur.

In this way, after specifying the forced termination condition, the game content of the advantageous section up to that point is strongly reflected, and the content of the setting value suggestion as a special notification is used by using that information (the player obtains it). By differentiating the types of information to be received and the information to which the degree of usefulness can be different), it is possible to relate the game content of the advantageous section and the special notification. This makes it possible to perform special notification according to the content of the game.

Comparing the 5th special notification C and the 5th special notification D, the 5th special notification suggests a set value of whether or not the set value is 5 or more, and the 5th special notification D has a set value of 4 or 5. It is a suggestion of a set value as to whether or not the setting value is set, and the set value can be narrowed down by combining the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D. That is, when the fifth special notification c1 is generated and the fifth special notification d1 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 6, and when the fifth special notification c1 is generated and the fifth special notification d2 is generated. Is determined to have a set value of 5, and when the fifth special notification c2 is generated and the fifth special notification d2 is generated, the set value is determined to be 4, and the fifth special notification c2 is generated. When the fifth special notification d1 is generated, it is determined that the set value is 3 or less. However, since the fifth special notification C and the fifth special notification D are unlikely to occur in the same advantageous section, it is highly necessary to go through a plurality of advantageous sections in order to perform such narrowing down. Become. By doing so, even after the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, it is possible to support the enthusiasm for the transition to a new advantageous section and the establishment of the forced termination condition in the advantageous section. Become.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, if it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are satisfied, the game difference of each game in which the forced termination condition will be satisfied is set. Based on this, the content (advantage) of the setting value suggestion is different. FIG. 227 (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining game management process in the present modification, and FIG. 227 (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the remaining number management process in the present modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), in the remaining game number management process in this modification, when a negative determination is made in step S13110 and it is determined that the number of free games FG that can be added is 0 or less, step S13501. Proceed to. In step S13501, the process of setting the first excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13111. In the following step S13502, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. That is, in the process of step S13502, similarly to the process of step S13402, when it is specified that the first forced termination condition is satisfied after the fact, it is already specified that the second forced termination condition is satisfied after the fact. It is a process of determining whether or not it has been done. Then, when the second excess flag is set, the process of setting the second destination flag is executed in step S13503.

After executing the process of step S13503, in step S13504, a process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that exceed the upper limit increase number is executed. The number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number is stored in the temporary storage area of the RAM 106 at the stage where it is specified that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future, that is, at the stage when the second excess flag is set. Be remembered. This process will be described later. After executing the process of step S13504, or when a negative determination is made in step S13502, the remaining game number management process ends.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in FIG. 227 (b), if a negative determination is made in step S13205 and it is determined that the free number FM that can be increased is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step S13551. In step S13551, the process of setting the second excess flag is executed in the same manner as in step S13206. In the following step S13552, a process of storing the number of games that exceeds the upper limit increase number in the temporary storage area of the RAM 106 is executed. By the way, the number of games that will exceed the upper limit increase number exceeds the upper limit increase number obtained by dividing the difference between the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number (2400) by the expected increase / decrease number KM. It is calculated by adding the current number of advantageous section games AG to the number of games until the game is played.

In the following step S13553, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag has already been set. That is, in the process of step S13553, similarly to the process of step S13452, it is specified that the first forced termination condition is already satisfied after the fact when the second forced termination condition is specified to be satisfied after the fact. It is a process of determining whether or not it has been done. Then, when the first excess flag is set, the process of setting the first destination flag is executed in step S13554.

After executing the process of step S13554, in step S13555, a process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, and the number of games that exceed the upper limit increase number is executed. After executing the process of step S13555, or when a negative determination is made in step S13553, the remaining game number management process ends.

An example of the fifth special notification type table in this modification is shown in FIG. 227 (c). The table when only the first excess flag is set or when only the second excess flag is set is the same as that shown in FIG. 226 (c), and in FIG. 227 (c), It is omitted and shown.

In the fifth special notification type table when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, either the first destination flag or the second destination flag is set as in the above modification 1. The type of the fifth special notification to be distributed differs depending on whether or not the notification is performed. Further, in this modification, the number of difference games grasped in step S13504 and step S13555 also has a configuration that affects the type of the fifth special notification to be distributed.

More specifically, when the first flag is set, that is, when a specific one to reach the maximum number of games is performed first, in general, a sufficient medal increase in the advantageous section up to that point. If the above does not occur, the type of distribution differs depending on whether the number of difference games is less than a predetermined number and is 99 games or less, or the number of difference games is more than a predetermined number and is 100 games or more. When the number of difference games is 99 games or less, both the 5th special notification A and the 5th special notification B are distributed at 20%, the 5th special notification C is distributed at 60%, and the 5th special notification D is distributed. I can't. On the other hand, when the number of difference games is 100 games or more, it is distributed to the 5th special notification C at 100%, and is not distributed to the other 5th special notification.

In addition, when the second-first flag is set, that is, when the specific one that reaches the upper limit increase number of medals is performed first, in general, a sufficient increase in medals is made in the advantageous section up to that point. If the number of difference games is less than a predetermined number and is 99 games or less, or if the number of difference games is more than a predetermined number and is 100 games or more, the type to be distributed differs. When the number of difference games is 99 games or less, both the 5th special notification A and the 5th special notification B are distributed at 20%, the 5th special notification C is not distributed, and the 5th special notification D is 60%. It is sorted. On the other hand, when the number of difference games is 100 games or more, it is distributed to the fifth special notification D at 100%, and is not distributed to the other fifth special notifications.

That is, in the above modification, it is based on the number of difference games between the game in which the first forced termination condition is satisfied (upper limit number of games) and the game in which the second forced termination condition is satisfied (games that reach the upper limit increase number). Therefore, the type of set value suggestion to be selected is different, and the larger the number of difference games, the easier it is to narrow down the set value. The set value suggestion is selected. As described above, when it is specified that both the first forced termination condition and the second forced termination condition are satisfied, basically, the second forced termination condition is satisfied first. , The above difference game number can be said to be the number of games indicating how quickly the upper limit increase number of medals is reached than the upper limit game number. That is, by reaching the upper limit increase number with a smaller number of games, a setting value that is likely to be useful for the player is suggested. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the case where the upper limit increase number is reached with a smaller number of games, that is, the remaining games up to the upper limit number of games are forcibly terminated without being digested.

<Modification example 3>
In this modification, a configuration in which information according to the excess amount is presented at the time of forced termination will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the second section display processing in this modification.

The change from the second section display processing in the above embodiment is that when the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number and is forcibly terminated, the above excess The point is to perform processing for presenting information according to the minute. That is, the processing of steps S13601 to S13606 is the same as the processing of steps S13001 to S13006, and the processing of updating the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the free game number FG, and the presence / absence of the free number FM are present. When the determination process is performed and the number of advantageous section games AG reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaches the upper limit increase number, a positive determination is made in step S13606 and the process proceeds to step S13607. In step S13607, the sixth special notification process is executed. Such processing is processing for presenting information according to the excess amount. The processing of steps S13608 to S13612 is the same as the processing of steps S13007 to S13011.

The sixth special notification process of step S13607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 229.

In step S13701, the number of advantageous sections increased / decreased ZM is 2400 or more, and it is determined whether or not the forced termination of the advantageous section this time (step S13606: YES) is performed under the second forced termination condition. When the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM is 2400 or more, the process proceeds to step S13702 to perform a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG. As described above, the total number of extinct games TEG is a counter to which the number of additional games is added when an addition occurs in a situation where any of the excess flags is set. In the following step S13703, a process of acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a is performed.

In this modification, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification is generated as the presentation of information that may be useful to the player according to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG. The occurrence rate of the sixth special notification differs depending on the value of the total number of extinct games TEG, and further, whether the forced termination this time was performed under the first forced termination condition or the second forced termination condition. The occurrence rate of the sixth special notification differs depending on whether or not it was performed. The above-mentioned sixth special notification A lottery table is a table acquired when the advantageous section ends in a situation where at least the second forced termination condition is satisfied. On the other hand, if the advantageous section ends without the second forced termination condition being satisfied (according to the first forced termination condition), the sixth special notification B lottery table is acquired (step S13709).

In both the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table, as shown in FIG. 230 (a), the larger the value of the total number of extinct games TEG, the higher the occurrence rate of the 6th special notification. However, the 6th special notification B lottery table (the winning rate of the 6th special notification B) is higher than the 6th special notification A lottery table (from the winning rate of the 6th special notification A). Also), when compared with the same value of the total number of extinct games TEG, the sixth special notification is set so as to be likely to occur. As with the fifth special notification, the sixth special notification A and the sixth special notification B can be identified by the player based on the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effect from the speaker 64, and the like. Different production contents are set in.

After acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table in step S13703, the sixth special notification A lottery process is executed in step S13704, and it is determined in step S13705 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the notification lottery has been won, the sixth special notification A execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13706, and then the sixth special notification process ends. On the other hand, if the notification lottery has not been won, the sixth special notification A non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13707, and then the sixth special notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S13701 that the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has not reached 2400, that is, if the forced termination of the advantageous section this time is performed without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the process proceeds to step S13708. The processing of steps S13708 to S13713 is substantially the same as the processing of steps S13702 to S13707. In step S13708, a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG is executed, and in step S13709, the sixth special notification B lottery table is executed. To get. Then, the sixth special notification B lottery process is executed in step S13710, it is determined in step S13711 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if the notification lottery has been won, the third in step S13712. If the 6 special notification B execution command has not been won in the notification lottery, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S13713, and then each is set. The sixth special notification process is terminated.

The display control device 81 that has received these commands related to the sixth special notification executes the sixth special notification at the time of the attack mode end effect, as in the process related to the fourth special notification in the setting process of the attack mode end effect of FIG. 154, for example. Perform the processing to do. Specifically, in FIG. 154, instead of or in addition to the process of determining whether or not the fourth special notification command has been received in step S7703, the sixth special notification A execution command or the sixth special notification B Performs processing to determine whether or not an execution command has been received. If none of the commands related to the sixth special notification has been received, or if the command has been received but is the sixth special notification A non-execution command or the sixth special notification B non-execution command, the process proceeds to step S7704. , Normal end After setting the effect, this setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S7703 that the sixth special notification A execution command or the sixth special notification B execution command has been received, the process proceeds to step S7705 to acquire the sixth special notification detail table. As shown in FIG. 230 (b), the sixth special notification detail table is detailed according to the type of the sixth special notification (sixth special notification A and the sixth special notification B) and the set value. The production contents are set to be different. Specifically, the sixth special notification A is provided with the sixth special notification a1 and the sixth special notification a2, and the sixth special notification B is provided with the sixth special notification b1, the sixth special notification b2, and the sixth. 6 Special notification b3 is provided, and these also have different production contents to the extent that the player can be identified by the display contents by the auxiliary display unit 65, the sound effects from the speaker 64, and the like.

The detailed effect contents of the various sixth special notifications differ depending on the set value, which one is easier to select. Specifically, among the 6th special notification A, the 6th special notification a1 is easily selected by the odd setting of the settings 1, 3 and 5, and the 6th special notification a2 is selected by the even setting of the settings 2, 4 and 6. Easy to do. Further, of the sixth special notification B, the sixth special notification b1 is selected in the settings 1 and 2, but is not selected in the settings 3 to 6, and the sixth special notification b2 is selected in the settings 3 and 4. , Settings 1, 2, 5 and 6 are not selected, and the sixth special notification b3 is selected in settings 5 and 6, but not selected in settings 1 to 4.

That is, when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification A is performed, so that the evenness and oddness of the set value can be predicted, and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is not reached. When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, the sixth special notification B is performed, so that the set value can be narrowed down to a predetermined number of types or less (two types or less).

As described above, by allowing different setting value suggestions to occur depending on the type of forced termination condition for which the advantageous section is to be forcibly terminated, the advantageous section can be determined under any of the forced termination conditions. It will be possible to entertain until the final stage of the advantageous section in terms of whether it will be forcibly terminated. In other words, for the purpose of the game, such as wishing to increase the number of medals by playing the game, the one that is forcibly terminated when the advantageous section reaches the maximum number of medals is forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is reached. It can be said that it is preferable for the player. On the other hand, the setting value suggestion that occurs when the setting value is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number can make it easier to narrow down the setting value, and in the first place, the occurrence rate of the setting value suggestion also becomes the upper limit increase number. It is set to be higher than when it is reached. Then, it is considered that the player who wants to detect the set value wants the advantageous section to be forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number.

On the contrary, as a player who wants to enjoy the advantageous section for a long time, it is considered that he / she wants to fully consume the maximum number of games without reaching the maximum number of medals. The setting value suggestion, which is not preferable from the viewpoint of the ease of narrowing down the setting value, is set.

In this way, by making each forced termination condition different from the type of setting value suggestion generated at that time, while responding to the diverse needs of the player, new fun of the game is created, and the playability of the advantageous section is achieved. Can be suitably increased.

As described above, the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table both have different rates of suggestion of set values depending on the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG, but the 6th special notification The notification A lottery table is a table acquired when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by satisfying the second forced termination condition, and the sixth special notification B lottery table satisfies the first forced termination condition. It is a table acquired when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by doing so. That is, the total number of extinct games TEG is used properly depending on which forced termination condition the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, depending on the value for the first forced termination condition and the value for the second forced termination. It can be said that the weighting of the value of the number of disappearing games TEG is different. By doing so, the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the number of games that exceed each forced termination condition is separately stored while using a common counter such as the total number of extinct games TEG. Has been done. In addition, when it is specified that the game is forcibly terminated under the first forced termination condition, the number of additional games after that, and when it is specified that the game is forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition, after that. The number of additional games may be stored separately. In this case, the number of corresponding games may be grasped in step S13702 or step S13708.

<Modification example 4>
In this modification, based on the above modification 3, at the time of forced termination, a privilege is given by adding information on the other forced termination condition.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 231, in the sixth special notification process in this modification, when it is determined in step S13801 that the second forced termination condition is satisfied, the total disappearance game is performed in step S13802. After grasping the number of TEGs, the process of grasping the number of games up to the maximum number of games is executed in step S13803. That is, unless both forced termination conditions are satisfied at the same time and the advantageous section is terminated, the maximum number of games will be reached if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number of medals as the second forced termination condition. The first forced termination condition is not satisfied. The process of step S13803 is a process of grasping the number of remaining games until the maximum number of games is reached, and specifically, a process of grasping a value obtained by dividing 1500 by the number of advantageous section games AG.

In the following step S13804, the process of acquiring the sixth special notification A lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232 (a), the sixth special notification A lottery table in this modified example is based on the number of games up to 1500 games and the number of games corresponding to the excess number (total number of disappearing games TEG). 6 The rate of occurrence of special notifications is different, and the higher the number of games up to 1500 games, the higher the rate of occurrence of 6th special notifications. It is set so that the occurrence rate of special notification is high.

That is, in this modified example, when the number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number and is forcibly terminated, the larger the number of games in the advantageous section that could not be digested, the more the setting value suggestion as the sixth special notification occurs. It is easy to do so, and the more medals that could not be obtained by exceeding the upper limit increase number even though the addition occurred, the more likely the above setting value suggestion is to occur.

The processing of steps S13805 to step S13808 is the same as the processing of steps S13704 to S13707, and if the notification lottery is won after the sixth special notification A lottery process is executed, the sixth special notification A The execution command is output and set, and if it is not won, the sixth special notification A non-execution command is output and set.

If it is determined in step S13801 that the upper limit increase number has not been reached, that is, if the forced termination this time is forcibly terminated under the first forced termination condition instead of the second forced termination condition, step S13809 is performed. The process of grasping the total number of extinct games TEG corresponding to the excess of the number of games is executed. Then, in step S13810, a process of grasping the remaining number of medals up to the maximum increase number of medals is executed. That is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit number of games as the first forced termination condition, the second forced termination condition for reaching the upper limit increase number is not satisfied, and the process of step S13810 is performed. , It is a process of grasping the remaining increase number up to the upper limit increase number, and specifically, it is a process of grasping a value obtained by dividing 2400 by the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM.

In the following step S13811, the process of acquiring the sixth special notification B lottery table is executed. As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the sixth special notification B lottery table in this modified example is based on the number of up to 2400 games and the number of games corresponding to the excess number of games (total number of extinguished games TEG). 6 The rate of occurrence of special notifications is different, and the higher the number of cards up to 2400, the higher the rate of occurrence of 6th special notifications. It is set so that the occurrence rate of notification is high.

That is, as in the case of the 6th special notification A lottery table, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit and the game is forcibly terminated, the larger the number of medals that did not increase during the advantageous section, the more the 6th special notification The setting value suggestion is more likely to occur, and the more games that cannot be digested due to exceeding the upper limit number of games even though the addition occurs, the more likely the above setting value suggestion is to occur.

In particular, when comparing the 6th special notification A lottery table and the 6th special notification B lottery table, even if the total number of disappearing games is the same TEG, the 6th special notification B lottery table has a higher occurrence rate of the 6th special notification. Is set so that it tends to be high. This is because the original purpose of the game, such as receiving medals paid out as a result of each game and aiming to increase medals, is achieved when the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the maximum number of medals in the advantageous section. It is believed that the player's sense of loss due to this is greater than if the number of games did not reach the maximum number of games.

The process of step S13812 to step S13815 is the same as the process of step S13710 to step S13713, and after executing the sixth special notification B lottery process, if the notification lottery is won, the sixth special notification B The execution command is output and set, and if it is not won, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set.

As described above, in this modification, in the configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, the expectation that the other forced termination condition is expected to be satisfied is given a privilege such as suggesting a set value. Therefore, it is possible to compensate for the player's feeling of loss. In addition, it is possible to compensate for the loss due to the forced termination condition on the established side by suggesting a set value. That is, in this modification, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, when one forced termination condition is satisfied, compensation is made from both the forced termination condition on the side where the forced termination condition is satisfied and the forced termination condition on the other side. By doing so, it is possible to increase the compensation to the player and preferably avoid a decrease in the motivation to play due to the forced termination.

<Modification 5>
In this modification, based on the above modification 3 and 4, although it was predicted that the maximum number of medals will be increased, the maximum number of games will be reached and the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated. In that case, the sixth special notification is likely to occur.

FIG. 233 (a) shows a part of the flowchart of the sixth special notification process in this modified example. That is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated without the medal increase / decrease number reaching the upper limit increase number (step S13701: NO), the process after executing the sixth special notification B lottery process in step S13710 is shown. ing.

In step S13901, it is determined whether or not the sixth special notification B lottery has been won. If the player is elected, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set in step S13902 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13901 that the player has not won, the process proceeds to step S13903 to determine whether or not the second excess flag is set. When it is determined in step S13903 that the second excess flag is set, the game is forcibly terminated by the maximum number of games without reaching the maximum increase number even though the second excess flag is set. This is the case (step S13701: NO). In this case, in step S13901, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set, and then the sixth special notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set in step S13904 in the same manner as described above, and then the sixth special notification process is terminated. That is, when the second excess flag is set, even if the sixth special notification B lottery is not won, the sixth special notification B is executed as if it was won, and processing advantageous to the player is performed. Will be.

As shown in the seventh embodiment, when it is predicted that the first forced termination condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied based on the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (when only the first excess flag is set). ), And when it is predicted that the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied (when only the second excess flag is set), it is predicted that both forced termination conditions of the advantageous section will be satisfied. There are cases (when both excess flags are set). On the other hand, even if it is predicted that both forced termination conditions will be satisfied, unless both forced termination conditions are satisfied at the same time (in the same game), if one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, the other will be satisfied. The advantageous section ends without the forced termination condition being satisfied.

In this modification, in the case where it is predicted that both forced termination conditions will be satisfied, if the second forced termination condition is not satisfied and the forced termination is performed under the first forced termination condition, the game is played. I made it advantageous for the person. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably follow the feeling of loss of the player who has been expecting that the second forced termination condition is satisfied.

<Modification 6>
In this modification, in the above modification 5, when it is predicted that the second forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future, the notification that the prediction has been made has occurred. , If the second forced termination condition is not satisfied, it is advantageous for the player.

FIG. 233 (b) shows a part of the flowchart of the sixth special notification process in the present modification, and it is determined that the difference from the flow chart of the sixth special notification process 5 is that the sixth special notification B lottery is not won. If this is the case (step S13951: NO), it is determined in step S13953 whether or not the special notification that the second excess flag has been set has been executed.

Although detailed description by drawing is omitted, in this modified example, when the second excess flag is set, a notification (special notification) to that effect can be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Then, the notification to that effect is performed when the predetermined lottery is won, and when the predetermined lottery is not won, the notification to that effect is performed even if the second excess flag is set. Absent.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and 233 (d), even when the total expected increase / decrease number SM is 2410 and the second excess flag is set, the second excess flag is set. When the limit excess information image GTP (in the figure, the image of "limit breakthrough !!" in the figure) is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (FIG. 233 (d)) and when it is not displayed (FIG. 233 (d)) as a notification to the effect that the flag has been set. There is 233 (c)). In this case, in FIG. 233 (c), it cannot be directly grasped that the number of medals increased / decreased will reach the upper limit increase number, and in FIG. 233 (d), the upper limit increase number will be reached. It can be clearly grasped.

Then, in step S13953, if the special notification that the above limit excess information image GTP is displayed has occurred but the command is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number, the sixth special in step S13952. The notification B execution command is output and set, and if the above special notification has not occurred, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set in step S13954.

In this way, even if it is predicted that the upper limit increase number will be reached, whether or not it is advantageous depends on whether or not the player knows in advance that the upper limit increase number will be reached. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent the advantage to the player from becoming unreasonably high.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, in the configuration where the set value suggestion is performed based on the excess amount or the unachievable amount at the forced end of the advantageous section, the set value suggestion based on the excess amount occurs before the forced end of the advantageous section. Is deducted from the advantage of that amount to generate a setting value suggestion at the time of forced termination.

FIG. 234 (a) and FIG. 234 (b) are one of the flowcharts of the sixth special notification process when the idea of subtracting the set value suggestion before the forced termination is applied to the modified example 5 and the modified example 6. Shows the part.

That is, after executing the sixth special notification B lottery in step S13704, it is determined in step S13961 and step S13971 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it is determined that the lottery has not been won, the third step S13963 is performed. 2 It is determined whether or not the excess flag is set, and whether or not the special notification that the second excess flag is set is executed in step S13973. When an affirmative judgment is made in steps S13963 and S13973, in this modification, whether or not the fifth special notification is generated as a setting value suggestion based on the excess before the forced termination of the advantageous section in step S13964 or step S13974. Is determined. In this process, when it is determined that the fifth special notification is to be executed, the information may be temporarily stored in the RAM 106 or the like.

If the fifth special notification is not executed, the sixth special notification B execution command is output and set in step S13962 or step S13972, and if the fifth special notification is executed, step S13965 or step S13975 is executed. In, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set. Even when the second excess flag is not set in step S13963 or the special notification to that effect is not executed in step S13973, the sixth special notification B non-execution command is output and set.

In this way, if a privilege based on the excess amount etc. is given before the forced termination of the advantageous section, the privilege at the time of forced termination is set by adding (subtracting) it at the time of forced termination (6th). By making the configuration (determining whether or not to execute the special notification), it is possible to eliminate that the advantage of the player due to the privilege based on the excess amount or the like becomes too high.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, an application example in which a special section is set at the time of forced termination of an advantageous section will be described. As described in the modified example 9 and the like of the fourth embodiment, the special section is a section set based on the total number of extinct games TEG at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section, and more specifically, after the end of the advantageous section. In the normal section, the section is set so that the suggestion effect of the set value is likely to occur. In the special section, for example, when the special replays 1 and 2 are won, a push order notification that becomes a predetermined stop roll (stop roll with "black BAR" symbols aligned) is generated with a probability according to the set value, and the set value is set. Can be predicted (see FIG. 162). In this modification, in addition to the total number of disappearing games TEG, a special section is set based on the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG and the number of differences up to the upper limit increase number. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the special section setting process in this modification. The special section setting process is, for example, a process performed in step S7808 in the second section display process of FIG. 158, and is performed at the end of the advantageous section.

In step S14001, a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG is performed. Then, in step S14002, a process of grasping the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is performed. Incidentally, the case where the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 1 or more means that the end processing of the advantageous section this time is terminated by the second forced termination condition.

In the following step S14003, a process of grasping the difference number up to the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is performed. This process is the same as the process of step S13803, and the difference number can be grasped by subtracting the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM from the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets). In step S14003, when the special section setting process this time is executed based on any of the forced termination conditions, the above difference number of sheets is grasped. That is, in step S14003, when the advantageous section of this time is terminated without satisfying any of the forced termination conditions, such as when the number of continuations of the attack mode becomes 0, the difference number from the upper limit increase number is grasped. Not (or grasp as 0).

In the following step S14004, a process of acquiring a special section table from various table storage areas 105a is performed. In the special section table in this modification, as shown in FIG. 236, the number of special section games PG and the special section are determined by the total number of disappearing games TEG, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number. It is set to be different from the number of PMs. As described above, the special section game number PG is a counter for defining the number of games in the special section, and is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed in the special section. On the other hand, the special section number PM is a counter for defining the number of games in the special section, but is a counter for grasping the number of medals paid out in each game, and each game is performed each time the payout process is performed. It is a counter from which the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out is subtracted.

In step S14005, a process of inputting to the special section game number PG is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is 0 and the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 1 or more, that is, the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached. When forced termination without reaching (difference number = 0 and ZG> 0), the value obtained by adding the value corresponding to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG (0 to 80 in the figure) to the remaining number of games ZG is special. Enter in the section game number PG. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the maximum number of games may be input to the number of special section games PG, or the number of games up to the maximum number of games corresponds to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG. It may be configured to input the value to be performed. On the other hand, when the maximum number of games is reached without reaching the maximum increase number and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number> 0 and ZG = 0), 0 is input to the special section game number PG (no value is input). Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG is input to the special section game number PG. .. The value input to the special section game number PG when both forced termination conditions are satisfied tends to be larger than the value input to the special section game number PG when only one forced termination condition is satisfied. Is set to.

In the following step S14006, a process of inputting to the special section number PM is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 236, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the upper limit number of games (difference number = 0 and ZG> 0), 0 is input to the special section number PM (value). Do not enter). On the other hand, when the maximum number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated without reaching the maximum increase number (difference number> 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the difference number up to the maximum increase number is input to the special section number PM. .. Then, when the upper limit increase number is reached and the upper limit number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated (difference number = 0 and ZG = 0), a value corresponding to the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG is input to the special section number PM. The value to be input to the special section number PM when both forced termination conditions are satisfied is likely to be larger than the value to be input to the special section number PM when only one forced termination condition is satisfied. It is set.

In step S14007, it is determined whether or not a value of 1 or more is input to the special section game number PG or the special section number PM. If an affirmative determination is made in step S14007, the special section flag is set in step S14008, and the special section command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14009. Incidentally, the special section command includes information on the values of the special section game number PG and the special section number PM. If a negative determination is made in step S14007, or after the process of step S1409 is executed, the process of clearing the total number of extinct games TEG is executed in step S14010, and then the special section setting process is terminated.

The game number management process in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing a part of the game number management process in this modified example.

In step S14101, it is determined whether or not the special section flag is set. When the special section flag is set, it is determined in step S14102 whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In these low RT states, the process proceeds to step S14103, and the subtraction process of the special section game number PG is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S8101 to S8103. In step S14104, the subtraction process of the special section number PM is executed based on the winning result of the current game. Specifically, the process of subtracting the number of medals paid out in this game from the number of special section PMs is executed. In this case, if the result of this game is out of order, or if the so-called missed result does not result in a stop result corresponding to the winning, the number of medals paid out is 0, and the number of medals paid out is 0 from the special section number PM to 0. Is subtracted (not subtracted in this game).

Then, in step S14105, it is determined whether or not both the special section game number PG and the special section number PM are 0. If both are 0, the process of clearing the special section flag is executed in step S14106. Then, in step S14107, a special section end command for causing the display control device 81 to know that the special section ends is set as an output target to the display control device 81. By these processes, the special section ends. On the other hand, in step S14105, if any of them is not 0, that is, for example, if the number of special section games PG is 0 but the number of special section PMs is not 0, it is denied in step S14105. It will be judged.

As described above, in this modification, at the end of the advantageous section, a special section is set according to the excess amount, and the difference number up to the maximum increase number, the number of games up to the maximum number of games, and the number of remaining games ZG are set. A special section is set accordingly. In this way, not only the special section according to the extra generated in the advantageous section, but also the number of medals obtained and the number of digestible games will be lost due to the other forced termination condition, which will be followed in the special section. With the configuration, it is possible to preferably reduce the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The contents of the production in this modified example will be described. FIG. 238 is a flowchart of the setting process of the attack mode end effect, and FIG. 239 is a diagram for explaining the effect content by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. The attack mode end effect setting process is a process executed by the display control device 81 for setting an effect that occurs at the end of the attack mode or at the forced end of the advantageous section.

In step S14201, a process of grasping the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section this time (the number of increase / decrease in the advantageous section ZM) is executed. Then, in step S14202, a process of grasping the total number of continuous games in the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section AG) is executed. Then, in step S14203, a process of setting the end effect including the total number of medals won and the total number of continuous games is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S7701, step S7702, and step S7704.

In the following step S14204, it is determined whether or not the above special section command has been received. If the special section command has not been received, this setting process ends as it is. When the special section command is received, in step S14205, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs a continuous effect indicating that the special section, which is a section advantageous to the player, continues after the end of the advantageous section. Execute the process.

In the following step S14206, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of special section games PG included in the received special section command is 1 or more. If it is 1 or more, in step S14207, after the end effect set this time, a process for continuing the display of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that was executed before that is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14206, or after the process of step S14207 is executed, it is determined in step S14208 whether or not the value of the number of special sections PM included in the special section command received this time is 1 or more. To do. If it is 1 or more, in step S14209, after the end effect set this time, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of advantageous sections that was executed before that is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14208, or after the process of step S14209 is executed, the present setting process ends.

The contents of the effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 239. 239 (a1), (b1), (c1), and (d1) show the effect contents when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and is forcibly terminated, and FIGS. 239 (a2), (b2), (d1). c2) and (d2) show the contents of the effect when the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number of medals and is forcibly terminated.

As shown in FIG. 239 (a1), when the number of games in the advantageous section AG is close to the maximum number of games, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG has reached the maximum number of games, and the first excess flag is set. On the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, the above-mentioned limit exceeding information image GTP is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (b1), when the upper limit game of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the end effect of the attack mode is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section is set according to the excess amount and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number.

In the case where the above-mentioned end effect of the attack mode is performed, for example, the continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (c1) is triggered by a predetermined operation (based on the operation of any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, etc.). Occurs. More specifically, in the continuous production, the face of a soldier as a predetermined character is displayed in close-up on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a voice of "not yet!" Is generated from the speaker 64 by a thick male voice. It should be noted that such a continuous effect is also used, for example, in the post-addition notification of the attack mode, and is an effect executed as a part of the pseudo end effect as if the advantageous state ends. More specifically, in the pseudo-end effect, after the end notification such as the end effect of the attack mode is generated, the continuous notification as the continuous effect is generated. That is, on the premise of a series of effects such that when the end notification is performed without satisfying any of the forced termination conditions, the continuous notification is generated after that and the advantageous section is continued, the above compulsion is performed. By generating a continuous notification even at the end and shifting to the special section, it is possible to give a strong impression that the special section is a section in which the advantageous section is continued.

As described above, after the continuous notification is performed, the section shifts to the special section. As shown in FIGS. 239 (a1) and 239 (b1), since the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is reached this time, a value of 1 or more is input to the number of special sections PM. .. Then, in step S14209, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of sheets in the advantageous section is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239 (d1), the display of the total number of medals won in the advantageous section and the display of the difference number (remaining payout number) up to the upper limit increase number are continued. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the special section as a normal section is continued from the advantageous section that was performed before that.

As shown in FIG. 239 (a2), when the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is close to the upper limit increase number, the total expected increase / decrease number SM has reached the upper limit increase number, and the second excess flag is set, it is assisted. On the display unit 65, for example, the above-mentioned limit exceeding information image GTP is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (b2), when the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the end effect of the attack mode is performed. In this case, as described above, a special section is set according to the excess amount, the number of games up to the maximum number of games, and the number of remaining games ZG.

Similar to FIG. 239 (c1), after the end effect (end notification), the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like generates a continuous effect (continuous notification) triggered by a predetermined operation.

After the continuous notification is given, the section shifts to the special section. As shown in FIGS. 239 (a2) and 239 (b2), since the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number this time, a value of 1 or more is also input to the special section game number PG. ing. Then, in step S14207, a process for continuing the display of the remaining increased number of games in the advantageous section is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 239 (d2), the display of the total number of continuous games in the advantageous section and the display of the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games are continued. As a result, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the special section as a normal section is continued from the advantageous section that was performed before that.

<Modification example 9>
In this modification, the processing when the actual number of sheets in the advantageous section increase / decrease ZM is smaller than the predicted number of sheets (total increase / decrease expected number of sheets SM) by the remaining number management process will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 240, an event that occurs when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is smaller than the prediction will be described.

In FIG. 240 (a), the timing of tf1 in the advantageous section is shown as a reference, and when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG at that time is exhausted, the number of increase / decrease exceeds the upper limit increase number at the timing of tf2. It shows the situation where the second excess flag is set.

If an additional game occurs in this situation, the maximum number of games (1500 games) will not be reached even if the number of additional games is added to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, but the second excess flag is set as described above. Therefore, as already explained, this additional amount is added to the total number of extinct games TEG (FIG. 240 (b)).

FIG. 240 (c) is a timing after FIG. 240 (a) and FIG. 240 (b), and is shown with reference to the timing of tf2 in which the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG has been exhausted. In this example, the case where the net increase in the number of sheets from tf1 to tf2 is lower than the prediction at the time of tf1 is shown. That is, at the time of tf1, although it was predicted that the increase / decrease number would reach the upper limit increase number at the subsequent tf2 timing, the upper limit increase number was not reached even at the actual timing of tf2. Shown.

Although the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 0 at the timing of tf2, as described above, the number of additional games of tf1 is added to the total number of disappearing games TEG. That is, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section becomes 0, if the advantageous section is ended as it is, the player suffers a great loss. Therefore, in such a case, the number of games that reach the upper limit increase number (timing of tf4) is predicted again, and the number of games up to that point (the minute until the upper limit increase number is reached) is the total number of disappearing games TEG. It is configured to move from to to the remaining number of games ZG (FIG. 240 (d)).

Hereinafter, the redistribution process performed when the actual increase / decrease number is smaller than the forecast will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the reallocation process. The redistribution process is a process executed after affirmative determination is made in step S1408, step S1414, step S1421, and step S1426 in the game number management process, and is the number of continuations of the current display mode (challenge mode, attack mode, etc.). Is a process to be executed when becomes 0.

In step S14301, it is determined whether or not all of the challenge mode continuation number, the attack mode continuation number, the VB mode continuation number, and the special zone continuation number are 0. That is, in step S14301, it is determined that, for example, after determining that the number of continuations of the attack mode is 0 in the immediately preceding process, it is not the case of shifting to the challenge mode without shifting to the normal mode. If all the continuation numbers are 0, it is determined in step S14302 whether or not the total number of extinct games TEG is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, it is advantageous in step S14303. It is determined whether or not the forced termination condition is satisfied after reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section. The case where an affirmative determination is made in steps S14301 and S14302 and a negative determination is made in step S14303 is the situation shown in FIG. 240 (c).

That is, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 0 even though the number of games added to the total number of disappearing games TEG is stored, the process proceeds to step S14304. In step S14304, a process of grasping the total number of disappearing games TEG is executed. Then, in step S14305, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM when the total number of extinct games TEG is digested as an advantageous section is calculated. More specifically, the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM is calculated by multiplying the total number of extinct games TEG by the expected increase / decrease number KM. In the following step S14306, a process of calculating the total expected increase / decrease number SM from the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM and the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is executed. Then, in step S14307, a process of calculating the number of free FMs that can be increased is executed. That is, the processes of steps S14304 to S14307 are processes for determining whether or not the upper limit increase number is exceeded when all the total disappearance game number TEG is digested as an advantageous section.

In step S14308, it is determined whether or not the free number FM becomes 0 or less, assuming that the upper limit increase number is exceeded. If it does not become 0 or less and it is predicted that the maximum increase number will not be exceeded even if all the total number of disappearing games TEG is exhausted, the process proceeds to step S14309, and all the values of the total number of disappearing games TEG are continued in attack mode. Execute the process of inputting the number.

If the number of empty FM is 0 or less in step S14308, the process proceeds to step S14310. In step S14310, a process of calculating the number of games YG required up to the upper limit increase number is executed. More specifically, the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is calculated by dividing the difference between the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM and the upper limit increase number KM by the expected increase / decrease number KM. Then, in step S14311, it is determined whether or not the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase number is larger than the number of empty games FG calculated from the advantageous section game number AG and the upper limit game number 1500 games. If the empty game FG is larger, the advantageous section can be digested up to the upper limit increase number. In this case, in step S14312, the process of dividing the number of games YG required for the upper limit increase number from the total number of extinguished games TEG is executed. , Step S14313 executes a process of adding the number of games YG required up to the upper limit increase number to the number of continuation of the attack mode.

If it is determined in step S14311 that the number of games YG required to reach the upper limit increase is larger than the number of empty games FG, in step S14314, the number of games corresponding to the number of empty games FG is calculated from the total number of disappearing games TEG. The process of dividing is executed, and in step S14315, the process of adding the number of games corresponding to the number of empty games FG to the number of continuations of the attack mode is executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S14309, step S14313, and step S14315, in step S14316, a process of setting the redistribution flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed. The redistribution flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the number of continuous attack modes has been re-input by each of the above processes. After that, in step S14317, an additional command corresponding to the number of games added to the number of continuous attack modes in the above process is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the reallocation process is terminated. .. In this case, the number of games on the display and the number of continuous attack modes are adjusted by the post-addition notification or the like.

As described above, in the configuration in which the increase number of advantageous sections is predicted and the second excess flag is set, after the second excess flag is set, the number of additional games is added to the total number of games even if an additional opportunity occurs. However, if the actual increase number is lower than expected, the remaining game number ZM may become 0 before the increase number reaches the upper limit increase number. Therefore, when such an event occurs, the number of games up to the upper limit increase is repredicted again based on the value of the number of disappearing games TEG by the above redistribution process, and the number of games up to the upper limit increase is reached. Only the required number of games is extracted from the number of disappearing games TEG. Therefore, the addition after the second excess flag is set is not completely invalidated, and it is possible to preferably avoid the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, in the redistribution process, since the configuration is such that the remaining number of games ZM is redistributed within the range of the number of disappeared games TEG, the reallocation exceeding the addition generated after the second excess flag is set is performed. It can be prevented and the ball output rate can be prevented from becoming too high.

<Modification example 10>
In this modification, in the configuration of the above modification 9, when an additional trigger occurs after the second excess flag is set, not all of them are added to the number of disappearing games TEG, but they are temporarily added to another counter. It is configured to be memorized. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the process of adding the number of games in this modified example.

That is, in step S14401, it is determined whether or not any of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set. If neither is set, the process of adding the number of the added games this time to the number of continuous games corresponding in steps S14402 and S14403 is performed, and then the process of adding the number of games is completed.

If it is determined in step S14401 that any of the excess flags is set, after grasping the number of additional games in step S14404, in this modification, the first excess flag is set in step S14405. Determine if it is. When the first excess flag is set, the process of adding the number of added games this time to the total number of disappeared games TEG is executed in step S14406 as in the seventh embodiment.

On the other hand, if the first excess flag is not set in step S14405, that is, if only the second excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag, the process proceeds to step S14407. In step S14407, a process of adding the number of the added games this time to the number of extinction preparation games EJG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The number of extinction preparation games EJG is for temporarily storing the number of additional games when an addition occurs in a situation where the second forced termination condition of the advantageous section is predicted to be satisfied in the future. It is a counter.

After executing the process of step S14406 or step S14407, the process for the fifth special notification is executed in steps S14408 to S14413, and then the process of adding the number of games is completed. The processing of steps S14408 to S14413 is the same as the processing of steps S13306 to S13311.

In this case, in the redistribution process (FIG. 241), in step S14302, it is determined whether or not the number of extinction preparation games EJG is 1 or more instead of the total number of extinction games TEG. Further, in step S14304, instead of the total number of extinct games TEG, the number of extinction preparation games EJG is grasped, and in step S14305, instead of the total number of extinction games TEG, the remaining number of extinction preparation games EJG is increased or decreased. Used for calculation. Then, in step S14312, a process of subtracting the number of games CG up to the maximum number of games from the number of extinction preparation games EJG is performed, and in step S14314, a process of subtracting the number of empty games FG from the number of extinction preparation games EJG is performed.

FIG. 243 (a) is a flowchart showing a process of moving the number of extinct games for moving the number of extinction preparation games EJG to the total number of extinct games TEG. The disappearance game number movement process is, for example, a process executed after step S13111 in the remaining game number management process, a process executed when the first excess flag is set, and the number of free games FG is 0 or less. It is a process that is carried out in such a situation.

In step S14501, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag is set. When the second excess flag is set, in step S14502, the process of grasping the number of extinction preparation games EJG and adding the value of the extinction preparation game number EJG to the total number of extinction games TEG is executed. In this case, the value of the number of extinction preparation games EJG is cleared. If the second excess flag is not set in step S14501, or after the process of step S14502 is executed, the process of moving the number of disappearing games is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, if an addition occurs in a situation where only the second excess flag is set, a value corresponding to the number of added games is temporarily stored in the number of extinction preparation games EJG. Then, when the first excess flag is set, the number of games stored in the number of extinction preparation games EJG moves to the total number of extinction games TEG. Then, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 0 by the time the first excess flag is set, the redistribution process to the number of remaining games ZG is performed using the value of the number of extinction preparation games EJG. .. That is, in this modification, the event that the number of games stored in the total number of extinguished games TEG is subtracted before extinction does not occur. In this way, by managing the number of extinction preparation games that can be reduced EJG and the total number of extinct games that do not decrease TEG separately, the ease of managing the total number of extinct games TEG is improved, and the total number of extinct games TEG is increased. In presenting useful information to the player based on the above, the frequency of rewriting and the frequency of access of the total number of disappearing games TEG, which is the basis for the presentation, can be reduced, and the storage stability of the total number of disappearing games TEG can be ensured. Therefore, for example, an error such as erroneously erasing the total number of disappearing games TEG is less likely to occur, and the profit that the player should obtain (presentation of information that can be useful, generation of setting value suggestion) is generated by the error. It is possible to preferably avoid an event that disappears.

As described above, the number of extinction preparation games EJG stores the number of games when an addition occurs in a situation where the second excess flag is set. Then, the second excess flag can be said to be a material for determining whether or not the total number of extinct games TEG when the forced termination condition is finally satisfied may be temporarily stored in the number of extinction preparation games EJG.

In this case, in the sixth special notification process at the time of forced termination, the sixth special notification lottery table may be different depending on the presence or absence of the second excess flag. More specifically, for example, when the second excess flag is set, processing is performed by the sixth special notification A lottery table, and when the second excess flag is not set, the sixth special notification B lottery is performed. The configuration is such that processing is performed using a table. In any of the 6th special notification lottery tables, the information of the total number of disappearing games TEG is used. By adopting the above configuration, the 6th special notification based on the total number of disappearing games TEG after the number of extinction preparation games EJG is used. It is possible to separately perform the processing for the sixth special notification based on the total number of extinction games TEG that has not passed the extinction preparation game number EJG, and whether or not each has passed the extinction preparation game number EJG. Depending on the situation, it is possible to make a difference in the advantage due to the suggestion of the set value.

In the RAM 106, the total number of extinct games TEG and the number of extinction preparation games EJG are, as shown in FIG. The number of games may be stored in the TEG area, and the number of extinction preparation games EJG may be stored in the number of extinction preparation games EJG area provided in the counter area 209 corresponding to the advantageous section of various counter areas 106e. In this way, in the configuration in which useful information is presented to the player by using the number of games in excess of the forced termination condition, the seventh embodiment is such that the excess can not be exceeded. Also, the information used in connection with the push order notification in the advantageous section (number of extinction preparation games EJG) and the information used in the section other than the advantageous section (total number of extinction games TEG) are stored separately. As a result, the information generated during the advantageous section can be inherited even after the advantageous section ends.

It is preferable that the access restriction setting of the CPU 102 is different between the area where the total number of disappearing games TEG is stored and the area where the total number of disappearing games EJG is stored. More specifically, in the area where the total number of extinct games TEG is stored, access is permitted in the process of adding the number of games in steps S14406 and S14502 in the advantageous section, and access is provided in the process of subtracting the number of games, for example. With the configuration of restriction, the stability of the information of the disappearance game number TEG is ensured, and the special notification based on the disappearance game number TEG can be carried out more safely. On the other hand, with respect to the number of extinction preparation games EJG, if the configuration allows access in both the addition process and the subtraction process in the advantageous section, the convenience of the extinction preparation game number EJG is greatly improved. Then, by making the access restriction settings of the two game numbers TEG and EJG different in this way, the significance of storing common information such as the number of games in the advantageous section separately in the plurality of storage areas is enhanced.

<Modification 11>
In this modification, the subsequent advantages are different based on the reallocation processing shown in the above modification 10. FIG. 244 is a diagram for explaining an example in which the difference in advantage based on the redistribution processing is applied to the sixth special notification at the time of forced termination, and is the sixth in the present modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special notification.

That is, in step S14601, it is determined whether or not the above redistribution flag is set. If the redistribution flag is not set, as the sixth special notification this time, a process for generating a special notification using the sixth special notification A lottery table (step S14602 to step S14607) is executed. The process of step S14602 to step S14607 is the same as the process of step S13702 to step S13707.

On the other hand, if the redistribution flag is set and the total number of extinct games TEG and the number of extinction preparation games EJG are redistributed before the forced termination of this time, the sixth special notification of this time is the sixth. Special notification B A process for generating a special notification using the lottery table (step S14608 to step S14613) is executed. The processing of steps S14608 to S14613 is the same as the processing of steps S13708 to S13713.

As already explained, the setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification A lottery table and the setting value suggestion using the 6th special notification B lottery table use the A lottery table rather than the B lottery table. It is easier to narrow down the set values than the ones (Fig. 230). The reallocation process is when the maximum increase is not reached in the game that was predicted to reach the maximum increase, even though it was predicted that the maximum increase would be reached. This is the case when the number of medals paid out in each game is less than expected. That is, the player is not enjoying the benefits as originally expected. Therefore, by making the ease of narrowing down the set value in the case of performing the sixth special notification different as described above, it is possible to compensate the unenjoyed profit with information such as suggestion of the set value.

<Modification example 12>
In this modification, when the actual number of sheets increased / decreased in the advantageous section ZM is smaller than the number of sheets predicted by the remaining number management process (total number of sheets expected to increase / decrease SM), the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is adjusted to increase. FIG. 245 shows the push order notification process for CB in this modified example. The push order notification process for CB is a process that is executed when it is determined in the push order combination process (FIG. 38) that a CB is won, which is not shown. Is a process to be executed when it is determined whether or not is a CB winner and the determination is affirmed.

In step S14701, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts is 15 with reference to the number of remaining payouts in the CB state (see step S605 of the bonus state processing in FIG. 26). Here, as the winning combination in the CB state, CB small and medium-sized combination 1 to CB small and medium-sized combination 4 having an index value IV = 49 to 52 are set (see FIG. 17 and the like), and in the CB state, these CB small and medium-sized combination 1 ~ Win one of the CB small and medium-sized roles 4 with a high probability (be sure to win one). The CB state is performed in a 2-bet game, and if you win the CB small and medium-sized roles 1 to CB small and medium-sized roles 4, you will win one of the 1st to 41st small roles, and as a benefit, 15 medals. A payout or 14 medals are paid out (see FIGS. 9 and 10). Then, in the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 to the CB small and medium-sized winning combination 4, which small winning combination is established is managed by the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (see FIG. 27 (a)). More specifically, CB small and medium-sized winning combination 1 and CB small and medium-sized winning combination 2 are awarded a small winning combination that pays out 15 medals regardless of the stop order, and CB small and medium-sized winning combination 3 and CB small and medium-sized combination 4 are stopped. Depending on the order, the stop order of the small winning combination for paying out 15 medals and the small winning combination for paying out 14 medals is different.

The situation in which the number of remaining payouts is 15 in step S14701 means that it is the first game in the CB state. If the number of remaining payouts is 15, the process proceeds to step S14702, and it is determined whether or not the above redistribution flag is set. When the redistribution flag is set, it is determined in step S14703 whether or not the lottery result of this game is CB small / small winning combination 3 or CB small / medium winning combination 4. That is, the process of step S14703 is a process of determining whether or not the lottery result of this game is a result in which the number of payouts differs depending on the stop order.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S14703, a push order notification of the stop order for paying out 14 medals is generated in step S14704. After that, in step S14705, the push order command is output to the display control device 81, and then the push order notification process for this CB ends. If a negative determination is made in any of steps S14701 to S14703, this process ends without performing the push order notification process. In this case, the result of paying out 14 medals wins a prize, or the result of paying out 15 medals wins a prize.

By doing so, the net increase in the number of sheets after the reallocation process is performed increases. More specifically, if the CB is won after the redistribution flag is set, it is possible to receive 14 medals and 15 medals in the CB state, and the increased number of medals in the CB state is 14 sheets + 15 sheets-2 sheets x 2 = 25 sheets. On the other hand, before the increase notification flag is set, for example, if 15 medals are paid out in the first game, the CB state ends in that game, so that the number of medals increased in the CB state. Is 15 sheets-2 sheets = 13 sheets, which means that there is a difference in the number of sheets increased by nearly twice as compared with that after the redistribution flag is set. By doing so, it is possible to approach the expected number of sheets in a situation where the reallocation process is performed, that is, when the actual number of sheets to be increased is smaller than the expected number of sheets.

<Modification example 13>
In this modification, the processing when the actual number of sheets in the advantageous section increase / decrease ZM is larger than the predicted number of sheets (total increase / decrease expected number of sheets SM) by the remaining number management process will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 246, an event that occurs when the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is larger than the prediction will be described.

In FIG. 246 (a), the timing of tg1 in the advantageous section is shown as a reference, and the number of games remaining in the advantageous section at that time is not reached at the timing of tg2 to digest ZG, and the number of medals increased / decreased. Indicates a situation in which neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set, assuming that does not exceed the upper limit increase number.

In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 can display the number of remaining games by the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, and in the figure, the number of games remaining equal to the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (200 games) remains. It is displayed as a number.

In FIG. 246 (b), the timing of tg3, which is a timing after the timing of tg1, is shown as a reference. In this example, the number of sheets increased more than the number of increase / decrease predicted at the timing of tg1, and the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section was exceeded at the timing of tg3. That is, the timing of tg3 is a timing before tg2, which should have consumed the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (200 games) at the timing of tg1. In this case, based on the fact that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section is exceeded as described above, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the auxiliary display unit 65 performs, for example, an attack mode end effect.

Then, at the timing of tg1, the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG, and at the timing of tg3, all the remaining games notified at the time of tg1 are notified. It means that the advantageous section was forcibly terminated without digestion, and the player had the impression that the profit to be obtained was unfairly exploited for the game for the notification of TG1 (the remaining 100 games in FIG. 246). May hold.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the seventh special notification process in this modification. The seventh special notification process is, for example, a process executed at the time of forced termination of the advantageous section in the section display second process (for example, in FIG. 228, between step S13606 and step S13607).

In step S14801, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is 2400 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S14801 and the advantageous section of this time ends without satisfying the second forced termination condition, the seventh special notification process is terminated as it is. When the second forced termination condition is satisfied, in step S14802, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is larger than 0. The case where the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is larger than 0 is the case where the game is forcibly terminated by the second forced termination condition even though there is the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 0, the seventh special notification process is terminated as it is, and if it is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S14803. In step S14803, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG grasped in step S14802 includes those that have already been notified. More specifically, the number of games for post-addition notification (the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG on the display control device 81 side, the figure and the following, described as the post-addition counter BG) is grasped, and the post-addition counter If the BG is equal to the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, it is determined that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG does not include the previously notified game, and if the post-addition counter BG is smaller than the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, It is determined that the notified one is included. If it is determined that the notified one is not included, the seventh special notification process is terminated as it is. That is, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is ZG, even if the game is forcibly terminated by the second forced termination condition, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not notified, the seventh special No notification processing is performed.

If the notified one is included, the process proceeds to step S14804. In step S14804, a process of grasping the notified portion is executed. In this case, the notification amount can be grasped by subtracting the post-addition counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. In the following step S14805, the seventh special notification lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), the seventh special notification lottery table has a different occurrence rate of the seventh special notification (winning rate of the notification lottery) according to the number of games that have been notified in step S14804. It is set to, and the occurrence rate increases as the number of notified games increases.

In the following step S14806, the execution lottery for the seventh special notification is performed based on the number of games for the notifications grasped in step S14804 and the seventh special notification lottery table acquired in step S14805. Then, it is determined in step S14807 whether or not the notification lottery has been won, and if it has been won, the seventh special notification execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14808. If the notification lottery has not been won, the seventh special notification non-execution command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S14809. After executing the process of step S14808 or step S14809, the seventh special notification process is terminated.

The processing on the display control device 81 side that has received the 7th special notification execution command and the 7th special notification non-execution command is generally the same as the processing when another special notification execution command / non-execution command is received. Since the same is true, detailed description of the processing will be omitted, but since the 7th special notification execution command and the 7th special notification non-execution command are output at the end of the advantageous section, the attack mode end effect, etc. The 7th special notification (whether or not a predetermined character appears, the type of the character that appears, the background, etc.) may be performed at. Further, when the display control device 81 executes the seventh special notification (when the command for executing the seventh special notification is received), the type of the seventh special notification is determined by a type lottery or the like. As shown in FIG. 248 (b), the seventh special notification type table is set so that the type of the seventh special notification (a1 to a4) to be generated differs depending on the set value, and the player has generated the seventh special notification. The set value can be predicted from the type of the seventh special notification.

However, the seventh special notification is set so that the set value cannot be narrowed down or is difficult to be narrowed down by itself regardless of which type is generated. That is, the 7th special notification a1 and the 7th special notification a2 are generated at any of the set values. Further, when the 7th special notification a3 is generated, it is determined that the setting is 3 or more, and when the 7th special notification a4 is generated, it is determined that the setting is 5 or more. However, regardless of the set value, more than half of the selected 7th special notification types are the 7th special notification a1 and the 7th special notification a2, which are set values as compared with other special notifications. The difficulty of narrowing down is high. This has reached at least the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section in the situation of FIG. 246 (b), and the actual profit of the player is what was predicted in FIG. 246 (a) (upper limit increase). This is because it is more favorable to the player than (not reaching the number). That is, in the situation of FIG. 246 (b), the player does not suffer a substantial disadvantage, but rather enjoys more profit than expected, which is beneficial to the player in such a situation. This is based on the idea that if information that can be useful is presented, the degree to which it can be useful may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a balance between the loss and disadvantage of the player and the presentation (compensation) of information.

As described above, in the configuration where the first forced termination condition of the upper limit number of games and the second forced termination condition of the upper limit increase number are set as the forced termination condition of the advantageous section, the second forced termination condition is unexpectedly faster. If it is established (in a game earlier than expected), there may be a discrepancy in relation to the notification content of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. Therefore, in order to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the player may feel due to the discrepancy, information that may be useful to the player is presented (setting value suggestion). By doing so, the game can be enjoyed favorably without discouraging the player's willingness to play.

<Modification 14>
In this modification, based on the modification 13, the actual number of sheets of increase / decrease in the advantageous section ZM is larger than the number of sheets predicted by the remaining number management process (total number of expected increase / decrease SM), and the notification of the number of remaining games is not exhausted. When the upper limit increase number is reached, the undigested notification amount is used to set the special section. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing a special section setting process in this modification.

The processing of steps S14901 to S14905 is the same as the processing of steps S14001 to S14005, and the number of special section games is based on the total number of disappearing games TEG, the number of remaining advantageous section games ZG, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number. PG is set. In this modification, in addition to the special section game number PG based on these parameters, the number of games based on the undigested notification portion is set for the special section, so that the total number of disappearing games is set. The special section game number PG based on the TEG, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG, and the difference number up to the upper limit increase number is referred to as the first special section game number PG1.

In step S14906, a process of grasping the number of notified games is executed. The process of step S14906 is the same as the process of step S14804, and the number of games that have been notified can be grasped by subtracting the post-addition counter BG from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. In the following step S14907, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of games grasped in step S14906 to the second special section game number PG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The value input in step S14907 does not have to be completely the same as the value grasped in step S14906. For example, any one of the second special section game number PG2 set in a plurality of stages can be used. It may be configured to be input by a lottery or the like, and the value grasped in step S14906 may be used as the parameter of the lottery.

After that, in step S14908, it is determined whether or not any one of the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 is 1 or more, and if any of them is 1 or more, step S14909 and In step S14910, a process for setting a special section is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S14908, or after the process of step S14910 is executed, the special section setting process ends after clearing the total number of extinct games TEG in step S14911.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 250A, in the special section game number subtraction process (15003), the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2 are subtracted by one each. Then, in step S1504, it is determined whether or not the first special section game number PG1 is 0 among the 1st special section game number PG1 and the 2nd special section game number PG2, and if it is 0, it is determined. , Step S15005 clears the special section flag and ends the special section. That is, although the number of games in the first special section PG1 and the number of games in the second special section PG2 are set as parameters for the number of games in the special section, the number of games in the special section itself is defined by the number of games in the first special section PG1. ..

On the other hand, in the push order combination processing in this modification, the occurrence rate of the push order notification at the time of winning the special replays 1 and 2 is 1 or more for the first special section game number PG1 and the second special section game number PG2. The situation is different from the situation after the number of games PG2 in the second special section becomes 0 (the situation where only the first special section PG1 is 1 or more). Specifically, when it is determined in step S15051 that the special replays 1 and 2 have been won, it is determined in step S15052 whether or not it is a special section. In the case of a special section, the set value is grasped in step S15053, and the push order notification lottery table at the time of winning the special replay is acquired in step S15054. As shown in FIGS. 251 (a) and 251 (b), the push order notification table at the time of winning the special replay is the situation after the number of games PG2 in the second special section becomes 0 (only the first special section PG1). The situation where the number of games is 1 or more, FIG. 251 (a)) and the situation where the number of games in the first special section PG1 and the number of games in the second special section PG2 are 1 or more (FIG. 251 (b)) are different. FIG. 251 (a) is the same as the table shown in FIG. 162 (b), and is set so that the occurrence rate of push order notification and the type of push order notification when generating push order notification differ depending on the set value. Has been done. Similar to FIG. 251 (a), FIG. 251 (b) is set so that the occurrence rate of push order notification and the type of push order notification when generating push order notification differ depending on the set value. The difference in the occurrence rate of push order notification depending on the value and the variation in the type of push order notification when generating push order notification are different from those in FIG. 251 (a) above, and are larger than those in the table in FIG. 251 (a). The table of FIG. 251 (b) is set so that the set values can be easily narrowed down based on the occurrence rate and type.

In step S15055, the push order notification lottery process is executed, and in step S15056, it is determined whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If it is won, the process of setting the push order notification command is executed in step S15057.

That is, when a special section is set based on the forced termination, a section in which the set value is easily narrowed down by the number of games that have been notified is set. By doing so, the fact that the number of games that have been notified cannot be digested can be followed by a section that facilitates the narrowing down of the set value, and the absurdity of the player can be suitably eliminated.

In particular, in a special section, if it is set in a special section, useful information is not presented to the player, and even if it is set, it is necessary to win the special replays 1 and 2, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to avoid an excessive event and maintain a good balance between the player's loss or disadvantage and its follow-up.

<Modification 15>
In this modification, when the second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process, a new game property is provided by utilizing the relationship between the number of games that will reach the upper limit increase number and the number of games that have been notified. To do. FIG. 252 (a) shows a part of the flowchart of the remaining number management process in this modified example.

In this modification, when it is determined in step S13205 that the number of free FMs that can be increased is 0 or less, the second excess flag is set in step S15101. Then, in step S15102, a process of grasping the number of games required until the upper limit increase number is reached is executed, and in step S15103, a process of grasping the number of remaining games that have been notified is executed.

In step S15104, it is determined whether or not the number of games remaining notified in step S15103 is larger than the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number grasped in step S15102. When the number of remaining games that have been notified is larger, that is, when the number of remaining games that have already been notified is determined to reach the upper limit increase number before all the remaining games that have already been notified are exhausted when the second excess flag is set. After setting the eighth special notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S15105, the remaining number management process is terminated. If the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is larger than the number of remaining games that have been notified, the remaining number management process is terminated as it is without setting the eighth special notification command.

An example of the effect of the eighth special notification is shown in FIG. 252 (b).

In this example, the case where the number of games remaining to be notified is 300 games and the number of games required to reach the upper limit increase number is 250 games is shown as an example, and the auxiliary display unit 65 shows the number of games remaining. Along with the display (300 games) and the display of the total number of medals won (1900), the limit excess information image GTP based on the setting of the second excess flag is displayed.

As the eighth special notification, regarding the display of the number of remaining games, the auxiliary display unit is notified that it is advantageous to reach the upper limit increase number and forcibly terminate the display while keeping the number of remaining games displayed as much as possible. It is set to be performed at 65. In this example, along with the girl character, an explanation is displayed for the display of the number of remaining games, "If a lot of games remain, you are super lucky", and the number of remaining games that have been notified is left to be forcibly terminated. It will be explained that the special section after that will be advantageous.

By doing so, the event of being forcibly terminated without exhausting the number of remaining games that have been notified is not a disadvantage for the player, but rather an advantageous event that it occurs. It is possible to make an impression of, and it is possible to create a new playability using it.

In particular, in this modification, it is advantageous for the player to forcibly terminate the advantageous section earlier, so that it is possible to further increase the expectation for the bonus state in which the expected increase / decrease number per game is large. That is, in the situation where it is known that the upper limit increase number is reached, the final increase in medals may occur due to the push order notification in the attack mode or the bonus state. Since the number of medals increased does not change, it is possible that the bonus winning that would otherwise be appreciated may not be appreciated. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, by making the configuration advantageous by reaching the upper limit increase number earlier, it is possible to expect earlier achievement by winning the bonus, so the winning of the bonus is pleased. It is possible to strengthen the impression that it is.

In the above modification, the more the number of remaining games notified at the time of forced termination is, the more advantageous the player is. However, the smaller the number of remaining games notified is, the more advantageous the player is. However, if the number of remaining games that have been notified is a predetermined number such as a good number, the configuration may be advantageous for the player.

For example, in FIG. 253 (a), regarding the seventh special notification shown in the modified example 13, the smaller the number of games that have been notified at the time of forced termination, the higher the occurrence rate of the seventh special notification. The lottery table is shown. By doing so, it is advantageous to exhaust the number of games that have already been notified and forcibly terminate the game, and it is possible to thoroughly enjoy the advantageous section to the end.

FIG. 253 (b) shows that the number of notified games at the time of forced termination is a predetermined specific number such as 10, 50, 100, 200 for the seventh special notification shown in the modification example 13. The 7th special notification lottery table in which the occurrence rate of the 7th special notification is higher than that in the absence is shown. By doing so, it is unlikely that the number of games that have been notified will be exhausted at an early stage and vice versa, and the expectation for the 7th special notification will be diminished. In relation to the rest of the number of completed games, it is possible to pay attention to the game results of each game to the end.

In the above configuration, for example, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 172, etc.), whether the additional notification is the immediate addition notification or the post-addition notification is different depending on whether or not the second excess flag is set. It may be configured. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which a large number of games that have already been notified remain and the game is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number (the 7th special notification is likely to occur), the immediate notification is selected. It is preferable for the player, and in a configuration where it is advantageous that the game is forcibly terminated by the upper limit increase number in a situation where the number of games that have been notified is small, it is preferable for the player to select the post-addition notification. By doing so, in a situation where the excess flag is set, such as the number of additional notification games, even an event that may no longer be of interest can be played by using the relationship with the number of games already notified. It can be incorporated into the game, and the fun of the game can be improved.

<Modification 16>
In this modification, the configuration for predicting that the second forced termination condition may be satisfied in the future is changed. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the remaining number management process in this modification.

In step S15201, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is grasped. In the following step S15202, a process of calculating the average value of the number of times that the bonus winning can be expected (expected bonus winning number KB) is performed from the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG. For example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games and the probability of winning the bonus is about 1/254, the expected number of bonus winnings KB is calculated as 500 games x about 1/254 = about 1.97 times. Will be done.

In step S15203, the expected increase in the bonus (expected bonus increase number KBM) is calculated based on the expected bonus winning number KB calculated in step S15202. For example, if the number of bonuses obtained is 144, the expected bonus increase KBM is calculated as about 1.97 times (KB) x 144 = about 283.68.

In the following step S15204, the number of games (reported game number HG) excluding the number of games executed in the bonus state in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section when the bonus is won according to the expected number of bonus winning times KB is calculated. For example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500, the expected number of bonus winnings KB is about 1.97, and the number of games required to digest the bonus state is 24 games, the number of notified games HG is 500 games. -Calculated as about 1.97 times (KB) x 24 games = about 452.72 games.

In step S15205, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM when the advantageous section for the number of notification games HG is executed is calculated. In this case, the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM is calculated by multiplying the notification game number HG by the expected increase / decrease number KM, which is the net increase number (about +1.90) without adding the bonus state. In the above-mentioned example in which the number of notified games HG is about 452.72 games, the remaining expected increase / decrease number NM is calculated as about 452.72 games × 1.90 cards (KM) = about 860.17 games.

Then, in step S15206, by adding the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM and the expected bonus increase number KBM to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG in consideration of the number of games consumed in the bonus state is obtained. Calculate the total expected increase / decrease number SM. In the above example, the total expected increase / decrease number SM is a value obtained by adding the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM to about 860.17 (NM) + about 283.68 (KBM) = 1143.85. This value is smaller than the total expected increase / decrease expected number SM (1230 + ZM) calculated as the same number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG in the seventh embodiment. After that, the free number FM that can be increased is calculated in step S15207, and when the free number FM becomes 0 or less (step S15208), the process of setting the second excess flag is performed (step S15209).

As described above, in predicting (calculating) the number of medals that can be expected to increase or decrease in the remaining advantageous section, not only the increase in the bonus state is taken into consideration, but also the number of remaining games in the advantageous section consumed in the bonus state. By adding, it becomes possible to more accurately predict the number of medals to increase or decrease.

In particular, even if the advantageous section is exhausted in the bonus state, the number of games in the advantageous section AG will continue to be counted. Therefore, by shifting to the bonus state, more medals can be expected than in the case of not shifting, but the bonus. The number of games played such as attack mode is reduced by the amount of the state. That is, for example, if the expected increase in the number of games to be expected when the so-called ART in the attack mode and the high RT state is executed for a predetermined number of games is calculated in consideration of the transition to the bonus state, the ART when the transition to the bonus state is performed. Since the count of the number of remaining games is stopped, simply by adding the transition rate to the bonus state and the expected increase in the bonus state to the increase in the number of games that can be expected in the ART state, the predetermined number of games can be obtained. It is possible to calculate the expected increase in the number of sheets during ART. More specifically, for example, if the ART of 100 games is carried out with a net increase of about +1.90, and a bonus lottery that can expect to win 144 medals at about 1/254 during that time is also performed, the 100 By digesting the ART of the game, you can expect to win 100 games x about 1.90 + 100 games x about 1/254 x 144 = about 246 medals, which is converted into a net increase in the number of medals per game. Then, it becomes about 2.46 sheets. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the ART count is not stopped when the bonus state is entered, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the number of ART games for the bonus state. In the above example, 100 games of ART are required. By digesting (100 games-100 games x about 1/254 x 24 games (number of games required in the bonus state)) x about 1.90 + 100 games x about 1/254 x 144 = about 227 This can be expected to win medals, which translates to a net increase in the number of medals per game, which is about 2.27. In this way, it is possible to make a more accurate prediction by predicting the expected increase number of sheets in consideration of the configuration in which the counting of the advantageous section is not stopped by the bonus winning in the advantageous section.

<Modification example 17>
In this modification, a device for reducing the fluctuation width in which the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section fluctuates depending on whether or not the BB is won will be described. FIG. 255 (a) shows a part of the lottery table for the first RT state in this modified example.

In this modification, the winning probabilities of various replays in the first RT state in the seventh embodiment are different, and the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 has a higher winning probability than the seventh embodiment, and the index. The first promotion replays 1 to 4 having a value IV = 2 to 5 have a lower winning probability than the seventh embodiment. On the other hand, the total replay probability including various replays with index values IV = 1 to 5 is set to be equivalent to that of the seventh embodiment. The index value IV = 6 or later is the same as that of the seventh embodiment.

By doing so, in the first RT state in this modified example, the winning probability of the first promotion replay is lower than that of the seventh embodiment, and the push order notification can occur. However, the average number of games until the transition to the second RT state is longer than that of the seventh embodiment. The net increase in the number of medals in the 1st RT state in the situation where the push order notification can occur is as shown in FIG. 216 above, and the number of medals held is about -0.99 per game without the bonus winning. Can decrease.

FIG. 255 (b) is a diagram for comparing the increase / decrease of medals when a bonus is won during ART between the seventh embodiment and the present modification.

In the seventh embodiment, if the bonus is won at the timing of th1 during ART, the bonus is carried over until the timing of th2 when the bonus winning is established, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Further, in the return state from the timing of th3 when the bonus ends to the timing of th4 when returning to the second RT state, the game state becomes the normal game state and the first RT state. The net increase in the number of sheets in each of these states is as described above, th1 to th2 and th3 to th4 are about -0.99 sheets per game, and th2 to th3 are about +6.00 sheets, which is higher than th1. Before and after th4, it is about +1.90.

The figure also shows that the bonus is won at th5, the bonus is won at th6, the bonus ends at th7, and the bonus returns to the second RT state at tf8, and the net increase in the number of sheets in each state is shown. Th5 to th6 and th7 to th8 are about -0.99 sheets per game, th6 to th7 are about +6.00 sheets, and before th5 and after th8 are about +1.90 sheets. ..

The average number of games from the end of the bonus to the return to the second RT state is different between the seventh embodiment and the present modification, and the average number of games in the seventh embodiment is th3 to th4 in the figure. The average number of games in this modified example is th7 to th8, and this modified example tends to be longer. By doing so, the net increase in the number of bonuses won during ART is the increase in the net increase in the case of winning the bonus during ART (net increase from th1 to th4 and net increase from th5 to th8). It can be suppressed. Therefore, the fluctuation range of the net increase number when the bonus is won during ART becomes small, and the difference between the predicted value of the net increase number and the actual value can be reduced.

Incidentally, in this modification, the winning probability of the first promotion replay during the first RT state is about 1/50, and the transition to the second RT state can occur in an average of 50 games. In addition, in the normal game state, since the player shifts to the 1st RT state due to the omission (1/3) at the time of winning the bell, which is won at about 1 / 5.5, the transition can occur in an average of 16.5 games. .. That is, after the bonus, it takes an average of 66.5 games to return to the second RT state. In this case, the average number of medals increased / decreased is about −64.8 (−0.99 × 66.5). Adding 214 bonuses to this, and calculating the net increase from winning the bonus to returning to ART in 70.5 games including 24 games in the bonus state, it is about 2.12, which is during ART. It will be more than the net increase. If it takes about 8 games to win the bonus, the net increase will be about +1.90, which is almost the same as the net increase during ART (almost the same, it will be equal to the extent that there is no difference in the predicted number of games). The difference is equal to the extent that the player cannot grasp the difference).

<Modification 18>
In this modification, the total increase / decrease expected number SM and the like calculated by the remaining number management process are appropriately modified. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the additional command in this modification. The addition command setting process is a process that is started when the addition command is output and set to the display control device 81 after the process of adding the number of games such as the attack mode. In this modified example, the setting process of the additional command is activated even when the additional command is not won, and further, as the execution timing of the additional notification, the immediate addition notification, the post-addition notification, the stop ON operation, and the stop OFF are performed. The operation timing and the like are determined on the main control device 101 side.

In step S15301, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. As described above, in the present modification, the setting process of the additional command is activated even when the additional command is not won, but the process of step S1531 is a process of determining whether or not the setting process is activated at the time of the non-winning. I can say. Further, even in the situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, it is determined in step S15301 that the additional lottery has not been won. If it is not activated at the time of non-winning but at the time of additional winning, the process proceeds to step S15302 to perform a process of grasping the number of additional games this time. Then, in step S15303, the first adjustment process is executed. The first adjustment process is a process for correcting the total expected increase / decrease number SM and the like calculated in the section display second process of the previous game at the time of this addition.

The first adjustment process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 257. In the description, FIG. 260 will also be referred to as appropriate.

In step S1541, a process of grasping the remaining number counter HG for display provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. This display remaining number counter HG corresponds to the display remaining number counter HG on the display control device 81 side, and is the number of remaining games in the currently notified advantageous section, and is the remaining number of games in the advantageous section that has already been notified. Corresponds to the number of games ZG. In addition, the figure and the following description are both referred to as a display remaining number counter HG. In step S15402, the counter temporarily inputs the value of the display remaining counter HG to the calculation counter SC provided in the various counter areas 106e. The calculation counter SC is a counter used in arithmetic processing such as the total expected increase / decrease number SM.

In step S15403, a process is performed in which the number of games added this time is further added to the calculation counter SC in which the display remaining number counter HG (notified advantageous section remaining game number ZG) is input. Then, in step S15404, a process of calculating the remaining increase maximum expected number NMM is performed from the calculation counter SC after addition and the maximum increase / decrease number MM. The maximum increase / decrease number MM is the maximum number that can be expected per game, and in this modification, the maximum increase / decrease number MM is 12 which is the maximum payout number per game minus 3 bets. In addition, the maximum increase / decrease number MM of the increase number (9 sheets-3 sheets = 6 sheets) of the payout combination (so-called main combination, push order bell in the attack mode) with the highest winning probability in the state at the time of calculation and the state after that. May be. Then, in step S15405, the total remaining increase / maximum expected number SMM is calculated by adding the above-calculated remaining increase maximum expected number NMM to the current advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM.

FIG. 260A is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of games and the counter when the first adjustment process is performed. The figure shows the situation when the addition occurs at the timing of ti1. At the timing of ti1, the number of games up to ti2 corresponding to the remaining number counter HG for display is compared with the number of games AG in the advantageous section. It has already been notified, and as this addition, the case where the number of games from ti2 to ti4 is added is shown. At the timing of ti1, the expected increase number is required as the total expected increase / decrease number SM in the second processing of the section display immediately before, and in this example, it is predicted that the upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets will not be reached. ing.

Then, as described above, in step S15405, the number of additional games this time is added to the remaining number of games ZG, and the total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM is calculated. In the following step S15406, it is determined whether or not the calculated total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number. If it is determined that the upper limit increase number is exceeded, the excess CM is calculated by subtracting the upper limit increase number from the total maximum increase expected number SMM in step S15407, and the excess CM and the maximum increase / decrease number MM are exceeded in step S15408. The process of calculating the excess game number CG corresponding to the minute CM is performed. Then, in step S15409, at the time of this addition, a process of calculating the notification upper limit HJ, which is the upper limit at which the event of being forcibly terminated without exhausting the number of notified games, is executed is executed. More specifically, the notification upper limit HJ is calculated by subtracting the display remaining number counter HG and the excess game number CG from the calculation counter SC.

In FIG. 260 (a), the excess game number CG corresponding to the excess CM is calculated from the calculated total increase / decrease maximum expected number SMM. Based on the timing of ti1, if the maximum increase is expected in each game including this addition, the upper limit increase number is exceeded in ti4, and more specifically, if the maximum increase is expected. Exceeds the maximum increase in the ti3 game. In this case, the games from ti3 to ti4 are calculated as the excess game number CG, and the number of games from ti2 to ti3 is calculated as the notification upper limit HJ.

After the notification upper limit HJ is calculated in step S15409, the process of setting the adjustment flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S15410. The adjustment flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the excess game number CG and the notification upper limit HJ have been calculated assuming that the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number by this addition.

In the following step S15411, a process of adding the number of additional games exceeding the above notification upper limit HJ, that is, the excess game number CG, to the first adjustment counter CC1 provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. After that, the calculation counter SC is cleared in step S15412, and then the first adjustment process is completed. If it is determined in step S15406 that the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM does not exceed the upper limit increase number, the calculation counter SC is cleared in step S15412 without calculating the excess game number CG or the like. The first adjustment process is completed.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the addition command, after executing the first adjustment process in step S15303, the post-addition lottery process of whether or not the addition notification of this time is to be the post-addition notification is executed in step S15304. Such a process corresponds to the process of step S8503 on the display control device 81 side. Then, in step S15305, it is determined whether or not the post-addition notification is selected, and if immediate addition notification is selected instead of the post-addition notification, the addition game this time is added to the display remaining number counter HG in step S15306. A process of adding the number or the upper limit of notification HJ set in the first adjustment process is performed. In this case, if the notification upper limit HJ is not set, the notification of the number of additional games this time is generated in the game, and if the notification upper limit HJ is set, the additional notification corresponding to the notification upper limit HJ is generated. Occurs in the game. The processes of steps S15307 to S15312 correspond to the processes of steps S8506 to S8511, and are processes for setting at which timing of the current game the additional notification is generated. After executing any of the processes of step S15309, step S15311, and step S15312, the process of outputting and setting the additional command including the information set in each of the above processes is executed in step S1533, and then the additional command is executed. Ends the setting process of.

When it is determined in step S15305 that the post-addition notification is selected, the process of setting the post-addition flag in the various flag storage areas 106d is executed in step S15314. Then, in step S15315, a process of adding the number of additional games this time or the notification upper limit HJ to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The post-addition counter is also a counter corresponding to the post-addition counter BG on the display control device 81 side, and is referred to as a post-addition counter BG in the drawings and the following description. After that, the additional command in which various information is set is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S15316, and then the setting process of the additional command is completed.

If it is determined in step S15301 that the addition is not won, the third adjustment process is executed in step S15317, the addition command is output and set in step S15318, and then the setting process of the addition command is completed. The third adjustment process will be described in detail later.

Next, the second adjustment process started in the section display second process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 258. The second adjustment process is a process for readjusting the first adjustment counter CC1 set in the first adjustment process based on the result of the current game. For example, the remaining number management process in step S13005. Is started after is executed.

In step S15501, the number of games corresponding to the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG that has been notified as the display remaining number counter HG is grasped. In the following step S15502, the number of games corresponding to the above notification upper limit HJ is grasped. Then, in step S15503, the process of inputting the remaining number counter HG for display and the upper limit HJ for notification to the calculation counter SC is executed. After that, in step S15504, a process of calculating the remaining maximum increase / decrease expected number NMM is executed from the calculation counter SC and the maximum increase / decrease expected number MM, and a process of calculating the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM is executed in step S15505. The processes of steps S15504 and S15505 correspond to the processes of steps S15404 and S15405 described above.

In the following step S15506, it is determined whether or not the total maximum increase / decrease expected number SMM exceeds the upper limit increase number, and if it is determined that the total maximum increase / decrease expected number exceeds, the excess CM is grasped in step S15507, and then the excess game number CG is determined in step S15508. Is executed. The processes of steps S15506 to S15508 correspond to the processes of steps S15406 to S15408.

In the following step S15509, a process of inputting the difference between the first adjustment counter CC1 and the excess game number CG into the second adjustment counter CC2 provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S15506, or after the process of step S15509 is executed, the second adjustment process ends after the calculation counter SC is cleared.

FIG. 260 (b) shows a situation when the second adjustment process is performed after the first adjustment process is performed in FIG. 260 (a). The first adjustment process is performed at the start of the game, whereas the second adjustment process is performed at the end of the game, and FIG. 260 (b) is started at the timing of ti1 in FIG. 260 (a). It is shown with reference to the timing of ti5, which is the end of the game.

As described above, the notification upper limit HJ at the time of additional winning is calculated from the maximum increase number, but for games that exceed the upper limit increase number derived from the maximum increase number, the result of this game is the maximum increase number. If it does not reach, the game will be different from the previous prediction. More specifically, at the time of ti1 in FIG. 260 (a), the game exceeding the upper limit increase number was predicted as ti3, but if the result of this game is not the maximum increase number, it is more than that ti3. It is predicted that the upper limit increase number will be exceeded in the later game ti6. The above-mentioned second adjustment process is a process for correcting the deviation between ti3 and ti6, and among the games from ti3 to ti4 input to the first adjustment counter CC1, the portion of the deviation is the second. This is a process of inputting to the adjustment counter CC2.

As described above, the first adjustment process is executed in the game in which the addition trigger occurs, while the second adjustment process is executed at the end of each game. Therefore, the above deviation is cumulatively added to the second adjustment counter CC2 in each game.

FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing a third adjustment process activated by the setting process of the additional command.

In step S15601, it is determined whether or not the second adjustment counter CC2 is 1 or more, and if it is 0, the present process is terminated as it is. If it is 1 or more, in step S15602, a pseudo-additional lottery table is acquired from various table storage areas 105a. Pseudo-addition is based on the above-mentioned second adjustment counter CC2, that is, of the first adjustment counter CC1 which is the amount for which the addition notification is restricted, although it has not been won in the additional lottery this time. It is an effect of notifying the number of games for which the additional notification is possible depending on the game situation of, and the same effect as the additional notification is set. Although detailed explanation of the pseudo-addition lottery table by the figure is omitted, whether or not to win the pseudo-addition is set according to the game result, the display mode, etc., as in the case of the addition lottery table.

In step S15603, a pseudo-addition lottery process is executed, and in step S15604, it is determined whether or not the lottery process has been won. If it is not won, the third adjustment process is terminated as it is, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S15605. In step S15605, the number of pseudo-additional notification games is determined by lottery or the like as the number of games to be notified from the second adjustment counter CC2. Then, in step S15606, the process of setting the additional notification effect is executed. More specifically, the additional command for performing the additional notification of the number of pseudo-addition notification games is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S15607, the process of subtracting the number of pseudo-additional games this time from the second adjustment counter CC2 is performed, and then the third adjustment process is terminated.

As described above, even if the number of remaining games is notified, the upper limit that is not forcibly terminated without digesting the notified number of games is calculated from the maximum increase number depending on the subsequent game situation, and the additional notification up to the upper limit is notified. By making it a configuration that does, it is possible to avoid an event that causes a contradiction in notification after the fact, and to prevent a sense of discomfort or loss from being forcibly terminated without exhausting the number of games that have already been notified. It will be possible.

In addition, after calculating the notification upper limit as described above and performing additional notification based on the upper limit, the notification upper limit is readjusted by the second adjustment process according to the actual game situation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which the additional notification is unnecessarily restricted, and to prevent the above-mentioned contradiction in the notification from occurring while not hindering the effect of improving the degree of attention to the additional notification. ..

By configuring the number of games that can be notified in the second adjustment process to be notified as a pseudo-addition in the third adjustment process when the addition is not won, for example, even in a situation where the addition lottery is restricted, etc. It is also possible to give the impression that an additional lottery has been performed, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 19>
In this modification, the remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process that are started in the game after the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set will be described.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining games is increased, such as adding the number of games in the attack mode in the advantageous section, the event that the remaining number of games in the advantageous section ZG is subtracted due to factors other than the digestion of the games It is configured so that it does not occur. Then, in the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, that is, after it is specified that the maximum number of games is reached, the specification is not overturned. Then, regarding the remaining game number management process, once the first excess flag is set, it is a condition that the remaining game number management process is not started, or even if it is started, the first excess flag is set. As a result, the remaining game number management process may be terminated without executing the processes of steps S13101 to S13111.

On the other hand, regarding the second excess flag, that is, after it is specified that the upper limit increase number of medals is reached, as described above, the upper limit increase number of medals is not reached depending on the subsequent game situation. It can also happen. The remaining number management process in this case will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 261.

In this modification, in step S15701, it is determined whether or not the second excess flag has already been set. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S15702, and a process for specifying that the second forced termination condition of steps S15702 to S15707 will be satisfied in the future is executed. The processing of steps S15702 to S15707 is the same as the processing of steps S13201 to S13206.

If it is determined in step S15701 that the second excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S15708 to determine whether or not a predetermined correction condition is satisfied. If the correction condition is satisfied, the process for specifying that the second forced termination condition in steps S15302 to S15307 will be satisfied in the future is executed again, and the correction condition must be satisfied. If so, the remaining number management process is terminated without performing the specific process.

The above-mentioned modification conditions are, for example, when a bonus is won, when a bonus is won, when the RT state shifts to a low RT state (when shifting from the 2nd RT state or the 3rd RT state to the 1st RT state or the normal gaming state). ), When the RT state shifts from the high RT state to the low RT state, and when the RT state returns to the high RT state, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM and the number predicted before that (total increase / decrease expected number SM) When the difference between the above exceeds a predetermined number, and the like can be mentioned.

If the correction process is performed based on the bonus winning, bonus winning, or the transition of the RT state to the low RT state, the expected increase / decrease number KM will be substantially different from the one used for the prediction. The configuration is such that corrections are made based on the transition, and it is not necessary to add bonuses, the transition rate of the RT state, etc. to the prediction in advance, and the processing configuration of the prediction process (remaining number management process) can be simplified. Further, if the RT state shifts from the high RT state to the low RT state and the correction process is performed based on the return to the high RT state, the number of games staying in the low RT state can be reduced. The process of predicting in advance is omitted, and the decrease in the actual low RT state may be corrected, and the process configuration can be further simplified. Further, if the configuration is such that the correction is performed when the difference between the actual increase / decrease number and the predicted number of sheets exceeds a predetermined number, the correction is performed after the difference from the predicted number of sheets occurs, and the number of times the correction process is performed and the possibility It is possible to reduce the property and further simplify the processing.

<Modification example 20>
In this modification, a state in which a bonus is won near the end of the advantageous section will be described. First, the state just before the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 262.

FIG. 262 (a) shows a case where the bonus winning flag of the first BB or the second BB is set in the game of tj1 in which the push order notification such as the attack mode is generated, and at tj2 after tj1. It shows the case where a bonus prize occurs. In this case, by winning the bonus, the gaming states of tj1 to tj2 that are being carried over from the bonus winning will be in the normal gaming state, and the net increase in the number of cards in the normal game state will be less than the net increase in the number of cards in the attack mode. More specifically, in the games from tj1 to tj2, an increase of about −0.99 is expected per game, and the number of medals held can be reduced (see FIG. 216). Further, even in the return state from tj3 at which the bonus state ends to tj4 at which the game state returns to the second RT state, since the game state is the normal game state, the number of medals held can be reduced. When the transition to the second RT state occurs at tj4, the number of medals held will increase, and the number of medals can be expected to increase until tj5, where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes 0.

On the other hand, FIG. 262 (b) shows the case where the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached at tj6 between tj3 at which the bonus state ends and tj4 at which the bonus state returns to the second RT state. As described above, in the games from tj3 to tj4, the net increase in the number of games per game is negative, but the game is forcibly terminated at tj6 while the number of medals held is decreasing. Then, the number of medals held will increase significantly, and even though the number of games has reached the maximum number of games, it is advantageous in the state where the number of medals held is finally less than the maximum number (timing of tj3 in the figure). The section will be forcibly terminated, and the special game will result in a dent. When such an event occurs, the player's satisfaction cannot be fully satisfied, which is not preferable.

Therefore, in this modification, the setting process of the precursor mode is devised for the bonus winning near the end of the advantageous section.

FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process at the time of winning a bonus in the present embodiment. The precursor setting process at the time of bonus winning is, for example, a process performed in a situation where the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set in the lottery result handling process, and the precursor mode is set based on the bonus winning. It is a process for performing. In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the precursor mode is set through the transition lottery such as the challenge mode and the attack mode and the additional lottery in the first specific combination process to the third specific combination process will be described. Therefore, the precursor mode setting process may be performed in duplicate, but in this case, the precursor mode set in the precursor setting process at the time of winning the bonus is prioritized. Further, as already explained, the precursor mode is a mode in which a suggestion effect suggesting the winning content occurs with a relatively high probability, and a continuous effect occurs when the number of precursor games set as the precursor mode approaches 0. However, when it becomes 0, the winning content is notified. That is, in the precursor mode based on the bonus winning, a suggestion effect suggesting the bonus winning is generated, and the bonus winning notification is performed after the continuous effect.

In step S1581, it is determined whether or not the set first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag are set in the current game, that is, whether or not the game is a bonus winning game. If it is not a winning game and the bonus is being carried over, the precursor setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of a winning game, the process of acquiring the precursor table is executed in step S15802. As a precursor table, an example is shown in FIG. 35 above. More specifically, in the precursor table, 0 to 32 games are set as the precursor games, and the number of precursor games selected depending on whether or not the display mode and the attack mode at the time of winning are simultaneously won. Is different. The precursor table is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 35 above, and the game result that triggered the bonus winning (for example, even if the same 1st BB is won, the trigger is strong cherry duplication 1 or weak). Whether it is a cherry duplication 1 or a winning bonus type (for example, even if it is a duplication with the same strong cherry, it is a strong cherry duplication 1 that is a duplication with the first BB, or a duplication with the second BB. The number of precursor games selected may be set differently depending on whether it is a strong cherry duplication 2 or the like. Further, the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the presence or absence of duplication with other results (for example, whether the first BB is a single win or a strong cherry duplication 1). Further, the number of precursor games is not limited to 0 to 32 games, and a configuration in which a larger number of games can be selected may be used, or a configuration in which 0 games are always selected (so-called one-shot notification) may be used.

In the following step S15803, based on the precursor table acquired in step S15802, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode based on the current bonus winning is determined by lottery, and the determined precursor games are input to the precursor counter. ..

In step S15804, it is determined whether or not the current bonus winning is a bonus winning in the advantageous section. If it is in the advantageous section, in step S15805, it is determined whether or not the first excess flag is set among the first excess flag and the second excess flag. If the first excess flag is set and it is specified that the maximum number of games will be reached in the future, the maximum number of games will be reached during the return state after the bonus state in steps S15806 to S15810. Whether or not it is reached, that is, whether or not the situation shown in FIG. 262 (b) occurs is determined.

More specifically, in step S15806, a process of grasping the number of games (A) required up to the maximum number of games is performed from the current number of advantageous section games AG and the maximum number of games (1500). In the following step S15807, a process of grasping the number of precursor games (B) this time is performed based on the lottery result of the above step S15803. In step S15808, a process of grasping the number of games executed in the bonus state won this time (24 games in both the first BB state and the second BB state) is performed. Then, in step S15809, a process of grasping the average value (D) of the number of return games from the end of the bonus state to the occurrence of the transition to the second RT state is performed by performing the push order notification. In this slot machine 10, the average number of games until the push order bell is missed in the normal game state and the transition to the first RT state occurs is about 11 games, and the first promotion replay is won in the first RT state. The average number of games until the transition to the second RT state occurs is about 8 games, and the average value (D) of the number of return games is about 19 games. After that, in step S15810, the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games determines whether or not the maximum number of games is reached during the return state after the bonus state is the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state. It is determined whether or not it is more than the sum of (C) and less than the sum of the number of precursor games (B), the number of games in the bonus state (C), and the average value of the number of returning games (D). To do.

As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the case where the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games is less than the sum of the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C) is a precursor. When the maximum number of games is reached during the mode or bonus state, the number of games (A) required to reach the maximum number of games is the average of the number of precursor games (B), the number of games in the bonus state (C), and the number of returning games. The case where the value (D) is larger than the total is the case where the maximum number of games is reached after returning to the second RT state after the end of the bonus state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S15810, in step S15811, a process of grasping the number of games (E) from the end of the bonus state to the arrival of the upper limit number of games is executed. Such processing is calculated by subtracting the number of precursor games (B) and the number of games in the bonus state (C) from the number of games (A) required up to the maximum number of games. Then, in step S15812, the number of games (E) calculated in step S15811 is used as the number of adjusted games, and the number of adjusted games is added to the number of precursor games determined in step S1583 to add the number of precursor games this time. Execute the process to be. More specifically, the process of adding the calculated number of adjusted games (E) to the precursor counter is performed.

After executing the process of step S15812, the process of setting the precursor command including the information of the number of precursor games of this time as the output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S15813, and then the present precursor setting process is completed. To do. In this case, the precursor mode is performed over the number of games to which the above-mentioned number of adjusted games (E) is added, and after the amount of the number of adjusted games (E) is exhausted, the bonus winning notification is performed. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S15804 and the bonus is not won in the advantageous section, or if the first excess flag is not set in step S15805, the maximum number of games being returned in step S15810 is further increased. If it is determined that the number does not reach, the process proceeds to step S15813 as it is, and a precursor command including information on the number of precursor games (the number of precursor games drawn in step S15803) in the state where the number of adjustment games in step S15812 is not added. Is performed as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the precursor setting process is terminated.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 264, the number of precursor games when the bonus is won in the game of tk1 in the advantageous section is the number of games up to tk3 in addition to the original number of games (B) up to tk2. The one to which (E) is added is set. As a result, if the notification in the precursor mode is followed, the bonus state will be digested from tk3 to tk5, and will be forcibly terminated at tk5. That is, before the adjustment, the medals held at tk4 reach the maximum value, and then the medals held are reduced to tk5 and then forcibly terminated, but after the adjustment, the medals held are forcibly terminated at the maximum value. , It will be forcibly terminated when the player's satisfaction reaches the climax.

In particular, even if the number of adjusted games is added as described above, the number of games in the precursor mode and the return state does not change, so the maximum value of medals held at the time of forced termination does not change. By doing so, it is possible to make a big difference in the impression given to the player at the time of forced termination without making a big difference in the advantage for the player.

By the way, by setting the bonus winning flag, the game state shifts from the high RT state (2nd RT state and 3rd RT state) to the low RT state (here, the normal game state), and the replay probability is greatly increased. It will be lower, and reach eyes based on bonus winning may appear. That is, the player can detect the bonus winning at a timing before the bonus winning notification is performed, and as described above, the medals held can be reduced in the low RT state. Therefore, if you detect the winning of the bonus and get the bonus prize as soon as possible, the decrease of the medals you have will be suppressed. For example, in FIG. 264, if a bonus is won promptly after winning a bonus at tk1, it is conceivable that the maximum number of games will be reached after returning to the high RT state after the bonus state. More specifically, from winning the bonus at tk1 to digesting the game obtained by subtracting the number of adjusted games (E) from the average value (D) of the number of returning games, a bonus prize is awarded to reach a high RT state. After returning, the maximum number of games will be reached. As for the change in the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game during this period, the later the bonus winning, the smaller the increase after returning to the high RT state, and the larger the decrease until the bonus winning, so the bonus is won. Occasionally, the total number of medals when a prize is won is the largest, and the total number of medals when a game obtained by subtracting the number of adjustment games (E) from the average value (D) of the number of return games is digested and the total number of medals is the smallest. That is, depending on the skill of the player (the number of games required from the detection of the bonus to the winning of the bonus is large and small), the maximum value of the medals held at the time of forced termination may be larger than that of tk5 in FIG. 264. In this way, by leaving room for technical intervention, it is possible to stimulate the player's willingness to play and encourage active participation in the game.

On the other hand, after digesting the game in which the number of adjusted games (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of return games, the later the bonus winning, the greater the number of reductions until the bonus winning, and the higher RT state is reached. Since no return is expected, the change in the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game is that the later the bonus winning, the smaller the total number of medals, and the amount of decrease is from the average value (D) of the number of returning games from the bonus winning. It is larger than the reduction amount up to the game obtained by subtracting the number of adjusted games (E). In other words, if the bonus is won by the game in which the number of adjusted games (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of returned games from the bonus winning, the number of adjusted games (D) from the average number of returned games (D) It can be said that the effect of reducing the decrease in the number of medals held is higher than when the bonus prize is awarded after the game in which E) is subtracted. The time when the game in which the number of adjusted games (E) is subtracted from the average value (D) of the number of returned games from the bonus winning is also referred to as the first turning point.

Then, after the number of precursor games (B) before the addition of the number of adjustment games (E) is exhausted from the bonus winning, the total number of medals when reaching the upper limit game is until the number of adjustment games (E) is exhausted. As mentioned above, is hard to change. In other words, after the number of precursor games (B) has been exhausted from the bonus winning, even if the bonus is won at an early stage, there is no effect of reducing the decrease in the number of medals held. The time when the number of precursor games (B) before the addition of the number of adjusted games (E) is exhausted from the winning of the bonus is also referred to as a second turning point.

In this case, the effect mode of the precursor effect such as the suggestion effect of whether or not the bonus is won in the precursor mode may be changed based on each of the above branch points. For example, from the time when the bonus is won, at the first branch point, a suggestion effect that a continuous effect (FIG. 60) may occur is generated (precursor effect is the first mode), and the first branch point. From to the second branch point, we notify that continuous production will occur and explain the conditions that will be the winning contents in the continuous production (explaining the number of stages of Daruma doll dropping, etc.) (precursor production is the second mode). ), A continuous effect is generated after the second branch point (the precursor effect is the third mode). By doing so, the player who senses that there is a possibility that a continuous effect may occur due to the effect up to the first branch point, wants to confirm, for example, whether or not a bonus has been won by the first branch point. The player who stopped the operation aiming at the symbol of the above and clearly recognized that the continuous effect is generated by the effect after the first branch point, for example, in order to establish a bonus prize by the second branch point. It is considered that the stop operation is performed aiming at the bonus-corresponding symbol, and after the second turning point, the whereabouts of the production (continuous production) are enjoyed rather than the early bonus winning. In other words, the game of aiming for a bonus prize from the bonus winning to the first branch point and the second branch point, and the game of enjoying the production rather than the early bonus prize after the second branch point. Sex is realized. In this way, by setting the production mode of the precursor mode in relation to the skill of the player and the final number of medals won, it is possible to provide an unprecedentedly interesting playability.

<Modification 21>
In this modification, the relationship between the bonus winning just before the end of the advantageous section and the bonus winning just before the end of the challenge mode with the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described. FIG. 265 is a diagram showing a state of winning a specific combination in the challenge mode, and FIG. 265 (a) shows a case where the winning specific combination is an overlapping combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry duplication 1. FIG. 265 (b) shows a case where the winning specific combination is not a duplicate combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry. As already described, the challenge mode is a mode in which the probability of winning the attack mode or the like is higher than that in the normal mode, and is also called a so-called chance zone (CZ). Then, if the challenge mode does not win the transition lottery to the attack mode during the predetermined number of games, the challenge mode ends.

FIG. 265 (a) shows a case where the challenge mode is started at tm1 and the specific combination is won in the game of tm2 before the tm3 at which the challenge mode ends. As described above, the challenge mode is included in the advantageous section, and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is started at the time of winning the specific combination (tm1) that triggers the transition to the challenge mode.

As described above, the specific winning combination in the tm2 is, for example, an overlapping combination with a bonus such as a strong cherry duplication 1, and here, it is assumed that the attack mode transition lottery based on the strong cherry duplication 1 winning is won. To do. Then, the precursor mode is set based on the bonus winning and the attack mode winning. For example, when the precursor mode or continuous effect set in tm2 starts from tm2 and continues until tm4 after tm3, which is the end game of the challenge mode, a bonus winning or attack is performed in the tm4 game. Winning notification of mode winning is performed. Then, the bonus state is entered at tm4, and the attack mode is set after tm5 when the bonus state ends.

In this case, although the challenge mode ends at tm3 as described above, since the attack mode winning flag is set, the section display end process is not performed in the section display second process. That is, the display of the section indicator started at tm1 does not end at tm3, and continues after tm5.

On the other hand, in FIG. 265 (b), although the specific role was won in tm2 in the challenge mode, the specific role was not a duplicate of the bonus and was won in the lottery for transition to the attack mode. Absent. However, a pseudo precursor mode may be set even when the specific combination of tm2 in FIG. 265 (b) is triggered (FIG. 53). For example, the precursor mode or continuous effect set in tm2 is the relevant. If the game starts from tm2 and continues to tm4 after tm3, which is the end game of the challenge mode, the non-winning of the bonus or the non-winning of the attack mode is notified in the game of the tm4 (winning notification is performed). I won't).

In this case, also in FIG. 265 (b), although the challenge mode ends at tm3, the attack mode winning flag is not set. Therefore, in the second section display process, the section indicator is displayed at tm3. Termination processing is performed. That is, in the continuous effect starting from tm2, the section display is displayed up to tm3, but tm3 to tm4 are not displayed. In other words, as compared with that of FIG. 265 (a), in FIG. 265 (b), since the display of the section indicator is terminated at the end of the challenge mode of tm3, the end of the continuous production (tm4). Without waiting, it becomes clear that the lottery for tm2 was not won. Then, not only will it turn out to be non-winning, but the humorousness of the continuous production being performed will stand out, and there is a possibility that the attention to the production, including other productions, will be greatly reduced. ..

FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the challenge mode in this modified example. Here, the overlapping target combination is a duplication result such as a strong cherry duplication 1, 2 or a weak cherry duplication 1, 2 which is a duplication winning with the first BB or the second BB, and the duplication result overlaps with the first BB or the second BB. This is a result including non-overlapping results that are won (strong cherries are non-overlapping results when strong cherries 1 and 2 are duplicated results, and weak cherries are non-overlapping results when weak cherries 1 and 2 are duplicated results). The precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the challenge mode is, for example, a process executed when the above-mentioned duplicate target combination is won in the lottery result handling process in the challenge mode, regardless of whether or not the bonus is won. This is a process for setting the precursor mode. That is, it is a process of setting both the precursor mode based on the above-mentioned bonus winning and the pseudo precursor mode based on the non-winning of the bonus. As in the case of the above modification 20, the processing for setting various precursor modes of the first specific combination processing to the third specific combination processing and the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the challenge mode overlap. However, the precursor mode set in the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the challenge mode is prioritized.

In step S15901, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the above-mentioned duplicate target combination. If it is not a duplicate target combination, the present precursor setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a duplicate target combination, the process of acquiring the precursor table is executed in step S15902, and the lottery process of the number of precursor games is executed in step S15903. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S15802 and step S15803. The number of precursor games set in the precursor table is also as described above, and the number of precursor games selected depends on the game result and the like.

In the following step S15904, it is determined whether or not the duplicate target combination this time is the result of duplication with the first BB and the second BB. In the case of overlapping results with the first BB and the second BB, in step S15905, information on the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 and information on winning the bonus (this precursor mode is the bonus winning). After setting the precursor command including the precursor mode for performing the notification) as the output target to the display control device 81, the precursor setting process is terminated.

In step S15904, if the duplicate target combination this time is not a duplicate result with the first BB or the second BB but a non-overlapping result, the process proceeds to step S15906. In step S15906, the number of remaining games in the current challenge mode is compared with the number of precursor games determined in step S15903, and it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is larger than the number of precursor games in the challenge mode. To do. That is, the process of step S15906 is a process of determining whether or not the game in which the result of the precursor mode of this time is notified (the game in which the precursor counter becomes 0 and the winning notification or the non-winning notification is performed) is in the challenge mode. .. If the result notification is in the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S15905, and the information on the number of precursor games determined in step S15903 and the information that the bonus is not won (this precursor mode is the bonus non-winning notification). The precursor command including the information that the precursor mode for performing the above is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the precursor setting process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S15906 that the result notification of the precursor mode is performed after the challenge mode, in step S15907, the number of remaining games in the challenge mode is subtracted from the number of precursor games to calculate the number of these difference games. I do. Then, in step S15908, a process of adding the number of difference games calculated in step S15907 to the number of continuous challenge modes is executed. By this process, the challenge mode is extended by the number of the difference games.

In the following step S15909, a process of setting the additional CM pseudo-end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the CM pseudo-end command for the added amount is controlled so as not to perform the effect in the challenge mode for the added amount in step S15908. That is, the above-mentioned additional CM pseudo-end command substantially extends the number of games in the challenge mode, but makes it difficult or impossible to grasp that the challenge mode has been extended in appearance. It is a command to do.

In this modified example, when the continuous effect is performed during the challenge mode, whether or not the challenge mode is in the challenge mode can be grasped from the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 (for example, together with the display content in the continuous effect). , The display that the challenge mode is in progress is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65), and the above-mentioned addition CM pseudo-end command can grasp whether or not the challenge mode is in the continuous production. It can be said that it is a command to prevent the display. On the other hand, when continuous production is performed during the challenge mode, whether or not the challenge mode is in progress cannot be grasped from the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 (in the above example, during the continuous production, the challenge mode is in progress). If the configuration is such that the above-mentioned addition CM pseudo-end command is not performed), it is possible to omit the additional CM pseudo-end command.

Further, the additional CM pseudo-end command may be configured such that information to that effect is transmitted to the display control device 81, and for example, the information to that effect is set in the precursor command.

In the following step S15910, when the number of difference games is extended, the process for not generating the additional notification is executed so that the additional notification does not occur. In step S15910, for example, a process of adding a non-occurrence flag to the various flag storage areas 106d is performed. The addition non-occurrence flag is, for example, a process for preventing the process for additional notification in the challenge mode from being performed with respect to the extension of step S15908 in the first specific combination process. More specifically, although the additional notification based on the extension of step S15908 is not generated, the generation of the additional notification based on another opportunity (such as when a specific combination is won in another game) is allowed.

After executing the process of step S15910, the process proceeds to step S15905, the information on the number of precursor games obtained by adding the number of difference games in step S15908 to the number of precursor games determined in step S15903, and the above bonus non-winning. After setting the precursor command including the information (information that the precursor mode this time is the precursor mode for performing the bonus non-winning notification) as the output target to the display control device 81, this precursor setting process is performed. finish.

As a result of the above processing, as shown in FIG. 267, in the challenge mode started from tn1, when the duplicate target combination winning, which is a non-overlapping result in tn2, is won, it normally ends in tn3. The challenge mode that was supposed to be is extended to tn4 after that. In this case, the precursor mode and the continuous effect set in tn2 are executed up to tn4, and the section indicator whose display is started from tn1 also continues the display until tn4. As a result, it is possible to avoid an event in which the result of the continuous effect is completely understood depending on the presence or absence of the display of the section display, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the effect in the challenge mode.

Here, in order to avoid the event that the result of the continuous production becomes clear depending on whether or not the section indicator continues to display, in addition to the configuration of extending the challenge mode (advantageous section) as described above, a challenge Although the mode (advantageous section) ends, it is conceivable that only the display of the section indicator is continued. However, with such a configuration, even though the advantageous section is clearly indicated by the section display, its significance is neglected, and the credibility of the display on the section display itself deteriorates. It is possible that it will end up. On the other hand, by extending the challenge mode itself as in the above configuration, the effect of continuous production can be preferably expected while ensuring the relationship between the advantageous section and the section display. It becomes possible to.

As described above, since the CM pseudo-end command for the addition is output, of the tn2 to tn4 in which the continuous effect is performed, the tn2 to tn3 are displayed in the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the continuous effect in the challenge mode. The indication that it is in the middle is made, and the indication that it is in the challenge mode is not displayed for tn3 to tn4. By doing so, when the duplicate result is won as the duplicate target combination, the effect mode up to tm4 and the effect mode up to tun4 are the same from the viewpoint of displaying whether or not the challenge mode is in effect, and the display thereof is obtained. Therefore, it becomes impossible to judge the result of this precursor mode (continuous production). As a result, the effect of continuous production is further enhanced.

By preventing the additional notification from occurring when extending the challenge mode, the player will be informed that the additional notification was secretly extended in accordance with the continuous production, and the event of being ruined will be avoided. be able to.

In the above configuration, whether or not the challenge mode extension process is performed differs depending on whether the overlapping result with the first BB, the overlapping result with the second BB, or the non-overlapping result is the duplicate target combination. As a result, even if the result is duplicated, the winning to the attack mode etc. is not confirmed. For example, if the result is duplicated with the first BB, the attack mode is simultaneously won, while if the result is duplicated with the second BB, the attack mode is set. Events such as not winning at the same time may occur. Then, in step S15904, even if an affirmative determination is made as a result of overlapping with the bonus and the challenge mode extension process is not performed, the display of the section indicator may end at the end of the challenge mode. .. That is, even if the display of the section display ends during the continuous production, the winning notification may be performed as a result of the precursor mode or the continuous production. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the phenomenon that even if the display of the section display is completed, there is no expectation at all, and it is possible to further enjoy the continuous production.

<Modification 22>
In this modification, in the above modification 21, the advantage of the challenge mode to be extended when the precursor mode is set based on the non-overlapping result winning is different. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing a precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the challenge mode in this modified example.

In this modification, the process is almost the same as the precursor setting process of the modification 21, and the difference is that in step S16007, the number of difference games is calculated by subtracting the number of remaining games in the challenge mode from the number of precursor games. After that, instead of adding the difference game number to the challenge mode continuation number in step S1608, the difference game number is added to the continuation number of the second challenge mode different from the current challenge mode.

The second challenge mode is a challenge mode set to be less advantageous to the player than the normal challenge mode (also referred to as the "first challenge mode" for comparison in the following description). is there. More specifically, the winning probability of the attack mode is set to be lower in the second challenge mode than in the first challenge mode (see FIG. 269 (b)).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269 (a), when the duplicate target combination is won in tо2 in the first challenge mode started in tо1 and the duplicate target combination is not a bonus, as described above. In step S1608, the extension process of the second challenge mode is performed.

As a result, when the first challenge mode ends at tо3, the mode shifts to the second challenge mode in succession, and the second challenge mode continues until tо4 where the continuous production starting from tо2 ends. In this case, although the second challenge mode of tо3 to tо4 is an advantageous section, the advantage for the player is set lower than that of the first challenge mode, and the advantage of the player is unreasonably set due to the convenience of production. It is possible to avoid an event in which the result of the continuous effect becomes clear depending on whether or not the display of the section display is continued while suppressing the height from becoming too high.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 269 (b), in the second challenge mode, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode is higher than that of the outpatient mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the attack mode from the first challenge mode is high. Although it is set to be low, in reality, the winning probability of the attack mode transition lottery in the second challenge mode is set to be almost the same as or about the same as that in the normal mode. By doing so, it is possible to process the second challenge mode as an advantageous section, and even if the second challenge mode is added due to the relationship of production, it is almost advantageous compared to the case where it is not added. It is possible to prevent changes from occurring.

<Modification example 23>
In this modification, the lighting start condition of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is changed. That is, in each of the above embodiments and modifications, basically, the game that wins the transition lottery to the advantageous section is set as the start game, and the lighting process is performed at the timing until the next game of the start game can be played. Was configured to be performed. That is, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won depending on whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is lit. However, in such a configuration, as shown in the above-mentioned modification 21 and the like, even in the lottery during the advantageous section, the result of the effect executed depending on whether or not the display of the section indicator is continued is clearly understood. Inconveniences such as this may occur, and similar inconveniences may occur in the lottery for transition to an advantageous section depending on whether or not the section indicator starts displaying.

Therefore, in this modification, the display start timing of the section display is set to a situation in which push order notification can occur in the advantageous section and the net increase number is positive (SIM ball output rate is larger than 1). It is assumed that the start condition is satisfied. In this case, in the above configuration, basically, the above start condition is satisfied in the game in which the attack mode start effect is performed (the game in which the attack mode is started) (see FIG. 51). More specifically, the attack mode winning notification sets the attack notification flag to generate various push order notifications (FIGS. 36 and 38), and the net increase in the number of sheets becomes positive by shifting to the second RT state (FIG. 36 and 38). 216), the attack mode is started, and the display start condition of the above section indicator is satisfied. That is, even if the challenge mode is won and the advantageous section is started, the display of the section indicator is not started.

In addition, for example, when a bonus such as 1st BB and an attack mode are won at the same time, the net increase in the number of cards is increased by the bonus winning, but the slot machine 10 is configured so that the push order notification during the bonus state does not occur. Therefore, the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied after the push order notification is generated at the end of the bonus (after the attack mode winning notification is performed). Also, even if the lottery to shift to the attack mode is won in the bonus state, the push order notification will occur because the net increase is positive during the bonus state, but the push order notification cannot occur. At the end of the bonus to be obtained, the display start condition of the section display is satisfied.

That is, the situation where the push order notification can occur is the first start condition, the situation where the net increase in the number of sheets is positive is the second start condition, and after the transition to the advantageous section, the first start condition and the second start Based on the condition that the condition is satisfied, the display of the section indicator is started. Then, in this modification, the first start condition and the second start condition do not have to be satisfied at the same time (in the same game), and after the first start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied. The display of the section indicator may be started when the start condition is satisfied, or the display of the section indicator may be started when the first start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied. Have a good configuration. By doing so, the degree of freedom of the display start game of the section display is greatly improved, and the configuration can be greatly useful for eliminating the above-mentioned inconvenience in the production.

Then, in the bonus winning in the challenge mode, the display of the section display is not started during the challenge mode as described above, and the display of the section display is not started even when the bonus is won. The inconvenience in the production shown in the above will not occur.

However, if the display start timing (start game) of the section display is different from the start timing (start game) of the advantageous section, the following inconveniences may occur.

For example, as shown in FIG. 270 (a), it is assumed that the advantageous section is started by winning the challenge mode at tp1 and then the attack mode is started at tp2, so that the section display is displayed. When started, it is possible to continue the advantageous section up to tp3 where any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied. In this case, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the section in which the medal increase can be expected substantially by the push order notification (substantial increase section) is from tp2 to tp3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 270 (b), even if the transition of the advantageous section is the same as in FIG. 270 (a) at tp1, tp2 at which the attack mode is started after the transition to the advantageous section is shown in FIG. 270 (a). ) Is slower than the case. Then, in the advantageous section from tp1 to tp3, the substantially increase section from tp2 to tb3, which is the section in which the medal increase can be substantially expected by the push order notification, is shorter than that in FIG. 270 (a). That is, the length of the substantially increased section differs depending on the length of the section from tp1 to tp2, and even if the attack mode is started at tp2, in FIGS. 270 (a) and 270 (b), The player's advantage will be potentially different.

FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the first section display processing in this modification.

That is, in step S16101, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. If it is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S16102 to perform a process for determining whether or not the section is in an advantageous section. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the transition to the advantageous section has been established or the transition has already been made. If it is not in the advantageous section, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S16103.

In step S16103, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number AG is being measured, thereby determining whether or not the advantageous section has already been started. If it is before the start of measurement of the number of advantageous section games AG, the start processing of the advantageous section is performed in steps S16104 to S16106.

That is, in step S16104, a process of starting the measurement of the advantageous section game number AG is performed. Then, in step S16105, a process of starting the measurement of the number of pre-start games MG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The number of games MG before the start is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games before the start of the display of the section display after the transition to the advantageous section, and corresponds to the number of games from tp1 to tp2 in FIG. 270. After that, in step S16106, the output start processing of the winning signal is performed. The winning signal is a kind of output signal that outputs externally from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to a hall computer, a hall data device, or the like. The LOW state and the HI state are set as the output state of the winning signal, and the hall computer and the data device can specify the switching and the state of the winning signal. In step S16106, by switching the winning signal from the LOW state to the HI state, the hall computer or the data device is made to specify that the advantageous section has been started.

If it is determined in step S16103 that the start processing of the advantageous section has already been executed, or after the start processing is executed in step S16106, the process proceeds to step S16107. In step S16107, it is determined whether or not the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied. More specifically, the attack notification flag is set as the first start condition in which push order notification can occur, and the second start condition is a situation in which the net increase in the number of sheets is positive, that is, When the transition to the second RT state occurs or the transition to the bonus state occurs, it is determined that the above display start condition is satisfied. If the display start condition is not satisfied, the section display first process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the display start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S16108, and the section display start processing is performed in steps S16108 to S16110.

That is, in step S16108, as the display start processing of the section display, the lighting processing of the eighth display segment N8 is performed. In the following step S16109, a process of changing the prediction condition of the remaining number management process is performed. More specifically, in the calculation process of the total expected increase / decrease number SM (prediction process, step S13202, step S13023), the expected increase / decrease number KM, which is the basis for the calculation process, is changed to a value different from the values up to that point. In this case, the expected increase / decrease number KM before the start of the display of the section display is set to the net increase number (about -1.05 or about -0.44, see FIG. 216) in the low RT state, and the display of the section display is started. Based on this, the expected increase / decrease number KM is set as the net increase number in the high RT state, and the prediction process is performed. In this way, by reflecting the subtraction amount of the prior section in the predicted number of sheets (total expected increase number of sheets SM), it is possible to calculate the predicted number of sheets more accurately.

In the following step S16110, the output stop processing of the winning signal is performed. More specifically, by switching the output state of the winning signal from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the hall computer or the data device is made to specify that the display of the section display is started after the start of the advantageous section. Then, in step S16111, the display signal output process is performed, and then the first section display process is terminated. Similar to the winning signal, the display signal is a kind of output signal that outputs externally from an external terminal connected to the main control device 101 to a hall computer, a hall data device, or the like. A LOW state and a HI state are set as the output state of the display signal, and the hall computer and the data device can specify the switching and the state of the display signal. In step S16111, by switching the display signal from the LOW state to the HI state, the display of the section display is started, and the hall computer or the data device is made to specify that the above-mentioned substantially increasing section is started.

If it is determined in step S16101 that the section display is being displayed, the display continuation process is performed in step S16112, and then the section display first process is terminated.

Next, the second section display process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 272.

In step S16201, it is determined whether or not the section is in the advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, the second section display process is terminated as it is. If it is in the advantageous section, the addition process of the advantageous section game number AG is executed in step S16202. In the following step S16203, the update process of the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is executed. These processes have already been described.

In step S16204, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed. The case where the negative determination is made in step S16204 is the situation before the display start of the section indicator even during the advantageous section. In this case, the addition process of the number of games MG before the start is executed in step S16205. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games MG before the start is executed in accordance with the digestion of the current game. In the following step S16206, a process of setting the pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The pre-start game number command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the above-mentioned pre-start game number MG information. The display control device 81 that has received the pre-start game number command is the auxiliary display unit 65. The pre-start game number notification corresponding to the value of the pre-start game number MG is executed in a predetermined area (for example, the upper right corner) or a display unit different from the auxiliary display unit 65.

When it is determined in step S16204 that the section display is being displayed, or after the pre-start game number command setting process is performed in step S16206, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S16207, and the step The remaining number management process is executed in S16208. The remaining game number management process and the remaining number management process are also as described above.

In step S16209, it is determined whether or not any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied. If any of the forced termination conditions is satisfied, the initialization process of the number of games before the start MG, the number of advantageous section games AG, and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is executed in step S16210, and in step S16211. Determine if the section indicator is displaying. If it is being displayed, the section display end processing is executed in step S16212. Specifically, a process for turning off the eighth display segment N8 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1621, or after the process of step S16212 is executed, the data initialization process is executed in step S16213. After that, in step S16214, the output stop processing of the above display signal is executed, and then the second section display processing is terminated. More specifically, step S16214 executes a process of switching the output mode of the display signal from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

If it is determined in step S16209 that the forced termination condition is not satisfied, the presence or absence of the winning flag of each mode corresponding to the advantageous section is determined in step S16215, and if it is not set, it is advantageous in step S16216. The presence / absence of each mode flag corresponding to the section is determined, and if the corresponding mode flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S16210 to execute the end processing of the advantageous section. These processes are as described above.

The state in which the winning signal and the start signal are output and the display example of the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG. 273.

As shown in FIG. 273 (a), when the advantageous section is started at tq1, the output mode of the winning signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. As a result, the hall computer and the data device can grasp the transition to the advantageous section. When the attack mode is started at tq2, the display start processing of the section display is performed assuming that the display start condition of the section display is satisfied. In this case, the player can grasp that the transition to the substantially increasing section has been performed based on the eighth display segment N8. Further, in this case, the output mode of the winning signal and the output mode of the display signal are switched. More specifically, in tq2, the winning signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Further, at tq2, the display signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

The display of the section display and the output of the display signal as the HI signal continue until tq3 at which the advantageous section ends, the display of the section display ends at tq3, and the display signal is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. ..

In the pre-section after the start of the advantageous section from tq1 to tq2 and before the start of the section display display, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays (starts) the number of pre-section games as shown in FIG. 273 (b). The pre-start game number notification corresponding to the value of the previous game number MG) is performed, and the number of advantageous section games corresponding to the advantageous section game number AG is displayed. Further, in the target section as a substantially increasing section after the start of the section display display of tq2 to tq3, for example, in the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 273 (c), the display of the number of games in the preliminary section is advantageous. Along with the display of the number of section games, the number of target section games is displayed (the number of continuous attack modes is displayed).

In this way, by shifting the display start timing of the section indicator from the start timing of the advantageous section, the effect of the transition lottery to the advantageous section and the transition lottery to the substantially increasing section is enhanced, and before the display start of the section indicator is started. In, the player can grasp the number of games in the advantageous section, and can play the game after understanding the degree of advantage in the actual increase section when shifting to the real increase section. As a result, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game while enhancing the effect of the game production.

Here, the display of the number of games in the preliminary section, the display of the number of games in the target section, and the display of the number of games in the advantageous section are managed by the display control device 81 on the sub side. It is also possible to hide the display of the number of games or display the number of games differently from the corresponding section as one effect. That is, for example, in the challenge mode, when a continuous effect occurs in a situation where the number of pre-section games is displayed, the display of the number of pre-section games can be hidden. Even during the continuous production, the display of the number of games in the pre-section is continued, and even if the challenge mode ends (even if the pre-section ends), the number of games in the pre-section may continue to be displayed until the end of the continuous production. It is possible. This makes it possible to grasp the potential advantage of the advantageous section by displaying the number of games in the preliminary section while ensuring the credibility of the advantageous section by the section display, and further, in relation to other effects, on the display. It is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom.

In addition, since the winning signal is output externally in the preliminary section and the display signal is output externally in the target section, the manager of the game hall is advantageous even if the display of the section display is not started. It is possible to clearly distinguish between a game table that has shifted to a section and a game table that has not, and it is also possible to grasp the degree of remaining advantage of a substantially increased section after the start of display on the section display. As a result, for example, it is possible to use it as a material for determining whether or not there is a reset process when the hall is opened / closed, and when a large amount of medals are paid out at a predetermined game table even during business hours. In addition, it can also be used as a judgment material when identifying whether or not it is a fraudulent act.

<Modification 24>
In this modification, the difference in the advantage of the substantially increased section (target section) depending on the game situation of the preceding section will be described in the above modification 23.

FIG. 274 (a) shows a case where the advantageous section is started at tr1 and the display of the section indicator is started at tr2. As described above, in the present embodiment, a first forced termination condition for reaching the upper limit number of games and a second forced termination condition for reaching the upper limit increase number of medals are set as the forced termination condition for the advantageous section. In this case, the first forced termination condition is defined by the advantageous section game number AG counted from tr1, and the first forced termination condition is satisfied at tr4 when the advantageous section game number AG reaches the upper limit number of games. .. On the other hand, the second forced termination condition is defined by the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM counted from tr1, but the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is basically negative until the actual increase section of tr2 is started. It becomes.

That is, the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is not the number of increase from tr2 at which the substantial increase section is started, but the second forced termination condition is satisfied when the number of increase from tr1 reaches the upper limit increase number. The decrease number (α sheets) from r1 to tr2 is added to the upper limit increase number for the increase number from the start of the substantial increase section in tr2 until the upper limit increase number is reached.

Then, for example, in FIG. 274 (b), the start game (tr1) of the advantageous section is the same as in the case of FIG. 274 (a), but the start game (tr2) of the substantially increased section is shown in FIG. It is shown that the case of 274 (b) is slower, and the decrease in medals from tr1 to tr2 is larger in β in FIG. 274 (b) than in α in FIG. 274 (a). That is, in the case of FIG. 274 (b), the number of games from the start of the advantageous section to the start of the real increase section is larger, but the number of medals increased from the start of the real increase section to the arrival of the upper limit increase number. Is more in the case of FIG. 274 (b) than in the case of FIG. 274 (a), and the advantage at the time when the substantial increase section is disclosed is that in FIG. 274 (b), the player is more advantageous. (2400 + α <2400 + β).

However, as described above, even in the actual increase section, when the upper limit number of games, which is the first forced termination condition, is reached, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated before the upper limit increase number is reached. Then, the later the start of the actual increase section, the greater the number of medals increased until the upper limit increase number is reached, and there is a branch point (third branch point) of the reaching limit that makes it possible to reach the upper limit increase number. ..

The branch point of the reaching limit is the number of games in the pre-section, the net increase in the number of games in the pre-section (about -1.05), and the maximum number of games in the actual increase section calculated from the maximum number of games in the advantageous section (1500). It is the number of games in the preliminary section when the total of the net increase number of the actual increase section (about +2.46) and the upper limit increase number (2400) is reached, and in the present embodiment, it is 367 games. In this case, the number of medals reduced when the advance section has completed 367 games is about 385, and the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section is the upper limit increase number of about 385. The total number is about 2785, including 2400.

In other words, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section gradually increases until the number of games that is the turning point of the reaching limit is exhausted in the advance section. On the other hand, after the number of games, which is the turning point of the reaching limit, is exhausted, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section gradually decreases.

FIG. 275 (a) shows a part of the flowchart of the section display second process in this modified example.

Steps S16301 to S16303 are the same as the processes of steps S16201 to S16203, and update the advantageous section game number AG and the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM on condition that the advantageous section is in progress. Then, in step S16304, it is determined whether or not the section indicator is being displayed, and whether or not it is the above-mentioned prior section is grasped. If it is a preliminary section, the update process of the number of games MG before the start is performed in step S16305. Then, in step S16306, it is determined whether or not the number of games MG before the start has reached the branch point of the above-mentioned reaching limit.

If the branch point of the arrival limit has not been reached, in step S16307, a process of setting the first pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. In this case, similarly to the pre-start game number command, the display control device 81 displays the number of games in the preliminary section, and the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section gradually increases. As a notification to the effect that the situation is occurring, for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Expected number of sheets is increasing!".

When the branch point of the arrival limit has been reached, in step S16308, a process of setting the second pre-start game number command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. Then, in step S16309, the transition process to the second challenge mode is performed. As shown in FIG. 275 (b), the second challenge mode in this modified example has an improved probability of winning the transition lottery to the attack mode as compared with the first challenge mode (challenge mode before the transition processing in step S16309). It is set as a mode. In other words, if the branch point of the reach limit is exceeded, the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the real increase section will decrease, but the transition rate to the real increase section (attack mode) will be higher than before. It has a structure of. The display control device 81 that has received the second pre-start game number command displays the number of games in the preliminary section, and instead of gradually reducing the maximum number of medals that can be increased when shifting to the actual increase section. As a notification that the transition rate to the actual increase section is improving, for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "The winning probability is increasing!". Do.

As described above, if the advance section becomes longer, the medals will decrease by the time the transition to the real increase section occurs, so the advantage may be lower in the entire advantageous section, but as described above, to the real increase section. The maximum number of medals that can be increased after the transition of is possible as the pre-section becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the continuation of the game without giving up the game even if the lottery for the transition to the real increase section is not won (it is difficult to shift to the real increase section).

On the other hand, if the advance section becomes too long, the upper limit increase number cannot be reached in the actual increase section due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games. In this case, as described above, by making the winning probability of the transition lottery to the real increase section higher than before, it is possible to shift to the real increase section relatively easily, so that the upper limit increase number is not reached. However, it is also possible to complete the substantial increase section without giving up.

In this way, in consideration of the event that the game status of the pre-section after the start of the advantageous section and before the start of the display of the section indicator affects the advantage in the substantially increased section after the start of the display of the section indicator. By incorporating it into the playability, it becomes possible to create a novel playability that has never been seen before.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that each of the above-described embodiments and modifications is not limited to the description thereof, and all or part of the various configurations shown in the embodiments, the modifications, the other embodiments, and the modifications is optional. It is also possible to combine with. Further, the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or wholly combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. In these cases, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be individually applied to a new configuration composed of a combination of each embodiment or each modification, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) As an advantageous section, an attack mode in which the frequency of push order notification is higher than in the normal mode, a challenge mode in which the probability of winning a lottery to shift to the attack mode is higher than in the normal mode, and a supermarket including an additional special zone The configuration includes an attack mode, a VB mode, and a mode in which each of these modes is won and before the transition, but at least if the mode includes a mode in which the function related to push order notification is improved compared to the normal mode, the above-mentioned ones. Not limited to. For example, the challenge mode may not be set.

(2) Although the VB mode as a pseudo bonus is configured to be able to shift only during the attack mode, it may be configured to be transitionable even from the normal mode. In this case, when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won, the winning game is set as the start game, and the display of the section display is started at a timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. And it is sufficient. Further, in this case, when the first BB and the second BB are simultaneously won in the VBB mode, the game in which the first BB and the second BB are won may be set as the start game.

(3) Transition to advantageous section As a specific role that triggers a lottery or an additional lottery, a small role with medal payout such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc., and a prize with these strong cherries, etc. Although the specific re-games having a common aspect and the overlapping combinations of these small wins and the specific re-games with the bonus have been described as examples, the results that trigger the lottery are not limited to these results. For example, it may be configured to perform a single role of a predetermined bonus, or a lottery to shift to an advantageous section even in a normal replay. In addition, a transition lottery or the like may be performed based on the number of digested games, the cumulative number of points separately given based on each result, and the like. In any case, it suffices that the trigger for the transition lottery to the advantageous section does not cause a difference in the winning probability and the frequency of occurrence depending on the set value.

(4) The winning mode of the game result of performing the transition lottery to the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, any specific combination may have a structure in which a prize is established in a common winning mode, or a winning mode may be common among some specific roles. In addition, the winning mode of the game result (for example, normal replay) in which the transition lottery is not performed and the winning mode of the specific combination may be partially or all in common.

(5) As the section display, the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9 have been described as examples, but the configuration of the section display is not limited to the above. The section indicator may be configured to explicitly display whether or not it is an advantageous section by at least switching the display mode. For example, the arrangement position and the size of the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9. The display mode (lighting mode) in the advantageous section may be different from the above. For example, the operation unit of the start lever 41 and a part or all of the predetermined credit input switches 56 to 58 are configured to be capable of light emission control, and the operation unit and the credit input switches 56 to 58 emit light based on the advantageous section. It may be configured so that the function as a section display is secured by a predetermined operation unit. As described above, in the configuration in which the display of the section indicator is started at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game, the above-mentioned predetermined operation unit is the operation target at the end of the start timing. By displaying the advantageous section at or near the predetermined operation unit as described above, it becomes easier to grasp the transition to the advantageous section.

Further, the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 may include a display unit having a function of an interval display. In this case, at least the display unit having the function of the section display is preferably controlled by the main control device 101, and the auxiliary display unit 65 itself is controlled by the main control device 101 to perform the function of the section display. The configuration may be such that the main control device 101 controls the display unit together with the display unit.

Further, as a section indicator, an accessory that can be displaced to a predetermined first position and a second position different from the first position is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player (for example, the front portion of the gaming machine). Notifying whether or not it is an advantageous section depending on the display mode including the accessory by arranging the accessory in the first position and the display mode including the accessory by arranging the accessory in the second position. It may be configured.

(6) The section display may have a plurality of sections other than the eighth display segment N8 and the ninth display unit N9. That is, it may be configured to include one section indicator, or may be configured to include a plurality of section indicators. When a plurality of them are provided, they may be combined with a section display having another configuration as described in (5) above.

(7) The section indicator may be configured to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification means attached to the section display or adjacent to the section display according to the display mode of the section display. Examples of the predetermined notification means attached to the section display include the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 attached to the eighth display segment N8 as the section display in the instruction monitor 68. Can be mentioned. Further, examples of the predetermined notification means adjacent to the section display include an auxiliary display unit 65, a payout number display unit 62, and the like.

For example, after the section display is configured to be able to start displaying at a predetermined timing, the predetermined notification means is set as the first notification mode at the predetermined timing, and the above is performed at a specific timing different from the predetermined timing. The predetermined notification means is set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. In this case, it is assumed that the visibility and display contents of the display of the section display can be grasped differently depending on whether the predetermined notification means is the first notification mode and the second notification mode. It is possible to change the appearance of the section display without changing the display mode of the section display.

Further, by combining the configuration for changing the display mode of the section display and the configuration for changing the notification mode of the predetermined notification means, it is possible to make the appearance of the section display more diverse.

For example, a predetermined notification means is composed of light emitting parts by a plurality of LEDs or the like, and the light emitting parts are arranged in a matrix shape (for example, a grid shape of x columns × y rows). Then, one element of the matrix (for example, the element in the a-th column and the b-th row) is replaced with an interval indicator. Then, when the section indicator of the ath column and the bth row is lit and displayed, the a + nth column to the annth column and the bth row and the ath column and the b + nth column to the bnth row around it are lit. The light emitting part of the above is turned on and displayed, and the light emitting part on the outer periphery thereof is turned off. Further, when the section display of the ath column and the bth row is turned off, the a + nth column to the annth column and the bth row and the ath column and the b + nth row to the bnth column around it are turned off. The light emitting part of the above is turned off and the light emitting part on the outer periphery thereof is turned on (x, y, a, b, n are all natural numbers). By doing so, it is possible to make the section indicator, which is one element in the matrix, easy to recognize in relation to the light emitting portion of the other element. Further, when the section indicators in the ath column and the bth row are turned on, the light emitting parts in the a + 1th column and the bth row adjacent to the display are turned off, and the other light emitting parts are turned on. Further, when the section indicators in the ath column and the bth row are turned off, the light emitting parts in the ath column and the b + 1th row adjacent thereto are turned on and the other light emitting parts are turned off. By doing so, the lighting / extinguishing of the section indicator in the ath column and the bth row can be turned on / off of the light emitting part in the a + 1th column and the bth row and the light emitting part in the a + 1st row and the b + 1st row. It becomes difficult to distinguish, and it is possible to make the section indicator, which is one element in the matrix, difficult to recognize in relation to the light emitting portion of another element. In this case, the light emitting unit to be turned on / off instead of the section display is not limited to the light emitting unit adjacent to the section display. For example, which light emitting unit is to be turned on / off is displayed. It may be configured to be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, the other predetermined notification means may be configured to be different between the notification mode in the start game and the notification mode in the advantageous section.

(8) Increase the brightness of the eighth display segment N8 as a section display and the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine to display the section more than other display units (surrounding display units, other predetermined notification means). Although the configuration is designed to improve the visibility of the device, when displaying the section display, the brightness and illuminance of other display units (surrounding display units, other predetermined notification means) are lowered for visual recognition. You may improve the sex. Further, the difference in brightness and illuminance from other display units is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, 10 times the brightness and illuminance.

Further, the visibility may be improved in relation to the display color of another display unit. That is, the visibility of the section display and other display units is improved by making the emission color of the section display and the display color (emission color) of other display units, for example, a complementary color (opposite color). It may be configured to make it easier to distinguish (make it easier to distinguish).

On the contrary, the brightness and the illuminance may be the opposite of the above-mentioned relationship, and the visibility of the section display may be reduced. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the section display, to make it difficult to notice that the display is being performed, to improve the effect of the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Since the visibility of the display unit of the above is increased, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to other display units. As for the display color, the section display and other display units can be distinguished by, for example, having a similar color relationship between the emission color of the section display and the display color (emission color) of the other display unit. It becomes difficult to attach, and the impression that these section indicators and other display units are integrally related to each other can be strengthened.

(9) The display start mode table of the section display is not limited to the above. For example, in addition to the game result that triggered the display start, the table may include the number of bonus wins on the day or multiple days, the number of transitions to the advantageous section, the number of wins, etc. as parameters, and based on these parameters. , It is preferable that the display start mode is different. In this case, for example, if the display start mode table makes it easier to predict the contents and set values of the advantageous section as the number of times of winning the bonus or the advantageous section on the day or multiple days increases, it is adjusted to the progress of the game. As a result, it becomes easier to predict the game content and the set value gradually, and it is possible to realize the playability as if the player trains the production content of the game machine.

(10) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section display is set according to the content and advantage of the advantageous section, one-to-one with the content and advantage of the advantageous section without going through the lottery of the display start mode. It may be the associated display start mode.

(11) The display end mode table of the section display is not limited to the above. For example, not only the content of the advantageous section at the end but also the number of digested games at the end (value of the number of advantageous section games AG) may be included as a parameter, or the time at the end may be included as a parameter. However, the configuration may include the time at the start of the advantageous section as a parameter, or may include the length of time required for digestion of the advantageous section as a parameter, and the display end mode differs based on these parameters. It is good to do so. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the number of digested games at the end is included in the parameter, the larger the number of digested games (the more benefits obtained during the advantageous section), the more useful information can be provided to the player. As a display end mode table, or as a display end mode table in which useful information can be provided to the player as the number of digestion games is smaller (the benefits obtained during the advantageous section may have been smaller). May be good.

(12) Although the display end mode table of the section display is configured so that useful information for the player can be presented, the configuration related to the display start mode table may be applied. That is, the set value or the like may be presented as useful information for the player depending on the display start mode of the section display.

(13) Information on the set value has been described as an example as useful information for the player presented at the end of the display of the section display, but for example, as a configuration in which advertisements and advertisements of the game hall and other stores are presented. Alternatively, the product may be presented with a discount coupon, a coupon, or the like. Further, in a configuration in which the display start mode table is changed in a specific state, when an advantageous display start mode table is selected according to the cumulative number of winnings such as bonuses and advantageous sections and the cumulative number of non-winnings, the cumulative number is calculated. The configuration may be presented or suggested.

(14) By setting the freeze state in the start game, the start of the next game of the start game is restricted, but the freeze state that limits the operation itself of the next game of the start game is concerned. It may be configured to limit the start of the next game.

(15) In the start game, a predetermined effect may be generated during the freeze state. For example, a specific rotation control for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the reverse direction or a low speed during the freeze state is performed, or a predetermined pattern combination (for example, "red" is performed at the end of the freeze state after performing the specific rotation control. 7 ”The pattern alignment) may be configured to generate an effect of stopping or temporarily stopping at a predetermined line (for example, the middle line L2). In this case, the rotation direction and the rotation speed are specified according to the length of the period of the frozen state, that is, according to the content and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section when the display of the section display is started. The rotation control mode may be different, the type of predetermined symbol combination to be stopped or temporarily stopped (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment and "black BAR" symbol alignment), and the predetermined to stop or temporarily stop. The line types (for example, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2) may be different.

(16) In a configuration in which the length of the period of the freeze state is set according to the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the section display, the freeze state is generated a plurality of times, and then a plurality of times. The total length of the period of the frozen state may be associated with the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section and the display start mode of the section display, and the number of occurrences of the frozen state is the number of occurrences of the advantageous section. It may be associated with the content or the degree of advantage or the display start mode of the section display.

(17) In a configuration in which the section display can be lit in a plurality of colors as in the ninth display unit N9, the display start mode is such that the lighting state is different in which color, but the display end mode is It may be configured so that which color is used to turn off the light is different. In this case, it is preferable to switch the lighting state of white in the advantageous section in the ending game to the lighting state of the corresponding color and then turn it off.

(18) If a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won based on an overlapping combination of a bonus and a specific combination (for example, strong cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, etc.), the frozen state is set in the game in which the overlapping combination is won. In addition to generating it, the length of the frozen state is set according to the content and degree of advantage of the advantageous section, and after the carry-over state, the section is displayed until the bonus winning game is used as the start game and the operation of the next game is allowed. It may be configured to start displaying the vessel. Furthermore, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won with the overlapping combination of the above bonus and the specific combination as an opportunity, the game is after the game that won the overlapping combination and is before the bonus winning game. In addition to generating a freeze state in, the length of the freeze state period is set according to the content and advantage of the advantageous section, and the section indicator is set until the operation of the next game is allowed with the bonus winning game as the start game. It may be configured to start the display of. Further, when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won with the overlapping combination of the above bonus and the specific combination as an opportunity, the game is later than the game in which the overlapping combination is won, and a freeze state is generated in the bonus winning game. At the same time, the length of the frozen state is set according to the content and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section, and the section display is started until the operation of the next game is allowed with the bonus winning game as the start game. It may be configured. In the configuration in which the freeze state is generated during the carry-over state, the freeze state may be generated multiple times in a plurality of games. In this case, the total length of the periods of the multiple freeze states is the content of the advantageous section or advantageous. It may be associated with the display start mode of the degree or section indicator, or the number of occurrences of a plurality of freeze states is associated with the content or degree of advantage of the advantageous section or the display start mode of the section indicator. May be good.

(19) Transition to an advantageous section based on the winning replay When the lottery is won, the winning game of the winning replay is set as the start game, and the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed instead of the bet operation in the next game of the start game. Although the end of the start timing of the display is set, it may be configured to determine by lottery whether the end of the start timing is the bet operation or the start operation at the time of winning replay. Further, a plurality of winning replays may be provided, and the betting operation may be the final stage or the start operation may be the final stage depending on the type of the winning replay. In this case, it is preferable that the stop rolls are different for each winning replay, and the stop rolls (for example, bell alignment) corresponding to other payout small wins are stopped at a line different from the effective line on the side where the start operation is terminated. With this configuration, the surprising effect of starting the display of the section indicator based on the start operation can be further enhanced. Even in this case, it is more preferable that the start operation is allowed based on the bet operation.

(20) Although the first BB and the second BB are used as the transition role to the bonus state, the configuration may be such that the transition to the bonus state and the replay are given based on the first BB and the second BB winnings. In this case, since the re-game is given, when the first BB prize is set as the start game, the start operation of the start lever 41 is regarded as the end of the display start timing of the section indicator instead of the bet operation of the next game. It is also possible to do.

(21) In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is determined based on the display start mode table for the specific state when the game state becomes the specific state, the transition condition to the specific state and the continuation condition of the specific state The parameters of (end condition) are not limited to the above. For example, as parameters of the transition condition to the specific state, a configuration in which the transition setting to the specific state or the transition lottery is performed according to the number of games from the RAM clear or the power-on, or the normal section from the end of the previous advantageous section. A configuration in which a transition setting or a transition lottery is performed according to the number of games, a configuration in which a transition setting or a transition lottery is performed according to the number of games between bonuses, a specific role, a replay, a small role, a loss, a bonus, an advantage It is conceivable that the transition setting or the transition lottery is performed depending on the number of winnings, the number of winnings, the number of transitions, etc. of the section or the like. Further, when determining the success or failure of these transition conditions, the number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like, and the length of the determined continuous games may also be changed according to each of the above parameters. The parameters of the continuation condition (end condition) of the specific state include a configuration in which the continuation setting or the continuous lottery is performed according to the number of games after the transition to the specific state, a specific combination in the specific state, a replay, and the like. It is conceivable that a continuous setting or continuous lottery is performed depending on the number of winnings such as small wins, misses, bonuses, the number of winnings, the number of transitions, and the like. Further, the winning probability of the transition lottery or the continuous lottery may be different depending on the number of transitions to a specific state and the number of occurrences of the transition trigger.

(22) When starting the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator at the start of an advantageous section, depending on the type of the winning advantageous section (either challenge mode, attack mode, or super attack mode). Although the display mode such as the display start timing and the emission color of the display start is different, the display mode may be different depending on the number of continuous games in the winning advantageous section. For example, the number of initial games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the special zone is variable, and the number of initial games is determined by lottery or the like at the time of the transition lottery (at the time of winning) of these modes. Then, the display start mode of the section display may be determined according to the determined number of initial games. When the display end mode at the end of the advantageous section is different, the display end mode may be different depending on the length of the continuous advantageous section. Further, in addition to the initial number of games, the display start / end mode may be different depending on the parameters that change the advantage (for example, the ease of transition to the VB mode in the attack mode). The display start / end mode may be different depending on the combination of these parameters and the type of advantageous section.

(23) The trigger for transition to the special RT state and the termination condition are not limited to the above. For example, a specific role with a medal payout (strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.), a duplicate role of the specific role and a bonus (strong cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, etc.), and a specific role replaced by a specific replay game. , Or any of these combinations may be used for migration. In addition, as an end condition, when the bonus overlaps, the special RT state is terminated based on the bonus winning, but even when the bonus overlaps, the special RT state is changed by digesting a predetermined number of games or stopping the transition roll. It may be configured to end.

(24) In a configuration in which a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is won based on a bonus overlapping combination and the game is transferred to a special RT state, a special replay in the special RT state is performed due to a stop result of the game that has become the bonus overlapping combination. The stop result may be different. For example, if there is a strong watermelon duplication 1 as the duplicate winning combination, in the game in which the strong watermelon duplication 1 is won, a strong watermelon winning (30th small winning combination winning) is established and a strong watermelon is stopped. If you miss the item (if you don't win the 30th small role), the stop result of the special replay will be different. For example, if you win a strong watermelon, the winning section will be more advantageous. In order to make it easier to predict the content and advantage of the special replay, the stop result of the special replay may be different.

(25) In the configuration for shifting to the special RT state, the display control device 81 may be configured not to set the pseudo precursor mode as an effect. In addition, a configuration that does not generate continuous production may be used.

(26) Regarding the push order notification effect of the special replay winning in the special RT state, not only the stop roll that is out of the black BAR tempai, but also the stop roll that is the black BAR double lineup and the stop roll that is the black BAR single lineup. The push order notification of the eyes may also be configured to be performed when the player wins the push order notification through the execution lottery.

(27) Regarding the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay in the special RT state, an upper limit may be set for the number of times the push order notification effect occurs. For example, if the upper limit is set to once in one special RT state, and the push order notification effect such as black BAR double alignment or black BAR single alignment is performed and the corresponding stop roll appears once, the subsequent stop rolls are displayed. When the special replay is won, the same push order notification effect may not be performed. In this case, if a stop result different from the executed push order notification effect appears due to a failure of the push order operation, an erroneous stop order operation, or the like, the push order notification effect may be generated again.

(28) By the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay in the special RT state, a predetermined stop roll (black BAR double match, black BAR single match, etc.) appears to suggest the content and advantage of the advantageous section. In the configuration, the content and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section may be suggested by the number of appearances of the predetermined stop roll. For example, when the first number (1 time) of black BAR singles appears as a predetermined stop roll, it is confirmed that the lottery for transition to the challenge mode has been won, and the black BAR is confirmed as the predetermined stop roll. When the second number (twice), which is more than the first number, appears, it may be determined that the lottery for transition to the attack mode, which is more advantageous than the challenge mode, has been won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay to be different so that the corresponding number of appearances is obtained.

(29) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed triggered by a specific combination in the special RT state, the release lottery is performed when the shift lottery to the advantageous section has already been won, but the shift lottery is won. Even if it is not, the cancellation lottery may be performed. In this case, if the release lottery is won without winning the transition lottery, the push order notification effect is generated, but the stop rolls such as the stop rolls in which the black BAR doubles are aligned are determined. It is preferable to have a configuration that generates a push order notification effect that does not cause the appearance of.

(30) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed triggered by the specific combination in the special RT state, the winning probability of the release lottery table is not limited to the above. For example, a uniform winning probability may be used regardless of the type of specific role. Further, the winning number of the specific winning combination in the special RT state may be stored, and the winning probability may be different according to the winning number. In this case, it is preferable that the probability of winning the cancellation increases as the number of winnings increases. Further, the winning probability of the notification release lottery may be different depending on the relationship between the specific winning combination that triggered the transition to the special RT state and the specific winning combination that was won during the special RT state. If the specific combination and the specific combination won during the special RT state have the same specific combination (same index value IV), the configuration may be such that it is easier to win the notification release lottery than in the case where it is not.

(31) In the configuration in which the notification release lottery is performed triggered by the specific combination in the special RT state, the content notified after the release may be different from the above. Specifically, the content of the lottery for transition to the advantageous section that has already been executed may be sufficient. For example, the transition to the advantageous section performed based on the game result before the result that triggers the transition to the special RT state. The content may be the content of the lottery, or the result of the transition to the special RT state may be a notification that the transition lottery has not been won or a notification that the transition lottery has been performed.

(32) In a configuration in which a notification release lottery is performed triggered by a specific combination in the special RT state, the advantageous section is executed based on the game result (duplication with the bonus) that triggered the transition to the special RT state. The content of the transition lottery has been described as an example of setting the precursor mode as a configuration that makes it difficult to be notified in the game that resulted in the game, but it is limited to be notified in the game that resulted in the game. It may be configured as long as it is configured, and for example, it may be configured so that notification is not performed in the game. In this case, the precursor mode may not be set.

(33) In a configuration in which there are a plurality of special RT states and the types of special replays that can be won in each special RT state are different, the winning probability of the special replay may be higher than the winning probability of the normal replay. In addition, the configuration may be such that only the special replay is won without winning the normal replay. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency (possibility) of establishing a special replay, and if you aim for the "black BAR" symbol in each game, it is possible to make the desired stop roll appear relatively smoothly. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game of aiming at the "black BAR" symbol from getting bored in each game.

(34) The type of special replay is not limited to the above in a configuration having a plurality of special RT states and having different winning probabilities of special replays that can be won in each special RT state. For example, the winning probabilities of the special replay 3 may be different. Further, the number of special replays that can be won may be not one type but multiple types. In this case, the type of RT state is predicted by the difference in the winning probability of each special replay (by the balance of the winning probability). Therefore, the game may be configured to predict the content of the advantageous section. More specifically, for example, in the 6th RT state, the special replay 3 is easy to win and the special replay 4 is hard to win, and in the 7th RT state, the special replay 3 is hard to win and the special replay 4 is easy to win. You may do something like that. Further, a predetermined special replay may be configured so that it can be won only in a predetermined RT state. For example, the special replay 5 may be won only in the 5th RT state.

(35) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the black BAR symbol in the special RT state, if the bonus is won during the special RT state that is not based on the bonus winning, the "black BAR" symbol The count (black BAR stop counter), the notification scenario, and the upper limit value may be reset.

(36) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus is won or the content of an advantageous section by a stop roll in a special RT state, the symbol to be stopped is not limited to the "black BAR" symbol, and the stop position is not limited to the middle stage. When the stop positions are, for example, the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage, a configuration in which a plurality of corresponding symbols are stopped on one reel may be used.

(37) In the configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section according to the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the notification scenario is set according to the suggested content, but the notification scenario is described above. Not limited to things. For example, a plurality of types of notification scenarios are set for one suggestion content, and one notification scenario may be selected from these plurality of types by lottery or the like. In this case, for example, there may be a notification scenario in which the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter is 2 although it suggests a bonus winning, and the plurality of types of notification scenarios may include a notification scenario that does not match the suggested content. ..

(38) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the content of an advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the corresponding symbol count (black BAR stop counter) is subtracted by a predetermined trigger. May be. For example, if the corresponding symbol does not stop (when the push operation fails) even though the stop order that enables the corresponding symbol to be stopped is notified, the count of the corresponding symbol is subtracted. It may be configured. Further, the count of the corresponding symbol may be subtracted when the stop order for disabling the corresponding symbol is notified.

(39) In a configuration that suggests whether or not a bonus is won and the content of an advantageous section by a stop roll during a special RT state, the type of bonus may also be suggested. For example, the content of the suggestion may be different depending on whether the special RT state is based on the first BB or the second BB (for example, the upper limit value of the black BAR stop counter or the notification scenario may be different).

(40) After shifting the gaming state to the special RT state, the configuration is such that the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section are suggested by the stop roll during the special RT state. The configuration may be such that the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section are suggested by the stop result while the first RT state remains. In this case, regarding the special replay, it is possible to win not only in the carry-over state but also in the normal game state and the first RT state, and then the state corresponding to the carry-over state and the fake special RT state (BB non-winning and advantageous section non-winning). In the game after winning the specific combination), the push order notification effect of the corresponding stop order may be generated based on the special replay winning. In other words, when the game result (specific role, duplicate role, etc.) that triggered the transition to the special RT state is obtained, the content of the push order notification effect at the time of winning the special replay is different (with a predetermined stop result). It may be configured to shift to the mode in which the push order notification effect is likely to occur.

(41) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the cumulative number of stops of the corresponding symbol over multiple games and the stop of the corresponding symbol related to the single game. Depending on the number, the presence or absence of winning a bonus and the suggestion of the content of the advantageous section may be different, or the weight of the suggestion may be different between the cumulative number of stops and the number of stops related to the single game. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the bonus winning is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops is 3 or more, when the number of stops related to a single game is 3, that is, the cumulative number of stops corresponding to the bonus winning is cleared in one game. In that case, the bonus winning and the attack mode winning may be determined, or the bonus winning may be determined when the number of stops related to the single game is 2 or more.

(42) In a configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbols is different by differentiating the stop rolls of the special replay in the special RT state by the push order notification effect, there are 0 corresponding symbols as the stop order of one special replay. The configuration may be such that the stop order is not included.

(43) In a configuration in which the number of stops of the corresponding symbols is different by changing the stop result of the special replay in the special RT state by the push order notification effect, one corresponding symbol is used as the stop order of one special replay. The configuration may include a first number (1 piece) as described above and a stop order in which the number of corresponding symbols is 1 or more and the number is a second number (2 pieces) different from the first number.

(44) In a configuration that suggests the presence or absence of bonus winning and the content of the advantageous section by the number of stops of the corresponding symbol in the special RT state, the background color is determined when the suggested content is determined by the cumulative number of stops or the number of stops in the single game. In addition to the change of, the configuration may be such that the corresponding content is finalized. For example, in the configuration in which the bonus winning is confirmed when the cumulative number of stops of the "black BAR" symbol is 3 or more, the bonus winning notification effect is generated in the game in which the cumulative number of stops (black BAR stop counter) is 3. May be.

(45) As a special RT state, the total replay probability is higher than that of the normal game state, but in any special RT state or all special RT states, the total replay probability is higher than that of the normal game state. It may be configured to be lower.

(46) In a configuration having a plurality of special RT states, the total replay probabilities in each special RT state are set to be the same, but the probabilities are not exactly the same, and although there are some differences, the player's The probabilities may be similar to the extent that they can be perceived as the same in the experience. More specifically, for example, if the difference in the replay probabilities between the special RT states is smaller than one tenth of the replay probabilities, it is considered that the same probabilities are recognized. Further, the relationship with the total replay probability with other RT states (second RT state and third RT state) is also the same, and the probability may not be exactly the same, but may be the same.

(47) The advantageous section may be defined as follows. A section in which push order notification corresponding to a prize related to the maximum number of payouts is generated at least once. More specifically, in the push order bell where 9 medals, 3 medals or 0 medals can be paid out depending on the stop order, the push order notification that 9 medals are paid out is generated at least once. Section.

(48) Even when the advantageous section ends before reaching the continuation upper limit, the initialization process may be performed.

(49) Even when the first BB or the second BB is independently won, a transition lottery for an advantageous section, an additional lottery, or the like may be performed. In each of the above-described embodiments, since the single winning of the first BB and the second BB does not cause a difference in the winning probability depending on the set value, even if a lottery regarding the advantageous section is performed at the time of such a single winning, It is considered that no inconvenience will occur.

(50) Regarding the bonuses of the first BB and the second BB, the winning probability differs depending on the set value including the winning probability of the duplicate winning combination, but a bonus may be provided in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. In this case, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like may be possible during the carry-over state of the bonus in which the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. That is, there may be a case where the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like is performed by the specific combination winning during the carry-over, and a case where the lottery is not performed. Further, although the winning probabilities of the first BB and the second BB are the same depending on the set value, they may be different.

(51) In addition to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, CBs (1st CB to 4th CB) are provided as transitional combinations in which the small winning combination probability can be changed by the transition of the gaming state, but in addition to or in place of these transitional combinations. Other transition roles may be provided. Other transition roles include MB (middle bonus), which has no limit on the number of sliding frames, REG (regular bonus), which has a smaller maximum number of acquisitions than the 1st BB and 2nd BB, and 1 game of JAC game. SB (single bonus) etc. can be considered. In addition, the maximum number of bonuses that can be obtained is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit acquisition number in the CB state may be 3 cards, which is less than 15 cards, or 0 cards.

(52) Although the medals are not paid out at the time of winning the transitional combination (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB), the medals may be paid out.

(53) During the bonus, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the like, an additional lottery, or the like may be performed. In this case, there is no setting difference in the winning probability, the number of winnings, the transition lottery to the attack mode during the bonus, the additional lottery probability, and the advantage. It is preferable that these lottery is not performed when a certain bonus is won.

(54) In order not to make a difference in the probability and advantage of the transition lottery to the attack mode or the like depending on the set value, the lottery is performed based on the lottery result with no particular setting difference. Although the lottery is performed based on the result of a certain lottery, the setting difference may be prevented by adjusting the benefits at the time of winning (the winning probability of the privilege, the transition lottery, etc. and the number of additional games). For example, in setting 1, a specific winning combination is provided with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/100, and in setting 6 with a probability of winning with a probability of 1/10. Is set to 1/2, and in setting 6, it is set to 1/20. By doing so, the total additional winning probability is 1/200 regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference.

(55) Although the content of the effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 has been mainly described as the effect by the other notification means of the section display unit, another display unit is provided as the other notification means, and the effect is performed by the other display unit. It may be configured to generate.

(56) Transition to attack mode or the like By winning the lottery or the additional lottery, basically an advantageous event occurs for the player, but for example, the end lottery such as the attack mode may be performed. However, it may be configured to perform a subtraction lottery for the number of continuous games.

(57) Although the game in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been mainly described, the above invention may be applied to a 1-bet game in which the number of bets is 1 and a 2-bet game in which the number of bets is 2. For example, when the 1-bet game or the 2-bet game wins the transition lottery to the advantageous section, and when the 3-bet game wins the transition lottery to the advantageous section, the display start mode table of the section indicator is displayed. By making them different, the display start mode of the section display may be different.

(58) The setting value is suggested when an additional trigger occurs in the situation where the excess flag is set. For example, as a zone that can be shifted during the attack mode, the set value is suggested as compared with the normal attack mode. A specific zone may be provided to facilitate the movement to the specific zone when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

(59) The setting value is suggested when an additional trigger such as winning a specific combination occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, but the additional trigger is not limited to the above. For example, the number of digested games in the advantageous section may cause an additional opportunity, or the number of small wins, winnings, medals paid out, etc. in the advantageous section may cause an additional opportunity. , It is advisable to configure the configuration to suggest the set value when these additional triggers occur in a situation where the excess flag is set.

(60) When an additional opportunity occurs, the set value is suggested instead of the number of games, but the set value may be suggested after the number of games is added.

(61) If a mode transition lottery is won from challenge mode to attack mode or attack mode to special zone in a situation where the excess flag is set, the setting value is suggested after the mode transition. , The mode transition may not be performed.

(62) The setting value is suggested when an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, but even if an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is not set, the additional trigger is added. If the lottery is not won, the set value may be suggested. Further, if the additional lottery is not won, it is assumed that the additional lottery is won, and the number of additional games may be added to the total number of extinguished games TEG or the like.

(63) In the configuration in which the set value is suggested by referring to the total number of extinct games TEG at the time of forced termination, the display mode at the time of forced termination may be added. For example, a table for suggesting set values (third special notification lottery table, third special notification type table, etc.) is prepared according to the display mode at the time of forced termination. Then, when the game is forcibly terminated during the special zone, the setting value suggestion may be likely to occur with a smaller total number of disappearing games TEG than when the game is forcibly terminated during the attack mode.

(64) When the game to be forcibly terminated occurs during the bonus, the processing such as suggesting the set value may be different from the case where the game occurs during the non-bonus situation. For example, in the case of forced termination in a situation where the bonus is not in progress, the setting value is suggested in the game to be forcibly terminated, while in the case of forced termination during the bonus, the setting value is suggested after waiting for the end of the bonus. May be. In addition, processing such as setting value suggestion may be different depending on the type of bonus. For example, if a game that is forced to end occurs during the first BB where the winning probability is common regardless of the set value, the set value is suggested, while the forced termination is performed during the second BB where the winning probability differs depending on the set value. When a game occurs, the configuration may be such that the setting value is not suggested, or vice versa. Further, if it is in the first BB, the set value is suggested in the forced termination game, and if it is in the second BB, the set value is suggested after waiting for the end of the bonus, or vice versa. When different processes such as suggestion of set values are used, the winning probability may be different after determining which process is to be performed by lottery.

(65) The number of forced termination games in the advantageous section is not limited to the above number (1500), and may be more or less than that.

(66) Additional lottery table and number of additional games The lottery table is not limited to the above, and may be configured to perform additional lottery by other occasions (small role or replay), the winning probability, and the additional game at the time of winning. The range of numbers, the average, etc. are also arbitrary. For example, as the number of additional games, the number of games (2000 games, etc.) exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section may be selected.

(67) In the situation where the excess flag is set, when an additional opportunity occurs, the information useful for the player is presented by suggesting the set value as a compensation. Anything is sufficient, and the setting value suggestion is not limited. For example, it may be the above-mentioned advertisement, coupon, or the like, or it may be configured to give benefits such as rare images.

In addition, if an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the push order bell and the push order notification mode at the time of winning the push order replay will be different, so that useful information for the player will be presented. It may be configured such that a privilege is given or a privilege is given. For example, the push order bell is the first role in which 1 or 0 medals are paid out, the second role in which 9 medals are paid out more than the 1st role, and 15 cards more than the 2nd role. It is a duplicate of the role in which the medal is paid out. Then, in the normal section other than the advantageous section, if the push order notification is not performed, the first winning combination is likely to be established, and the pushing order notification is performed in the advantageous section, so that the second and third winning combinations are won. The configuration is such that it is easy to establish. Then, until the excess flag is set, the push order notification of the second combination is likely to be performed, and after the excess flag is set, the push order notification of the third combination is performed based on the occurrence of an additional opportunity. The configuration will be easy. By doing so, it is possible to use it as a privilege when an additional opportunity occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set.

In this case, when betting 3 cards, 6 medals can be expected to increase by winning the 2nd role, and 12 medals can be expected to increase by winning the 3rd role. It can be said that the number of medals can be expected to increase. Therefore, when the push order notification for establishing the third winning combination is generated as described above, the number of games equivalent to two times of winning the push order bell is subtracted from the maximum number of games, and the number is subtracted. The configuration may be such that forced termination occurs at the maximum number of games. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the merit of ending the advantageous section at an early stage without substantially changing the total number of medals won.

(68) The compulsory termination condition may be specified not by the number of games but by the total number of medals paid out or the total number of medals won (total number of medals paid out minus total number of bets). In this case, the attack mode, etc. should be managed not by the number of games but by the specified number of total medals paid out and the total number of medals won (the attack mode, etc. ends when the specified number is reached). Even when the above-mentioned number occurs, it is preferable to perform the above-mentioned specified number of increase processing instead of the number of games. For example, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the total number of medals won reaches 3000. Then, as a result of adding the specified number such as the attack mode, the excess flag is set when the specified number reaches 3000 sheets. With such a configuration, the total number of medals that the player can obtain even if the push order notification, which is a winning combination with a large number of payouts, is performed in the situation where the excess flag is set as in (67) above. Does not change, and while keeping the advantage degree unchanged, it is possible to enjoy the advantage that the advantageous section can be completed with a small number of games.

(69) The number of times of addition triggers generated in the situation where the excess flag is set may be stored, and the lottery table and the type table in the set value suggestion may be different depending on the number of times. For example, the setting value suggestion when the weak cherry is won in the situation where the strong cherry is won once and the weak cherry is won four times after the excess flag is set, and the strong after the excess flag is set. Narrowing down the setting value when the winning probability and the setting value suggestion are made by the setting value suggestion when the weak cherry is won in the situation where the cherry is won four times and the weak cherry is won once. The configuration may be different in ease, and because it is difficult to win a strong cherry, the latter may be a setting value suggestion that is more advantageous for the player (setting value suggestion that makes it easier to narrow down the setting value). Good.

(70) In the configuration in which the set value is suggested in consideration of the game situation on the day, the total number of games TG is initialized by the processing of changing the winning probability, that is, by clearing the RAM. However, it may be configured to be initialized by turning the power on / off.

(71) In the configuration in which the set value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day, the game situation of the day may include information other than the total number of games TG and the time. For example, instead of or in addition to the time, the elapsed time from turning on the power may be taken into consideration. Further, for example, the configuration may include a bonus, the number of times a predetermined small winning combination is won, the number of times a prize is won, and the like. The configuration may be such that the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out are taken into consideration. The configuration may be such that the number of forced terminations is taken into consideration.

(72) In the configuration in which the setting value suggestion is performed in consideration of the game situation of the day, the setting value suggestion is unlikely to occur or the setting value suggestion of the low setting is likely to occur when the forced termination is performed at a relatively early stage. Although it is configured, it may be a configuration in which a high setting value suggestion is likely to occur when it is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage, a configuration in which a low setting value suggestion is unlikely to occur, or a high setting setting value. The configuration may be such that suggestions are unlikely to occur.

In addition, assuming that the operating rate is high in the morning and evening, if the configuration is such that the setting value suggestion is likely to occur if it is forcibly terminated in other daytime, etc., the operating rate by the player who anticipates the setting value suggestion. Can be expected to increase. In this case, for example, the operating rate over multiple days up to the previous day or the previous day can be grasped from the built-in clock, the number of games counter, etc., and based on the operating rate, a table for suggesting set values (special notification lottery table). , Special notification type table, etc.) may be changed.

(73) In the configuration in which the set value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day, the data to be referred to such as the total number of games TG is set as the data that can be managed over a plurality of days, and the multiple days when the forced termination occurs. It may be configured to take into account the game situation. For example, the total number of games TG is configured so that it is not initialized even if the winning probability is changed, and the setting value suggestion is made in consideration of the total number of games since the game table is installed in the game hall. It may be configured to be performed. In this case, the configuration may be such that the setting value suggestion is unlikely to occur / easily occurs at the initial stage of introduction (initial stage of installation).

(74) The setting value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, but the setting in consideration of the game situation of the day when the other advantageous state is forcibly terminated. It may be configured to suggest a value. As another advantageous state, for example, when the bonus state is not only the number of payouts but also other compulsory termination conditions are satisfied (for example, when a specific ending combination is won or when the specific ending combination winning is established). It is configured to end (when a so-called puncture occurs), and if the bonus state ends based on the establishment of the forced end condition before reaching the upper limit of the number of payouts, the set value is suggested in consideration of the game situation of the day. It may be configured.

(75) The storage area for the advantageous section and the storage area for the normal section are provided in separate areas so as not to overlap each other. However, it suffices if the CPU 102 can distinguish between them. The parts may overlap.

As a configuration provided in separate areas, a configuration in which one RAM is provided as a separate area, but a configuration in which a RAM for an advantageous section and a RAM for a normal section are provided, respectively, may be provided. In this case, although the CPU can access both RAMs, it is preferable that the information in both RAMs is not directly communicated with each other (without going through the CPU).

(76) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the information when the addition trigger occurs is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section or the storage area for the normal section differently. When an additional opportunity occurs in the situation where is set, the information (number of additional games) based on the additional opportunity is stored in a predetermined area provided in the storage area for the advantageous section. Then, at least at a timing before the initialization process is performed, the information stored in the predetermined area is re-stored in the storage area for the normal section (total number of disappearing games TEG and number of disappearing games EG). May be.

(77) Depending on the presence or absence of the excess flag, the information when the addition trigger occurs is stored in the storage area for the advantageous section or the storage area for the normal section differently. When this occurs, the information corresponding to any storage area may be stored. Specifically, for example, when an additional game occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the number of additional games is added to the number of continuations such as the attack mode, and the number of additional games is added to the total number of disappearing games. It may be configured to perform a process of adding to the TEG and the number of disappearing games EG. Even in this case, the initialization process at the time of forced termination initializes the number of additional games such as the attack mode added after the above excess flag is set, while the total number of disappearing games TEG and the number of disappearing games. Since the EG is not initialized, it is possible to use these total number of extinct games TEG and the like in the normal section.

(78) Information corresponding to an event occurring in the advantageous section is stored in the storage area for the normal section, and a special section is set in the normal section after the forced termination advantageous section based on the stored information. Although it is configured, the scene in which the information corresponding to the event occurring in the advantageous section is used is not limited to the normal section after the forced termination. For example, it may be configured to be used when shifting to the advantageous section again after the forced termination (for example, a configuration in which the setting value suggestion is likely to occur in the advantageous section after the forced termination), or the power ON / OFF is turned on / off after the forced termination. It may be a configuration used when it is performed (for example, a configuration in which setting value suggestion is likely to occur in the morning of the next day), or a configuration used during the bonus when a bonus is won after forced termination (for example, a configuration used during the bonus). For example, a configuration in which the setting value suggestion is likely to occur during the bonus) may be used.

(79) During the special section, as a special notification, the push order notification effect of the special replays 1 and 2 is generated, and a short precursor game number is selected when the bonus is won. These special replays 1 and 2 are configured. The push order notification effect and the special notification as the number of short precursor games may be generated not only in the special section but also in other normal sections or advantageous sections. In this case, a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of special notification is higher in the special section than in other normal sections or advantageous sections, notification useful for the player (push order notification in which the set value can be easily narrowed down, and the number of short precursor games) ) Is likely to occur.

(80) Although the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as the special game number display unit TGH, they may be displayed on other display units.

(81) The special game number display unit TGH is configured to display the number of times corresponding to the number of additional games as the total number of disappearing games TEG. For example, when the setting value suggestion is generated by the value of the total number of disappearing games TEG. The total number of extinct games TEG, which is a threshold for the presence or absence of the occurrence, may be set to 100%, and the percentage up to the total number of extinct games TEG may be displayed on the special game number display unit TGH. In this case, every time the total number of extinct games TEG is added, the percentage of the special game number display unit TGH approaches 100%, and by reaching 100%, it gives a strong impression that some kind of benefit can be obtained. Is possible.

Further, the special game number display unit TGH may be a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors, and may be configured to suggest that some benefit can be obtained by the light emitting color (the setting value suggestion is expected to occur). In this case, as the light emission of a plurality of colors, the light is emitted in a color having a relationship corresponding to the expected degree of the light emission color of other general expected effects such as white → blue → yellow → green → red → rainbow. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that some benefit can be obtained by changing the emission color.

(82) In the configuration in which the number of disappearing games EG and the total number of disappearing games TEG are displayed on the special game number display unit TGH, the setting value is not suggested by the total number of disappearing games TEG or the like. May be.

(83) By displaying the number of disappeared games EG and the total number of disappeared games TEG on the special game number display unit TGH, the configuration that expects the compensation of the invalidation of the addition due to the forced termination is limited to the forced termination of the advantageous section. Instead, it may be applied to forced termination of other favorable conditions. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state in which the winning probability of the bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VBB mode is relatively high or low are set, and the upper limit is the number of times the bonus or VB mode is won in the high probability state. Is provided. Then, for example, if a configuration is such that a bonus or VB mode can be won a plurality of times by one winning, or a bonus or VB mode can be won even during the bonus or VB mode, after the number of winnings becomes the upper limit. Will also be able to win bonuses and VB mode. In such a configuration, by displaying the bonus after reaching the upper limit and the number of winnings in VB mode, when ending at the upper limit, that is, when the bonus or VB mode after reaching the upper limit is invalidated. Even if there is, it is possible to expect that some kind of benefit will be obtained because the number of winnings after reaching the upper limit is intentionally displayed.

(84) Assuming the post-addition effect, if there is an unreported portion (if the post-addition flag is set) when an addition trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, the range of the unreported portion. In this case, the number of additional games is determined by referring to the number of additional games lottery table at the normal time. However, the number of additional games lottery table for pseudo-addition is used. It may be configured to determine the number of pseudo-additional games. In this case, when the unreported portion is large, a large number of games is likely to be pseudo-added, and when the unreported portion is small, a small number of games is likely to be pseudo-added.

(85) On the premise of the post-addition effect, when an addition trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set, if there is an unreported portion, a pseudo addition is performed within the range of the unreported portion, and the unreported portion is added. The configuration has a case where the pseudo-addition is performed beyond the unreported portion, and the setting value suggestion is performed when the pseudo-addition is performed beyond the unreported portion. However, the configuration value suggestion is performed within the range not exceeding the unreported portion. May be.

For example, if a pseudo-addition of the number of times that 10 is subtracted as the first number from the post-addition counter BG occurs, settings 1 to 3 are suggested, and if a pseudo-addition of the number of times that 56 is subtracted as the second number from the post-addition counter BG occurs. The configuration may be such that setting 5 or setting 6 is suggested, and setting 6 is suggested when a pseudo addition of the number of times that 77 is subtracted as the third number from the post-addition counter BG occurs. In this case, the pseudo-addition of the number of times each first number to third number is subtracted from these post-addition counters BG not only occurs as a suggestion of the set value, but can also be selected based on the normal number of additional games lottery table. It becomes a thing. Therefore, when a pseudo addition of these times occurs, the set value is predicted in consideration of whether or not it occurs as a set value suggestion, and the enjoyment of the predicted game is improved. ..

Further, according to the above configuration, it is necessary that the post-addition counter BG is the first number to the third number or more in the situation where the setting value suggestion occurs, and even from such a viewpoint, the setting value suggestion can be obtained. It becomes difficult to judge whether or not it is done, and the enjoyment of predicting the set value is improved.

Needless to say, the values of the first number to the third number are not limited to the above values.

(86) If an additional trigger occurs in a situation where the excess flag is set on the premise of a post-addition effect, the target section is limited to an advantageous section even in a configuration in which a pseudo-addition is generated if there is an unreported portion. However, it may be applied to other advantageous states or sections. For example, a high probability state and a low probability state in which the winning probability of the bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, etc.) or VBB mode is relatively high or low are set, and the upper limit is the number of times the bonus or VB mode is won in the high probability state. Is provided. Then, for example, if a configuration is such that a bonus or VB mode can be won a plurality of times by one winning, or a bonus or VB mode can be won even during the bonus or VB mode, after the number of winnings becomes the upper limit. Will also be able to win bonuses and VB mode. In such a configuration, the configuration may further notify that the upper limit has been reached, and if the bonus or VB mode is won in a situation where there is an unreported portion even if the upper limit is reached, a pseudo It may be configured to notify the winning.

(87) In the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the game number additional process (FIG. 132), it is determined whether or not the excess flag is set, and whether or not the subsequent processing is executed is different. However, if the excess flag is set at least in the game number addition lottery process (Fig. 128) before that, the game number addition lottery has not been performed, and the addition winning is achieved in the subsequent judgment processing. It is determined that it has not been done. Therefore, in the situation where the excess flag is set, the additional game number lottery process (FIG. 130) and the game number additional process (FIG. 132) do not substantially occur, and for this reason, In these processes, the excess flag determination process may be omitted.

(88) As compensation for forced termination due to the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the setting value is suggested, but the set value is used as compensation when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to other factors that can be grasped in advance. It may be configured to make a suggestion or the like. For example, when the game hall is forcibly terminated due to the closing time (when the remaining number of games ZG in the advantageous section cannot be completely consumed within the business hours), a setting value suggestion or the like may be provided.

(89) The explanation was made on the premise of playability in which the number of games may be added when a specific combination is won during the advantageous section, but the number of games is subtracted and added based on a predetermined opportunity such as winning a specific combination. It may be a game property in which any of the above can occur, or a game property in which only subtraction can occur. Assuming that the number of games can be subtracted, even if the number of empty games FG becomes 0 or less, the maximum number of games is not always reached, and it is possible to make the subsequent games more enjoyable. In this case, after shifting to the advantageous section, the number of remaining games that apparently exceeds the maximum number of games is displayed, and when the maximum number of games is reached or the game progresses to near the maximum number of games, the maximum number of games is displayed. The number of remaining games on the display may be subtracted.

(90) At the time of winning the push order bell or push order replay, the winning combination differs depending on the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the privilege to be given is different, and the stop order is notified. The configuration is such that the advantage for the player is different depending on whether or not the player has the advantage, but any role may be used in which the advantage for the player is different by notifying the stop operation.

For example, in the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel, the first symbol (for example, "black BAR" symbol) and the second symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) cannot be aimed at the same time (at positions separated by 5 symbols or more). )Deploy. Then, the first symbol of the left reel 32L, the predetermined symbol of the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol), and the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or When the "second replay" symbol stops at the valid line, the first result prize is established, and the second symbol on the left reel 32L and the predetermined symbol on the middle reel 32M (for example, the "first replay" symbol) or "1st replay" symbol The second result winning is established when the "second replay" symbol) and the predetermined symbol of the right reel 32R (for example, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol) stop at the valid line. The winning mode of the first result and the second result is set. In this case, if the stop operation is aimed at the first symbol when the first result is won, the first result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is aimed at the second symbol instead of the first symbol, the first result prize is won. It does not hold and the corresponding benefits are not granted. Similarly, when the second result is won, if the stop operation is performed aiming at the second symbol, the second result prize can be established, but if the stop operation is aimed at the first symbol instead of the second symbol, the second result prize is won. It does not hold and the corresponding benefits are not granted. After that, a specific combination is set up in which either the first result or the second result is won, and when the specific combination is won, which of the first result and the second result is won (first symbol and first). Which of the two symbols should be aimed at to stop the left reel 32L) can be notified. Even in such a configuration, the winning result (either the first result or the second result) can be won by the notification, and the advantage for the player changes depending on the presence or absence of the notification. Then, at least one of a mode in which such notification is easily performed, a mode in which the probability of transition to a mode in which the notification is easily performed is high, and a mode in which the lottery for transition to these modes is won but before the transition is performed. The situation including the above modes may be regarded as an advantageous section, and the situation including at least one of the above modes may be regarded as an advantageous section including each of the above modes and each mode based on the push order combination.

In addition, by performing a black BAR push notification (FIG. 106) when a special replay is won, a configuration is established in which a 15th replay prize is established instead of the first replay, and a push order notification is given when each special replay is won. It may be applied to a configuration in which the stop result is different.

That is, even if the winning combination is the same, the stop operation for changing the stop result is not limited to the stop order, and any stop operation mode including the stop operation timing may be used, and the notification for performing such a stop operation mode is sufficient. Is not limited to the push order notification, and may be any mode notification regarding the operation mode.

(91) Transition to an advantageous section In a configuration in which the display start mode of the section indicator is different depending on the result of the lottery when the lottery is won, and the stop roll is associated with the display start mode of the section indicator. The display start mode of the section display may be different depending on the winning mode of the result that triggers the lottery and the presence or absence of winning. For example, a strong cherry with IV = 13 is set as an overlapping role of the 28th small role and the 32nd small role to the 35th small role, and depending on which of these overlapping roles the strong cherry prize is established. , The display start mode of the section display may be different. More specifically, there are cases where the "cherry" symbols are aligned on the effective line and stop, and the 28th small winning combination is established to win a strong cherry prize, and the case where the "cherry" symbols are not aligned on the effective line and the first is The display start mode of the section display may be different depending on whether any of the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination is established and a strong cherry prize is awarded. In addition, in the specific role that may be missed, the section indicator may be established when the specific role prize is established when the specific role is won, or when the specific role prize cannot be established due to the loss. The display start mode may be different.

In these cases, the section indicator is not turned on until the circuit is stopped, where the winning mode, the stop result, and the presence or absence of omission are branched, and the timing after the timing at which the branched circuit is stopped is not reached. The section indicator may be configured to start lighting at the timing, and then the timing and mode (color, etc.) of starting lighting may be different depending on the branch. Specifically, for example, on the premise that the stop operation is performed in the order of left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R, the winning mode and the like branch when the middle reel 32M is stopped (in the case of strong cherry). , 28th small winning combination and 32nd small winning combination to 35th small winning combination), at the timing after the 2nd stop is OFF so that the section indicator starts lighting after the middle reel 32M is stopped. A certain third stop ON time is set as the default lighting start timing. Then, when the winning mode or the like branches to the first mode (the 28th small winning combination winning side in the case of strong cherry) due to the stop operation, the lighting is started when the third stop of the above specification is turned on, and the winning mode is won. When the mode or the like branches to the second mode (in the case of a strong cherry, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination winning side), the lighting for change is not performed at the above-specified lighting start timing (when the third stop is ON). As the start timing, the lighting is started when the third stop is OFF. By doing so, it is possible to provide enjoyment utilizing the relationship between the success or absence of the eye-pressing operation and the timing at which the winning of the advantageous section can be recognized by the start of lighting of the section indicator.

(92) Regarding the advantageous section, the winning probability of the transition lottery and the benefits at the time of winning (transition mode, number of additional games, etc.) are common regardless of the set value, but the winning probability etc. differs depending on the set value. May be good. In this case, depending on the type of result that triggers the lottery such as the transition lottery, there are cases where there is a difference in the probability due to the set value and the privilege at the time of winning, and there is a case where there is no difference in the probability due to the set value and the privilege at the time of winning. It may be configured to be used.

(93) In the instruction monitor 68, the display mode of the push order information (“1” to “6”) using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is not limited to the above. For example, as the push order combination, the winning combination differs depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are first stopped, and the stop order of the second reel and the third reel includes three selection push order combinations that are not related to the winning combination. In this case, the push order information (display of "7") displayed by lighting the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7, and the first display segments N1 to the first. 7 Display segment N7 The push order information (display of "8") displayed by lighting, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7. The push order information (display of "9") displayed by lighting the segment N7 may be used to notify the push order of these three-choice push order combinations.

(94) In the instruction monitor 68, the timing at which the push order information using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is turned off is not limited to the third reel stop ON operation, and is operated by at least the push order notification. It suffices that the push order notification is performed until the stop switches 42 to 44 to be pressed are grasped (the push order information may be displayed). For example, it may be during the second reel stop ON operation or during the second reel stop OFF operation. Further, when the push order notification of the three-choice push order combination is performed, it may be the first reel stop ON operation or the first reel stop OFF operation. Further, the light may be turned off after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time of these operations.

Further, the timing may be later than the time when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the timing may be the time when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed, or a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) is set from the time when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. It may be configured to turn off after a lapse of time, or it may be at the end of medal payout.

(95) The instruction monitor 68 may also be used as the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, or the payout number display unit 62. In these cases, the push order notification is performed on each display unit 60 to 62 at the timing when the push order notification is performed, while the original display of each display unit 60 to 62 is displayed at the timing when the push order notification is not performed. It is good to have a configuration to do.

When it is also used as the credit display unit 60, it is preferable that the credit display unit 60 displays the credits at least until the bet operation is performed, and then (based on the operation of the start lever 41) notifies the push order. The push order notification ends at least before the timing when the number of medals acquired (paid out) in the game increases and is updated (the timing when the medal payout starts) (the push order information is turned off). For example, it is preferable that the configuration is completed by the time when the third reel is stopped ON, and the display is switched to the credit display when the medal payout is started.

The remaining payout number display unit 61 is a display unit that displays the number of remaining payouts in the bonus. For example, the bonus state is set to a game property that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination and increases the number of medals, and then pushes the order. There are two games, one in which the remaining payout number is displayed by the remaining payout number display unit 61 and the other in which the push order notification is performed. It may not be duplicated. In this case, the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 may be generated during the bonus.

When it is also used as the payout number display unit 62, it is preferable that the push order notification ends at least before the payout medal number display of the game is started on the payout number display unit 62. For example, when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the push order notification is terminated (the push order information is turned off), and when the payout combination wins a prize, the number of payouts is displayed at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation. It is good to do. Such a configuration may be applied to the remaining payout number display unit 61.

Further, the push order notification may be performed by using these display units 60 to 62. In the game panel 25, the credit display unit 60 is arranged side by side, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is arranged in the middle, and the payout number display unit 62 is arranged in the right side (FIG. 1). The credit display unit 60 is displayed when the left stop switch 42 should be operated, the remaining payout number display unit 61 is displayed when the middle stop switch 43 should be operated, and the payout is made when the right stop switch 44 should be operated. The number-of-sheet display unit 62 may be displayed to notify the pressing order. In this case, as described above, from after the betting operation is performed to the third reel stop ON operation, the push order notification is performed on the display units 60 to 62 for any of the display units 60 to 62. Even so, where the original display function is guaranteed, the period from the time when the betting operation is performed to the time when the third reel is stopped ON is set as the period during which the push order notification is performed by the display units 60 to 62, and other than that. In the period of, it is preferable that the original display of each display unit 60 to 62 is performed.

(96) The number of continuous games in the advantageous section is managed by the number of advantageous section games AG or the like, but for example, until the predetermined number of games is exhausted (for example, 50 games) or until the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example,). (Until the replay wins three times in a row) may be set as one set and managed according to the number of sets. Specifically, in the attack mode, a predetermined number of games (50 games) is set as one set, and the number of sets is determined by lottery at the start of the attack mode or at the time of the attack mode transition lottery. Then, the attack mode is terminated when the determined number of sets is digested. In this case, when measurement conditions such as winning a specific combination are satisfied during the attack mode, the additional lottery for the number of sets is performed as an additional lottery for the attack mode. It is advisable to add the number of sets.

In such a configuration, in relation to the upper limit number of games (1500 games) in the advantageous section, for example, a predetermined number of predetermined games (for example, 50 games) can be set as one set, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, replay). If one set is to decide whether to win 3 consecutive games or to consume a specific number of games (for example, 50 games), the number of sets (30 sets) obtained by dividing the maximum number of games by the predetermined number of games or the specific number of games is used. The upper limit number of sets may be set, and the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by digesting the upper limit number of sets. In this case, it is preferable that the number of sets of advantageous sections is grasped by a predetermined counter, and the counter is forcibly terminated when the upper limit value (30) is reached. If the challenge mode and the precursor mode are added, the number of games is determined so that the total number of games of the challenge mode and the precursor mode is also added to the number of sets (for example, the total number of games of the precursor mode and the challenge mode is one set). When the counter reaches the upper limit value including these modes, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached. In addition, in a configuration in which the number of games per set can fluctuate (a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied or a specific number of games is exhausted as one set), the number of games is less than the maximum number of games in the advantageous section. The counter for the number of sets can be the upper limit.

In relation to the excess flag, it is preferable to set the excess flag when the sum of the digested set number and the undigested set number reaches the upper limit of the set number in the counter of the number of sets. ..

(97) The push order notification may be performed even in the challenge mode or the precursor mode. More specifically, when the specific gaming state is entered as an advantageous section including the attack mode, challenge mode, precursor mode, etc., the advantageous section is displayed until at least a predetermined number of push order notifications (once) occur. It may be a configuration that does not end.

(98) As a lottery result during the advantageous section, the timing of notification of the result of the additional lottery is configured to be different between the immediate addition effect and the post-addition effect depending on the set value, but the lottery results are different depending on the set value. Is not limited to the additional lottery, and may be another lottery as long as it is a lottery during an advantageous section. For example, the timing of notification of the result of the number of additional games may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the immediate addition / post-addition notification timing may be different depending on the set value according to the number of additional games. The configuration may be such that the setting difference of the addition / addition ratio is different. Further, the lottery is not limited to the instruction function, and for example, the timing of notification of the result of the BB lottery in the advantageous section may be different depending on the set value. In this case, if the number of precursor games at the time of winning the BB is different depending on the set value. It may be configured to be used. Further, the notification timing of the winning result of a small winning combination such as cherry may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be different depending on the set value.

(99) In the case of performing the post-addition effect, the first post-addition character BUP1, the second post-addition character BUP2, etc. are configured to notify the winning result, but these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. may not be displayed. .. In this case, on the premise that the additional effect includes result notification (winning notification) and content notification (winning game number notification), in the post-addition production, the result notification is at the same timing as the content notification of the post-addition effect, or slightly more than that. The configuration may be such that the result is not notified in the game in which the additional lottery is performed.

Further, in the post-addition effect, the first post-addition character BUP1, the second post-addition character BUP2, etc. are displayed when the additional lottery is won, but these characters BUP1 and BUP2 are displayed even when the addition is not won. It may be configured. In this case, the characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are characters indicating that the additional lottery has been performed. When these characters BUP1, BUP2, etc. are displayed without winning the addition, the result at the time of the content notification is such that the treasure box is empty or the number of additional games is 0. It may be configured to perform notification.

(100) As a lottery with no setting difference, the notification timing of the additional lottery is set to be different between the immediate addition effect and the post-addition effect depending on the set value, but if the lottery has no setting difference, it is not limited to the additional lottery. It may be another lottery. For example, it may be met by a lottery for the number of additional games, or the timing of notification of the result of the number of additional games may be different depending on the set value. May be different depending on the set value, or the setting difference of the immediate addition / post-addition ratio may be different. Further, the lottery is not limited to the instruction function, and for example, the timing of notification of the result of the BB lottery in the normal section or the advantageous section may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the number of precursor games at the time of winning the BB is set. It may be configured to be different depending on the value. Further, the notification timing of the winning result of a small winning combination such as cherry may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the notification timing in the winning game may be different depending on the set value.

(101) Based on the fact that the immediate addition effect was continuous as the addition effect in the special zone, the table counter ATK was added to switch the addition notification timing table, but based on the continuation of the post-addition effect. The additional notification timing table may be switched. In this case, it is preferable that the table counter ATK is initialized (1) based on the occurrence of the immediate loading effect.

In addition, the continuity of the immediate-added effect and the post-addition effect is not limited to the special zone, and as the additional effect that occurred during the attack mode, the immediate-on effect is continuous and the post-addition effect is continuous. The notification timing table may be switched.

In addition, the trigger for switching the additional notification timing table is not limited to the continuity of the selected effects, and the additional notification timing table is used when the additions by the same type of small winning combination are continuous (for example, when the additions of the cherry triggers are continuous). The table counter ATK may be initialized when additions by other types of small winning combinations are continuous.

(102) The additional notification timing table is switched by the continuous immediate addition effect, but even if the immediate addition effect is not continuous, the additional notification timing table is simply switched depending on the number of times the immediate addition effect is selected. May be. In this case, for example, when the number of selections of the immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is 1 to 3, the first addition notification timing table is selected, and when the number of selections of the immediate addition effect (table counter ATK) is 4 to 5 times. Settings based on the selected additional notification timing table, such as the fourth additional notification timing table being selected and the first additional notification timing table being selected if the number of times the immediate addition effect is selected (table counter ATK) is 6 or more. The difficulty level of guessing the value may not change uniformly depending on the number of times (the difficulty level increases as the number of times increases, or the difficulty level decreases as the number of times increases), but may not change uniformly. ..

(103) The configuration is such that the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing, which is selected by increasing the number of consecutive times of the immediate addition effect, is reduced, but it is selected by increasing the number of consecutive times of the immediate addition effect. The configuration may be such that the difficulty of estimating the set value based on the additional notification timing becomes high.

(104) In the configuration for switching the additional notification timing table, the initial value of the table counter ATK may be different depending on the transition to the specialized zone. Specifically, for example, if the trigger for transition to the specialized zone is watermelon, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1, while if the trigger for transition to the specialized zone is cherry, the initial value of the table counter ATK is set to 1. The value may be set to 3 or the like. By doing so, it is possible to make the difficulty of guessing the set value different based on the opportunity to shift to the specialized zone.

(105) The special zone that shifts when the cherry is triggered is a special zone where the special addition notification timing table with a large difference in the setting of the immediate / post-load ratio is used, but it shifts to the special zone when the watermelon triggers. It may be configured to move to the specialized zone at another specific role opportunity.

(106) The additional notification timing table is configured to be different between the specialized zone that shifts when the cherry is triggered and the specialized zone that shifts when another specific role triggers, but the additional notification timing table used is different. The zone is not limited to two types, and may be three types or more zones may be set.

(107) In the game playability in which the set value is predicted by the immediate addition / post-addition ratio, the addition effect may be generated at a timing different from that of the immediate addition effect and the post-addition effect. For example, the playability may be such that the set value is predicted by the selection rate including the effect via the precursor.

(108) At the end of the special zone or the end of the attack mode, the information regarding the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is output, but the addition that is the target of the ratio occurs during these special zones and the attack mode. If there is no such thing, that is, if the watermelon or cherry is not won, the information regarding the immediate / post-addition ratio may not be output.

(109) Information on the notification timing, such as the immediate / post-addition ratio, may be output by lottery. For example, the output lottery may be performed with a predetermined probability at the end of the attack mode, and when the output lottery is won, the information regarding the notification timing may be output. The winning probability of the output lottery is arbitrary, but the winning probability may differ depending on the set value. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability may be, and vice versa. Further, the winning probability may be different depending on the number of digested games in the attack mode (advantageous section). In this case, the winning probability may be higher as the number of digested games is larger, or vice versa.

(110) The output timing of the information related to the notification timing such as the immediate addition / post-addition ratio is not limited to the end of the special zone or the end of the attack mode, and may be configured to be output at other timings. For example, the output may be based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section reaching a predetermined number of games (for example, 1000 games) before the upper limit. Further, it may be configured to be output at the start or end of the bonus state won during the attack mode, or during the bonus state. Further, it may be configured so that it can be output when a specific combination is won (for example, a cherry is won) in the attack mode.

(111) In the configuration for outputting information related to the notification timing such as the immediate addition / post-addition ratio, the additional lottery may be configured to include the information that is not won in the additional lottery. Further, when outputting information regarding the notification timing of the additional effect triggered by the winning combination such as cherry, the information including the presence or absence of the missing may be output.

(112) In the configuration for outputting the information regarding the immediate addition / post-addition ratio, only the ratio may be output, and the information regarding the number of times of each immediate addition effect and the post-addition effect may not be output. By doing so, for example, it is possible to avoid suppressing the impression that the player receives from being deteriorated due to the small number of additional winnings.

(113) In the notification mode selection effect, the immediate loading effect is selected when the reel on which the missing reel occurs is selected. However, the post-loading effect may be selected when the reel on which the missing reel occurs is selected. The configuration may be such that the effect via the precursor is selected. In addition, in relation to the reels that are missed and the reels that are not missed, the selection operation and the execution timing of the selected additional notification are associated with each other. The selection operation may be associated with the execution timing of the additional notification to be selected according to the high possibility of the above. More specifically, for example, when a reel having the highest possibility of being missed (a reel having a small number of winning symbols) is selected and operated, the immediate placement effect may be selected.

(114) In the notification mode selection effect, the execution timing of the additional effect is selected by the stop operation of the first reel, but the execution timing is selected by the stop operation of the second reel or the stop operation of the third reel. May be good. Further, in a predetermined reel, a first specific symbol, a second specific symbol, and a third specific symbol, which cannot be stopped at the same time, are provided, and the execution timing is selected depending on which specific symbol is stopped. May be good.

(115) In the situation where the post-addition effect is selected by the correction process, the data of each post-addition effect is individually changed to the immediate addition effect, but each data can be uniformly changed to the immediate addition effect. It may be configured as. Further, the configuration may be such that it is possible to select whether or not to change to the immediate addition effect according to the type of the addition trigger of the data to be added later. In addition, the configuration may be such that it is possible to select whether or not to change to the immediate addition effect depending on the number of additional games.

(116) Although the data for which the post-addition effect is selected is changed to the immediate addition effect by the correction process, the data may be changed to the precursory effect, or the data for which the precursory effect is selected. May be configured to be changed to an immediate effect or a post-installation effect.

(117) The configuration of the individual area to be stored when the post-addition effect or the effect via the precursor is selected / determined is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of games that can be stored may be less than or greater than the above. Also, the number of individual data can be changed.

(118) Regarding the individual areas for storing the additional data, if a storage opportunity (selection of post-addition effect, etc.) occurs that is larger than the number of individual areas provided, the data in one or more of the individual areas will be recorded. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the number of additional games this time is added. In the case of a configuration in which data in a plurality of areas are added, the number of additional games to be added this time may be divided evenly and added, or may be divided in a biased manner and added.

(119) When the post-addition effect is selected, the first post-addition character BUP1, the second post-addition character BUP2, etc. are displayed according to the addition winning opportunity, but these post-addition characters are the above. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured to display different characters according to the number of additional games.

(120) The configuration in which the execution timing of the additional effect is different is not limited to the effect at the time of winning the additional lottery, and may be applied when the additional lottery is not won.

(121) In a configuration in which the execution timing of the additional effect is determined based on the player's selection operation, the execution timing is different from the execution timing selected by the player by the selection operation due to the relationship between the number of additional games and the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. It may be configured to execute the additional effect at the timing. More specifically, for example, in a situation where the maximum number of games in the advantageous section is 50 games later (the number of executed games is 1450 games), if 100 games more than the 50 games are added, an immediate addition effect is produced. Even if is selected, an additional effect is generated as a post-addition effect. By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the addition of the maximum number of games or more occurs and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by making the addition effect at a timing different from the selection operation of oneself.

In addition, this configuration may be used for suggesting a set value. More specifically, the additional effect is generated with a predetermined probability at a timing different from the execution timing by the player's selection operation. Then, when the set value is the first set value (for example, setting 1), the addition effect is executed at the timing different from the selection operation with the first probability (for example, 10%) as the predetermined probability, and the set value is the first. When the second set value (for example, setting 6) is different from the first set value, the second probability (for example, 80%) different from the first probability is added as the above-mentioned predetermined probability at a timing different from the selection operation. The configuration is to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new playability such as predicting a set value by generating an additional effect at an execution timing different from that of the own selection operation.

Further, when the number of games is added more than the number of empty games up to the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, the additional effect can be generated at an execution timing different from the above selection operation, and the difference is different. The probability that the additional effect will occur at the execution timing may differ depending on the set value. By doing so, when an addition exceeding the upper limit occurs, it is possible to generate a merit that the set value can be predicted, and it is possible to guarantee the excess of the upper limit due to the addition.

(122) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum increase number are provided as the forced termination conditions of the advantageous section, these forced termination conditions are not limited to the maximum number of games and the maximum increase number, and can be used as other conditions. It may be configured to include other conditions. Other conditions include, for example, when the number of winnings of a predetermined result (bell, replay, multiple types of payout results, multiple types of replays, etc.) in an advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or consecutive winnings. One forced termination condition is when the number of times reaches the upper limit, for example, one forced termination condition when the number of deviation results in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or when the number of consecutive times reaches the upper limit. For example, when the number of bonus wins in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit or when the number of consecutive wins reaches the upper limit, one compulsory termination condition can be set, for example, digestion after shifting to the advantageous section. One compulsory termination condition is set when the time reaches a predetermined time, or for example, one compulsion is performed when the number of occurrences of a predetermined effect in an advantageous section reaches the upper limit or when the number of consecutive occurrences reaches the upper limit. It may be an end condition.

In these cases, it is possible to predict in advance that the above-mentioned forced termination condition is satisfied from the current game content (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG), and it may be beneficial for the player such as suggesting a set value based on the prediction result. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a specific process for presenting information or giving a privilege is executed.

(123) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions of the upper limit game number and the upper limit increase number are set, if it is specified in advance that each forced termination condition is satisfied, the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, respectively. If the excess flag is set and the additional condition is satisfied after that, the number of additional games is added to the total number of extinct games TEG, but a counter that stores the excess for each forced termination condition is used. It may be provided and each may be stored separately. For example, when the first excess flag is set, the number of additional games after that is added to the first total number of extinct games TEG1 provided in the various counter areas 106e, and when the second excess flag is set. May be configured to add the number of additional games thereafter to the second total number of disappearing games TEG2 provided in the various counter areas 106e. In this case, when both the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the first excess flag corresponding to the first excess flag among the first total number of disappearing games TEG1 and the second total number of disappearing games TEG2 is set. 1 Total number of extinct games It is preferable to add the number of games to TEG1. By doing so, it is possible to simplify the processing for correction when the situation in which the second excess flag is set is resolved after the fact.

(124) The value and relationship between the upper limit number of games and the upper limit increase number are not limited to the above, the upper limit number of games may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games, and the upper limit increase number is less than 2400. However, it may be more than 2400 sheets. However, in terms of playability such as aiming to increase the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section, it is better that the net increase number of the advantageous section is specified so that the upper limit increase number is reached when the advantageous section of the upper limit game number is exhausted. Specifically, it is preferable that the net increase number is specified so that the maximum number of games can be reached with the number of games smaller than the maximum number of games.

(125) In the advantageous section, the attack mode and the like are configured to manage the presence / absence of continuation based on the number of continuations based on the number of remaining games, but the configuration may be configured to manage the presence / absence of continuation based on the number of payouts. More specifically, for example, in the above configuration, 50 games are set as the initial game when shifting to the attack mode, and the attack mode is terminated by digesting the 50 games. At the time of transition, 100 cards may be set as the initial payout number, and the attack mode may be terminated when the 100 cards or more are paid out. In this case, when an addition occurs, it is preferable to add the number of payouts instead of the number of games. Further, instead of the number of payouts, the number of increase / decrease obtained by subtracting the number of used sheets from the number of payouts may be specified.

(126) When calculating the increase / decrease number ZM in the advantageous section, the number of game media used in each game is subtracted from the number of game media paid out in each game, but the calculation is reflected in the advantageous section. It may be configured to have a game and a game that is not reflected. For example, at the time of winning the replay, the deduction becomes zero, so the configuration may be such that the above-mentioned advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is not calculated. By doing so, it is possible to expect a significant effect of reducing the processing load as compared with the configuration in which each game is calculated. In particular, since the configuration is mainly calculated in a high RT state with a high probability of winning a replay, the reduction effect can be great.

Further, in the advantageous section, the number of payouts and the number of sheets used in a predetermined number of bets may not be reflected. The configuration may be such that the number of payouts and the number of cards used in the game performed in the 1-bet mode are not reflected. In this case, for example, in the CB state in which the 2-bet mode is the specified number, the game may be reflected in the calculation of the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM as a game caused by the CB winning in the 3-bet mode. Further, for example, when the bonus winning flag is set, the number of payouts and the number of used cards may be reflected regardless of the number of bets. By doing so, the carry-over with the bonus winning flag set. By continuing the state endlessly, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act such as exhausting the number of games that substantially exceeds the maximum number of games.

(127) The first excess flag is set when it is specified that the maximum number of games is exceeded, and the second excess flag is set when it is specified that the maximum increase number is exceeded. Depending on the case, the type of special notification to be generated (content of the setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of the special notification are different to make the advantage for the player different, but this is the configuration to make the advantage different. The contents may be different from each other, such as suggesting a set value on one side and displaying a rare image on the other side. Further, the high and low of the advantage are not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, and may be reversed, the advantages may be the same or the same, and the same special notification (setting value suggestion) may be used. ) May occur.

In addition to the set excess flag, the type of special notification (contents of setting value suggestion) and the occurrence rate of special notification are different depending on the total number of extinct games TEG, which gives the player an advantage. Although the configuration is different, the advantage of reflecting the value of the total number of extinguished games TEG and the type and content of the special notification are not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and modification, but are reflected in different ones. May be. For example, the smaller the total number of extinguished games TEG (the smaller the addition after the identification that the upper limit is reached), the more advantageous the special notification for the player may be generated.

(128) The type of special notification (contents of setting value suggestion) and special notification that occur depending on whether the identification of exceeding the upper limit number of games or the identification of exceeding the upper limit increase number is performed first. The configuration is such that the advantage for the player is different by making the occurrence rate of the difference different, but the configuration for making the advantage different is not limited to this, one suggests the set value and the other displays a rare image. Etc., each may have different contents. Further, the high and low of the advantage are not limited to those of the above-described embodiment and the modified example, and may be reversed, the advantages may be the same or the same, and the same special notification (setting value suggestion) may be used. ) May occur.

(129) The net increase in the number of sheets for each state is not limited to the above. For example, the net increase in the number of sheets when the attack mode is digested in the high RT state (about +1.90 in the seventh embodiment) is not limited to that of the embodiment or the modification, and is per game. It may be less than 2 or more than 2, and for example, a net increase of 3 or 5, 10 or 14 may be set per game.

(130) A configuration in which a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery based on a winning combination (for example, duplication result with the second BB, strong cherry duplication 2, weak cherry duplication 2, etc.) whose winning probability differs depending on the set value is not performed. However, it may be configured to be performed. In this case, even in a bonus state based on a winning combination (for example, a second BB state based on strong cherry duplication 2) in which the winning probabilities differ depending on the set value, a transition lottery such as an attack mode or an additional lottery may be performed.

(131) When it is specified in advance that a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum increase number are satisfied, it occurs according to the number of advantageous section games AG when the specification is performed. By making the type of special notification different, the advantage for the player may be different. For example, the advantage of the special notification to be generated when the identification of reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number is performed before the predetermined number of games (1000 games) or after that. The type may be different, and if the number of games is earlier than the predetermined number, a special notification advantageous to the player may be generated.

(132) A configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the maximum number of games and the maximum increase number are set, and by satisfying one of the forced termination conditions, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated even if the other forced termination condition is not satisfied. However, the configuration may be such that the forced termination is performed after waiting for any of the forced termination conditions to be satisfied.

(133) Depending on the game situation after it is specified that the upper limit increase number is reached, if the upper limit increase number is not reached, the second excess flag may be cleared in the remaining number management process. In this case, the information that the upper limit increase number has been specified is temporarily stored, and the situation that the upper limit increase number is not specified at all is specified once. It is preferable to configure the processing to be different depending on the situation. For example, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that the advantage and the type of the special notification when the upper limit increase number is reached after that are different. In addition, when the advantageous section is terminated without being forcibly terminated (without reaching the upper limit increase number) and the information that the above identification has been performed is temporarily stored, the set value is suggested. On the other hand, if the above specification is not performed, the setting value suggestion may not be performed, or vice versa.

(134) The maximum number of games has been explained on the premise that the maximum number of games may not be reached depending on the game situation after it is specified that the maximum number of games will be reached. However, the maximum number of games may not be reached depending on the game situation after it is specified that the maximum number of games will be reached. For example, if the subtraction process of the remaining number of games ZG is performed according to the game result in the advantageous section, the subtraction process is performed even when it is specified that the maximum number of games is reached. Depending on the winning situation of the game result, an event may occur in which the maximum number of games is not reached. In this case, depending on the game situation after the specification that the upper limit increase number is reached, each invention in the case where the upper limit increase number is not reached is specified after the upper limit game number is specified. It may be applied when the maximum number of games is not reached depending on the game situation.

(135) When the advantageous section ends without reaching the upper limit increase number after the notification that the second excess flag has been set is performed, the configuration is set to be more advantageous than the case where it is not. When the notification is performed, the configuration may be more disadvantageous than the case where the notification is not performed.

(136) When the game is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit increase number without digesting the notification amount of the remaining games in the advantageous section, the notification amount is compensated by the special notification, but the compensation is not performed. On the contrary, it may be configured to generate a special notification in which it is advantageous that there is no notification portion. The number of remaining games to be notified differs greatly depending on whether the additional notification is selected as the immediate addition notification or the post-addition notification. The case where the number is small is the case where a large number of post-addition notifications are selected. Then, at least when there is a large amount of notification, it is considered that many productions have been performed (flashy productions have been performed), and the amount of production and the degree of liveliness are subtracted from the advantage of special notifications ( If a lot of production is occurring, it may be configured so that the compensation is not performed or the compensation is reduced by that amount as the one that is fully enjoyed.

(137) When the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is reached, when the sixth special notification based on the excess amount is executed, if the second excess flag is set, the sixth special notification lottery is not won. Even if it is, it is configured to be advantageous for the player by treating it as a winning, but for example, the processing for the sixth special notification is performed using the sixth special notification A lottery table instead of the sixth special notification B lottery table. Etc., it may be configured to perform advantageous processing. Further, even if the second excess flag is set, if the fifth special notification is executed, the advantage is not increased too much by not treating the non-winning as a winning, but for example, the sixth special notification B lottery. A process for the sixth special notification may be performed using a lottery table in which it is more difficult to narrow down the set values than the table. Further, the configuration may be such that the sixth special notification is set in consideration of not only the presence / absence of the execution of the fifth special notification but also the number of executions and the execution mode of the fifth special notification. For example, the fifth special notification is predetermined. If the number of executions is more than the number, the sixth special notification may not be executed, and if the number is less than the predetermined number, the sixth special notification may be executed.

(138) In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as an upper limit number of games and an upper limit increase number are provided, the advantage is different by changing the content of the special notification depending on which forced termination condition is used. If the maximum number of games is forcibly terminated, the difference number up to the maximum increase number is added, and if the maximum number of games is forcibly terminated, the number of games up to the maximum number of games is added. If you forcibly end the game, the number of games up to the maximum number of games will be added, but if you forcibly end with the maximum number of games, the difference number up to the maximum number of games will not be added, or vice versa. The configuration may be such that the situation until the forced termination condition of is satisfied is taken into consideration.

(139) When the game is forcibly terminated at the maximum number of games, the number of remaining payouts is continuously displayed in the special section in consideration of the difference number up to the maximum increase number. If the remaining increase number is not displayed (at least at the time of forced termination), it is not necessary to display the number of payouts in the special section, and if the maximum increase number is forcibly terminated, the maximum number of games can be displayed in the special section. The number of remaining games is continuously displayed in consideration of the number of games in the above, but if the number of remaining games is not displayed during the advantageous section (at least at the time of forced termination), the number of remaining games in the special section is displayed. Does not have to be displayed. In addition, whether or not the display is continued may be different depending on whether or not the display is displayed at the time of forced termination.

(140) When the game is forcibly terminated at the maximum number of games, the continuity of the special section is managed by the difference number up to the maximum increase number in the special section, and the remaining payout number is displayed. The continuity of the special section may be managed by the number of increases, and the remaining number of increases may be displayed. In this case, it becomes easy for the special section to continue until the transition to a state where an increase in the game medium can be expected.

(141) The number of extinction preparation games EJG and the total number of extinction games TEG are managed separately in the advantageous section corresponding counter area 209 and the normal section corresponding counter area 210, respectively, but both are in the advantageous section corresponding counter area 209. It may be managed in the counter area 210 corresponding to the normal section, or it may be managed in another area. The information about the excess may be used only for special notification, etc., and may not be deleted at the time of forced termination, or the information about the excess may be deleted after shifting to the normal section, and the information about the excess may be deleted. May be maintained in the normal section until the transition to the next advantageous section (deleted at the transition to the next advantageous section), and the information about the excess portion may be subjected to a predetermined reset process (reset button operation, RAM clear). It may be configured to be maintained (erased based on a predetermined reset process) until the operation, power ON / OFF, etc. are performed.

(142) Number of extinction preparation games The number of EJG games is moved to the total number of extinction games TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag, but it is moved to the total number of extinction games TEG by at least the forced termination. Any configuration may be used. In the case of a configuration in which the game is moved at the time of forced termination, the special notification during the advantageous section may be performed based on the number of extinction preparation games EJG, and the special notification at the time of forced termination or thereafter may be performed based on the total number of extinction games TEG.

(143) Number of extinction preparation games The number of EJG games is moved to the total number of extinction games TEG based on the setting of the first excess flag, but it is also possible to manage them separately without moving them. Good. In this case, the excess amount when only the second excess flag is set is managed as the number of extinction preparation games EJG, and when the first excess flag is set (when only the first excess flag is set). It is possible to manage the excess amount of the first excess flag and the second excess flag (when the second excess flag is set) as the total number of extinguished games TEG. Further, it is possible to grasp the difference in the number of excess games that occurs after the second excess flag is set and before the first excess flag is set as the number of extinction preparation games EJG.

(144) Number of extinction preparation games Total number of extinction games via EJG Information on excess stored in TEG and total number of extinction games stored in TEG without going through EJG It may be configured to be managed separately (for example, in a separate counter or in a separate storage area). Even if it is managed by the same counter (total number of disappearing games TEG), at least for special notification based on the total number of disappearing games TEG, such as storing the boundary value between the part that has passed and the part that has not passed. At the time of processing, it suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the number of extinction preparation games is via the EJG.

(145) A special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified remains large and is forcibly terminated by the upper limit increase number, or a special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller. , The more the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is a better number, the more advantageous the special notification is. It may be a configuration in which the above is performed, and it may be more advantageous when the number of games is forcibly terminated by the upper limit increase number or the upper limit number of games in a situation where there is no remaining number of games that have been notified.

(146) A special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified remains large and is forcibly terminated by the upper limit increase number, or a special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller. , In a configuration in which the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is a better number, the more advantageous the special notification is, the number of remaining games that is advantageous is clearly indicated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. At the same time, the display of the number of remaining games may be updated (for example, updated by a countdown) at the time of digesting each game toward the specified number of games.

(147) A special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified remains large and is forcibly terminated by the upper limit increase number, or a special notification that is more advantageous as the number of remaining games that have been notified at the time of forced termination is smaller. , In a configuration where the more the number of remaining games notified at the time of forced termination is a better number, the more advantageous the special notification is, the number of games remaining at the time of forced termination is not the number of remaining games at the time of forced termination, but the upper limit increase number such as transition to the bonus state is reached. It may be configured to perform special notification processing as the number of remaining games when a specific condition is satisfied, which is determined before the maximum increase number is reached.

(148) In the configuration in which the first adjustment processing to the third adjustment processing are performed, in particular, the configuration in which the subsequent increase / decrease number is predicted based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM can be diverted to other processes, for example, the remaining number management. If the total expected increase / decrease number SM is predicted based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM in the processing, the remaining increase / decrease expected number NM may be calculated from the advantageous section remaining number of games ZG and the maximum increase / decrease number MM.

(149) The second adjustment process is configured to be activated every time the second process for section display is performed, but may be configured to be activated when the correction condition is satisfied, for example. The correction conditions include, for example, when the deviation from the total expected maximum expected number of sheets SMM predicted in the first adjustment process exceeds a predetermined value, or when the gaming state (RT state) shifts to another state. is there.

(150) If it is found that the maximum number of games will be reached during the return to the high RT state after the end of the bonus at the time of winning the bonus at the end of the advantageous section, from the end of the bonus until the maximum number of games is reached. Although the number of games in the above is added to the number of precursor games, the average number of games in the returned state may be added to the number of precursor games. In this case, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the number of games until the maximum number of games is reached.

(151) If it is found that the maximum number of games will be reached during the return to the high RT state after the end of the bonus at the time of winning the bonus at the end of the profit section, from the end of the bonus until the maximum number of games is reached. In addition to the configuration in which the number of games in the above is added to the number of precursor games, a configuration may be made in which a special notification such as a setting value suggestion is generated in order to follow the forced termination due to a dent. Further, in this case, a configuration in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated without waiting for the execution of the maximum number of games (specifically, a configuration in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the end of the bonus) may be used. Further, when the upper limit number of games is reached during the return state, the advantageous section may be extended until the return to the high RT state.

(152) The challenge mode can be extended based on the fact that the duplicate target role that triggers the bonus lottery is won at the end of the challenge mode, but the mode to be extended is not limited to the challenge mode. It may be a mode in another advantageous section such as an attack mode or a VB mode.

(153) When the extension processing of the mode is performed based on winning the duplicate target role at the end of the attack mode or the VB mode, not only the number of continuations of the precursor mode and the continuous production, but also the average game until the transition to the RT state. The extension process may be performed in consideration of the number and the actual migration. That is, for example, if the actual transition of the RT state is taken into consideration, the game until the fall replay is won (the game before the fall replay is won) may be configured to be the target of the extension process.

(154) The extension process of the challenge mode has been described on the premise that the precursor mode is set and the continuous effect is finally generated based on the winning of the duplicate target combination, but the continuous effect does not occur in the precursor mode. It is also applicable to the configuration in which the precursor mode ends.

(155) At the time of winning the duplicate target role at the end of the challenge mode, the challenge mode is extended on the premise that the precursor mode is set, but the duplicate target combination is won even if the precursor mode is not set. It may be configured to perform extension processing at times.

(156) The challenge mode can be extended based on the fact that the duplicate target role is won at the end of the challenge mode, but the challenge mode is not extended and only the display continuation game of the section display is extended. May be.

(157) At the time of winning the duplicate target combination at the end of the challenge mode, a configuration for extending the second challenge mode, which is more disadvantageous than before, may be applied when extending the attack mode, the VB mode, or the like. In this case, for example, an attack mode or the like in which push order notification is likely to occur in a normal state is referred to as a first attack mode or the like, and the probability of occurrence of push order notification is lower than that in the first attack mode for the portion extended by the extension process. It may be configured to have two attack modes. Instead of a configuration in which the advantage is lowered according to the probability of occurrence of the push order notification, or in addition, the advantage of the target combination to be notified when the push order notification occurs is different (for example, the first number in the first attack mode). Even if the push order corresponding to the first result in which the payout occurs is notified, and in the second attack mode, the push order corresponding to the second result in which the second number is paid out less than the first number is notified). Good.

(158) The advantageous section is configured to be initialized not only by the forced termination in the section display second process but also by the RAM clear process (reset process) by the manager of the game hall or the like. It may be a configuration to be performed. For example, the initialization process may be performed when the predetermined combination (forced termination combination) is won or the predetermined combination winning is established in the advantageous section, and the initialization process may be performed at the time of forced termination.

(159) In the configuration in which the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is performed after the start condition after the transition to the advantageous section is satisfied, the start condition is not limited to the above, and at least the first start is performed. It suffices if the configuration is such that the push order notification as a condition can occur and the game medium can be expected to increase as the second start condition, and these first start conditions are sufficient. When and the second start condition are satisfied at the same time (in the same game), the start condition may be satisfied.

In addition, when the bonus and the attack mode are won at the same time, the start condition may be satisfied at the time of the bonus winning (at the time of winning the attack mode) in addition to the time of winning the bonus, or at the end of the bonus (at the time of notification of winning the attack mode). ) May satisfy the start condition, or may satisfy the start condition when the transition to the attack mode occurs after the end of the bonus.

(160) The display of the number of games in the preliminary section (display based on the number of games MG before the start) is not limited to the above, and is, for example, in place of or in addition to the above configuration, depending on the value of the number of games MG before the start. The background color may change (for example, 0 to 99 is a blue background, 100 to 199 is a yellow background, 200 to is a red background, and the like).

(161) Although the description has been made on the premise that the number of medals held in each game can be reduced in the preliminary section, the configuration may include a section in which the number of medals held increases in the preliminary section. For example, if a bonus is won during the advance section and the attack mode is not won (when the situation where push order notification can occur does not occur), the start condition is not satisfied, but the medal is held during the advance section. The number of medals can be expected to increase.

(162) The ball ejection rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball ejection rate and setting 6 has the highest ball ejection rate. However, depending on the set value, the ball ejection rate (game medium) Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase / decrease and the mode of increase / decrease of are changed. For example, the payout rates of some of the set values may be the same, such as the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 being the same, but the payout rates of the other set values may be different. Further, the settings 1, 3 and 5 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is high, and the settings 2, 4 and 6 may have a configuration in which the rate of increase / decrease in ball output is low. In addition, in settings 1 and 5, the amount of balls ejected increases by a predetermined amount in a short time and decreases by a predetermined amount in a long time, and in settings 2, 3 and 4, it takes longer than the settings 1 and 5 to increase the predetermined amount. The reduction of a predetermined amount may take less time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured such that the increase or decrease of the number of balls is hardly generated. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(163) A slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and for example, five reels and five corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Further, the slot machine in which the effective line is set to 1 line in the situation where the number of bets is 3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

(164) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine (so-called ball-using rotating cylinder type game machine) having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-using rotating game machine, even if each of the above inventions is applied as a suggestion or teaching effect of a configuration having a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball ejection rate or the like. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high probability state and a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is high or low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and entry into a predetermined ball entry portion. In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball ratio is high or low, the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 as the high ball entry state.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in each of the following feature groups are "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as a kind of game machine. In these game machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. It is known that a player is given a privilege according to the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, the start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet on a slot machine. Then, the internal lottery is carried out, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. Then, the stop result of the reel is the internal lottery. When the result corresponds to the above-mentioned result, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). It is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic AA group>
Features AA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is executed based on a predetermined specific result, and the transition lottery means (the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the notification means, and
With
The specific game state notification means is
In a predetermined first aspect, a process of starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, in the main control device 101 at the time of the first stop OFF operation, the display of the section indicator is started is executed. Function) and
In a second aspect different from the first aspect, a process of starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the main control device 101). Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the mode shifts to the specific gaming state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first mode or in the second mode. By doing so, it is possible to fully expect the effect of the game by using the specific notification means such that the notification is simply started at the transition to the specific game state and the notification is ended at the end of the specific game state. Is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, for example, the notification by the specific notification means is terminated by winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means, or by playing the specific game state. It is possible to give information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state to the player who played the game in the start / end mode of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee the equality among the players depending on the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means, and to secure the superiority to the player who played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the "specific game state notification means", the notification is started by turning on the specific notification means based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and the specific game state ends. Based on this, the configuration is such that the notification is terminated by turning off the specific notification means, but simply "the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, and the specific notification means is specified. The configuration may be such that the notification by the specific notification means is terminated based on the termination of the gaming state. This also applies to the "specific game state notification means" in the following other features.

Features AA2. Depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state notification means may start or end the notification by the specific notification means by the first means, or start or end the notification by the specific notification means by the second means. The gaming machine according to feature AA1, which is characterized in that it can be different from the case of ending.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means differ depending on the advantage of the specific gaming state depending on whether the notification is performed in the first mode or the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the specific notification means when the notification by the specific notification means starts / ends.

Features AA3. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is a predetermined first predetermined state, the first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means.
When the specific gaming state is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the feature AA1 or the feature AA2 characterized in that the notification by the specific notification means is started or ended by the second means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, as the advantage of the specific gaming state, the first aspect and the second aspect differ depending on the type of the specific gaming state. Since it is important to shift to any state in the playability by the stop operation mode and mode notification of the first result and the second result, by performing the above, the notification of the specific notification means can be performed. It is possible to suitably increase the interest in starting. Further, at the end of the notification, if the notification of the specific notification means is terminated in a mode associated with the information of which state, the lingering sound of these states is achieved through the end mode of the notification of the specific notification means. It becomes possible to entertain.

Features AA4. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
The specific game state notification means is
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the first means starts the notification by the specific notification means, and the notification is started.
The gaming machine according to feature AA3, wherein when the specific gaming state is the second predetermined state, notification by the specific notification means is started by the second means.

According to the above configuration, among the features AA3, the effect at the start of notification can be preferably achieved.

Features AA5. The specific gaming state notification means performs notification during the specific gaming state in the same manner depending on whether the first means starts or ends the notification and the second means starts or ends the notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA4.

According to the above configuration, since the notification mode is the same during the specific gaming state, the function of ensuring equality among the players can be achieved by the notification of the specific notification means, and when the point where the notification mode of the specific notification means is different is started. By aggregating at the end of or at the end, it becomes easier to understand the timing to be noted, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification means.

Features AA6. The specific gaming state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means in either the first aspect or the second aspect according to the content of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA5, which comprises a start-time setting means (a function of executing the section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether or not to play.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first aspect or the notification is started in the second aspect. As a result, it is possible to raise the interest in which mode is used, and thus to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention.

The above-mentioned "according to the content of the specific gaming state" is, for example, "as the specific gaming state, a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode) having different advantages for the player". Etc.), depending on whether the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. ” It may be expressed using the type of state. Further, it may be associated with the number of continuous games or the like, such as "according to the length of the specific gaming state".

Features AA7. The specific gaming state notification means notifies by the specific notification means in either the first aspect or the second aspect according to the advantage of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA6, which comprises a start-time setting means (a function of executing a section display first process by the main control device 101) for setting whether to start.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the notification is started in the first aspect or the notification is started in the second aspect. As a result, it is possible to raise the interest in which mode is used, and thus to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention.

Further, when this configuration is applied to the above feature AA6, the "start setting means" of the feature AA6 may be read as the "start setting means" of the present configuration, and the "start setting means" of the feature AA6 may be read as "start setting means". The "first start setting means" may be used, and the "start setting means" of the present configuration may be read as the "second start setting means". That is, when the "starting setting means" overlap in applying each feature, one "starting setting means" may be limited by the configuration of the other "starting setting means", or both "starting setting means" may be used. A configuration in which "starting setting means" coexist may be used. The relationship of limitation or duplication of each means is the same for each of the following features.

Features AA8. When the notification of the specific notification means is started or ended by the first means, the notification is started or ended at the first timing as the first aspect, and the specific notification is started or ended by the second means. When the notification of the means is started or ended, the second aspect is that the notification is started or ended at a second timing different from the first timing. Features AA1 to AA7 The gaming machine according to any one of.

The mode of starting / ending the notification of the specific notification means includes a difference in display contents (different colors, different images, etc.), a difference in sound, etc., in addition to a difference in timing. The notification start / end timing of the specific notification means is different from that of the second aspect. Therefore, it is possible to make other differences (differences in display contents, sounds, etc.) the same, and the first means and the second means share the effect data at the start / end of the notification of the specific notification means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects of each of the above features with a simple configuration.

Features AA9. The second timing is a timing after the first timing, and when the notification of the specific notification means is started at the second timing, the specific notification means is started at the first timing. The gaming machine according to feature AA8, wherein the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the notification of the above is started.

According to the above configuration, if the notification start timing on the rear side is more advantageous for the player, it is preferable that the notification start is later, and it is possible to enjoy a feeling of excitement such as whether or not the notification is started for a long time. It becomes.

Features AA10. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific result is caused by stopping the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position. The start game is a game in which the privilege corresponding to the above can be granted by the privilege granting means.
The specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means at least at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game.
The gaming machine according to feature AA9, wherein the first timing and the second timing are included in the start game.

According to the above configuration, since the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started is more limited, it is difficult for the effect to be delayed in the game such as whether or not the notification is performed. In addition, by setting the end of the timing at which the notification by the specific notification means is started, the points to be noted regarding whether or not the notification by the specific notification means is performed (whether or not the transition lottery is won) are aggregated. If it contributes to the improvement of attention and the rear timing is more advantageous for the player as in the feature AA9, the notification is started at the front timing and a sense of security is obtained. It is possible to realize playability such as whether or not the notification is not started until the timing on the rear side and a feeling of excitement is experienced.

Features AA11. The first means starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of the first stop operation means among the plurality of the stop operation means.
The second means starts notification by the specific notification means based on the operation of the second stop operation means operated after the first stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA10, characterized in that it is terminated.

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is started or ended according to the operation of the plurality of stop operation means. In this way, for example, the stop operation means is operated with expectation while hoping that the notification by the specific notification means is started or does not end, that is, the specific gaming state is reached or the specific gaming state is continued. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to increase the fun of the operation of the stop operation means as each game progresses.

If the above configuration is applied to the feature AA6, the following effects are particularly exhibited.

Since the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the destination of the stopped operation means to be operated, in a game in which the notification by the specific notification means can be started, the degree of expectation is gradually changed. Each stop operation means can be operated. In addition, the stop operation means on the rear side is considered from the game nature that the corresponding orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is stopped by stopping all the orbiting bodies. It is more likely that the operation of is closer to completion of the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result. Then, it is possible to link the degree of perfection of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started and the content of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform notification by a specific notification means utilizing the relationship with the pattern stopped on each orbiting body, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. ..

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature AA7, the following effects are particularly exhibited.

Since the advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means may differ depending on the destination of the stopped operation means to be operated, the degree of expectation is gradually changed in the game in which the notification by the specific notification means can be started. However, each stop operation means can be operated. In addition, the stop operation means on the rear side is considered from the game nature that the corresponding orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of each stop operation means, and the pattern combination corresponding to the game result is stopped by stopping all the orbiting bodies. It is more likely that the operation of is closer to completion of the pattern combination corresponding to the above game result. Then, it is possible to link the degree of perfection of the pattern combination corresponding to the game result at the timing when the notification of the specific notification means is started and the advantage of the specific game state to be notified by the specific notification means. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform notification by a specific notification means utilizing the relationship with the pattern stopped on each orbiting body, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the notification. ..

Features AA12. The stop operating means can be displaced from the initial position to the operating position.
The drive control means drives and controls the stop operation means so as to stop the corresponding orbiting body based on the operation from the initial position to the operation position.
Based on the fact that the predetermined stop operation means is operated from the initial position to the operation position as the first aspect according to the advantage of the specific gaming state when the notification by the specific notification means is started. It is set whether to start the notification by the specific notification means or, as the second aspect, start the notification by the specific notification means based on the return of the predetermined stop operation means from the operation position to the initial position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA11, which comprises a start setting means (a function of executing a section display first process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means is started based on the operation of the stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position to stop the orbiting body, and the stop operation means is operated to the operation position. After that (after the orbiting body is stopped), the notification by the specific notification means may be started based on returning to the initial position, and the advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified by the specific notification means is different for each. ing. By doing so, it becomes possible to start the notification by the specific notification means in relation to the act of stopping each orbiting body and the afterglow after the stop, and the notification of the specific notification means is started. The degree of attention to this is more preferably increased.

Features AA13. The specific gaming state notification means is described in either the first aspect or the second aspect according to the content of the specific gaming state that was the notification target when the notification by the specific notification means is terminated. It is characterized by having an end time setting means (a function of executing a process of ending the advantageous section display in the section display first process of the main control device 101) for setting whether to end the notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA12.

According to the above configuration, depending on the content of the specific gaming state that has been carried out, whether the notification is terminated in the first aspect or the notification is terminated in the second aspect differs. By doing so, for example, when the content of the specific game state may not be what the player wants (for example, when the game ends in a short number of games), the content of the specific game state is the player. It is possible to expect an effect at the end of the game by making the notification end mode by the specific notification means different depending on whether it was what was desired (such as when the game was continued for a long number of games). It becomes.

Features AA14. Content notification means (a function of executing the additional notification effect in the display control device 81) that is an effect executed in the specific game state and executes content notification (additional notification effect) related to the specific game state being executed. With
The content notification by the content notification means tends to be more advantageous to the player as the period from the occurrence of the execution trigger of the notification to the notification is performed.
The specific game state notification means is such that the content of the specific game state, which is the target of notification by the specific notification means, is advantageous to the player, so that the first means and the second means are on the rear side. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA13, characterized in that it is easy to start or end the notification by the specific notification means by means for starting or ending the notification.

According to the above configuration, the later the start / end of the notification by the specific game state notification means, the more advantageous the content of the specific game state to be notified to the player is the content notification during the specific game state. In association with the relationship of the execution timing of, the notification becomes familiar or easy to understand for the player. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the start / end of the notification by the specific game state notification means is associated with the content and enjoyed.

Features AA15. The specific game state notification means is
Depending on the game situation when the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is won, the first means starts the notification by the specific notification means, or the second means starts the notification by the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA14, which is characterized in that it is possible to make a difference.

According to the above configuration, not only the lottery for shifting to the specific game state is won, but also the start mode of the notification by the specific notification means differs depending on the game situation in which the lottery for transition is won. By doing so, the notification mode can be diversified.

Features AA16. A situation setting means (in the main control device 101) for setting the game situation to a specific situation, provided that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is not won. Equipped with a function to execute processing for specific states)
The specific game state notification means is such that information that may be useful to the player in the specific situation is more likely to be suggested from the start mode of the notification by the specific notification means than in the non-specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature AA15, wherein it is possible to make a difference in whether one means or the second means starts the notification by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, even if the lottery result is a specific result or the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won, the game situation can be set to the specific situation. If the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won during the specific situation, information that may be useful to the player is suggested by the start mode of the notification by the specific game state notification means. In this way, not only whether or not to win the lottery for transition to the specific game state, but also whether or not it is set to the specific situation is the heart of the game, and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won. But you can avoid being too discouraged.

The "information that can be useful to the player" may be, for example, "information on the set value set by the setting means" or the like.

Features AA17. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AA1 to AA16, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AA18. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA17, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means. ..

According to the above configuration, since there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value regarding the specific game state, the equality of the game related to the specific game state is high regardless of which of the multiple game machines installed in the game hall is selected. Be secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Features AA 19. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features AA1 to AA18, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the effect of the effect and the improvement of the interest described in the feature AA1.

Features AA20. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is executed based on a predetermined specific result, and the transition lottery means (the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the notification means, and
With
The specific game state notification means is
At a predetermined first timing, the first means for starting or ending the notification by the specific notification means (for example, the main control device 101 executes a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation. Function to do) and
At a second timing different from the first timing, the display of the section indicator is started at the time of the third stop OFF operation in the second means (for example, in the main control device 101) to start or end the notification by the specific notification means. Function to execute the process to be performed) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the mode shifts to the specific gaming state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed at the first timing or at the second timing. By doing so, it is possible to fully expect the effect of the game by using the specific notification means such that the notification is simply started at the transition to the specific game state and the notification is ended at the end of the specific game state. Is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, a game in which the notification by the specific notification means is terminated by winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means or by playing the specific game state is performed. It is possible to provide the player who has performed the game with information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state at the start / end timing of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee the equality among the players depending on the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means, and to secure the superiority to the player who played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features AA21. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is executed based on a predetermined specific result, and the transition lottery means (the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the notification means, and
With
The specific game state notification means is
By setting the lighting state or the extinguishing state in the predetermined first color, the first means (for example, in the main control device 101, the section indicator is red in red) to start or end the notification by the specific notification means. Function to execute the process to start the display) and
A second means (for example, in the main control device 101, in green, a section) that starts or ends the notification by the specific notification means by setting the lighting state or the extinguishing state in a second color different from the first color. Function to execute the process to start the display of the display) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the mode shifts to the specific gaming state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the start and end of the notification by the specific notification means may be performed in the first color or in the second color. By doing so, it is possible to fully expect the effect of the game by using the specific notification means such that the notification is simply started at the transition to the specific game state and the notification is ended at the end of the specific game state. Is also possible. Further, if the above configuration is used, a game in which the notification by the specific notification means is terminated by winning the lottery for transition to the specific game state and starting the notification by the specific notification means or by playing the specific game state is performed. It is possible to provide the player who has performed the game with information such as the content of the game and the content of the specific game state in different colors at the start / end of the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee the equality among the players depending on the presence or absence of the notification by the specific notification means, and to secure the superiority to the player who played the game that triggers the notification. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, each configuration of the above features AA1 to AA19 may be applied individually to the feature AA20 or the feature AA21, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic AB group>
Features AB1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means.
With
In the specific game state notification means, in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is set at the effective position. The start game is a game in which the privilege corresponding to the specific result can be granted by the privilege granting means by stopping the game, and at least at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. It starts the notification during the state by the specific notification means.
At a timing prior to the start of the state-time notification by the specific game state notification means, a special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state that is the target of the state-time notification is specified in advance. Special notification means (execution of section display first processing and special RT state processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the notification means (eighth display segment N8, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, auxiliary display unit 65, etc.) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of performing a function and a function of executing a special RT state notification means by a display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the state shifts to the specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

On the other hand, as described above, if the start of the state notification is timed, whether or not the state notification is finally started (until the operation of the next game is allowed). There is a risk that the player's attention will only be paid to, and in this case, as the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the state notification is started when the operation of the next game of the starting game is permitted. Therefore, the attention of the starting game itself may decrease. Therefore, in this gaming machine, in addition to the state notification, the middle of the start game, which is the timing before the start of the state notification, the timing of winning the transition lottery, etc. (mainly, the start timing of the start game). ), The special notification corresponding to the content of the specific game state can be executed by the specific notification means. By doing so, attention is paid to whether or not the state notification is started by the specific notification means, and the starting game is directed to the player who is interested in the next game of the starting game. Can be transferred to.

Features AB2. When the special notification is performed by the special notification means at the first timing and when the special notification is performed at a second timing which is later than the first timing, there are cases where the special notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature AB1, wherein the specific notification means has different advantages of the specific gaming state for which notification during the state is started.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the specific gaming state to be notified during the state, which is started after that, differs depending on the timing at which the special notification is performed by the special notification means. By doing so, the interest in the special notification to the special notification means can be enhanced by a simple configuration.

Features AB3. The feature AB2, wherein the special notification means is more likely to perform the special notification at the second timing than at the first timing so that the content of the specific gaming state is more advantageous to the player. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the later the execution timing of the special notification is, the more likely it is that the specific game state has a content that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to perform the progress operation of the start game while expecting that the state notification is started before the operation of the next game is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property in which the expectation is gradually different by associating the game progress and the expectation in the starting game.

In addition, since it is premised on a timed notification that the status notification is started before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed, the special notification performed before the status notification is performed. If the configuration is more advantageous as the execution timing of is closer, the closer the execution / start timings of the special notification and the state notification are, the more advantageous the player is. In this way, it is possible to raise awareness that the notification during the state is started by using the advantage of the specific gaming state and the difference in the execution timing of the special notification, and the degree of freedom of the notification mode is compared. It is possible to greatly change the impression of the notification even if the notification is in a small number of states.

Features AB4. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
When the specific gaming state that is the target of the notification during the state to be started is the predetermined first predetermined state, the special notification means can easily perform the special notification at the first timing. When the specific gaming state to be notified during the state to be started is a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state, the second timing different from the first timing is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB3, which is characterized in that it has a configuration that facilitates special notification.

According to the above configuration, if the notification timing at which the special notification is likely to be executed differs depending on the type of the specific gaming state, the type of the specific gaming state that shifts from the notification timing to that (the notification during the state is started) is predicted. , Is added, and the game is diversified.

Features AB5. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB4, wherein the special notification means can execute the special notification based on an operation of a predetermined stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the operation of each stop operation means until the state notification is performed can be associated with the special notification, and the special notification can be obtained in the situation that the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won. The stop operation means can be operated with the expectation that it will be performed.

In particular, in a gaming machine to which playability is added by utilizing the result that the privilege given may differ depending on the stop order among the stop operation modes, the player tends to pay attention only to the operation order of each stop operation means. , There is a possibility that the original playability of the slot machine, such as operating each stop operation means to stop the pattern, may be neglected. In that respect, as described above, if the special notification is performed based on the operation of the stop operation means, the stop operation means is operated in the instructed order to stop the orbiting body, which is a passive game. In addition to the nature, it is possible to realize active playability such as operating the stop operation means to generate a special notification, and by increasing the degree of attention to each operation of each stop operation means, each stop operation. It is possible to rekindle or guarantee the original playability of the slot machine, such as operating the means to stop the pattern.

Features AB6. The stop operating means can be displaced from the initial position to the operating position.
The drive control means drives and controls the stop operation means so as to stop the corresponding orbiting body based on the operation from the initial position to the operation position.
The predetermined stop operation means is operated from the operation position by the special notification means, as compared with the case where the special notification is performed based on the operation of the predetermined stop operation means from the initial position to the operation position. The gaming machine according to feature AB5, wherein the content of the specific gaming state is more likely to be advantageous to the player when the special notification is performed based on returning to the initial position.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the stop operation means is displaced to the operation position and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped, the orbiting body is stopped and the special notification is given while the orbiting body is stopped. It is advantageous for the player that the special notification is given at. In other words, it is more advantageous to see the stop roll together with the special notification when the orbiting body is stopped than when only the special notification is given before the stop, so it was stopped by the stop operation (predetermined roll). It is possible to strengthen the impression that it has become advantageous by making it appear.

Features AB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB6, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification by the specific notification means as the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, not only the configuration is centralized, but also the high level of interest in the state notification is used to raise the degree of attention to the special notification, and the high level of interest in the special notification is used. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the notification during the state, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to both notifications.

Features AB8. The specific notification means is configured to be able to switch between a light-off state and a light-on state.
The specific game state notification means starts the notification during the state by switching the specific notification means from the off state to the lighting state, and switches the specific notification means from the lighting state to the off state to perform the state. It ends the middle notification,
The special notification means is described in feature AB7, wherein when the notification during the state is started, the special notification means is performed by utilizing the timing of switching the specific notification means from the off state to the on state. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification means is realized by a simple configuration of switching between the off state and the lighting state, and in spite of the simple configuration, the special notification by the special notification means such as the difference in the switching timing to the lighting state is used. It is possible to enhance the production effect. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both contradictory effects such as simplification of the configuration and improvement of the effect of production.

Features AB9. In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB) including the specific result and the transition lottery to the specific game state is won, the transition to the effective position corresponds to the transition result. If the combination of symbols in the above does not stop and the privilege corresponding to the transition result is not granted by the privilege granting means, the game that wins the transition result can be regarded as the winning game, and the transition result winning can be reserved. It is provided with a reservation means (a function of executing the process of step S609 by the main control device 101).
In a situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the privilege corresponding to the transition result is given by the privilege granting means by stopping the pattern combination for the transition at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB8, wherein the game is a start game.

According to the above configuration, by reserving the winning of the transition result, the number of games capable of executing the special notification is increased by the amount reserved, and the execution timing of the special notification is diversified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by predicting / grasping the content of the specific game state that is the target of the state notification by the special notification.

Regarding the "transition result", "when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position, it is advantageous for the player. By limiting the configuration of "shifting to a favorable advantageous state (bonus state)", it becomes clearer that the so-called jackpot result (bonus) can be reserved by the reservation means.

Features AB10. The special notification means is characterized in that the special notification can be executed in a game between the winning game and the start game in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed in the game from the winning game to the starting game, the extension of the game while the winning of the specific result is reserved is suppressed. That is, by making the transition result winning reserved, it is possible to prolong the game that determines whether or not it is the transition result, and to maintain the expectation, but the reserved game is long. The more the effect of sustaining the sense of expectation can be expected, the longer the reserved game is, the more likely it is that the game will be delayed, and the degree of attention may decrease. In that respect, if the special notification is executed during the reservation as in the above configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a feeling of extension during the reservation and to preferably exert the effect of sustaining the feeling of expectation by the reservation.

Features AB11. The special notification means can execute the special notification based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined notification response result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to the feature AB10, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the lottery result of each game that is reserved. That is, if the special notification is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery means that is reserved, instead of simply performing the special notification during the reservation, each game that is reserved is waiting for the special notification or waiting for the transition result to win a prize. It is possible to give meaning to the lottery of each game, instead of making it a digestion game.

Features AB12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result (for example, a single role of a strong watermelon) that does not include the transition result among the specific results, the game in which the lottery result is the first specific result is said. It is said to be the starting game
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specific result (for example, a strong watermelon + a duplicate combination of the first BB) including the transition result among the specific results, the game in which the transition result winning is established is the start game. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB9 to AB11.

According to the above configuration, whether or not it is reserved depends on the type of specific result. In this way, there are cases where the execution of the special notification and the start of the status notification are reserved, and cases where the execution of the special notification and the start of the status notification are not reserved, and the execution and status of the special notification are reserved. The starting mode of medium notification is greatly diversified.

Features AB13. The gaming machine according to feature AB12, wherein a pattern combination common to the effective positions can be stopped between the game that won the first specific result and the game that won the second specific result. ..

According to the above configuration, it cannot be determined from the stop result whether or not the execution of the special notification and the start of the notification during the state are reserved. As a result, when the common pattern combination is stopped, the expectation can be maintained in the subsequent game even if the special notification or the notification during the state is not performed.

Features AB14. The gaming machine according to feature AB13, wherein the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, and the common pattern combination can be stopped even when the transition lottery is not won.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific result is won, the common pattern combination is stopped regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, and the stop result is common. Therefore, even if the same stop result is obtained, there are a pattern in which special notification and status notification are performed without being reserved by the reservation means, and a pattern in which special notification and status notification are performed after being reserved by the reservation means. In addition to this, a pattern in which neither special notification nor status notification is performed in the first place will be added. In this way, not only in the game in which the common pattern combination is stopped, but also in the subsequent games, it is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that the special notification and the notification during the state will be performed.

Features AB15. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AB1 to AB14.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AB16. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features AB1 to AB15, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the effect of the effect and the improvement of the interest described in the feature AB1.

<Characteristic AC group>
Features AC1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means.
With
In the specific game state notification means, in a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result is set at the effective position. The start game is a game in which the privilege corresponding to the specific result can be granted by the privilege granting means by stopping the game, and at least at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. It starts the notification during the state by the specific notification means.
A gaming machine characterized by having a limiting means (a function of executing a section display third process by the main control device 101) capable of limiting the permissible operation of the game following the start game.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the state shifts to the specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

On the other hand, if the above is performed, the timing at which the notification during the state can be started becomes short, resulting in a monotonous start effect in which the effect at the start cannot be expected, or the timing is shortened. It can also be a concern that things themselves will be overlooked. In that respect, since the gaming machine is provided with a limiting means capable of limiting the permissible operation of the next game of the starting game, the state is in progress by limiting the permissible operation of the next game. It is possible to make people aware that the notification will be performed, and if the operation of the next game is restricted in this way, the period during which the notification can be started during the state will be extended, and the state will be extended. The starting mode of medium notification will be diversified.

Features AC2. It is equipped with a progress processing execution means (a function of executing normal processing by the main control device 101) for performing the progress processing of the game.
The feature AC1 is characterized in that the execution of a specific process (a function of executing a payout control process by the main control device 101) among the progress processes in the start game is restricted by the restriction by the limiting means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the progress of the start game is restricted by restricting the execution of a specific process among the progress processes of the start game, and thus the operation of the next game of the start game is restricted. Can be done. By doing so, while ensuring the independence of each game, the phenomenon of transition to the specific gaming state that occurred in the starting game can be reflected in the next game of the starting game.

Features AC3. The gaming machine according to feature AC1 or feature AC2, wherein the operation in the start game is also restricted during the restriction period in which the restriction is performed by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the progress of the starting game by limiting the operation of the starting game, thereby limiting the operation of the next game of the starting game. .. By doing so, while ensuring the independence of each game, the phenomenon of transition to the specific gaming state that occurred in the starting game can be reflected in the next game of the starting game.

Features AC4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AC1 to AC3, wherein the specific gaming state notification means can start the state notification during the limited period by the limiting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notice that the state-time notification is started by limiting the operation, and to preferably confirm the start of the state-time notification.

Features AC5. It is provided with a limited period setting means (a function of executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limited period for which the restriction is performed by the limiting means.
In the limiting period setting means, the period from the start of the restriction by the limiting means to the start of the state notification corresponds to the content of the specific gaming state to be notified of the state notification. The gaming machine according to feature AC4, wherein the length of the limited period can be set.

According to the above configuration, the period from the restriction that the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed to the start of the in-state notification is limited because it is associated with the content of the specific gaming state. It is possible to give a strong interest to the length of the period from, and by increasing the degree of attention to the length of the period, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the start of the in-state notification.

Features AC6. The gaming machine according to feature AC5, wherein the restriction by the limiting means limits the control corresponding to a predetermined operation performed by the player.

According to the above configuration, the player operates as compared with the configuration in which the progress of unilateral processing on the gaming machine side is restricted by limiting the control corresponding to the operation performed by the player. You will notice that it is restricted by, and it will be difficult to understand when the restriction starts. Therefore, in a configuration such as the feature AC5 in which the length of the limited period is important, it is difficult to clearly grasp the length, and the start timing (length of the period) of the state notification is assumed. Even if it is not preferable for the player, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation until the player shifts to a specific gaming state.

Features AC7. It is provided with a limited period setting means (a function of executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limited period for which the restriction is performed by the limiting means.
In the limiting period setting means, the period from the start of the state notification to the end of the restriction by the limiting means is the content of the specific gaming state corresponding to the state notification by the specific gaming state notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC4 to AC6, wherein the length of the limited period can be set so as to correspond to the feature.

According to the above configuration, since the period from the start of the state notification to the permissible operation of the next game corresponds to the content of the specific game state, the player first starts the state notification. Paying attention to this, when the notification during the state is started, the timing at which the operation is allowed is paid attention to, and it is possible to produce the effect over time or in stages.

Features AC8. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC7, wherein the specific gaming state notification means can start notification during the state at a period different from the restriction period by the restriction means.

According to the above configuration, it is considered that the period in which the operation is restricted is a period in which the degree of attention is increased in a dramatic manner, and if the configuration is such that the notification during the state can be started even in other periods, the game can be started. It is possible to improve the degree of attention evenly.

Features AC9. It is provided with a limited period setting means (a function of executing a freeze setting process in the section display third process by the main control device 101) for setting the length of the limited period for which the restriction is performed by the limiting means.
The limitation period setting means can set the length of the limitation period according to the advantage of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of AC8.

According to the above configuration, the permissible operation of the next game is restricted, a period during which the notification during the state can be started is secured, and the length of the secured period (restricted period) is the specific gaming state. It will correspond to the advantage. In this way, it is possible to further enhance the feeling of excitement depending on the length of the period during which the feeling of excitement increases, such as whether or not the notification during the state is started. For example, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period during which the state notification can be started is longer, not only the pleasure of whether or not the state notification is started, but also that the period continues for a long time even if it is not started. It is thought that the person will want to do so, and the longer the period of non-starting, the more expected that the status notification will be started, which is expected to have a synergistic effect of improving the degree of attention. In addition, if the specific gaming state is more advantageous as the period during which the state notification can be started is shorter, the period for enjoying whether or not the state notification is started is condensed, and it is possible to provide a strong feeling of excitement. Become.

Features AC10. The limitation period setting means is described in the feature AC9, wherein the limitation period can be easily set as the content of the specific gaming state corresponding to the notification during the state by the specific gaming state notification means is advantageous. Gaming machine.

In general, on the premise that the longer the production time is, the more advantageous it is for the player, as in the above configuration, the longer the restriction period is, the more advantageous the content of the specific gaming state is for the player. It is easy for the player to understand the composition, and the production can be well-balanced with other productions.

Features AC11. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC10.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AC12. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of features AC1 to AC11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode) that is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the effect of the effect and the improvement of the interest described in the feature AC1.

<Characteristic AD group>
Features AD1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
Based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification during the state, and based on the end of the specific game state. The specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means.
With
The specific game state notification means is
In a situation where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific result is caused by stopping the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position. The game in which the privilege corresponding to the above can be granted by the privilege granting means is set as the start game, and the state notification by the specific notification means is performed at least at a timing before allowing the operation of the next game of the start game. It ’s something to start with,
When the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, the main control is performed when the first means (for example, when the super attack mode is won) in which the state notification by the specific notification means is started in the first aspect. In the device 101, a function of executing a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the first stop OFF operation of the game of the stop result corresponding to the strong cherry) and
When a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the start game, the state notification by the specific notification means is changed to the second aspect different from the first aspect. (For example, when the super attack mode is won, the main control device 101 executes a process of starting the display of the section indicator at the time of the third stop OFF operation of the game of the stop result corresponding to the weak cherry. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the state shifts to the specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

On the other hand, if the start of the state notification is limited as described above, the start mode of the state notification may be simplified. However, there is a limit to diversifying the starting mode of the state notification. In that respect, the game machine has a configuration in which the start mode of the state notification differs depending on the stop result in the start game, that is, the type of the specific result and the winning mode when the specific result is won. As a result, it is possible to start the state-time notification in relation to the stop result of each orbiting body, and it is possible to significantly enhance the effect of the state-time notification without changing the configuration of the specific notification means.

Features AD2. The specific result includes a first specific result (for example, strong cherry) and a second specific result (for example, weak cherry).
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature AD1.

According to the above configuration, since the stop result differs depending on the type of the specific result, the gaming machine of the feature AD1 has a configuration in which the start mode of the state notification differs depending on the type of the specific result. By doing so, while grasping what triggered the winning of the transition lottery to the specific game state, the fun of predicting the subsequent development is added, and the interest is improved.

Features AD3. A third specific result (for example, strong cherry) is included as the specific result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third specific result, the privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position, and the effective position is given. The gaming machine according to the feature AD1 or the feature AD2, wherein the privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, even if the same third specific result is obtained, there are cases where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the prize is established, and the case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the prize is established. , The start mode of notification during the state is different. By doing so, the interest in the stop roll can be particularly strengthened.

Features AD4. The fourth specific result (for example, strong watermelon) is included as the specific result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth specific result, the privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position, and the effective position is given. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD3, wherein the privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is not given by stopping the second specific pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the fourth specific result, the case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the prize is established, and the case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the prize is not established, so-called omission. The mode of starting the notification during the state differs depending on the case. By doing so, the interest in the stop roll can be particularly strengthened.

Features AD5. The first means is the first when the super attack mode is won by the strong cherry before the stop of the specific orbit (for example, the second by the strong cherry and the weak cherry) of the orbits. It is possible to start the notification during the state according to the first aspect in the stop OFF operation).
The second means can start the notification during the state by the second aspect after the stop of the specific orbiting body (for example, when the super attack mode is won with a weak cherry, when the 3 stop OFF operation is performed). Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of AD2 to AD4.

According to the above configuration, the game result that triggers the state notification differs depending on whether the start timing of the state notification is before or after the stop of the predetermined orbiting body. That is, in the game in which each stop operation means is operated to stop the orbiting body, when the state notification is started based on the first specific result, the state notification is started before the specific operation, and the second state notification is started. 2 When the state notification is started based on the specific result, the state notification is started after the specific operation. By doing so, for example, if it is not possible to determine whether the result of this game is the first specific result winning or the second specific result winning before the specific operation. , Even if the status notification is not started at that time, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of connecting the hope that the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won. In addition, if it can be determined that the result of this game is the first specific result winning, the game will proceed while hoping that the status notification will be started by the specific th operation. If it is conceivable and it can be determined that the result of this game is the second specific result winning, the game proceeds while hoping that the status notification will be started at the specific operation transition. It is thought that it will be. Furthermore, even in a situation where it can be determined that the third specific result is won or the fourth specific result is won, whether the state notification is started by the specific operation or is started after that. Depends on the stop roll, and progresses the game while predicting the start timing of the state notification from the relationship (commonality, difference) between the first specific symbol combination and the second specific symbol combination. In any case, the period of interest in whether or not the in-state notification is started is centralized, and it becomes possible to add inflection to the game.

Features AD6. The first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination can have a common pattern that stops at the effective position up to the specific position (for example, the left reel of a strong cherry and a weak cherry). Features The gaming machine described in AD5.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether the first specific result is won or the second specific result is won up to the specific number from the stop result, and in the fourth specific result, no omission occurs up to the specific number. Therefore, even if the state notification has not been started by the time the specific orbiting body is stopped, the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state has been won when the orbiting body is stopped after the specific number. You can play games while connecting your wishes.

Features AD7. The gaming machine according to feature AD5 or feature AD6, wherein the first specific pattern combination and the second specific pattern combination have different patterns that stop at the effective position in the specific orbiting body.

According to the above configuration, by stopping the specific orbiting body, it is possible to determine whether the first specific result is won or the second specific result is won, the winning mode of the third specific result is determined, or the fourth specific result is determined. It becomes possible to determine whether or not a prize has been won. Therefore, in particular, in a situation where the notification during the state has not been started before that, stopping the specific orbiting body may shift to the specific gaming state, for example, when the first specific result or the fourth specific result is won. It will be a turning point whether or not there is a possibility of winning the lottery. Therefore, the stop operation of the specific orbiting body becomes more interesting, and the interest is improved.

Features AD8. The specific result includes a first specific result (for example, strong cherry) and a second specific result (for example, weak cherry).
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position.
In the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, if the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is won with the first probability, and the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD7, characterized in that, in the case of a specific result, a lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won with a second probability.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability of the transition lottery differs depending on the type of the specific result, the stop result that is easy to win the transition lottery is stopped, and the stop that is difficult to win the transition lottery is stopped. The probability that the status notification will be started in the start game differs depending on whether the outcome is stopped. In this way, it is determined from the stop result including the ease of starting the case where the state-time notification is started in the first aspect and the case where the state-time notification is started in the second aspect. It is possible to increase the interest in the stop roll.

Features AD9. The specific result includes a first specific result (for example, strong cherry) and a second specific result (for example, weak cherry).
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the first specific result, the privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given by stopping the first specific pattern combination (triple cherry) at the effective position.
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the second specific result, the privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given by stopping the second specific pattern combination (single cherry) at the effective position.
The feature AD1 to the feature AD1 to the feature AD1 to which the content of the specific gaming state may be different between the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the first specific result and the transition lottery by the transition lottery means based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of AD8.

According to the above configuration, the case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the state notification is started in the first aspect, and the case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped and the state notification is started in the second aspect. The content of the specific game state when it is started differs depending on whether it is started. Therefore, the joy differs between the case where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and the case where the second specific pattern combination is stopped, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the stopped result.

Features AD10. As the specific result, a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without requiring a new game medium are included.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result, the predetermined number of game media are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the first specific result by stopping the first specific pattern combination at the effective position. I,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game result, the re-game becomes possible as a privilege corresponding to the re-game result by stopping the second specific pattern combination at the effective position.
When the specific result is the payout result, the first means notifies the state during the state until the reception operation (bet operation) for accepting the game medium is allowed in the game following the start game as the first aspect. To start
When the specific result is the replay result, the second means starts the state-state notification until the start operation of the start operation means is allowed in the next game of the start game as the second aspect. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD9.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific symbol combination is stopped for the payout result and the second specific symbol combination is stopped for the replay result, the state notification is started depending on which symbol combination is stopped. The end of timing is different. More specifically, in the case of shifting to the specific game state based on the payout result, the state-in-state notification is sent until the first specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game and the reception operation of the game medium of the next game is permitted. When the game is started and the game shifts to the specific game state based on the re-game result, the second specific pattern combination is stopped in the start game, and the state-state notification is notified until the start operation of the start operation means of the next game is allowed. Is started. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the variation at the end of the period until the notification during the state is started. Moreover, when the manager of the game hall or the like tries to confirm which result the in-state notification is started by associating the final variation with the stop result, for example, the first specific pattern combination is stopped. In this case, if the status notification is started after the reception operation, it is confirmed that the previous game is not the start game but the current game is the start game. Can be confirmed from the stop roll.

Features AD11. The start operation means has a configuration in which the start operation is permitted by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the position is visible through the display unit and is different from the effective position. The design of each orbital body is attached so that the first specific design combination stops at a specific position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-game result, the means for enabling the re-game by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the next game (during operation in the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature AD10, which comprises a function of executing a process of setting a bet flag).

According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination stops at the effective position and the replay result is won, the first specific symbol combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to visually determine whether the re-game result winning or the payout result winning is established. Moreover, in the next game in which the re-game prize is established, the next game can be re-gamed by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so whether or not a new game medium is required. Although there are differences, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the re-game result. By doing so, in a configuration in which the end of the start timing of the state notification differs between the payout result and the re-game result, the player can determine which result the state notification is started or started. Can be obfuscated. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the feeling of excitement such as when the notification during the state is started.

Features AD12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result winning, the first stopping means for stopping the first specific pattern combination (for example, when the overlapping combination of the strong watermelon and the bonus is won, the main control device 101 A function that executes a process of stopping a stop result that is a bonus prize) and a second stop means that stops the second specific pattern combination (for example, when a duplicate combination of a strong watermelon and a bonus is won, the main control device The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD11, which comprises a function of stopping a stop roll that is a watermelon winning in 101).

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the first specific pattern combination is stopped and cases where the second specific pattern combination is stopped even if the same specific result is obtained. Therefore, even if the specific results are the same, there are cases where the state notification is started in the first aspect and cases where the state notification is started in the second aspect, and even if the lottery results are the same. As long as the lottery result is not complicated, it is possible to expect the effect of improving the degree of attention by different stop rolls and different notification modes.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature AD5.

Features AD13. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features AD1 to AD12.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AD14. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the said The gaming machine according to any one of the features AD1 to AD13, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the effect of the effect and the improvement of the interest described in the feature AD1.

<Characteristic AE group>
Features AE1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
It is a lottery that is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result and has the same winning probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery is entered into the specific gaming state. A transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery (a function of executing a first specific combination process by the main control device 101) and
At least by a predetermined specific timing in the specific game in which the game state shifts to the specific game state, the state notification by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started, and the specific notification is started. The specific game state notification means (section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the game state. Function to execute) and
With
The specific game state notification means is
When the first specific result (for example, strong watermelon) of the specific results is used as an opportunity to win the lottery for transition to the specific game state, the specific timing is by the first specific timing (timing when betting operation is allowed). The notification during the state is started, and
When a second specific result (for example, winning replay) different from the first specific result among the specific results is won as an opportunity to win the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, the specific timing is from the first specific timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the notification during the state is started by the second specific timing, which is also late.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the state shifts to the specific game state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the state notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

Here, the state-state notification is started at least by a specific timing in the specific game state that shifts to the specific game state, and the end of the notification start is set. There is a risk that the expectation for the game will diminish at once, and the degree of attention will drop in the game that can be in a specific game state. In that respect, in the above configuration, the end of the state notification is different depending on the game result that triggered the winning of the lottery for shifting to the specific game state, so that even if one of the ends is exceeded, the state is in the state. It is possible to continue the game while leaving a feeling of expectation for the notification. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Features AE2. The lottery result by the lottery means includes a payout result in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and a replay result in which the next game can be replayed without requiring a new game medium.
The first specific result is the payout result,
The gaming machine according to feature AE1, wherein the second specific result is the re-gaming result.

According to the above configuration, the start and end of the state notification by the specific game state notification means differs depending on whether the payout result or the re-game result. In this way, by using the conventional payout result and re-game result to make the start and end of the state notification different, it is not necessary to set a special game result, and the configuration is relatively simple. It is possible to achieve the effect of the feature AE1.

Features AE3. The specific game state notification means is
When the specific result is the payout result, the in-state notification is started with the timing for allowing the reception operation (bet operation) for accepting the game medium in the specific game as the first specific timing.
Described in the feature AE2 characterized in that when the specific result is the replay result, the notification during the state is started with the timing at which the start operation of the start operation means is allowed in the specific game as the second specific timing. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the player's operation is allowed is set as the end of each, and if it is the payout result, it is the timing that allows the reception operation, and if it is the re-game result, the start operation is allowed. It's timing. In this way, by setting the timing at which the player's operation is allowed as the final stage, it is possible to actively proceed with the game instead of waiting until the notification is started. Further, in general, the re-game result is allowed to start without requiring a reception operation, but the final stage is set according to the operation mode according to each game result, which causes the configuration to be complicated. It is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect without any problem.

Features AE4. The start operation means has a configuration in which the start operation is permitted by performing the reception operation on a predetermined reception means (for example, the first credit insertion switch 56).
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result and the first specific pattern combination corresponding to the first specific result is stopped at the effective position, the privilege granting means is the predetermined as the privilege. It is a configuration that pays out a number of game media,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the replay result and the second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the position visible through the display unit. The pattern of each of the orbiting bodies is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the re-game result, the means for enabling the re-game by performing the reception operation on the reception means in the specific game (operation bet on the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to feature AE3, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of setting a flag).

According to the above configuration, when the second specific symbol combination stops at the effective position and the replay result is won, the first specific symbol combination stops at a specific position different from the effective position. Therefore, it is difficult to visually determine whether the re-game result winning or the payout result winning is established. Moreover, in the next game in which the re-game prize is established, the next game can be re-gamed by performing a reception operation on a predetermined reception means, so whether or not a new game medium is required. Although there are differences, the operation performed by the player in the next game is the same for the payout result and the re-game result. By doing so, in a configuration in which the end of the start timing of the state notification differs between the payout result and the re-game result, the player can determine which result the state notification is started or started. Can be obfuscated. Therefore, it is possible to further enjoy the feeling of excitement such as when the notification during the state is started.

Features AE5. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, the first reservation means (step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the transition result winning until the pattern combination for the transition stops at the effective position. Function to execute processing) and
With
As the specific result, a third specific result of the replay result and the transition result is included.
When the specific game state notification means shifts to the specific game state based on the duplication result, the second reservation reserves the start of the status notification until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to any one of features AE2 to AE4, which comprises means (a function of executing a section display first process and a section display fourth process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, the transition result (so-called jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the advantageous state as the lottery result is included, and the overlapping result of the re-game result and the transition result is also included. Then, in the case of duplicate results, the transfer result winning is reserved until the transfer result winning of the re-game result and the transfer result is established. In such a configuration, when the game shifts to the specific gaming state based on the duplicated result, the specific game that shifts to the specific gaming state is reserved until the game in which the transition result winning is established. By doing so, it is possible to strengthen the impression of winning the transition lottery to a specific game based on the transition result winning of the duplicate results, and it is consistent with the fact that the transition result winning is reserved. Sex can be guaranteed.

Features AE6. When the specific game state notification means wins the lottery for shifting to the specific game state triggered by the third specific result of the specific results, the specific game state notification means notifies the state during the state by the first specific timing as the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature AE5, characterized in that it starts.

According to the above configuration, when the specific game itself is reserved as a result of the reservation of the transition result winning, the start and end of the state notification in the specific game matches that of the payout result. In this way, in a configuration (feature AE2) in which the start and end of the state notification differs between the payout result and the re-game result, the start and end of the third specific result in which the re-game result and the transition result are duplicated is determined. , Even if the re-game is not given based on the transition result winning, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the different game operations and the start and end depending on the game result.

Features AE7. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of the features AE1 to AE6.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features AE8. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of the features AE1 to AE7, wherein the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means. ..

According to the above configuration, since there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value regarding the specific game state, the equality of the game related to the specific game state is high regardless of which of the multiple game machines installed in the game hall is selected. Be secured. By applying such a configuration to a configuration in which notification is uniformly started at the time of state transition by the specific notification means, it is possible to further enhance the effect of ensuring equality.

Features AE9. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features AE1 to AE8, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means, and to expect the effect of the effect and the improvement of the interest described in the feature AE1.

<Characteristic BA group>
Features BA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result (for example, special replays 1 and 2). If this is the case, the first control means (in the main control device 101, for example, a black BAR double-aligned stop output) that executes stop control of each circuit so that the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position A function that controls the replay prize to be established by eye),
When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result (for example, special replay), the valid A second control means (in the main control device 101, for example, black BAR is not used) that executes stop control of each orbiting body so that a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination can be stopped at the position. (Function to control so that the replay prize is established at the stop result),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided in which the winning result may be different depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition. There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and generating an unlimited number of transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning of the transition result, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it in the production etc., the transition to the advantageous state will be made. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, in the situation where the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is not performed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, but from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific gaming state. Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop result at the time of winning the special result is made different depending on whether or not the transition result lottery to the specific game state is won. There is. Specifically, if the game is in a specific game state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop result at the time of winning the special result is set as the first specific pattern combination, and the game is in the normal game state. If the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the stop result at the time of the special result winning is set as the second specific pattern combination. By doing so, even in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, if the first specific pattern combination appears, the transition to the specific gaming state is entered. It is possible to know that the player has won the transition lottery, and to play the game while maintaining the expectation for the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features BA2. In a situation where the gaming state is the specific gaming state and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a special means for making the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination stops at the effective position different (for example). The gaming machine according to feature BA1, characterized in that the display control device 81 is provided with a function of executing the notification lottery process 1 and a lottery table for a special RT state having different special replay winning probabilities.

According to the above configuration, in the specific game state, the frequency at which the first specific symbol combination is stopped can be changed by special means. Therefore, for example, the special result is won and the first specific symbol combination is not stopped. However, it is not completely denied that the player is in the specific game state, and the expectation for the specific game state can be continued. That is, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added in which whether or not the game is in a specific game state is predicted from the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination. The interest can be improved favorably.

As a specific configuration of the above configuration, for example, "when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means executes a specific control that enables the first specific pattern combination to be stopped. A means for determining whether or not to perform (a function of executing the notification lottery process 1 in the display control device 81) or a means for changing the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result (special replay winning probability is It has at least one of the lottery tables for different special RT states). "

Features BA3. The gaming machine according to feature BA2, wherein the special means can change the frequency at which the first specific pattern combination is stopped according to the content of the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, a game is added such that the content of the specific game state is predicted by the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination. In this way, if it is possible to predict not only whether or not the player is in a specific game state but also the content of the game from the stop result, the game playability during reservation is significantly improved.

Features BA4. As the first specific pattern combination, the first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR single set) and the second type specific pattern combination different from the first type specific pattern combination (for example, black BAR tempai off) ) And is set,
The special means is characterized in that it is possible to make the stop frequency of the type 1 specific pattern combination and the type 2 specific pattern combination different according to the content of the specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in BA3.

According to the above configuration, the content of the specific gaming state differs depending on whether the type 1 specific pattern combination of the first specific pattern combinations is stopped or the type 2 specific pattern combination is stopped. , It becomes possible to raise the interest in the stop roll.

Features BA5. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
When the specific gaming state is the first predetermined state, the special means performs the special notification so that the type 1 specific pattern combination is likely to stop, and the specific gaming state becomes the first predetermined state. The gaming machine according to the feature BA4, characterized in that, when the second predetermined state is different, the second type specific pattern combination is likely to be stopped.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature BA4 can be achieved by a specific configuration.

Features BA6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special means changes the execution frequency of the special notification (black BAR push notification effect) that enables the first specific pattern combination to be stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA2 to BA5, characterized in that the stopping frequency of the first specific pattern combination is changed.

According to the above configuration, in order to adjust the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination depending on the presence or absence of notification, it is configured to suggest that the mode is in the pre-transition mode, teach, etc. as an effect, and playability by such suggestion, teaching, etc. Can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature BA7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in the first specific stop order, the first control means can stop the first specific pattern combination. When each of the orbiting bodies is stopped in a second specific stop order different from the first specific stop order, the second control means controls the second specific pattern combination to be stopped. I,
The gaming machine according to feature BA6, wherein the special means notifies the first specific stop order as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, depending on the stop order at the time of winning the special result, whether the first specific symbol combination is stopped or the second specific symbol combination is stopped is different, and the special means is a special notification. , By notifying the first specific stop order corresponding to the first specific pattern combination, the stop frequency of the first specific pattern combination is made different, so that the stop operation mode including the stop order can be used. The affinity with the specific gaming state in which the advantage degree changes based on the above becomes high, and it becomes easy for the player to understand that the special notification is performed as a suggestion of the specific gaming state (pre-transition mode).

Features BA8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the specific orbiting body in each of the orbiting bodies is stopped at the first timing, the specific symbols constituting the first specific symbol combination are stopped at the effective position. When the specific orbiting body is stopped at a second timing different from the first timing, the specific pattern cannot be stopped at the effective position.
The gaming machine according to feature BA6 or feature BA7, wherein the special means can notify that the specific orbiting body is stopped at the first timing as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, since the first specific pattern combination can be stopped by pressing the specific orbiting body, the original playability of the slot machine is specified by aiming at the pattern and stopping the operation to obtain a privilege. The configuration is incorporated into the production of suggestions and teachings of the game state. In this way, it is possible to make the specific game state seem to have been won by its own stop operation, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game (stop operation).

Features BA9. The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, a special privilege (replay) is given as a privilege corresponding to the special result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the second specific pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, the special privilege is given to any one of the features BA6 to BA8. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the stop rolls may differ depending on the stop order and stop timing, but the benefits obtained are the same regardless of the stop rolls (stop order, stop timing). It becomes. By doing so, it is possible to ensure consistency with the fact that the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. In other words, since the advantage at the time of winning the specific result does not change due to the special notification, even if the transition result winning is intentionally delayed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the profit based on the specific result is unreasonable. It will not be enjoyed.

Features BA10. A first control means (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the mode notification means, and
A second control means (display control device 81) having at least the special means, and
Have,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result or the second result, the mode notification is performed by the mode notification means in the first control means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special notification by the special means in the second control means is performed, while the mode notification by the mode notification means in the first control means is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BA6 to BA9.

According to the above configuration, especially in the feature BA9 that cites the feature BA7, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first result and the second result in which the winning results are different in notifying the stop order of the special result. That is, with respect to the lottery means and the mode notification means related to the profit of the player, by consolidating them in the first control means, it is easy to take measures to appropriately avoid fraudulent acts, and the function of mainly performing the production etc. which is not related to the profit. The functions are decentralized by consolidating the above into the second control means. In such a configuration, if the special notification by the special means is a function of the second control means side, it is clarified that the change of the stop result based on the special result is not directly related to the profit. For example, when a design change or the like is made for a special means, it can be done without requiring a new calculation of the payout rate or the like. Therefore, it is possible to realize excellent playability by special means with a relatively easy configuration.

Features BA11. The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, and the notification is started based on the end of the specific game state. It is equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the specific notification means.
As the specific result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific game state notification means becomes the advantageous state by stopping the pattern combination for the transition. The game to be transferred is set as the start game, and the notification by the specific notification means is not started at the timing before the start game, and the specification is performed at the timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA10, characterized in that the notification is started by the notification means of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification by the specific game state notification means is confirmed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who ends the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to fully enjoy the game by order notification equally.

Moreover, when the transition to the specific game state is based on the duplicate result winning including the transition result, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started until the start game in which the pattern combination for transition is stopped and the transition to the advantageous state is started. Is restricted. That is, as described above, in the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means while eliminating the feeling of inequality among the players regarding the specific game state, the notification regarding the specific game state is also restricted, and the special result is obtained. It is possible not to reduce the joy of the appearance of the first specific pattern combination at the time of winning (the joy of knowing that the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won). Therefore, while ensuring equality among players by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to suitably improve the game playability in a situation where the transfer result winning by the reservation means is reserved.

Features BA12. As the specific result, a non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, chance A) that does not include the transition result is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the specific game state notification means sets the game that wins the specific result as the start game and starts the game. The gaming machine according to feature BA11, wherein the notification by the specific notification means is started at a timing before the operation of the next game of the game is allowed.

According to the above configuration, the case where the start of the notification by the specific game state notification means is restricted is limited to the time when the duplicate winning with the transition result is won, and the game is ended even though the transition to the specific game state is performed. It is possible to reduce the number of events such as spilling as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the function of ensuring equality among players by providing the specific game state notification means.

Features BA13. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, the first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) which is the non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature BA12.

According to the above configuration, the game that wins the first duplicate result, which is the duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game that wins the first non-overlapping result, which is the single winning of the first specific result, In either case, since the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the first specific result winning can be established, it is stopped whether the first duplicate result or the first non-overlapping result is won. It becomes difficult to judge from the result. On the other hand, in the notification by the specific game state notification means, the game in which the transition result winning is established is set as the start game if the first overlapping result is established, and the game in which the first specific result winning is established if the first non-overlapping result is established. Let's start the game. Therefore, even if the lottery for shifting to the specific game state is won with any result as an opportunity, an event may occur in which the presence / absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific game state notification means is different. That is, even if the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started until the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specific is specified. It is possible to leave the possibility that the pattern combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result, and the expectation is maintained even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won. It becomes possible to make it.

Moreover, in this case, since it is possible to determine whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won based on the stop result at the time of winning the special result, it is possible to draw great interest to the subsequent stop result. ..

Features BA14. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon), which is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
The gaming machine according to feature BA13, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, in the playability of the feature BA13, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into consideration. That is, for example, if the first specific result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. If not, it is more likely that the specific game state has been won than in the case where the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. The expectation for the appearance of a specific pattern combination is further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the surprising effect when the first specific pattern combination appears after that is enhanced. .. As described above, by taking into account the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and entertaining the stop result, the playability of predicting the presence or absence of the specific game state winning from the stop result during the reservation is significantly improved. ..

Features BA15. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1), which is an duplication result with the third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A), which is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result becomes the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the ratio of the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BA13 or feature BA14, which is characterized by being different in proportion.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into consideration in the playability of the feature BA13 and the feature BA14. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result, and the ratio of the overlapping result with the migration result is higher (same stop). If it is a configuration in which there is a high possibility that the transition result is won even if the result is a result), the third specific is specified unless the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. It is more likely that the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BA14, if the result is non-overlapping and the specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started in the game, and therefore, as described above, for the first specific result. If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the possibility that the specific game state has been won is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into account the probability of winning the transition result and entertaining the stop roll, the playability of predicting whether or not the specific game state is won from the stop roll during the reservation is significantly improved.

Features BA16. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA15, wherein the special result is a result that does not trigger a transition lottery to the specific gaming state by the transition lottery means.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, the result different from the result subject to the restriction of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state. In, the notification of whether or not the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won (whether or not the mode is in the pre-transition mode) is performed by a stop roll. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the stop result purely without feeling the loss due to the result of being restricted.

Features BA17. In the situation where the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result winning is higher than the situation where the transition result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA16.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of a special result is high during reservation, it is easy to play a game to enjoy whether the first specific pattern combination is stopped or the second specific pattern combination is stopped. Can be done.

Features BA18. The privilege granting means replays as a privilege corresponding to the special result based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the pattern combination corresponding to the special result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature BA17, wherein the gaming medium is paid out in the same number as or less than the number of bets of the game in which the special result is won.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific game state is estimated from a stop roll without increasing the advantage during reservation too much. In other words, for example, if the configuration is such that the game medium can be expected to increase due to the privilege at the time of winning the special result, the profit can be enjoyed by the special result winning, and the special result winning is desired in anticipation of the increase in the game medium. , Can be a barrier to playability that purely enjoys a stop.

Features BA19. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA18.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Feature BA20. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of features BA1 to BA19, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BA1.

<Characteristic BB group>
Features BB1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. When the operation is performed in the second stop operation mode different from the above, the pattern combination corresponding to the second result different from the first result, and the second mode different from the picture combination of the first aspect. The first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) in which the pattern combination can be stopped, and
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the third stop operation. When the operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode different from the aspect, the pattern combination of the fourth aspect, which is the pattern combination corresponding to the third result and is different from the pattern combination of the third aspect, can be stopped. The second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the first aspect relating to the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode, or the operation mode including the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode. It is provided with a first mode notification means (a function of executing push order notification processing by the display control device 81) capable of performing notification (push order notification effect) by the first notification means (auxiliary display unit 65).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
With the transition lottery means (function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result. ,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the first aspect notification is executed by the first aspect notification means based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the second operation mode result. Possible special notification means (function to execute special RT notification processing by the display control device 81) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided such that the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage differs depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. There is. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition. There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and generating an unlimited number of transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning of the transition result, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it in the production etc., the transition to the advantageous state will be made. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, since the transition lottery to the specific game state is not performed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the configuration is such that it can be clearly grasped that the transition lottery will not be performed, as a player. Is not desirable.

In that respect, in the above configuration, even in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted, the first aspect notification based on the second operation mode result is executed. .. Similar to the first operation mode result, the second operation mode result is set so that the stop result differs depending on the stop operation mode, but the winning result is the same depending on the stop result. That is, if it is the result of the second operation mode, the advantage of the player does not change even if the first mode notification is performed. Therefore, in the situation where the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state is restricted as described above, if the first mode notification is performed based on the result of the second operation mode, the winning of the transition result is reserved by the reservation means. It is possible to execute the first aspect notification within a range not contrary to the purpose of restricting the transition lottery to the specific gaming state, and it is difficult to understand the situation in which the transition lottery is restricted by the execution of the first aspect notification. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability during reservation while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Features BB2. The first aspect notification means does not execute the first aspect notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. The gaming machine according to the feature BB1.

According to the above configuration, the case where the first mode notification is executed in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means is the second operation mode result of the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result. Limited to certain cases. As described above, the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result may differ in the result of winning the first operation mode result depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the stop operation mode. The same result wins regardless. By doing so, the first aspect in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, while ensuring the significance of restricting the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state. Notification can be executed.

Features BB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode, the second mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode and the stop operation mode including the second stop operation mode is referred to as the first notification means. A second mode notification means (a function of executing push order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by different second notification means (first display segment N1 to 7th display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68). The gaming machine according to feature BB1 or feature BB2, which is characterized by being provided.

According to the above configuration, in the first aspect notification means, the first mode notification is executed in both the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, while in the second aspect notification means, the first operation mode result is the first. Two-mode notification is executed. As described above, in the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the winning result of the first operation mode result may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the stop operation mode. The same result wins regardless. That is, in the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification, the second aspect notification causes a change in the profit of the player, and the first aspect notification includes a case in which the same profit is not changed. Then, for example, in order for the manager of the game hall or the like to monitor the relationship between the stop operation mode and the winning result, the second mode notification by the second notification means may be monitored. In this way, by entrusting the notification associated with the player's profit to the second mode notification, the first mode notification can be used as the notification for the production, and the notification is related to the profit or is involved in the profit. The degree of freedom of notification is overwhelmingly increased, such as not notification.

Features BB4. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means and the second mode notification means, and
A second control device (display control device 81) having at least the first aspect notification means, and
The gaming machine according to the feature BB3, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the lottery means and the second mode notification means that are directly linked to the profit of the player and the first mode notification means for the production are mounted on separate control devices. It is possible to take centralized countermeasures against fraud, and it is possible to suppress the local increase in processing load by decentralizing the functions.

By limiting the "second control device" to "provided separately from the first control device", the effect of being separate control devices can be more clearly achieved.

Features BB5. The notification is started by turning on the predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition to the specific game state, and the predetermined notification is based on the end of the specific game state. It is equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the means.
The first aspect notification means can execute the first aspect notification regardless of whether or not the notification by the specific gaming state notification means is started, while the second aspect notification means is the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature BB3 or feature BB4, wherein the second aspect notification can be executed provided that the notification by the notification means is started.

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific game state, when the specific game state shifts to the specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification is confirmed by the predetermined notification means by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who ends the game without noticing it and the player who is seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy the game by special notification equally.

Then, with respect to the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification, the second aspect notification is configured to be feasible under one condition that the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. The significance of the fact that is directly linked to profits is further strengthened, and the importance of monitoring the second mode notification is increased along with the notification by the specific game state notification means. Further, since the first mode notification can be executed regardless of whether or not the notification is started by the specific game state notification means, the degree of freedom when performing the first mode notification is improved, and the function as an effect is further improved. It becomes possible to increase.

Features BB6. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning.
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the start of notification by the specific game state notification means corresponding to the result of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state executed based on the transition result winning. A feature characterized by having at least means capable of limiting until the transition result winning is established (for example, a function of executing step S4204, step S4208, and a section display fourth process in the main control device 101). The gaming machine described in BB5.

According to the above configuration, it is consistent that the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is restricted in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the second mode notification is not performed in the situation. It is possible to secure the collateral, and in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the transition lottery to the specific gaming state has also been won.

Features BB7. By performing the first aspect notification by the special notification means, it is suggested that the specific content corresponding to the result of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means executed with the transition result reserved by the reservation means as a trigger. The gaming machine according to the feature BB6.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the first aspect notification based on the second operation mode result is performed, so that the specific gaming state triggered by the reserved transition result is entered. Since the content of the transition lottery is suggested, even if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state is restricted in such a situation, it is possible to keep the interest in the transition lottery.

Features BB8. As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, if the result of the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is the transition winning to the first predetermined state, the special notification means. Executes the first aspect notification for the third stop operation mode in which the pattern combination of the third order in the second operation mode result can be stopped.
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, the result of the transition lottery means executed based on the transition result winning is the transition winning to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state. In this case, the special notification means executes the first aspect notification for the fourth stop operation mode in which the pattern combination of the fourth order in the second operation mode result can be stopped. Features The gaming machine described in BB7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the winning content of the lottery for shifting to the specific game state by using the result of the second operation mode in which the stop result is changed by changing the stop operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game playability using the mode notification in a situation where the mode notification directly linked to the profit can be limited.

Features BB 9. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a plurality of types of re-game results in which the re-game can be given as a privilege by the privilege-giving means are provided.
As the result of the plurality of types of re-games, the re-game is granted by the privilege-giving means, and the transition re-game result (for example, promotion replay) that triggers the transition of the game state and the re-game are given by the privilege-giving means. A non-transition replay result (for example, a special replay) that is given and does not trigger a transition of the gaming state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features BB1 to BB8, wherein the second operation mode result is the non-transitional re-gaming result.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, even if the second operation mode result winning is achieved, the gaming state does not shift, and the re-game is simply given. By notifying the mode using such a game result, the effect of the feature BB1 is not contrary to the purpose of restricting the lottery for transition to the specific game state in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved. It becomes possible to play.

Features BB10. In the first operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first aspect corresponding to the first result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation means corresponding to the second result. It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
In the second operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop operation means corresponding to the third result. It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means has the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third mode. BB1 characterized in that the first order notification (pushing order notification effect) relating to the stop order and the stop order including the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of BB9.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

It should be noted that the above configuration is as follows: "In the result of the first operation mode, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode is obtained. The first result winning is established by stopping, the first privilege (for example, nine medals given based on the first small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given by the privilege giving means, and each of the above stops. When the operating means is operated in the second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result winning is won. It is established, and the second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given by the privilege giving means.
The second operation mode result is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result. A prize is established, a third privilege (replay) is given by the privilege granting means, and each of the stop operating means operates in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. In that case, the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is given by the privilege giving means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means has the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third mode. The first order notification (push order notification effect) relating to the stop order and the stop order including the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. " It may be expressed, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features BB11. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features BB1 to BB10, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BB1.

<Characteristic BC group>
Features BC1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
When the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means, a special notification regarding the transition lottery by the already executed transition lottery means is sent based on the specific result winning which is the restriction target by the restriction means. Executable special notification means (function for executing notification cancellation processing and special RT notification processing by the display control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided in which the winning result may be different depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition. There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and generating an unlimited number of transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning of the transition result, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it in the production etc., the transition to the advantageous state will be made. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. However, in the situation where the transition result is reserved by the reservation means, the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is not performed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be improved, but from the viewpoint of the expectation for the specific gaming state. Then, it can be said that the situation in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means is not preferable for the player.

In particular, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the player cannot usually enjoy the benefit of the transition lottery, and the player may feel lost, and the transition result winning is won. The more games that are reserved, the more likely it is that such an event will occur. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the transition lottery to the specific game state is restricted at the time of winning the specific result, if the configuration is such that the notification regarding the transition lottery performed before that is performed, it is as if the specific result is won. It is possible to make it seem as if a transition lottery to a specific game state has been performed, and it is possible to make it difficult to realize that the transition lottery is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize the playability of the advantageous state and the specific gaming state.

Features BC2. The gaming machine according to feature BC1, wherein the special notification means relates to a transition lottery by the already executed transition lottery means, and can notify unnotified contents.

According to the above configuration, the content of notification by the special notification means is more limited. More specifically, since the content of the notification by the special notification means does not include the information related to the transferred lottery that has been notified but is related to the lottery that has not been notified, it is executed in a game close to the game in which the transfer lottery is restricted although the specific result is obtained. Since it is a notification regarding the transition lottery that has been performed and the content is in a close game, the effect of making the transition lottery seem to have been performed based on a specific result can be further enhanced.

Features BC3. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery of the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the transition result.
In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the shift result, a means capable of restricting the execution of notification regarding the lottery by the shift lottery means triggered by the shift result (attack mode or the like in the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature BC1 or feature BC2, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of setting a precursor mode when winning.

According to the above configuration, when the transition lottery is performed by the transition lottery means based on the transition result, the execution of the notification regarding the transition lottery is restricted, so that the transition result winning is carried over by the reservation means. When a specific result is won, it is possible to minimize the number of events such as the transition lottery not being performed before that.

Features BC4. The special notification means has one of the features BC1 to BC3 characterized in that the special notification can be executed in a game after the game that has the specific result restricted by the restriction means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the game after the game in which the specific result is won in which the transition lottery is restricted, the notification regarding the transition lottery executed before the game in which the specific result is obtained is notified. By doing so, the game in which the special notification is performed is not limited to the game in which the specific result is won, the special notification is diversified, and the result of the transition lottery is not preferable for the player. Even if there is, it is possible to entertain the game after a specific result while expecting a change in the content of the special notification.

Features BC5. The special notification means is described when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result in a game after the game that has the specific result restricted by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to feature BC4, characterized in that special notification can be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, it is added that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, so even if the transition result winning is established without the special result, the notification is made. It is possible to raise expectations for the content of the special notification that was supposed to be given. That is, in a configuration in which the result of the transition lottery is favorable to the player due to the special notification being performed, the factor that the special notification is not performed even if the special notification is not performed is the result of the transition lottery. Not only is it unfavorable for the player, but there are also cases where the special result is not won, and the sense of expectation can be maintained. In particular, since the execution timing of the special notification is a time-limited situation in which the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, there are many situations where the special result is not obtained by the transition result winning, and the above special notification is performed. It is more likely to be a factor that did not exist. Therefore, it is possible to preferably exert the effect of sustaining the above-mentioned expectation.

Features BC6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the first control means (in the main control device 101, for example, the main control device 101) controls each of the orbitals so that the first special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. (A function to control so that the replay prize is established when the black BAR double match is stopped),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, each of the orbitals is controlled so that the second special pattern combination different from the first special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position. Control means (in the main control device 101, for example, a function of controlling so that a replay prize is established at a stop result in which the black BAR is not stopped) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature BC5, wherein the special notification means executes a notification that enables the first special pattern combination to be stopped as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is given by the stop result when the special result is won. By doing so, in the configuration of performing special notification based on the special result winning, it is not necessary to change the probability of winning the special result before and after the specific result winning, and the feature BC5 has a simple configuration. It can be effective.

Features BC7. The special notification means is a game in which the transfer result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the execution of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is restricted by the restriction means. BC1 to the feature BC1 to the feature BC1 to make it easier for the game after the game after the game to be notified about the transfer lottery by the executed transfer lottery means. The game machine according to any one of BC6.

According to the above configuration, if a specific result is won in a situation where the transition result winning is reserved, the game that wins the specific result is used as the trigger game, and the game after the game before the trigger game is executed. It becomes easier to notify about the completed transition lottery. By doing so, even if the transition lottery has already been executed, it is possible to make the transition lottery appear as if the transition lottery was performed based on the specific result of the opportunity game.

Features BC8. Multiple types of the specific results are set,
In the special notification means, the game after the trigger game is better than the game before the trigger game, depending on the type of the specific result in which the shift lottery by the shift lottery means is restricted by the limiting means. The gaming machine according to feature BC7, wherein the probability of facilitating notification of the transition lottery by the already executed transition lottery means can be different.

According to the above configuration, the probability that the notification regarding the transition lottery is likely to be performed in the game after the game in which the specific result is won differs depending on the type of the specific result being reserved. The notification by can be made into a production in line with the actual situation of the transition lottery. Specifically, for example, as a specific result, there are generally a result that makes it easy to win the transition lottery and a result that makes it difficult to win, and the change in the notification rate during reservation is also adjusted according to the winning probability. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the transition lottery has been performed based on the specific result of the opportunity game.

Features BC9. When the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and then the transition result winning is established, a means capable of executing notification regarding the lottery by the already executed transition lottery means (section display fourth process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of the features BC1 to BC8, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, even if a specific result is not won during reservation, or even if a specific result is won, a special notification is given based on the special result winning, for example, feature BC5. Even if the transition result winning is established without notification, it is possible to minimize the number of events such as transition to an advantageous state without notification regarding the lottery by the already executed transition lottery means. By doing so, it is possible to preferably execute the notification regarding the lottery by the transition lottery means.

Features BC10. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BC1 to BC9.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features BC11. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of the features BC1 to BC10, wherein at least one of the pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BC1.

<Characteristic BD group>
Features BD1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
With
As the game state, a plurality of re-game states (particularly, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-game result is different from the normal game state are set.
When a specific condition including a winning condition for which the transition result winning is reserved is satisfied by the reservation means, the re-gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to one of the plurality of re-gaming states ( In the special RT state processing of the main control device 101, a function of executing a process of shifting to any of the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) and
When the gaming state is shifted to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition means, the re-gaming state to be shifted can be selected based on the specific event related to the specific gaming state (special RT of the main control device 101). In the state processing, a function to execute the process of setting the RT state depending on the presence or absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided in which the winning result may be different depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition. There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and generating an unlimited number of transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning of the transition result, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it in the production etc., the transition to the advantageous state will be made. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for transition, there are many situations where the execution of the lottery for a specific state is restricted due to a specific result, and the player feels like a loss. obtain. Therefore, based on the situation in which such a situation can occur, that is, the situation in which the winning of the transition result is reserved in the reservation means, the re-game state in which the probability of a predetermined re-game result changes, that is, the so-called RT state. After making the configuration to be transferred, the type of the re-gaming state is selected based on the specific event related to the specific gaming state. By doing so, a game such as predicting a specific event related to the specific game state is added from the type of the re-game state, and the execution of the lottery related to the specific game state is restricted as a specific result. However, it is possible to entertain the game related to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features BD2. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning.
The gaming machine according to feature BD1, wherein the specific event is the content of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of shifting to the re-gaming state based on the transition result winning, the shifting re-gaming state differs depending on the content of the transition lottery performed based on the transition result winning. By doing so, it is possible to preferably realize a game in which the content of the transition lottery is predicted from the transitioned re-game state.

Features BD3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), a means (main control device 101) for controlling each of the orbiting bodies so that the pattern combination for the specific replay can be stopped at the effective position. Has a function to execute reel control processing in
The gaming machine according to feature BD1 or feature BD2, wherein the frequency at which the pattern combination for the specific replay is stopped differs depending on the type of the replay state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the stop frequency of the pattern combination for the specific re-game that may appear when the specific re-game result is won differs depending on the type of the re-game state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a game such as predicting the type of the re-game state from the stop frequency of the pattern combination for the specific re-game, and thereby predicting a specific event related to the specific game state. Become.

Features BD4. The gaming machine according to feature BD3, wherein the probability of achieving the specific replay result differs depending on the type of the replay state.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability itself of the specific re-game result is different, the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific re-game may be different depending on the type of the re-game state. In this way, for example, when the specific re-game result is won, it is not necessary to control whether or not to stop the symbol combination for the specific re-game depending on the stop order, the stop timing, and the like. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize a game in which a specific event regarding a specific game state is predicted from the appearance rate of a pattern combination for a specific re-game.

Features BD5. The feature BD1 to BD4 is characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes any of the re-game results is the same probability or almost the same probability regardless of the type of the re-game state. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved, in order to realize the game of predicting a specific event about the specific gaming state, the advantage of the re-gaming state transitioning during the reservation is different. No need arises. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of the specific gaming state without considering the ball output rate and the like.

The "same probability or almost the same probability" includes not only the case where the probabilities are exactly the same, but also the difference in the probabilities to the extent that it is difficult for the player to experience the difference in the probabilities.

Features BD7. The specific condition includes a non-winning condition (for example, a duplicate winning combination that is a BB non-winning) that is established without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means.
The lottery is based on the re-gaming state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the non-winning condition and the re-gaming state selected by the selection means based on the establishment of the winning condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD6, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the means will be the re-gaming result is the same probability or substantially the same probability.

According to the above configuration, the probability of a re-game result is the same or almost the same in the re-game state in which the transition result is reserved based on the reservation means and the re-game state in which the transition result is not won. Become. By doing so, when a game such as predicting whether or not the transition result winning is reserved when the transition to the re-gaming state is also performed, it cannot be predicted from the winning probability of the re-gaming result. In this way, it is possible to increase the weight of the predicted game.

Features BD8. A normal replay result (normal replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the normal game state.
A specific replay result (special replay) is set as the replay result that can be won in the replay state.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the normal re-game result, the means for controlling each of the orbiting bodies (reel control of the main control device 101) so that the pattern combination for the normal re-game can be stopped at the effective position. In the process, the function to execute the process of stopping the normal replay and making the replay win a prize) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), a means (main control device 101) for controlling each orbiting body so that the pattern combination for the specific regame can be stopped at the effective position. In the reel control process of, for example, a function to execute a process of winning a replay prize at the stop of the black BAR stop),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific replay result (special replay), a means (main control device) for controlling each of the orbiting bodies so that the pattern combination for the normal replay can be stopped at the effective position. In the reel control process of 101, the function of executing the process of stopping the normal replay and making the replay win a prize) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD7, characterized in that the frequency at which the pattern combination for the specific re-gaming is stopped differs depending on the type of the re-gaming state selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, in the game property of predicting the type of the re-game state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific re-game, even when the specific re-game result is won, the same stop result as the normal re-game result is obtained. May occur. By doing so, the symbol combination for the specific re-game is stopped or the symbol combination for the normal re-game is stopped at the time of winning the specific re-game result without differentiating the winning probability of the specific re-game result. It is possible to change the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific re-game simply by making it or making it different. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of the re-game state from the appearance rate of the pattern combination for the specific re-game, and thereby predicting the specific event related to the specific game state. it can.

Features BD9. The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery based on the transition result winning.
As the migration result, the first migration result and the second migration result are included.
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
When the transition lottery is executed based on the first transition result winning, the transition lottery means performs a transition lottery to the first predetermined state of the specific gaming states, and based on the second transition result winning. When the transition lottery is executed, the transition lottery to a second predetermined state different from the first predetermined state in the specific gaming state is performed.
The re-gaming state transition means shifts to the first re-gaming state among the plurality of re-gaming states on condition that the first transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, and the reservation means shifts to the first re-gaming state. 1 Transition Result Features BD1 to BD8 characterized in that the transition is made to a second re-gaming state different from the first re-gaming state among the plurality of re-gaming states on condition that the winning is reserved. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the type of the transition result, the type of the re-gaming state, and the content of the specific gaming state in which the transition lottery is performed are associated with each other. In other words, an event occurs in which the player shifts to the first re-gaming state even though the second transition result is won, or shifts to the second re-gaming state even though the first transition result is won. Absent. Therefore, the transparency of the game is ensured, and the game in which the specific game state is predicted from the type of the re-game state can be preferably realized.

Features BD10. The notification is started by turning on the predetermined notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, and the notification is started based on the end of the specific game state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by turning off the predetermined notification means, and
When the gaming state is shifted to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition means, a means capable of restricting the start of notification by the specific game state notification means (when the display control device 81 wins the attack mode or the like, the precursor mode Function to execute the process of setting) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD9.

According to the above configuration, regarding the specific game state, when the specific game state shifts to the specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, if the presence or absence of notification is confirmed by the predetermined notification means by the specific game state notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who ends the game without noticing it and the player who is seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy the game by special notification equally.

In addition, when the re-gaming state transition means shifts to the re-gaming state, the start of notification by the specific gaming state notification means may be restricted. By doing so, when the transition to the re-gaming state is made based on the reservation of the transition result winning by the reservation means, it is preferable to predict the specific event related to the specific gaming state from the type of the re-gaming state. Can be executed. That is, when the notification is started by the specific game state notification means, the specific event is predicted by the notification by the specific game state notification means in the configuration in which the presence or absence of the transition to the specific game state is set as the specific event. This is because it will be grasped soon.

Features BD11. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD10, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features BD12. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of features BD1 to BD11, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BD1.

Features BD13. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
With
As the game state, a plurality of re-game states (particularly, the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined re-game result is different from the normal game state are set.
The plurality of re-game states are set so that the probability of becoming a specific re-game result among the re-game results is different.
The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning.
When a specific condition including a winning condition for which the transition result winning is reserved is satisfied by the reservation means, the re-gaming state transition means capable of shifting the gaming state to one of the plurality of re-gaming states ( In the special RT state processing of the main control device 101, a function of executing a process of shifting to any of the 5th RT state to the 8th RT state) and
When the gaming state is shifted to the re-gaming state by the re-gaming state transition means, the re-gaming state to be shifted can be selected according to the winning expectation of the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state (main control). In the special RT state processing of the device 101, a function of executing a process of setting the RT state depending on the presence or absence of the challenge mode winning flag, the attack mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved. In such a configuration, a specific gaming state is provided in which the winning result may be different depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body, and the advantage is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

On the other hand, if the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is performed, a stop operation is performed so as not to stop the pattern combination for transition. There is a possibility that an act of preventing the transition to the advantageous state from occurring easily and generating an unlimited number of transition lottery to the specific gaming state may be performed. Then, the difference in advantage between the player who can perform the stop operation without stopping the pattern combination for the transition and the player who cannot perform such the stop operation becomes remarkable, and from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. It is not preferable, and it is not preferable from such a viewpoint because the payout rate may be different from the intended payout rate in the first place. Therefore, in the state where the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed, the above-mentioned intended payout rate can be obtained by restricting the execution of the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state, and the fairness of the game. Can be secured.

In addition, by making it possible to reserve the winning of the transition result, in a situation where the transition to the advantageous state is internally confirmed, if the game is played while suggesting it in the production etc., the transition to the advantageous state will be made. It also has the advantage of sustaining expectations. On the other hand, if it is difficult to stop the pattern combination itself for transition, there are many situations where the execution of the lottery for a specific state is restricted due to a specific result, and the player feels like a loss. obtain. Therefore, any of a plurality of replay states in which the probability of a specific replay result is different based on the situation in which such a situation can occur, that is, the situation in which the transition result winning is reserved in the reservation means. After making the configuration to shift to the crab, the type of the re-gaming state is selected according to the winning expectation of the lottery to shift to the specific gaming state. By doing so, a game such as predicting and grasping the type of the re-game state from the winning probability of the specific re-game result and predicting the winning expectation of the lottery to shift to the specific game state is added, and the specific result Therefore, even in a situation where the execution of the lottery related to the specific game state is restricted, it is possible to entertain the game related to the specific game state. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, each configuration of the above features BD1 to BD12 may be applied individually to the feature BD13, or each configuration may be applied in combination.

<Characteristic BE group>
Features BE1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing the transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the game state shifting to the specific game state, and the notification by the specific notification means is ended based on the end of the specific game state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
With
As the specific result, a duplicate result including the transition result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1, strong watermelon duplication 1, chance A duplication 1) and a non-overlapping result not including the migration result (for example, strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc.) Chance A) is set,
The specific game state notification means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the non-overlapping result and the lottery for transition to the specific gaming state is won, the game winning the non-overlapping result is set as the start game, and the operation of the next game of the start game is performed. (A function of executing the section display first process in the main control device 101) and a means for starting the notification by the specific notification means at a timing before allowing the above.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplication result or the transition result and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won, the game that shifts to the advantageous state by stopping the pattern combination for the transition is performed. The start game is set, and the notification by the specific notification means is not started at the timing before the start game, and the notification by the specific notification means is performed at the timing before the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. Means to start (a function to execute the section display fourth process in the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

In this case, when the mode shifts to the specific gaming state in which the mode notification is likely to be performed, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible to have all the players enjoy the game by the mode notification equally.

Moreover, the notification by the specific game state notification means sets the game in which the lottery result that triggered the winning of the transition to the specific game state can be won as the start game, and allows the operation of the next game of the start game. Is started before, and the start timing of the notification is a timed notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce as much as possible the end of the game even though the lottery for transition to the specific game state has been won.

On the other hand, if the notification of the transition lottery is timed as described above, the result of the transition lottery can be clearly determined depending on whether or not the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. Therefore, it can be viewed as a source of lack of fun in the production.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the lottery for shifting to the specific gaming state triggers the transition to the advantageous state, and the result overlaps with the transition result (so-called jackpot) in which the winning can be reserved until the winning is established. In addition to the configuration that can be performed by the non-overlapping result that is not the duplication with the transition result, the notification start by the specific game state notification means is different between the duplicated result and the non-overlapping result.

More specifically, when the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won with the non-overlapping result as an opportunity, the game in which the non-overlapping result is won is set as the start game, and the operation of the next game is not allowed. If the notification by the specific game state notification means is started and the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won with the result including the transition result (mainly the duplicate result) as an opportunity, the pattern for transition corresponding to the transition result is won. The game in which the combination is stopped and the game shifts to the advantageous state is set as the start game, and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started before the operation of the next game is allowed.

By doing so, even if a stop result corresponding to the result that triggers the transition to the specific game state appears, the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started in the game. Since the possibility of the above duplication result remains, it is possible to make the notification by the specific game state notification means time-limited, and to make the notification highly effective. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

Features BE2. As the duplication result, a first duplication result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, the first non-overlapping result (for example, strong cherry) which is the non-overlapping result of the first specific result (for example, strong cherry) among the specific results is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped at the effective position. The gaming machine according to the feature BE1.

According to the above configuration, the game that wins the first duplicate result, which is the duplicate winning of the first specific result and the transition result, and the game that wins the first non-overlapping result, which is the single winning of the first specific result, In either case, since the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the first specific result winning can be established, it is stopped whether the first duplicate result or the first non-overlapping result is won. It becomes difficult to judge from the result. On the other hand, in the notification by the specific game state notification means, the game in which the transition result winning is established is set as the start game if the first overlapping result is established, and the game in which the first specific result winning is established if the first non-overlapping result is established. Let's start the game. Therefore, even if the lottery for shifting to the specific game state is won with any result as an opportunity, an event may occur in which the presence / absence (start timing) of the notification of the specific game state notification means is different. That is, even if the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started until the operation of the next game of the game is permitted, the first specific is specified. It is possible to leave the possibility that the pattern combination for the result is based on the first specific result in the first duplicate result, and the expectation is maintained even if the lottery for transition to the specific game state is not won. It becomes possible to make it.

Features BE3. As the duplication result, a second duplication result (for example, strong watermelon duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a second non-overlapping result (for example, strong watermelon), which is a non-overlapping result of the second specific result (for example, strong watermelon) among the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
The gaming machine according to feature BE2, wherein the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is different between the lottery based on the first specific result and the lottery based on the second specific result.

According to the above configuration, in the playability of the feature BE2, the probability of winning the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is also taken into consideration. That is, for example, if the first specific result is more likely to win the transition lottery than the second specific result, the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is started. If this is not the case, there is a higher possibility that the transition has been won than when the combination of symbols for the second specific result has stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means has not been started, and the first specific symbol has not been started. Expectations for the emergence of combinations are further increased. On the other hand, when the pattern combination for the second specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the surprising effect when the first specific pattern combination appears after that is enhanced. .. As described above, by taking into account the winning probability of the transition lottery by the transition lottery means and entertaining the stop result, the playability of predicting the result of the transfer lottery from the stop result during the reservation is significantly improved.

Features BE4. As the duplication result, a third duplication result (for example, chance A duplication 1), which is an duplication result with the third specific result (for example, chance A) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a third non-overlapping result (for example, chance A), which is a non-overlapping result of the third specific result (for example, chance A) among the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the third non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the third specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the third specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
In the lottery by the lottery means, the ratio of the overlapping result and the non-overlapping result becomes the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result, and the ratio of the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result. The gaming machine according to feature BE2 or feature BE3, which is characterized by being different in proportion.

According to the above configuration, the probability of winning the transition result is also taken into consideration in the playability of the feature BE2 and the feature BE3. That is, for example, the ratio of the first overlapping result and the first non-overlapping result is higher than the ratio of the third overlapping result and the third non-overlapping result, and the ratio of the overlapping result with the migration result is higher (same stop). If it is a configuration in which there is a high possibility that the transition result is won even if the result is a result), the third specific is specified unless the pattern combination for the first specific result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. It is more likely that the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means than when the pattern combination for the result is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started. In other words, in the configuration of the feature BE3, if the result is non-overlapping and the specific game state, the notification by the specific game state notification means is started in the game. Therefore, as described above, for the first specific result. If the symbol combination is stopped and the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, the possibility that the specific game state has been won is higher than in the case of the symbol combination for the third specific result. As described above, by taking into account the probability of winning the transition result and entertaining the stop roll, the playability of predicting the result of the transition lottery from the stop roll during the reservation is significantly improved.

Features BE5. As the duplication result, a fourth duplication result (for example, middle bell duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the fourth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a fourth non-overlapping result (for example, the middle bell), which is a non-overlapping result of the fourth specific result (for example, the middle bell) of the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is given to the effective position based on the stop of the pattern combination for the fourth specific result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fourth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fourth specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fourth specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, there are a first transition lottery which is a transition lottery to the first predetermined state (challenge mode) and a transition lottery to a second predetermined state (attack mode) different from the first predetermined state. A certain second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specific result, any transition lottery can be won, while the first transition lottery executed based on the fourth specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE4, wherein the second transition lottery is set so as not to win in one of the transition lottery.

According to the above configuration, among the specific gaming states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state include those that do not shift depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first specific result, it is possible to shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, but in the case of the fourth specific result, it is not possible to shift to either one. By doing so, the case where the pattern combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result is stopped, and the fourth identification corresponding to the fourth overlapping result or the fourth non-overlapping result. In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the combination of symbols for the result is stopped and whether or not the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, a lottery for transition to any predetermined state is performed. From the point of view of whether or not it was broken, it is possible to play a game to enjoy the subsequent trends.

Features BE6. As the duplication result, a fifth duplication result (for example, middle bell duplication 1), which is a duplication result with the fifth specific result (for example, middle bell) of the specific results, is set.
As the non-overlapping result, a fifth non-overlapping result (for example, the middle bell), which is a non-overlapping result of the fifth specific result (for example, the middle bell) of the specific results, is set.
The privilege granting means
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fifth specific result is given to the effective position based on the stop of the pattern combination for the fifth specific result.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth non-overlapping result, a privilege corresponding to the fifth specific result is given based on the fact that the pattern combination for the fifth specific result is stopped at the effective position. It is a thing
As the specific gaming state, there are a plurality of predetermined states (attack mode, challenge mode, super attack mode, precursor mode, etc.) having different advantages for the player.
As the transition lottery by the transition lottery means, the first transition lottery which is the transition lottery to the first predetermined state (challenge mode) and the transition lottery to the second predetermined state (super attack mode) different from the first predetermined state. The second transition lottery is set,
In the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery executed based on the first specific result, the first transition lottery executed based on the fifth specific result may not be won in any of the transition lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of the features BE2 to BE5, which is set to win in at least one of the transition lottery in the transition lottery and the second transition lottery.

According to the above configuration, among the specific gaming states, the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state always shift to one of the predetermined states depending on the type of the specific result. That is, in the case of the first specific result, it may not shift to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state, and in the case of the fifth specific result, it always shifts to either one. By doing so, the case where the pattern combination for the first specific result corresponding to the first overlapping result or the first non-overlapping result is stopped, and the fifth identification corresponding to the fifth overlapping result or the fifth non-overlapping result. In addition to the viewpoint of whether or not the combination of symbols for the result is stopped and whether or not the notification by the specific game state notification means is started, which predetermined state is to be shifted to, etc. From the viewpoint as well, it is possible to play a game to enjoy the subsequent trends.

Features BE7. The first result is that a prize is established when the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order.
The second result is a winning result when the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order can be executed by the predetermined notification means as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that it is present.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

Features BE8. As the specific gaming state, a high-frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than that in the normal gaming state, a high-probability state in which the transition to the high-frequency state is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the high-frequency state or the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of features BE1 to BE7, characterized in that at least one of a pre-transition state (precursor mode), which is won in the transition lottery to a high probability and is before the transition, is set.

According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, the high-probability state and the pre-transition state are both stages before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as the normal game state. .. Including such a state, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means, so that the game ends without noticing it even though the state has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to preferably avoid such an event. That is, if the player has transitioned to the high-frequency state, it is considered that the player can grasp the transition to the state by performing the mode notification, and the transition to the previous stage state of the high-frequency state is specified. By configuring the notification means to notify by the start of notification, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means and to improve the effect of increasing the expectation for the specific gaming state described in the feature BE1.

<Characteristic CA group>
Features CA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means can stop the first stop. When the operation is performed in the second stop operation mode different from the operation mode, the operation mode result (for example, the push order bell) that the pattern combination for the second mode different from the picture combination for the first mode can be stopped. ) Is set,
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player based on the fact that the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position. A transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the shift result, the process of the reservation means (the process of step S609 by the main control device 101) that reserves the shift result winning until the pattern combination for the shift stops at the effective position. Function to execute) and
With
As the gaming state, a re-gaming state is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a re-gaming result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
When a specific condition including a winning condition that is established when the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means and a non-winning condition that is established without the transition result winning being reserved by the reservation means is satisfied. It is equipped with a re-game state transition means (a function of executing special RT state processing by the main control device 101) capable of shifting the game state to the re-game state.
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the operation mode result in the re-game state, the mode notification means shifts based on the fact that the winning condition is satisfied as the specific condition. If there is, it is easy to execute the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode, and if the replay state shifts based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition, the second stop operation A gaming machine characterized by having a special aspect notification means (a function of executing a special RT notification process by the display control device 81) that makes it easy to execute the aspect notification regarding the aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and the pattern combination for the transition corresponding to the transition result is stopped. Then, the player shifts to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and if the pattern combination for transition does not stop, the winning of the transition result is reserved.

Further, as a gaming state, a re-gaming state (so-called RT state) in which the probability of a re-gaming result is higher than that of the normal gaming state is set, and the transition to the re-gaming state is performed on condition that the transition result winning is reserved. In some cases, the game may shift to the re-gaming state on the condition that the winning result is not reserved. Therefore, when the player shifts to the re-gaming state, the advantage of the subsequent player differs greatly depending on whether or not the transition result winning is reserved, and it is considered that the player's interest is the presence or absence of the reservation.

Here, the replay result is a result in which so-called omission does not occur. Therefore, for example, in the case where the presence or absence of the reservation is performed by the production or the like, the frequency at which the eye-pressing is required during the replay state is relatively low, so that the production of the presence or absence of the reservation is overlooked. It is preferable from the viewpoint of deterring. On the other hand, in general, the stop result of the replay result winning is uniform, but there is a possibility that the stop result may be monotonous.

In that respect, in the above configuration, by differentiating the mode notification when the operation mode result is won during the replay state, the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped or the pattern combination for the second mode is stopped. A game such as predicting the presence or absence of the above reservation is added depending on whether or not the game is stopped. That is, by suggesting whether or not there is a reservation that the player is interested in during the re-gaming state by the stop roll and grasping it, not only the monotonous stop roll in the re-game state is avoided, but also the relevant It is possible to expect a directing effect such as dramatically increasing the degree of attention to the stop roll. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Features CA2. As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
With the transition lottery means (function of executing the first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result. ,
In a situation where the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means (carry-over state), when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the limiting means (main control) that restricts the execution of the lottery by the transition lottery means. The function of executing the process of step S702 by the device 101) and
The gaming machine according to the feature CA1, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the above configuration, the execution of the transition lottery to the specific gaming state related to the mode notification is restricted in the situation where the transition result winning is reserved. That is, in the re-game state, if the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted, the reservation of the transition result winning is confirmed, and the execution of the transition lottery to the specific game state related to the mode notification is restricted. If not, it is confirmed that the transition result winning is not reserved. In other words, if the situation is unfavorable for the player, such as the execution of the transition lottery is restricted, the situation is favorable for the player, that is, the reservation of the transition result winning, and conversely, the execution of the transition lottery is not restricted. If it is a favorable situation for the player, it will be an unfavorable situation for the player that the transition result winning is not reserved, and in any case, it will be a favorable situation for the player. Therefore, it is possible to have a well-balanced playability.

Features CA3. The pattern combination for the first aspect is established by stopping the first number of predetermined specific patterns at a specific position (middle line L2) that can be visually recognized via the display unit in each of the orbiting bodies. ,
The pattern combination for the second aspect is formed by stopping a second number of the specific patterns, which is less than the first number, at the specific position in each of the orbiting bodies. Alternatively, the gaming machine described in the feature CA2.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the stop result between the pattern combination for the first aspect and the pattern combination for the second aspect can be grasped by the number of stops of the specific pattern. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand, for example, a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted by the difference in the stop result is judged by the number of stops of the specific pattern.

Features CA4. The gaming machine according to feature CA3, wherein the second number is 0.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the stop result of the case where the pattern combination for the first aspect is stopped and the case where the pattern combination for the second aspect is stopped is whether or not the specific pattern is stopped at a specific position. It will be a clearer difference. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more simple in predicting the presence or absence of reservation.

Further, for example, in the game to be predicted, when it is not desired to stop the specific pattern at a specific position any more, the above configuration can be used, for example, to prevent the operation mode result from being won any more. Even if such a complicated configuration is not used, it is possible to adjust the presence or absence of the stop of the specific pattern by the difference in the stop operation mode, and it is possible to realize the above-predicted game with a simpler configuration.

Features CA5. A specific means (black BAR stop counter) for counting the number of times the specific pattern has stopped at the specific position over a plurality of games in the replay state is provided.
When the number counted by the specific means reaches a specific number, the special mode notification means is described as long as the re-gaming state shifts based on the establishment of the non-winning condition as the specific condition. Means for disabling the execution of the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode (in the display control device 81, a process of setting a push order notification effect for non-stop of the black BAR is executed from the notification scenario and the value of the black BAR stop counter. The gaming machine according to the feature CA4, which is characterized by having a function of performing.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stops of the specific symbol reaches the specific number in the re-gaming state in which the transition result winning is not reserved, the mode of the first stop operation mode corresponding to the symbol combination for the first aspect. Notification will not be executed. As a result, the first number of specific symbols does not stop as the pattern combination for the first aspect, so that the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position as the pattern combination for the second aspect. As a result, it is predicted that the transition result winning is not reserved because the number of the specific symbols stopped at the specific position does not exceed the specific number, and conversely, the number of the specific symbols stopped at the specific position exceeds the specific number. Through this, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition result winning is reserved.

Features CA6. Even if the number counted by the specific means is less than the specific number, the special mode notification means shifts based on the fact that the non-winning condition is satisfied as the specific condition in the replay state. If the number exceeds the specific number when the first number is added to the number counted by the specific means, the means (display control device) for disabling the execution of the mode notification regarding the first stop operation mode. 81. The gaming machine according to the feature CA5, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of setting a push order notification effect for black BAR non-stop from the type of special replay and the value of the black BAR stop counter). ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which the number of specific patterns stopped at a specific position exceeds a specific number even though the transfer result winning is not reserved by the reservation means. Therefore, in a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the number of stops, a contradiction between the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservation is less likely to occur.

Features CA7. As the operation mode result, a plurality of operation mode results in which the number of stops of the specific pattern is different at the specific position when the pattern combination for the first mode is stopped are provided.
Regarding any of the results of the plurality of operation modes, the feature CA3 to CA6 is characterized in that the number of the specific symbols stopped at the specific position is 0 when the symbol combination for the second aspect is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted by the number of stops of a specific pattern, the number of increases in the number of stops differs depending on the type of operation mode result, and while the rate of increase is diversified, the feature CA5 As described above, when it is not desired to increase the number of stops and the presence or absence of reservations, it is only necessary to notify the mode of the second stop operation mode, and the game of predicting the presence or absence of reservations is preferably realized. can do.

Features CA8. A means (process for setting an addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of changing the content (background color) of the specific effect in the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) according to the number counted by the specific means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features CA3 to CA7, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of the specific pattern stopped at the specific position from the content of the predetermined effect by the specific notification means, and the player does not have to count the number by himself / herself. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to play a game that predicts the presence or absence of reservation from the number of stops.

Features CA9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result and each of the orbiting bodies is stopped by the first stop operation mode, the stop timing of the predetermined orbiting body among the orbiting bodies is the first timing. If so, the pattern combination for the first aspect is stopped, while the stop timing of the predetermined orbiter is different from the first timing if the second timing is different from the pattern combination for the first aspect. 4. The feature according to any one of features CA3 to CA8, which is a pattern combination and is characterized in that a low number of picture combinations for which the number of times the specific picture stops at the specific position is smaller than the first number stops. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the stop operation mode matches the first stop operation mode (for example, even if the stop operation mode matches the stop order and matches the first stop order), the first stop operation mode is used. The number of specific symbols is not always stopped at a specific position, and the timing of the stop operation, that is, the symbol combination for the first aspect in which the first number of specific symbols is stopped by the eye-pressing operation is stopped, or from the first number. A small number of specific symbols are stopped. It depends on whether the low number of symbol combinations are stopped. In this way, it is possible to stop the specific pattern by its own stop operation and make it appear as if the winner of the transition result has been won, and it is possible to improve the playability during the replay state.

Features CA10. In a game in which the winning condition is satisfied and the game shifts to the re-gaming state, a stop roll that stops at each of the orbiting bodies and a non-winning condition that the non-winning condition is satisfied shifts to the re-gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA9, characterized in that a stop roll that stops at each of the orbiting bodies is common in the game.

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether or not the game has been reserved as a result of the transition from the stop result of the game that triggers the transition to the replay state. Therefore, the gameability of predicting and grasping the presence or absence of reservation from the stop result during the re-game state is not impaired.

Features CA11. A grasping means (special RT counter) for grasping the number of games in the re-gaming state that has been transferred due to the establishment of the non-winning condition, and
A means for returning from the re-gaming state to the gaming state before the transition to the re-gaming state (main control device 101) based on the number of games grasped by the grasping means reaching a predetermined predetermined number. (A function to execute the process of returning to the original game state based on the special RT counter becoming 0)
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA10.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to limit the re-gaming state in which the transition result winning is not reserved. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the re-gaming state, which has a high probability of winning the re-gaming result, continues endlessly even though the transition result winning is not reserved.

Regarding the "predetermined number", if the configuration is such that "the lottery result by the lottery means is larger than the denominator of the probability that the operation mode result will be obtained", the average number of times during the replay state is at least once. It is expected that the result of the operation mode will be won, and there is a merit that it is possible to suitably realize the game playability using the stop result. On the contrary, if the "predetermined number" is configured to be "a number smaller than the denominator of the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the operation mode result", it is difficult to win the operation mode result during the replay state. Therefore, there is an advantage that the rarity of the stop roll based on the operation mode result can be increased, and the degree of attention to the stop roll can be increased.

Features CA12. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
It is a lottery that is executed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result and has the same winning probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery is entered into the specific gaming state. It is equipped with a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery (a function of executing a first specific combination process by the main control device 101).
As the transition result, any one of the features CA1 to CA11 is provided with a first transition result (second BB) in which the winning probability by the lottery means differs depending on the set value set by the setting means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the player shifts to an advantageous state, and the transition symbol combination must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game property that the transition result winning is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided such that when the operation mode result is won, the stop result is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves. Moreover, regarding the specific game state, it is set so that there is no difference in the winning rate of the transition lottery depending on the set value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, etc. It is enhanced and the fairness of the game is guaranteed. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set value in this way, it is fun to select one game table from multiple game tables installed in the game hall, that is, it is predicted which set value is set. There is also the possibility that the enjoyment of the game played while playing will be wiped out. Therefore, in the above configuration, by providing the first transition result in which the winning probability differs depending on the set value as the transition result, the game of predicting the above set value is reserved depending on the stop result during the re-game state. It is possible to enjoy the playability linked to the specific game state while performing while predicting.

Regarding the "specific game state", "as the specific game state, a high frequency state in which the execution frequency of the mode notification is higher than in the normal game state, and a high frequency state in which the transition to the high frequency state is easier than in the normal game state". At least one of the probability state and the pre-transition state (precursor mode) in which the high-frequency state or the transition lottery to the high probability is won and before the transition is set may be set. ”In this case,“ According to the above configuration, the variation of the specific gaming state is diversified and the game playability is improved. Moreover, in the high-probability state and the pre-transition state, both of them are before the advantage is improved by the execution frequency of the mode notification. It is a stage, and the advantage of each game is almost the same as that of the normal game state. Including such a state, when the game shifts to the specific game state, the notification is started by the specific notification means. , It is possible to preferably avoid an event such as ending the game without noticing it even though the game has shifted to the specific game state. That is, if the game has shifted to the high frequency state, It is considered that the player can grasp the state transition by performing the mode notification, and the configuration is such that the transition to the previous stage state of such a high frequency state is notified by the notification start of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably grasp the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result of the above, it is possible to enhance the function of ensuring equality by the specific notification means. " The variation of the "specific game state" is the same for each of the following features.

Features CA13. As the transition result, a second transition result (first BB) having a common winning probability by the lottery means is provided regardless of the set value set by the setting means.
The re-gaming state transition means is characterized in that it shifts to the common re-gaming state regardless of which of the first transition result winning and the second transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means. Features The gaming machine described in CA12.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to complicate the game of predicting the set value while predicting the presence or absence of reservation in the re-game state. That is, even if it is determined whether or not there is a reservation in the replay state, is it the first transition result in which there is a difference in the winning probability depending on the set value, or is it the second transition in which there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value? As if it is a result, the number of branches in the prediction of the set value is increased, the game for predicting the set value can be made more diverse, and the game playability is improved.

Features CA14. As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
The transition lottery means can execute the transition lottery to the specific gaming state based on the transition result winning.
Notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state to the specific game state, and the specific notification means is based on the end of the specific game state. It is equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification by turning off the notification means.
The specific game state notification means is
If the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means does not include the transition result, the game in which the winning result is established is set as the start game, and the operation of the next game of the start game is permitted. A first means (a function of executing the section display first process by the main control device 101) for starting the notification by the specific notification means at a timing earlier than that, and
When the game result that triggered the transition lottery by the transition lottery means is a result including the transition result, the game in which the transition result winning is established is set as the start game, and the operation of the next game of the start game is allowed. The second means (the function of executing the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that starts the notification by the specific notification means at the previous timing, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA13.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result, and when the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped, the player shifts to an advantageous state, and the transition symbol combination must be stopped. For example, in addition to the game property that the transition result winning is reserved, a specific gaming state is provided such that when the operation mode result is won, the stop result is different depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification regarding the stop operation mode. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, so that a chain between the advantageous state and the specific game state can occur in each game, and the game playability is remarkably improved. improves.

In such a configuration, when the state shifts to the specific game state, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific game state ends, the notification also ends. That is, by confirming the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing the transition to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy the game by special notification equally.

Moreover, the notification by the specific notification means is started at least before the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific game state allows the operation of the next game of the start game in which the prize is won, and the notification start timing is timed. It is supposed to be a notification. More specifically, if the lottery result that triggered the start does not include the transition result and the transition result winning is not reserved, the operation of the next game of the game in which the lottery result winning is established. If the lottery result that triggered the start is the result including the transition result and the transition result winning can be reserved, the next game in which the transition result winning is established. The notification is started before the operation of the game is allowed. In other words, basically, the notification is started in the game of winning the lottery result that triggered the start of the specific game state, but if the transition result winning is reserved, the specific game is held until the transition result winning is established. The start of notification by the status notification means is restricted. Then, for example, in a game that has a game result that can trigger the start of the specific game state, if the notification by the specific game state notification means is not started, (1) the lottery for transition to the specific game state is won and the lottery is won. If the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, or (2) the transition result winning to the specific game state is not won and the transition result winning is reserved by the reservation means, or (3) the specific game Either the transition to the state lottery or the transition result has not been won. In that respect, as in the above feature CA1, since it is possible to perform a game in which the presence or absence of winning the transition result is estimated from the stop result of the operation mode result, in relation to the presence or absence of the start of notification by the specific game state notification means. If the notification has not been started, it is possible to narrow down whether the case is the case (1) or (2) or the case (3) from the stop result of the operation mode result. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of estimating the presence or absence of reservation based on the stop result, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In particular, in a configuration such as feature CA12 and feature CA13, which has a first transition result having a difference in winning probability depending on a set value and a second transition result having no difference as a transition result, winning of a transition lottery to a specific gaming state. Assuming that the probabilities do not differ depending on the set value, the transition lottery to the specific gaming state cannot be performed in the first transition result, and the transition lottery to the specific gaming state cannot be performed in the second transition result. It becomes a configuration that can perform. Then, in the cases (1) and (2) above, if the first transition result is reserved, it is the case of (2), and if the second transition result is reserved, it is the case of (1). Therefore, it is possible to narrow down which case is the case from the relationship with the type of migration result.

Features CA15. As a result of the operation mode
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first aspect corresponding to the first result can be stopped as the pattern combination for the first aspect, and each stop can be stopped. When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the second aspect is a pattern combination corresponding to a second result different from the first result, and is the first aspect. The first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) that enables the stop of the second mode of the pattern combination different from the pattern combination of
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result can be stopped as the pattern combination for the first aspect, and each stop can be stopped. When the operating means is operated in the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination for the second aspect is a pattern combination corresponding to the third result, which is different from the pattern combination in the third aspect. The first operation mode result (for example, special replay) that enables the pattern combination of the fourth mode to be stopped is set.
The special aspect notification means does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, while does not execute the mode notification if the operation mode result is the first operation mode result. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA14.

According to the above configuration, in the game of predicting the presence or absence of reservation from the stop result at the time of winning the operation mode result, if the operation mode result is the second operation mode result, the stop result is adjusted by the mode notification. If it is the result of the first operation mode, the mode notification is not performed and the stop result is not adjusted. As for the first operation mode result and the second operation mode result, the result of winning the first operation mode result may differ depending on the stop operation mode, while the second operation mode result is the same result regardless of the stop operation mode. Will win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the presence or absence of reservation is predicted from the stop result at the time of winning the operation mode result within a range that does not cause a change in the profit of the player. Therefore, when setting the game to be predicted, it is not necessary to consider the ball output rate and the like, and it is possible to set it in anticipation of a pure effect.

Features CA16. As a result of the operation mode, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the symbol combination for the first mode can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means can be stopped. When the second stop operation mode is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, the pattern combination for the second mode can be stopped as an order correspondence result (for example, a push order bell). Is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order correspondence result, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features CA1 to CA15, which can be executed by a predetermined notification means.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

In the above configuration, "when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode and the first result winning is established, the first privilege (for example, 3 bets) is used. (9 medals) given based on the first small winning combination in the game) are given, and each of the stop operation means has a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode. When the second result winning is established by the operation with, the second privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification means uses the order notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop order and the stop order including the second stop order as the mode notification as the predetermined notification. It is characterized by being feasible by means. ”In this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

<Characteristic CB group>
Features CB1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode corresponding to the first result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation mode. When the operation is performed in the second stop operation mode different from the above, the pattern combination corresponding to the second result different from the first result, and the second mode different from the picture combination of the first aspect. The first operation mode result (for example, push order bell) in which the pattern combination can be stopped, and
When each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode corresponding to the third result can be stopped, and each of the stop operation means is the third stop operation mode. When the operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode different from the above, the pattern combination corresponding to the third result and different from the pattern combination of the third aspect can be stopped. The second operation mode result (for example, special replay) is set.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the first operation mode, the first aspect notification (push order notification) regarding the stop operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is first. The first aspect notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the notification means (first display segment N1 to 7th display segment N7 in the instruction monitor 68), and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result of the second operation mode, the second mode notification (push order notification effect) relating to the third stop operation mode and the stop operation mode including the fourth stop operation mode is performed. 2 A second mode notification means (a function of executing push order notification processing by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
With
A first specific state (advantageous section) in which execution of both the first aspect notification by the first aspect notification means and the second aspect notification by the second aspect notification means is permitted, and
The second specific state (normal section) in which the execution of the first aspect notification by the first aspect notification means is restricted, while the execution of the second aspect notification by the second aspect notification means is permitted.
Is set,
In the second specific state, based on the second aspect notification by the second aspect notification means, a suggestion means suggesting an advantage after the second specific state (a special RT notification process by the display control device 81 is executed). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a first operation mode result is set in which the winning result differs depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body. Therefore, it is possible to realize game playability in which the advantage is changed depending on the presence or absence of the first mode notification at the time of winning the result of the first operation mode. In addition to that, since the second operation mode result in which the winning result is common depending on the stop operation mode of the orbiting body is also set, as the first specific state, the second mode notification at the time of winning the second operation mode result is the first mode. By interweaving it with the notification and generating it, it is possible to realize playability with suppressed gambling without excessively changing the advantage.

In such a configuration, of the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification, the execution of the first aspect notification is restricted, while the execution of the second aspect notification is permitted in the second specific state. By setting such a second specific state, it is possible to realize game playability in which the mode notification is performed but the mode notification does not cause a change in an advantageous manner, and the mode notification is simply aimed at acquiring a game medium. It is possible to contribute to the creation of new playability that has escaped from the playability. On the other hand, although players may want to enjoy such new playability, they do not want to acquire game media, and the fact is that their interest in advantage is still high. It can be said. Therefore, in the second specific state, if the configuration is configured to suggest the advantage after the second specific state by using the mode notification, a game of predicting the subsequent development by the mode notification will be added, and the mode notification will be added. It is possible to improve the playability in the second specific state in which the advantage does not change by itself. As a result of the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features CB2. The first specific state is a state in which at least the execution frequency of the first aspect notification by the first aspect notification means can be higher than that in the normal gaming state.
A first shift lottery means (a function of executing a first specific combination process by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery for whether or not to shift the game state to the first specific state, and
The specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) starts the notification based on the fact that the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won, and the specific notification is based on the end of the first specific state. Specific notification execution means (a function of executing the section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that terminates the notification by the means, and
With
The specific notification executing means is characterized in that even if the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is won, the specific notification means does not perform notification in the second specific state. Features The gaming machine described in CB1.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration having the first specific state in which the execution of the first aspect notification and the second aspect notification is permitted and the second specific state in which the execution of only the second aspect notification is permitted, the first aspect is generated. Since the specific state is set so that the execution frequency of the first aspect notification can be higher than that of the normal gaming state, the player is expected to play the game while expecting to shift to the first specific state. Conceivable. In that respect, if the first lottery for the first transition to the first specific state is won, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the first specific state ends, the notification by the specific notification means ends. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not it is in the first specific state. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from ending without noticing it even though the player has won the first transition lottery to the first specific state. It is possible to eliminate the bias of profit between the player who ends the game and the successor player who plays the game after that.

In this way, if a specific notification means for clearly indicating whether or not it is in the first specific state is provided, the effect of ensuring the fairness of the game as described above can be expected, but on the other hand, the game result and the stop result, etc. Regardless of the occurrence of the effect, the player may pay attention only to the specific notification means, so that the effect of the effect may be reduced. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the notification of the specific notification means is not performed in the second specific state, the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means, that is, the start of notification of the specific notification means is maximum. It is possible to urge the player who has been paying limited attention to shift the point of interest to the second mode notification that occurs in the second specific state, and the subsequent advantage based on the second mode notification. It is possible to preferably realize the playability of predicting.

Features CB3. The suggestion means is a case where the second aspect notification for the third stop operation mode is performed and a case where the second mode notification for the fourth stop operation mode is performed, and after the second specific state. The gaming machine according to the feature CB1 or the feature CB2, characterized in that the advantages of the above are different.

According to the above configuration, there are a case where the stop operation is performed in the third stop operation mode and the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped by the suggestion means, and a fourth mode in which the stop operation is performed in the fourth stop operation mode. The advantage after the second specific state is different from the case where the pattern combination of is stopped. In this way, if the configuration is such that the stop roll is used to make a suggestion, even if the common third result is a prize, the interest in the stop operation is increased and the subsequent advantage is predicted. The playability can be suitably improved.

Features CB4. The suggestion means can perform the second aspect notification regarding the third stop operation mode and execute a specific effect (background color change) when the pattern combination of the third aspect is stopped, and the fourth aspect. The specific effect can be executed when the second aspect notification of the stop operation mode is performed and the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, while the second aspect notification of the third stop operation mode is possible. And when the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the specific effect is not executed, the second aspect notification of the fourth stop operation mode is performed, and the pattern combination of the third aspect is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature CB3, wherein the advantage after the second specific state can be suggested by not executing the specific effect in the case of the above.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion means executes the specific effect as a kind of suggestion if the stop operation is performed according to the second aspect notification, but does not execute the specific effect if the stop operation is performed without following the second aspect notification. .. That is, the second aspect notification and the set of stop rolls match, and the suggestion is established. By doing so, even if the winning results are all the third results, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game that does not follow the second aspect notification, and it is possible to preferably perform the game property using the suggestion means.

Features CB5. A second transition lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state is provided.
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, the first result that does not transition to the first specific state after the second specific state (for example, the second BB winning, the specific combination that is not won in the bonus and attack modes, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB1 to CB4, wherein a second result (for example, a first BB winning) that can shift to the first specific state is included after the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern that does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state and a pattern that shifts to the first specific state after the second specific state occur. It is also possible to suggest whether or not to shift to the first specific state after using the suggestion by the second aspect notification performed in the second specific state. In particular, since the first specific state is a state in which both mode notifications are allowed and the degree of advantage changes depending on the mode notification, it has a high affinity with the suggestion made by the mode notification (second mode notification), and the second aspect notification. It is possible to easily associate the first specific state from the suggestion by the mode notification.

Features CB6. The suggestion means is described in feature CB5, which is capable of suggesting whether or not to shift to the first specific state after the second specific state as an advantage after the second specific state. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature CB5 can be achieved by a specific configuration.

Features CB7. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which a predetermined number of game media are given as the privilege by the privilege granting means.
As the game state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal game state.
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the first result, the process shifts to the third specific state after the second specific state.
When the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result, the feature CB5 is characterized in that the second specific state is followed by the third specific state and then the first specific state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to the feature CB6.

According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when the payout result winning is established, a large number of game media can be expected to increase in the third specific state. Such a third specific state is made to occur after the second specific state in both the first result and the second result, and the first specific state is made after the third specific state by the first result and the second result. Changed whether or not to move to. In this way, no matter which result is used to shift to the second specific state, at least the third specific state will occur after the second specific state, and the expectation for the second specific state will be raised. It will be possible to increase it further.

Features CB8. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the first result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means, and the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the second result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features CB5 to CB7, wherein the probability of becoming is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the first result of not shifting to the first specific state after the second specific state differs depending on the set value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate of the game medium, and the second after the second specific state. 1 The probability of the second result of transitioning to a specific state is the same regardless of the set value. That is, for the first specific state in which the advantage changes due to the first mode notification (also the second mode notification), the probability of transition can be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to make the element of luck stronger whether or not to shift to the first specific state, and the fairness of the game based on the first specific state is guaranteed. On the other hand, if there is no difference due to the set value in this way, it is fun to select one game table from multiple game tables installed in the game hall, that is, it is predicted which set value is set. There is also the possibility that the enjoyment of the game played while playing will be wiped out. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the case where the state does not shift to the first specific state after the second specific state, a difference may occur depending on the set value, so that the enjoyment of playing the game while predicting the set value is not eliminated. To the extent, the fairness of the game based on the first specific state can be guaranteed.

Features CB9. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a payout result is set in which a predetermined number of game media are given as the privilege by the privilege granting means.
As the game state, a third specific state (bonus state) is set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal game state.
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to shift the gaming state to the second specific state is provided.
As a lottery result by the second transition lottery means, a third result (a specific combination that is not won in the bonus and attack modes, etc.) that does not transition to the third specific state after the second specific state, and the second specific The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB8, characterized in that a fourth result (for example, a first BB winning) that can shift to the third specific state is included after the state.

According to the above configuration, since a predetermined number of game media are paid out when the payout result winning is established, a large number of game media can be expected to increase in the third specific state. By setting such a third specific state and making the above configuration, in the second specific state, a pattern that does not shift to the third specific state after the second specific state and the second specific state Since a pattern of transitioning to the third specific state occurs after the above, it is also suggested whether or not to shift to the third specific state after that by using the suggestion by the second aspect notification performed in the second specific state. Is also possible.

Features CB10. The suggestion means is described in feature CB9, which is capable of suggesting whether or not to shift to the third specific state after the second specific state as an advantage after the second specific state. Pachinko machine.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature CB9 can be achieved by a specific configuration.

Features CB11. As the lottery result by the lottery means, the re-game result in which the re-game is given as the privilege by the privilege-giving means is set.
The second operation mode result is a specific re-game result among the re-game results.
As the game state, a plurality of re-game states are set in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will win the predetermined re-game result is higher than that in the normal game state.
A means (main control device) for shifting to a specific re-gaming state in which the probability of winning the specific re-gaming result among the plurality of re-gaming states is higher than that of the normal gaming state based on the transition to the second specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features CB1 to CB10, characterized in that it has a function of executing a special RT state process according to 101).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a plurality of re-gaming states are set, the specific re-gaming state is set as the second specific state. In the specific re-game state, the probability of winning the specific re-game result as the result of the second operation mode is high. By using the re-gaming state in this way, the winning probability of the game result can be changed without using the so-called jackpot state as in the third specific state described above, and when the game shifts to the second specific state, the winning probability can be changed. Second operation mode As a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning.

Features CB12. In the first operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first aspect corresponding to the first result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the second stop operation means corresponding to the second result. It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
In the second operation mode result, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third aspect corresponding to the third result is obtained. When the stop operation means is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode, the fourth stop operation means corresponding to the third result. It is possible to stop the pattern combination of the aspect,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means has the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third mode. CB1 characterized in that the first order notification (pushing order notification effect) relating to the stop order and the stop order including the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. The gaming machine according to any one of CB11.

According to the above configuration, order notification regarding the stop order of a plurality of orbiting bodies can be executed as mode notification. By doing so, for example, even a player who is not good at the eye-pressing operation aiming at a predetermined pattern attached to the orbiting body can fully enjoy the benefits of the mode notification.

It should be noted that the above configuration is as follows: "In the result of the first operation mode, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order as the first stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the first mode is obtained. The first result winning is established by stopping, the first privilege (for example, nine medals given based on the first small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given by the privilege giving means, and each of the above stops. When the operating means is operated in the second stop order different from the first stop order as the second stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the second mode is stopped and the second result winning is won. It is established, and the second privilege different from the first privilege (for example, three medals given based on the second small winning combination in the 3-bet game) is given by the privilege giving means.
The second operation mode result is that when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order as the third stop operation mode, the pattern combination of the third mode is stopped and the third result. A prize is established, a third privilege (replay) is given by the privilege granting means, and each of the stop operating means operates in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order as the fourth stop operation mode. In that case, the pattern combination of the fourth aspect is stopped, the third result winning is established, and the third privilege is given by the privilege giving means.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first operation mode result or the second operation mode result, the first mode notification means has the first stop order and the second stop order, or the third mode. The first order notification (push order notification effect) relating to the stop order and the stop order including the fourth stop order can be executed by the first notification means as the first mode notification. " It may be expressed, and in this case, it is possible to more clearly show the relationship between the winning result and the privilege to be given.

<Characteristic DA group>
Features DA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
The first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific game state, and
A second grasping means (ZG for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state, and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, the first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit in the specific gaming state. , A second termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit, or. When the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to generate a specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can be beneficial to the player. Specific event execution means (function to execute each process for special notification in the situation where the excess flag is set by the main controller 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stop order. A specific gaming state is provided, such as different advantages depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the remaining number of times of the specific game state is increased, so-called addition. Can occur, so the playability in each game is significantly improved.

However, the original playability of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the orbiting body and stop it to obtain the privilege, but if the privilege that can be obtained by the game using the order notification is too large, the original game The game playability may be neglected, and if a specific game state using order notification can be executed indefinitely, there is a possibility that a ball output rate exceeding the designer's intended ball output rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the process ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability using the order notification into the game playability associated with the above-mentioned original game playability, and to fully enjoy both game playability.

However, if the maximum number of times is specified as described above, in a specific situation where the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the maximum number of times, the addition does not occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digestion game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, if the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, or if the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, the increase processing (addition) is performed. A specific event that is different from the above and can be beneficial to the player occurs. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

Regarding the "first result" and the "second result", "the first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means are described above. It may be expressed as "a second result in which a prize is established when the operation is performed in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, "stop order" may be read as "stop operation mode", "order notification" may be read as "mode notification", and "order notification means" may be read as "mode notification means".

Features DA2. The gaming machine according to feature DA1, wherein the specific event is an event that is not related to the probability of occurrence, the frequency of occurrence, and the number of occurrences of the sequence notification.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to further ensure consistency with not setting the upper limit number of times and performing the increase processing.

It should be noted that the above configuration can also be expressed as "the probability of occurrence, the frequency of occurrence, and the number of occurrences of the sequence notification do not change depending on whether the specific event occurs or not".

Features DA3. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to feature DA1 or feature DA2, wherein the specific event executing means performs suggestion notification suggesting information on a set value set by the setting means as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, since the suggestion information of the set value is presented as a specific event, the player can use it as a material for determining the continuation of the game after the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times and ends. That is, if it is a suggestion notification indicating a low setting, it can be determined that the game should be ended after the end of the specific game state, and if it is a suggestion notification indicating a high setting, the game should be continued even after the end of the specific game state. It can be said that the suggestion notification of the set value is useful for the player who wants to increase the number of game media and not to decrease the game medium.

Features DA4. The gaming machine according to feature DA3, wherein the specific condition has a common probability of establishment regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the increase processing has a common probability of occurrence regardless of the set value. That is, in the situation where the upper limit is reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase processing occurs with a common probability of occurrence regardless of the set value, but when it occurs, the suggestion notification of the set value is performed. By doing so, it is possible that the element of luck is strongly involved in the suggestion notification of the set value. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such that the higher the setting, the more likely the chance of the suggestion notification of the set value is to occur, so that the suggestion notification does not substantially occur at the low setting.

Moreover, since the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times can be the same regardless of the set value. In other words, the probability itself that a specific situation in which the suggestion notification of the set value can be performed will be the same regardless of the set value, and the independence that the set value is not involved in regarding the occurrence rate of the suggestion notification of the set value will be further enhanced. Is possible.

Features DA5. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result.
The probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed differs depending on the type of the special result.
Features DA1 to DA4 characterized in that the probability of establishment of the specific condition is higher when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition is when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the probability when the increase processing is performed as a special result and the probability when a specific event occurs as a special result are linked. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in the case of winning a special result in which the increase process is performed with a high probability in a specific situation, it is possible to raise the expectation that a specific event will occur in advance, and the player's mind can be raised. By making preparations, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event.

Features DA6. As the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set.
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of establishment differs between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. Yes,
In the specific gaming state, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine described in DA5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the probability that the increase processing is performed changes depending on the type of the specific gaming state (predetermined state) even for the same type of special result, the probability when a specific event occurs is also the type of the specific gaming state (predetermined). It changes depending on the state) and is linked to the case of increase processing. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier to understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result.

Features DA7. As the specific game state, a special state (VB mode, special zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is set is set.
In the specific gaming state, a special transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the special state (for example, a VB notification flag by the main control device 101 is set based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition. Has a function to execute processing)
The specific event executing means may cause the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features DA1 to DA6, which is characterized by being possible.

If the game shifts to the special state during the specific game state, the special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games. Therefore, the transition to the special state is the minimum number of continuous games in terms of the number of games in the specific game state. It can be regarded as equivalent to the process of increasing the number of times. Then, it may be meaningless for the player to shift to a special state in a specific situation, or to become a specific situation by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid making the above-mentioned meaningless feeling by targeting a specific event even for such a special state.

Features DA8. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result.
The specific condition when the increase processing is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability that the special state is established is higher than that of the other states in the specific gaming state. Is a configuration that increases
The probability that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states during the specific gaming state.
When the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the specific event executing means causes the specific event. The gaming machine according to feature DA7, which allows a transition to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which an increase process is likely to be performed when a transition to a special state is performed, a specific event occurs when the transition to a special state occurs in a specific situation or when the transition to a special state results in a specific situation. At that time, it is permissible to shift to a special state. Therefore, the configuration is such that a specific event is generated at the time of transition of the special state, and the specific event is allowed to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which the increase process is likely to be performed and a state in which a specific event is likely to occur, the transition to the special state during the specific game state is approached by the specific situation or the specific situation. It will be possible to look forward to even the situation that has come.

Features DA9. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition to obtain the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. A storage means for storing the number of times information corresponding to the number of times increased in the number of times information storage means (disappearing game number EG) (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games to the number of disappearing games EG by the main control device 101). With
The specific event executing means is described in any one of the features DA1 to DA8, which is capable of causing the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the number of times when the increase process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to generate a specific event as compensation for the privilege that should have been obtained by the increase processing, for example, the more the number of times information is, the more likely the specific event is to occur.

Features DA10. The number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means is stored at least until the specific gaming state in which the specific event occurs shifts to the normal gaming state, and the stored information is stored. In this situation, when the specific condition is newly satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, the above-mentioned is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. The number of times information corresponding to the number of times increased when the increase process is performed can be updated by adding it to the stored number of times information.
When shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific event executing means can generate the specific event based on the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means. Characteristic Features The gaming machine described in DA9.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the specific situation, the number of times information when the increase process is performed is accumulated respectively, and a specific event occurs at the end of the specific game state based on the total number of times information. .. By doing so, in the configuration of the feature DA9, even if the number of times information based on the establishment of each specific condition is small, it is possible to generate a specific event if the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, and the specific event can be generated. Expectations can be sustained.

In particular, when a specific situation is reached relatively early after the specific game state is reached, a game in which the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the upper limit, that is, a game that can be a so-called digestion game is executed for a long period of time. It will be. In that respect, as in the above configuration, by adopting a configuration in which a specific event can occur by accumulating a plurality of increase processes, the more games that can be the digestion game, the more likely the specific event will occur, and the game feels like a digestion game. Can be suppressed.

Features DA11. The specific event executing means can generate the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the specific gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state by the second ending means. The gaming machine according to feature DA10, wherein the specific event can be generated based on the number-of-times information stored in the number-of-times information storage means based on the shift.

According to the above configuration, a specific event may occur each time a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific event may occur depending on the integrated value when the increase process is performed at the end of the specific game state. By doing so, both the effect of not getting tired of the specific game state due to the occurrence of the specific event each time and the effect of enjoying the specific game state for a long period of time by satisfying the specific condition multiple times can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to make it.

Features DA12. The specific event executing means can cause the specific event based on the establishment of the specific condition during the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific condition is satisfied. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of DA1 to DA11.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to take over the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the specific gaming state as a specific event to the normal gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state. Then, since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the event in the specific game state is taken over to the normal game state within a range not contrary to the significance of forcibly terminating the specific game state by the upper limit number of times. It becomes a composition. By doing so, the interlocking between the specific game state and the normal game state can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Features DA13. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition to obtain the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. Information corresponding to the number of times increased to is stored in a predetermined information storage means (disappearing game number EG) (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games to the disappearing game number EG by the main control device 101). ,
When shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by at least the second ending means, an initial process capable of initializing the specific information related to the order notification used during the specific gaming state can be executed. Means (function to execute initialization processing by the main control device 101) and
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, a means for limiting the initialization of the information stored by the information storage means (the number of disappearing games in the main control device 101 is provided in the normal section area). A function to execute the process of storing in the specified area) and
The gaming machine according to the feature DA12.

According to the above configuration, when the specific game state is terminated when the number of executions in the specific game state reaches the upper limit, the specific information related to the sequence notification is initialized, so that the specific game state is forced. The effect of the feature DA11 is achieved while preventing the occurrence of so-called consecutive villas such as shifting to the specific game state again based on the information in the specific game state that was forcibly ended even though the game ended in. It becomes possible to expect.

Features DA14. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features DA1 to DA13.

In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation or an increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition causes a specific situation, the increase process itself is not limited. To. That is, for example, in a configuration in which the execution of the process related to the predetermined order notification including the increase process is restricted in the normal game state other than the specific game state, the increase process related to the specific situation is not subject to the restriction. Is clarified. However, as described above, even if the increase processing is performed in the above situation, it may become meaningless depending on the upper limit number of times. By causing a specific event in such a situation, the excellent effect of the feature DA1 can be obtained. You can expect it.

Features DA15. The notification is started by turning on the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the game state from the normal game state to the specific game state, and the specific game state is the normal game. Specific game state notification means for ending notification by turning off the specific notification means based on the transition to the state (function of executing section display first processing to section display fourth processing by the main control device 101) With
The specific gaming state notification means is characterized in that even when the specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state by the second ending means, the notification is terminated by turning off the specific notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of DA1 to DA14.

According to the above configuration, when the normal gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends and the normal gaming state shifts, the notification also ends. That is, by confirming the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing the transition to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy the game by special notification equally.

In particular, even when the specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times and shifts to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so that the player has finished the specific game state, that is, a specific condition in a specific situation. It can be clearly understood that the increase processing was not performed even if the above was established. Then, from the configuration in which the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated, it is difficult to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the specific gaming state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. In that respect, if the configuration is such that a specific event can be generated as in the feature DA1, even if the configuration is such that the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated by the specific notification means, it can be clearly grasped through the specific event. , It is also possible to entertain the afterglow based on the establishment of specific conditions.

Features DA16. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
The first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific game state, and
A second grasping means (ZG for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section) for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state, and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, the first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit in the specific gaming state. , A second termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit, or. Specific event execution means (main control device) capable of causing a specific event that is an event different from the event based on the increase process when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. (Function to execute each process for special notification in the situation where the excess flag by 101 is set) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stop order. A specific gaming state is provided, such as different advantages depending on the game. Then, when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result, a lottery for shifting to the specific game state can be performed, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the remaining number of times of the specific game state is increased, so-called addition. Can occur, so the playability in each game is significantly improved.

However, the original playability of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the orbiting body and stop it to obtain the privilege, but if the privilege that can be obtained by the game using the order notification is too large, the original game The game playability may be neglected, and if a specific game state using order notification can be executed indefinitely, there is a possibility that a ball output rate exceeding the designer's intended ball output rate may occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, regardless of the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the process ends when the upper limit number of times is reached. By doing so, it is possible to make the game playability using the order notification into the game playability associated with the above-mentioned original game playability, and to fully enjoy both game playability.

However, if the maximum number of times is specified as described above, in a specific situation where the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the maximum number of times, the addition does not occur even if the specific condition is satisfied. The game in such a situation becomes a so-called digestion game, and the fun of the game can be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, if the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times has already reached the upper limit, or if the increase processing is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, the increase processing (addition) is performed. A specific event that is different from the above occurs. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

Regarding the "first result" and the "second result", "the first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means are described above. It may be expressed as "a second result in which a prize is established when the operation is performed in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode". In this case, "stop order" may be read as "stop operation mode", "order notification" may be read as "mode notification", and "order notification means" may be read as "mode notification means".

<Characteristic DB group>
Features DB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
The first grasping means (the number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state, and
The second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, the first termination means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit in the highly advantageous state. , A second termination means for shifting the high-advantageous state to the low-advantageous state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the multiple stages of the set value is set. Function to execute the setting process of winning probability by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Specific information grasping means for grasping specific information (total number of games) corresponding to the game situation of the day (a function of executing a process for grasping the total number of games in the second section display process by the main control device 101)
Suggestion notification execution means (a function of executing a process for performing the fourth special notification by the display control device 81) for executing suggestion notification that suggests information on the set value set by the setting means, and
With
The suggestion notification executing means can execute the suggestion notification based on the specific information grasped by the specific information grasping means when the second termination means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantage state. Since it may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. However, it is considered that the player wants the high advantage state to continue for a long time, and it is preferable that the high advantage state is forcibly terminated even if there is a remaining number of times based on reaching the upper limit number of times. Alternatively, it is considered that the intention to continue the game may be extremely reduced when the high advantage state is forcibly terminated. Therefore, when such a high advantage state is forcibly terminated, a suggestion notification of a set value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium is performed, so that, for example, a high setting is performed. It is possible to motivate the player to continue the game by giving a suggestion notification.

On the other hand, depending on the situation in which the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, the above-mentioned suggestion notification of the set value may not only motivate the player to continue the game, but rather may motivate the player to end the game. That is, for example, if the situation in which the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times is a situation shortly after the opening of the game hall, the game of playing the game table is performed when the high setting suggestion notification is performed as described above. Although it may be a motivation for the person to continue the game, for other game tables, it is judged that the other game table has a low setting in relation to the high setting, and the motivation for ending the game is determined. May be attached. Further, for example, in a situation where the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times is just before the closing of the game hall, the suggestion notification of the set value is purely reported rather than adding the motivation to continue the game or the motivation to end the game. It may be better to go. Therefore, when the high-advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, the high-advantage state is forcibly terminated by setting a configuration in which the suggestion notification of the set value is performed after adding the specific information corresponding to the game situation of the day. In some cases, it is possible to suitably suppress the player's intention to continue playing the game.

Feature DB2. It is provided with a specific execution means (for example, a function of executing a process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) for executing a specific process relating to the continuation rate or the number of continuations in the high advantageous state.
The gaming machine according to feature DB 1, wherein the specific execution means executes the specific process regardless of a set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the specific process relating to the continuation rate and the number of continuations is executed regardless of the set value, but when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times as a result of the specific process and ends, the set value suggestion may occur. .. In this case, the fact that the high advantage state reaches the upper limit has a strong element of luck and has nothing to do with the high or low of the set value, but when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit, a large amount of game medium is acquired. Under such circumstances, it is considered that the player tends to easily predict a set value higher than the actual set value. However, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times, a large amount of game medium is required by then, and even if a large amount of game medium is acquired when the upper limit number of times is reached, on the day Depending on the game situation, the total ball output rate is not always high. Therefore, regarding the above-mentioned high advantageous state, by performing the suggestion notification of the set value in consideration of the game situation at the time of forced termination, the suggestion notification of the set value gives the impression that the player has to the acquired game medium. It can be used as a boost to continue the game at the time of the forced termination.

In addition, more specifically about the "specific execution means", for example, "a transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the low advantage state to the high advantage state can be executed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied". A transition lottery means (a function of executing a mode lottery process by the main control device 101), or, for example, an increasing means capable of executing an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. (A function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) "or, for example," a means capable of executing the end lottery in the highly advantageous state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition "may be used." ..

Further, the "specific execution means" may be expressed as "the specific processing is executed with a uniform probability regardless of the level of the set value set by the setting means", or "the specific processing" may be expressed. Regardless of the level of the set value set by the setting means, it may be expressed that the specific process is executed with a common probability. Regardless, the results of the specific processing are common. "

Feature DB3. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of times the game is executed in the game situation on the day as the specific information.
In the suggestion notification executing means, when the second termination means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number of times (2000). When the total number of executions is less than or equal to (times), the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than when the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times, or when the total number of executions is less than or equal to the specific number of times, the suggestion notification is executed. The feature DB 1 or feature DB 2 is characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed so that the player is more difficult to predict the set value than the suggestion notification executed when the number of times exceeds a specific number. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the total number of executions is less than or equal to the specific number and the case where the total number of executions exceeds the specific number, it is more difficult to execute the suggestion notification of the set value in the former case, or even if it is executed, the set value It may be difficult to predict. Therefore, it is difficult to narrow down the set value even if the high advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times in the situation where the number of times is less than a specific number. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined shortly after the opening of the game hall and the operating rate of the game table or another game table is lowered.

Features DB4. The specific information grasping means can grasp the time information as the specific information in the game situation of the day.
When the second termination means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the suggestion notification executing means obtains the time information grasped by the specific information grasping means at a predetermined specific time (13:00). ) If it is earlier, the execution probability of the suggestion notification is lower than when the time information is later than the specific time, or the suggestion notification executed when the time information is before the specific time is higher. The features DB1 to DB3 are characterized in that the suggestion notification is executed so that the player is less likely to predict the set value than the suggestion notification executed after the specific time. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the above configuration, when comparing the case where the time at the time of forced termination is before the specific time and the case where the time is after the specific time, the suggestion notification of the set value is more difficult to be executed or executed in the former case. Even if it is done, it may be difficult to predict the set value. Therefore, even if the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times in the situation before the specific time, it is difficult to narrow down the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined shortly after the opening of the game hall and the operating rate of the game table or another game table is lowered.

In particular, by adding the above configuration to the feature DB3, it is possible to suggest a set value according to the operation start time of the day. Specifically, for example, in the feature DB3, if the start of operation on the day is late, it may be determined that the specified number of times has been exceeded at a later stage than the case where the operation has been started from the beginning of the morning and the specific number of times has been exceeded. Then, the setting value suggestion as intended by the designer may not be obtained. Therefore, by having the configuration of the feature DB 4 together with the configuration of the feature DB 3, it is possible to generate a suggestion notification of the set value as intended by the designer.

Feature DB5. The specific information grasping means can grasp at least one of the total number of executions since the power is turned on or the time information in the game situation on the day as the specific information.
In the suggestion notification executing means, when the second termination means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state, the total number of executions grasped by the specific information grasping means is a predetermined specific number of times (2000). Time) or less, or when the time information is the first specific situation before the predetermined specific time (13:00), the total number of executions exceeds the specific number of times or the time information is later than the specific time. The execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting a lower setting is higher than in the case of the second specific situation, or the suggestion notification executed in the case of the first specific situation is the second specific situation. The feature DB1 to the feature DB1 is characterized in that the player executes the suggestion notification so as to predict the set value having a lower setting than the suggestion notification executed in 1. The gaming machine according to any one of DB4.

According to the above configuration, when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times and is forcibly terminated at a relatively early stage from the opening of the game hall, the suggestion notification that it is easy to narrow down the low setting is executed. The situation where the high advantage state reaches the upper limit number of times at a relatively early stage is considered to be the situation where a large amount of game media is acquired and the total ball output rate is high. It is considered that there is a tendency that it is easy to predict a high set value, and even if a suggestion notification that makes it easy to narrow down the low setting is performed as a suggestion notification of the set value as described above, it is highly likely that the game will continue. Be done. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the suggestion notification of the set value on the low setting side is performed in anticipation of such a situation, the appearance rate is balanced with the suggestion notification of the set value on the high setting side without causing a decrease in the operating rate. Can be kept.

Features DB6. The suggestion notification execution means is
As the suggestion notification of the set value, the suggestion notification information group in which the information corresponding to a plurality of types of suggestion notifications is stored is used, and the information corresponding to one suggestion notification is selected from the suggestion notification information group, and the selection is made. It is a configuration that executes the suggestion notification based on the information corresponding to the suggestion notification.
In the case of shifting from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state by the second termination means, the suggestion notification information group used in the first specific situation and the suggestion notification information group used in the second specific situation. By making the above different, the suggestion notification is executed so that the execution probability of the suggestion notification suggesting the low setting becomes high or the setting value of the low setting can be easily predicted. Characteristic Features The gaming machine described in DB5.

According to the above configuration, the configuration of the feature DB 5 can be realized by a simple configuration such as switching of a suggestion notification information group, that is, a table used for suggestion notification.

Feature DB7. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined transition result (second BB), the transition means (according to the main control device 101) capable of shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Has a function to execute bonus state processing)
The rate of increase of the game medium in each game is likely to be higher in the special game state than in the high advantage state.
The special gaming state is set so that it can be transferred even during the high advantageous state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB6, wherein the first grasping means grasps the number of executions including the number of games executed during the special gaming state.

According to the above configuration, a special game state is set as a so-called jackpot state in which the rate of increase of the game medium is high, and the number of games in the special game state is also taken into account in the number of executions. When the special game state is intervened in the advantageous state, the final number of game media acquired may be larger than when the special game state is not intervened. That is, in the high advantage state in which the upper limit number of times is set, the final number of game media acquired when the high advantage state ends by the upper limit number of times is diversified. By doing so, when the high advantage state ends due to the upper limit number of times, for example, if the number of acquisitions is large, the high setting is predicted, and if the number of acquisitions is small, the low setting is predicted. The fun of predicting the set value at the end is added.

Feature DB8. The gaming machine according to feature DB7, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the transition result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DB 7, the number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination in the high advantage state can actually differ depending on the set value. This makes it possible to increase the significance of giving a suggestion notification of the set value at the time of forced termination.

Features DB9. The specific information grasping means can grasp the total number of times the game is executed in the game situation on the day as the specific information.
The total number of executions is initialized when the change process of the set value set by the setting means is performed, but is not initialized based on the power-on or power-off of the gaming machine. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of DB1 to DB8.

According to the above configuration, the total number of executions as a game situation reflected in the suggestion notification at the time of forced termination is not initialized by turning on the power or shutting off the power, but is initialized by the process of changing the set value. Therefore, if the power is turned on / off without changing the set value at the time of closing or opening the game hall, the total number of executions on the previous day will be inherited. As a result, it is possible to perform a game in which the set value is predicted not only from the suggestion notification of the set value but also from factors such as whether or not the set value has been changed, and the game playability is greatly improved.

Features DB10. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
With
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DB1 to DB9, wherein the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be obtained. A specific gaming state is provided as a high-advantage state, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence. If a configuration related to setting value suggestion according to the gaming status of the feature DB1 is applied to a gaming machine having such a configuration, the subsequent operating rate when the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit number of times can be suitably adjusted. Can be done.

In particular, as compared with the special gaming state accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is for the player depending on the presence / absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, and the like. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a higher degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition and the number of continuations of the specific gaming state is strictly determined as compared with the one in which the game result is associated one-to-one with the transition of the gaming state. It is easy to realize a game property that has not been played, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, in such game playability, when the maximum number of times is reached and the specific game state ends, it is considered that the intention to continue the game thereafter may decrease, and there is a concern that the operating rate may decrease. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature DB1 to such a gaming machine, while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state, the game can be played even after the number of continuations reaches the upper limit. It can be a motivation to continue.

<Characteristic DC group>
Features DC1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
Specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition (a function of executing the end process of an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101). When,
A process of storing information corresponding to various areas for advantageous sections in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101, which is information used in the specific game state and can store specific information related to the order notification. Function to execute) and
Normal storage means that can store normal information that can be used even in other than the specific gaming state and is not involved in the order notification (information corresponding to various areas for the normal section in the RAM 106 by the main control device 101 is stored. Function to execute processing) and
When shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state by the specific end means, the initialization means (section display by the main control device 101) capable of executing the initialization process of the specific information stored in the specific storage means. 2 Function to execute initialization processing during processing) and
Regarding a specific event (for example, an opportunity to add the number of games in a situation where the excess flag is not set) that occurs during the specific game state, the information corresponding to the specific event (the number of additional games) is used as the specific information and the specific storage means. A first means (a function of executing a process of adding the number of additional games to the corresponding number of continuations in the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the storage process to be stored in the
Regarding the specific event (for example, the opportunity to add the number of games in the situation where the excess flag is set) that occurs during the specific game state, the information corresponding to the specific event (the number of disappearing games) is stored as the normal information. A second means (a function of adding the number of additional games to the number of disappearing games in the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the storage process to be stored in the means, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and whether or not there is an order notification regarding the stop order. A specific game state is provided such that the degree of advantage is different depending on the game, and the playability of each game is improved.

However, the original playability of the so-called slot machine is to aim at the pattern of the orbiting body and stop it to obtain the privilege, but if the privilege that can be obtained by the game using the order notification is too large, the original game If the game playability can be neglected and the specific game state can be executed indefinitely by increasing the performance of the consecutive villas in the specific game state using order notification, the ball output rate intended by the designer will be exceeded. There is also the possibility that a ball will come out. Furthermore, if the performance of the collateral in the specific game state is enhanced, even if the specific game state is considered to have ended and the game is ended, cases such as the fact that the specific game state is actually continued are likely to occur, and the game concerned. It is possible that the fairness between the player who ends the game and the successor player who sits down at the game table after the game is finished cannot be guaranteed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, at the end of the specific game state, the specific event in the specific game state is initialized by the specific storage means that is stored as the specific information related to the order notification. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of unfairness among the players without increasing the performance of the consecutive villas in the state too much.

However, if the above configuration is used, the impression that the game performance in the specific game state and the game property in the normal game state are separate game properties becomes stronger, and the interlocking of these two game states is reduced, and the total view is obtained. There is also concern that the playability may decrease. Therefore, in the above configuration, regarding the specific event in the specific game state, the second means for storing the information as normal information not involved in the order notification is provided instead of storing the information as specific information. It is possible to take over the information of the specific event in the specific game state to the normal game state as information different from the order notification. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance of the villa in the specific gaming state from being excessively enhanced, and to enhance the interlocking between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state while ensuring equality among the players. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Features DC2. Specific storage areas (various areas for advantageous sections in RAM 106) corresponding to the specific storage means, and
A normal storage area (various areas for a normal section in the RAM 106) corresponding to the normal storage means, and
Is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature DC1, wherein the specific storage area and the normal storage area are set as storage areas that do not overlap with each other.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DC1, the locations for storing each information are physically different, so that, for example, the normal information of the normal storage means is initialized during the initialization process. Such an error is less likely to occur, and an event such as the specific information remaining without being initialized even after the end of the specific game state is less likely to occur.

Features DC3. Using the normal information corresponding to the specific event stored in the normal storage means by the second means, special notification is sent by the specific notification means after the end of the specific gaming state in which the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to feature DC1 or feature DC2, which is provided with an executable special notification means (a function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the special notification for the specific event that occurred during the specific game state is executed after the end of the specific game state, the interlocking between the specific game state and the normal game state is called the special notification. It will be possible to plan through the production.

Features DC4. When the specific event occurs, a selection means for selecting which of the first means and the second means is to be executed (a process of determining whether or not the excess flag is set in the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features DC1 to DC3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, information about a specific event is stored as either specific information or normal information. By doing so, since both information are not stored in duplicate, the storage capacity can be reduced, and when the normal information based on the specific event is taken over at the end of the specific game state, the specific information is related. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being inherited (the possibility of not being initialized due to some inconvenience).

Features DC5. Based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result (specific combination), an increase determination means (mainly) capable of executing an increase determination as to whether or not to execute an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state. (A function to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games by the control device 101),
Based on the result of the determination result by the increase determination means being the result of executing the increase process, the function of executing the increase processing means (the function of executing the game number addition process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the remaining number of times. )When,
With
The selection means
As the specific event, when the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of executing the increase process, the storage process by the first means is selected to be executed.
As the specific event, when the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of not executing the increase process, the feature DC4 is characterized in that the storage process is selected to be executed by the second means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, as a specific event, when it is determined whether or not to increase the number of continuous games in the specific game state, and when it is determined to increase the number of continuous games, it is used as specific information related to order notification. When the storage process by the first means is performed and it is determined that the number of continuous games is not increased, the storage process by the second means is performed as normal information that is not involved in the order notification. Information that the determination is unfavorable for the player on the premise that the increase in the number of continuous games in the specific game state is more advantageous for the player and the player wants the increase process to be performed. However, it is stored as normal information and can be inherited until after the specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to take over the information corresponding to the profit that could not be fully enjoyed in the specific game state to the normal game state without taking over the profit in the specific game state to the normal game state. It is possible to enhance the interlocking between the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state by making it as if the profit can be enjoyed in the normal gaming state.

Features DC6. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination result by the increase determination means is the result of executing the increase process, or the limiting means capable of executing the restriction process for limiting the execution of the increase process. (A function to execute a process of setting an excess flag by the main controller 101)
The gaming machine according to feature DC5, wherein the selection means is selected so that the storage process by the second means is performed based on the restriction process performed by the limiting means.

When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination result by the increase determination means results in the execution of the increase process, and the execution of the increase process itself is restricted. Therefore, when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the lottery means Even if the lottery result by is a specific result, there is no merit for the player in the specific game state, but rather, it is a pity that the specific result should have been obtained in the situation where the predetermined conditions are not satisfied. Can be. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the information of the unfortunate result is stored so as to be taken over to the normal gaming state, even if the unfortunate result is obtained, the end of the specific gaming state Later, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that some kind of benefit will be obtained.

Features DC7. The first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific game state, and
The second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
With
The specific termination means
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the specific gaming state, the first ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (usually in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit in the specific gaming state. , A second termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
With
The predetermined condition is characterized in that the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit. The gaming machine described in DC6.

In the above configuration, the specific gaming state may end based on the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, or may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, and the predetermined condition in the feature DC5 is the number of executions. The configuration is established when the total of the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit. That is, when the situation is such that the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase even if the increase processing is performed any more, the storage process by the second process is performed based on the specific result that triggers the increase process. For a player who wants to digest as many games as possible in a specific game state, it is considered that he / she desires that the increase process is performed in each game in the specific game state, that is, the game result becomes a specific result. If the number of remaining games cannot be expected to increase even after the increase processing, the interest in the game result of the game in the situation decreases, the interest in the specific game state itself decreases, and the degree of attention to the game decreases. May drop extremely. In that respect, as in the above configuration, even in such a situation, if a specific result is won, the specific result can be meaningless by performing the memory processing by the second means. It is possible to take over the information after the specific gaming state, and it can be meaningful that the specific result is obtained in the situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability during the specific gaming state.

Features DC8. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means results in the determination result by the increase determination means executing the increase process. The gaming machine according to feature DC6 or feature DC7, wherein a specific number of times for increasing the remaining number of times in the increase process is used as the normal information, and a storage process for storing in the normal storage means is executed.

According to the above configuration, if a specific result is won when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific number of times that should have been increased by the increase process is stored as normal information as it is. By doing so, in order to perform the storage processing by the second means instead of the first means, no special processing such as information conversion processing is required, and the effect of the feature DC6 or the like can be obtained with a simple configuration. You can expect it.

Features DC9. In the normal game state, a special state (special section) in which a predetermined special notification can be executed is set.
When the specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state by the specific ending means, means capable of shifting to the special state (a function of executing a process of setting a special section flag by the main control device 101) and
Means for selecting the number of executions of the special state based on the information of the specific number of times the storage process is performed by the second means (corresponding to the special section game number PG based on the special section table by the main controller 101). A function to execute the process of entering a value) and
The gaming machine according to the feature DC8, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state, the special notification may be executed, and the number of executions of the special state is stored by the second means. It is determined by the information of a specific number of times. Therefore, the information that the increase process during the specific game state has not been performed is inherited as the information that the special state in which the special notification is performed is continuous, and the specific game state and the normal game state are set to the special state. Can be linked via.

Features DC10. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to feature DC9, wherein the special notification is a suggestion notification as information on the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the suggestion notification can be executed after the specific game state instead of the increase processing not being performed during the specific game state. Assuming that the player desires a high setting, the suggestion notification of the set value becomes useful information for the player, and by providing such useful information, the increase process is performed. It can be a price for not having it.

Features DC11. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the third stop order, the third specific pattern combination is stopped and the third result winning can be established, and each of the stop operation means Is operated in a fourth stop order different from the third stop order, the fourth specific pattern combination different from the third specific pattern combination is stopped, and the third result winning can be established. The second order correspondence result (for example, special replay) that becomes
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the second order notification (push order notification effect) regarding the stop order including the third stop order and the fourth stop order is designated as the special notification by a specific notification means (auxiliary display). The gaming machine according to the feature DC9 or the feature DC10, which is provided with a second sequence notification means (a function of executing a special replay notification process by the display control device 81) that can be executed by the unit 65).

According to the above configuration, if the stop result is different depending on the stop order but the obtained privilege does not change, the first order causes a change in the advantage even if it is performed during the normal game state. The maximum number of times is set for the specific gaming state in which the notification (order notification of the feature DC1, referred to as the first order notification in relation to the above configuration, and the order correspondence result of the feature DC1 is also referred to as the first order correspondence result) is performed. To the extent that it does not contradict the significance of the decision, special notification can be realized by notification using the stop result.

Features DC12. When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result, the winning notification means (display control) capable of notifying the winning notification that the special result is won by the special notification means (for example, the auxiliary display unit 65). (Function to execute bonus winning notification effect by device 81) and
A game number setting means (the display control device 81 executes a lottery process for the number of precursor games) that sets the number of winning notification games from the game that has won the special result to the game that notifies the winning by the winning notification means. Function) and
With
Any of the features DC9 to DC11, wherein the number of winning notification games set by the game number setting means is likely to be shorter when the special notification is performed than when the special notification is not performed. The game machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, for a player who wants to know the special result winning early, it is preferable to set a short number of winning notification games by performing the special notification, and from that point of view, the increase processing is performed during the specific game state. Can be paid for not being done.

<Characteristic DD group>
Features DD1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
The first grasping means (the number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state, and
The second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, the first transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit in the highly advantageous state. , A second transition means for shifting the high-advantageous state to the low-advantageous state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (Function to execute additional notification effect by display control device 81) and
The increase process is performed in a situation where the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit. The number of special games is displayed in the third special notification setting process by the display control device 81, which can execute the specific notification for the excess amount exceeding the upper limit number of times by the predetermined notification means or another notification means. Function to execute the update process of the part) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantage state. Since it may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. In such a configuration, it has a so-called additional function that the remaining number of times in the high advantageous state is increased when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased.

On the other hand, if the game in which the specific condition is satisfied is before the total number of executions and the remaining number reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total reaches the upper limit. After that, no matter how many times the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state will end when the maximum number of times is reached, so the interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and until the maximum number of times is reached. The game becomes a so-called digestion game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

In that respect, in the above configuration, even after the total reaches the upper limit number of times, the specific notification about the excess amount when the increase processing is performed is performed, and by exceeding the upper limit number of times, the specific notification is performed. The structure is such that the player is intentionally informed of the number of times the benefit has not been fully received. In other words, even if the increase processing is performed, it means that the increase processing was not performed depending on the upper limit number of times. Therefore, it is usually considered that it is better not to notify the increase processing, but it is intentionally done. By notifying you, you can use the benefits that would have been obtained if the increase processing was performed beyond the upper limit, or compensate for the failure to receive the benefits. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that this will be done. In other words, instead of concealing the inability to enjoy the benefits of the increase process, the reversal idea of daringly clarifying it reminds us of feelings that are different from the feeling of loss based on not being able to enjoy the benefits. It is possible to improve the playability in the situation where the upper limit is reached.

Features DD2. The specific notification executing means can notify the number of times corresponding to the excess as the specific notification, and is characterized in that the specific notification is notified so that the number of times can be grasped as a number different from the remaining number of times. The gaming machine described in DD1.

It is also possible to add the excess amount to the remaining number of times and display it on the same number of times display, but in the above configuration, by displaying these separately times, it is only easy to grasp the excess amount. However, since the excess amount is displayed separately, it is possible to give a strong impression that some kind of compensation will be provided by the excess amount.

Features DD3. When the increasing process is performed, the increasing means selects one number of times by using the number of times information group in which a plurality of types of number of times information is stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The specific notification executing means selects one number of times as the number of times of the excess by using the number of times information group or an information group in which the same type of number of times information as the number of times information group is stored, and the selected number of times is selected. The gaming machine according to feature DD1 or feature DD2, wherein the increase notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, since the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification is used to determine the number of notifications in the specific notification, the excess amount when the increase processing is performed is clarified. It can be grasped. Further, if the number of times is determined by using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively for it, which can contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Features DD4. The specific notification execution means is
As the notification of the number of times corresponding to the excess amount, it is possible to notify the information of a predetermined number of times.
By performing the increase notification corresponding to the selected number of times, the predetermined number of times information can be added to the predetermined number of times information, and then the predetermined number of times information can be updated and notified. Features The gaming machine described in DD3.

According to the above configuration, when the increase processing exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed a plurality of times, the number of times corresponding to each increase process is accumulated and notified. By doing so, even after the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times reaches the upper limit, the enjoyment of adding and increasing the excess amount notified is added, and the notification is made. By gradually increasing the number of times, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the compensation content that will be implemented will also be generous.

Features DD5. A special notification executing means (a function of executing a third special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined special notification based on the number of times of the excess in the specific notification by the specific notification executing means. The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD4.

According to the above configuration, special notification is executed as compensation for the excess amount. For example, if the configuration is such that useful information is presented to the player by the special notification, the player will be satisfied if the special notification is given, and even if the information is not useful, it is special. Even if the notification is, for example, a flashy effect, it is possible to compensate the player's feeling of loss due to the fact that the increase process was not performed by seeing the flashy effect.

Features DD6. The special notification executing means can execute the special notification as a transition notification (attack mode end effect) when the second transition means shifts from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state. Features The gaming machine described in DD5.

According to the above configuration, the transition notification when the high advantage state ends becomes a special notification, and the excess amount is reflected. In the transition notification when the high advantage state ends, generally, the number of game media, the number of continuous games, etc. acquired during the high advantage state are notified, and the excess amount with respect to these notifications. By reflecting the above, it becomes easier to associate how many more games were continued if there was no upper limit, or the number of game media acquired when there was no upper limit. In addition, when such a transition notification is taken with a photograph or the like, the excess information is reflected, and for example, the enjoyment of reporting to a friend based on the photographed photograph increases. Even if you review it later, you can immerse yourself in your memories.

Features DD7. The special notification executing means is characterized in that the special notification can be executed in the low advantageous state after the transition from the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state by the second transition means. Features The gaming machine described in DD6.

According to the above configuration, the excess portion of the high advantageous state can be reflected not in the high advantageous state but in the low advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interlocking of the high-advantageous state and the low-advantageous state in the production by utilizing the excess amount.

Features DD8. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The above-described one of the features DD5 to DD7, wherein the special notification executing means can execute a suggestion notification suggesting information on a set value set by the setting means as the special notification. Amusement machine.

Assuming that the player desires a high setting, the suggestion notification of the set value can be useful information for the player. Therefore, as described above, if the suggestion notification of the set value is performed based on the excess amount, it is predicted that the suggestion of the set value will be performed from the excess amount notified by the specific notification, and the said When the set value is suggested, it is possible to realize the gameability such as predicting the set value, and it is possible to raise the interest in the specific notification which is the starting point of the game.

Features DD9. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
With
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DD1 to DD8, wherein the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be obtained. A specific gaming state is provided as a high-advantage state, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence. By applying the configuration related to the specific notification of the feature DD1 to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the game performance after the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state reaches the upper limit can be suitably improved. Can be done.

In particular, as compared with the special gaming state accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is for the player depending on the presence / absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, and the like. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a higher degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition and the number of continuations of the specific gaming state is strictly determined as compared with the one in which the game result is associated one-to-one with the transition of the gaming state. It is easy to realize a game property that has not been played, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DD1 is likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such playability. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature DD1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the continuity of the specific gaming state and to improve the playability when it is determined that the number of continuations reaches the upper limit. It is possible to improve.

<Characteristic DE group>
Features DE1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
The first grasping means (the number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state, and
The second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, the first transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit in the highly advantageous state. , A second transition means for shifting the high-advantageous state to the low-advantageous state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
It is a gaming machine equipped with
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (Function to execute additional notification effect by display control device 81) and
With
The increase notification executing means can execute the increase notification for an increase in the special number of times, which is a part or all of the number of times increased by the increase processing, in a game after the game in which the increase processing is performed. It has a post-notification execution means (a function of executing a post-addition effect setting process by the display control device 81).
The total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit, and is related to the increase processing by the post-notification executing means. When the specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which an unreported portion exists as the special number of times (a situation in which an excess flag is set and a post-addition flag is set), the above-mentioned It is provided with a first special notification executing means (a function of executing a first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a first special notification (pseudo-addition notification) as an increase notification by the predetermined notification means. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantage state. Since it may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. In such a configuration, it has a so-called additional function that the remaining number of times in the high advantageous state is increased when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased. Moreover, even if the remaining number of times is increased, the notification of a part or all of the remaining times may not be performed immediately, so that the expectation when a specific condition is satisfied can be continued for a long time. ..

On the other hand, if the game in which the specific condition is satisfied is before the total number of executions and the remaining number reaches the upper limit, it is preferable for the player as described above, but the total reaches the upper limit. After that, no matter how many times the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state will end when the maximum number of times is reached, so the interest in the success or failure of the specific condition will decrease, and until the maximum number of times is reached. The game becomes a so-called digestion game, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the game will be extremely reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, even after the total reaches the upper limit number of times, if there is an unreported portion of the increase processing, the unreported portion is used and the range of the number of times of the unreported portion is used. Since the increase notification can be executed within the configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the remaining number of times has increased without causing a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a highly advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably play the game after the total reaches the upper limit number of times.

Features DE2. When the increasing process is performed, the increasing means selects one number of times by using the number of times information group in which a plurality of types of number of times information is stored, and increases the remaining number of times by the selected number of times. ,
The first special notification executing means selects one number of times as the number of times of the unreported portion by using the number of times information group or an information group in which the same type of number of times information as the number of times information group is stored, and the selection. The gaming machine according to feature DE1, characterized in that the first special notification can be executed as the increase notification corresponding to the number of times the game has been performed.

According to the above configuration, since the number of times of notification in the first special notification is determined by using the same or similar information group (table) as the actual increase notification, the actual number of times is actually reached even in the situation where the upper limit is reached. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the increase processing is being performed. Further, if the number of times is determined by using the same information group, it is not necessary to store the information group exclusively for it, which can contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Features DE3. The first special notification executing means has the feature DE2 that, when the selected number of times exceeds the number of times of the unnotified portion, the number of times of the unnotified portion can be notified as the first special notification. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, while enjoying the merit of the first special notification that the increase notification is performed within the range of the unreported portion, the effect of simplifying the configuration related to the number of times selection or resembling the actual increase processing is expected. be able to.

Features DE4. In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo-additional notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the range of the unnotified portion. Special notification execution means (function to execute the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) and
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification executing means, a special privilege different from the privilege based on the increase processing being performed can be given (by a pseudo additional notification by the display control device 81). Function to suggest setting values) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE3.

According to the above configuration, while assuming the first special notification as an increase notification within the range of the number of unannounced minutes, the second special notification as an increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unannounced minutes is performed. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a high advantage state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and the remaining It is possible to improve the playability after the total with the number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, since the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase processing, when there is no unreported portion, that is, the total of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit. The configuration is such that the second special notification is performed before the player grasps that the player has reached it, not after the player has grasped it. By doing so, the second special notification exceeds the expectation for the player who wants to increase the number of times until the total reaches the upper limit, and when the second special notification is performed. You can increase your joy. That is, in a situation where the player already knows that the total has reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase process to the granting of special benefits. Then, even if the special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide more joy than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where a person wants something different from the special privilege (increase processing), by giving the special privilege together with the increase processing, it is possible to provide more joy than the special privilege.

Features DE5. The second special notification executing means can execute the increase notification as the second special notification by adding a predetermined specific number of times (10 times, 56 times, 77 times) to the number of times of the unnotified portion. The gaming machine according to the feature DE4, which is characterized by being present.

The number of unreported minutes is the number of times that the number of times of execution and the number of times of notification of the remaining number of times are subtracted from the upper limit number of times in the high advantage state, and each time the game in the high advantage state progresses, that is, execution As the number of times increases, the number of unreported minutes decreases, and the special number of times also changes depending on the ratio of unreported by the post-notification means. Then, as in the above configuration, in a configuration in which a special privilege is granted by performing an increase notification of the number of times a specific number is added to the number of unannounced minutes, the special privilege is granted. The number of notifications will change depending on the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at a glance the increase notification that triggers the granting of special benefits. It is possible to make the ease of noticing that a special privilege is given different from that of others who are looking at. In other words, the advantage of the player playing the game table is that the special privilege is given so that the player playing the game table can easily notice it and others cannot easily notice it. Can be secured.

Features DE6. The second special notification executing means can execute the increase notification by adding the first specific number (10 times) as the specific number to the number of the unnotified minutes, and the number of the unnotified minutes is increased. On the other hand, the increase notification can be executed by adding the second specific number of times (56 times, 77 times) different from the first specific number of times as the specific number of times.
The content of the special privilege given by the granting means differs depending on whether the increase notification to which the first specific number of times is added is executed or the increase notification to which the second specific number of times is added is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature DE5, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature DE5, the number of times of the increase notification to which the special privilege is given is further diversified, and further, which special privilege is given becomes complicated. It is possible to further secure the superiority of the player who is playing the game table.

Features DE7. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the multiple stages of the set value is set. Function to execute the setting process of winning probability by 101) and
In the specific situation, when the specific condition is satisfied, the second special notification (pseudo-additional notification) as the increase notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means beyond the range of the unnotified portion. Special notification execution means (function to execute the first special notification setting process by the display control device 81) and
By performing the second special notification by the second special notification executing means, a special privilege different from the privilege based on the increase processing being performed can be given (by a pseudo additional notification by the display control device 81). Function to suggest setting values) and
With
Described in any one of features DE1 to DE6, wherein the granting means can grant the special privilege by executing a suggestion notification suggesting information on a set value set by the setting means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, while assuming the first special notification as an increase notification within the range of the number of unannounced minutes, the second special notification as an increase notification exceeding the range of the number of unannounced minutes is performed. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the increase notification and the number of continuous games in a high advantage state, it will lead to a happy event for the player, and the number of executions and the remaining It is possible to improve the playability after the total with the number of times reaches the upper limit.

In particular, since the second special notification is executed on the condition that there is an unreported portion of the increase processing, when there is no unreported portion, that is, the total of the number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit. The configuration is such that the second special notification is performed before the player grasps that the player has reached it, not after the player has grasped it. By doing so, the second special notification exceeds the expectation for the player who wants to increase the number of times until the total reaches the upper limit, and when the second special notification is performed. You can increase your joy. That is, in a situation where the player already knows that the total has reached the upper limit, it is considered that the player's interest has shifted from the increase process to the granting of special benefits. Then, even if the special privilege is given in such a situation, it is considered difficult to provide more joy than the special privilege. Therefore, in a situation where a person wants something different from the special privilege (increase processing), by giving the special privilege together with the increase processing, it is possible to provide more joy than the special privilege.

In the above configuration, in particular, the suggestion information of the set value is presented as a special privilege. That is, since the information of the set value is presented by performing the second special notification that exceeds the range of the unreported portion, the player has a strong ability to decide whether or not to continue the game after the high advantage state ends. It can be used as a basis for judgment.

Moreover, when the high advantage state reaches the upper limit and ends, it is considered that a large amount of game media has been acquired, and even if information indicating a low setting is presented, a large amount of game media is acquired. Therefore, it is highly likely that the setting is high, and it is considered that it is easy to judge that the game is continued. Therefore, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the set value is suggested when the upper limit is not reached, the effect of loosening the criterion for determining the continuation of the game to the continuation side can be expected while suggesting the set value.

Features DE8. The gaming machine according to feature DE7, wherein the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition that is satisfied with the same probability of establishment is satisfied regardless of the set value, the set value is suggested when the notification exceeding the upper limit number of times is performed by the second special notification. By setting, it is possible to inform the player of the importance of the set value even if the part where the set value is involved in the high advantageous state is small, and the game can be played from a plurality of game consoles installed in the game hall. It can provide the fun of choosing a game table to play.

Features DE9. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order and a first result in which each of the stop operation means is different from the first stop order. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in the stop order of 2.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the order notification (push order notification) regarding the stop order including the first stop order and the second stop order is sent to a predetermined notification means (first display segment in the instruction monitor 68). It is equipped with an order notification means (a function of executing push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in N1 to 7th display segment N7).
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
With
The low advantage state is the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to any one of features DE1 to DE8, wherein the highly advantageous state is the specific gaming state.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop order of the orbiting body, and the order notification regarding the stop order may be obtained. A specific gaming state is provided as a high-advantage state, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence. If the configuration related to the first special notification of the feature DE1 is applied to a gaming machine having such a configuration, the playability after the total of the number of executions and the remaining number of times of the specific advantageous state reaches the upper limit is suitably improved. Can be made to.

In particular, as compared with the special gaming state accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, that is, the jackpot state, the above-mentioned specific gaming state is for the player depending on the presence / absence of notification at the time of winning the order correspondence result, the frequency of notification, the mode of notification, and the like. The degree of advantage changes. In such a configuration, there is a higher degree of freedom in setting the continuation condition and the number of continuations of the specific gaming state is strictly determined as compared with the one in which the game result is associated one-to-one with the transition of the gaming state. It is easy to realize a game property that has not been played, that is, a game property that allows the player to enjoy how long the specific game state continues. On the other hand, it can be said that the problem described in the feature DE1 is likely to occur by setting the upper limit number of times for such playability. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the above-mentioned feature DE1 to such a gaming machine, the playability when it is determined that the number of continuations reaches the upper limit while enjoying the continuity of the specific gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to improve.

<Characteristic EA group>
Features EA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
It is a lottery performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game state, and the specific notification corresponding to the predetermined specific lottery result can be notified by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). It is equipped with a specific notification execution means (for example, a function of executing an additional effect setting process by the display control device 81).
The specific notification execution means is
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the first notification means (in the case of an additional effect, the execution timing of the immediate addition effect) can execute the specific notification. The display control device 81 executes a process of generating an additional notification effect in the additional winning game) and
When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the specific notification is sent to the second mode (if it is an additional effect), which is a mode different from the first mode. , The second notification means (a function of executing the process of generating the additional notification effect in the game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the post-addition effect execution timing).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, the first result is won or the second result is won depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means for stopping the orbiting body. As a result, a result such as winning is set, and mode notification regarding these stop operation modes may be performed, and game playability is created in which the presence or absence of winning is changed depending on the presence or absence of mode notification to make the advantage different. To.

Here, in a configuration in which the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium are managed by the set values set by the setting means, it is common that the probability of lottery by the lottery means differs depending on each set value. On the other hand, in order to create the above-mentioned game playability, if there is a difference depending on the set value in the presence / absence of mode notification, the transition probability to the specific game state, the continuity, etc., the number of parameters with the setting difference becomes too large. As a result, there is a possibility that the increase / decrease rate of the game medium and the range of the upper / lower part of the increase / decrease mode may be increased due to the overlap of the upper / lower part of each parameter. On the other hand, in the game in the specific game state, if the configuration is such that no difference due to the set value is provided, the enjoyment in the specific game state may be reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the mode of the result notification (specific notification) of the specific lottery executed in the specific game state is configured to be different depending on the set value, so that the ball output rate due to the set value is less likely to be affected. It is possible to make a difference in playability depending on the set value within the range. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing". As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Features EA2. As the specific notification, the specific notification executing means is the first specific notification that the specific lottery has been won (additional notification effect in the immediate addition effect in the zone, first addition character BUP1 in the rear addition effect in the zone, and the like. (Display of the second post-addition character BUP2) and the second specific notification regarding the content when the specific lottery is won (notification of the number of games in the extra production in the immediate addition production in the zone, specialization in the rear-end production in the zone) Notification of the number of additional games at the end of the zone) and can be executed,
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to feature EA1, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. ..

According to the above configuration, as the specific notification, the first specific notification that the specific lottery regarding the specific game state has been won and the second specific notification regarding the winning content of the specific lottery are provided, and then the first specific notification is provided. The notification is executed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the set value, and the second specific notification is executed in a different mode depending on the set value. Therefore, the difference in the set value depends on the execution mode of the second specific notification, while preventing the probability of occurrence of an event such as ending the game without noticing that the specific lottery has been won differ depending on the set value. It is possible to realize the playability (the playability of predicting and grasping the set value) that reflects the above in the production.

Features EA3. When the first set value is set by the setting means, the rate of increase of the game medium is higher than when the second set value is set.
The gaming machine according to feature EA2, wherein the first aspect is set as a timing prior to the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, the higher the increase rate of the game medium, the earlier the execution timing of the second specific notification. Assuming that the player wants to set a set value that increases the rate of increase and preferentially selects the game table on which such a set value is set, the specific lottery It is preferable that the second specific notification as the winning content is executed as soon as possible. In this way, the set value can be predicted and grasped by using the execution timing of the second specific notification.

Here, in the game playability for predicting / grasping such a set value, when the predicted / grasped set value is not preferable for the player (when it is the second set value in the above example), the player's The motivation for the game may drop sharply. In that respect, in the above configuration, even if it is predicted and grasped that the second set value is not preferable for the player by the second specific notification, the specific lottery is won by the first specific notification before that. Since the notification is performed, the first specific notification becomes the second specific notification after the player is slightly pleased, and the decrease in motivation for the game can be alleviated.

Features EA4. The specific lottery is executed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific result (specific combination).
As the specific result, at least the first specific result (watermelon) and the second specific result (cherry) are provided.
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as a notification ratio (immediate addition / post-addition ratio), and the notification when the first set value is used. The difference in the notification ratio, which is the difference between the ratio and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value, differs between the specific notification based on the first specific result and the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features EA1 to EA3.

According to the above configuration, regarding the notification ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed in the first mode and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second mode, the notification ratio when the first set value and the notification when the specific notification is the second set value The difference in the notification ratio from the ratio is different between the case of the first specific result and the case of the second specific result. For example, when the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is larger than the notification ratio difference based on the second specific result, the specific notification based on the first specific result is better in the game of predicting and grasping the set value. It can be a more powerful basis for predicting and grasping the notification than the specific notification based on the second specific result. In this way, by making the ease of prediction and grasping different depending on the type of specific result, the interest in the specific result that triggers the specific notification is also raised, and the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is raised. It is possible to increase it suitably.

Features EA5. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first specific result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second specific result.
The feature EA4 is characterized in that the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. Described gaming machine.

On the premise that the larger the difference in notification ratio, the more powerful the basis for predicting and grasping the set value, the first specific result with a low winning probability has a larger difference in notification ratio than the second specific result. Then, the specific notification based on the first specific result can be a more powerful basis for predicting and grasping the set value. Therefore, it is possible to create the merits of winning the first specific result with a low winning probability in addition to the merits such as the specific lottery based on the first specific result and the benefits of winning the specific lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to winning the first specific result.

In addition, if the benefit of the specific lottery is a benefit related to the ball output rate, such as a benefit related to continuity during the specific game state, the ball output will be provided by providing the benefits of the above notification. It is possible to provide merits from a viewpoint different from the rate, and it is possible to enhance the merits of achieving the first specific result while preventing the ball output rate from rising.

Features EA6. As the gaming state during the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (specialized zone for cherry trigger) and a second specific gaming state (specialized zone for specific role trigger other than cherry) are set.
In the first specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be larger than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. Ori,
In the second specific gaming state, the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the first specific result is set to be smaller than the notification ratio difference of the specific notification based on the second specific result. The gaming machine according to the feature EA4 or the feature EA5, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, the difference in notification ratio based on the first specific result and the second specific result is reversed between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. That is, in the first specific game state, the effect of the feature EA5 is exhibited, and in the second specific game state, when the second specific result with a high winning probability is won, the set value can be easily predicted and grasped. Therefore, the second specific game state is a state in which the set value can be predicted and grasped more easily than the first specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the game in which the set value is predicted and grasped from the viewpoint of which specific game state will be reached, and the interest can be improved through the diversification of the game.

Features EA7. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first specific result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second specific result.
The gaming machine according to feature EA6, which comprises means for shifting to the second specific gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being the first specific result.

According to the above configuration, if the first specific result has a low winning probability, the game may shift to the second specific game state in which it is easy to predict and grasp the set value. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide the merit based on the first specific result winning not only from the viewpoint of the specific notification based on the winning, but also from the viewpoint of the transition of the specific gaming state, and the first specific. It is possible to further improve the superiority of the result.

Features EA8. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first specific result and the probability that the lottery result will be the second specific result are common to any one of the features EA4 to EA7 regardless of the gaming state. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize game playability using the first specific result and the second specific result without changing the lottery probability by the lottery means. Therefore, for example, it is not necessary to change the lottery table, and the game performance is realized as compared with a configuration that can be applied only in a limited state such as a big hit state in which the small winning combination winning probability is different from the normal game state. Greatly improves the degree of freedom in.

Features EA9. As the first aspect, the first notification means executes the specific notification in the game in which the specific lottery is performed.
The game according to any one of features EA1 to EA8, wherein the second notification means executes the specific notification in a game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed, as the second aspect. Machine.

According to the above configuration, the difference in the mode between the specific notification by the first notification means and the specific notification by the second notification means is the difference in the mode in different games. By doing so, there is a difference in whether the result of the specific lottery is notified in the game or in a game after that, and the playability due to the difference in the notification mode is extended. It will be possible to entertain over a period of time.

Features EA10. A means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific game state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state based on the remaining number of times in the specific game state (an advantageous section based on the establishment of the normal end condition in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). Function to execute termination processing) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features EA1 to EA9, wherein the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is a lottery related to an increase process for increasing the remaining number of times in the specific game state, that is, an additional lottery. From the viewpoint of the game property that is advantageous for the player by performing the mode notification in the specific game state, it is advantageous that the specific game state continues for a long time, and it can be said that the increase in the remaining number of times is a preferable event for the player. In particular, after shifting to the specific game state, the game should be performed while hoping that the specific game state will continue for a long time. Therefore, it can be said that the specific lottery related to the increase process is a lottery that the player is of great interest in. In addition, by making the execution mode of the specific notification regarding the increase processing of the remaining number of times different depending on the set value, it is possible to make the player pay great attention to the difference in the execution mode, and the winning probability of the increase processing. It is possible to entertain while associating the set value with the increase process without actually providing a setting difference.

Features EA11. The specific notification executing means is the first specific notification that the increase processing is performed as the specific notification (additional notification effect in the immediate addition effect in the zone, first addition character BUP1 in the rear addition effect in the zone, and the like. (Display of the second post-addition character BUP2) and the second specific notification regarding the number of increases in the remaining number of times when the increase processing is performed (in the immediate addition effect in the zone, the notification of the number of games in the addition effect, the post-addition in the zone) In the production, it is possible to execute (notification of the number of additional games at the end of the special zone).
The first notification means executes the first specific notification in a specific mode, and executes the second specific notification in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to feature EA10, wherein the second notification means executes the first specific notification in the specific mode and executes the second specific notification in the second mode. ..

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the first specific notification that the number of games has been added (increase processing) in the specific game state and the second specific notification regarding the number of additional games are provided. The specific notification is executed in a common mode (specific mode) regardless of the set value, and the second specific notification is executed in a different mode depending on the set value. Therefore, after the player is pleased by the addition by the first specific notification, the second specific notification regarding the number of additional games, which is important, is performed in a mode with a setting difference, and the second specific notification is the same. It will be done in a situation where interest in notification has been raised in advance. That is, it is considered that the difference in the notification mode gives a big impression to the player who is waiting now or now, and the merit of providing the setting difference for the notification mode of the second specific notification is more preferably exhibited. Is possible.

Features EA12. The first notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific aspect in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and executes the second specific notification as the first aspect in the game in which the specific lottery is performed. And run
The second notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific mode in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and in a game after the game in which the specific lottery is performed as the second mode. The gaming machine according to feature EA10 or feature EA11, characterized in that it is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the first notification means, the notification of the additional winning (first specific notification) and the notification of the number of additional games in the game in which the specific lottery is performed are performed. (Second specific notification) is performed, and it becomes a so-called immediate ride notification. On the other hand, when the additional notification (specific notification) is performed by the second notification means, the notification of the additional winning (first specific notification) is performed in the game in which the specific lottery is performed, and the additional game is performed in the subsequent game. A number notification (second specific notification) is performed, which is a so-called post-addition notification. In this way, by configuring the additional notification and the post-addition notification in the additional notification to be different depending on the set value, the game can be played without making a difference due to the set value regarding the additional winning rate and the number of additional games at the time of winning. It is possible to involve the set value for the addition of the number.

Features EA13. A means for grasping the number of executions executed in the specific game state (advantageous section game number AG) and
Means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (main control device 101) based on the number of executions reaching a predetermined upper limit in the specific game state, regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times. (Function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second process of section display)
With
The ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed by the first notification means and the case where the specific notification is performed by the second notification means is defined as the notification ratio, and the notification ratio when the first set value and the second set value are used. The gaming machine according to any one of the features EA10 to EA12, wherein the difference in the notification ratio, which is the difference from the notification ratio in the case of, is different depending on the number of executions.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the upper limit number of times is set in the specific gaming state, the first set value is related to the notification ratio between the case where the specific notification is performed in the first mode and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second mode. The difference in the notification ratio between the notification ratio in the case of the above and the notification ratio in the case of the second set value differs depending on the number of executions of the specific game state, and the difficulty level of predicting / grasping the set value changes. For example, if there is still room for the maximum number of games, the player may want to add a large number of games, and if the number of remaining games up to the maximum number is small, the game may be added. It seems that the player does not feel so happy even if the number is added, but rather that he loses if the number exceeds the upper limit. In that respect, by adopting the above configuration, by making the difficulty level of predicting / grasping the set value different in relation to the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of times, it is possible to predict / grasp the joy when the addition occurs. It is possible to make up for it from the viewpoint of ease of use.

Features EA14. It is provided with a number display means (a function of executing a process for displaying the remaining number counter HG for display by the display control device 81) capable of displaying the number display corresponding to the remaining number by a predetermined display means.
Any one of the features EA10 to EA13, characterized in that whether the specific notification is performed by the first notification means or the second notification means differs depending on the number of times displayed by the number of times display. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, whether the specific notification as the additional notification is performed in the first mode or the second mode differs in relation to the number of times display corresponding to the remaining number of times in the specific game state. When an additional prize is won as a specific lottery, for example, in a situation where the number of times display is small, the player will be relieved by increasing the number of times displayed by the addition, and conversely, in a situation where the number of times is large, the player Depending on the situation, it may be preferable to obtain a superiority complex that the potential remaining number of times is larger than that of the number of times display, rather than immediately increasing the number of times display. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making the mode of the addition notification different according to the number of times displayed from the number of times display, the effect utilizing the difference in emotions due to the addition as described above is achieved. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effective production that attracts the player.

Features EA15. Grant determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for executing a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on a determination opportunity, and
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege to the player, the privilege that enables the player to grant the privilege corresponding to the grant response result. Granting means (function to execute payout determination processing by the main control device 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the grant determination means are provided, and the set value of one of the plurality of stages is set. The setting means to be set (a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the main control device 101) and
The determination is executed based on the determination result by the grant determination means, and the specific determination means (the first by the main control device 101) that executes the specific determination having the same winning probability regardless of the set value set by the setting means. 1 specific role processing-function to execute the second specific role processing) and
The specific notification executing means (display control device 81 is used to set the additional effect) that can execute the specific notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means by the predetermined specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Function) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the first notification means (in the case of an additional effect, the execution timing of the immediate addition effect) can execute the specific notification. The display control device 81 executes a process of generating an additional notification effect in the additional winning game) and
When the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the specific notification is sent to the second mode (if it is an additional effect), which is a mode different from the first mode. , The second notification means (a function of executing the process of generating the additional notification effect in the game after the additional winning game by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the post-addition effect execution timing).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a set value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or increase / decrease mode of the game medium based on the determination result by the grant determination means is set, such a set value affects the winning probability by the specific determination means. Although there is no such thing, it affects the execution mode of the specific notification as the result notification corresponding to the determination result by the specific determination means, and the execution mode is different between the case where the first set value and the case where the second set value is used. By doing so, with respect to the specific judgment executed based on the judgment result by the grant judgment means, it is possible to associate the set value and the specific judgment with respect to the winning probability without providing a difference due to the set value. Become.

Here, it is considered that a player who desires to increase the number of game media seeks out a game table on which a better set value is set and plays a game, and suggests a suggestion effect such as suggesting a set value set by the setting means. It can be said that it is possible to make the game more entertaining by providing it. On the other hand, if the suggestion effect is configured so that the probability of its occurrence differs depending on the set value, the suggestion effect itself does not occur or is unlikely to occur depending on the set value, and the suggestion effect prepared with great care becomes effective. A situation may occur in which the device is not used. For example, in order to provide a suggestion effect such that the predetermined set value is determined when it appears, it is necessary to separately prepare a suggestion effect for the predetermined set value. In that respect, in the above configuration, with respect to the specific notification having a function as a suggestion effect, the winning probability itself of the specific judgment that triggers the specific notification does not differ depending on the set value, so that the occurrence rate of the specific notification is also total. Since the set values can be made common and only the execution mode of the specific notification is different, it is not necessary to prepare a separate specific notification for each set value. Therefore, the suggestion effect can be performed more simply and effectively, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing". As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

In addition, each configuration of the above features EA1 to EA14 may be applied individually to the feature EA15, or each configuration may be applied in combination. In this case, the term "grant determination means" in the feature EA15 may be read as "lottery means", and the terms may be appropriately matched before application.

<Characteristic EB group>
Features EB1. Specific determination means (first specific combination processing to third by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to the player based on the establishment of predetermined determination conditions. Function to execute specific role processing) and
An event execution means for executing the specific event based on the result of the determination by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101). When,
The specific notification executing means (additional effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the execution of the specific event by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Function to execute setting process) and
The number of times grasping means for grasping the number of times of the specific event (a function of executing the process of managing the watermelon post-loading counter and the watermelon immediate-loading counter by the display control device 81) and
With
The specific notification execution means is
The first notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for immediately placing the specific notification in the zone) capable of executing the specific notification at the first timing, and
A second notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing a post-addition effect in the zone) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing later than the first timing.
A selection means (display) for selecting a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means. The control device 81 executes a process of selecting an additional notification timing table according to the table counter ATK) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs by winning the specific determination, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if a specific event is a big hit, the specific notification is a big hit notification, and the player can fully enjoy the big hit and immerse himself in a sense of superiority.

Here, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, the emotion of the player when the specific event occurs is subtle at each occurrence time, even if the advantage of the specific event does not change at each occurrence time. It is thought that various changes will occur. In detail, it is thought that the occurrence of the specific event will be greatly pleased at the first occurrence, but after that, "familiarity" with the occurrence will occur as the number of occurrences elapses, and the joy of the first occurrence will be felt. It is thought that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification for the occurrence of the specific event is made different at each occurrence time, so that the specific notification according to the subtle change of the player at each occurrence time is realized. This makes it possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Features EB2. The gaming machine according to feature EB2, wherein the selection means is easier to select so that the specific notification is performed by the first notification execution means as the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is smaller.

According to the above configuration, the smaller the number of occurrences of a specific event that is advantageous to the player, the faster the notification is performed. As a player who is looking forward to whether or not a favorable specific event will occur, it is considered preferable that the notification is made early, and it is advantageous after the advantageous specific event has already occurred several times. It is thought that it is more joyful to be notified of a specific event at an unexpected timing because it was not expected. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the specific notification according to the emotion of the player, which can change at each occurrence time.

Features EB3. The number-of-times grasping means is the number of times of the first specific event, which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification is executed by the first notification executing means, or the number of times of the second notification among the number of times of the specific event. A specific number of times grasping means for grasping either one of the second specific event number of times, which is the number of times of the specific event for which the specific notification is executed by the executing means (for example, the display control device 81 immediately puts the watermelon on the display control device 81). It has a function to execute the process of managing the counter).
The selection means includes a plurality of notification execution means including the first notification execution means and the second notification execution means according to the number of times of the first specific event or the number of times of the second specific event grasped by the specific number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature EB1 or feature EB2, wherein the notification executing means for executing the specific notification is selected from the means.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the next specific notification is selected according to the number of times the specific notification is executed at the first timing (or the second timing), not just the number of executions of the specific event. In this case, for example, if a large number of executions are performed at the first timing, the second timing can be easily selected next, the first timing can be easily selected next time, and so on. It is possible to determine the execution timing of a new specific notification in consideration of the timing of the specific notification, and it is possible to adjust the subtle difference in the impression given to the player by the execution timing of the specific notification.

Features EB4. The first identification grasped by the specific number of times grasping means based on the fact that the specific notification is executed by a notification execution means different from the specific notification by the notification execution means of the side grasped by the specific number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to feature EB3, which comprises means capable of initializing the number of events or the number of times of the second specific event (a function of executing the process of step S10806 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific number of times grasping means grasps the first specific event number, the first specific event number is incremented by 1 when the specific notification is executed by the first notification executing means. When the specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means, the number of times of the first specific event is initialized (reset). That is, the number of times the specific notification is grasped by the specific number of times grasping means is the continuous number of times the specific notification is executed by the first notification execution means or the continuous number of times the specific notification is executed by the second notification execution means. As a result, for example, if the specific notification at the first timing is continuous, the specific notification at the first timing can be more easily performed, and the execution timing of the specific notification is determined according to the number of grasps. Then, the decision can be made according to the number of consecutive numbers up to that point.

Features EB5. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The selection means is characterized in that it is possible to select a notification execution means for executing the specific notification from the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means and the set value set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of EB1 to EB4.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification also changes depending on the setting value that causes a change in the increase / decrease rate or the increase / decrease mode of the game medium. For example, a situation in which a large amount of game media is acquired due to a good set value, a situation in which a game medium is not acquired due to a bad set value, and a situation in which a game medium is not acquired. Comparing the cases where a specific advantageous event occurs, it is considered that the player is more pleased with the occurrence of the latter than the former. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to realize a specific notification according to a subtle change in the emotion of the player based on an advantageous specific event and the quality of the set value.

Features EB6. The selection means
When the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is the first number and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, a predetermined notification execution means is selected with a first probability. When the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is a second set value different from the first set value, the first probability and the set value are different from the first set value. Selects the predetermined notification execution means with a different second probability,
When the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is the second number of times larger than the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the third probability is the said. When a predetermined notification execution means is selected, the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means is the second number, and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the third setting value. The predetermined notification execution means is selected with a fourth probability different from the probability.
The gaming machine according to feature EB5, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, when selecting the notification execution means based on the number of times of a specific event and the set value, the influence of the set value increases as the number of times increases, and conversely, the influence of the set value decreases as the number of times decreases. By doing so, for example, in the case of a configuration in which the set value is suggested according to the execution timing of the specific notification, the set value can be easily narrowed down as the number of executions of the specific event increases. In other words, it is possible to prevent the set value from being narrowed down in a situation where the number of executions of a specific event is small, and to prevent the enjoyment of the game of gradually narrowing down the set value from being eliminated.

More specifically, the "predetermined notification executing means" is the "first notification executing means" or the "second notification executing means".

Features EB7. The gaming machine according to feature EB6, wherein when the first number of times is one, the first probability and the second probability have the same probability.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific event is executed, there is no difference in the execution timing of the specific notification depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is determined from the first time, and it is possible to preferably realize the playability of predicting the set value.

Features EB8. A notification in which information on a notification executing means that executes the specific notification is stored from a plurality of notification executing means including the first notification executing means and the second notification executing means according to the number of times grasped by the number-of-times grasping means. Execution means information group (additional notification timing table) is set respectively.
The feature EB1 to EB7 is characterized in that the selection means switches the notification execution means information group to be used and selects the notification execution means for executing the specific notification according to the number of times grasped by the number of times grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the notification execution means selected by the selection means can be made different only by switching the notification execution means information group (table) according to the number of executions of the specific event. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature EB1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Features EB9. As the gaming state, at least a normal gaming state (normal section) and a specific gaming state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features EB1 to EB8, wherein the specific event is an event capable of increasing the remaining number of times in the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the specific event is executed during the specific gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous in the first place, and when the specific event occurs, the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state increases. That is, the specific event is an addition of the specific gaming state. By configuring the execution timing of the specific notification (additional notification) when such an addition occurs to be different according to the number of occurrences of the addition, for example, when the number of occurrences of the addition is small and the remaining number is small. In the case where the number of times of addition is large and the number of remaining times is large, it is possible to perform the addition notification by utilizing the subtle difference in the emotion of the player when the addition occurs.

<Characteristic EC group>
Features EC1. Specific determination means (first specific combination processing to the first by the main control device 101) capable of executing specific determination as to whether or not to execute a specific event advantageous to the player based on the establishment of predetermined determination conditions. 3 Function to execute specific role processing) and
An event execution means for executing the specific event based on the result of the determination by the specific determination means corresponding to the execution of the specific event (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101). When,
The specific notification executing means (additional effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the execution of the specific event or the execution of the specific event by the specific notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). Function to execute setting process) and
With a specific storage means (a function of the display control device 81 to manage a watermelon post-addition counter and a watermelon immediate addition counter) capable of storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means. ,
Specific output means (for watermelon by the display control device 81) capable of outputting specific information corresponding to the information stored in the specific storage means at a timing after the timing when the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means. (A function to execute processing to display the immediate / post-addition ratio and the immediate / post-addition ratio for cherries) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs by winning the specific determination, the player can grasp the specific event based on the specific notification corresponding to the specific event. For example, if a specific event is a big hit, the specific notification is a big hit notification, and the player can fully enjoy the big hit and immerse himself in a sense of superiority. Although the specific notification can be performed at various timings, in the above configuration, the timing at which the specific notification is executed is stored, and the specific information regarding the timing is output after the fact. Here, for example, when the game data is aggregated after the fact, specific events such as big hits may be displayed on the data display of the game hall, and such events that are advantageous to the player are memorized. It is easy to remain, and it is thought that it can be easily remembered later. On the other hand, regarding the execution timing of the specific notification that a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs, the player's desire will be satisfied at the time when the specific notification is performed, and the game will be played by the occurrence of the specific event. Since the feeling of exhilaration of the person will be further enhanced, it is considered that the specific notification executed before that is likely to fade from the memory as the feeling of exhilaration increases. That is, it is considered that it is difficult for the player to remember the specific notification, especially the execution timing. Therefore, as in the above configuration, it is possible to help the player collect data by storing such information that is difficult to remember on the gaming machine side and making it possible to read (output) it after the fact. It will be possible.

Features EC2. As the specific event, a plurality of specific events (additions with different numbers of games) having different advantages for the player are set.
The game according to feature EC1, wherein the specific storage means can be stored as separate information when the specific notification is executed at different timings even if the specific event has the same advantage. Machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific events have the same advantage, if the execution timings of the specific notifications are different, they can be aggregated separately. That is, even if the jackpots are the same, if the notification timings of the jackpots are different, they can be aggregated as separate information. For example, in the conventional aggregation method, the jackpot and the small hit are aggregated separately, but if the jackpot is the same, it is generally aggregated as the same information even if the notification timing is different. According to the above configuration, it is possible to clarify the difference from the conventional technique and more preferably realize the aggregation of the notification timings shown in the feature EC1.

Features EC3. The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for immediately placing an effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at the first timing, and
A second specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing, and
With
The specific output means can output the ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means as the specific information. The gaming machine according to the feature EC1 or the feature EC2.

According to the above configuration, as information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification, the ratio information of the ratio executed at the first timing and the ratio executed at the second timing is output. By doing so, not only the aggregation can be facilitated, but also, for example, when the number of executions of a specific event is small, only the ratio is output without outputting the number of times, which is not preferable for the player. It is also possible to avoid the information being expressed in a clear manner.

The above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The specific notification execution means is
A first specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for immediately placing an effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at the first timing, and
A second specific notification executing means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-addition effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification at a second timing different from the first timing, and
With
While the specific output means can output the ratio information between the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means as the specific information. , The number information of the specific notification executed by the first specific notification executing means and the specific notification executed by the second specific notification executing means is not output. "

Features EC4. Limitation that can limit the output of the specific information by the output means in a specific situation (advantageous section) in which the specific event is being executed or a game based on the specific event is being performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC3, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S11206 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the output of specific information is restricted during a specific event or in a specific situation in which a game based on the specific event is performed. For example, during the jackpot, information about the execution timing of the jackpot notification is not output. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an event such as the fact that the specific event or the like cannot be fully enjoyed due to the attempt to collect the data in the specific situation. Further, by assuming such a configuration, the output of the specific information can be performed at a later timing, so that the significance of storing the specific information is enhanced.

Features EC5. The specific notification execution means uses a predetermined information group (additional notification timing table including information of set values) to determine the execution timing of the specific notification, and then executes the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC4, wherein the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player.

According to the above configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification is determined by using the information set in the predetermined information group, and the execution timing is aggregated to be set in the predetermined information group. Information can be predicted and grasped. Since the information set in the predetermined information group can be useful information for the player, it can be said that the aggregation of the execution timing is also an act for collecting the information that can be useful for the player. Therefore, the significance of outputting the specific information is further enhanced, and it is possible to bring about the merit of the player by outputting the specific information.

Features EC6. In the specific storage means, the specific area for storing information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed is configured to be able to store information regarding the timing at which the plurality of specific notifications are executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC5, wherein the specific output means can output cumulative information of a plurality of stored information as the specific information.

According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification, such as when the specific notification is executed a plurality of times, the cumulative information is output as the specific information. Therefore, the player can more easily perform data analysis based on the specific information.

Features EC7. The first judgment condition (cherry) and the second judgment condition (watermelon) are set as the judgment conditions.
The specific information storage means separately separates the information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification based on the establishment of the second determination condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC6, which is memorable.

According to the above configuration, since the information corresponding to the execution timing of the specific notification is stored for each type of judgment condition, it is possible to perform more useful data analysis when the information obtained for each type is different. Become.

Features EC8. It has an operation unit (effect switch 66) that can be operated by the player.
It is characterized in that it includes means (a function of executing the processing of step S11203 and step S11204 by the display control device 81) capable of erasing the information stored in the specific storage means based on the operation of the operation unit. Feature The gaming machine according to any one of EC1 to EC7.

According to the above configuration, the player can freely select whether or not to erase the information stored in the specific storage means. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the successor from passing on the game data played by oneself, and it is possible to guarantee the superiority of collecting specific information.

Features EC9. The specific information is output by the specific output means based on the operation of the operation unit.
The gaming machine according to feature EC8, wherein the specific storage means can store information regarding the timing at which the specific notification is executed regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is deleted or output by the operation of the operation unit, and the storage of the information regarding the execution timing of the specific notification is performed regardless of whether or not the operation unit is operated. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the specific information cannot be output due to forgetting the operation or the like, while entrusting the operation by the player to collect the specific information and ensuring its superiority.

Features EC10. As the game state, a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are set.
A first termination means (a function of executing a process of normally ending an advantageous section in the main control device 101) for ending the specific gaming state according to the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state, and
A second termination means (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the main control device 101) for terminating the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining number of times of the specific gaming state.
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features EC1 to EC9, wherein the specific output means can output the specific information based on the end of the specific gaming state by the second termination means. ..

The specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player may end according to the remaining number of times that can be executed, or may end regardless of the remaining number of times that can be executed. The former is a normal termination mode, and the latter corresponds to forced termination, for example, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. In such a configuration, if the player is forcibly terminated by the second termination means, the player who still wants to enjoy the specific gaming state may have the impression that the profit obtained has been exploited. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which specific information is output as a substitute as in the above configuration, it is possible to follow up on the forced termination of the specific game state.

<Characteristic ED group>
Features ED1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
The first grasping means (the number of advantageous section games AG) for grasping the number of executions executed in the highly advantageous state, and
The second grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means in the high advantageous state, the first termination means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (usually in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the satisfaction of the end condition of)
Regardless of the presence or absence of the remaining number of times grasped by the second grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit in the highly advantageous state. , A second termination means for shifting the high-advantageous state to the low-advantageous state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the multiple stages of the set value is set. Function to execute the setting process of winning probability by 101) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
With
When the increase notification is performed, the increase notification execution means (display control device) capable of executing a specific notification suggesting information on a set value set by the setting means according to the number of executions. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing a back-loading effect in the zone and an immediate-loading effect in the zone by 81).

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of times of the high advantage state. Since it may end based on reaching the upper limit number of times, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. In such a configuration, it has a so-called additional function that the remaining number of times in the high advantageous state is increased when the specific condition is satisfied, and the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased.

On the other hand, even if a specific condition is satisfied and the remaining number of times is increased, it is sufficiently increased, for example, when the remaining number of times is increased and the maximum number of times is reached, for example, in a situation where the number of executions is near the upper limit. However, in a high-advantageous state in which an upper limit is set, expectations for an increase in the remaining number of times differ greatly depending on the situation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in order to perform the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing, the suggestion of the set value can be executed according to the number of executions, so that the remaining number of times cannot be expected to increase and is specified. Even in a situation where the merits of satisfying the conditions cannot be fully enjoyed, the merits can be followed by the suggestion of the set value. Therefore, it is possible to fully enjoy the high-advantageous state, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

Features ED2. The specific notification executing means makes it easier to grasp the information of the set value set by the setting means in the specific notification as the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature ED1, characterized in that it can be suggested.

According to the above configuration, the number of executions increases and the number of executions approaches the upper limit, and even if the increase processing is performed, the merits cannot be fully enjoyed, so that the set value can be easily grasped by the specific notification. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the merit that cannot be enjoyed by the increase processing by suggesting the set value.

Features ED3. The specific notification execution means is
When the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the execution mode of the specific notification is determined with the first probability. Information on the set value is suggested in a specific manner, the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the first number, and the set value set by the setting means is the first. When the second set value is different from the first set value, the information of the set value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with the second probability different from the first probability.
When the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the second number of times larger than the first number of times and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the third probability is set. The information of the set value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode, the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is the second number, and the setting means When the set value to be set is the second set value, the information of the set value is suggested so that the execution mode of the specific notification becomes the specific mode with a fourth probability different from the third probability. Is a thing
The gaming machine according to feature ED2, wherein the probability difference between the third probability and the fourth probability is set to be larger than the probability difference between the first probability and the second probability.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the specific notification becomes a specific mode and the setting value is suggested so that the number of executions increases and the number of executions approaches the upper limit, and the merit cannot be fully enjoyed even if the increase processing is performed. The difference in the set value in the probability that is performed becomes large. Thereby, the effect of the feature ED2 can be achieved by a concrete configuration.

Features ED4. The game according to any one of features ED1 to ED3, wherein the specific notification executing means can suggest information on the set value as the specific notification according to the execution timing of the increase notification. Machine.

According to the above configuration, if the suggestion of the set value using the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification, it is not necessary to prepare different modes of effect for the set value set in a plurality of stages. As a result, the specific notification can be realized with a simple configuration without inviting the complicated production configuration.

Features ED5. When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the specific notification executing means executes the increase notification at the first timing, and the set value set by the setting means is the first set value. When the second set value is different from the first set value, the specific notification can be executed by executing the increase notification at a second timing different from the first timing. Features The gaming machine described in ED4.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature ED4 can be achieved by a more concrete configuration.

Features ED6. The gaming machine according to feature ED5, wherein the second timing is a game after the first timing.

According to the above configuration, the first timing and the second timing are different games. In this case, the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the first timing and the remaining number of times when the specific notification is executed at the second timing are different. For example, it is considered that the former is more happy that the remaining number of times is increased depending on whether the specific notification is notified when the remaining number of times is small or when the remaining number of times is large. That is, the impression that the player receives when the remaining number of times is increased by the increase notification is significantly different. By utilizing the difference in impressions received by the player to suggest the set value, for example, by suggesting a low setting at a timing when the player feels happy with the increase notification. , It is possible to alleviate the sadness of being at a low setting, and conversely, by suggesting a high setting at a timing when you feel that you are not so happy with the increase notification, you can supplement the joy of the increase notification. it can.

Features ED7. The specific notification execution means is
When the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the increase notification is executed in the first game, and the set value set by the setting means is larger than the first set value of the player. When it is the second set value that is advantageous to the player, the increase notification is executed in the second game, which is a game after the first game.
When the set value set by the setting means is the same,
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the first number of executions, the specific selection rate at which the second game is selected rather than the first game becomes the first selection rate.
When the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the second number of executions larger than the number of first executions, the specific selection rate is set to a second selection rate higher than the first selection rate. The gaming machine according to any one of ED4 to ED6, characterized in that specific notification can be executed.

According to the above configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the increase notification to be executed in the later game, and when compared with the same set value, the number of executions is higher than in the early stage when the number of executions of the specific game state is small. In the early stage when the number of executions of the specific game state is small, the increase notification is executed in the first game and the setting is low. Although it is easier to suggest that, the joy of the increase notification can alleviate the sadness of the low setting. On the contrary, since it is easy to suggest that the setting is high at the end of the specific game state, even in a situation where the increase notification is not so happy, the suggestion that the setting is high will be followed. It becomes possible.

Features ED8. The increase notification is
A first means for executing the increase notification in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied (a function of executing a process for performing an immediate ride effect on the display control device 81) and
A second means (a function of executing a process for performing a post-addition effect in the display control device 81) for executing the increase notification in a game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features ED4 to ED7, wherein the increasing means executes the increasing processing in a game in which the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, since the increase processing itself is executed in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, there is a difference in production even if the increase notification is performed in the ex post facto game as in the second means. This is sufficient, and the configuration for performing specific notification can be simplified by the difference in the execution timing of the increase notification while managing the number of executions, the maximum number of times, and the like.

Features ED9. It is provided with a number of times notification means (a function of executing a process for managing the display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of executing the number of times notification corresponding to the remaining number of times by a predetermined notification means.
When the increase notification is executed in a game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied by the second means, the number notification means is the result of the increase processing executed in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. The feature is that the number of times notification is performed without reflecting the above number of times, and the result of the increase processing for the increase notification is reflected in the number of times notification based on the fact that the increase notification is performed by the second means. The gaming machine described in ED8.

According to the above configuration, when the increase notification is performed after the fact while the remaining number of times is grasped to some extent by the number notification means, the result of the increase processing is not reflected in the number notification until the increase notification occurs. As a result, it is possible to achieve the effect of simplifying the processing configuration as in the feature ED8, while achieving the effect of performing the increase notification in the ex post facto game.

Features ED10. The gaming machine according to feature ED9, wherein the specific notification executing means can perform the specific notification in response to information about the number of times notification notified by the number of times notification means.

According to the above configuration, the setting value is suggested (specific notification) by performing the increase notification in consideration of the information about the number of times notification on the display. By doing so, for example, even when a large number of remaining times are actually left, but a small number of times is displayed in the number of times notification on the display, the increase notification is treated as a case where the person will be happy. It becomes possible. Therefore, in particular, there are many situations where the configuration such as the feature ED6 is applied, and it becomes possible to more preferably exert the effect of the feature ED1.

<Characteristic FA group>
Features FA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific game state (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal end condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of),
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
With
The increase notification executing means is
The first notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an addition effect based on the immediate addition selection flag) that can execute the increase notification in the first aspect, and
With a second notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an additional effect based on the post-addition selection flag), which can execute the increase notification in a second aspect different from the first aspect). ,
With
The first notification execution means is based on the fact that in a specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, the stop operation means is operated in the first specific stop operation mode, and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped. Then, when the increase processing is performed, the increase notification is executed in the first aspect.
In the specific game, the second notification executing means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode, and the corresponding orbiting body is stopped. Based on this, a gaming machine characterized in that the increase notification when the increase process is performed is executed in the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and the aspect relating to such a stop operation mode. A specific gaming state is provided, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the player tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, such as aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above-mentioned game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is given to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to be selected. By doing so, it is possible to intervene the player in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the playability that can be led by the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the "specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means" is configured to "provide a special result (specific combination, normal replay) as the lottery result by the lottery means", and then "the above. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second stop operation means. The game in which the special result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of the above and the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result may be referred to as a "specific game".

The "first aspect" and "second aspect" may be expressed as "first timing" and "second timing". As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Features FA2. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a replay result that enables the next game to be replayed without requiring a new game medium is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature FA1, wherein when the specific gaming state is reached, the lottery result of the lottery means can shift to a regaming state in which the probability that the lottery result becomes a predetermined replaying result is higher than that of the normal gaming state. ..

According to the above configuration, when the player shifts to the specific game state in which the mode notification is performed, it is possible to shift to the so-called RT state in which the probability of obtaining a predetermined re-game result is high. As for the re-game result, a prize is generally established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. However, in the above RT state, the mode notification is performed and the privilege is obtained in the stop operation mode according to the mode notification. In addition to the games in which the first result or the second result is won, it is conceivable that a game in which the predetermined re-game result with a high winning probability is won frequently occurs. As described above, since it is common for the re-game result to win a prize regardless of the stop operation mode, in these games, the stop operation is performed according to the instruction from the game machine side. The game or the stop operation mode becomes a game in which the presence or absence of a prize is not related at all, and there may be less room for the player to intervene in the game. In that respect, as described in the feature FA1, the execution mode of the increase notification is determined based on the stop operation mode of the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. Therefore, for example, the replay result winning game Can also be a specific game. As a result of the above, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

The above configuration is limited to "when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific re-game result winning, the specific re-game result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode by each stop operation means". By doing so, the above effect can be achieved more clearly.

Features FA3. Based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the specific condition is satisfied.
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the first stop operation means. The gaming machine according to feature FA1 or feature FA2, wherein the specific result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of 2.

According to the above configuration, in the specific result winning game that triggers the execution of the increase process, the specific result winning is established regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means. That is, a game that is not the target of execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means triggers the increase processing, and the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed by the stop operation mode of the game is determined. Assuming that the game is performed while hoping that the increase processing is performed in the specific game state, the interest in the game in which such mode notification is not performed is another game (mode notification is performed). It is considered to be expensive compared to the game). Therefore, as in the above configuration, by configuring the configuration to determine the execution mode of the increase notification in the game that is originally of high interest, it is possible to fully enjoy the playability of selecting the increase notification by itself.

Features FA4. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific result winning game becomes the specific game. That is, the game in which the increase processing is performed and the game in which the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing is performed are the same games. It is considered that the joy of the player when the increase notification is performed depends not only on the execution mode but also on the progress status of the game (the status of the specific game state). It is possible to make the selection of the execution mode of the above in a situation closer to the ever-changing progress. That is, for example, a configuration in which the execution mode of the special notification is selected at the start of the game or the start of the specific game state is conceivable, but in such a configuration, the execution mode is different from the initially desired execution mode as the game progresses. There is a possibility that the increase notification will be performed depending on the execution mode. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to realize an increase notification according to the player's preference.

Features FA5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the specific result winning is established by stopping the specific pattern combination corresponding to the specific result at the effective position.
In the specific orbiting body of each of the orbiting bodies, the specific symbols constituting the specific symbol combination can be stopped at the effective position when the corresponding stop operating means is stopped in the first stop mode. On the other hand, it is characterized in that it is attached to the specific orbiting body so that it cannot be stopped at the effective position when the stop operation is performed in the second stop mode different from the first stop mode. The gaming machine described in FA4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific result is a result of so-called omission, in the game playability of selecting the execution mode of the increase notification in the stop operation mode in the specific result winning game, the stop operation for making such a selection is performed. , The configuration is such that the specific result is not missed, and the difficulty of the operation is increased to improve the playability.

Features FA6. The second aspect is a timing after the first aspect, and is
The first specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which the first stop operation means of each of the stop operation means is stopped at a specific order.
The second specific stop operation mode is a stop operation mode in which a second stop operation means different from the first stop operation means of each of the stop operation means is stopped at the specific order.
The gaming machine according to feature FA5, wherein the stop operation means corresponding to the specific orbiting body is the first stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification is selected depending on which stop operation means is used to perform the stop operation at the specific order, and then the stop operation for the orbiting body that is missed in the specific result winning game. When the means is stopped at the specific order, the first aspect is selected. By doing this, even if a miss occurs, the increase notification will be sent at a relatively early timing, and there are multiple things such as whether it was missed or whether a specific result was not won in the first place. Questions and anxieties due to possibilities can be resolved earlier.

Features FA7. The gaming machine according to feature FA3, wherein the game before the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result is the specific game.

According to the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase process is performed is selected according to the stop operation mode of the game prior to the specific result winning game that triggers the increase process. By doing so, it is possible to perform the operation of selecting and the operation of establishing a specific result winning in separate games, and it is possible to concentrate on each operation.

Features FA8. Based on the transition to the specific gaming state, a means (attack mode start effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a transition notification (attack mode start effect) of the transition to the specific game state by a predetermined notification means. Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA7, wherein a game after the game in which the transition notification is performed becomes the specific game.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that one game in the game in the specific game state is the specific game, and the difference from the game property to be selected before or at the start of the specific game state becomes clearer. That is, in the game after the specific game state is started, it is possible to more clearly exert the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game in which the mode notification is not performed.

Features FA9. The gaming machine according to any one of features FA1 to FA8, wherein the second aspect is included in a game different from the game in which the first aspect is included.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the increase notification is performed may be a different game depending on the stop operation mode in the specific game. With such a configuration, the selection result by the player can be influenced by the production over a plurality of games, and the importance and significance of the selection can be enhanced.

Features FA10. In the specific game, when the stop operation means is operated in the second specific stop operation mode, the game before the target game including the second mode is further referred to as the specific game, the increase. The gaming machine according to feature FA9, wherein the notification executing means executes the increase notification in a mode corresponding to the stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the specific game on the rear side.

Feature In a configuration such as FA9 in which an increase notification is performed in a later game across games, a situation in which a later game is selected may result in a more specific game. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the rear side selection is prioritized, it is possible to execute the increase notification in a manner that takes into account the situation at the time of selection.

Features FA11. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific game state (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal end condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of),
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
With
The increase notification executing means is
The first notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an addition effect based on the immediate addition selection flag) that can execute the increase notification in the first aspect, and
With a second notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an additional effect based on the post-addition selection flag), which can execute the increase notification in a second aspect different from the first aspect). ,
With
In the specific game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, the first notification executing means performs the increase processing based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the first specific stop operation mode. The increase notification in the case of a failure is executed in the first aspect, and the increase notification is executed.
In the specific game, the second notification execution means performs the increase process based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the increase notification when performed is executed in the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and the aspect relating to such a stop operation mode. A specific gaming state is provided, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the player tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, such as aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above-mentioned game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is given to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to be selected. By doing so, it is possible to intervene the player in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the playability that can be led by the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the "specific game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means" is configured to "provide a special result (specific combination, normal replay) as the lottery result by the lottery means", and then "the above. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second stop operation means. The game in which the special result winning can be established by being operated in the stop operation mode of the above and the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result may be referred to as a "specific game".

Further, the "first aspect" and the "second aspect" may be expressed as the "first timing" and the "second timing". As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

Features FA12. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
As the game state, at least a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) in which the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means is higher than that of the normal game state are provided.
A transition lottery means (first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) that executes a transition lottery to the specific game state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result in the normal game state. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, the specific transition means (the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific game state is executed. Function) and
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the specific game state (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the specific gaming state, the normal transition means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal end condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of),
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
With
The increase notification executing means is
The first notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an addition effect based on the immediate addition selection flag) that can execute the increase notification in the first aspect, and
With a second notification executing means (a function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an additional effect based on the post-addition selection flag), which can execute the increase notification in a second aspect different from the first aspect). ,
With
In the game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is not executed, the first notification executing means operates the stop operation means in the first specific stop operation mode in a specific situation in which each orbiting body is orbiting. Based on the above, the increase notification when the increase process is performed is executed in the first aspect.
In the second notification executing means, the increase processing is performed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in a second specific stop operation mode different from the first specific stop operation mode in the specific situation. A gaming machine characterized in that the increase notification when performed is executed in the second aspect.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, the winning result may differ depending on the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, and the aspect relating to such a stop operation mode. A specific gaming state is provided, such as different advantages depending on the presence or absence of notification. Moreover, if a specific condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state may be increased, and by continuing the specific game state for a long time, it may be possible to acquire a large amount of game media. , The playability of each game has been significantly improved.

On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the player tends to be a one-sided game from the gaming machine, such as the player performing a stop operation based on the mode notification on the gaming machine side and winning the corresponding result. Considering the original gameplay of slot machines, such as aiming at the pattern of the orbiting body and stopping it to obtain a privilege, the above-mentioned game machine-led game is not preferable.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the execution mode of the increase notification when the increase processing based on the establishment of the specific condition is performed is given to the player by the mode of the stop operation by the stop operation means in the specific game in which the mode notification is not performed. It was configured to be selected. By doing so, it is possible to intervene the player in the game in the specific gaming state, and it is possible to encourage the participation of the player in the playability that can be led by the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the "game in which the mode notification is not executed by the mode notification means" is configured to "provide a special result (specific combination, normal replay) as the lottery result by the lottery means", and then "the lottery". When the lottery result by the means is the special result, the special result winning can be established by operating each of the stop operation means in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is the second stop operation means. The special result winning can be established by operating the stop operation mode, and the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result is not executed. It may be a "game".

Further, the "first aspect" and the "second aspect" may be expressed as the "first timing" and the "second timing". As described above, if the above configuration is realized only by the difference in timing, the above excellent effect can be exhibited with a simpler configuration.

<Characteristic FB group>
Features FB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
A grasping means for grasping the remaining number of times in the highly advantageous state (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
Based on the remaining number of times grasped by the grasping means in the high advantageous state, the transition means for shifting the high advantageous state to the low advantageous state (the normal end condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101 is Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment) and
An increasing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increasing process of increasing the remaining number of times based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, and
When the increase processing is performed by the increase means, the increase notification execution means (additional notification) that the increase processing has been performed can be executed by the predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). (A function to execute the setting process of the additional effect by the display control device 81) and
With
The increase notification executing means is
Based on the first selection operation performed by the player, the increase notification triggered by a predetermined specific condition is immediately put on the first notification execution means (display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification at the first timing. (A function to execute processing to perform additional effects based on the selection flag) and
A second notification execution means capable of executing the increase notification triggered by the predetermined specific condition at a second timing after the first timing based on the second selection operation performed by the player. (A function of the display control device 81 to execute a process for performing an additional effect based on the additional selection flag).
The predetermined specific condition is set based on the fact that the third selection operation is performed by the player in the specific situation after the second selection operation is performed and before the second timing is reached. A third notification executing means (a function of executing correction processing in the display control device 81) that causes the increase notification to be executed at a third timing different from the second timing, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which there are a high-advantage state and a low-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, the remaining number of high-advantage states is increased when a specific condition is satisfied. It has a function, and when the remaining number of times is increased, an increase notification is performed as an additional notification, so that the expectation that the specific condition is satisfied is increased.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the player can select whether to execute the increase notification at the first timing or the second timing after that as the execution timing, so that the game is related to the increase notification. It has a function to be customized by the player, and it is possible to make the gaming machine according to the needs of the player. In addition, in the situation where the increase notification at the second timing is selected, in the specific situation before reaching the second timing, the increase notification is generated at the third timing different from the second timing by the player's selection. It also has a function that can be changed so that it can be changed. By doing so, although the second timing is selected once, if a change of heart occurs due to the subsequent game situation, etc., the execution timing of the increase notification can be changed after the fact to meet various needs. A game machine is realized.

Features FB2. A storage means (by the display control device 81) capable of storing the result of the increase processing triggered by the predetermined specific condition, which is to be executed at the second timing by the second notification execution means, in a predetermined storage area. (Individual area)
The third notification executing means is
A means for acquiring the result of the increase processing triggered by the predetermined specific condition stored in the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S12806 by the display control device 81) and
A means for executing the increase notification corresponding to the acquired result of the increase process at the third timing (a function of executing the process of step S12807 by the display control device 81) and
A means for erasing the acquired result of the increase process from the storage means (a function of executing the process of step S12809 by the display control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to the feature FB1, which is characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the above configuration, the content of the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing can be changed to be executed at the third timing while preventing duplication or omission. By doing so, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature FB1 while avoiding the inconvenience that the player suffers a disadvantage or a disagreement in the production occurs.

Features FB3. The storage means can individually store the results of the plurality of the increase processes.
Based on the third selection operation by the player, the third notification executing means can separately execute the increase notification for the result of the increase process stored individually at the third timing. The gaming machine according to feature FB1 or feature FB2.

According to the above configuration, when there is a plurality of information corresponding to the increase notification that was supposed to be executed at the second timing, it is possible to individually change each of them to be executed at the third timing. By doing so, it is possible to realize a production that more meets the needs of the player.

Features FB4. The storage means is the one in which the increase processing is performed based on the first specific opportunity, and the information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing and the first identification. The increase processing is performed based on a second specific trigger different from the trigger, and information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing is stored separately. It is possible and
Based on the third selection operation by the player, the increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity, and when executed at the second timing, it corresponds to the result of the increase process selected. The information to be executed can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing. The gaming machine according to feature FB3, characterized in that the information corresponding to the result of the above can be executed at the second timing.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature FB3.

Regarding the "second specific trigger", "different from the first specific trigger" means not only that the type of trigger when the "specific condition" is satisfied is different, but also that the type of trigger is the same. It also includes the fact that the timing (game) at which the "specific condition" is satisfied is different.

Features FB5. The storage means is the one in which the increase processing is performed based on the first specific opportunity, and the information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing and the first identification. The increase processing is performed based on the second specific trigger that occurs prior to the trigger, and the information corresponding to the result of the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing, respectively. Can be stored separately and
Based on the third selection operation by the player, the increase process is performed based on the first specific opportunity, and when executed at the second timing, it corresponds to the result of the increase process selected. The information to be executed can be executed at the third timing, and the increase processing is performed based on the second specific opportunity, and the increase processing selected to be executed at the second timing. The gaming machine according to the feature FB3 or the feature FB4, characterized in that the information corresponding to the result of the above can be executed at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurred earlier is kept at the second timing, while the increase notification for the first specific trigger that occurs later is set to the third timing that precedes the second timing. Can be executed. That is, it is possible to perform the increase notification in an order different from the order in which the increase processing is performed by using a configuration in which the results of the increase processing can be individually stored.

Features FB6. A display control means (display control device 81) having a predetermined display screen (auxiliary display unit 65), and
In the specific situation, the means (step S12804 by the display control device 81) capable of displaying the corresponding information corresponding to the information for the result of the increase processing individually stored in the storage means on the predetermined display screen. (Function to execute the processing of) and
A means for enabling selection of one of the displayed corresponding information based on the third selection operation by the player (a function of executing the processes of step S12805 and step S12806 by the display control device 81) and
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features FB2 to FB5, wherein the third notification executing means executes the increase notification of the selected correspondence information at the third timing.

According to the above configuration, the player can execute the increase notification at the third timing by selecting one of the correspondence information displayed on the predetermined display screen. In this way, by selecting while displaying on the display screen, it is intuitively easy to understand, and even a player who is not accustomed to the game can easily perform the selection operation. Therefore, the gaming machine can be made user-friendly.

Features FB7. The gaming machine according to any one of features FB1 to FB6, wherein the game in which the first timing exists and the game in which the second timing exists are different from each other.

If the configuration of the feature FB1 is applied to a gaming machine on the premise that the increase notification is performed in different games by the first selection operation and the second selection operation as in the above configuration, the first timing and The second timing becomes a timing that is more temporally separated, the second timing is selected, and a specific situation before that is likely to occur, and in such a specific situation, the third selection operation is performed. It is possible to secure a grace time.

Features FB8. The first timing exists in the first game in which the specific condition is satisfied.
The second timing exists in the second game after the first game,
The third timing exists in the third game prior to the second game,
The gaming machine according to feature FB7, wherein the third notification executing means executes the increase notification in the third game when the third selection operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the first selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the specific condition is satisfied, and when the second selection operation is performed, in a game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied. Increase notification occurs. On the premise of such a configuration, when the third selection operation is performed, an increase notification is generated in the game in which the selection operation is performed. By doing so, when the third selection operation is performed, the increase notification is immediately executed, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand, and the third selection operation is performed. Since it is not necessary to re-store the information in the event of a failure, the configuration can be simplified.

<Characteristic GA group>
Features GA1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, etc.) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery means for executing the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state (execution of the transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101). Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) to shift to the first specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the challenge mode in the process of dealing with the winning result)
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing the transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process to shift to the attack mode in the process for dealing with the winning result)
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed. In the configuration of, the first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number of sheets) is established. When,
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG, advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase / decrease number of the game medium increased / decreased in the first specific game state.
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the first ending means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal ending condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 is Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment) and
The first grasping means grasps the number of executions based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the number of increases / decreases has reached the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, the second end means for shifting the first specific gaming state including the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (an advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the process of forcibly terminating) and
An increase means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit, or the number of increases / decreases grasped by the second grasping means. And based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied. A specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can cause a specific event that can be beneficial to the player, based on the fact that the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the above. Execution means (a function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , Since the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific gaming state, is provided, the normal gaming state is shifted to the first specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is aimed at. The gameplay is realized on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the stage, and it will be possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest.

In these first specific game states and second specific game states, in addition to the case where the second specific game state ends based on the remaining number up to the end condition of the second specific game state, the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the maximum number of times is reached or the number of increases / decreases in the game medium reaches the maximum number of increases, the case where the first specific game state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game states is set. By continuing the 1 specific gaming state and the 2nd specific gaming state endlessly, inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media exceeding the designer's expectation and the player being unable to finish the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state are specified as described above, the total of the current number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit when a so-called addition such as an increase process of the second specific game state occurs. If the number of times is exceeded, or if the total of the current increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. Expectations are extremely lowered, and the fact that the increase processing is performed is considered to be a loss, which may result in a great loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation that exceeds the above upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process, it is an event different from the increase process (addition) and the game is played. We are trying to create specific events that can be beneficial to the person. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the second specific gaming state is a state included in the first specific gaming state, and when the first specific gaming state ends, the second specific gaming state also ends at the same time, and conversely, the second 2 When the specific game state ends, the first specific game state also ends. For example, in a configuration in which the first specific gaming state is not terminated even if the second specific gaming state is terminated, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific gaming state are specified, the first specific gaming state is specified. When the second specific gaming state ends and then shifts to the second specific gaming state, the number of times or the number of increases up to the upper limit number or the upper limit increase number of the first specific gaming state is small. It is likely to occur. On the other hand, if the first specific gaming state is also terminated at the end of the second specific gaming state as in the above configuration, the transition to the second specific gaming state in the first specific gaming state is performed. In the first specific game state up to that point, the portion digested in the second specific game state no longer exists, and the above-mentioned events such as the upper limit number of times, the number of times up to the upper limit increase number, and the increase number are less likely to occur. Become. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game between the first specific game state in which the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number are defined and the second specific game state included in the first specific game state.

The "number of increase / decrease in the number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state" is more specifically referred to as "the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state". The number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media used in the above and the number of game media used in.

Further, regarding the "first specific game state" and the "second specific game state", "as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, a prize is established. It has a first result and a second result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, and a lottery by the lottery means is performed. Based on the result, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to a predetermined notification means (first display segment N1 to 1 in the instruction monitor 68). 7 A mode notification means (a function of executing push order processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed by the display segment N7) ”is provided, and then the“ first specific game state ”is set to“ the above-mentioned mode. The event related to the notification is set to "the first specific gaming state" in which the event related to the notification is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the "second specific gaming state" is set to "the event related to the mode notification is more than the other state in the first specific gaming state". May be expressed as "a second specific gaming state" that is likely to be advantageous to the player. It should be noted that this point can be applied to other configurations (including other feature groups).

Features GA2. When the number of executions reaches the upper limit, the second end means shifts the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state even if the increase / decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number, and the increase / decrease occurs. The gaming machine according to feature GA1, characterized in that when the number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state even if the number of executions does not reach the upper limit. ..

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit or the number of increases / decreases reaches the upper limit, the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated by the second termination means and the normal gaming state is entered. In this way, if one of the forced termination conditions (upper limit) is satisfied, the termination is performed regardless of the other situation, so that the significance of providing a plurality of types of forced termination conditions is further enhanced. In other words, if the configuration is such that both termination conditions are satisfied and then forcibly terminated by the second termination means, the conditions for forced termination become more profound and the event of accidental forced termination can be avoided. However, if one of the forced termination conditions is satisfied and the forced termination is performed as in the above configuration, the player's benefit depends on which forced termination condition is used for the forced termination. It becomes possible to preferably improve the interest of the game by utilizing such a plurality of forced termination conditions.

Features GA3. The gaming machine according to feature GA1 or feature GA2, wherein the increase / decrease number can reach the upper limit increase number before the execution number reaches the upper limit number of times.

Based on the premise of the game that the game medium is paid out according to the game result and the game medium is increased, the first specific game state is terminated by the second end means when the upper limit increase number is reached. Rather, it can be said that the goal of the game has been achieved. On the other hand, if the number of executions reaches the upper limit and the first specific gaming state is terminated without reaching the upper limit increase number, the target ends without being achieved. The above configuration is for ensuring the superiority of the upper limit increase number based on the difference between the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number, and even if the number of executions does not reach the upper limit number as in the above configuration. By making the configuration that can reach the upper limit increase number, in other words, by not making the configuration so that the upper limit increase number cannot be reached even if the number of executions reaches the upper limit number, the aim of the game is clarified and the game is played. It is possible to set an upper limit so as not to reduce a person's willingness to play.

Features GA4. Any of the features GA1 to GA3 characterized in that the result of multiplying the average value of the expected increase / decrease number expected per game in the second specific gaming state by the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit increase number. The gaming machine according to 1.

The above configuration stipulates that the result of multiplying the so-called net increase number and the upper limit number of times as the average value of the expected increase / decrease number is larger than the upper limit increase number. It is not an accidental event but a normal (on average) possible event that the upper limit increases before the upper limit is reached. In other words, it becomes easier to aim to exceed the upper limit increase number, and the goal of the game such as reaching the upper limit increase number before being forcibly terminated by the upper limit number of times becomes clear.

In addition, in the above configuration, when all the first specific game states are played in the second specific game state, the upper limit is increased before the upper limit is reached. Therefore, in the first specific game state, the upper limit is increased. When a state other than the second specific gaming state is included, the difference between the game that reaches the upper limit number of times and the game that reaches the upper limit increase number can be reduced or reversed by the number of executions. That is, if the number of executions in the state other than the second specific game state is large, the upper limit number can be reached before the upper limit increase number is reached. By doing so, the aim of the game, such as how to shift from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to bring out the fun of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Features GA5. The specific event execution means is
The specific condition is satisfied in the first specific situation in which the total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit. Based on this, or based on the fact that the first specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, the event is different from the event based on the increase process and can be beneficial to the player. 1 First execution means capable of causing a specific event (a function of executing various special notifications based on the setting of the first excess flag by the main control device 101) and
The total of the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase / decrease number corresponding to the remaining number grasped based on the remaining number by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number. An event based on the increase process is based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the second specific situation, or based on the fact that the second specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. Various special notifications are performed based on the second execution means (the second excess flag set by the main control device 101) capable of causing a second specific event that is a different event and can be beneficial to the player. (Function to execute processing for) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA4.

In a configuration in which a plurality of termination conditions such as an upper limit number of times and an upper limit increase number are set, a first specific situation in which the upper limit number of times is exceeded and a second specific situation in which the upper limit increase number is exceeded are assumed. There may be a difference in the profit that the player cannot obtain between the specific situation and the second specific situation. Therefore, by managing these separately as in the above configuration and making the specific events that occur depending on which specific situation different, it is possible to set specific events according to the loss of profit due to these specific situations. It becomes possible to more preferably compensate the player by a specific event.

Features GA6. Whether or not the first specific event is caused by the configuration in which the advantage to the player or the degree of potential benefit to the player may differ between the first specific event and the second specific event, or the first execution means. The probability of winning the first lottery in the first lottery may differ from the probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery of whether or not the second specific event is caused by the second execution means. The gaming machine according to feature GA5, which is characterized in that it is at least one of the configurations.

Comparing the disappearance of the excess of the number of times of the second specific gaming state and the disappearance of the excess of the increase / decrease number (increase number), the degree of loss that both can give to the player may be different. The above configuration is a configuration in which the degree of loss of such a player is followed by each specific event or the likelihood of the specific event occurring, and by doing so, the player can be more preferably compensated. Is possible.

Features GA7. In the first lottery of whether or not the second specific event is an event that can be more beneficial to the player than the first specific event, or whether or not the first specific event is caused by the first execution means. The probability of winning the second lottery in the second lottery as to whether or not the second specific event is caused by the second execution means is higher than the probability of winning the first lottery. The gaming machine according to feature GA6, which is characterized in that it is at least one.

Comparing the disappearance of the excess of the number of times of the second specific gaming state and the disappearance of the excess of the increase / decrease number (increase number), it is better that the excess amount of the increase / decrease number (increase number) disappears. It is directly linked to the interests of the player, and the feeling of loss that can be given to the player can be greater in the latter (disappearance of the increased number). The above configuration is a configuration in which whether or not it is directly linked to such profits and the degree of loss due to the loss of profits are followed according to each specific event and the likelihood of the specific event occurring. It becomes possible to more preferably compensate the person.

Features GA8. A calculation means for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (a function of executing a prediction process based on the expected increase / decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main control device 101). With
The calculation means is characterized in that the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated based on the remaining number and the average value of the expected increase / decrease number expected per game in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to GA6 or the feature GA7.

According to the above configuration, the planned increase / decrease number is calculated based on the expected increase / decrease number and the remaining number of times per game. With such a configuration, it is only necessary to store the expected increase / decrease number in the second specific game state in advance, and the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

Features GA9. Calculation means for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (in the first adjustment process and the second adjustment process by the main control device 101, the prediction process based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM is performed. Has a function to execute)
The calculation means is characterized in that the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated based on the remaining number and the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of GA5 to GA8.

According to the above configuration, the planned increase / decrease number is calculated based on the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number per game and the remaining number of times. Therefore, it is only necessary to store the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number in the second specific game state in advance, and the maximum value of the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated with a relatively simple configuration.

In particular, in the above configuration, since the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease is used, the calculated increase / decrease is the maximum value, and no event occurs in which the actual increase / decrease exceeds that value. By doing so, for example, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the first specific gaming state ending earlier than planned due to exceeding the schedule.

When the above feature GA9 is applied to the feature GA8, the "calculation means" of the feature GA8 may be expressed as the "first calculation means" and the "calculation means" of the feature GA9 may be expressed as the "second calculation means". , The same "calculation means" may be configured to enable calculation based on the "average value" and the "maximum value", respectively.

Features GA10. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a transition result (first BB or second BB) that allows a transition to a transition game state in which the probability that the game medium is to be paid out by the payout means may be different from the previous state. Etc.) are provided,
The transition means for shifting the gaming state to the transition gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the transition symbol combination corresponding to the transition result is stopped at the effective position (the transition means). (Function to execute bonus state processing of the main controller 101) and
The lottery result by the lottery means is the shift result, and the shift result can be reserved until the shift pattern combination is stopped at the effective position (first BB winning flag by the main control device 101 or second BB). A function that does not clear the winning flag until the corresponding BB prize),
With
By shifting to the transition game state, at least a predetermined number of games can be executed.
It is provided with a calculation means (a function of executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for calculating the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means.
The calculation means is an average value of the number of increase / decrease in the game medium during the transition game state, the number obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the remaining number, and the expected number of increase / decrease per game in the second specific game state. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of the features GA5 to GA9, wherein the planned increase / decrease number can be calculated based on the maximum value.

When the transition to the transition game state occurs, the winning probability of the result to be paid out of the game medium is different, so that the number of increase / decrease of the game medium may be different. For example, the increase / decrease of the game medium that can be expected during the second specific game state. If the number is to be calculated, when the predetermined game is executed by adding the transition rate to the transition game state and the increase / decrease number during the transition game state to the increase / decrease number in each game in the second specific game state. It is possible to calculate the number of increase / decrease of. However, assuming that the first specific game state is forcibly terminated when the number of games in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of games, the game shifts to the transition game state. This leads to the inability to digest the number in the first specific game state, especially in the second specific game state, and simply adding the increase / decrease number in the transition game state to the increase / decrease number in the second specific game state is the predicted increase / decrease number. The result can be inaccurate. Therefore, in the above configuration, the number of games consumed in the transition game state is excluded from the number of digested games in the second specific game state, and the planned increase / decrease number is calculated. It is possible to calculate the number of increase / decrease that is easy to use in relation to the end condition.

Features GA11. A setting means (main control device) in which a setting value capable of causing a change in the increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium is provided in a plurality of stages, and a set value of one of the set values in the plurality of stages is set. It has a function to execute the setting process of the winning probability by 101).
The gaming machine according to any one of features GA1 to GA10, wherein the specific event executing means performs suggestion notification suggesting information on a set value set by the setting means as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, since the suggestion information of the set value is presented as a specific event, the player uses it as a material for determining the continuation of the game after the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number and ends. be able to. That is, if it is a suggestion notification indicating a low setting, it can be determined that the game should be ended after the end of the first specific game state, and if it is a suggestion notification indicating a high setting, the game is played even after the end of the first specific game state. It can be said that the suggestion notification of the set value is useful for the player who wants to increase the number of game media and not to decrease the game medium.

Features GA12. The gaming machine according to feature GA11, wherein the predetermined specific condition has a common probability of establishment regardless of a set value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the increase processing has a common probability of occurrence regardless of the set value. In other words, in the situation where the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is reached, the specific condition that triggers the increase process occurs with a common occurrence probability regardless of the set value, but when it occurs, the suggestion notification of the set value is performed. Become. By doing so, it is possible that the element of luck is strongly involved in the suggestion notification of the set value. Thereby, for example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience such that the higher the setting, the more likely the chance of the suggestion notification of the set value is to occur, so that the suggestion notification does not substantially occur at the low setting.

Moreover, since the probability of establishment of the specific condition is common regardless of the set value as described above, the possibility that the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number is the same regardless of the set value. It can be a thing. In other words, the probability itself that a specific situation in which the suggestion notification of the set value can be performed will be the same regardless of the set value, and the independence that the set value is not involved in regarding the occurrence rate of the suggestion notification of the set value will be further enhanced. Is possible.

Features GA13. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result.
The probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase process is performed differs depending on the type of the special result.
Features GA1 to GA12 characterized in that the higher the type of special result in which the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the above configuration, the probability when the increase processing is performed as a special result and the probability when a specific event occurs as a special result are linked. By doing so, it is possible to easily understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result. Therefore, for example, in the case of winning a special result in which the increase process is performed with a high probability in a specific situation, it is possible to raise the expectation that a specific event will occur in advance, and the player's mind can be raised. By making preparations, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to a specific event.

Features GA14. As the second specific gaming state, a plurality of types of predetermined states including a first predetermined state (attack mode) and a second predetermined state (specialized zone) different from the first predetermined state are set.
The specific condition when the increase process is performed is that even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the probability of establishment differs between the first predetermined state and the second predetermined state. Yes,
In the second specific gaming state, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the increase processing is performed, the higher the probability of establishment of the specific condition when the specific event occurs. Features The gaming machine described in GA13.

According to the above configuration, even in the same type of special result, in the configuration in which the probability that the increase processing is performed changes depending on the type (predetermined state) of the second specific gaming state, the probability when a specific event occurs is also the second specific gaming state. It changes depending on the type (predetermined state) of, and is linked with the case of increase processing. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of making it easier to understand that a specific event occurs instead of performing the increase processing based on the special result.

Features GA15. As the second specific game state, a special state (VB mode, special zone) in which the minimum number of continuous games is set is set.
A special transition means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the special state (for example, VB notification by the main control device 101) based on the establishment of a predetermined special condition in the second specific gaming state. It has a function to execute the process of setting a flag).
The specific event executing means may cause the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA14, characterized in that it is possible.

If the special state is entered during the second specific gaming state, the special state continues for the minimum number of continuous games. Therefore, the transition to the special state is based on the number of games in the second specific gaming state. It can be regarded as equivalent to the process of increasing the minimum number of continuous games. Then, it may be meaningless for the player to shift to a special state in a specific situation, or to become a specific situation by shifting to the special state. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to avoid making the above-mentioned meaningless feeling by targeting a specific event even for such a special state.

Features GA16. The specific condition when the increase process is performed can be satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result.
In the specific condition when the increase processing is performed, even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the same type of special result, the special state is more than the other state in the second specific gaming state. It is a configuration that increases the probability of establishment,
The probability that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific event occurs is also higher in the special state than in other states in the second specific gaming state.
When the specific event execution means causes the specific event when the special condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is reached by shifting to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the specific event executing means causes the specific event. The gaming machine according to feature GA15, which allows a transition to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which an increase process is likely to be performed when a transition to a special state is performed, a specific event occurs when the transition to a special state occurs in a specific situation or when the transition to a special state results in a specific situation. At that time, it is permissible to shift to a special state. Therefore, the configuration is such that a specific event is generated at the time of transition of the special state, and the specific event is allowed to occur even during the special state. In this way, by making the special state a state in which the increase process is likely to be performed and a state in which a specific event is likely to occur, it is possible to shift to the special state during the second specific gaming state. It is possible to look forward to even the situation where is approaching.

Features GA17. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition to obtain the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. The increase information corresponding to the remaining number to be increased is stored in the increase information storage means (total number of disappearing games TEG), and the processing of adding the number of games to the total number of disappearing games TEG by the main control device 101 is executed. Function to do)
The specific event executing means according to any one of the features GA1 to GA16, which is capable of causing the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation, a specific event may occur based on the increase information when the increase process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to generate a specific event as compensation for the privilege that should have been obtained by the increase processing, for example, the more the increase information is, the more likely the specific event is to occur.

Features GA18. The increase information stored in the increase information storage means is stored at least until the first specific gaming state in which the specific condition is satisfied shifts to the normal gaming state, and the increase information is stored. In the above-mentioned situation, when the specific condition is newly satisfied in the specific situation, or when the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition, the specific condition is established. The increase information corresponding to the remaining number to be increased when the increase process is performed can be added to the stored increase information and updated.
When shifting from the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state, the specific event executing means can generate the specific event based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means. The gaming machine according to the feature GA17.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in the specific situation, the increase information when the increase process is performed is accumulated respectively, and based on the total increase information, the specific event at the end of the first specific game state. Occurs. By doing so, in the configuration of the feature GA17, even if the increase information based on the establishment of each specific condition is small, it is possible to generate a specific event if the specific condition is satisfied multiple times, and the specific event can be generated. Expectations can be sustained.

In particular, if a specific situation is reached relatively early after the first specific game state (second specific game state) is reached, the number of executions of the first specific game state reaches the upper limit, or the number of increases / decreases reaches the upper limit. A game up to the point, that is, a game that can be a so-called digestion game, will be played for a long period of time. In that respect, as in the above configuration, by adopting a configuration in which a specific event can occur by accumulating a plurality of increase processes, the more games that can be the digestion game, the more likely the specific event will occur, and the game feels like a digestion game. Can be suppressed.

Features GA 19. The specific event executing means can generate the specific event each time based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the first specific gaming state is changed to the normal game by the second ending means. The gaming machine according to feature GA18, wherein the specific event can be generated based on the increase information stored in the increase information storage means based on the transition to the state.

According to the above configuration, a specific event may occur each time a specific condition is satisfied, and a specific event may occur depending on the integrated value when the increase process is performed at the end of the first specific gaming state. By doing so, the effect of not getting tired of the first specific gaming state due to the occurrence of a specific event each time, and the effect of entertaining the first specific gaming state for a long period of time by satisfying the specific condition a plurality of times. Can be enjoyed together.

Features GA20. The specific event executing means can cause the specific event based on the establishment of the specific condition during the normal gaming state after the end of the first specific gaming state in which the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA19.

According to the above configuration, it is also possible to take over the fact that the specific condition is satisfied during the second specific gaming state (first specific gaming state) as a specific event to the normal gaming state after the end of the first specific gaming state. It becomes. Since the specific event is an event different from the increase process, the second specific game state (the second specific game state) is not contrary to the significance of forcibly terminating the first specific game state by the upper limit number of times or the upper limit increase number. The event in the first specific game state) is taken over to the normal game state. By doing so, the interlocking between the second specific game state (first specific game state) and the normal game state is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

Features GA21. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition to obtain the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. A means for storing the increase information of the above in a predetermined increase information storage means (total number of disappearing games TEG) (a function of executing a process of adding the number of games to the total number of disappearing games TEG by the main control device 101).
Initialization means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing various information used during the first specific game state, at least when shifting from the first specific game state to the normal game state by the second end means. (Function to execute initialization processing by the main controller 101) and
When the initialization process is performed by the initialization means, a means for limiting the initialization of the information stored by the increasing information storage means (the total number of extinct games TEG in the main control device 101 for the normal section). A function to execute the process of storing in the area provided in the area) and
The gaming machine according to the feature GA20, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific game state is terminated when the number of executions in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number or the increase / decrease number reaches the upper limit increase number, the first specific game state is reached. Since various information used in the game is initialized, even though the first specific game state is forcibly terminated, the information in the forcibly terminated first specific game state is used again. It is possible to expect the effect of the feature GA20 while preventing the occurrence of so-called consecutive villas such as shifting to the first specific gaming state.

Features GA22. When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition to obtain the specific situation, or when the increase process is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition. A process of adding the number of games to the number of extinction preparation games EJG by the main control device 101 to store the increase information of the above in another information storage means (number of extinction preparation games EJG) different from the predetermined increase information storage means. Function to execute) and
Means for storing the increased information stored in the separate information storage means in the increased information storage means (number of extinct games by the main control device 101) at least before the initialization process is performed by the initialization means. Function to execute move processing) and
With
The information stored by the separate information storage means is subject to the initialization process by the initialization means, while the information stored by the augmented information storage means is not subject to the initialization process by the initialization means. The gaming machine according to the feature GA21.

According to the above configuration, by moving the information to the increasing information storage means that is not the target of the initialization processing before the initialization processing, it is convenient to generate a specific event by using the increasing information. Its accuracy is improved. More specifically, for example, by setting access restrictions in areas that are not the target of initialization, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that information that is not the target of initialization is also initialized during the initialization process. In such a case, the area to be initialized may be more easily accessible than the area not to be initialized. Then, by temporarily storing the increased information in another information storage means to be initialized, the convenience of the increased information is improved, and the increased information is moved to the increased information storage means during the initialization process. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event in which the increase information is initialized.

Features GA23. The specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which the total of the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number. After the specific situation is reached by performing the increase processing based on the above, or based on the establishment of the specific condition, a special event in which the increase / decrease number grasped by the second grasping means does not reach the upper limit increase number occurs. It is a possible configuration,
A means for storing the increased information stored in the other information storage means in a storage means for storing information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means (mainly) based on the occurrence of the special event. The gaming machine according to feature GA22, which comprises a function of executing redistribution processing by the control device 101).

According to the above configuration, if the specific situation can be resolved after that, the player will be greatly disadvantaged if the increase information is not treated as the remaining number. Therefore, if the increased information is temporarily stored in another information storage means and then the temporarily stored information is returned when the specific situation is resolved, the player will not be disadvantaged. Become. On top of that, by temporarily storing the information in a different information storage means different from the increase information storage means as in the above-mentioned feature GA22, the convenience and accuracy in causing a specific event by using the increase information are further improved. Can be done. In other words, assuming that the increase information is stored in the increase information storage means as it is, assuming that the access restriction is provided as described above, the increase information is released after the access restriction is canceled when the specific situation is resolved. It is necessary to move the increased information of the storage means as the remaining number, and on the other hand, by temporarily storing it in another information storage means (which is the target of initialization) where access restriction is not provided as described above, it is possible to do so. It eliminates the need for processing such as lifting access restrictions, which enhances convenience.

Features GA24. The increase process can be executed even when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation, or even when the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA23.

In the above configuration, it is clarified that even if a specific condition is satisfied in a specific situation or an increase process based on the establishment of the specific condition causes a specific situation, the increase process itself is not limited. To. However, as described above, even if the increase processing is performed in the above situation, it may be meaningless depending on the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number. By causing a specific event in such a situation, the feature GA1 Excellent effect can be expected.

Features GA25. Based on the transition of the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state, or when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state, a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Based on this, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the notification, and the specific notification means is turned off based on the transition of the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. It is equipped with a specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process to the section display fourth process by the main control device 101) to end the notification.
The specific game state notification means ends the notification by turning off the specific notification means even when the first specific game state is shifted to the normal gaming state by the second end means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GA1 to GA24.

According to the above configuration, when the normal game state is changed to the first specific game state, or when a predetermined start condition is satisfied thereafter, the notification by the specific notification means is started, the first specific game state ends, and the normal game is completed. When the state shifts, the notification also ends. That is, by confirming the presence or absence of notification by the specific notification means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state. For example, even though the first specific gaming state continues, it can be determined. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who ends the game without noticing it and the player who is seated later on the game table that has finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to enjoy the game by special notification equally.

In particular, even when the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of times or reaches the upper limit increase number and shifts to the normal game state, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so that the player is in the first specific game state. It can be clearly grasped that the above is completed, that is, the increase process is not performed even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. Then, from the configuration in which the notification of the specific notification means is strictly terminated, it is difficult to enjoy the afterglow of the end of the first specific gaming state even if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation. Become. In that respect, if the configuration is such that a specific event can be generated as in the feature GA1, even if the configuration is such that it is possible to clearly grasp that the first specific gaming state is forcibly terminated by the specific notification means, it is specified. Through the event, it is also possible to entertain the afterglow based on the establishment of specific conditions.

Features GA26. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, etc.) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery means for executing the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state (execution of the transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101). Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) to shift to the first specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the challenge mode in the process of dealing with the winning result)
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing the transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process to shift to the attack mode in the process for dealing with the winning result)
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed. In the configuration of, the first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number of sheets) is established. When,
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG, advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific game state and the increase / decrease number of the game medium increased / decreased in the first specific game state.
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the first ending means for shifting the first specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal ending condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101 is Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment) and
The first grasping means grasps the number of executions based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the number of increases / decreases has reached the upper limit increase number. Regardless of the remaining number, the second end means for shifting the first specific gaming state including the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (an advantageous section in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the process of forcibly terminating) and
An increase means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the second specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit, or the number of increases / decreases grasped by the second grasping means. And based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied. Specific event execution means (first excess by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the specific situation obtained by performing the increase process based on the above. (A function to execute each process for special notification when the flag or the second excess flag is set) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific game state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , Since the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific gaming state, is provided, the normal gaming state is shifted to the first specific gaming state, and the second specific gaming state is aimed at. The gameplay is realized on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the stage, and it will be possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest.

In these first specific game states and second specific game states, in addition to the case where the first specific game state ends based on the remaining number up to the end condition of the second specific game state, the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the maximum number of times is reached or the number of increases / decreases in the game medium reaches the maximum number of increases, the case where the first specific game state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game states is set. By continuing the first specific game state and the second specific game state endlessly, inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media exceeding the designer's expectation and the player being unable to finish the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number of times and the upper limit increase number of the first specific game state are specified as described above, the total of the current number of executions and the remaining number is the upper limit when a so-called addition such as an increase process of the second specific game state occurs. If the number of times is exceeded, or if the total of the current increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected. Expectations are extremely lowered, and the fact that the increase processing is performed is considered to be a loss, which may result in a great loss of interest in the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation that exceeds the above upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) occurs. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

The "number of increase / decrease in the number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state" is more specifically referred to as "the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state". The number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media used in the above and the number of game media used in.

Features GA27. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (attack mode in the advantageous section, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
In the normal game state, a shift lottery means for executing a shift lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific game state (a function for executing a shift lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101), and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state. (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number),
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG, advantageous section increase / decrease) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase / decrease number of the game medium increased / decreased in the predetermined game state. Number of sheets ZM) and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending condition is satisfied in the first ending means (the second processing of the section display by the main control device 101) for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
The first grasping means grasps the number of executions based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the number of increases / decreases has reached the upper limit increase number. A second termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) regardless of the remaining number. ,
An increase means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit, or the number of increases / decreases grasped by the second grasping means. And based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process based on the above, a specific event that is different from the event based on the increase process and can cause a specific event that can be beneficial to the player. Execution means (a function to execute each process for special notification in a situation where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means as long as the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a specific game state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition to the case where the game state ends based on the remaining number until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of the predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit number, and the increase / decrease number of the game medium is the upper limit. When the increase number is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the specific game states. Therefore, the specific game state continues endlessly, which exceeds the designer's expectation. Inconveniences such as an increase or the player having difficulty in finishing the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number are specified as described above, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number may exceed the upper limit number or the current state when a so-called addition such as an increase process of a specific game state occurs. If the total of the increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected, so the expectation for the occurrence of the above increase process is extremely lowered. In addition, the increase processing may be regarded as a loss, and the interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation that exceeds the above upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) occurs. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

The "number of increase / decrease in the number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state" is more specifically referred to as "the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state". The number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media used in the above and the number of game media used in.

Features GA28. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a specific game state (attack mode in the advantageous section, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
In the normal game state, a shift lottery means for executing a shift lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific game state (a function for executing a shift lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101), and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state. (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The first grasping means (the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number),
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG, advantageous section increase / decrease) for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the predetermined game state (advantageous section) including the specific game state and the increase / decrease number of the game medium increased / decreased in the predetermined game state. Number of sheets ZM) and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending condition is satisfied in the first ending means (the second processing of the section display by the main control device 101) for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
The first grasping means grasps the number of executions based on at least one of the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number and the number of increases / decreases has reached the upper limit increase number. A second termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the section display second process by the main control device 101) regardless of the remaining number. ,
An increase means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the specific game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition, and
The total of the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit, or the number of increases / decreases grasped by the second grasping means. And based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific situation where the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means has reached the upper limit increase number, or the specific condition is satisfied. Specific event execution means (first excess by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event different from the event based on the increase process based on the specific situation obtained by performing the increase process based on the above. (A function to execute each process for special notification when the flag or the second excess flag is set) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a game medium can be paid out by a payout means as long as the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, a specific game state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition to the case where the game state ends based on the remaining number until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, the number of executions of the predetermined state including the specific game state reaches the upper limit number, and the increase / decrease number of the game medium is the upper limit. When the increase number is reached, it is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the specific game states. Therefore, the specific game state continues endlessly, which exceeds the designer's expectation. Inconveniences such as an increase or the player having difficulty in finishing the game are avoided.

However, if the upper limit number and the upper limit increase number are specified as described above, the total of the current execution number and the remaining number may exceed the upper limit number or the current state when a so-called addition such as an increase process of a specific game state occurs. If the total of the increase / decrease number and the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number exceeds the upper limit increase number, no further increase can be expected, so the expectation for the occurrence of the above increase process is extremely lowered. In addition, the increase processing may be regarded as a loss, and the interest in the game may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a specific situation that exceeds the above upper limit number or the upper limit increase number or a specific situation is obtained by performing the increase process, a specific event different from the increase process (addition) occurs. I have to. By doing so, the specific event can be used as a substitute for the fact that the addition is not performed or the addition is meaningless, and the fun of each game is increased even in the above specific situation. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

The "number of increase / decrease in the number of game media increased / decreased in the specific game state" is more specifically referred to as "the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the specific game state and the specific game state". The number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media used in the above and the number of game media used in.

Further, each of the configurations shown in the features GA1 to GA25 may be applied individually or in combination to the features GA26 to GA28.

<Characteristic GB group>
Features GB1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
As a state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the high advantageous state is set.
A predetermined end condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of remaining payouts or increases in the number management configuration. Remaining number grasping means (ZG number of games remaining in advantageous section) for grasping the remaining number until the number of sheets becomes 0 or the number of payouts or the number of increased sheets reaches the set number)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the section display second process by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without satisfying the condition),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specified high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first specific condition. (A function to execute a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section games AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the section display second process by the main control device 101). When,
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the specific high advantage state is included based on the fact that the second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition, is satisfied. Based on the second specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM reaches the upper limit increase number). (A function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section) and
In the specific high advantage state, the first specific means (main control device 101 manages the remaining game) that can specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Function to execute processing) and
In the specific high advantage state, the second specific means (main control device 101 manages the remaining number of sheets) that can specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Function to execute processing) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a low-advantage state, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the specific high advantage states, and the high advantage is based on the establishment of the first specific condition and the second specific condition in the high advantage state. Since it may end with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state including the specific high advantage state is extremely increased. For a player who desires a high-advantage state, particularly a specific high-advantage state to continue for a long time, the first specific condition in the high-advantage state including the specific high-advantage state, while grasping the remaining number of the specific high-advantage state, It is considered that we want to know how soon the second specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are configured to be identifiable before the condition is satisfied, so that the player knows, for example, that the specific result is notified according to the progress of the game. It is also possible to use the desired content for playability. In particular, since the high-advantageous state can be terminated by different conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition, and each of them can be specified separately, the termination mode of the high-advantageous state is diversified. The feeling of excitement in a highly advantageous state is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably realize the feeling of excitement, the mutual relationship between the two specific conditions, and the playability utilizing the feeling of excitement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied" and "it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied" means that, for example, "the first specific condition is satisfied". , Can be specified in the game before the first specific condition is satisfied "or" It is possible to specify that the second specific condition is satisfied in the game before the second specific condition is satisfied " It is also possible to express that.

Further, the "first specific termination means" and the "second specific termination means" are, for example, "a predetermined first specific condition is satisfied regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on this, the "first specific termination means for terminating the high advantage state and shifting to the low advantage state by terminating the specific high advantage state" and "the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" Regardless of the above, the high advantage state is terminated by terminating the specific high advantage state based on the fact that the second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition, is satisfied. It may be expressed as "a second specific termination means for shifting to a low advantageous state".

Further, the "first specific condition" and the "second specific condition" include the "first specific condition set as the end condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state" and the "specific high advantageous state". It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as the end condition of the highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition".

Features GB2. When it is specified by the first specific means that the first specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied. First specific event execution means (a function of the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 to execute various special notifications in a situation where the first excess flag is set) and
When it is specified by the second specific means that the second specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the second specific condition is satisfied. Second specific event execution means (a function of the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 to execute various special notifications in a situation where the second excess flag is set) and
The gaming machine according to the feature GB1, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, not only is it specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, but also the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied based on the specific result. A first specific event or a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player may occur before. By doing so, in the configuration for grasping that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, it is meaningful to grasp the grasp before the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied. In a high advantageous state (particularly a specific high advantageous state), it is determined (specified) in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, and the first specific event or the second specific event is generated. With the addition of playability, the fun of the game is improved.

It should be noted that "a first specific event execution means capable of causing a first specific event that can be beneficial to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied" and "a first specific event that can be beneficial to the player". The "second specific event execution means capable of causing the second specific event before the second specific condition is satisfied" is "a second specific event to the player before the first specific condition is satisfied". It may be expressed as "a first privilege granting means capable of granting one privilege" or "a second privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege to a player before the second specific condition is satisfied". .. This also applies to the "specific event execution means" defined by other features and other feature groups, and conversely, the "privilege granting means" defined by other features and other feature groups is "benefit granting means". It can also be expressed as a "specific event execution means".

Features GB3. The first specific event by the first specific event execution means can be beneficial to the player as soon as the first specific condition is specified to be satisfied in the specific high advantage state (early, the first excess flag). When is set, for example, the number of times the setting value is suggested as the fifth special notification is increased, and the setting value is easily narrowed down).
The second specific event by the second specific event execution means can be beneficial to the player as soon as the second specific condition is specified to be satisfied in the specific high advantage state (early, the first excess flag). The gaming machine according to the feature GB2, which is characterized in that, for example, the number of times the setting value is suggested as the fifth special notification is increased and the setting value is easily narrowed down when is set.

According to the above configuration, in the specific high advantage state, it is confirmed (specified) that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied, and the first specific event or the first specific event occurs before the end of the high advantage state (specific high advantage state). In terms of playability such as causing a second specific event, further fun such as confirming that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied as soon as possible has been added, and a new end condition using a highly advantageous state has been added. Playability is created.

Features GB4. The first specific means can specify in advance that the first specific condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means.
The second specific means is any one of the features GB1 to GB3, which is characterized in that it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is not satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are not satisfied depending on the current remaining number, and on the premise that such a situation exists, the above characteristics By making it possible to separately specify that the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied as in GB1, for example, the first specific condition is satisfied but the second specific condition is not satisfied, or the second. It is possible to specify each situation where the specific condition is satisfied but the first specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the significance of providing a plurality of specific conditions can be further enhanced, and it can be greatly utilized for processing and production when the success or failure of each specific condition is specified in advance.

Features GB5. It may be beneficial to the player based on the fact that the first specific means specifies that the first specific condition is satisfied and that the second specific means satisfies the second specific condition. Various special notifications in a situation where the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set by the third specific event execution means (main control device 101 or display control device 81) capable of causing a third specific event. It has a function to execute the process to be performed)
After the first specific means specifies that the first specific condition is satisfied, the second specific means specifies that the second specific condition is satisfied, and the second specific means specifies that the second specific condition is satisfied. After it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, the third specific event by the third specific event execution means is specified when the first specific condition is specified to be satisfied by the first specific means. The game according to any one of the features GB1 to GB4, which is characterized in that the degree of advantage or the degree of potential benefit is different (difference in the type of the fifth special notification due to the difference between the first flag and the second flag). Machine.

According to the above configuration, the advantage of the third specific event caused by the latter, the identification that the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specific means and the identification that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specific means. The degree and the degree to which it can be beneficial vary. By doing so, in order to specify the first specific condition and the second specific condition as a plurality of forced termination conditions in advance, it is possible to incorporate in the game the game property such as which specification should be performed first. It will be possible and the fun of the game will be enhanced.

Features GB6. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the specific high advantage state.
The first specific condition is that the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Is established, the high-advantageous state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-advantageous state.
The second specific ending means is the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and each game regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media used, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and the high advantageous state is terminated to the low advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB5, which is characterized in that it is to be transferred.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the identification that the maximum number of games is reached is specified first and the specification that the maximum number of games is reached later, and that the specification that the maximum number of games is reached reaches the maximum number of games first. Comparing the case where the identification is later with the number of executions in the same high advantage state, the former is assumed to have a smaller increase / decrease number than the execution number, and so on. When is set as the forced termination condition, which identification comes first can be information that strongly reflects the game situation up to that point. Therefore, for example, as in the above-mentioned feature GB5, by making the advantage of the third specific event different depending on these specific destinations, it is possible to generate the third specific event according to the game situation up to that point. it can.

Features GB7. When the second specific means specifies that the second specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the first specific means is specified to satisfy the first specific condition, or the second specific condition is specified by the second specific means. When it is specified that the first specific condition is satisfied by the first specific means in the situation where it is specified that the first specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to grasp which of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied first. Specific grasping means (a function of the main control device 101 to perform a process of grasping the difference between the upper limit number of games and the number of games that exceed the upper limit increase number). The gaming machine according to any one of GB6.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the establishment of the first specific condition and the establishment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, when it is specified that both specific conditions are satisfied, which specific condition is satisfied first. Whether to do it is grasped by the specific grasping means. Since both specific conditions terminate the high advantage state, unless both specific conditions are satisfied in the same game, if either specific condition is satisfied, the other specific condition will not be satisfied. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by grasping which specific condition is satisfied first, it is possible to grasp the specific condition that is likely not to be satisfied, and it is adjusted to the specific condition of the side that is not satisfied. It is also possible to perform processing (such as following it).

Features GB8. The game according to feature GB7, wherein the specific grasping means can grasp the difference between a game specified when the first specific condition is satisfied and a game specified when the second specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the establishment of the first specific condition and the establishment of the second specific condition can be specified in advance, if it is specified that both specific conditions are satisfied, the game in which the specific conditions are satisfied. The difference can be grasped. As a result, for example, the first specific condition is satisfied relatively early, but the second specific condition is not easily satisfied, or vice versa, when there is a difference between the games in which both specific conditions are satisfied. The high advantage state ends without being able to fully obtain the benefits of the high advantage state specified by the specific condition on the side, and the game in which the first specific condition is satisfied and the game in which the second specific condition is satisfied are In the case of almost the same game, it is possible to receive by the end of the high advantage state, such as the end of the high advantage state after fully obtaining the benefits of the high advantage state specified by both specific conditions. While predicting the benefits (profit) that have been made, it is possible to perform processing according to the prediction.

In addition, in the configuration that "the first specific condition is satisfied based on the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaching the predetermined upper limit number of games", "the game specified that the first specific condition is satisfied". "" Is "a game in which the number of executed games in a highly advantageous state is a predetermined maximum number of games".

Features GB9. Even if it is specified in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specific means, the high advantage state is terminated without the second specific condition being satisfied due to the subsequent gaming situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB8.

According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, that is, the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific end means in the future, depending on the subsequent gaming situation, for example, Since the high advantage state may end without the second specific condition being satisfied with the end of the specific high advantage state, if the establishment of the second specific condition is preferable for the player, the subsequent gaming situation. It is not preferable for the player that the second specific condition is not satisfied due to the above, and conversely, if the establishment of the second specific condition is not preferable for the player, the second specific condition may be changed depending on the subsequent game situation. It is preferable for the player that it does not hold. That is, by leaving room for the specific result of the second specific means to change depending on the subsequent game situation, the gameability using the specific result of the second specific means is created, and the attention of the subsequent game is achieved. It is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in degree.

Features GB10. When it is specified in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specific means, and the high advantage state is terminated without the second specific condition being satisfied due to the subsequent gaming situation. In this case, a function of executing a process for performing various special notifications based on the redistribution process in the third specific event execution means (main control device 101 or display control device 81) that causes a third specific event that may be beneficial to the player. The gaming machine according to the feature GB9, which is characterized by having).

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is preferable for the player, if the high advantage state ends without the second specific condition being satisfied due to the subsequent game situation, A third specific event occurs that can be beneficial to the player. By doing so, it becomes possible to follow the feeling of loss of the player who expected that the second specific condition is satisfied by the third specific event.

Features GB11. In a specific situation in which it is specified in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specific means, the specific notification means (main control) capable of executing the specific notification including the specified by the predetermined notification means. A function for executing a process for performing a special notification that the second excess flag has been set by the device 101) is provided.
The case where the specific notification is executed in the specific situation is higher than the case where the specific notification is not executed in the specific situation without the second specific condition being satisfied due to the subsequent gaming situation. The gaming machine according to feature GB10, wherein the advantage of the third specific event when the advantageous state is terminated is set so as to be easily advantageous to the player.

On the premise that the establishment of the second specific condition is a preferable event for the player, when the specific notification that the establishment of the second specific condition is specified is executed, the player is concerned with the second specific condition. 2 Assuming that the specific conditions will be met in the future, you can fully enjoy the game until the second specific conditions are met, such as proceeding with the game while immersing yourself in a sense of superiority, or using the profits from the establishment of the second specific conditions. It is considered to be enjoyable. On the other hand, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, if the player does not know it, there is no such skin calculation, and the second specific condition is not satisfied. Even if this happens, it is considered that the degree of disappointment of the player is low. The above configuration is for eliminating the inconvenience caused by the notification that the second specific condition is satisfied (such as disappointing the player if the second specific condition is not satisfied), and the third By adjusting the advantage of a specific event, even if the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs, it becomes possible to appropriately follow it. At the same time, even if it is specified that the second specific condition is satisfied, if the specific notification is not performed, the advantage of the third specific event can be lowered, and the player can use it. It is possible to improve the soundness of the game by not setting the advantage of the game too high.

Features GB12. When it is specified by the second specific means that the second specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to cause a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player before the second specific condition is satisfied. The second specific event execution means (a function of the main control device 101 or the display control device 81 to execute various special notifications based on the setting of the second excess flag) is provided.
The advantage of the third specific event is higher when the second specific event is not generated by the second specific event execution means than when the second specific event is caused by the second specific event execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature GB 10 or the feature GB 11, characterized in that is set so as to be easily advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, when the high advantage state ends without the second specific condition being satisfied, even if the expectation that the second specific condition is satisfied is fueled before the end, the second specific event causes the expectation. Assuming that the player is able to enjoy the profit of the portion, the advantage of the third specific event is reduced. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's advantage from being unreasonably increased and to maintain the balance of the game.

Features GB13. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the specific high advantage state.
The first specific condition is that the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Is established, the high-advantageous state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-advantageous state.
The second specific ending means is the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and each game regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media used, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and the high advantageous state is terminated to the low advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features GB1 to GB12, which is characterized in that it is to be transferred.

According to the above configuration, a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set: a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and a second specific condition that the number of increase / decrease in the game medium reaches the upper limit increase number. In, whether or not the maximum number of games is reached is specified by the first specific means before reaching the maximum number of games, and whether or not the number of increases / decreases reaches the maximum number of games is before the maximum number of games is reached. It is specified by the second specific means. Since the number of increase / decrease in the game medium is increased / decreased based on the game result of each game, basically, the number of games in a high advantage state and the number of increase / decrease are linked, but the number of games depends on the game result. In some cases, the relationship between and the number of increases / decreases is not constant. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to predict the number of games and the number of increase / decrease separately, it is possible to accurately predict that the high advantage state will be forcibly terminated in the future.

Features GB14. The second specific means is obtained by the number of remaining games from the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and the average value of the expected increase / decrease number per game in the specified high advantageous state. The first predicting means for predicting the expected first expected increase / decrease number (a function of executing a prediction process based on the expected increase / decrease number KM in the remaining payout number management process by the main control device 101) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature GB13, wherein it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on a prediction result.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the average value of the expected increase / decrease per game in a specific high advantage state (that is, the average net increase) are used to predict the future increase / decrease, and the prediction is made. Based on the results, identify that the increase / decrease reaches the upper limit increase. By doing so, it is possible to predict and specify that the upper limit increase number will be reached simply by storing the above average value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

Features GB15. The second specific means is obtained by the number of remaining games from the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means and the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the specified high advantage state. Is equipped with a second predicting means (a function of executing a prediction process based on the maximum increase / decrease number MM in the first adjustment process and the second adjustment process by the main control device 101) for predicting the second expected increase / decrease number that can be expected. 2. The gaming machine according to feature GB 13 or feature GB 14, characterized in that it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on the prediction result of the prediction means.

According to the above configuration, the number of remaining games and the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease per game in a specific high advantage state (that is, the maximum net increase) are used to predict the future increase / decrease, and the prediction is made. Based on the results, identify that the increase / decrease reaches the upper limit increase. By doing so, it is possible to predict and specify that the upper limit increase number will be reached simply by storing the maximum value in advance without using complicated calculation processing.

In particular, with this configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid unexpectedly reaching the upper limit increase number. In other words, if it is the maximum value of the expected increase / decrease in each game, the increase will not be larger than that, so even though it was predicted that the upper limit increase would not be reached, the upper limit increase was reached. The event of reaching does not occur.

Features GB16. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a high advantageous state (attack mode in the advantageous section, etc.) are set.
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) to grasp the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or increase number reaches the set number)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without establishing),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section) is satisfied. The first specific end means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section games AG reaching the upper limit number of games is performed. Function to execute) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section) which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the second specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the number of advantageous sections increased / decreased ZM has reached the upper limit increase number. (A function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on),
In the highly advantageous state, the first specific means (remaining game management process by the main control device 101) that can specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Function to execute) and
In the highly advantageous state, the second specific means (remaining number management process by the main control device 101) can specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantage states. Since the process may be terminated based on the satisfaction of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantageous state is extremely increased. As a player who desires that the high advantage state continues for a long time, it is considered that he / she wants to grasp how soon the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied while grasping the remaining number of the high advantage states. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are configured to be identifiable before the condition is satisfied, so that the player knows, for example, that the specific result is notified according to the progress of the game. It is also possible to use the desired content for playability. In particular, since the high-advantageous state can be terminated by different conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition, and each of them can be specified separately, the termination mode of the high-advantageous state is diversified. The feeling of excitement in a highly advantageous state is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably realize the feeling of excitement, the mutual relationship between the two specific conditions, and the playability utilizing the feeling of excitement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "it is possible to specify in advance that the first specific condition is satisfied" and "it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition is satisfied" means that, for example, "the first specific condition is satisfied". , Can be specified in the game before the first specific condition is satisfied "or" It is possible to specify that the second specific condition is satisfied in the game before the second specific condition is satisfied " It is also possible to express that.

Further, the "first specific condition" and the "second specific condition" include the "first specific condition set as the end condition of the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state" and the "highly advantageous state". It may be expressed as "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition of a predetermined state and is different from the first specific condition".

Further, each configuration shown in the features GB1 to GB15 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GB16.

In this case, for example, in the feature GB6, "The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the highly advantageous state.
In the first specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the first specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low advantage state.
The second specific end means is a game paid out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The high advantage state is terminated when the second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of payouts of the medium and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Then, it is preferable to modify the expression such as "they shift to the low advantageous state" and the like, and the modification is also applied to the case where the corresponding other configuration is applied to the feature GB16.

<Characteristic GC group>
Features GC1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
As a state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the high advantageous state is set.
In the specific high advantage state, a predetermined end condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration In, the remaining number grasping means (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG) for grasping the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number) is established.
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the section display second process by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without satisfying the condition),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specified high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of the predetermined first specific condition. (A function to execute a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section games AG reaching the upper limit number of games in the section display second process by the main control device 101). When,
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the specific high advantage state is included based on the fact that the second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition, is satisfied. Based on the second specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM reaches the upper limit increase number). (A function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section) and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific end means, the first specific event execution means capable of causing a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player (for example, the upper limit game by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number) and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific end means, the upper limit is increased by the second specific event execution means (for example, the main control device 101) capable of causing a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player. (Function to execute the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a low-advantage state, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the specific high advantage states, and the high advantage is based on the establishment of the first specific condition and the second specific condition in the high advantage state. Since it may end with the state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state including the specific high advantage state is extremely increased. Given that the player will want the high advantage state, especially the specific high advantage state, to continue for a long time, the high advantage state is determined by the first specific condition and the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantage states. When it is finished, the player may get the impression that the remaining specific high advantage state has been exploited, and may be discouraged from continuing the game or replaying the game. Therefore, when the high advantage state is terminated based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high advantage state is forcibly forced by allowing a specific event that can be beneficial to the player to occur. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when it can be terminated.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether it is forcibly terminated by the first specific condition or the second specific condition. By doing so, it is possible to make people interested in which specific condition is forcibly terminated, and even an event in which a high advantage state is forcibly terminated can be used for a game. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The "first specific termination means" and the "second specific termination means" are, for example, "a predetermined first specific condition is satisfied regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on this, the "first specific termination means for terminating the high advantage state and shifting to the low advantage state by terminating the specific high advantage state" and "the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means" Regardless of the above, the high advantage state is terminated by terminating the specific high advantage state based on the fact that the second specific condition, which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition, is satisfied. It may be expressed as "a second specific termination means for shifting to a low advantageous state".

Further, the "first specific condition" and the "second specific condition" include the "first specific condition set as the end condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state" and the "specific high advantageous state". It may be expressed as "a second specific condition which is a condition set as the end condition of the highly advantageous state and is different from the first specific condition".

Features GC2. When the high-advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the first specific means (for example, the main control device 101) specifies the remaining number of the specific high-advantageous states until the second specific condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the process of step S13810) and
When the high-advantageous state is terminated by the second specific termination means, the second specific means (for example, the main control device 101) specifies the remaining number of the specific high-advantageous states until the first specific condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the process of step S13803) and
With
The first specific event executing means can cause the first specific event based on the specific result by the first specific means.
The gaming machine according to feature GC1, wherein the second specific event executing means can generate the second specific event based on a specific result by the second specific means.

In a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition are set, the first specific condition is satisfied and is highly advantageous unless the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied at the same time. When the state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the high advantage state ends, the first specific condition is not satisfied, and one of the specific conditions is specified. The high advantage state will be terminated without maximizing the benefits of the high advantage state specified in the conditions. The above configuration is a configuration in which such unenjoyable benefits are supplemented as a first specific event or a second specific event. By doing so, in a configuration having a plurality of forced termination conditions, any of the forced termination conditions can be obtained. It is possible to bring out the fun of the game, such as whether to end the high advantage state at.

In particular, in the configuration in which the specific high-advantage state is included in the high-advantage state, the first specific event and the second specific event are associated with the remaining number of the specific high-advantage states. It is possible to make the first specific event and the second specific event occur in consideration of the benefits that would have been enjoyed if it could be done, and the player's interest in each specific event is further increased. It becomes possible.

The "first specific means" and "second specific means" are, for example, "when the high advantageous state is terminated by the first specific end means, the remaining number until the second specific condition is satisfied. "The first specific means for specifying the remaining number to be grasped by the grasping means" and "when the high advantageous state is terminated by the second specific ending means, the remaining number is grasped until the first specific condition is satisfied." It may be expressed as "a second specific means for specifying the remaining number grasped by the means".

Features GC3. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the specific high advantage state.
The first specific condition is that the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Is established, the high-advantageous state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-advantageous state.
The second specific ending means is the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and each game regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media used, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and the high advantageous state is terminated to the low advantageous state. It ’s a transition,
The gaming machine according to feature GC2, wherein the first specific event has a higher degree of advantage or potential benefit to the player than the second specific event.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, that is, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and a second specific condition that the number of increases / decreases reaches the upper limit increase number. The first specific event that occurs when the first specific condition that reaches the maximum number of games is satisfied before reaching the maximum number of games and the second specific condition that reaches the maximum number of games are satisfied before reaching the maximum number of games. Comparing with the second specific event that occurs when the game is forcibly terminated, the first specific event has a higher advantage or a greater degree of potential benefit to the player than the second specific event. There is. That is, from the premise of the game that the game medium is paid out as a result of each game and the game medium is intended to be increased, the number of game media is further increased for the side that has reached the maximum number of games and is forcibly terminated. Although there is a sense of disappearance that it can be expected, there is also an idea that it is sufficient for the side that has reached the upper limit increase number and was forcibly terminated, even if the increase number of the game medium has reached the upper limit. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by increasing the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit number of games and decreasing the compensation on the side that has reached the upper limit increase number, the balance between both compensations (privileges) is maintained and the game is optimized. Can be planned.

Features GC4. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the specific high advantage state.
The first specific condition is that the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Is established, the high-advantageous state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-advantageous state.
The second specific ending means is the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and each game regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media used, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and the high advantageous state is terminated to the low advantageous state. It ’s a transition,
When the high-advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means or the second specific termination means, a special state (special section) advantageous to the player is set in the low-advantageous state after the end of the high-advantageous state. Equipped with settable special state setting means (function to execute special section setting processing by the main controller 101)
The first specific event executing means has a corresponding number of games in which the end condition of the special state set by the special state setting means corresponds to an increase number up to the upper limit increase number specified by the second specific means. It is possible to set the termination condition as the first specific event, which is established when the medium is paid out in the special state.
The second specific event executing means executes the end condition of the special state set by the special state setting means by the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games specified by the first specific means. The gaming machine according to the feature GC2 or the feature GC3, characterized in that the setting of the end condition can be set as the second specific event as being established when the event is established.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, that is, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and a second specific condition that the number of increases / decreases reaches the upper limit increase number. When the high advantage state ends under the forced termination condition, a special state advantageous for the player is set in the low advantage state, and as the end condition of the special state, the number of games up to the maximum number of games and the maximum number of games increased. The increased number up to is used. More specifically, when the maximum number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, the increase number up to the maximum number of games is used as the end condition of the special state, and when the maximum number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated. , The number of games up to the maximum number of games is used as the end condition of the special state. By doing so, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions in a highly advantageous state are set, a feeling of loss that the other forced termination condition could not be satisfied when terminating under one forced termination condition is felt. It can be supplemented by a special condition.

Features GC5. In the specific high advantage state, the first information notification means (the number of remaining games by the display control device 81) capable of notifying the first information corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games in the high advantage state by a predetermined notification means. Function to execute display processing) and
In the specific high advantage state, the second information notification means (remaining increase number by the display control device 81) capable of notifying the second information corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number in the high advantage state by a predetermined notification means. Function to execute display processing) and
When the corresponding number corresponding to the increase number up to the upper limit increase number is set as the end condition of the special state by the first specific event executing means, the second information notified in the specific high advantage state. A means (a function of executing the process of step S14209 by the display control device 81) capable of continuing the notification of the second information by the notification means in the special state, and
When the number of games corresponding to the number of games up to the upper limit number of games is set as the end condition of the special state by the second specific event executing means, the first information notified in the specific high advantage state. A means (a function of executing the process of step S14206 by the display control device 81) capable of continuing the notification of the first information by the notification means in the special state, and
The gaming machine according to the feature GC4, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the maximum number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, the increase number up to the maximum number of games is used for a special state, and when the maximum number of games is reached and the game is forcibly terminated, the number of games is used in a special state. In a configuration in which the number of games up to the maximum number of games is used in a special state, information corresponding to the number of increases up to the maximum number of games that was previously notified in the specific high advantage state and the maximum number of games are notified. Notification of information corresponding to the number of games up to is taken over to a special state and notified. By doing so, it is possible to make it seem as if the high advantage state (especially the specific high advantage state) continues until the forced termination condition of the side that could not be actually satisfied is satisfied. Even if it is recognized that the state has shifted to the special state, it is easy to understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition on the side that could not be satisfied in the high advantage state was taken over by the special state, and that special state. It is possible to clearly understand that the difference up to the forced termination condition is compensated for in the state.

Features GC6. When shifting from the specific high advantage state to the low advantage state, the end notification executing means (step S14203 by the display control device 81) capable of executing the end notification of the end of the specific high advantage state by a predetermined notification means. Function to execute processing) and
Pseudo-end notification executing means (display control device) capable of executing pseudo-end notification suggesting that the specific high-advantage state ends when the specific high-advantage state does not shift to the low-advantage state. 81, a function to execute a process for performing an end effect when a post-addition notification occurs) and
With
The pseudo-end notification by the pseudo-end notification executing means is configured to execute the end notification by a predetermined notification means and then execute the continuous notification to make the player recognize that the specific high advantage state continues. And
When the special state is set by the special state setting means, the pseudo continuous notification executing means (pseudo continuous notification executing means) capable of executing the continuous notification by the predetermined notification means after the end notification is executed by the end notification executing means. The gaming machine according to feature GC5, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S14205 by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the pseudo-end notification can be performed by the pseudo-end notification executing means, such that the specific high-advantage state continues by the continuous notification while making the end notification seem to end the specific high-advantage state. As a premise, even when the specific high-advantage state (high-advantage state) is forcibly terminated and shifts to the special state, the specific high-advantage state continues as if the special state continues by performing the same flow notification as the pseudo-end notification. It is possible to give the impression of being in a state of being. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the information up to the maximum number of games and the information up to the maximum increase number being taken over in a special state.

Features GC7. In the specific high advantage state, based on the establishment of the predetermined increase condition, the increase processing means (the attack mode by the main control device 101, etc.) that can execute the increase process in the specific high advantage state is added to the number of games. Function to execute) and
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently satisfied based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Or, when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase processing by the increase processing means, the excess information storage means for storing the excess information in the specific high advantage state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition ( Total number of disappearing games TEG) and
With
When the first specific condition is satisfied, the first specific termination means terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means.
When the second specific condition is satisfied, the second specific termination means terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means.
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the process of step S13708 by the third specific means (for example, the main control device 101) for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means is performed. Function to execute) and
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second specific termination means, the processing of step S13702 by the fourth specific means (for example, the main control device 101) for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means is performed. Function to execute) and
With
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on the specific result by the third specific means.
The gaming machine according to any one of features GC1 to GC6, wherein the second specific event executing means can set the second specific event based on a specific result by the fourth specific means.

In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the excess of the remaining number of the specified high advantage state is stored as excess information, and then the first When the specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, until the specific situation in which the first specific condition or the second specific condition is specified is satisfied, it is desired that the increase process in which the remaining number of the specific high advantage states is increased as much as possible, but in the specific situation, the game is played. Those who have no choice but to feel that it is meaningless even if the increase processing is performed, and there is a concern that the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced. Therefore, by using the excess amount in the specific high advantage state and making a configuration in which a specific event can occur at the end of the high advantage state, it becomes possible to make a meaning for increasing the excess amount, and the game It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation.

When the above configuration is applied to the features GC2 to the feature GC6, the "first specific event execution means" and the "first specific event" in the above configuration and the "first specific event execution means" and the "first specific event execution means" of the features GC2 to GC6 are used. The "first specific event" may be the same or different. If they are different, in order to clearly distinguish them, the "first specific event execution means" and "first specific event" in the above configuration are referred to as "third specific event execution means" and "third specific event", respectively. May be expressed as. Further, even if the "second specific event execution means" or "second specific event" in the above configuration is the same as the "second specific event execution means" or "second specific event" of the features GC2 to GC6. It may or may not be different. If they are different, in order to clearly distinguish them, the "second specific event execution means" and "second specific event" in the above configuration are referred to as "fourth specific event execution means" and "fourth specific event", respectively. May be expressed as.

Features GC8. The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the specific high advantage state.
The first specific condition is that the number of executed games in the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Is established, the high-advantageous state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low-advantageous state.
The second specific ending means is the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and each game regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference from the number of used game media used, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, and the high advantageous state is terminated to the low advantageous state. It ’s a transition,
The excess information storage means
The first storage means for storing the information on the number of games corresponding to the increase processing as the excess information (the number of games added to the total number of disappearing games TEG when the first excess flag by the main control device 101 is set is added. Function to execute processing) and
A second storage means (a total extinction game when the second excess flag by the main control device 101 is set) that stores information on the increase number of game media that can be expected in the number of games corresponding to the increase process as the excess information. (A function to execute the process of adding the number of games to the number TEG) and
With
The third specific means identifies the excess information of the number of games stored in the first storage means.
The gaming machine according to feature GC7, wherein the fourth specific means specifies excess information of the increased number stored in the second storage means.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, that is, a first specific condition that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games and a second specific condition that the number of increases / decreases reaches the upper limit increase number. If the establishment of the forced termination condition of is specified in advance, and if the increase processing is performed as the so-called addition processing after the specification, the excess amount corresponding to the increase processing is the excess information of the number of games, respectively. It is stored as excess information of the increased number. Then, when it is forcibly terminated, a specific event occurs based on these excess information, and when it is forcibly terminated with the maximum number of games, a specific event occurs based on the excess information of the number of games. If it occurs and is forcibly terminated at the upper limit increase number, a specific event will occur based on the excess information of the increase number. By doing so, the benefits that would have been received if the player was not forcibly terminated are linked to the reason for the forced termination, and it is possible to appropriately follow the feeling of loss of the player due to the forced termination.

Features GC9. In the specific high advantage state, based on the establishment of the predetermined increase condition, the increase processing means (the attack mode by the main control device 101, etc.) that can execute the increase process in the specific high advantage state is added to the number of games. Function to execute) and
When the increase condition is satisfied in a specific situation in which it is specified that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is subsequently satisfied based on the current remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. Or, when the specific situation is reached by performing the increase processing by the increase processing means, excess information storage for storing the excess information of the specific high advantage state corresponding to the increase processing based on the establishment of the increase condition. Means (total number of extinct games TEG) and
With
When the first specific condition is satisfied, the first specific termination means terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means.
When the second specific condition is satisfied, the second specific termination means terminates the highly advantageous state regardless of the excess information stored in the excess information storage means.
When the high-advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the first specific means (step S13810 by the main control device 101) for specifying the remaining number of the specific high-advantageous states until the second specific condition is satisfied. (Function to take care of the processing) and
When the high advantageous state is terminated by the second specific termination means, the second specific means (step S13803 by the main control device 101) for specifying the remaining number of the specific high advantageous states until the first specific condition is satisfied. (Function to execute the processing of) and
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the process of step S13809 by the third specific means (main control device 101) for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means is executed. Function) and
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the second specific termination means, the process of step S13802 by the fourth specific means (main control device 101) for specifying the excess information stored in the excess information storage means is executed. Function) and
With
The first specific event executing means can set the first specific event based on the specific result by the first specific means and the specific result by the third specific means.
Any of the features GC1 to GC8, wherein the second specific event executing means can set the second specific event based on the specific result by the second specific means and the specific result by the fourth specific means. The gaming machine according to 1.

In the above configuration, when it is specified in advance that the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, the excess amount of the remaining number is stored as excess information, and then the first specific condition or the second specific condition is stored. When the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state ends regardless of the excess information. Then, until the specific situation in which the first specific condition or the second specific condition is specified is satisfied, it is desired that the increase process in which the remaining number of the specific high advantage states is increased as much as possible, but in the specific situation, the game is played. Those who have no choice but to feel that it is meaningless even if the increase processing is performed, and there is a concern that the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced. Therefore, by using the excess amount to cause a specific event at the end of the specific high advantage state (high advantage state), it becomes possible to give significance to increasing the excess amount. It is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

However, in a configuration in which a plurality of forced termination conditions such as the first specific condition and the second specific condition and the second specific condition are set, the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied at the same time. Unless the first specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the second specific condition is not satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the high advantageous state ends, the first The specific condition is not satisfied, and the high advantage state ends without fully enjoying the benefits of the high advantage state specified in any of the specific conditions. That is, for example, in the case of forced termination under the first specific condition, if a specific event is generated based on the excess amount on the first specific condition side, the player's feeling of loss can be alleviated to some extent. For the player who expected the benefit of the second specific condition side, if the player is forcibly terminated under the first specific condition, he / she may feel unsatisfied because he / she could not receive the benefit sufficiently.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in addition to the excess amount of the side that was forced to end at the time of forced termination, the benefit of the side that did not reach the forced termination is taken into consideration to cause a specific event. By doing so, in a gaming machine in which a plurality of forced termination conditions are set, it is possible to more preferably follow the feeling of loss at the time of forced termination.

Features GC10. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a high advantageous state (for example, attack mode in the advantageous section) are set.
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) to grasp the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or increase number reaches the set number)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without establishing),
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state is terminated based on the fact that the predetermined first specific condition (reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section) is satisfied. The first specific end means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section games AG reaching the upper limit number of games is performed. Function to execute) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the second specific condition (reaching the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section) which is a predetermined condition and is different from the first specific condition is satisfied. Based on the above, the second specific end means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the number of advantageous sections increased / decreased ZM has reached the upper limit increase number. (A function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on),
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific end means, the first specific event execution means capable of causing a first specific event that may be beneficial to the player (for example, the upper limit game by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number) and
When the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific end means, the upper limit is increased by the second specific event execution means (for example, the main control device 101) capable of causing a second specific event that may be beneficial to the player. (Function to execute the sixth special notification process when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantage states. Since the process may be terminated based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition in the high advantageous state, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantageous state is extremely increased. Given that the player will want the high-advantage state to continue for a long time, if the high-advantage state ends due to the first specific condition or the second specific condition regardless of the remaining number of the high-advantage state, the game The person may get the impression that the remaining high-advantageous state has been exploited, and may be discouraged from continuing the game or replaying the game. Therefore, when the high advantage state is terminated based on the establishment of the first specific condition or the second specific condition, such a high advantage state is forcibly forced by allowing a specific event that can be beneficial to the player to occur. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when it can be terminated.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs differs depending on whether it is forcibly terminated by the first specific condition or the second specific condition. By doing so, it is possible to make people interested in which specific condition is forcibly terminated, and even an event in which a high advantage state is forcibly terminated can be used for a game. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the "first specific condition" and "second specific condition" include "the first specific condition set as the end condition of the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state" and "the highly advantageous state". It may be expressed as "a second specific condition that is set as an end condition of a predetermined state (advantageous section) and is different from the first specific condition".

Further, each configuration shown in the features GC1 to GC9 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GC10.

In this case, for example, in the feature GC3, "The remaining number grasping means grasps the remaining number of games as the remaining number in the highly advantageous state.
In the first specific ending means, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the number of executed games in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games. As the first specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state is terminated and the state is shifted to the low advantage state.
The second specific ending means is a game paid out according to the game result of each game in a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantageous state, regardless of the number of remaining games grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The high advantage state is terminated when the second specific condition is satisfied when the increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of payouts of the medium and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Then, it shifts to the low advantageous state.
It is preferable to apply after correcting the expression such as "The first specific event has a higher advantage or a greater possibility of being beneficial to the player than the second specific event." The same applies to the case where the configuration of is applied to the feature GC10.

<Characteristic GD group>
Features GD1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
As a state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the high advantageous state is set.
A payout means (payout device 53) that pays out the game medium according to the result of each game, and
In the specific high advantage state, a predetermined end condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number management configuration In, the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number) is stored in the predetermined remaining number area. Remaining number information storage means (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG),
A remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function of executing the section display second processing by the main control device 101).
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the section display second process by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without satisfying the condition),
The increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Based on the fact that the first specific condition including the above is satisfied, regardless of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means, the high advantageous state including the specified high advantageous state is terminated and the said First specific termination means for shifting to a low advantageous state (in the second processing of section display by the main control device 101, a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number is executed. Function to do) and
An increase processing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process of the specific high advantage state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined increase condition, and
An expected increase / decrease number grasping means (a function of executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for grasping the expected increase / decrease number of the game medium that can be expected when the game of the increase due to the increase process is digested.
When the sum of the expected increase / decrease number and the increase / decrease number up to that point exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess amount is transmitted to the excess area different from the remaining number area (disappearance preparation game). Excess storage means (a function of executing the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101) to be stored in the number EJG), and
When the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes the specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means, the excess information is stored in the excess area. If so, a specific storage means (a function of executing redistribution processing by the main control device 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as remaining number information, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a low-advantage state, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specified high-advantage state is limited to the case where it ends based on the remaining number of the specified high-advantage states and the number of increase / decrease in the number of game media paid out in the high-advantage state including the specified high-advantage state. Since it may end based on reaching the increased number, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state, particularly the specific high advantage state, is extremely increased. In the specific high advantage state, a so-called addition such as an increase process may occur based on the establishment of the increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, a game medium that can be expected when the game of the increase of the increase process is digested. When the expected increase / decrease number and the increase / decrease number up to that point exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. Is stored in different excess areas. By storing the excess information in an area different from the area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored in this way, the game playability using the excess amount (information stored in the excess area) is used. This can be used to simplify the processing configuration in order to improve the interest of a highly advantageous state in which the upper limit of the number of increases is set.

In addition, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, even if the specific high advantage state stored in the remaining number area is exhausted, the high advantage state is achieved. It is possible that the number of increase / decrease in the number does not reach the upper limit increase number. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area. By doing so, while suppressing the occurrence of loss of the player due to the processing error as described above, even though the increase processing has been performed, the specific high advantage state can be implemented accordingly. It is possible to preferably avoid the event that is restricted.

The "remaining number information" and "excess information" can also be expressed as, for example, "first information" and "second information". In this case, the "remaining number information storage means", "excess information storage means", "remaining number area" and "excess area" are also "first information storage means", "second information storage means", and "first area". Or "second area", and the expression may be modified as appropriate for other configurations. Such modifications are also applicable to other features and corresponding locations in other feature groups.

Further, regarding the "specific storage means", when "the remaining number corresponding to the excess information is stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area", "the excess amount stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area" is used. With the configuration of "erasing information from the excess information storage means", it is more clearly understood that the "excess information" is temporarily stored in the "excess area". Regarding the "specific storage means", "the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes the specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means, and is described above. When the excess information is stored in the excess area, it may be expressed as "means capable of executing a movement process for moving the remaining number corresponding to the excess information to the remaining number area as the remaining number information". Such modifications can also be applied to other features and corresponding locations in other feature groups.

Features GD2. The gaming machine according to feature GD1, wherein when the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted.

According to the above configuration, the excess information stored in the excess area is erased when the upper limit increase number is reached and the process ends, so that the excess area to be erased and the excess area are always used during the specified high advantage state. Since the remaining number area is different from the remaining number area, it is necessary to prevent the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase number is not reached, and reduce the risk suffered by the player due to the error. Is possible.

Features GD3. The remaining number stored by the remaining number information storage means based on the fact that the second specific condition including the fact that the number of games executed in the high advantageous state has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games is satisfied. Regardless of the information, the number of advantageous section games in the second specific end means (second process of section display by the main control device 101) for terminating the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state. A function that executes the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the fact that the AG has reached the maximum number of games)
In the specific high advantage state, it is possible to specify in advance that the second specific condition of the high advantage state including the specific high advantage state is satisfied based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means. The second specific means (a function of executing the remaining game number management process by the main control device 101) and
With
Even when the high advantage state is terminated by the second specific termination means, the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted.
Based on the fact that the second specific condition is satisfied by the second specific means, it is specified that the upper limit number of games is exceeded among the remaining number corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area. Definite information storage means for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games as definite information in the remaining number area and a definite area different from the excess area (a function of executing the disappearance game number movement process by the main control device 101). GD1 or the gaming machine according to the feature GD2.

The number of increase / decrease fluctuates depending on the result of the game, and even if the excess information is stored in order to reach the upper limit increase number, the upper limit increase number may not be reached. Assuming such a case, the excess information is re-stored as the remaining number information. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the number of games reaches the maximum number of games and is forcibly terminated, if it is specified in advance that the maximum number of games will be reached, the maximum number of games will be reached rather than reaching the maximum number of games. Even if the high advantage state ends before, it is unlikely that the high advantage state will continue beyond the maximum number of games. That is, it is considered that the event of re-memorizing the amount exceeding the upper limit number of games in the remaining number area does not occur depending on the subsequent game situation. Therefore, in the above configuration, the portion exceeding the upper limit number of games is stored in the fixed area as disappearance information, so that the remaining number area that stores the remaining number information that is always used in the high advantageous state exceeds the remaining number area. Each area is used, that is, an excess area that temporarily stores excess information that is likely to be exceeded, and a confirmation area that stores confirmation information that is determined to be exceeded. In this way, by storing common information such as information on the remaining number in the specific high advantage state by dividing it into different areas, it is possible to anticipate simplification of the processing configuration in the high advantage state, prevention of errors, and the like. It will be possible.

The "confirmed information" can be expressed as, for example, "third information", and in this case, the "confirmed information storage means" and the "confirmed area" are also the "third information storage means" and the "third information storage means". It is advisable to express it as "area" and modify the expression as appropriate for other configurations.

Further, regarding the "determined information storage means", "the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games is stored as definite information in the remaining number area and the definite area different from the excess area. In the case of ", if the configuration is such that" the excess information stored in the confirmation area as the confirmation information is deleted from the excess information storage means ", the" excess information "is temporarily stored in the" excess area ". Is more clearly understood. Regarding the "determined information storage means", "the remaining number corresponding to the excess information stored in the excess area based on the fact that the second specific condition is specified to be satisfied by the second specific means". Among them, a means capable of executing a movement process of moving the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games to the remaining number area and a fixed area different from the excess area as definite information. " It may be expressed.

Features GD4. When the high advantage state is terminated, an initialization means capable of executing an initialization process for initializing various information used in the high advantage state (initialization process is executed in the section display second process by the main controller 101). Function to do)
The feature GD3 is characterized in that the remaining number region and the excess region are subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means, while the definite region is not subject to the initialization processing by the initialization means. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area and the excess information stored in the excess area are initialized at the end of the high advantage state, while the definite information stored in the definite area is initialized. Since it is not a target, the confirmed information can be inherited until after the end of the high advantage state. That is, as described in the feature GD2, since the definite information is the remaining number of information that cannot be used during the high advantage state, it is not necessary to be the target of the initialization process at the end of the high advantage state. It is considered that this does not go against the significance of the chemical treatment. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the definite information is taken over from the high advantage state to the low advantage state and used for the game production in the low advantage state, so that the game progress in the high advantage state and the low advantage state is optimized. Can be planned.

Features GD5. The definite information storage means is stored in the remaining number area when the second specific condition is specified by the second specific means and the excess information is not stored in the excess area. Among the remaining numbers, the remaining number corresponding to the excess number of games specified to exceed the upper limit number of games is stored as definite information in the remaining number area and a definite area different from the excess area. The gaming machine according to the feature GD3 or the feature GD4.

According to the above configuration, if the excess information is not stored at the time when it is predicted that the maximum number of games will be reached, the remaining number corresponding to the excess games from the remaining number information of the first information is used as the definite information. Be remembered. In other words, when it is predicted that the maximum number of games will be reached, it may be predicted that the number of increase / decrease will reach the maximum number of increase before that, or it may not be predicted. The above configuration defines the storage of definite information in unpredictable situations. With such a configuration, the significance of existence of the definite area is clarified, so that the excess area for storing the excess information is a temporary storage area before the definite information is stored in the definite area. It is clarified, and it becomes possible to further emphasize the merit of temporarily storing in the excess area described in the feature GD1.

Features GD6. The definite information stored in the definite area by the definite information storage means is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area or based on the excess information stored in the excess area. The gaming machine according to the feature GD5, which is provided with a discriminating means (a function of executing a process of determining the presence / absence of a second excess flag by the main control device 101) capable of discriminating between the two.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of roots such as the remaining number information of the remaining number area and the excess information of the excess area exist as the roots of the confirmed information stored in the fixed area, the roots of the confirmed information are determined by the discriminating means. Since it becomes possible to discriminate after the fact, for example, the definite information having the roots of the remaining number information and the definite information having the roots of the excess information are treated differently (different benefits are given or the advantages are different). It is possible to realize playability by utilizing the difference in roots (such as causing an event).

Features GD7. The first process is executed based on the determination by the determination means that the confirmation information stored in the confirmation area is based on the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area. The first processing execution means (a function of executing the processing for the sixth special notification based on the total number of extinct games TEG when the second excess flag by the main control device 101 is not set) and
The first process is different from the first process based on the fact that the determination means stored in the determination area is determined to be based on the excess information stored in the excess area. 2 The second process execution means for executing the process (the function of executing the process for the sixth special notification based on the total number of extinct games TEG when the second excess flag is set by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to the feature GD6, which is characterized by having.

The above configuration is a specific configuration for clarifying the function of the feature GD6.

Features GD8. The case where the first process is performed by the first process execution means is set so as to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the second process is performed by the second process execution means. The gaming machine according to the feature GD7, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, when it is stored as excess information and then stored as definite information, it is predicted that the number of increase / decrease will reach the upper limit increase number and then the upper limit number of games will be reached. When this is done and the remaining number information is stored as definite information as it is without being stored as excess information, the maximum number of games is reached before the prediction that the maximum increase number will be reached. This is the case when a prediction is made. In other words, in a high advantage state, especially in a specific high advantage state, it is easy to predict that the upper limit increase number will be reached even with the same number of remaining games as in the situation where a large number of games are paid out with a small number of games, in other words, a high advantage state (specific). The smaller the payout in the high advantage state), the easier it is to predict that the maximum number of games will be reached before the prediction that the maximum number of games will be reached. Moreover, if it is predicted that the maximum number of games will be reached before the prediction that the maximum number of games will be reached, there is a high possibility that the maximum number of games will be reached without reaching the maximum number of games. Therefore, as in the above configuration, when the processing (first processing) when the upper limit game number is predicted to be reached before the prediction that the upper limit increase number is reached reaches the upper limit increase number, By making it easier for the player to be more advantageous than the processing (second processing) when it is predicted that the maximum number of games will be reached after the prediction of It may be possible to compensate for the difference in the number of media by the difference in the degree of advantage.

Features GD9. In the specific high advantage state, an increase means capable of executing the increase process of the specific high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition (a function of executing the game number addition process by the main controller 101) When,
The first increase notification means (a function of executing the process for additional notification by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81) that can execute the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing performed by the predetermined notification means). When,
When the specific storage means stores the remaining number information in the remaining number area based on the excess information stored in the excess area, the increase notification can be executed by a predetermined notification means. Second increase notification means (function of executing the process of step S14317 by the main control device 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of GD1 to GD8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the so-called additional notification is set, such that the increase processing is performed when the increase condition is satisfied and the increase notification is generated, the upper limit increase number is temporarily exceeded. Although it is stored as information, if the remaining number information becomes specific information before the upper limit increase number is reached, the increase notification is generated along with the re-storage of the remaining number information in the remaining number area. By doing so, for example, when the notification corresponding to the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area (for example, the notification of the remaining number of games) is performed, the remaining number information is re-stored. It is possible to resolve the inconsistency in notification with a configuration that does not give a feeling of strangeness.

Features GD10. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a high advantageous state (among the advantageous sections, for example, attack mode) are set.
A payout means (payout device 53) that pays out the game medium according to the result of each game, and
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The remaining number of sheets to be paid out or increased to 0, or the remaining number of sheets to be paid out or increased to reach the set number of sheets) is stored in the predetermined remaining number area. Information storage means (number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG) and
A remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means (for example, a function of executing the section display second processing by the main control device 101).
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without establishing),
The increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game, is calculated in advance. Based on the fact that the first specific condition including the fact that the determined upper limit increase number is satisfied, the high advantage state is terminated regardless of the remaining number information stored by the remaining number information storage means. The first specific end means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number is performed. Function to execute) and
An increase processing means (a function of executing the process of adding the number of games by the main control device 101) capable of executing the increase process in the highly advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined increase condition, and
An expected increase / decrease number grasping means (a function of executing the remaining number management process by the main control device 101) for grasping the expected increase / decrease number of the game medium that can be expected when the game of the increase due to the increase process is digested.
When the sum of the expected increase / decrease number and the increase / decrease number up to that point exceeds the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess amount is transmitted to the excess area different from the remaining number area (disappearance preparation game). Excess storage means (a function of executing the process of step S14407 by the main control device 101) to be stored in the number EJG), and
With
When the high advantage state is terminated by the first specific termination means, the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted.
When the remaining number information stored in the remaining number area becomes the specific information corresponding to the specific number that triggers the termination process by the normal termination means, the excess information is stored in the excess area. If so, a specific storage means (a function of executing redistribution processing by the main control device 101) for storing the remaining number corresponding to the excess information in the remaining number area as remaining number information, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantage states. Since the number of increase / decrease in the game medium paid out in the predetermined state including the high advantage state may end based on reaching the upper limit increase number, the advantage of the high advantage state may be extremely increased. It is suppressed. In a high advantage state, a so-called addition such as an increase process may occur based on the establishment of the increase condition, and when the increase process is performed, the game medium that can be expected when the game of the increase of the increase process is digested. When the expected increase / decrease number and the increase / decrease number up to that point exceed the upper limit increase number, the excess information of the remaining number corresponding to the excess is the remaining number area in which the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored. Stored in different excess areas. By storing the excess information in an area different from the area where the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number is stored in this way, the game playability using the excess amount (information stored in the excess area) is used. This can be used to simplify the processing configuration in order to improve the interest of a highly advantageous state in which the upper limit of the number of increases is set. Moreover, the excess information stored in the excess area is deleted when the upper limit increase number is reached and the process ends. By using the above configuration, the excess area to be erased and the excess area in a highly advantageous state can be found. Since the remaining number area that is always used is a separate area, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing errors such as erasing when the upper limit increase number is not reached, and reduce the risk that the player suffers from the error. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, when excess information is stored in such an excess area, depending on the progress of each game, the number of game media may increase or decrease even if the high advantage state stored in the remaining number area is exhausted. It is possible that the number does not reach the upper limit increase. Therefore, in such a case, the excess information stored in the excess area is re-stored as the remaining number information in the remaining number area. By doing so, while suppressing the occurrence of loss of the player due to the processing error as described above, the implementation of the highly advantageous state is restricted even though the increase processing has been performed. It is possible to preferably avoid the event that the error occurs.

In addition, each configuration shown in the features GD1 to GD9 may be applied individually or in combination to the above feature GD10.

<Characteristic GE group>
Features GE1. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) and a high advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low are set.
As a state included in the high advantageous state, a specific high advantageous state (for example, attack mode) having a higher advantage for the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the high advantageous state is set.
A predetermined end condition of the specific high advantage state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of remaining payouts or increases in the number management configuration. Remaining number grasping means (ZG number of games remaining in advantageous section) for grasping the remaining number until the number of sheets becomes 0 or the number of payouts or the number of increased sheets reaches the set number)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the specific high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination in the section display second process by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without satisfying the condition),
The number of remaining games corresponding to the remaining number counter HG for display by the remaining number notification means (display control device 81) that can notify the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means by a predetermined notification means. (Function to execute processing for notification) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets). Then, the specific end means for shifting to the low advantageous state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM reaching the upper limit increase number is performed. Function to execute) and
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the specific termination means, the processing of step S14803 by the notification remaining number grasping means (for example, the main control device 101) for grasping the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notifying means is executed. Function to do) and
A function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main control device 101 (for example, a function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event that may be beneficial to the player based on the grasp result by the notification remaining number grasping means. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a low-advantage state, and the high-advantage state includes a specific high-advantage state in which the advantage for the player is further higher. In the included configuration, the specific high-advantage state may end based on the remaining number of the specific high-advantage states, or may end based on the satisfaction of the specific conditions. It is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. When the specific condition is satisfied, the high advantage state is terminated regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantage state, but when the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is satisfied and terminated. There is a concern that the player may be given the impression that the remaining number that has been notified is intentionally extinguished and that it is exploited, resulting in a decrease in motivation for playing. However, if the configuration is such that the high advantage state is terminated after waiting for the remaining number to be notified to be exhausted, the significance of setting the forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and the remaining number is notified. Even if it is not done, it cannot meet the needs of players who will be highly interested in the continuity of high advantage. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the configuration is such that the high advantage state is terminated when a specific condition is satisfied regardless of the presence or absence of notification, and then a specific event is generated according to the remaining number of the notified portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a game machine that meets the diverse needs of the player.

The "specific condition" may be expressed as "a specific condition set as an end condition of the high advantageous state including the specific high advantageous state".

Features GE2. A payout means (payout device 53) for paying out the game medium according to the result of each game is provided.
In the specific condition, the number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, is predetermined. It is established based on reaching the upper limit increase number,
The gaming machine according to feature GE1, wherein the specific event executing means can present information that may be useful to the player as the specific event.

According to the above configuration, from the premise of the gaming machine that the game medium is paid out as a result of playing the game and the game medium is expected to increase, the increase / decrease number of the game medium does not reach the upper limit increase number. It can be said that it is the ultimate goal of high advantage. That is, even if the game is terminated by the specific end means regardless of the remaining number of the specific high advantage state in the high advantage state, if the increase / decrease number of the game medium reaches the upper limit increase number, the target of the high advantage state is reached. There is also the idea that the player will be fully satisfied even if the high advantage state is terminated without exhausting the remaining number that has been notified. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the specific event that occurs based on the remaining number that has been notified is limited to the presentation of information that can be useful to the player, and the advantage is excessively increased by causing such a specific event. It is possible to prevent it.

Features GE3. The remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of games that can be executed in the specific high advantage state.
The gaming machine according to feature GE2, wherein the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means corresponds to the number of games.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature GE2 is further clarified. That is, the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state, and when the increase / decrease number of the game medium in the high advantage state reaches the upper limit increase number, The high advantage state is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the specific high advantage state. Then, the specific event executing means executes the presentation of information that may be useful to the player as a specific event based on the information corresponding to the number of remaining games notified at the time of the forced termination. By clarifying in this way, the structure of the feature GE1 that compensates for the contradiction between the purpose of the game and the notification in the game, that the game medium is expected to increase as a result of the game of each game, with a specific event, and It is more clearly understood that the balance is maintained.

Features GE4. Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the specific situation grasping means (main control device 101 executes the remaining number management process) capable of grasping that the specific condition is a specific situation that is subsequently satisfied. Function) and
The specific situation notification means (eighth special notification by the main control device 101) that can execute the specific situation notification corresponding to the fact that the specific situation is grasped by the specific situation grasping means by the predetermined notification means is performed. (Function to execute processing for) and
The gaming machine according to any one of GE1 to GE3.

According to the above configuration, when a specific situation such as a specific condition is likely to be satisfied after the fact, the specific situation notification is performed by a predetermined notification means, so that the player is in the specific situation. It becomes possible to grasp that a specific event occurs when a specific condition is satisfied based on the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means. Then, for example, if the configuration is such that the more the remaining number corresponding to the reported remaining number information is, the more advantageous the specific event occurs, when the specific situation notification is performed, the player is notified of the remaining number. It is thought that it will be desired that a specific condition is satisfied without digesting the remaining number corresponding to the numerical information as much as possible. By doing so, after a specific situation is reached, the fun of the game until the specific condition is satisfied is added, and the interest of the game is improved, instead of simply digesting the remaining number until the specific condition is satisfied.

Features GE5. A payout means (payout device 53) for paying out the game medium according to the result of each game is provided.
In the specific condition, the number of increase / decrease, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the highly advantageous state and the number of game media used in each game, is predetermined. It is established based on reaching the upper limit increase number,
As a result of each game in the high advantageous state, the first result (for example, the strong cherry role in which three medals are paid out) in which the first number of game media can be paid out, and more than the first number. The gaming machine according to feature GE4, characterized in that a second result (for example, a bell role in which nine medals are paid out) and a second result (for example, a bell role in which nine medals are paid out) can be paid out of a second number of game media.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is established when the increase / decrease number of the game medium in the high advantage state reaches the upper limit increase number. Therefore, the specific condition is established as soon as possible after the specific situation notification is performed. If the goal is to establish the above, it is considered that the game is played while expecting that the result of the game will be the second result with a large number of payouts. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game after a specific situation is reached.

Features GE6. It is more advantageous for the player that the specific event executing means corresponds to the remaining number in which the remaining number information is notified by the remaining number notification means when the high advantageous state is terminated by the specific ending means. The gaming machine according to feature GE4 or feature GE5, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to establish the specific condition as soon as possible after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation is notified. By doing so, it is possible to switch the player's feelings of not wanting to end the high advantage state to the completely opposite goal of wanting to end the high advantage state early. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the playability in a highly advantageous state in which a forced termination condition such as a specific condition is set.

Features GE7. It is more advantageous for the player that the specific event executing means corresponds to the remaining number in which the remaining number information is not notified by the remaining number notification means when the high advantageous state is terminated by the specific ending means. The gaming machine according to feature GE4 or feature GE5, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of causing a specific event.

According to the above configuration, it is advantageous to delay the establishment of the specific condition as much as possible after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation is notified. By doing so, the high-advantageous state can be enjoyed to the end, and the playability in the high-advantageous state in which the forced termination condition such as a specific condition is set can be suitably enhanced.

Features GE8. The specific event executing means is so when the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means is the notification corresponding to a predetermined special number when the high advantageous state is terminated by the specific ending means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature GE4 to feature GE7, which is characterized in that it has a configuration capable of causing a specific event that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where it is not.

According to the above configuration, after the specific situation is reached and the specific situation notification is performed, if the specific condition is satisfied in the situation where the remaining number corresponding to the remaining number notification is a special number, it is more advantageous than in the case where it is not. That is, for example, if the special number is a good number, it is advantageous to forcibly terminate the number in a situation where the good number is notified. By doing so, in the game from the time when the specific situation is reached until the specific condition is satisfied, the player adjusts the game operation so that the specific condition is satisfied with a special number as much as possible, and wishes for it. It is considered that the game progresses, and the playability under the specific situation can be significantly improved.

Features GE9. In the specific high advantage state, an increase means capable of executing the increase process of the specific high advantage state based on the establishment of a predetermined increase condition (a function of executing the game number addition process by the main controller 101) When,
An increase notification means (a function of executing an additional notification process by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing performed by a predetermined notification means, and
A specific means (for example,) capable of specifying whether or not the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition based on the increase processing performed by the increasing means. , The function of executing the process of step S13301 by the main controller 101)
The gaming machine according to any one of GE1 to GE8.

According to the above configuration, when the increase process as a so-called addition process for increasing the remaining number of the specific high advantage state is performed, whether or not the specific condition as the forced termination condition of the high advantage state is satisfied by the increase process. Be identified. By doing so, if the high advantage state is forcibly terminated anyway, the notification based on the increase processing is not performed, or the increase processing is not reflected in the notification of the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means. It is possible to prevent the player from being overjoyed, and it is possible to reduce the chance of a specific event occurring at the time of forced termination by the specific termination means as much as possible. In addition, assuming that a specific event occurs at the time of forced termination by the specific termination means, if it is specified that the specific condition is satisfied by the increase processing as described above, the specific event will occur due to the forced termination. It is also possible to make a notification that expects the above, and it is possible to break away from the playability of simply increasing the remaining number and to use it for the creation of new playability.

Features GE10. The gaming machine according to feature GE9, wherein the increase notification means can adjust an increase in the remaining number to be notified based on the increase process according to a specific result of the specific means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to adjust the increase amount to be notified based on the increase process depending on the success or failure of the forced termination condition such as the specific condition. Therefore, for example, the increase amount until the specific condition is satisfied is notified while being specified. The player is delighted by not notifying the increase amount that exceeds the remaining number that satisfies the condition, and determining the information of the increase amount to be notified in relation to the increase number that will cause a specific condition. It is possible to prevent the player from letting it go, or to make use of the increase in the remaining number of indigestible pieces to entertain the player.

Features GE11. The increase notification means
A first means for executing the increase notification based on the increase processing (a function of executing the processing of performing the addition notification as an immediate addition notification by the display control device 81) and
Based on the fact that the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notification means becomes predetermined information, the second means for executing the increase notification (the display control device 81 executes a process of performing the additional notification as a post-addition notification). Function) and
With
The feature GE9 is characterized in that it is possible to select whether to perform the increase notification corresponding to the increase processing this time by the first means or the second means based on the specific result by the specific means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to the feature GE10.

According to the above configuration, an increase notification is performed based on the increase processing being performed, so-called immediate ride notification, and an increase notification is performed based on the remaining number information by the remaining number notification means becoming predetermined information. In a configuration with so-called post-addition notification, when it is specified that a specific condition is satisfied after the fact, immediate addition notification and post-addition notification are selected as the additional notification (increase notification) this time. By doing so, in a configuration in which the success or failure of a specific condition may be overturned after the fact depending on the subsequent game situation, etc., by delaying the increase notification, the player will not be delighted or delighted. By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by using the relationship with the remaining number information.

Features GE12. Even if it is specified in advance that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific means, the high advantage state may be terminated without satisfying the specific condition depending on the subsequent gaming situation. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of GE9 to GE11.

According to the above configuration, even if it is specified that the specific condition will be satisfied in the future, the high advantage state may end without the specific condition being satisfied depending on the subsequent game situation. Therefore, if the configuration is such that the increase processing is not performed at the time of the increase processing, the player suffers a great disadvantage if the specific condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, as described in the above-mentioned feature GE9 and the like, the configuration is such that the increase processing itself is executed and the notification side adjusts only by specifying whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the future. If this is done (if a specific event is caused by the amount that has been notified, or if it is not notified, etc.), the specific condition will be set after the fact while avoiding the inconvenience that the increased processing amount will disappear. Even if it does not hold, it is possible to prevent the game from giving a sense of discomfort.

Features GE13. As the gaming state, a low advantageous state (normal section) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a high advantageous state (attack mode in the advantageous section, etc.) are set.
In the high advantageous state, a predetermined end condition of the high advantageous state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, Remaining number grasping means (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) to grasp the remaining number until the remaining number of payouts or increase number becomes 0, or the number of payouts or increase number reaches the set number)
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for ending the high advantageous state and shifting to the low advantageous state (forced termination condition in the second process of section display by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of ending the advantageous section without establishing),
The number of remaining games corresponding to the remaining number counter HG for display by the remaining number notification means (display control device 81) that can notify the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means by a predetermined notification means. (Function to execute processing for notification) and
Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the high advantageous state is terminated and the low advantageous state is reached based on the condition that a predetermined specific condition (upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets) is satisfied. (A function to execute a process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM reaching the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main control device 101).
When the highly advantageous state is terminated by the specific termination means, the processing of step S14803 by the notification remaining number grasping means (for example, the main control device 101) for grasping the remaining number information notified by the remaining number notifying means is executed. Function to do) and
A function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main control device 101 (for example, a function of executing the seventh special notification process by the main control device 101) capable of causing a specific event that may be beneficial to the player based on the grasp result by the notification remaining number grasping means. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high advantage state and a low advantage state in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the high advantage state ends based on the remaining number of the high advantage states. Since it may end based on the satisfaction of a specific condition, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high advantage state is extremely increased. When the specific condition is satisfied, the game is terminated regardless of the remaining number in the high advantage state. However, if the remaining number is notified before the specific condition is satisfied and the specific condition is satisfied, the player is notified. , The remaining number that has been notified may be intentionally extinguished, giving the impression that it has been exploited, and there is concern that the motivation for playing will decrease. However, if the configuration is such that the high advantage state is terminated after waiting for the remaining number to be notified to be exhausted, the significance of setting the forced termination condition such as a specific condition is not guaranteed at all, and the remaining number is notified. Even if it is not done, it cannot meet the needs of players who will be highly interested in the continuity of high advantage. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the configuration is such that the high advantage state is terminated when a specific condition is satisfied regardless of the presence or absence of notification, and then a specific event is generated according to the remaining number of the notified portion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the player's motivation to play and to provide a game machine that meets the diverse needs of the player.

The "specific condition" may be expressed as "a specific condition set as an end condition of a predetermined state (advantageous section) including the highly advantageous state".

Further, each configuration shown in the features GE1 to GE12 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GE13.

In this case, for example, in the feature GE2, "a payout means (payout device 53) for paying out the game medium according to the result of each game is provided.
The specific condition is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the predetermined state (advantageous section) including the high advantage state and the number of game media used in each game. It is established based on the fact that a certain increase / decrease number reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number.
The specific event executing means can present information that may be useful to the player as the specific event. ”It is preferable to apply the modification after modifying the expression, and such modification is characterized by the corresponding other configuration in GE13. The same applies when applying.

<Characteristic GF group>
Features GF1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, etc.) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery means for executing the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state (execution of the transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101). Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) to shift to the first specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the challenge mode in the process of dealing with the winning result)
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing the transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process to shift to the attack mode in the process for dealing with the winning result)
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed. In the configuration of, the first grasping means (1st grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number). Advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) and
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific game state, and
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal ending condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of),
Based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means. A function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in a section display second process by the main control device 101, which shifts the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state. )When,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the second specific gaming state is calculated before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable predictive means (a function of executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Since the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific gaming state, is provided, the stage is such that the normal gaming state is shifted to the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is aimed at. It is possible to realize playability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the player, and it will be very useful for improving the interest.

In addition to the case where the first specific game state and the second specific game state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the end condition of the second specific game state, the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the upper limit is reached, the case is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game states. Therefore, the design is made by continuing the first specific game state and the second specific game state endlessly. Inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media that exceeds the expectations of the player and the difficulty of the player to finish the game are avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of game media that increases or decreases during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. If such a configuration is provided, the second specific game can be played while grasping the point such as how much more payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. It helps to improve the playability in the state, and it becomes possible to preferably improve the playability.

Features GF2. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state (advantageous section including an attack mode, etc.) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states (for example, challenge mode) in the first specific gaming state is set. And
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery means for executing the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state (execution of the transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101). Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the first specific gaming state, the first specific transition means (main control device 101) to shift to the first specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process of shifting to the challenge mode in the process of dealing with the winning result)
A second transition lottery means (a function of executing the transition lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) for executing the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the second specific gaming state, the second specific transition means (main control device 101) for shifting to the second specific gaming state. (A function to execute the process to shift to the attack mode in the process for dealing with the winning result)
In the second specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the second specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and the number of games is managed. In the configuration of, the first grasping means (1st grasping means for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the remaining payout number or the increase number becomes 0 or the payout number or the increase number reaches the set number). Advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) and
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in the first specific game state, and
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending means for shifting the second specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (normal ending condition in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the establishment of),
Based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means. A function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in a section display second process by the main control device 101, which shifts the first specific game state including the second specific game state to the normal game state. )When,
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the second specific gaming state is calculated before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictable predictive means (a function of executing the remaining number management process, the first adjustment process, the second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101) and
A correction means (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main control device 101, or correction condition is satisfied) capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. (A function to execute the remaining number management process after the remaining number management process and the forecast condition change process based on) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a first specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Since the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific gaming state, is provided, the stage is such that the normal gaming state is shifted to the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state is aimed at. It is possible to realize playability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the player, and it will be very useful for improving the interest.

In addition to the case where the first specific game state and the second specific game state are terminated based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the end condition of the second specific game state, the number of executions of the first specific game state is When the upper limit is reached, the case is set to end regardless of the remaining number of the second specific game states. Therefore, the design is made by continuing the first specific game state and the second specific game state endlessly. Inconveniences such as an increase in the number of game media that exceeds the expectations of the player and the difficulty of the player to finish the game are avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of game media that increases or decreases during the second specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. If such a configuration is provided, the second specific game can be played while grasping the point such as how much more payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. Helps improve playability during the state. However, the predicted increase / decrease number may differ significantly from the actual increase / decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stopping mode of each game. Therefore, by enabling the correction processing of the predicted increase / decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistency due to the prediction error in the game using the predicted increase / decrease number, and to preferably improve the game playability. Become.

Features GF3. The prediction means is a means that can predict the maximum value of the predicted increase / decrease number by using the maximum value of the expected number of payouts that can be expected per game (the maximum number corresponding to the maximum number in the first adjustment process by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to the feature GF1 or the feature GF2, which is provided with a function of executing a process of performing a prediction using an increase / decrease number MM).

According to the above configuration, the predicted increase / decrease number becomes the maximum value, and no event occurs in which the actual increase / decrease number exceeds that value. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenience due to the excess.

Features GF4. As the lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined payout result (for example, a bell) to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means is provided.
The payout means is a specific payout result in which the lottery result by the lottery means has the highest winning probability in the state of staying among the predetermined payout results, and is a specific payout result corresponding to the specific payout result at the effective position. A specific number of game media are paid out based on the stop of the pattern combination.
The prediction means is a means capable of predicting the predicted increase / decrease number with the expected increase / decrease number of each game as the specific number (the maximum increase / decrease number MM corresponding to the number of main characters in the first adjustment process by the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of the features GF1 to GF3, which is characterized by having a function of executing a process of performing the prediction used.

According to the above configuration, the so-called main winning combination is used as the specific payout result having the highest winning probability, and the predicted increase / decrease is predicted assuming that the main winning combination is won in each game. In predicting the predicted increase / decrease, for example, as in the feature GF3, it is conceivable that the payout result with the maximum number of increase / decrease is won in each game, and the prediction is made in this way. While the number of increase / decrease cannot be larger than expected, the winning probability of the maximum number of payout results is often set relatively low, and it is predicted that such payout results will be won every game. It may not be realistic. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to predict the largest number of increase / decrease in the range that can actually occur, and it is possible to increase the usefulness of the prediction result and reduce the necessity of correction. It will be possible.

Features GF5. As the lottery result by the lottery means, the probability that the predetermined payout result (for example, bell) to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means and the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal game state. A transition result (for example, the first BB) that enables the transition to a higher special state is set.
The second expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the special state is larger than the first expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the second specific game state.
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result during the second specific gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state is performed before the transition to the special state and after the end of the special state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GF1 to GF4, wherein the third expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game in the post-transition state until the occurrence of the above-mentioned first expected increase / decrease number is smaller than the first expected increase / decrease number.

According to the above configuration, in predicting the predicted increase / decrease number in the second specific game state, a special state in which the expected increase / decrease number is large is set, and the transition to such a special state is the second specific game state. The difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number can be large depending on how many times it occurs. On the other hand, if a transition result that may cause a transition to a special state during the second specific gaming state is won, the second specific state is before the transition to the special state and after the special state ends. The expected increase / decrease number of the post-transition state until the transition to the gaming state occurs is smaller than the expected increase / decrease number during the second specific gaming state. That is, when the expected increase / decrease number for the pre-transition state and the post-transition state is taken into consideration, the increase in the special state is offset by the decrease in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state, and the prediction during the second specific gaming state is made. The difference between the number of increases / decreases and the actual number of increases / decreases can be small.

Features GF6. The first total increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the special state calculated from the average value of the number of continuous games in the special state and the second expected increase / decrease number, and the continuous games in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state. The sum of the average value of the numbers and the second total increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the pre-transition state and the post-transition state calculated from the third expected increase / decrease number, these special states, and the pre-transition state. The fourth expected increase / decrease number that can be expected per game, which is calculated from the average value of the number of continuous games in the post-transition state, is set to be the same as or about the same as the first expected increase / decrease number. The gaming machine according to the feature GF5.

The above configuration is a specific configuration for more preferably exerting the effect of the feature GF5.

Features GF7. A correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing the remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of the correction condition by the main control device 101). With
The prediction means has a configuration in which the predicted increase / decrease can be predicted by using the average value of the expected increase / decrease that can be expected per game while staying.
The correction means can execute the correction process based on the transition from the staying state to a different state or the occurrence of a transition event in which the transition to the different state is allowed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GF1 to GF6.

According to the above configuration, the predicted increase / decrease is predicted using the average value of the expected increase / decrease in the staying state, and the predicted increase / decrease is corrected based on the transition to a different state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effects of the above-mentioned feature GF1 and the like without going through a complicated process such as predicting the predicted increase / decrease number after predicting the transition of the state in advance.

Features GF8. The predicting means has a configuration capable of predicting the predicted increase / decrease number including the first specific gaming state.
Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, a correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number (prediction condition correction process by the main control device 101: a function of executing step S16109) and
Based on the transition of the gaming state to the first specific gaming state, or the transition of the gaming state to the first specific gaming state, the mode notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed. The notification by the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is started based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition including the above, and the notification by the specific notification means is ended based on the end of the first specific gaming state. Specific game state notification means (a function of executing the section display first process and section display second process by the main control device 101) and
With
The correction means is described in any one of the features GF1 to GF7, which is characterized in that the correction process can be executed based on the start of notification of the specific notification means by the specific game state notification means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, by providing the specific notification means, it becomes possible to clearly understand whether or not there is a transition to the first specific gaming state, and at least after the start condition is satisfied, the transition to the first specific gaming state is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause an event such as ending the game without knowing it even though it is present. Then, the start condition of such a specific notification means includes a state in which the mode notification regarding the operation mode by the stop operation means can be executed, and the winning result may differ depending on the mode notification. The number of increase / decrease in the game medium in the state may differ greatly before and after the establishment of the start condition. Therefore, if the above-mentioned correction process is to start the notification of the specific notification means, it is only necessary to determine the presence / absence of the notification. Therefore, it is relatively easy to determine whether or not the correction process should be performed. Is possible.

Features GF9. A correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing the remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of the correction condition by the main control device 101). With
As the lottery result by the lottery means, the probability that the predetermined payout result (for example, bell) to be paid out of the game medium by the payout means and the lottery result by the lottery means will be the predetermined payout result is higher than the normal game state. A transition result (for example, the first BB) that enables the transition to a higher special state is set.
The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF8, wherein the specific conditions can be satisfied based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being the transition result.

According to the above configuration, when the transition result is won, which enables the transition to a special state in which the probability of a predetermined payout result is high, a specific condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned predicted increase / decrease number is corrected. In this way, if the correction process is performed when the actual increase / decrease number becomes larger than the predicted increase / decrease number or when it is certain that the increase / decrease number will be, the predicted increase / decrease number is predicted in advance by taking into account the transition result winning. It is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number without using complicated processing such as performing.

Features GF10. A correction means capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition (a function of executing the remaining number management process based on the satisfaction of the correction condition by the main control device 101). With
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined replay result is set in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given.
As game states, a first re-game state (for example, a normal game state, a first RT state) and a second re-game state (for example, a second RT) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-game result is different. State, 3rd RT state), and are set,
One of the features GF1 to GF9, which is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied based on the transition from the predetermined gaming state to the first replaying state or the second replaying state. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a first re-gaming state and a second re-gaming state having different probabilities of becoming a predetermined re-gaming state are set, the first re-gaming state and the second re-gaming state are set from the predetermined gaming state. When the transition to the gaming state occurs, that is, when the winning probability of the re-gaming result is different from the previous state, a specific condition is satisfied and the above-mentioned prediction increase / decrease number is corrected. Since the re-game result allows the execution of the next game without requiring a new game medium, the probability of the re-game result greatly affects the total number of increase / decrease of the game medium in the second specific game state. Can exert. In other words, if it is easy to win the re-game result, the total number of increase / decrease can naturally increase. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if an event occurs in which the probability of the re-game result is different, the correction process is performed, without using complicated processing such as adding fluctuations in the re-game result in advance. However, it is possible to reduce the discrepancy between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number.

Features GF11. The remaining number of sheets based on the correction means (the correction condition by the main control device 101) that can execute the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific condition in the second specific game state. Has a function to execute management processing)
As the lottery result by the lottery means, a predetermined replay result is set in which a replay that enables the next game to be executed without requiring a new game medium is given.
As game states, a first re-game state (for example, a normal game state, a first RT state) and a second re-game state (for example, a second RT) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the predetermined re-game result is different. State, 3rd RT state), and are set,
Expected increase / decrease number per game when the second specific gaming state is digested in the second re-gaming state than when the second specific gaming state is digested in the first re-gaming state. Can be many,
One of the features GF1 to GF10, which is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied based on the transition from the predetermined gaming state to the second replaying state in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first re-game state and the second re-game state having different probabilities of becoming a predetermined re-game state are set, the second specific game state is digested in the second re-game state. The expected increase / decrease number is larger when the game is played, and it is assumed that the game is mainly played in the second re-game state during the second specific game state. That is, when the second specific gaming state shifts from the second re-gaming state to another gaming state for some reason, it is considered that a difference between the predicted increase / decrease number by the predicting means and the actual increase / decrease number may occur. .. Therefore, when shifting to these other gaming states, the correction process is performed when returning to the second re-gaming state, so that the difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number is reduced. It can be modified.

In particular, in the above configuration, the correction process is performed when the player returns to the second re-game state, not when the game state shifts to another game state, so that the predicted increase / decrease occurs based on the shift to the other game state. It is not necessary to reflect the difference between the number and the actual increase / decrease number in the correction process in advance. That is, if the configuration is such that the correction process is performed when the player returns to the second replay state, the correction processing may be performed by the amount of the difference actually generated, and the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number may be performed in a simpler configuration. It is possible to reduce the difference between.

Features GF12. The remaining number of sheets based on the correction means (the correction condition by the main control device 101) that can execute the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific condition in the second specific game state. Has a function to execute management processing)
Any of the features GF1 to GF11 characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied based on the difference between the predicted increase / decrease number by the prediction means and the actual increase / decrease number becoming a predetermined special number. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, when there is a difference between the predicted increase / decrease number and the actual increase / decrease number, the correction process is performed, and it is not necessary to grasp the transition of the state, etc., and the difference can be corrected more simply. Is possible.

Features GF13. Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second specific gaming state, the correction means (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main control device 101) capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number is performed. Has a function to execute)
An increasing means (main control device 101) capable of executing an increasing process for increasing the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means based on the establishment of a predetermined increasing condition in the second specific gaming state. Equipped with a function to add the number of games by
The gaming machine according to any one of features GF1 to GF12, wherein the specific condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the increase condition.

According to the above configuration, when a so-called addition that increases the number of remaining games in the second specific game state occurs, a specific condition is satisfied and the predicted increase / decrease number is corrected. If the addition of the second specific game state occurs, the number of increase / decrease can be increased by that amount, and by correcting the predicted increase / decrease number with the addition as described above, more accurate correction processing can be performed. It is possible to carry out.

In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a lottery result is provided that enables a transition from a state in which the probability of winning a small winning combination is high over a plurality of games to a state in which it is possible to digest, such as a so-called bonus state, the second It can be said that winning the lottery result that enables the transition to the above state during the specific game state leads to an increase in the remaining number of the second specific game state, and winning the result is the above increase. It can be included in the condition being met.

Features GF14. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (attack mode in an advantageous section, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
In the normal game state, a shift lottery means for executing a shift lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific game state (a function for executing a shift lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101), and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state. (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The first grasping means (advantageous section remaining game) for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0 or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number). Number ZG) and
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state, and
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal ending condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the above) and
Based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means. A first specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, it is possible to predict the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the specific gaming state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictive means (function to execute remaining number management process, first adjustment process, second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. Is the case where the game ends based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) until the end condition of the specific game state is satisfied, and when the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the upper limit, the specific game state is entered. Since it is set to end regardless of the remaining number, if the specific game state continues endlessly, the number of game media that exceeds the designer's expectation will increase, or the player will not be able to finish the game easily. Inconvenience is avoided.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of increase / decrease in the game medium that increases / decreases during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. If such a configuration is provided, it is possible to play a game while grasping the point such as how much more payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state, and the game in the specific game state. It helps to improve the playability and makes it possible to preferably improve the playability.

Features GF15. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (attack mode in an advantageous section, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
In the normal game state, a shift lottery means for executing a shift lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific game state (a function for executing a shift lottery to the attack mode in the first specific combination process by the main control device 101), and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means (attack mode in the winning result correspondence process by the main control device 101) to shift to the specific gaming state. (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
In the specific game state, a predetermined end condition of the specific game state (for example, the number of remaining games in the attack mode becomes 0, the number of executed games in the attack mode reaches the set number of games, and in the configuration of number management, The first grasping means (advantageous section remaining game) for grasping the remaining number information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the remaining number of payouts or the increase number becomes 0 or the number of payouts or the increase number reaches the set number). Number ZG) and
A second grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping execution information corresponding to the number of executed games in a predetermined gaming state (advantageous section) including the specific gaming state, and
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, the normal ending means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal ending condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the above) and
Based on the fact that the execution information grasped by the second grasping means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined upper limit number of games, regardless of the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means. A first specific end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (a function of executing a process of forcibly terminating an advantageous section in the second section display process by the main control device 101).
Based on the remaining number information grasped by the first grasping means, it is possible to predict the predicted increase / decrease number of the game medium that increases / decreases in the specific gaming state before the game corresponding to the remaining number information is executed. Predictive means (function to execute remaining number management process, first adjustment process, second adjustment process, etc. by the main control device 101)
A correction means (first adjustment process to third adjustment process by the main control device 101, or correction condition is satisfied) capable of executing the correction process of the predicted increase / decrease number based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. (A function to execute the remaining number management process after the remaining number management process and the forecast condition change process based on) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. Is the remaining number of the specific game state when the game ends based on the number of remaining games (remaining number information) up to the end condition of the specific game state, and when the number of executions of the specific game state reaches the upper limit. Since the case of ending regardless of the setting is set, the inconvenience that the specific game state continues endlessly causes an increase in the number of game media that exceeds the designer's expectation and the player cannot easily finish the game is avoided. Has been done.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the number of increase / decrease in the game medium that increases / decreases during the specific game state is predicted based on the number of remaining games in the specific game state. If such a configuration is provided, it is possible to play a game while grasping the point such as how much more payout will be made in relation to the number of remaining games in the specific game state, and the game in the specific game state. Helps improve sexuality. However, the predicted increase / decrease number may differ significantly from the actual increase / decrease number depending on the lottery result of each game and the stopping mode of each game. Therefore, by enabling the correction processing of the predicted increase / decrease number, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconsistency due to the prediction error in the game using the predicted increase / decrease number, and to preferably improve the game playability. Become.

In addition, each configuration shown in the features GF1 to GF13 may be applied individually or in combination to the feature GF14 and the feature GF15.

<Characteristic GG group>
Features GG1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game state, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including a challenge mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
In the normal gaming state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (a function of executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state (challenge mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
By the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Executes the specific game state notification means (the section display first process and the section display second process by the main control device 101) that start the notification and end the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. Function) and
In the specific game state, an advantage determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event for the player (in the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the CM by the main control device 101, step S15904 or step S16004 (Function to execute the processing of) and
With
When the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is a response result that causes the advantage event, the specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantage event occurs. And
When the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result that does not cause the advantageous event, the extension means for extending the specific gaming state (precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in CM by the main control device 101) A gaming machine comprising a function of executing the processing of step S15908 and step S16008).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. When the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to fully enjoy the game in the specific game state on an equal basis.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an advantageous determination as to whether or not to cause an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player may be performed, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means is guaranteed while improving the game playability in the specific game state.

However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state, if the advantageous determination is a response result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, while the result of the advantageous determination. If is a non-correspondence result that no advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means ends at the end of the specific game state, and the result of the player's interest such as the special advantage judgment is the specific notification means. There may be an event that becomes clear depending on whether or not the notification of is continued.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result, the extension processing of the specific gaming state is performed although the advantageous event does not occur. As a result, even if an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state as described above and the result is non-correspondence, the notification by the specific notification means is completed by the amount of the above extension processing. It will be postponed. By doing so, while obtaining the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the event that the result of the advantage determination becomes clear, and it is preferable to improve the game playability in the specific game state. It becomes possible to plan.

In addition, "as a state included in the specific game state, a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than another state (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state is set". In the "specific game state notification means", "based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is permitted. A specific game state notification means that starts notification by the specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. " Or, "A notification condition for which notification of winning is performed based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or that the gaming state has transitioned to the specific gaming state and the lottery for transition to the special gaming state has been won. The specific game state notification means that starts the notification by the specific notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition including the above and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. " You may.

Features GG2. When the advantage determination is made, the advantage notification means (processing for performing the effect in the precursor mode or the continuous effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the advantage notification corresponding to the result of the advantage determination by the predetermined notification means. Has the ability to execute)
The gaming machine according to feature GG1, wherein the extension means can execute the extension process based on the advantageous notification performed by the advantageous notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the advantage determination is made, the advantage notification corresponding to the result is performed by a predetermined notification means, and the player who is concerned about the result of the advantage determination is very interested in the advantage notification. It becomes a thing. Then, as described in the above feature GG1, even if the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the extension processing of the specific gaming state is performed, so that the result of the advantageous determination is determined from the presence or absence of the continuation of the notification of the specific notification means. Can not be determined, so that the degree of attention to the above-mentioned advantageous notification can be suitably increased.

In other words, in a configuration in which the result of the advantageous determination is used as the advantageous notification, if the result becomes clear from the presence or absence of the continuation of the notification of the specific notification means, the degree of attention to the advantageous notification will be increased. Not only can it not be enhanced, but the humorousness of the advantage notification stands out even though it has been grasped that the result of the advantage judgment is a non-correspondence result, and the game production is started. There is concern about the indifference of. In that respect, by applying the configuration of the feature GG1 to the configuration for performing such advantageous notification as in the above configuration, it is possible to suitably increase the interest in the game production.

Features GG3. The gaming machine according to feature GG2, wherein the extension means can execute the extension process regardless of the result of the advantage determination based on the advantage notification performed by the advantage notification means.

According to the above configuration, the notification by the specific notification means will be continued in the end regardless of the result of the advantage determination, so that the processing configuration of the extension process can be simplified by the amount that the determination result of the advantage determination is not referred to. It is planned. On the other hand, since the occurrence of the advantage notification is a condition for executing the extension process, the advantage should not be unnecessarily increased as compared with the configuration in which the extension process is uniformly performed when the advantage determination is made. Is also possible.

Features GG4. The advantageous notification means can execute the advantageous notification over a predetermined number of games.
The gaming machine according to feature GG2 or feature GG3, wherein the extension means can execute the extension process according to the number of games in which the advantage notification is performed by the advantage notification means.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the advantageous notification by the advantageous notification means is performed over a plurality of games, the extension processing is performed according to the number of games in which the advantageous notification is performed. Therefore, for example, the extension processing Therefore, it is possible to keep the change in the advantage due to the extension process small, such as preventing the advantage of the specific game state from becoming excessively high. Therefore, the extension processing of the specific gaming state is performed within the range in which the significance of being non-winning (non-correspondence result) is guaranteed in the advantageous judgment such as whether or not to cause an advantageous event (without increasing the advantage too much). It can be configured.

Features GG5. A grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state when the advantageous notification is started (step S15906, step S15907, step S16006, step in the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in CM by the main control device 101). It has a function to execute the processing of S16007).
The gaming machine according to feature GG4, wherein the extension means can execute an extension process corresponding to the number of games obtained by subtracting the number of remaining games grasped by the grasping means from the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the extension processing of the specific game state is performed by the amount obtained by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state when the advantage notification is started from the predetermined number of games for which the advantage notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to match the end of the advantageous notification with the end of the specific gaming state. For example, even though the advantageous notification has ended, only the specific gaming state is extended. In addition, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary extension processing and eliminate the inconvenience that the advantage becomes too high when adjusting the effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the advantage becomes too high because the effect of the effect is sought.

Features GG6. As the advantageous notification, a first advantageous notification executed over a first predetermined number of games and a second advantageous notification executed over a second predetermined number of games different from the first predetermined number are set. Has been
The advantageous notification means has a function of selecting one advantageous notification from a plurality of types of advantageous notifications including the first advantageous notification and the second advantageous notification (a function of executing a lottery process for the number of precursor games by the main control device 101). ), And the advantageous notification selected by the selection means can be executed by the predetermined notification means.
The extension means is described in any one of the features GG2 to GG5, which is capable of executing the extension processing of the specific gaming state according to the number of games in which the advantageous notification is performed selected by the selection means. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the production can be diversified by setting multiple types of advantageous notifications, and even if multiple types are set in this way, extension processing is performed according to the number of games. Therefore, it is possible to accurately match the situation in which the advantageous notification is being made with the extension of the specific game state.

Features GG7. A first control device (main control device 101) having at least the lottery means, the advantage determination means, and the extension means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having the advantage notification means are provided.
The first control device is
A notification execution lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process for the number of precursor games by the main control device 101) for whether or not to execute the advantageous notification, and
An output means (a function of executing a process of outputting and setting a precursor command by the main control device 101) capable of outputting the lottery result by the notification execution lottery means to the second control device, and
The gaming machine according to any one of GG2 to GG6.

According to the above configuration, a first control device having a function directly linked to the interests of the player such as a lottery means, an advantage determination means, and an extension means and a second control device having an effect function such as an advantage notification means are separately provided. The configuration makes it easier to deal with fraudulent activities by sharing functions, preventing local increase in processing load, and consolidating profit-related functions on the first control device side. , It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player or the game hall suffers a disadvantage due to cheating. Then, when the configuration in which the extension processing is performed triggered by the advantageous notification is applied to a gaming machine having such a plurality of control devices, the presence or absence of execution of the advantageous notification is managed on the first control device side as in the above configuration. If the information is output to the second control device, for example, it is not necessary to output some information from the second control means to the first control means by the advantageous notification means. While ensuring the independence of the control device and the second control device and strengthening the above-mentioned fraud countermeasures, it is possible to preferably realize the extension process.

Features GG8. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined extension condition, a second extension means (a function of executing an addition process such as an attack mode by the main control device 101) capable of executing the extension process (addition) of the specific gaming state is provided. Prepare,
When the extension process is performed by the second extension means, the notification (additional notification) that the extension process is performed is executed, while when the extension process is performed by the extension means, the extension process is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GG1 to GG7, characterized in that the notification of GG1 is not executed.

According to the above configuration, when the extension process is performed by the second extension means, a so-called additional notification is generated as a notification to that effect. On the premise of such a configuration, when the extension process is performed by the extension means based on the above-mentioned advantage determination, the additional notification does not occur. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the notification of the specific notification means is continued based on the result of the advantageous determination being the result of causing an advantageous event. It becomes.

Features GG9. As the specific gaming state, a high-advantage specific gaming state (first challenge mode) in which the advantage for the player is relatively high and low and a low-advantage specific gaming state (second challenge mode) are set.
Based on the extension processing performed by the extension means, the means (process of step S1608 by the main control device 101) capable of changing the specific gaming state of the extension to the low advantage specific gaming state is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features GG1 to GG8, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, the extension portion of the specific gaming state based on the extension processing is set to the low advantage specific gaming state, so that the player's advantage is unnecessarily increased in order to eliminate the inconvenience in the production such as the extension processing. It is possible to avoid doing so.

Features GG10. The gaming machine according to feature GG9, wherein the advantage of the low advantage specific gaming state is equal to or about the same as the advantage of the normal gaming state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to postpone the notification end timing of the specific notification means without substantially increasing the advantage.

Features GG11. As the specific gaming state, a high-advantage specific gaming state (attack mode, etc.) and a low-advantage specific gaming state (challenge mode) are set so that the advantage in the specific gaming state is relatively high or low.
The low-advantage specific gaming state is a state in which the winning probability or execution frequency of the transition lottery to the high-advantage specific gaming state is higher than that of the normal gaming state.
As a lottery result by the lottery means, as the privilege, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the winning probability of the predetermined payout result is different from the normal game state. 2nd BB) is set,
Further, as a lottery result by the lottery means, a duplicate result (for example, strong cherry duplication 1) in which a predetermined specific result overlaps with the transition result and is won, and the specific result overlaps with the transition result. Special results (specific roles) including non-overlapping results (for example, strong cherries) that do not win are set.
The lottery result by the lottery means is the shift result, and the shift means (main control device) that shifts the gaming state to the shift state based on the fact that the shift pattern combination corresponding to the shift result is stopped at the effective position. Equipped with a function to execute bonus state processing by 101)
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the advantageous determination means determines whether or not the transition result is included as the special result as the advantageous determination.
The extension means can execute the extension process based on the determination result that the advantage determination result by the advantage determination means does not include the transition result in the low advantage specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of GG1 to GG10.

According to the above configuration, the high-advantage specific gaming state, which has a relatively high advantage in the specific gaming state, and the low-advantage, in which the winning probability and the execution frequency of the lottery for shifting to the high-advantage specific gaming state are higher than those in the normal gaming state. In the configuration in which the specific gaming state (so-called chance zone) is provided, the flow of the game is to shift from the normal gaming state to the low-advantage specific gaming state, and to shift from the low-advantage specific gaming state to the high-advantage specific gaming state. Is assumed. In such a configuration, the player is interested in how to cause the transition to the high-advantage specific gaming state during the low-advantage specific gaming state, and the transition state during the low-advantage specific gaming state. The transition to the high-advantage specific gaming state may function as a priming water for the high-advantage specific gaming state, and in the low-advantage specific gaming state, the transition to the high-advantage specific gaming state will occur together with the transition to the high-advantage specific gaming state. That is, it is considered that great expectations are placed on the fact that the advantageous judgment is made as a special result, and the degree of attention to the production when such an advantageous judgment is made is increased. However, even if the advantage determination is made as a special result in the low advantage specific gaming state, the result of the advantage determination may be completely understood depending on whether or not the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, if an advantage determination is made during the low-advantage specific game state and the result does not include the transition result, the low-advantage specific game state is extended to extend the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the result from being completely understood by the notification.

Features GG12. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As a game state, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including a challenge mode) that is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
In the normal gaming state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (a function of executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state (challenge mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main control device 101). (Function to execute the process of migrating to) and
By the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Executes the specific game state notification means (the section display first process and the section display second process by the main control device 101) that start the notification and end the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. Function) and
In the specific game state, an advantage determination means for determining whether or not to cause an advantageous event for the player (in the precursor setting process at the time of winning the duplicate target combination in the CM by the main control device 101, step S15904 or step Function to execute the processing of S16004) and
With
When the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is a response result that causes the advantage event, the specific game state notification means continues the notification by the specific notification means at least until the advantage event occurs. And
When the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result that does not cause the advantageous event, the extension means (in the CM by the main control device 101) that extends the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of executing the processing of step S15908 and step S16088) in the precursor setting processing at the time of winning a duplicate target combination.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. When the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to fully enjoy the game in the specific game state on an equal basis.

Moreover, in the specific gaming state, an advantageous determination as to whether or not to cause an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player may be performed, and even if an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued. Therefore, the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means is guaranteed while improving the game playability in the specific game state.

However, for example, when an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state, if the advantageous determination is a response result that an advantageous event occurs, the notification by the specific notification means is continued, while the advantageous determination is advantageous. If the non-correspondence result that the event does not occur, the notification by the specific notification means ends at the end of the specific game state, and the result of the player's interest such as the special advantage judgment is the notification of the specific notification means. There may be an event that becomes clear from the presence or absence of continuation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantage determination is a non-correspondence result, an extension process is performed to extend the notification continuation game of the specific notification means by a predetermined number of games, although an advantageous event does not occur. As a result, even if an advantageous determination is made just before the end of the specific gaming state as described above and the result is non-correspondence, the notification by the specific notification means is completed by the amount of the above extension processing. It will be postponed. By doing so, while obtaining the effect of equalizing the game by the specific notification means, it is possible to avoid the event that the result of the advantage determination becomes clear, and it is preferable to improve the game playability in the specific game state. It becomes possible to plan.

In addition, "as a state included in the specific game state, a special game state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than another state (for example, challenge mode) in the specific game state is set". In the "specific game state notification means", "based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is permitted. A specific game state notification means that starts notification by the specific notification means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition including an allowable condition, and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. " Or, "A notification condition for which notification of winning is performed based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state, or that the gaming state has transitioned to the specific gaming state and the lottery for transition to the special gaming state has been won. The specific game state notification means that starts the notification by the specific notification means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition including the above and ends the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. " You may.

In addition, each configuration shown in the features GG1 to GG11 may be applied individually or in combination to the above feature GG12.

<Characteristic GH group>
Features GH1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit, the said. A privilege granting means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
Transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state in a normal gaming state (a function for executing a transition lottery for a challenge mode or an attack mode in a first specific combination process by the main control device 101). When,
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state (challenge mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main control device 101) (A function to execute the process of shifting to the attack mode) and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined end condition of the specific game state, the normal end means for shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state (the normal end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on the above) and
By the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) based on the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state or the transition of the gaming state to the specific gaming state and the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Executes the specific game state notification means (the section display first process and the section display second process by the main control device 101) that start the notification and end the notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state. Function) and
With
As the specific game state, a high advantage specific game state (first challenge mode) and a low advantage specific game state (second challenge mode) are set so that the advantage for the player is relatively high and low. ,
The advantage for the player is the same or the same in the normal game state and the low advantage specific game state.
Based on the establishment of the predetermined first extension condition (additional condition), the first extension means (the challenge mode addition processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing the extension processing of the highly advantageous specific gaming state is executed. Function to do) and
Based on the fact that the second extension condition different from the first extension condition (determined affirmatively in step S1606 by the main control device 101) is satisfied, the second extension process of the low advantage specific gaming state can be executed. Extension means (function of executing the process of step S16008 by the main controller 101) and
With
The specific game state notification means is
It is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means in the highly advantageous specific gaming state extended by the first extension means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to continue the notification by the specific notification means in the low advantage specific gaming state extended by the second extension means.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. When the start condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and when the specific gaming state ends, the notification by the specific notification means also ends. That is, if it is confirmed whether or not the specific notification means is notified, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in the specific game state. For example, the game is played without noticing it even though it has shifted to the specific game state. It is possible to eliminate the feeling of inequality between the player who finishes the game and the player who is seated later on the game table that finished the game. Therefore, it is possible for all players to fully enjoy the game in the specific game state on an equal basis.

However, by defining the notification by the specific notification means as described above, there may be a hindrance to the game, for example, to entertain the continuation of the specific game state. Specifically, when the specific notification means ends, the notification by the specific notification means ends, so even if an effect such as whether or not the specific gaming state continues is performed, it will eventually be rounded by the notification of the specific notification means. I understand. On the other hand, if the specific gaming state is continued as long as the production is performed, the advantage of the specific gaming state may become unnecessarily high.

Therefore, as the specific game state, the high advantage specific game state and the low advantage specific game state are set so that the advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and then the advantage of the low advantage specific game state is usually set. By setting the same level as the gaming state and providing a case where the high-advantage specific gaming state is extended and a case where the low-advantage specific gaming state is extended, the notification of the specific notification means is notified regardless of which case is extended. It is possible to continue (extend) the specific game state without increasing the advantage of the specific game state too much without ending it.

In addition, "the advantage for the player is the same or the same in the normal game state and the low advantage specific game state" means "the number of expected benefits granted per game in the normal game state". (Net increase in number) and the expected number of privilege grants that can be expected per game in the low advantage specific game state are the same or about the same. "

Features GH2. The gaming machine according to GH1, wherein the specific gaming state is the low-advantageous specific gaming state in which the extension processing is performed by the second extension means, and the other is the high-advantageous specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, the games played in the low-advantage specific gaming state are more limited, and the specific gaming state does not impair the impression that the player is in an advantageous state (high-advantage specific gaming state). It can be expected to have the effect of extending the game in which the notification of the specific notification means is performed while not increasing the advantage too much.

Features GH3. Based on the fact that the second extension condition is satisfied in the high-advantageous specific gaming state, the second extension means changes the high-advantageous specific gaming state to the low-advantageous specific gaming state as an extension process of the low-advantageous specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature GH2, characterized in that the extension process is executed so as to shift to a state.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature GH2.

Features GH4. The second extension means is an establishment determination means for determining whether or not the second extension condition is satisfied based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined special result (overlapping target combination). (A function of executing the process of step S1606 by the main control device 101).
The second establishment determination means is the second when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in a situation where the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state is less than a predetermined specific number (precursor game number). If it can be determined that the extension condition is satisfied, but the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific gaming state is equal to or greater than the specific number and the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the second extension condition The gaming machine according to the feature GH2 or the feature GH3, which is characterized in that it is determined that the above is not established.

According to the above configuration, if the special result is won at the end when the number of remaining games in the high-advantage specific game state is less than the specific number, the extension process of the low-advantage specific game state can be performed, while the number of remaining games is equal to or more than the specific number. In that case, even if the special result is won, the extension process of the low advantage specific game state is not performed. By doing so, even if the configuration is relatively simple, such as performing extension processing according to the result of the game, if the special result is won in a situation where the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific game state is still large, etc. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of being unintentionally set to a low advantage specific game state. In other words, in a configuration in which the extension process can be executed based on the special result winning, the high-advantage specific gaming state is achieved without using a complicated configuration such as making the winning probability of winning the special result different according to the number of remaining games. It becomes possible to accurately perform the extension process at the final stage.

Features GH5. It is equipped with a continuous effect executing means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a continuous effect that can be continued over a plurality of games by a predetermined effect means.
In the second extension means, when the continuous effect by the continuous effect execution means is executed across the end game of the high advantage specific game state, the low advantage specific game is assumed that the second extension condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features GH1 to GH4, characterized in that the state extension process can be executed.

According to the above configuration, when the continuous effect by the continuous effect execution means is executed across the end games of the high advantage specific game state, the extension process of the low advantage specific game state is performed. As a result, although the transition from the high-advantage specific game state to the low-advantage specific game state is made, the continuous production itself can be executed without straddling the end game of the specific game state. As a result, for example, in the case where the continuous effect is an effect related to the continuity of the specific game state, the notification of the specific notification means ends with the end of the specific game state, and there is no continuous effect due to the end of the notification. It is possible to avoid becoming meaningful.

Features GH6. Execution of the difference game number grasping means (process of step S16007 by the main control device 101) for grasping the difference game number between the remaining game number of the highly advantageous specific gaming state and the continuous game number of the continuous production by the continuous production execution means Function to do)
The second extension means extends the low advantage specific gaming state so that the low advantage specific gaming state is executed after the high advantage specific gaming state by the number of difference games grasped by the difference game number grasping means. The gaming machine according to the feature GH5, which is characterized in that processing can be executed.

According to the above configuration, the low advantage specific game state is added by the amount of the continuous effect executed after the end of the high advantage specific game state, and the specific game state is unreasonably extended for a long time, or vice versa. It is possible to avoid the event that the specific game state ends before the continuous production even though the extension process has been performed.

Features GH7. Based on the extension processing of the specific gaming state, the extension notification execution means (for performing the additional notification effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the extension notification corresponding to the extension processing by the predetermined notification means. Function to execute processing) and
When the extension processing of the high advantage specific gaming state is performed by the first extension means, the extension notification execution means is allowed to execute the extension notification, while the low advantage specific game is allowed by the second extension means. When the state extension processing is performed, it is provided with means for restricting the execution of the extension notification by the extension notification execution means (a function of executing the additional notification non-generation processing by the main control device 101). Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of GH1 to GH6.

According to the above configuration, as an extension notification corresponding to the extension processing, it is premised that a so-called additional notification effect is generated, and when the extension processing of the highly advantageous specific gaming state is performed, the additional notification is given. While the effect is generated, when the extension process of the low advantage specific game state is performed, the additional notification effect is not generated, so that the player understands that the extension process of the low advantage specific game state is performed. Hateful. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the event in which the notification of the specific notification means is continued is caused by the fact that the number of remaining games in the highly advantageous specific game state still exists in the first place. It is possible to more preferably exert the effect of postponing the notification end of the specific notification means.

<Characteristic GI group>
Features GI1. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low are set.
A grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expectation state (advantageous section game number AG) and
Specific termination means (main control device) that terminates the high expectation state and shifts to the low expectation state based on the number of executions grasped by the grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number (1500). In the second process of displaying the section by 101, the function of executing the process of terminating the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the high expectation state, the first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and the second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in the game medium can be expected in each game, and a decrease in the game medium can be expected in each game. The third high expectation state (bonus carry-over state, return state that occurs during attack mode) is set.
When the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can exist between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state. A possible first setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the bonus carry-over state by the main control device 101) and
When the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can exist between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. A possible second setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal gaming state) and
Whether or not a specific event occurs in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the upper limit during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is determined by the first setting means. 3 Specific means (a function of executing the process of step S15810 by the main control device 101) that can be specified when setting the high expectation state, and
When the specific event is specified to occur by the specific means, the second continuation number (E) of the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is set by the first setting means. 3 A third setting means (a function of executing the process of step S15812 by the main controller 101) capable of executing an addition process of adding to the first continuation number (B) in the high expectation state, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. Therefore, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high expectation state is set as a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which the game medium can increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which the game medium can decrease in each game. When shifting from the 1st high expectation state to the 2nd high expectation state, the 3rd high expectation state intervenes between the 1st high expectation state and the 2nd high expectation state, and further, the 2nd high expectation state to the 1st high expectation state. When the transition to the state occurs, the third high advantageous state can intervene between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the number of game media in the third high expectation state can be reduced, when the number of executions reaches the upper limit and the high expectation state is terminated during the third high expectation state, the high expectation state is reached. However, in the end, the number of game media is reduced and the game ends with a dent.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in particular, it is assumed that the transition of the first high expectation state → the third high expectation state → the second high expectation state → the third high expectation state → the first high expectation state occurs, and the rear side The number of continuations of the third high expectation state is added to the number of continuations of the third high expectation state on the front side, and the positions (timing) where the third high expectation state can exist are different. By doing so, what was supposed to end the high expectation state by reducing the game medium in the end is changed so that the high expectation state ends without reducing the game medium, and the number of game media increases. It is possible not to impair the satisfaction with the high expectation state without making a difference. In this way, by performing the forced termination while utilizing the impression received by the player at the time of forced termination, the effect of suppressing the rise in advantage due to the forced termination in the high expectation state and the player's high expectation state It is possible to achieve both the effect of satisfying satisfaction.

In the above configuration, "the remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied (the remaining number of games in the advantageous section ZG) and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on the number, the normal termination means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is terminated without satisfying the forced termination condition. After providing "a function to execute processing"), the "specific termination means" is set to "the remaining number based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit." Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the number grasping means, it may be expressed as "specific termination means for terminating the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state".

Features GI2. When the addition process by the third setting means is not performed, the high expectation state is terminated by the specific end means in the third high expectation state between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. It is provided with a second grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S15811 by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of continuations of the third high expected state in the case of being performed.
The gaming machine according to feature GI 1, wherein the third setting means can execute the addition process with the number of continuations grasped by the second grasping means as the second continuation number.

According to the above configuration, when the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state is digested by the first continuation number and the second continuation number, the high expectation state is forcibly terminated in the end game of the second high expectation state. .. In this way, by setting the forced termination to the end of the second high expectation state where an increase in the game medium can be expected, the player is forced to terminate while the player's satisfaction is at its peak, and the player at the time of forced termination. Impression improves.

Features GI3. The third high expectation state set by the second setting means shifts to the first high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). The gaming machine according to the feature GI 1 or the feature GI 2, characterized in that the configuration is permissible.

According to the above configuration, it is premised that the number of continuations of the third high expectation state existing after the second high expectation state changes depending on the lottery result on the gaming machine side, and the player continues the continuation. The range that can be involved in the number is limited. Therefore, for example, even if the operation mode is devised, there is a high possibility that the high expectation state will be forcibly terminated in a situation where the number of game media is reduced. If the above-mentioned feature GI1 is applied to such a configuration, the dissatisfaction that cannot be resolved by the player no matter how hard he or she works can be more preferably resolved on the gaming machine side.

Features GI4. The first setting means sets the third high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being the transition result (first BB, second BB) corresponding to the transition to the second high expectation state. Is possible,
The second transition means (bonus by the main control device 101) shifts to the second high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being the transition result and the player performing the transition operation corresponding to the transition result. Function to execute state processing) and
If the lottery result of the game is the transition result and the second transition means does not cause the transition to the second high expectation state in the game, the transition result is shifted to the second high expectation state. Reservation means that can be reserved up to (a function that executes the process of setting the carry-over state by the main controller 101) and
The gaming machine according to any one of GI1 to GI3.

According to the above configuration, the transition result that triggers the setting of the third high expectation state on the front side is the result that is reserved until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs, and the transition to the second high expectation state is the result of the player. Is generated by performing the transition operation, so that the number of games until the transition to the second high expectation state occurs differs depending on whether or not the player performs the transition operation in the third high expectation state. .. By ending the 3rd high expectation state as soon as possible and shifting to the 2nd high expectation state, the decrease in the number of game media in the 3rd high expectation state is reduced, so that the 3rd high before the 2nd high expectation state In the expected state, the decrease number changes depending on the operation of the player, and as a result, the number of game media when the high expected state is forcibly terminated can also change. In this way, on the gaming machine side, the number of gaming media is increased or decreased depending on the skill of the player, while the number of gaming media when forced termination is not increased or decreased when the setting is such that the forced termination is not performed during the decrease. With a configuration that can occur, it is possible to arouse the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that the above configuration can also be expressed as, for example, "the number of continuations of the third high expectation state set by the first setting means changes depending on the game operation of the player". In this expression, when the feature GI3 is expressed, "the third high expectation state set by the second setting means does not change or is unlikely to change depending on the game operation of the player".

Features GI5. The third high expectation state set by the second setting means shifts to the second high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being a predetermined specific result (first promotion replay). Is an acceptable configuration,
The first transition means (RT by the main control device 101) shifts to the first high expectation state based on the lottery result of the game being the specific result and the player performing the specific operation corresponding to the specific result. Function to execute state processing) and
When the lottery result of the game is the specific result and the first transition means does not cause the transition to the first high expectation state in the game, the erasing means (in the main control device 101) capable of erasing the specific result. A function to execute the process of clearing the winning flag at the end of each game),
The gaming machine according to the feature GI4, which is characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, since the transition result winning is reserved in the third high expectation state on the front side, whether or not to perform the transition operation corresponding to the transition result has a great influence on the number of continuations of the third high expectation state. On the other hand, in the third high expectation state behind the second high expectation state, the specific result winning is not reserved, so in the third high expectation state, the game that wins the specific result is greatly related to the number of continuations. Will be done. With such a configuration, there is room for technical intervention by the player in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, and conversely, by the player in the third high expectation state after the second high expectation state. It is clarified that there is little room for technical intervention. Therefore, it is possible to realize a playability that further stimulates the motivation to play the game before the second high expectation state.

Features GI6. By performing the addition process by the third setting means, in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, the high expectation state when the high expectation state is terminated by the specific end means. The total number of game media acquired in the above is after the first branch point where the first continuation number of games is executed, and the first continuation number and the second continuation number of games are executed. 2. The gaming machine according to feature GI4 or feature GI5, which is characterized in that it does not change or does not change easily up to a branch point.

According to the above configuration, the reduction of the game medium can be reduced by reducing the number of continuations of the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state as much as possible, while leaving room for technical intervention. In the third high expectation state of the amount added by the third setting means from the execution of the game of one continuation number to the execution of the games of the first continuation number and the second continuation number, it is as early as possible. Even if the transition to the second high expectation state is successful, the total number of acquisitions at the time of forced termination of the high expectation state is unlikely to change. By doing so, it is possible to secure the significance of adding the second continuation number by the third setting means while stimulating the game motivation in the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state.

Features GI7. In the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state, the specific effect execution means (main control device 101 or display control device 81) capable of executing the specific effect (precursor effect, continuous effect) by a predetermined effect means. Equipped with a function to execute processing to perform the production in the precursor mode)
The gaming machine according to feature GI 6, wherein the specific effect executing means can have different production modes of the specific effect before and after the first branch point.

According to the above configuration, the player can clearly grasp that the first branch point has been reached due to the change in the effect mode of the specific effect. In this way, the player can understand that it does not make much sense to cause an early transition in the subsequent games, and can switch feelings such as enjoying a specific effect. As a result, it is easy to cause an event such as forced termination while the game medium is increasing, that is, the third high expectation state before the second high expectation state is defined as the first continuation number and the second continuation number. It is possible to make it easy to digest until it becomes.

Features GI8. The first setting means determines the number of continuous effects of the effect executed by the predetermined effect means in the third high expectation state until the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs. Set as the first continuation number,
The third setting means is such that the effect continuation number is set as a number obtained by adding the second continuation number to the first continuation number.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features GI1 to GI7, wherein the transition to the second high expectation state in the third high expectation state can occur regardless of the number of continuous productions.

According to the above configuration, when the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs and the third high expectation state intervenes, the number of continuations set by the first setting means and the third setting means. Is the number of continuations in the production, and regardless of the set number of continuations, the transition to the second high expectation state can occur. By doing so, the event that the set number of continuations of the third high expectation state is forced to be digested does not occur, and the number of continuations of the production is made different while ensuring the degree of freedom of the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to significantly change the image at the time of forced termination in relation to the increase or decrease of the actual game medium.

Features GI 9. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low are set.
A grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expectation state (advantageous section game number AG) and
Specific termination means (main control device) that terminates the high expectation state and shifts to the low expectation state based on the number of executions grasped by the grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number (1500). In the second process of displaying the section by 101, the function of executing the process of terminating the advantageous section when the forced end condition is satisfied) and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the high expectation state, the first high expectation state (ART such as attack mode) and the second high expectation state (bonus state) in which an increase in the game medium can be expected in each game, and a decrease in the game medium can be expected in each game. The third high expectation state (bonus carry-over state, return state that occurs during attack mode) is set.
When the transition from the first high expectation state to the second high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can exist between the first high expectation state and the second high expectation state. A possible first setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the bonus carry-over state by the main control device 101) and
When the transition from the second high expectation state to the first high expectation state occurs, the third high expectation state can exist between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. A possible second setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the gaming state after the bonus state by the main control device 101 to the normal gaming state) and
Whether or not a specific event occurs in which the number of executions grasped by the grasping means is the upper limit during the third high expectation state set by the second setting means is determined by the first setting means. 3 Specific means (a function of executing the process of step S15810 by the main control device 101) that can be specified when setting the high expectation state, and
When the specific event is specified to occur by the specific means, a third setting means (a function of executing the process of step S15812 by the main control device 101) capable of executing a predetermined specific process and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state may be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit. Therefore, it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high expectation state is set as a first high expectation state and a second high expectation state in which the game medium can increase in each game, and a third high expectation state in which the game medium can decrease in each game. When shifting from the 1st high expectation state to the 2nd high expectation state, the 3rd high expectation state intervenes between the 1st high expectation state and the 2nd high expectation state, and further, the 2nd high expectation state to the 1st high expectation state. When the transition to the state occurs, the third high advantageous state can intervene between the second high expectation state and the first high expectation state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the number of game media in the third high expectation state can be reduced, when the number of executions reaches a specific number and the high expectation state is terminated during the third high expectation state, the high expectation state is generated. Eventually, the number of game media will be reduced and the game will end with a dent.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific event that causes the tail dent is specified in advance, and the specific process that is based on the specific result can be executed. Therefore, the event that causes the tail dent is preferably eliminated. Or, it is possible to make up for the dent in the buttocks.

<Characteristic GJ group>
Features GJ1. Multiple orbiters (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern of each of the orbiting bodies.
A starting operation means (start lever 41) that starts the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that stop the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) that starts the orbit of each orbiting body when the starting operation means is operated and stops the orbiting of each orbiting body when the stop operating means is operated. Function to execute processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the start operation means, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set to a position where the symbol can be visually recognized via the display unit. A payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of paying out a number of game media corresponding to the predetermined result, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the game state, a normal game state and a specific game state (advantageous section including attack mode, challenge mode, etc.) that are more likely to be advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided.
In the normal gaming state, a transition lottery means for executing a transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (a function of executing a transition lottery to the challenge mode in the first specific combination processing by the main control device 101) and
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the transition lottery means is the result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state, the specific transition means for shifting to the specific gaming state (challenge mode in the winning result correspondence processing by the main control device 101). (A function to execute the process of shifting to the attack mode) and
When the game state shifts to the specific game state and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the specific notification means (eighth display segment N8) is turned on to start the state-in-state notification, and the specific notification means is started. The specific game state notification means (section display first process to section display fourth process by the main control device 101) that ends the notification during the state by turning off the specific notification means based on the end of the game state. Function to execute) and
The first grasping means (advantageous section game number AG) for grasping the number of executions of the specific game state, and
Based on the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaching a predetermined upper limit, the specific ending means (section by the main control device 101) for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. (Function to execute the process of forcibly terminating the advantageous section in the second display process) and
A second grasping means (number of games before start MG) for grasping the number of executions of the preliminary state (preliminary section) from the transition to the specific game state to the establishment of the start condition,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body is stopped and the orbiting body is stopped. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is given by a privilege giving means if the result corresponds to the lottery result, a specific gaming state is provided, which is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is provided. When the start condition is satisfied, the state notification is started, and when the specific game state ends, the state notification ends. Therefore, the player can clearly understand the situation in which the privilege can be easily obtained by the mode notification from the state notification. For example, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disadvantages such as ending the game without knowing that the situation has occurred. Moreover, the specific game state is configured so that it can be forcibly terminated when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, and the advantage of the specific game state is not excessively increased, and the balance of the game is optimized.

However, as described above, since the state-state notification is started after the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific game state, in the prior state before the state-time notification is started, the state-time notification is started. The player has no reason to know how many games remain up to the maximum number, and the player who reaches the maximum number immediately after the status notification is started and after the status notification is started. , There can be inequality in profits with players who can play a significant number of games as specific gaming states.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the number of games in the pre-state until the start condition is satisfied after the transition to the specific game state is made, the upper limit number can be notified to the player by notifying the grasping result. It is possible to recognize the number of games up to. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee the equality of the games.

In the above configuration, "the remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the specific game state is satisfied (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on the number, the normal end means for shifting the specific game state to the normal game state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the process of ending the advantageous section without satisfying the forced end condition is executed. After providing "functions) and", the "specific termination means" is defined as "the remaining number grasping based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number". Regardless of the remaining number grasped by the means, it may be expressed as "specific termination means for shifting the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state".

In addition, "a special gaming state (for example, attack mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than another state (for example, challenge mode) in the specific gaming state is set as a state included in the specific gaming state". Then, the "specific game state notification means" is specified based on the fact that "a predetermined start condition including a permissible condition in which the game state shifts to the specific game state and the shift to the special game state is permitted is satisfied." "Specific game state notification means that starts notification by the notification means and ends notification by the specific notification means based on the end of the specific game state" or "the game state shifts to the specific game state and the special Transition to game state Based on the fact that a predetermined start condition including the notification condition for which the winning notification of winning the lottery is performed is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started, and the notification by the specific game state ends. It may be expressed as "specific game state notification means for ending notification by the specific notification means".

Features GJ2. In the pre-state, the number of game media used in each game is likely to be larger than the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the pre-state. GJ1 The game machine described in.

According to the above configuration, even after shifting to the specific game state, in the pre-state until the start condition is satisfied, subtracting the number of used games from the number of game media paid out in each game becomes negative, so-called net increase. Becomes negative. Then, in the prior state, the notification of the specific notification means by the specific game state notification means has not been started, and the net increase is also negative. Therefore, the start condition is satisfied after that, and the mode notification is generated. Even so, the player is likely to end the game without knowing it. In that respect, as in the above feature GJ1, the number of games in the pre-state until the start condition is satisfied is grasped, so if the grasping result is displayed, the player is in the specific gaming state. It is also possible to grasp that the transition to is occurring. That is, it becomes possible to grasp the pre-state as well as the advantage after the start condition is satisfied, and it is possible to complement the relationship between the specific game state and the specific game state notification means well.

Features GJ3. The predetermined start condition includes an increasing condition in which the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state is likely to be larger than the number of game media used in each game. The gaming machine according to feature GJ1 or feature GJ2, which is characterized by being included.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined start condition includes an increase condition in which the number of games used is subtracted from the number of game media paid out in each game to be positive, and the so-called net increase is positive. Because of such a configuration, notification is performed by the specific notification means in a situation where a substantial benefit can be obtained in the specific gaming state, and the relationship between the specific gaming state and the notification of the specific notification means is clarified. To.

On the other hand, in many cases, the remaining number and the number of executions after the start condition is satisfied, such as the notification of the number of remaining games in an advantageous state, are grasped and notified, and such notification includes a section where the net increase is negative. In that case, it is easy for the player to feel that the remaining number and the number of executions have been exploited by the negative section. Therefore, the notification of the number of remaining games in the advantageous state includes the negative section. It is common to avoid it, and if so, it is considered that the starting condition should include the increasing condition.

However, with such a configuration, the relationship with the specific termination means that reaches the upper limit and is forcibly terminated cannot be grasped from the above notification, and even if it is notified, the notification is given. However, since it is considered that the start condition is satisfied, there is no way to know these in the prior state. Therefore, by applying the invention of the feature GJ1 to such a gaming machine, it is possible to play a game while understanding information such as profits remaining in a prior state.

Features GJ4. As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first result that a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and the first stop operation mode in which each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode. It has a second result that a prize is established when it is operated in a different second stop operation mode.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the mode notification (push order notification) relating to the first stop operation mode and the operation mode including the second stop operation mode is transmitted to the predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). The mode notification means (function of executing the push order combination processing by the main control device 101) that can be executed in the segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7) is provided.
The predetermined start condition includes a notification condition that enables the mode notification by the mode notification means to be executed.
The specific game state notification means is characterized in that even if the notification condition and the increase condition are satisfied in a game different from each other, the specific notification means starts the notification on the assumption that the start condition is satisfied. Features The gaming machine described in GJ3.

According to the above configuration, the mode notification that the winning result may be different is performed, the notification condition that the mode notification can be executed is included in the notification start condition of the specific notification means, and a plurality of conditions such as the notification condition and the start condition. In the configuration in which is included in the start condition, the success or failure of the notification start condition is relaxed, and the game is expected to be diversified. And, because of such a configuration, the number of executions in the prior state is likely to change. For example, even though the mode notification has been started, the situation in which the increase in the game medium cannot be expected continues for a long time. , The benefits obtained from the establishment of the start condition to the upper limit are reduced, and so on.

In the above configuration, "the specific game state notification means starts notification by the specific notification means on the assumption that the start condition is satisfied even when the increase condition is satisfied after the notification condition is satisfied. Then, after the increase condition is satisfied, even if the notification condition is satisfied, the notification by the specific notification means is started assuming that the start condition is satisfied. "

Features GJ5. In the specific game state, a remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the specific game state is satisfied (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG), and
Based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means, the normal ending means for shifting from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state (the normal ending condition is satisfied in the section display second processing by the main control device 101). Function to execute the end processing of the advantageous section based on) and
With
The specific ending means is the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit in the specific gaming state. Regardless of the presence or absence of the number, the transition from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed.
The counting of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means is started after the start condition is satisfied, while the counting of the execution number grasped by the first grasping means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ4, which is characterized in that it is started before the condition is satisfied.

If the feature GJ1 is applied to a gaming machine having the above configuration, the significance of counting the pre-states becomes clearer.

It should be noted that "the counting of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means is started before the start condition is satisfied" is more specifically described as "the first grasping means is grasped." The count of the number of executions is before the start condition is satisfied, and is started from the transition to the specific gaming state. "

Features GJ6. Means that can execute specific notification about the corresponding information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means by the predetermined notification means (process for performing notification based on the pre-start game number command by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of the features GJ1 to GJ5, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the number of executions in the prior state by the specific notification. As a result, it becomes possible to predict the remaining amount of benefits obtained in the specific game state in relation to the upper limit number, which can be useful for selecting a game table or the like.

Features GJ7. It is characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S16106 by the main control device 101) capable of outputting correspondence information corresponding to the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means to an external device. Features The gaming machine according to any one of GJ1 to GJ6.

As the external device, for example, a hall computer or a data device of the game hall is assumed, and if the configuration is such that the corresponding information corresponding to the number of executions in the pre-state is output to these devices, the manager of the game hall, etc. It is possible to clearly grasp the remaining state of the benefits of the specific gaming state, which cannot be grasped only by the notification of the specific notification means. Therefore, for example, a game table that has little remaining benefit of the specific game state when the store is closed can be used as information for eliminating the disadvantage of the player, such as performing a reset process.

Features GJ8. The increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the specific game state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Based on this, the second specific end means for shifting from the specific game state to the normal game state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the upper limit increase number is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features GJ1 to GJ7, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, after shifting to the specific game state, when the increase / decrease number, which is the deduction between the number of payouts and the number of used game media, reaches the upper limit increase number, the game is forcibly terminated. It is possible to avoid an event in which the advantage exceeds the content intended by the designer. In such a configuration, when the number of game media decreases in the prior state and increases after the start condition is satisfied, the decrease in the prior state reaches the upper limit after the start condition is satisfied. It will be added to the increase up to, and the game situation in the pre-state will greatly affect the benefits after the start condition is satisfied. In that respect, since the number of executions in the prior state is grasped as in the above-mentioned feature GJ1, it is possible to perform notification according to the benefit after the above-mentioned start condition is satisfied based on the content.

When the above configuration is applied to the feature GJ1, the "specific termination means" of the feature GJ1 may be read as "first specific termination means" and applied.

<Characteristic GK group>
Features GK1. As the game state, a low expectation state (normal section) and a high expectation state (advantageous section) in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low are set.
The increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out according to the game result of each game in the high expectation state and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number. Based on this, the specific end means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main control device 101, the advantageous section is ended by reaching the upper limit increase number. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function to execute processing).
The high expectation state is a substantially high expectation state (attack mode, etc.) in which an increase in game media can be expected in each game after passing through a pre-high expectation state (preliminary section such as challenge mode) in which a decrease in game media can be expected in each game. It is a configuration that can shift to a real increase section),
A grasping means (MG for the number of games before the start) for grasping the number of executions in the high-expected state in advance,
Correspondence notification execution means (the first pre-start game number command by the display control device 81 and the second start) that can execute the correspondence notification about the correspondence information corresponding to the execution number grasped by the grasping means by the predetermined notification means. (A function to execute the process of notifying based on the previous game number command) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, there are a high expectation state and a low expectation state in which the acquisition expectation of the game medium is relatively high and low, and the high expectation state is the remaining number when the increase / decrease number of the game medium reaches the upper limit increase number. Regardless of this, it may be forcibly terminated, so it is suppressed that the advantage of the high expectation state is extremely increased. The high expectation state is a configuration in which the game medium can be reduced in each game after the pre-high expectation state, and then the game medium can be increased in each game to the real high expectation state. , It will be added to the increase from the transition to the real high expectation state until the upper limit increase number is reached, and the game situation in the pre-high expectation state will greatly affect the benefits of the real high expectation state. In other words, the longer the period in which the game medium is decreasing, the greater the benefit after that, and by making the configuration to notify the response information corresponding to the period in which the phenomenon occurs, it is quite difficult. It is possible to eliminate the frustration of the player that the player does not actually shift to the high expectation state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above configuration, "the remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number until the predetermined end condition of the high expectation state is satisfied (advantageous section remaining number of games ZG) and the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on the number, the normal termination means for ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state (in the second process of displaying the section by the main controller 101, the advantageous section is terminated without satisfying the forced termination condition. After providing "a function to execute processing"), the "specific termination means" is set to "the game result of each game in the high expectation state regardless of the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means". Based on the fact that the increase / decrease number, which is the difference between the number of game media paid out and the number of game media used in each game, reaches a predetermined upper limit increase number, the high expectation state is set. It may be expressed as "specific termination means for ending and shifting to the low expectation state".

Features GK2. The response notification executing means is characterized in that, as the response notification, it is possible to execute the upper limit notification (display of the expected number of sheets being increased !!) regarding the upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state thereafter. Features The gaming machine described in GK1.

According to the above configuration, it becomes a response notification that directly expresses the upper limit of the benefit that can be received in the subsequent high expectation state, and the effect of eliminating the irritation in the high expectation state in advance can be preferably expected. If it is a direct expression, it is difficult to end the game in the pre-high expectation state for the purpose of the game, such as acquiring the game medium according to the result of each game and expecting an increase in the game medium. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to support the decision-making for continuing the game.

Features GK3. A second grasping means for grasping the number of executions in the high expected state (advantageous section game number AG) and
Based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500), the second specific end of ending the high expectation state and shifting to the low expectation state. Means (a function of executing a process of terminating an advantageous section when a forced end condition is satisfied in the second process of displaying a section by the main control device 101).
With
The gaming machine according to feature GK1 or feature GK2, wherein the second specific termination means terminates the high expectation state even if the increase / decrease number does not reach the upper limit increase number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of executions in the high expectation state reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of executions in the pre-high expectation state is forcibly terminated even if the number of increase / decrease in the game medium does not reach the upper limit increase number. The greater the number, the greater the number of increases that can be increased in the real high expectation state, and there is a trade-off with the number of executions in the high expectation state. By doing so, in the pre-high expectation state, the number of increases that can be increased in the real high expectation state increases up to what stage, and from which stage it becomes the target of forced termination by the second specific termination means and the upper limit increases. You can enjoy the game while adding the content that the number will not be reached. Therefore, the necessity of the correspondence notification regarding the number of executions of the pre-highly expected state grasped by the grasping means and the interest in the mode notification can be suitably increased.

Features GK4. The response notification executing means includes, as the response notification, an upper limit notification means capable of subsequent upper limit notification (display of expected number of sheets increasing !!) regarding the upper limit that can be increased in the substantially high expectation state.
The upper limit notification means is the number of game media used in each game from the expected payout number of game media that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result of each game when the substantially high expected state of the first game number is executed. Each game is the actual increase obtained by subtracting the above, and the number of game media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second game number obtained by subtracting the first game number from the upper limit game number is executed. It is possible to execute the upper limit notification in the pre-high expectation state until the branch game in which the sum of the actual decrease amount obtained by subtracting the expected payout number of the game medium that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result is the upper limit increase number. The gaming machine according to the feature GK3, which is characterized by being present.

According to the above configuration, in relation to the feature GK3, the upper limit notification is performed within a range that does not lie. By doing so, it is possible to increase the credibility of the upper limit notification and further enhance the effect of promoting the continuation of the game by the upper limit notification.

Features GK5. The actual increase in the number of first games, which is obtained by subtracting the number of game media used in each game from the expected number of game media that can be expected to be paid out according to the game result of each game when the above-mentioned substantially high expected state is executed. And, according to the game result of each game from the number of game media used in each game when the pre-high expectation state of the second game number obtained by subtracting the first game number from the upper limit number of games is executed. After the pre-high expectation state of the branch game in which the sum of the actual decrease amount obtained by subtracting the expected payout number of the game medium that can be expected to be paid out is the upper limit increase number is exhausted, the transition to the real high expectation state is performed. The gaming machine according to feature GK3 or feature GK4, wherein the degree of expectation is likely to be higher than before the branch game.

According to the above configuration, in relation to the feature GK3, it is possible to support the continuation of the game even after the branching game. In other words, after the branch game, although the number of increase that can be substantially increased decreases, the probability of transition to the real high expectation state increases, so that the game medium can be expected to increase relatively easily, and the branch The significance of playing games after the game is enhanced.

Features GK6. In the pre-high expectation state after the branch game, the notification (display of the winning probability is increasing !!) regarding the tendency that the transition probability to the actual high expectation state is likely to be high is notified by a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to feature GK5, which comprises a viable means.

According to the above configuration, since it is notified that the state is likely to shift to the substantially high expectation state, the effect of eliminating the irritation in the pre-high expectation state is preferable even when the branch game is exceeded. With such a direct expression, it goes beyond the branch game for the purpose of the game, such as acquiring a game medium according to the result of each game and expecting an increase in the game medium. Even in such a situation, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game in a state of high expectation in advance. Therefore, it is possible to support the decision-making for continuing the game.

Features GK7. One of the features GK1 to GK6 characterized in that it is provided with an initialization means (a function of executing a reset process by the main control device 101) capable of initializing at least the information on the increase / decrease number by a predetermined operation. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the player can receive sufficient benefits by playing the game, for example, when the benefits of the substantially high expectation state remain while creating the game playability like the feature GK1. There may be situations where it is not possible, and it is possible to eliminate the disadvantages of the player in such situations.

It should be noted that the "predetermined operation" is preferably configured so that the player cannot freely operate the operation, and "the operation means (reset button) for performing the predetermined operation is provided, and the operation means can be operated by the player. It is preferable that the configuration is "provided in an impossible or difficult position" or "a predetermined operation according to the lottery result of each game".

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature AA group to the feature GK group to each configuration of the feature AA group to the feature GK group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts and stops due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Slot machine as a game machine, 32 ... Reel as an orbiting body, 41 ... Start lever as a start operation means, 42 to 44 ... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64 ... Speakers constituting an auxiliary production unit, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting the auxiliary effect unit, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 ... A CPU that constitutes various control means such as a lottery means and a main control means.

Claims (2)

Multiple orbitals with multiple types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction,
A starting operation means for starting the orbit of each of the orbiting bodies when operated, and
A stop operating means that stops the orbit of each orbiting body when operated, and
Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to the player, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state and a first specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state are provided.
As a state included in the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than other predetermined states in the first specific gaming state is set.
In the normal gaming state, the first transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the first specific gaming state is executed, and the lottery result of the first transition lottery corresponds to shifting to the first specific gaming state. Based on the existence, the first specific transition means for shifting to the first specific gaming state, and
Based on the fact that the second transition lottery for whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state is executed, and the lottery result of the second transition lottery corresponds to the transition to the second specific gaming state. , The second specific transition means for transitioning to the second specific gaming state, and
A first grasping means for grasping at least one of the number of executions of the first specific gaming state and the increase / decrease number of game media increased / decreased in the first specific gaming state.
In the second specific gaming state, a second grasping means for grasping the remaining number until a predetermined end condition of the second specific gaming state is satisfied, and
Said first detection means said that the execution count has reached the upper limit a predetermined number of times and the speed change to be grasped at is based on at least one of the reaches the number of increase upper limit, grasped by the second grasping means A first termination means for terminating the first specific gaming state including the second specific gaming state, regardless of the remaining number.
Based on the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means, the second ending means for ending the second specific gaming state and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined special result, the increase determination means capable of performing the increase determination of executing the increase process of the second specific gaming state, and the increase determination means.
Based on the determination result of the increase determination means, the increase means capable of executing the increase process of the second specific gaming state, and the increase means.
A situation in which the total of the number of executions grasped by the first grasping means and the remaining number grasped by the second grasping means has reached the upper limit, and the number of increases / decreases grasped by the first grasping means. When the second gripping means form the sum of the expected increase or decrease the number based on the remaining number to be grasped that have reached the upper limit number increased by status, the execution count the maximum number of times that is grasped by the first grasping means The specific number of times is less than, and at least the difference between the specific number of times and the upper limit number of times is in a continuous state, or the increase / decrease number grasped by the first grasping means and the difference between the specified number of times and the upper limit number of times are grasped by the second grasping means. At least one of the situations in which the total of the planned increase / decrease number based on the remaining number is a specific increase number smaller than the upper limit increase number, and at least the difference between the upper limit increase number and the total is scheduled to increase. In a specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, or when the increase process based on the special result results in the specific situation, the event is different from the event based on the increase process. Specific event execution means that can cause a specific event that is an event and can be beneficial to the player,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an effect means for executing a predetermined effect.

Images